# Youzse, full text > Youzse is a UK platform for local service businesses: online booking, payments, quotes, invoicing, marketing and customer records. Businesses pay a monthly subscription from £19, card payments are charged at 2.5% plus 35p and there is 0% commission on new clients who find a business through the Youzse marketplace. Everything below is the full text of the trade pages, guides, comparisons, help articles and blog posts published on https://youzse.app. --- ## AIT Online is cheaper. Here is what the gap buys. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/ait-online-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 AIT Online publishes a lower entry price than Youzse Garage Pro. Rather than talk around that, this page works through what sits in the gap between £35 and £59 a month, and when paying less is the better decision. Written by Youzse. AIT Online is one of the few UK garage systems that publishes an entry price, which makes this one of the few garage comparisons where both sides can be judged on a real number instead of a demo quote. ### The honest opening AIT Online is cheaper. From £35 a month against £59 for Youzse Garage Pro. If entry price is the thing deciding this, AIT Online wins and we would rather say so at the top than bury it under a feature grid. What follows is only useful if you want to know what the extra £24 a month actually buys, and whether your workshop will use it. For a lot of small garages the answer is genuinely no. ### What sits in the gap AIT Online covers the traditional garage management set well: invoicing, job cards, quotes, diary, reporting, MOT and service reminders, VRM lookup, SMS, MOT history, multi site and accounting integrations. That is a complete workshop system and it is not a cut down one. The £24 is the difference between managing the workshop and running the whole customer relationship. Youzse Garage Pro adds customer facing online booking, card deposits and payment links at 2.5% plus 35p, online quote approval with photos, purchase orders against jobs and MTD ready VAT returns, on a platform where the customer record belongs to you rather than to a marketplace. If your bookings come in by phone and you invoice at collection, you will not use most of that. If you are losing time chasing approvals and payment after the job is done, you probably will. ### The numbers, side by side | | AIT Online | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published entry price | From £35 a month | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Job cards, diary and invoicing | Included | Included | | MOT and service reminders | Included | Included | | VRM lookup and MOT history | Included | Included | | Accounting integrations | Included | MTD ready VAT returns built in | | Customer online booking | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | AIT Online figures were read from its own published pricing on the date shown below. Where we were not able to confirm scope from a public page we have written check rather than guessing. ### Where AIT Online is the better buy A single ramp workshop that books by phone, invoices on collection and already has an accountant handling VAT does not need what the extra £24 pays for. AIT Online will do the job for less and the multi site and accounting integrations are a genuine strength if you run more than one unit. The published entry price is also worth something on its own. Most UK garage systems will not tell you a number without a sales call, and being able to compare two figures directly is rarer in this market than it should be. ### Questions that decide this one - How many of your bookings currently arrive by phone, and would you want that to change? - How long does it take you to get a quote approved once the car is on the ramp? - Are you chasing payment after the customer has driven away? - Do you file your own VAT returns, or does an accountant do it? - How many sites and users does the quoted price actually cover? - What does SMS cost on top, on either system? ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Is AIT Online cheaper than Youzse Garage Pro? Yes. AIT Online publishes from £35 a month and Youzse Garage Pro is from £59 a month. If the entry price is the deciding factor then AIT Online is the cheaper system and we would not argue otherwise. ### What do I get for the extra cost? Customer facing online booking, card deposits and payment links at 2.5% plus 35p, online quote approval with photos, purchase orders against jobs and MTD ready VAT returns. Whether that is worth £24 a month depends on how much of your admin currently happens after the job is finished. ### Can I move my data from AIT Online? Ask AIT Online for a full export of customers, vehicles, job history, invoices and MOT due dates before you commit either way. Being able to leave is worth checking on any system, including ours. --- ## Autowork Online or Youzse Garage Pro? It hinges on the estimate. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/autowork-online-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Autowork Online is built around estimating, invoicing and labour. If your quoting is complicated, that heritage matters. If your problem is what happens after the estimate, it may not. Written by Youzse. Autowork Online is demo led publicly, so no price is quoted here for it. ### Where its centre of gravity is Autowork Online is cloud garage management for estimates, invoices, MOTs, labour, reporting and day to day workshop visibility. Read that list again and notice what it starts with. Estimating and labour are where the product is strongest and where its history is. For a workshop doing varied repair work with real labour time calculations, that depth is the point. Getting an estimate right, quickly, with the labour priced properly, is a skill the software either supports or gets in the way of. ### The gap worth naming Building an accurate estimate and getting it approved are two different problems. The first is about labour times, parts and pricing. The second is about a customer who is at work, will not answer the phone and needs to see why the job has grown before they say yes. Youzse Garage Pro is built around the second one. Online quote approval with photos attached, sent to a phone, approved without a call. Then card deposits and payment links at 2.5% plus 35p so the money arrives before the keys do. If your estimates are already accurate and the delay is customers, that is the gap. If your estimates are the hard part, Autowork Online is closer to what you need. ### Side by side | | Autowork Online | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | Demo led publicly | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Estimating and labour | A core strength | Quotes with parts and labour lines | | Invoicing | Included | Included | | MOT handling | Included | MOT history and automated reminders | | Reporting | Included | Included | | Customer online booking | Check current scope | Included | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Autowork Online is sold through a demo. Ask for the monthly total including users, sites, setup, migration, SMS and any lookup allowances, in writing. ### What to get out of the demo - How long does it take to build a typical estimate from scratch? - Can a customer approve extra work from their phone, with photos? - How do MOT and service reminders go out, and does anyone have to trigger them? - Where does card payment happen, and at what rate? - What is the full monthly cost including users, sites and SMS? - Can you export customers, vehicles, job history and invoices if you leave? ### The honest split Established cloud workshop packages are not short of features. What they tend to be short of is a way to find out what they cost and whether they suit you without a sales process, and a customer facing side that works on a phone. Youzse Garage Pro is published at £59 a month with a 30 day trial and no card, and it is built from the customer inwards rather than the workshop outwards. Which of those two starting points is right depends entirely on where your week actually goes. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Autowork Online cost? It is demo led publicly, so no figure is quoted here. Ask for the monthly total including users, sites, setup, migration, SMS and lookup allowances in writing. ### Which is better for estimating? Autowork Online. Estimates, invoices and labour are where its strength and history sit, and if complex quoting is the hard part of your week that is the honest recommendation. ### Which is better for getting quotes approved? Youzse Garage Pro. Online quote approval with photos, sent to a customer's phone, plus card deposits and payment links at 2.5% plus 35p so the job is paid before collection. --- ## Barbr or Youzse for UK barbershops Source: https://youzse.app/compare/barbr-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 5, 2026 Barbr is a UK barber only booking app at £20 a month. It is cheap, focused and built by people who clearly understand barbering. The question is whether barber only is still the right shape for your shop in two years. Written by Youzse, so it is not neutral. Every Barbr figure below came from getbarbr.com, its terms of service and its Google Play listing on the date at the bottom of this page. Where Barbr is the better answer, this page says so. ### Why people search this comparison Most people do not search for a Barbr alternative when everything is calm. They search because they are checking pricing, commission, cancellation, reviews, complaints, support, data export or whether the platform still fits the way they work. That is the right moment to compare Youzse honestly: not as the cheapest card processor, but as a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, direct client ownership, imports and a wider operating tool set. ### What Barbr genuinely does well Barbr is barber only and makes no apology for it. One plan, PRO, at £20 a month with a 14 day free trial and no card required. A shop pays 50% for every extra barber after the first, so three chairs is about £40 a month rather than three subscriptions. That is a genuinely low bill and among the cheapest published prices on this page. The feature list is the right list for a barber rather than a salon list with the word barber pasted over it: bookings from a personal link, SMS reminders, no-show protection, recurring bookings, a waiting list, payments online and in store, reviews with a Google review booster, discount codes, a referral programme, SMS blasts, analytics and out of hours pricing. Its own FAQ says it is UK based, that it is cheaper than most competitors and that it never promotes your competition. It is also a real, rated product rather than a landing page. The barber app carries 4.7 stars from 49 reviews with 5,000 plus downloads on Google Play, and Barbr Ltd is a UK registered company. If you are a single barber or a small shop who wants a cheap focused app and nothing else, Barbr will very likely do the job for less than Youzse. ### What to check before you commit - The card rate is not published anywhere on the site. For a barber that is the number that decides the bill, because a percentage plus fixed pence hurts most on a £15 cut. Ask for it in writing before you compare £20 against £19. - Barbr is barbers only. There is no beauty, no retail, no mobile trade and no second line of work to grow into, so a shop that adds a beautician, a tattooist or a coffee counter is looking at a second system. - We found no published quotes, invoices, VAT handling, memberships, prepaid cut packages or gift cards. If you sell blocks of cuts up front or invoice a barbering contract, check those exist before you move. - Getting started means downloading the app and building a profile. There is no published web back office, so consider how that works for a manager doing the week on a laptop. - Nothing is published about importing your existing clients or exporting them again later. Ask what comes with you if you leave, including notes, history and reviews. - The Barbr terms describe the website and apps as a centralised booking point that aggregates listed barbers, and the app promises to get you discovered by new clients. Ask directly whether that discovery ever carries a fee, because no commission schedule is published either way. - The homepage income calculator is based on a £30 average booking and a 5% no-show rate, drawn from data on 1,000 plus barbers. Run it against your own average ticket before believing the number it lands on. ### Youzse and Barbr, side by side | | Youzse | Barbr | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £20 a month on the PRO plan | | How it scales | Flat per business, by plan | 50% off each extra barber in the shop | | New client commission | 0% on new clients | None published | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p, platform fee included | Not published on the website | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | 14 days, no card | | Trades covered | Barbers, salons, clinics, garages and wider trades | Barbers only | | Quotes, invoices and VAT | Included | Not published | | Packages, memberships and gift cards | Included | Not published | | Data import and export | Customers, services, history and reviews, exportable any time | Not published, ask before you move | | Where you run it | Web app and mobile app | Mobile app first, you sign up by downloading the app | | Where it works | UK | UK, with US pricing shown to US visitors | Barbr figures from getbarbr.com, its terms of service and its Google Play listing. Youzse figures from youzse.app/pricing. ### The number that usually decides it It is not the subscription. £20 against £19 is a rounding error next to what a busy chair pays in card fees, and neither price will make or break a shop. Take a two chair shop doing 300 cuts a month at £15, so £4,500 on card. On Youzse that is 2.5% plus 35p, roughly £217 a month, with the platform fee already inside it and nothing charged when a new client walks in. On Barbr we cannot tell you the equivalent, because the rate is not published. Half a point either way on those numbers is about £23 a month, which is more than the difference between the two subscriptions. So the honest instruction is simple: get the Barbr card rate in writing, multiply it out against your own transaction count, then compare. If it comes back lower than 2.5% plus 35p and you only ever want to cut hair, Barbr is the cheaper shop. ### Which one fits Choose Barbr if you are a single barber or a small shop, you want the cheapest focused barber app you can find, you are happy running the business from your phone and you have no plans to sell anything other than cuts. Its refund promise and 14 day trial make it a low risk thing to try. Choose Youzse if the shop is growing into more than a diary: prepaid blocks of cuts sold up front, deposits on the long appointments, memberships, gift cards, quotes and invoices for contract work, VAT, a web back office for whoever does the books and the option to add beauty or another trade without buying a second system. The point that is not about features: Barbr publishes its subscription and not its card rate, and Youzse publishes both. Whichever way you go, do not sign anything until every number is on the table. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Barbr cost? Barbr publishes one plan, PRO, at £20 a month with a 14 day free trial and no card required. A shop pays 50% for each extra barber after the first. US visitors are shown $25 a month instead. The card processing rate is not published on the site, so ask for it before you compare the total bill. ### Does Barbr charge commission on new clients? No commission schedule is published either way. Its terms describe the website and apps as a centralised booking point for listed barbers, and the app promises to help you get discovered by new clients, so it is worth asking directly whether any introduction ever carries a fee. Youzse charges 0% on new clients and says so in writing. ### Is Youzse a Barbr alternative? Yes, and a broader one. Youzse covers the same barbering ground with bookings, reminders, deposits, walk ins, no-show protection, reviews and marketing, then adds prepaid cut packages, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, quotes, invoices, VAT and a web back office. It also runs beyond barbering, so a shop that adds beauty, retail or another trade does not need a second system. ### Is Barbr cheaper than Youzse? On the subscription, barely: £20 against £19, and a Barbr shop pays half price for extra barbers where Youzse is flat per business. The subscription is not where the money goes though. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on cards with the platform fee inside it and Barbr does not publish a card rate, so the honest answer is that you cannot compare the two totals until Barbr gives you that number. ### Can I move my clients off Barbr? Barbr does not publish its export terms, so ask before you move anything in. Youzse imports customers, appointment history, services with prices and durations and reviews, and lets you export the lot at any time. Whichever platform you pick, get the answer on export in writing while you are still a prospect. --- ## Barber booking software, compared honestly Source: https://youzse.app/compare/best-barber-software-uk Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Barbering is high volume and low ticket, which changes the maths completely. The platform that suits a £120 balayage is rarely the one that suits a £15 skin fade. Written by Youzse, so read it accordingly. Every figure about another company came from their own UK pricing page on the date at the bottom of this page, and we have left in the parts where they beat us. ### The direct answer The best barber booking software depends on ticket size, transaction count and whether you need new clients. Choose Youzse if you want flat business pricing, 0% commission on new clients, walk ins, deposits for longer appointments, prepaid cut packages, loyalty, client history, marketing and exportable data. Choose Booksy if your chairs are already full and you want a strong barber marketplace with Boost switched off. Choose Fresha if you want the largest marketplace reach and accept the 20% first booking fee. Choose Barbr if you want the cheapest barber only app and never need to sell anything but cuts. Choose SQUIRE if you want a specialist barber platform and are happy with demo led pricing. Choose Square if POS matters more than barber workflow depth. Youzse suits a growing barbershop better than a settled high volume shop doing low ticket card transactions all day, because the Youzse card rate is higher. ### Why barbering is a different calculation Most software comparisons in this category are written for salons, where the average ticket is £45 to £120. A barbershop turning over the same money does it across three or four times as many transactions. That matters because card fees are a percentage plus a fixed amount, and the fixed amount does not care how small the sale is. At 2.5% plus 35p, a £15 cut costs 72.5p to process, or 4.8%. The headline percentage is close to meaningless at that ticket size. So for a barber, the number to compare is not the advertised percentage. It is the total of the subscription, the fixed pence multiplied by your transaction count and whatever you pay when a new client walks in. ### Published UK pricing | | Youzse | Fresha | Booksy | Vagaro | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £14.95 a month | £40 a month plus VAT | £20 a month | | How it scales | Flat per business, by plan | £9.95 per team member | Plus £5 per extra user | Per bookable calendar | | New client fee | 0% | 20% one-time, £4 minimum | 30% one-time on Boost clients, £5 minimum | 20% one-time | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p | 1.19% plus 20p in person | 1.29% plus 20p plus VAT, Tap to Pay 0.99% plus 20p plus VAT | 1.15% plus 20p tap, dip and swipe. 1.40% plus 25p keyed in | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | 7 days | 7 days | 30 days | Taken from each provider's own UK pricing or support pages. Booksy publishes plus VAT. Vagaro publishes UK card processing in its support centre. ### A worked example on barber numbers Take a three-chair shop doing 400 cuts a month at an average of £15, so £6,000 on card across 400 transactions, winning 25 new clients a month. The transaction count is the thing to watch. At 20p fixed that is £80 a month before any percentage. At 35p it is £140. On Booksy with Boost off: £50 subscription plus VAT, roughly £157 in card fees at 1.29% plus 20p and £0 ordinary marketplace fee. Around £207 plus VAT on the subscription. That is the cheapest here, and if your chairs are full and you do not need finding, it is hard to argue with. On Fresha Team: about £29.85 subscription, roughly £151 in card fees at the in-person rate, plus £75 in new client fees at 20% of 25 first visits averaging £15. Around £256. On Youzse Growth: £59 subscription, roughly £290 in card fees at 2.5% plus 35p and nothing on new clients. Around £349. On these numbers Youzse is the most expensive, and we are not going to dress that up. High transaction volume at a low ticket is the scenario our pricing suits least. It flips when the average ticket rises, when new client volume rises or when you value not paying to be introduced to your own customers. ### The wider shortlist | Platform | Published price signal | New client fee signal | Best known for | Best fit | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Youzse | From £19 a month | 0% commission on new clients | Fresh UK tool set with flat business pricing, deposits, quotes, invoicing, memberships, gift cards, loyalty and data import included | Growing salons, barbers, clinics and trades that want to own the client relationship | | Fresha | £14.95 a month on Independent, or £9.95 a month per bookable team member on Team. Fresha does not state whether those prices include VAT | 20% one time fee on marketplace new clients, £4 minimum in the UK | Large consumer marketplace, polished calendar and strong discovery for empty columns | Salons that want marketplace reach and accept new client acquisition cost | | Booksy | £40 a month, plus £5 a month per additional team member. Booksy states that all services are subject to VAT, which will be added to the final price | No marketplace commission when Boost is off. Boost is 30% one time with a £5 minimum | Strong barber adoption, quick rebooking and a well known client app | Established barbers and salons with a full book | | Vagaro | £20 a month in the UK, then the bill rises with bookable calendars | 20% one time fee on marketplace new clients | Deep configuration across salon, spa, wellness, fitness, retail, classes and memberships | Mixed service businesses that want a configurable system | | GlossGenius | From $24 a month billed annually, US focused | No published marketplace new client fee found on its pricing page | Beautiful booking sites, forms, payments and simple brand led client experience | US beauty professionals who care heavily about presentation | | Treatwell | Monthly fee not published on its pricing page. Treatwell publishes 35% on first bookings from new marketplace clients and card processing at 2.5% plus VAT | 35% new client commission via the marketplace plus VAT | High marketplace visibility and a familiar consumer booking brand in Europe | Salons that want marketplace demand more than software ownership | | Setora | £39 a month per location with unlimited staff. Setora states that prices shown exclude VAT where applicable | No new client commission published | UK salon booking with flat pricing, deposits, reminders, walk ins, exports and no per staff fee | Salons that want predictable direct booking software without a marketplace | | Schedulista | From $19 a month | No marketplace new client fee published | Simple general scheduling with flat pricing | Small teams that need scheduling rather than salon depth | | Solo | £20 a month website only or £30 with booking | No published commission schedule found for the booking app. Secret Spa marketplace access is separate and selective | Built for self employed beauty, hair and wellness professionals with mobile and at home workflows | Freelancers who want a lightweight app first setup | | Bookaro | From ₹99 a month | No current public commission schedule found | Ultra low cost booking link with WhatsApp and social sharing | Very small teams comparing lightweight booking tools outside a UK salon stack | | Barbr | £20 a month on the PRO plan, 50% off each extra barber | No new client commission published | UK barber only app with bookings, SMS reminders, no-show protection, reviews, referrals and analytics | Barbers who want a cheap barber first app and do not need quotes, invoices or other trades | | Square Appointments | Free for a single location, then Plus and Premium plans per location | No marketplace new client commission | Booking, POS and payments from one payments company | Businesses already using Square at the till | | Slick | From £20 a month for one column. Slick states that prices are exclusive of VAT which is applied at the standard rates | No new client commission published | UK salon and barber software with reminders, deposits, imports and support | Salons that want a UK salon first system without marketplace dependency | | Book in Beautiful | Free plan where clients pay a booking charge, subscription is custom | No salon side new client commission published | Website first beauty booking with consultation forms, deposits and social booking | Beauty businesses that accept a client paid booking charge or custom subscription | | SQUIRE | No official public price verified | No current public commission schedule found | Barber only operations, payments, staff and discovery positioning | Barbershops that want a specialist barber brand | | SalonIQ | Quote led publicly | No marketplace new client fee found | UK and Ireland salon depth across bookings, SMS, skin tests, forms, stock and KPIs | Established salons wanting operational depth | | Salonized | Published UK pricing varies by plan and region, check before buying | No marketplace new client fee found on its pricing page | Salon management, online booking, payments, marketing and client records | Salons wanting a European salon management suite | | Phorest | No plan price published, quote only, so there is no published figure for a VAT basis to apply to | No public marketplace commission schedule found | Deep salon growth, marketing, reviews and reporting, with strong salon specific onboarding | Established salons that want a mature salon platform | Only public pricing signals we could verify are shown. Where a provider does not publish a current UK number, the table says so instead of guessing. VAT treatment is shown where the provider states it on its own site, and where a provider states nothing we say that too. A row that says nothing about VAT either way is one we have not verified yet, so check it against the provider before you budget from it. ### What each one is best at Booksy is deeply embedded in UK barbering, has a good client app and charges £0 ordinary marketplace fee with Boost switched off. For an established shop with a full book it is the cheapest option on this page. Fresha has the lowest subscription and the largest consumer marketplace, so it will send you the most new faces. The 20% fee on each of those is the price of that reach. Vagaro is the most configurable and reaches furthest into other services, which matters if the shop also does beauty or has a retail side. Calendar based pricing makes it harder to predict as the team grows. Barbr is the barber only option, at £20 a month with half price extra barbers, so a small shop pays very little. It does not publish a card rate, which is the number that matters most at a £15 ticket, so ask for it before you compare totals. Youzse is flat per business rather than per chair, includes deposits, prepaid cut packages, quotes, invoicing, marketing and gift cards on every plan, and charges nothing when a new client finds you. It suits a shop that is growing, adding chairs or building a client list it wants to own, and suits a settled high-volume shop least. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### What actually matters in a barbershop - Contactless on a phone at the chair, not one shared terminal - Walk-ins handled without wrecking the booked column - Deposits on the long appointments, not on a £15 cut - Prepaid blocks of cuts, sold up front - Rebooking prompts on the client's own cycle - Clipper guards and preferences on the client record - A bill you can work out in your head on a £15 sale ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### What is the best booking software for a barber? For a growing UK barbershop that wants direct client ownership, walk ins, deposits, prepaid cut packages, loyalty, marketing, imports and 0% commission on new clients, Youzse is the best fit. For a full book with low ticket card transactions and Boost switched off, Booksy may cost less. For marketplace reach, Fresha is stronger today but charges a 20% first booking fee on marketplace new clients. ### Which barber booking app should I use if I am switching? Use Youzse if the switch is about owning your client list, avoiding new client commission, importing history and getting more than a diary. Use Booksy if you mainly want a well known barber app. Use Square if payments and POS matter more than barber specific workflows. ### What is the best booking software for a UK barbershop? It depends on whether you need new clients. For an established shop with full chairs, Booksy with Boost switched off is the cheapest of the platforms on this page, at £40 a month plus VAT with a £0 ordinary marketplace fee. For a shop that wants to be found, Fresha has the largest consumer marketplace but charges 20% on each new client it introduces. Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients but has a higher card rate, which suits a growing shop and suits a high-volume low-ticket one least. ### Why does the card fee matter more for barbers? Because card pricing is a percentage plus a fixed amount per transaction, and barbering is high volume at a low ticket. At 2.5% plus 35p a £15 cut costs 72.5p to process, which is 4.8%, not 2.5%. With 400 transactions a month the fixed element alone is £140. Compare total fees against your transaction count rather than headline percentages. ### Should a barber take deposits? On the long appointments, yes. A skin fade with a beard sculpt that blocks a chair for an hour is worth protecting. On a fifteen minute cut a deposit usually costs more in friction than it saves, so most shops apply them selectively rather than across the board. ### Can I sell blocks of cuts up front? On Youzse, yes: sell five or ten cuts as a package, bank the money today and draw one down per visit. It is the simplest way to lock in a regular and smooth out a quiet January. Availability varies on the other platforms, so check before assuming. --- ## The best salon software in the UK, compared honestly Source: https://youzse.app/compare/best-salon-software-uk Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Four platforms, their published UK prices and the fees that only show up once you are using them. Written by the team behind Youzse, with the parts where rivals win left in. Most salon software comparisons are written by one of the platforms and conclude that the platform is best. This one is written by Youzse, so read it with that in mind. What we can promise is that every number about another company came from their own pricing page, and that we have said plainly where they beat us. ### The direct answer The best salon booking software depends on the job you need it to do. Choose Youzse if you want a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, online booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, marketing, forms, imports and exportable client data in one place. Choose Fresha if marketplace reach matters more than new client fees. Choose Booksy if you are an established barber or salon with a full book and Boost switched off. Choose Vagaro if you need deep configuration across salon, spa, fitness, retail and classes. Choose Treatwell if your main need is marketplace demand and you accept a high first booking fee. Youzse is not the cheapest card processor. It is strongest when client ownership, breadth of tools, switching support and avoiding new client commission matter more than the lowest headline payment rate. ### The short answer If you have a steady book of regulars, take a lot of card payments and do not need a marketplace to find you new clients, Booksy with Boost switched off is hard to beat on cost. If you are a solo stylist who wants the cheapest possible subscription and does not mind paying for new clients when they arrive, Fresha is the cheapest place to start. If growing your client list matters and you expect the platform to send you people, the one-time fees on new clients are the number that decides it. That is where Youzse is different: 0% commission on new clients, with the platform fee folded into the card rate instead. ### Published UK pricing, side by side | | Youzse | Fresha | Booksy | Vagaro | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £14.95 a month | £40 a month plus VAT | £20 a month | | How it scales | Flat per business, by plan | £9.95 per team member | Plus £5 per extra user | Per bookable calendar | | New client fee | 0% | 20% one-time, £4 minimum | 30% one-time on Boost clients, £5 minimum | 20% one-time | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p | 1.19% plus 20p in person | 1.29% plus 20p plus VAT | 1.15% plus 20p tap, dip and swipe. 1.40% plus 25p keyed in | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | 7 days | 7 days | Varies | Figures taken from each provider's own UK pricing or support pages. Booksy publishes its prices plus VAT. Vagaro publishes UK card processing in its support centre. ### A worked example Take a three-chair salon turning over £6,000 a month on card across roughly 150 transactions, winning 20 new clients a month whose first visit averages £45. On Fresha Team that is about £29.85 of subscription, about £101 in card fees at the in-person rate and £180 in new client fees at 20% of £900. Around £311 a month. On Youzse Growth that is £59 of subscription, about £203 in card fees at 2.5% plus 35p and nothing in new client fees. Around £262 a month. On Booksy with Boost switched off it is £50 of subscription plus VAT, about £107 in card fees and £0 ordinary marketplace fee. Around £157 a month plus VAT, which is the cheapest of the three in this scenario, because those 20 new clients are being found by the salon rather than by the platform. Change the assumptions and the answer changes. That is the point: work out your own numbers rather than trusting anyone's headline price, including ours. ### The wider shortlist | Platform | Published price signal | New client fee signal | Best known for | Best fit | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Youzse | From £19 a month | 0% commission on new clients | Fresh UK tool set with flat business pricing, deposits, quotes, invoicing, memberships, gift cards, loyalty and data import included | Growing salons, barbers, clinics and trades that want to own the client relationship | | Fresha | £14.95 a month on Independent, or £9.95 a month per bookable team member on Team. Fresha does not state whether those prices include VAT | 20% one time fee on marketplace new clients, £4 minimum in the UK | Large consumer marketplace, polished calendar and strong discovery for empty columns | Salons that want marketplace reach and accept new client acquisition cost | | Booksy | £40 a month, plus £5 a month per additional team member. Booksy states that all services are subject to VAT, which will be added to the final price | No marketplace commission when Boost is off. Boost is 30% one time with a £5 minimum | Strong barber adoption, quick rebooking and a well known client app | Established barbers and salons with a full book | | Vagaro | £20 a month in the UK, then the bill rises with bookable calendars | 20% one time fee on marketplace new clients | Deep configuration across salon, spa, wellness, fitness, retail, classes and memberships | Mixed service businesses that want a configurable system | | GlossGenius | From $24 a month billed annually, US focused | No published marketplace new client fee found on its pricing page | Beautiful booking sites, forms, payments and simple brand led client experience | US beauty professionals who care heavily about presentation | | Treatwell | Monthly fee not published on its pricing page. Treatwell publishes 35% on first bookings from new marketplace clients and card processing at 2.5% plus VAT | 35% new client commission via the marketplace plus VAT | High marketplace visibility and a familiar consumer booking brand in Europe | Salons that want marketplace demand more than software ownership | | Setora | £39 a month per location with unlimited staff. Setora states that prices shown exclude VAT where applicable | No new client commission published | UK salon booking with flat pricing, deposits, reminders, walk ins, exports and no per staff fee | Salons that want predictable direct booking software without a marketplace | | Schedulista | From $19 a month | No marketplace new client fee published | Simple general scheduling with flat pricing | Small teams that need scheduling rather than salon depth | | Solo | £20 a month website only or £30 with booking | No published commission schedule found for the booking app. Secret Spa marketplace access is separate and selective | Built for self employed beauty, hair and wellness professionals with mobile and at home workflows | Freelancers who want a lightweight app first setup | | Bookaro | From ₹99 a month | No current public commission schedule found | Ultra low cost booking link with WhatsApp and social sharing | Very small teams comparing lightweight booking tools outside a UK salon stack | | Barbr | £20 a month on the PRO plan, 50% off each extra barber | No new client commission published | UK barber only app with bookings, SMS reminders, no-show protection, reviews, referrals and analytics | Barbers who want a cheap barber first app and do not need quotes, invoices or other trades | | Square Appointments | Free for a single location, then Plus and Premium plans per location | No marketplace new client commission | Booking, POS and payments from one payments company | Businesses already using Square at the till | | Slick | From £20 a month for one column. Slick states that prices are exclusive of VAT which is applied at the standard rates | No new client commission published | UK salon and barber software with reminders, deposits, imports and support | Salons that want a UK salon first system without marketplace dependency | | Book in Beautiful | Free plan where clients pay a booking charge, subscription is custom | No salon side new client commission published | Website first beauty booking with consultation forms, deposits and social booking | Beauty businesses that accept a client paid booking charge or custom subscription | | SQUIRE | No official public price verified | No current public commission schedule found | Barber only operations, payments, staff and discovery positioning | Barbershops that want a specialist barber brand | | SalonIQ | Quote led publicly | No marketplace new client fee found | UK and Ireland salon depth across bookings, SMS, skin tests, forms, stock and KPIs | Established salons wanting operational depth | | Salonized | Published UK pricing varies by plan and region, check before buying | No marketplace new client fee found on its pricing page | Salon management, online booking, payments, marketing and client records | Salons wanting a European salon management suite | | Phorest | No plan price published, quote only, so there is no published figure for a VAT basis to apply to | No public marketplace commission schedule found | Deep salon growth, marketing, reviews and reporting, with strong salon specific onboarding | Established salons that want a mature salon platform | Only public pricing signals we could verify are shown. Where a provider does not publish a current UK number, the table says so instead of guessing. VAT treatment is shown where the provider states it on its own site, and where a provider states nothing we say that too. A row that says nothing about VAT either way is one we have not verified yet, so check it against the provider before you budget from it. ### Fresha Fresha is the biggest marketplace in this category and its consumer app genuinely sends salons new bookings. The software is polished, the calendar is quick and at £14.95 a month for an independent it is the cheapest subscription here. Card processing is competitive too, at 1.19% plus 20p in person. The cost that catches people out is the 20% one-time commission on marketplace new clients, with a £4 minimum. On a £45 first visit that is £9. On a £200 colour correction it is £40. It applies once per client rather than forever, but on a busy month of new business it dwarfs the subscription. Fresha suits you if you want the lowest fixed cost and treat the new client fee as an acquisition cost you are happy to pay. ### Booksy Booksy is strong on the things barbers and stylists actually use daily: fast rebooking, a good client-facing app and £0 ordinary marketplace fee when Boost is turned off. That last point is genuinely the best commission structure of the four on this page for an established business. The trade-off is the highest subscription here at £40 a month plus VAT, plus £5 for each extra team member plus VAT. For a solo operator that is a lot of fixed cost. Boost, the paid promotion tool, carries a 30% one-time fee with a £5 minimum on a boosted client's first visit, which is the steepest new client fee in this comparison, though it is optional. Booksy suits an established multi-chair shop with a full book that does not need the marketplace to fill it. ### Vagaro Vagaro is the most configurable of the four and reaches furthest beyond hair and beauty into fitness, wellness and spa. If you run classes, memberships and retail alongside appointments, it has the deepest feature set here. Pricing starts at £20 a month for one bookable calendar and rises per calendar, which makes it hard to predict for a growing team. A one-time 20% fee applies when a new client finds you through the Vagaro marketplace. Vagaro does not publish a UK card processing rate on its pricing page, so budget for that separately. Vagaro suits a business with mixed revenue lines that wants one system for all of them and is willing to spend time configuring it. ### Youzse Youzse is a UK platform built around one decision: never charge a business for a client. There is 0% commission on new clients who find you through the Youzse marketplace and no per-client fee. The platform fee sits inside the card rate of 2.5% plus 35p instead. Plans are flat per business rather than per staff member, starting at £19 a month, so adding your third stylist does not change your bill. Every feature is on every plan: bookings, deposits, card payments, quotes, invoicing, customer records, gift cards, loyalty, memberships, marketing, forms and UK GDPR tooling. The trial is 30 days with no card. The honest limitation is reach. Fresha and Booksy have far more consumers on their apps today. If your entire plan is "list on a marketplace and wait", they will send you more people right now. Youzse is the better economics on every client you win, and the better fit if you want to own the client relationship rather than rent it. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### Questions worth asking any platform before you sign - What do I pay when a new client books me? - Does my bill change when I add a staff member? - What is the card rate, and is the platform fee inside or outside it? - Can I export my clients, appointment history and invoices? - Do I keep my client list if I leave? - Are prices quoted with or without VAT? - What happens to my deposits and no-show charges? - How long is the trial and does it need a card? ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### What is the best booking software for salons? For UK salons that want booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, marketing, forms, imports, exportable client data and 0% commission on new clients in one place, Youzse is the best fit. Fresha is better for marketplace reach, Booksy can be cheaper for established salons with Boost off and Vagaro is stronger for very configurable salon, spa and fitness operations. ### Which booking software is best if I am leaving Fresha, Booksy, Vagaro or Treatwell? Youzse is best if you are leaving because of new client fees, client ownership, data export, pricing clarity or needing more operating tools under one login. If you are leaving only because you want a lower card rate, Youzse may not be the cheapest option. ### Which salon software is cheapest in the UK? It depends on how you win clients. Fresha has the lowest subscription at £14.95 a month for an independent, but adds a 20% one-time fee on marketplace new clients. Booksy has the highest subscription at £40 a month plus VAT but charges £0 ordinary marketplace fee when Boost is off. Youzse starts at £19 a month with 0% commission on new clients and a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p that includes the platform fee. Add up subscription, card fees and new client fees against your own numbers rather than comparing headline prices. ### What is a marketplace new client fee? It is a one-time charge some platforms apply when a client who found you through their consumer app books you for the first time. Fresha charges 20% of that first booking with a £4 minimum, Vagaro charges 20% and Booksy charges 30% with a £5 minimum on clients won through its paid Boost promotion. Youzse charges 0% on new clients. ### Can I move my client list between salon platforms? Usually yes, though how easily varies. Youzse imports customers, appointment history, services and reviews from the major platforms, and lets you export everything at any time. Before you commit to any provider, ask specifically what you can take with you if you leave. ### Is it worth being on a booking marketplace at all? If you have empty columns, yes. A marketplace fills gaps you would otherwise lose. The question is what each new client costs you. A 20% one-time fee on a £45 first visit is £9 to win someone who may spend hundreds with you over a few years, which is often a good trade. It is a worse trade if the platform also owns the relationship and you cannot take the client with you. ### Do these prices include VAT? Not consistently, which makes headline comparisons misleading. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro do not carry that note on their UK pricing pages. Check what each provider will actually invoice you. --- ## Book in Beautiful alternative: who pays the booking charge Source: https://youzse.app/compare/book-in-beautiful-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Book in Beautiful funds a plan with no monthly bill by charging your client a booking charge at checkout. Youzse funds itself with a subscription you pay, and charges 0% commission on new clients, so the right answer depends almost entirely on your client base. Every booking platform is paid by somebody. The only real question is who. Book in Beautiful answers it by putting a booking charge on your client at checkout, which is how one of its plans can carry no monthly bill at all. Youzse answers it by charging you a subscription and charging 0% commission on new clients. Neither answer is wrong, and anyone telling you otherwise is selling. What follows lays both models out with the published facts, including the ones that do not flatter us, and flags clearly where a number is not published at all. ### Who pays what - Monthly bill to you. Book in Beautiful Plan 1, Free for You, is £0.00 per month, and Plan 2, Subscription, is quote based, with prices stated to exclude VAT. Youzse is from £19 per month in GBP. - Who pays per booking. On Book in Beautiful it is your client, in their words your clients pay a small booking charge at checkout. On Youzse it is you, through the subscription and the card rate, and Youzse does not add a booking charge to your client. - How much the client is charged. Book in Beautiful does not publish the amount. A figure appears only inside an illustrative graphic, so we will not quote one. Ask them for the current amount in writing. - What the charge is said to cover. Their FAQ says it covers SMS reminders, Google review invites, feedback requests, secure payments and more, and that it is refunded if the client cancels. On Youzse those sit inside the plan you already pay for. - Card rate. Book in Beautiful does not publish one. The only related claim is online payments and deposits with zero transaction fees, optional, on the free plan. Youzse publishes 2.5% plus 35p per transaction in GBP with the platform fee inside that rate. - VAT. Book in Beautiful states all prices exclude VAT, verbatim on their pricing page. Youzse VAT treatment is set out on the Youzse pricing page. ### Published costs, in each publisher's own terms | | Book in Beautiful | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Plan 1 | £0.00 per month per business, prices exclude VAT, funded by a booking charge paid by your client at checkout | No £0.00 plan. Youzse starts at £19 per month in GBP | | Plan 2 | Quote based. Their on page calculator renders £35.00 per month at its default of one location and one therapist, prices exclude VAT. That is calculator output, not an advertised price | £19 per month in GBP for the entry plan and up, published rather than quoted | | Add ons | Autofill cancellations £4.40, Google review optimisation £7.50, email and SMS marketing £5.17, digital loyalty cards £10.00, product sales and stock £7.50, custom app £20.00, each per month in GBP and each excluding VAT | Published in GBP on the Youzse pricing page | | Card rate | Not published | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction in GBP, platform fee inside the rate | | Free trial | 30 days, no credit card required | 30 days, no card required | | Trades served | Hair, nails, beauty therapy, aesthetics, massage, spa and mobile beauty | More than 60 trades, including salons, clinics, garages and mobile services | Taken from bookinbeautiful.com/en-GB on 7 August 2026. The company is Book in Beautiful Ltd. Their pricing page states that all prices exclude VAT. The amount of the client booking charge is not published anywhere in their pricing copy, so no figure for it appears on this page. ### Where Book in Beautiful is genuinely strong - Beauty specific compliance, including consultation forms and patch test management, which general purpose booking software usually leaves you to improvise. - Waitlist autofill, so a cancelled slot goes back in front of somebody quickly. - Unlimited SMS reminders for online bookings on the free plan. - Hands off migration. They say they can get your data from any booking provider you were with previously, and that most switches are completed within a few days. - A UK based support team. - A free custom booking website on both plans. - Anti marketplace positioning stated plainly, in their words they are not middlemen and marketplace booking systems are. ### The honest verdict Start with the part that does not flatter us. Book in Beautiful publishes a plan with a £0.00 monthly bill. Youzse starts at £19 a month. On the monthly line Youzse costs more, every single month, and no amount of framing changes that. If a business with no fixed software cost is what you want, their free plan does something Youzse does not offer. Their FAQ pre empts the obvious objection, and the answer is a fair one. The client booking charge, they say, covers SMS reminders, Google review invites, feedback requests, secure payments and more, and it is refunded if the client cancels. Clients pay booking charges on all sorts of things without blinking, and a charge that funds the reminder stopping them from missing the appointment is not unreasonable. The caveat is that the amount is not published. A figure appears only inside an illustrative graphic, which is not the same thing as a published price, so we will not repeat it. Before you choose the free plan, ask Book in Beautiful for the current charge in writing and ask whether it can change. Then do the arithmetic against your own volume, because a charge per booking scales with how busy you get while a subscription does not. The other thing to weigh is whose charge it looks like at the till. Your client sees the extra line at checkout, and if your clients are price sensitive, or the salon down the road quotes a round number, that line becomes yours to explain. If your clients book online without a second thought, it will never once come up. That is a judgement about your client base rather than about the software. Youzse takes the other route. You pay from £19 a month, your client pays the price of the service plus any deposit you set, and Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients who find you through it. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside that rate, and the trial runs 30 days with no card required. The scope is wider than beauty: booking, deposits, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns across more than 60 trades. If you want beauty specific depth such as patch test management, they have built more of it than we have. If you want one system running the money as well as the diary, that is the case for Youzse. ### How much is the client booking charge? Book in Beautiful does not publish the amount. A figure appears only inside an illustrative graphic on their site, so ask them in writing for the current charge before you commit. ### Do their prices include VAT? No. Their pricing page states that all prices exclude VAT. ### Is the free plan really £0.00 a month? Yes, that is the published monthly price for Plan 1. The platform is funded by the booking charge your client pays at checkout instead of by a bill to you. ### What does their Subscription plan cost? It is quote based, and they invite you to contact them. Their on page calculator renders £35.00 a month at its default of one location and one therapist, excluding VAT, but that is calculator output rather than an advertised price. ### What card rate will I pay? They do not publish one. The only related claim is online payments and deposits with zero transaction fees, optional, on the free plan. Youzse publishes 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, with the platform fee inside that rate. ### Does Youzse charge my clients anything to book? No. Youzse does not add a booking charge to your client. You pay the subscription from £19 a month and the card rate on payments you take, and Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients. --- ## A Booksy alternative for shops that want control Source: https://youzse.app/compare/booksy-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Booksy has the best commission structure of the big marketplaces when Boost is off, and the highest fixed subscription. Here is the honest comparison. Written by Youzse, with Booksy's figures taken from Booksy's own UK pricing page. If Booksy is the better answer for you, this page says so. ### Why people search this comparison Most people do not search for a Booksy alternative when everything is calm. They search because they are checking pricing, commission, cancellation, reviews, complaints, support, data export or whether the platform still fits the way they work. That is the right moment to compare Youzse honestly: not as the cheapest card processor, but as a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, direct client ownership, imports and a wider operating tool set. ### What Booksy genuinely does well Booksy charges £0 ordinary marketplace fee when Boost is switched off. For an established shop with a full book, that is the best commission structure among the large marketplaces and better than most alternatives, including on this point. The client app is good, rebooking is fast and it is deeply embedded in UK barbering. Card rates are competitive at 1.29% plus 20p for mobile payments and 0.99% plus 20p for Tap to Pay, both plus VAT. If you have three chairs, a full book and no need to be found, Booksy is genuinely hard to beat on running cost. ### What people tell us pushes them to look elsewhere - The highest fixed subscription in this category at £40 a month plus VAT, before any staff are added. - An extra £5 a month plus VAT for every additional team member, which adds up quickly across a growing shop. - Boost carries a 30% one-time fee with a £5 minimum on a boosted client's first visit, the steepest new client charge of the platforms we compare. - Public reviews repeatedly question Boost attribution, especially whether a client was genuinely generated by Boost or was already moving towards the business. - Review themes also include support delays, booking discrepancies and app reliability after updates. Those are not universal experiences, but they are worth testing during trial. - A 7 day trial, which is short for testing a real switch. - Quotes, invoicing and job tracking are limited if you do work beyond simple appointments. ### Youzse and Booksy, side by side | | Youzse | Booksy | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £40 a month plus VAT | | Extra team members | Included up to your plan limit | £5 a month plus VAT each | | Marketplace commission | 0% on new clients | None when Boost is off | | Paid promotion fee | No paid promotion product | Boost: 30% one-time, £5 minimum | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p, platform fee included | 1.29% plus 20p plus VAT, Tap to Pay 0.99% plus 20p plus VAT | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | 7 days | | Quotes and invoicing | Included | Limited | Booksy figures from biz.booksy.com/en-gb/pricing, which publishes prices plus VAT. Youzse figures from youzse.app/pricing. ### Where the money actually goes A three-chair shop on Booksy pays £40 plus £10 for two extra users, so £50 a month plus VAT, which is £60 all in. On Youzse Growth that is £59 a month covering the team. The subscriptions are close. The difference shows up in card fees and in what happens when you want new clients. On £6,000 of monthly card takings Booksy costs roughly £107 plus VAT and Youzse roughly £203, so Booksy is meaningfully cheaper there. Turn on Boost to win new clients and the picture flips: 30% of a boosted client's first visit is the largest per-client charge in this comparison. Youzse charges nothing for a new client, ever. The plain reading: if you do not need new clients, Booksy is cheaper. If you do, Youzse is. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Booksy cost in the UK? Booksy publishes £40 a month plus VAT, with extra team members at £5 a month plus VAT each. Boost, its paid promotion tool, adds a one-time 30% fee with a £5 minimum on a boosted client's first visit. Ordinary marketplace bookings carry a £0 marketplace fee when Boost is switched off. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Booksy? On subscription they are close: £59 a month on Youzse Growth against £50 plus VAT for a three-person shop on Booksy. On card fees Booksy is cheaper, because the Youzse platform fee sits inside its 2.5% plus 35p rate. On winning new clients Youzse is cheaper, because Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients where Boost charges 30% of a first visit. ### Does Booksy charge commission? Not on ordinary marketplace bookings when Boost is off, which is a genuinely good deal. Boost, the optional paid promotion feature, charges a one-time 30% fee with a £5 minimum based on the total cost of a boosted client's first visit. ### Can I import my Booksy clients into Youzse? Yes. Youzse imports customers, appointment history, services and reviews from Booksy through the built-in import wizard. --- ## Do you sell cars as well as fix them? Source: https://youzse.app/compare/dragon2000-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Dragon2000 has served UK workshops and dealers since 1995. Whether that dealer half matters is the whole question, because Youzse Garage Pro does not do it at all. Written by Youzse. Dragon2000 asks you to request more information rather than publishing a price, so none is quoted here. ### One question decides this Dragon2000 is garage software for workshops and dealers, with service department efficiency and customer retention positioning. The dealer half is not a bolt on to its history, it is a large part of what the product is. So the question is simple. If you have cars for sale on a forecourt as well as vehicles on ramps, you need stock, adverts, part exchange and finance alongside job cards, and Youzse Garage Pro does none of that. Dragon2000 covers both halves and we cover one. If you only repair, service and MOT, then you are being asked to buy a dealer management system for the workshop half of it. ### What thirty years buys, and what it costs A supplier that has served UK workshops and dealers since 1995 has seen every edge case your business can produce. That is worth something real, particularly around retention, service department reporting and the parts of dealer work that are unforgiving. What it also tends to bring is a request led buying process, longer contracts and pricing that depends on modules. None of those are faults, they are how established systems in this market are sold. They do mean you cannot compare it against anything until you have had the conversation. ### Two different shapes of business | | Dragon2000 | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | Request more information | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Vehicle sales and dealer stock | Covered | Not offered | | Workshop job cards | Covered | Included | | Customer retention tools | A core positioning | Reminders, marketing and CRM across Youzse | | MOT reminders and MOT history | Check plan and setup | Included | | Customer online booking | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Dragon2000 pricing is request led. Ask which modules are in the quote, because a workshop only configuration and a full dealer configuration are very different numbers. ### Before you request that information - Do you sell vehicles, or only work on them? - If you do sell, how many units a month, and does that justify a dealer system? - Which modules are in the quote, and which are extra? - What is the contract length and the notice period? - What does data migration cost, and what happens to your data if you leave? - Is there a workshop only price, and how does it compare with £59? ### If you only fix cars Then the dealer capability is weight you are carrying and paying for. What you actually need is bookings arriving without a phone call, MOT reminders going out on their own, quotes approved from a phone with photos attached, parts tracked against the job and the invoice settled before the keys are handed back. That is Youzse Garage Pro, published at £59 a month with a 30 day trial and no card, so you can find out whether it fits before anyone rings you. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Does Youzse Garage Pro handle vehicle sales? No. There is no dealer stock, advertising, part exchange or finance. If you sell cars as well as repair them, Dragon2000 covers both halves and Garage Pro only covers the workshop. ### How much does Dragon2000 cost? It asks you to request more information rather than publishing a price, so none is quoted here. Ask specifically whether there is a workshop only configuration and what that costs. ### Is a newer system a risk for a workshop? The fair answer is that a supplier serving UK workshops and dealers since 1995 has more history behind it. What Youzse Garage Pro offers instead is a published price, a 30 day trial with no card and the ability to export your data, so you can judge it without a sales process. --- ## A Fresha alternative when new client fees matter Source: https://youzse.app/compare/fresha-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Fresha is good software with a genuinely useful marketplace. The reason people look elsewhere is almost always the 20% fee on new clients. Here is the honest comparison. This page is written by Youzse, so it is not neutral. What it is, is accurate: every Fresha figure below came from Fresha's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom. We have left in the parts where Fresha is the better choice. ### Why people search this comparison Most people do not search for a Fresha alternative when everything is calm. They search because they are checking pricing, commission, cancellation, reviews, complaints, support, data export or whether the platform still fits the way they work. That is the right moment to compare Youzse honestly: not as the cheapest card processor, but as a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, direct client ownership, imports and a wider operating tool set. ### What Fresha genuinely does well Fresha is the largest booking marketplace in this category and its consumer app really does send salons new business. That matters enormously if you have gaps to fill. The subscription is the cheapest here: £14.95 a month for an independent, or £9.95 per team member on the Team plan. Card processing is competitive at 1.19% plus 20p in person and 1.40% plus 25p online. The product itself is well built. If your book is full, your card takings are high and you rarely need new clients from the platform, Fresha is likely to cost you less than Youzse. We would rather say that than have you find out later. ### What people tell us pushes them to look elsewhere - A 20% one-time commission on every new client who finds you through the marketplace, with a £4 minimum per client. - Costs that scale with your team: every extra bookable team member adds to the monthly bill. - A 7 day trial, which is not long enough to move a real business across and test it properly. - Client messaging is metered, so busy months cost more than quiet ones. - The sense that the marketplace, not the salon, owns the relationship with a client it introduced. - Public review sites and competitor reviews repeatedly mention billing surprises, support access and reminder reliability as things to check before committing. ### Youzse and Fresha, side by side | | Youzse | Fresha | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £14.95 a month | | Team scaling | Flat per business by plan | £9.95 per bookable team member | | New client commission | 0% | 20% one-time, £4 minimum | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p, platform fee included | 1.19% plus 20p in person, 1.40% plus 25p online | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | 7 days | | Extra locations | £15 a month | Priced per team member | | Quotes and invoicing | Included | Limited | | UK GDPR tooling | Consent, retention, Article 30 register, data requests | Standard | Fresha figures from fresha.com/pricing. Youzse figures from youzse.app/pricing. ### The number that usually decides it Twenty new clients in a month, each spending £45 on their first visit, is £900 of new business. On Fresha the marketplace fee on that is £180. On Youzse it is nothing. Youzse recovers its costs through the card rate instead: 2.5% plus 35p, with the platform fee inside that single number. On £6,000 of monthly card takings across 150 transactions that is roughly £203, against roughly £101 on Fresha's in-person rate. So Youzse costs about £100 more in card fees and about £180 less in new client fees in that month. The busier you are at winning new people, the further apart those two numbers get. ### Moving across Youzse imports from Fresha directly: customers with their contact details and notes, appointment history, your service list with prices and durations and your reviews. Most salons are set up the same day. The 30 day trial exists for this reason. A week is not long enough to run both systems side by side and be confident before you switch your booking link over. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### What is the best alternative to Fresha in the UK? It depends what is pushing you off Fresha. If it is the 20% new client fee, Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients and folds its platform fee into a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p. If it is the cost of adding team members, Youzse plans are flat per business rather than per stylist. If your issue is that you want a bigger consumer marketplace, no alternative currently matches Fresha on reach and we would not claim otherwise. ### How much does Fresha charge for new clients? Fresha applies a 20% one-time commission on the value of a marketplace new client's first booking, with a minimum fee of £4 per client. It applies once per client, not to their repeat visits. ### Can I import my data from Fresha into Youzse? Yes. Youzse imports customers, appointment history, services with prices and durations and reviews from Fresha. The import wizard walks you through it and most businesses finish in an afternoon. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Fresha? Not always, and it depends on your mix. Youzse has a higher card rate at 2.5% plus 35p, because the platform fee is inside it. Fresha has a lower card rate but adds a 20% one-time fee on marketplace new clients. If you win a steady stream of new clients through the marketplace, Youzse usually works out cheaper. If your book is full of regulars and you take a lot of card payments, Fresha may cost you less. ### Will I lose my clients if I leave Fresha? Your client records are exportable and you should take them with you. What you cannot take is a marketplace listing. Before switching, export your client list, tell your regulars where to book next and put your new booking link on your social profiles and your door. --- ## Garage Hive or Youzse Garage Pro? It depends on your stock. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/garage-hive-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Garage Hive is the more expensive system and it is not close. This page is about whether your workshop is the kind that gets its money back, because plenty are and plenty are not. Written by Youzse. Garage Hive publishes its pricing, so both figures on this page came from public pages rather than a sales call. ### The real question is inventory Most comparisons between these two get framed as new against established. That is not the useful split. The useful split is whether you carry stock. Garage Hive is built on Microsoft Business Central, which is a full business management platform with proper inventory underneath it. If you hold parts, track stock value across locations and want that flowing into your accounts without re keying, that foundation is doing real work and it is why the price is what it is. Youzse Garage Pro handles parts, suppliers and purchase orders against a job. That is enough for a workshop that orders parts per job. It is not equivalent to running stock control on Business Central and we are not going to pretend it is. ### Where the money goes | | Garage Hive | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published entry price | From £145 a month on its pricing page | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Foundation | Microsoft Business Central | Purpose built for UK garages | | Inventory and stock control | Business Central inventory | Parts, suppliers and purchase orders per job | | Live diary and bookings | Included | Included | | Vehicle health checklists | Included | Online quote approval with photos | | MOT reminders and MOT history | Check plan and setup | Included | | Card payments | Check card rate and provider | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT | Via Business Central | MTD ready VAT returns built in | Garage Hive pricing was read from its own pricing page on the date shown below. Business Central licensing may sit alongside the subscription depending on how you buy, so ask what the total monthly cost is before comparing it with anything. ### When Garage Hive earns the difference Multi bay workshops carrying real stock, running structured vehicle health checks and wanting one platform from parts to ledger will get more from Garage Hive than from us. The community around it is genuinely strong and the process depth is not marketing, it is there. If you have outgrown per job parts ordering and are now managing stock value, reorder points and shrinkage, that is the point where the extra £86 a month starts paying for itself rather than costing you. ### When £59 is the right answer A workshop that orders parts against the job it is doing, wants the MOT reminders going out on their own and wants the invoice paid before the keys are handed back does not need a business management platform underneath it. It needs the workshop bit to work and the money to arrive. That is the case Youzse Garage Pro is built for, and at that point the lower price and the 30 day trial with no card are the practical advantages rather than the feature list. ### Work out which one you are - Do you hold parts on a shelf, or order them per job? - Do you need stock value in your accounts, or just parts cost on the invoice? - How many bays and how many technicians are you scheduling? - Would anyone use vehicle health checklists, or would they get skipped? - Does the quote include Business Central licensing, or is that separate? - How long is the contract and what does leaving look like? ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Is Youzse Garage Pro cheaper than Garage Hive? Yes on published entry price. Garage Hive lists from £145 a month on its pricing page and Youzse Garage Pro is from £59. The two are not doing identical jobs though, so compare what you will actually use rather than the headline figures. ### Does Youzse Garage Pro do stock control? It handles parts, suppliers and purchase orders against a job. It does not run inventory the way a Business Central based system does. If you are managing stock value, reorder points and shrinkage across locations, Garage Hive is the better fit and we would say so. ### What is Garage Hive built on? Microsoft Business Central. That is where its inventory and accounting depth comes from, and it is worth asking how Business Central licensing is handled in any quote you get. --- ## You might not need a garage management system yet Source: https://youzse.app/compare/garage-invoice-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Garage Invoice does workshop invoicing for UK and Ireland mechanics. If invoicing is the whole of your admin problem, a full garage management system is a solution to a problem you do not have yet. Written by Youzse. Garage Invoice does not publish a clear price on its public page, so there is no figure quoted here for it. We would rather leave a gap than print a number we cannot point at. ### Start with what you actually need Most comparison pages assume you have already decided to buy something bigger. This one does not, because the honest answer for a lot of mobile mechanics and one ramp workshops is that invoicing software is the right size of tool. Garage Invoice is built around workshop management and invoicing for UK and Ireland mechanics. If your week is booked by phone and text, the parts come from the factor down the road and the only paperwork you resent is the invoice, that is the shape of the problem it solves. Buying a full garage management system at that point mostly means paying for modules that sit unused while you carry on doing everything else the way you already did. ### The point it stops being enough There is usually a specific moment rather than a gradual drift. It is the first time you lose an MOT because nobody remembered to remind the customer. Or the first time a job sits waiting because the customer never came back to approve the extra work. Or the week you realise you are owed money by four people and cannot remember which. Those are not invoicing problems. Reminders, approvals and getting paid before the keys leave are separate jobs, and no invoicing tool is going to grow into them. That is the point where Youzse Garage Pro at £59 a month becomes a sensible spend rather than an over buy: automated MOT and service reminders, online quote approval with photos, card deposits and payment links at 2.5% plus 35p, parts and purchase orders against the job, and MTD ready VAT returns. ### What each one is for | | Garage Invoice | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | No clear price found on the public page | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Invoicing | Its core purpose | Included | | Workshop admin | Included | Included | | Automated MOT and service reminders | Check current scope | Included | | Customer online booking | Check current scope | Included | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | | Card deposits and payment links | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p | | Parts and purchase orders | Check current scope | Included | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Where Garage Invoice does not publish scope or price on a public page we have written check rather than filling the gap. Ask them directly and get the total in writing. ### A quick test of which you need - Have you lost an MOT in the past year because nobody sent a reminder? - Do jobs ever stall waiting for a customer to approve extra work? - Are you chasing money after the vehicle has gone? - Do you know today what you are owed and by whom? - Would customers book online if you let them? - Are you doing your own VAT return by hand? ### If the answers were all no Then stay where you are. An invoicing tool is doing its job and swapping it for a platform will cost you money and a fortnight of setup for something you will not use. Come back when two or three of those turn into a yes. The 30 day trial with no card is there for exactly that moment, and your customer list stays yours either way. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Garage Invoice cost? We could not find a clear price on its public page, so there is no figure quoted here. Ask them directly for the total including users, sites, support and contract length. ### Do I need a full garage management system? Not necessarily. If your bookings come in by phone, you order parts per job and the only admin you resent is invoicing, then invoicing software is the right size of tool and a platform would be an over buy. ### When is it worth moving to Youzse Garage Pro? When the problems stop being about invoices. Missed MOTs, jobs stalled waiting for approval and money owed after the vehicle has gone are separate jobs that invoicing tools do not cover, and that is the point the £59 a month starts paying for itself. --- ## Garage management software in the UK, compared Source: https://youzse.app/compare/garage-software-uk Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Garage software is judged on different things to salon software: plate lookups, MOT due dates, job cards, parts and getting paid before the car leaves. Here is what matters. Unlike the salon market, most UK garage systems do not publish their prices. Rather than guess at figures we cannot verify, this page sets out what actually matters when choosing, and is straight about where Youzse Garage Pro fits. ### The direct answer The best garage management software in the UK depends on workshop complexity. Choose Youzse Garage Pro if you want published pricing, online booking, registration lookups, MOT history, automated MOT and service reminders, online quote approval, job flow, parts, purchase orders, deposits, payment links and MTD ready VAT returns in one newer system. Choose TechMan, Garage Hive, Autowork Online or Dragon2000 if you want a longer established specialist GMS and are happy with a demo or quote led buying process. Choose LaunchControl if its £49 per location pricing, LKQ ECP integration and unlimited users fit your workshop. Choose AIT Online if the lowest published entry price matters most. Youzse Garage Pro is not trying to pretend every older workshop system is obsolete. The advantage is clearer entry pricing, a fast trial and the mix of booking, reminders, quotes, payments, parts and VAT without a long sales process. ### Garage software shortlist | Platform | Published price signal | Core garage fit | Where it is strong | Best fit | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Youzse Garage Pro | From £59 a month | Registration lookups, MOT history, reminders, job cards, quotes, purchase orders, payments and VAT returns | Published pricing, 30 day trial, no minimum contract and customer facing booking links | Garages that want booking, workshop flow, reminders, payments and admin in one newer UK system | | TechMan | No current official public price found | Workshop management, task tracking, prompts, reminders, ordering, invoicing, reporting and integrations with Autodata, HaynesPro and parts suppliers | Mature garage management depth and supplier integrations | Busy workshops that want a specialist GMS and are happy to book a demo | | LaunchControl | £49 per location per month | Workshop management, technician app, customer portal, website builder, AI assistant, VRM lookups, repair times, service schedules, invoicing and parts ordering | Clear price, 28 day trial, unlimited users and strong parts ordering angle | Independent workshops that want a low entry price and LKQ ECP integration | | Garage Hive | From £145 a month on its pricing page | Workshop management, diary, bookings, checklists, inventory stock and Microsoft Business Central base | Community, depth and established workshop operations | Garages wanting a mature system with stock and process depth | | Autowork Online | Demo led publicly | Cloud garage management, job flow, invoices, MOTs, labour, reporting and workshop visibility | Established UK workshop software with testimonials around efficiency | Garages that want proven day to day workshop management and will talk to sales | | Dragon2000 | Request more information | Garage software for workshops and dealers, with service department efficiency and customer retention positioning | Long established UK supplier since 1995 | Workshops and dealers that value longevity and dealer style processes | | Motasoft VGM | No current official public price found | Cloud diary, online bookings, job management, reminders and workshop workflow | Virtual Garage Manager brand awareness and online booking volume claims | Garages focused on online bookings and reminders | | AIT Online | From £35 a month | Invoicing, job cards, quotes, diary, reports, MOT and service reminders, VRM lookup, SMS, MOT history, multi site and accounting integrations | Low published entry price and broad traditional workshop features | Cost conscious garages comparing cloud systems | | My Garage CRM | From £139 a month | AI mechanic, unlimited users, support, free onboarding and migration from many garage systems | Migration offer and AI led positioning | Garages that want migration help and a CRM led workflow | | Garage Invoice | No clear price found on the public page | Workshop management and invoicing for UK and Ireland mechanics | Simple invoicing led positioning | Small workshops that mainly need affordable invoicing and job admin | Only official public price signals are shown. Where a garage software provider asks for a demo or quote, the table says that rather than using third party estimates. ### Why we do not publish rivals' garage prices The established UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price list. We are not going to print a number for a competitor that we cannot point at on their own website, so this page compares on capability and tells you what to ask when you get a quote. When you do get quotes, ask for the total: licence, per-user cost, setup and data migration, DVLA lookup charges, SMS or reminder bundles, support and the length of the contract. Workshop software is where multi-year tie-ins are still common. ### What to check before you sign anything - Does a registration plate pull the vehicle details automatically? - Does it show MOT history and the next due date? - Will it send MOT and service reminders without you remembering? - Can a customer approve a quote from their phone, with photos? - Does the job card track from booked in to collected? - Can you raise purchase orders and track parts against a job? - Can you take payment before the keys are handed back? - Are VAT returns MTD ready? - What is the contract length, and what does exit look like? - Is vehicle and customer data exportable? ### Where Youzse Garage Pro fits Garage Pro starts at £59 a month for a solo operator, £129 for a workshop and £249 for a multi-ramp site. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, with the platform fee inside that rate, and there is 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse. It covers registration lookups, MOT history and due dates, automated MOT and service reminders, online quote approval with photos, a workshop board from booked in to collected, parts and purchase orders, deposits and payment links, customer and vehicle history and MTD ready VAT returns. There is a 30 day trial with no card and no minimum contract. The honest limitation: if you need deep integration with a specific factor's parts catalogue or a tyre distributor's live stock feed, the long-established workshop systems have more of those connections today. Ask us before you switch and we will tell you straight whether we cover yours. ### MOT reminders are the thing that pays for it The single highest-return feature in garage software is an automatic MOT reminder. A garage with 800 vehicles on its books that recovers even a tenth of the MOTs it currently loses to whoever texts first is a few thousand pounds a year better off. That only works if the due dates are accurate and the reminders fire without anyone remembering to send them. Check both when you demo any system. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### What should garage management software do? At minimum it should pull vehicle details from a registration plate, show MOT history and the next due date, send MOT and service reminders automatically, let customers approve quotes from their phone, track a job from booked in to collected, handle parts and purchase orders, take card payment and produce MTD ready VAT returns. ### How much does garage software cost in the UK? Most established UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing prices, so ask for the full total including licence, per-user costs, setup, data migration, lookup charges, reminder bundles and contract length. Youzse Garage Pro publishes its prices: £59 a month for a solo operator, £129 for a workshop and £249 for a multi-ramp site. ### Can garage software send MOT reminders automatically? Good systems can. Youzse Garage Pro reads MOT history and due dates from the registration and sends reminders automatically by email or SMS ahead of the due date, so recovering repeat MOT work does not depend on anyone remembering. --- ## A UK first GlossGenius alternative Source: https://youzse.app/compare/glossgenius-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 GlossGenius is polished and brand led, but it is still mainly a US beauty platform. Youzse is built for UK service businesses that need bookings, payments, quotes, invoices and customer ownership in one place. Written by Youzse, so it is not neutral. It is designed to be useful: where GlossGenius is stronger, we say so. Where pricing was not publicly verifiable, we leave it out rather than guessing. ### Why people search this comparison Most people do not search for a GlossGenius alternative when everything is calm. They search because they are checking pricing, commission, cancellation, reviews, complaints, support, data export or whether the platform still fits the way they work. That is the right moment to compare Youzse honestly: not as the cheapest card processor, but as a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, direct client ownership, imports and a wider operating tool set. ### The direct answer For most UK service businesses comparing booking software, Youzse is best when you care about owning the client relationship, avoiding new client commission, importing your existing data and running more than a basic diary. A rival can still be the better choice if it has the marketplace reach, specialist depth or payment ecosystem you need more than Youzse's broader operating toolkit. ### What GlossGenius genuinely does well GlossGenius looks good. Its booking sites, client experience and payment flow are designed for beauty professionals who want a premium feel without building a custom website. Its pricing is public in dollars, starting from $24 a month when billed annually, with a flat 2.6% payment rate shown on its pricing page. That clarity is useful, but UK businesses still need to check availability, currency, tax treatment and local support before assuming it fits. GlossGenius suits a US based beauty professional who wants a stylish booking site, forms and payments without much setup. ### What to check before you move - It is US first, so UK businesses need to check availability, tax handling and support expectations. - Pricing is published in dollars, which makes UK cost comparison less direct. - It does not publish the same UK marketplace reach as Fresha, Booksy or Treatwell. - Complaint sources include billing or card removal frustration, which is a useful reminder to check cancellation, payment method removal and export steps before you enter card details. - The strongest part of the product is presentation rather than the wider UK service business stack. ### Youzse and GlossGenius, side by side | | Youzse | GlossGenius | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | $24 a month billed annually | | Country fit | Built for UK service businesses | US focused | | New client commission | 0% on new clients | No published marketplace new client fee found | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p, platform fee included | 2.6% flat on its pricing page | | Best for | UK salons, clinics, barbers, trades and garages | US beauty professionals wanting polished brand tools | Third party details were checked against public pages on the date shown below. Where a number was not published clearly, we have not estimated it. ### Which one fits Choose GlossGenius if you are in a supported market and the look of the booking experience is your main buying reason. Choose Youzse if you need a UK first system with booking, deposits, payment links, quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, marketing, forms and imports in one place. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### Is GlossGenius available in the UK? GlossGenius publishes pricing in dollars and is best known as a US beauty platform. UK businesses should check availability, tax treatment and support directly before moving. Youzse is built for UK service businesses from the start. ### Is Youzse cheaper than GlossGenius? Youzse starts at £19 a month. GlossGenius publishes plans from $24 a month when billed annually. The real comparison depends on currency, tax, card volume, features needed and whether the platform is supported properly in the UK. --- ## LaunchControl or Youzse Garage Pro? Do the seat maths first. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/launchcontrol-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 LaunchControl publishes £49 per location with unlimited users. Youzse Garage Pro is £59. For a workshop with several technicians the arithmetic is the comparison, so this page does it properly. Written by Youzse. Both platforms publish a price, which makes this one of the few garage comparisons you can settle with a calculator rather than a sales call. ### The arithmetic, up front LaunchControl publishes £49 per location per month with unlimited users. Youzse Garage Pro publishes from £59 a month. On a single site, that is £10 a month between them, and LaunchControl is the cheaper one. Unlimited users is the part that matters more than the ten pounds. If you have six technicians who all need a login, per seat pricing anywhere else will pass £49 quickly. That is a genuine structural advantage and it is why the price is worth taking seriously rather than waving away. ### What LaunchControl puts in the box Workshop management, a technician app, a customer portal, a website builder, an AI assistant, free VRM lookups, repair times, service schedules, invoicing and parts ordering. Free VRM lookups are worth noticing on their own, because lookup allowances are a common way a low headline price grows. The LKQ ECP integration is the other specific thing. If LKQ Euro Car Parts is where your parts come from, ordering from inside the job rather than from a separate tab is a real saving in a busy week. If you buy from a local factor instead, that integration is worth nothing to you. ### Published against published | | LaunchControl | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | £49 per location per month | From £59 a month | | Users | Unlimited | Check plan for included users | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | VRM lookups | Free | Registration lookups included | | Parts ordering | LKQ ECP integration | Parts, suppliers and purchase orders per job | | Repair times and service schedules | Included | Not offered | | Technician app | Included | Works on tablet and phone | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | Wider business tools | Website builder and customer portal | Bookings, CRM, marketing and VAT across the Youzse platform | Both figures were read from each company's own published pricing on the date shown below. Check what a second location costs on either side before comparing single site prices. ### Where Youzse Garage Pro pulls ahead The difference is not the workshop. It is everything either side of it. Garage Pro sits on the wider Youzse platform, so the same system carries customer records, marketing, quotes, card payments at 2.5% plus 35p and MTD ready VAT returns, and the customer relationship is yours rather than a portal you rent. That matters if the garage is one part of a business, or if you want to stop running the workshop in one place and the money in another. If you only want the workshop bit to work well and cheaply, LaunchControl is doing that at £49. ### Settle it with these - How many people need a login today, and in a year? - Do you buy parts from LKQ Euro Car Parts, or a local factor? - Would your technicians actually use repair times and service schedules? - What does a second location cost on each system? - Where does card payment happen now, and what rate are you on? - Do you file your own VAT return? ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Is LaunchControl cheaper than Youzse Garage Pro? On a single site with several technicians, usually yes. LaunchControl publishes £49 per location with unlimited users against £59 for Garage Pro, and unlimited users is the bigger difference of the two. ### Does Youzse Garage Pro have LKQ ECP ordering? No. It handles parts, suppliers and purchase orders against a job, but there is no LKQ ECP integration. If that is where your parts come from, LaunchControl saves you steps we cannot. ### What does Youzse Garage Pro do that LaunchControl does not? It sits on the wider Youzse platform, so customer records, marketing, card payments at 2.5% plus 35p and MTD ready VAT returns are in the same system as the workshop, and the customer relationship belongs to you. --- ## Motasoft VGM or Youzse Garage Pro? Ask where bookings come from. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/motasoft-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Motasoft VGM leads with a cloud diary and online bookings. Both systems want to fill your diary, so the useful comparison is what happens to a job once it is in there. Written by Youzse. Motasoft does not publish a current official price, so none is quoted here. ### Both start in the same place Motasoft VGM is known for a cloud diary, online bookings, job management, customer reminders and workshop workflow. That is a close description of what Youzse Garage Pro does too, which is unusual in this market and means the comparison has to go deeper than a feature list. The split is what a booking turns into. Both will get a customer into the diary. The question is whether the system carries the job from there to a paid invoice without you chasing anything. ### Follow one job through A customer books online for a service. On the ramp you find the rear pads are gone. Now you need the customer to see it, agree to it and pay for it, and none of that is a diary problem. Youzse Garage Pro sends a quote with photos to their phone for approval, adds the parts to the job with a purchase order against the supplier, and takes payment by link at 2.5% plus 35p before the car is collected. The VAT return picks it up as MTD ready at the end of the quarter. That is the stretch to test on any demo. Getting the booking is the easy half. ### From booking to paid | | Motasoft VGM | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | No current official public price found | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Cloud diary | A core strength | Included | | Online bookings | A core strength | Included | | Customer reminders | Included | Automated MOT and service reminders | | Job management | Included | Included | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | | Parts and purchase orders | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Where Motasoft does not publish scope on a public page we have written check rather than guessing. Ask for the full monthly cost in writing. ### Test the whole journey, not the diary - Book a job as a customer would. How many steps, and does it work on a phone? - Add unexpected work mid job. How does the customer see and approve it? - Attach a photo to that approval. Can you? - Order a part against the job. Is there a purchase order behind it? - Take payment before collection. What does it cost you per transaction? - Produce the VAT return. Is it MTD ready or an export? ### Where each one lands If online booking volume is the thing you are missing and the rest of your process already works, Motasoft is aimed squarely at that and has the history behind it. If bookings are fine but jobs stall waiting for approval, parts go untracked and money arrives late, the diary is not your problem and a better diary will not fix it. Garage Pro is published at £59 a month with a 30 day trial and no card, so testing that costs nothing but the time. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Motasoft VGM cost? No current official public price was found, so none is quoted here. Ask for the full monthly cost including users, sites, SMS, setup and contract length. ### Do both do online booking? Yes. That is the unusual part of this comparison, and why it is worth testing what happens after the booking rather than comparing the diaries. ### What should I actually test on a demo? Adding unexpected work to a job that is already on the ramp. Getting it approved with a photo, ordering the part against it and taking payment before collection is where garage systems differ most. --- ## My Garage CRM or Youzse Garage Pro? Free migration is the hook. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/my-garage-crm-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 My Garage CRM publishes £139 a month with unlimited users and free data migration from many garage management systems. If you are trapped in an old system, that last part is the offer. Written by Youzse. Both platforms publish a price, so both figures on this page came from public pages. ### The offer is the migration My Garage CRM is known for an AI mechanic, unlimited users, support, onboarding and free data migration from many garage management systems. The migration is the part that changes decisions. Anyone who has tried to leave an established workshop system knows the real cost is not the subscription, it is fifteen years of customers, vehicles, job history and MOT due dates that you cannot get out cleanly. A supplier offering to do that for you is removing the actual barrier rather than discounting around it. We do not match that. Youzse Garage Pro has import tooling but there is no free hands on migration from any garage system you name, and pretending otherwise would not survive first contact. ### What it costs to take the offer My Garage CRM publishes from £139 a month. Youzse Garage Pro publishes from £59. That is £80 a month, or £960 a year, and it buys unlimited users, the onboarding and support, the AI mechanic and the migration. If you have a large team the unlimited users alone may cover a lot of that. If you are two people and a ramp, you are paying £960 a year mostly for a migration that happens once. That is the calculation, and it turns on how many logins you need rather than on features. ### Published against published | | My Garage CRM | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | From £139 a month | From £59 a month | | Users | Unlimited | Check plan for included users | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Data migration | Free from many garage systems | Import tooling, no free hands on migration | | Onboarding and support | Included in positioning | Included | | AI features | AI mechanic | Not offered | | MOT reminders and MOT history | Check plan and setup | Included | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Both figures were read from each company's own published pricing on the date shown below. Ask what free migration covers, which source systems are supported and how long it takes. ### If migration is why you are here - Which system are you leaving, and is it on their supported list? - Does the migration include job history and MOT due dates, or only customers and vehicles? - How long does it take, and what happens to the workshop in the meantime? - How many logins do you need? Unlimited users is worth more the bigger you are. - Have you asked your current supplier for a full export first? You may be less stuck than you think. - What is the contract length once the migration is done? ### The question to ask yourself first Before paying a premium for migration, ask your current supplier for a complete export. Customers, vehicles, job history, invoices, MOT due dates and notes. Plenty of workshops discover they can get out on their own, at which point the £80 a month difference is buying unlimited users and an AI assistant rather than an escape route. If the export comes back partial or does not come back at all, then free migration is worth exactly what it looks like and My Garage CRM is solving your real problem. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Does Youzse Garage Pro migrate my data for free? No. There is import tooling, but not free hands on migration from any garage system you name. My Garage CRM offers that and it is a genuine reason to pick them if you are stuck. ### Which is cheaper? Youzse Garage Pro, at from £59 a month against from £139. Whether that gap matters depends on how many logins you need, because My Garage CRM includes unlimited users. ### What should I do before paying for migration? Ask your current supplier for a full export of customers, vehicles, job history, invoices and MOT due dates. If you can get it yourself, you are not as trapped as the premium assumes. --- ## What quote only pricing means when you compare Phorest Source: https://youzse.app/compare/phorest-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Phorest keeps its four plan prices off the website and is candid that it runs demos rather than trials. This page is about buying well when the number only arrives at the end of a sales call. Phorest is one of the better known salon systems in the UK and Ireland, and it does not put a price on its website. Four plans are named Starter, Grow, Ultimate and Elite. Every button asks you to request a quote. There is no free trial either, and Phorest is unusually straight about why. It says it does not expect a busy owner to work the product out alone, so it offers a full demo instead. That is a real position rather than an evasion. It does change how you have to buy, and it means you cannot shortlist Phorest on price the way you can shortlist a supplier that publishes one. ### What quote only pricing actually does to a buyer A published price is a promise you can check on a Tuesday afternoon without speaking to anybody. A quote is a number produced for you, on a call, with your staff count and your plan mix sitting in front of a salesperson. Both can be perfectly fair. They simply put the work in different places. With a published price the supplier has already decided what you pay. With a quote, the outcome depends on how well you prepared for the conversation. The practical effect is sequencing. If you are comparing four systems and three of them publish, the Phorest figure arrives last and it arrives only after you have spent an hour of your working day. Budget for that. It also means the first time you can do a like for like sum is after the demo, so go into the demo with the sum already built and only the Phorest column empty. The absence of a trial has the same shape to it. Phorest puts it plainly: it does not offer a free trial and does not expect a busy owner to work it all out unaided, but it will take you through a full demo at a time that suits you. If you learn best by being shown, that is genuinely better than being dropped into an empty account. If you learn by poking at something at eleven at night with your own services and your own awkward double booking loaded in, it is worse, and only you know which of those you are. ### Twelve things to get in writing before you leave the demo - The monthly figure for your exact staff count, and whether it is charged per business or per user - Whether that figure is quoted including VAT or before VAT - Which of the four plans the figure covers, and what moving up a plan would add - Whether the price is fixed for the contract term or reviewed annually - The contract length, the notice period and whether the term renews automatically - Any setup, onboarding, data import or training charge, and whether it is a one off - The PhorestPay card rate as a percentage and a pence figure, because it is not published anywhere - Whether that card rate differs for consumer, business and international cards - SMS cost in pence per message for UK numbers, since the plans describe rates as affordable rather than stating them - What happens to your client records and booking history if you leave, and in which file format - Which features sit behind the Ultimate and Elite tiers, especially the branded client app and Ads Manager - Whether the quote expires, and what you would pay if you signed next month instead ### What each side publishes before you speak to anyone | | Phorest | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Headline price | Not published. Four plans named Starter, Grow, Ultimate and Elite, each with a request a quote button. No basis or VAT treatment is stated because no figure is given | From £19 a month, published. VAT treatment is set out on the Youzse pricing page rather than restated here | | Free trial | None. Phorest states this directly and offers a full demo at a time that suits you instead | 30 days, with no card required | | Card processing | PhorestPay exists and is powered by Stripe. The rate is not published, so it has to be asked for | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, with the platform fee inside that rate. This is higher than most rivals publish and we would rather you saw it now than later | | Commission on new clients | Phorest does not run a consumer marketplace, so it does not sell you leads | 0% commission on new clients who find your business through Youzse | | Included on every plan | Unlimited devices, unlimited staff and rates described as affordable SMS | Booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns | | Who it is built for | Growing salons and aesthetic clinics, described as perfect for three or more staff, so explicitly not solo | Solo professionals through to businesses running several sites, with Garage Pro for automotive | | How you reach a number | Request a quote, then take a demo | Read the price, start the trial, no call needed | Phorest details read from phorest.com on 7 August 2026. Suppliers change their pricing and their terms, so confirm anything here with Phorest directly before you sign. ### How to compare a quote against a published price When the quote lands, do not hold it against a headline. Hold total year one cost against total year one cost. Take the monthly figure, multiply by twelve, add VAT if the quote was given before VAT, add any onboarding or training charge, then add twelve months of card fees at the rate you were quoted. Build the same column for us. That is the only comparison that survives contact with your bank statement. Our number is the one that looks worse in the card fee row, and we would rather say so than let you find out. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p per transaction and the platform fee sits inside that rate rather than appearing as a separate line. Most rivals publish a lower card rate. If a large share of your takings arrives on cards, put your real monthly volume and your real average transaction value into that row, because the gap is money and it compounds over twelve months. On our side of the sum sits a software price you can read today starting at £19 a month, a 30 day trial that costs nothing and asks for no card, and 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse. Whether that beats a Phorest quote depends entirely on the quote, which is the honest answer and rather the point of this page. ### Where Phorest is the stronger choice - You want a branded client booking app in the App Store under your own salon name. Phorest offers this from the Ultimate tier and it is a genuinely hard thing to arrange yourself. - You want your Facebook and Instagram advertising run from inside the same system. Phorest Ads Manager, together with lead management, sits on the Elite tier. - You have three or more staff and you want a named person to call. Phorest includes a dedicated success manager from Grow upwards and aims squarely at growing salons and clinics. - You want onboarding handled for you. Setup, data import and full staff training are part of what Phorest includes rather than something you price up separately. - You want mature retail and loyalty. TreatCard, the online store, gift vouchers, the Shopify integration and Reserve with Google are all long established parts of the product. - You are comfortable buying from a demo. If a guided walkthrough suits your decision making better than an empty trial account, the lack of a trial costs you nothing at all. ### Why does Phorest not publish its prices? Phorest sells through a demo rather than a self serve sign up. The four plan names, Starter, Grow, Ultimate and Elite, are public. The figures are not, and every call to action asks you to request a quote. It is a sales model rather than a trick, but it does mean you cannot compare Phorest on price until you have had the conversation, so plan your shortlist around that. ### Does Phorest offer a free trial? No, and to its credit it says so on its own site rather than leaving you to discover it. Phorest explains that it does not expect a busy owner to work the product out unaided and offers a full demo at a time that suits you instead. Youzse takes the opposite view and gives you 30 days with no card required, which suits owners who prefer to load their own services and see what happens. ### What does PhorestPay charge to take a card payment? PhorestPay exists and is powered by Stripe, but the rate is not published, so ask for the percentage and the pence figure in writing during your demo, along with whether it changes for business or international cards. For your comparison column, Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p per transaction with the platform fee inside that rate, which is higher than most published rivals. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Phorest? We cannot tell you, because Phorest does not publish a number and we will not invent one. What we can tell you is our half of the comparison: from £19 a month, a 30 day trial with no card, 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, and a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p that is higher than most. Get the quote, run the year one sum, then decide. ### Can I move my client data from Phorest to Youzse? Client records, contact details and appointment history can be imported, so the practical question is what your current supplier will give you and in what format. Ask about export before you sign anything with anyone, including us. A supplier that will hand you a clean CSV of your own clients is telling you something useful about how it expects to keep your business. --- ## Work out what SalonIQ actually costs in year one Source: https://youzse.app/compare/saloniq-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 The figure you see first is £47 a month, but SalonIQ charges per bookable staff member, requires setup from £175 plus VAT and lists deposits, two way SMS, a branded app and card payments as chargeable extras. Here is the arithmetic laid out so you can find your own number rather than the headline one. A salon with four bookable staff is not paying £47. On SalonIQ's published ladder it is paying £87 a month for the software, plus setup from £175 plus VAT, plus whatever the extras come to, because online booking deposits and payments, two way SMS, a branded consumer app and integrated card payments are all listed as chargeable rather than included. None of that is hidden. It is set out on their own pricing page. It just does not add itself up for you, and the headline figure is the one that travels. So this page does the sum, states where our own pricing looks worse and leaves you with a method rather than a verdict. ### The shape of the ladder is the interesting part SalonIQ prices per bookable staff member. Solo is £47 a month. The second bookable person adds £20. Every step after that adds £10, up to £137 at eight or more, with fifteen or more quoted on application. Read that curve again, because the steepest step is the one from one person to two, and that is exactly the step a growing solo takes first. Hiring your first stylist costs you roughly 43 percent more in software before they have taken a single booking. The other thing worth pinning down is what the ladder counts. It counts bookable staff, so a receptionist or an apprentice who never appears in the diary may not move you up a rung. Ask them to confirm precisely where that line falls for your team, and ask what happens in a month when a chair sits empty. On a ladder this steep, the definition is worth real money over a year. VAT is not stated on the pricing page for the monthly figures. The setup fee is quoted plus VAT, which hints that the monthly prices are quoted the same way, but a hint is not a statement and you should not budget from one. Ask for the figure with VAT shown, then use that number in every sum below. ### The published ladder, and what twelve months of it comes to | Bookable staff | SalonIQ monthly, as last checked | Twelve months of software at that step | | --- | --- | --- | | 1, solo | £47, charged per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £564. VAT treatment not stated | | 2 | £67, per bookable staff member, so the second person adds £20. VAT treatment not stated | £804. VAT treatment not stated | | 3 | £77, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £924. VAT treatment not stated | | 4 | £87, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £1,044. VAT treatment not stated | | 5 | £97, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £1,164. VAT treatment not stated | | 6 | £107, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £1,284. VAT treatment not stated | | 7 | £117, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £1,404. VAT treatment not stated | | 8 or more | £137, per bookable staff member. VAT treatment not stated | £1,644. VAT treatment not stated | | 15 or more | Price on application, so no figure and no VAT treatment is published | Not published | | Youzse for comparison | From £19 a month, charged per business. VAT treatment is set out on the Youzse pricing page | From £228, with VAT treatment as shown on the Youzse pricing page | SalonIQ figures are taken from their own published pricing as last checked on 19 March 2026. When we tried again on 7 August 2026 saloniq.com did not respond, from two separate networks, so treat every figure here as last known rather than certainly current and confirm it with SalonIQ directly. The twelve month column is the monthly price alone. It excludes setup, extras, hardware and card fees. ### Then add setup, because it is not optional SalonIQ states that initial setup is required for all packages, and that setup fees may apply starting from £175 plus VAT. Read both halves of that sentence carefully. Required is doing the work in the first half. Starting from is doing the work in the second. So a four staff salon on £87 a month is looking at £1,044 of software and at least £175 plus VAT before a single client has booked anything. In fairness, that fee buys real labour. Setup covers install, unlimited online training, data build or migration and the configuration of your pricing, your services and your team. If you are coming off paper, or off a system that is holding fifteen years of client history hostage, having somebody else do the migration has genuine value and plenty of owners would rather pay than lose three evenings to a spreadsheet. What you want before you sign is the actual setup quote for your salon, not the from figure. Ask what pushes it above £175. Ask whether it scales with staff count or with the volume of data you are bringing across. Then put that real number in your year one column, not the smallest one on the page. ### The extras SalonIQ lists separately, so price every one you actually need - Onsite training, as distinct from the unlimited online training that comes with setup - Two way SMS, so clients can reply to a reminder rather than just receive it - A branded consumer app under your own salon name - Online booking deposits and payments, which is the feature that protects you against no shows - An e shop, if you sell retail online - Integrated card payments through IQ Pay, where no rate is published and the call to action is a free rate check - Hardware, including whatever you need on the front desk - Anything at fifteen or more bookable staff, which moves to price on application ### Where SalonIQ earns its price - IQ Connect is an AI receptionist that picks up missed calls and enquiries around the clock and books appointments. If you lose bookings because nobody can reach the phone while three clients are mid service, that is a direct answer to a problem you actually have. - Multiple sites are handled properly, with centralised reporting and shared client data. If you run two or three salons and a client should be recognised at any of them, this is built for exactly that. - Integrated eCommerce with product recommendation puts retail inside the same system as the diary, which is more than a lot of salon software manages. - It was founded by salon owners and is based in Tunbridge Wells, trading as Intelligent Salon Software Ltd. UK support in UK hours, from people who have run a salon, is worth something on a Saturday morning. - Setup includes data build or migration and unlimited online training. For an owner with years of client history and no appetite for importing it themselves, that is the part of the deal that justifies the fee. ### Where Youzse costs you more, plainly Our card rate is higher than most. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p per transaction and the platform fee sits inside that rate rather than being billed to you separately. SalonIQ does not publish an IQ Pay rate, so we cannot put the two figures side by side honestly. What we can say is that if you take their free rate check and it comes back below 2.5% plus 35p, that is a real point in their favour and it belongs in your sum rather than in a footnote. So use your own volume. Take your monthly card takings and your average transaction value, work out what 2.5% plus 35p costs you across a year, and add it to our software price. Then do the same with whatever rate SalonIQ quotes you, their ladder step for your headcount, their setup quote and the extras you genuinely need. One of those two totals will be smaller, and it will not be the same one for every salon. A busy six chair salon taking mostly cards weighs that differently from a solo therapist with a low transaction count. On our side of the sum sits pricing you can read right now from £19 a month, a 30 day free trial with no card required, and 0% commission on new clients who find your business through Youzse. Booking, deposits, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns come as part of the platform rather than as a list of extras to price up one by one. Whether that wins on your numbers is a question only your numbers can answer, and you can start the trial and find out without booking a demo first. ### How much does SalonIQ cost for a salon with four staff? On the published ladder as last checked it is £87 a month for four bookable staff, which is £1,044 over twelve months, with VAT treatment not stated on their page. Add setup from £175 plus VAT, then add any of the chargeable extras you need such as deposits and online payments, two way SMS or a branded app. saloniq.com was unreachable when we tried on 7 August 2026, so confirm the current figures with them directly. ### Why does the second staff member cost more than the third? That is how the published ladder is built. Solo is £47, two staff is £67, so the second person adds £20, and every step after that adds £10 until you reach £137 at eight or more. Fifteen or more is price on application. It means the moment a solo professional takes on their first colleague is the moment the software bill jumps hardest, which is worth knowing if you are about to hire. ### Does SalonIQ have a free trial? No. The call to action is Book Demo, and initial setup is required for all packages, so the route in is a conversation followed by a paid setup rather than a self serve trial. Youzse works the other way round with 30 days free and no card required, which suits owners who would rather test with their own services and staff before speaking to anybody. ### What does IQ Pay charge compared with Youzse? IQ Pay exists but no rate is published, and their call to action invites you to get a free rate check, so the only way to find out is to ask them. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p per transaction with the platform fee inside that rate. That is higher than most rivals publish, so if card takings are a big part of your revenue you should treat the rate as a serious line in your comparison rather than a rounding error. --- ## A Salonized alternative that is not owned by a marketplace Source: https://youzse.app/compare/salonized-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Salonized takes cards more cheaply than we do and we will say so first. What it cannot offer is booking software with no marketplace owner sitting behind it. Salonized is owned by Treatwell. That is not a criticism, it is the most important fact about the product, and it shapes everything below. Start with the part that does not flatter us. Salonized publishes a card rate of 1% on standard domestic cards excluding VAT, and Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside that rate. On a single transaction they are cheaper and there is no argument to be had about it. The argument worth having is about where your clients come from, who introduces them and what that introduction costs you. Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients, and it is not owned by a company that sells introductions for a living. ### The software and the marketplace have the same owner Salonized is a Dutch business and its site footer reads Treatwell Salonized NL B.V. Treatwell is a booking marketplace. The integration between the two is a native feature rather than a third party add on, which is genuinely convenient if you want marketplace volume. It also means the diary you run your business in and the marketplace that sells introductions to your business are built by the same company. Two things need saying plainly before anyone quotes a scary percentage. Salonized does not take a cut of the bookings you take yourself, and the Treatwell channel is something you switch on rather than something you are forced into. If you never enable it you never pay it, and the subscription is a subscription in the ordinary way. The published Treatwell terms are 35% commission on new Treatwell bookings plus a 2% transaction fee on prepaid online bookings. That is a marketplace acquisition fee, not a platform fee on your own work. Treatwell is charging for finding you a client you did not have, which is a legitimate thing to charge for. The question is what happens to your margin if that channel quietly becomes the way most new clients arrive, and how easily you can move those clients onto your own booking page afterwards. ### What each one costs before any marketplace fee | | Salonized | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Entry price | £50 a month for one team member. The Salonized pricing page does not state whether this includes or excludes VAT. | From £19 a month. VAT treatment is set out on the Youzse pricing page rather than here. | | Extra team members | £4 a month for each additional team member. Verified at two for £54, three for £58, five for £66 and ten for £86. VAT treatment not stated on their pricing page. | Tier prices and their VAT treatment are published on the Youzse pricing page. | | Free trial | 14 days, no card required and no setup fee. | 30 days, no card required. | | Card rate | 1% on standard domestic cards and 2.5% on premium international or business cards, both stated excluding VAT. Processor is Adyen and payouts can be as fast as next day. | 2.5% plus 35p a transaction with the platform fee inside that rate. Higher than the Salonized standard domestic rate. VAT treatment not stated here. | | Marketplace fee | Treatwell integration is a native feature. Treatwell's published terms are 35% commission on new Treatwell bookings plus a 2% transaction fee on prepaid online bookings. | 0% commission on new clients who find you through the Youzse marketplace, and no transaction fee on top of the card rate. | Salonized figures read from salonized.com on 7 August 2026. Their subscription pricing page does not state its VAT treatment, so we have not assumed either way. Their Salonized Pay page states card rates excluding VAT. Terminals are published as a one off from 199 euros excluding VAT with no price in pounds. ### Run the numbers on one new client Take a £60 treatment as an example. Booked as a new Treatwell booking at the published 35%, the fee is £21. If that booking is prepaid online, the 2% transaction fee adds £1.20 on the same £60. One introduction at that level costs more than a whole month of Youzse at £19. The same £60 taken through your own Youzse booking page carries 0% commission on new clients. You still pay to accept the card, and here is where we lose. Youzse at 2.5% plus 35p is £1.85 on that £60, where 1% on a standard domestic card through Salonized Pay is 60p excluding VAT. Per transaction, Salonized is the cheaper place to take money and nothing on this page changes that. So the two products are not close on card cost, and they are not close on acquisition cost either, in opposite directions. The number that decides it is how many of your clients arrive through a marketplace. If the honest answer is almost none, buy on features and card rate, and Salonized has a strong case. If the answer is a meaningful share of your new business, the acquisition fee becomes the largest number on your monthly statement and the subscription is a rounding error next to it. One caution before you model this yourself. Treatwell's published terms describe new Treatwell bookings, so read their current terms for how a returning client is treated rather than taking a figure from a comparison page. We have not assumed anything we cannot verify. Worth adding to your model too: Salonized SMS is bought as separate credits at £0.13 down to £0.09 each depending on volume, so reminders sit on top of the subscription. ### Reasons to choose Salonized rather than Youzse - You can sign up, take a 14 day trial and get going without a card, a setup fee or a conversation with a salesperson - One plan with no upgrade gating. The newsletter builder, dynamic pricing, last minute discounts, the automatic waiting list, loyalty points, gift cards, two way Google Calendar sync and the mini website are all in it - 1% on standard domestic cards excluding VAT is cheaper per transaction than anything Youzse charges - Adyen sits behind Salonized Pay and payouts can arrive as fast as the next day - No contracts, no setup fees and zero start up costs, in their own published words - You actively want Treatwell volume and you are content to pay an acquisition fee to get it ### Where Youzse is the better buy Youzse is built in the UK for UK businesses and starts at £19 a month, with a 30 day free trial that does not ask for a card. Youzse does list businesses so new clients can find them, and charges 0% commission on the new clients it brings you rather than taking a share of the first booking. The scope is wider than a salon calendar. Bookings, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns sit in one subscription, so the client record and the money record are the same record. If you have been running a diary in one product and invoicing in another, that is the part that changes your week rather than your card rate. Salonized serves continental Europe first. A UK support line exists, but the product carries no UK specific locale and its terminal pricing is published in euros with no price in pounds. If VAT returns, UK invoicing and pounds are the daily reality of your admin, weigh that alongside the percentage. ### Is Salonized the same company as Treatwell? Salonized is owned by Treatwell. Its site footer reads Treatwell Salonized NL B.V. The Treatwell marketplace integration is a native feature of the software rather than a connector from a separate vendor, which is why the ownership question is worth asking before you commit your client list. ### Does Salonized take a cut of my bookings? Not of the bookings you take yourself. Its subscription is £50 a month for one team member with £4 a month for each additional one, and the pricing page does not state whether that includes VAT. The 35% figure people quote is the published Treatwell fee, which is 35% commission on new Treatwell bookings plus a 2% transaction fee on prepaid online bookings, and it applies to the marketplace channel. ### Is Youzse cheaper for taking card payments? No. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside that rate. Salonized publishes 1% on standard domestic cards and 2.5% on premium international or business cards, both excluding VAT. On card cost per transaction Salonized wins, and any honest comparison has to start there. ### What does 0% commission on new clients actually mean? When somebody books you for the first time through Youzse, Youzse does not take a percentage of that booking as a fee for the introduction. You still pay the card rate on money you take and you still pay your subscription from £19 a month, so it is a pricing model rather than a promise about your total costs. --- ## A Schedulista alternative published in pounds Source: https://youzse.app/compare/schedulista-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Schedulista publishes in US dollars and supports you Monday to Friday on Pacific time, which is simply what buying a US product from the UK looks like. This page sets out what it publishes, what it is genuinely good at and where a scheduler stops. Schedulista prices in US dollars and labels it as such on its own pricing page: 19 dollars a month for one person and 39 dollars a month for anywhere between two and fifteen staff. Support runs Monday to Friday, 9 to 5 Pacific time, on a US toll free number. Neither of those is a criticism. They are just the shape of running a UK business on a US product, and for plenty of businesses they never cause a moment's trouble. What follows is what each company publishes, what Schedulista does better than most and what a scheduler does not do once money starts moving in more than one direction. ### Published pricing, in the currency each company published it | | Schedulista | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | One person | 19 USD per month, billed per business for a single person, VAT treatment not stated | £19 per month in GBP, entry plan, billed per business, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | Small team | 39 USD per month, flat for anywhere from 2 to 15 staff, VAT treatment not stated | GBP plans rising above £19 per month by feature set | | Larger team | More than 15 staff is custom and the price is not published | GBP pricing published on the Youzse pricing page rather than quoted | | Free trial | 15 days | 30 days, no card required | | Card rate | Not published. Schedulista resells Stripe but publishes no rate of its own | 2.5% plus 35p in GBP per transaction, with the platform fee inside that rate | | Support hours | Monday to Friday, 9 to 5 Pacific time, on a US toll free number | UK platform, so the clock and the currency are UK by default | Taken from schedulista.com on 7 August 2026. We do not convert USD into GBP, so a like for like price comparison is not possible on this page. Where VAT treatment is not stated by the publisher we say so rather than assume it. ### What a scheduler is, and what it is not Schedulista is a scheduler and it is honest about being one. There is no POS, no hardware, no stock and no marketplace. If your business is you, a diary and a phone that rings, that is a clean fit, and the extra machinery a bigger platform brings would only get in the way. The question is what happens after the booking. A scheduler books the appointment. It does not hold a deposit against a no show, raise the quote before the work, issue the invoice after it, chase the payment, keep client history in a form you can market from, run a loyalty scheme or a membership, sell a gift card or produce your VAT return. Each of those arrives as a separate tool, with a separate bill, a separate login and a reconciliation job joining them together. Youzse is built the other way round: one system covering booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns across more than 60 trades. That is a bigger surface to learn and it is more software than a solo diary needs. It earns its place at the point where the diary stops being the whole job. ### Where Schedulista is genuinely strong - Free unlimited SMS reminders, stated as included rather than metered. Most platforms meter SMS, so this is unusual and it is worth real money if you send a lot of them. - Flat all in pricing with no feature gating, so the thing you need is not sitting one tier up. - Band pricing rather than per user pricing. A team of fifteen pays the same 39 dollars a month as a team of two. - In their own words, flat fee, no setup charges, all features included. - Two way Google Calendar sync, plus Outlook, iPhone and Android sync. - Localised for several languages and workable internationally, even though it is a US product. ### Running the week - Reminders. Schedulista includes free unlimited SMS reminders in the plan. Youzse has reminders and notifications built in but makes no unlimited SMS claim, so ask us to price your volume rather than assume it. - Taking money. Schedulista has no POS and publishes no card rate of its own. Youzse takes card payments at 2.5% plus 35p in GBP, with deposits at booking and invoices on completion. - Team size. Schedulista covers 2 to 15 staff on one flat price, with above 15 unpublished. Youzse starts at £19 a month and steps up with what the business needs. - Currency. Schedulista publishes in USD and labels it as such. Youzse publishes in GBP throughout. - Support clock. Schedulista runs Monday to Friday, 9 to 5 Pacific time. Youzse is a UK platform working to UK time. - Scope. Schedulista is pure scheduling with no POS, hardware or marketplace. Youzse runs booking through to VAT returns, with 0% commission on new clients. ### Where Youzse costs more, and where we will not guess Start with what we refuse to do. Schedulista publishes in US dollars and Youzse publishes in pounds. Converting one into the other gives you a number that moves daily and quietly hides whatever your card issuer adds, so both stay in the currency their owner published. What we can say is this. Schedulista holds one price across a whole band, so a fifteen person team pays what a two person team pays. Youzse does not work that way. Youzse starts at £19 a month and moves up with the plan, so a growing team pays more than the entry price. For a business that only ever wanted a diary, Youzse will be both the more expensive and the more complicated choice, and you should not buy it. The trade is scope. Youzse publishes one card rate in pounds at 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside it, charges 0% commission on new clients and gives you 30 days to test it with no card required, against 15 days at Schedulista. If all you need is a calendar and reminders, that scope is overhead you will resent. If you are holding deposits, issuing invoices and filing VAT, it is the entire reason to move. ### Can I pay Schedulista in pounds? Their pricing is published and labelled in US dollars, at 19 dollars a month for one person and 39 dollars a month for two to fifteen staff. We will not convert those into pounds for you, because the rate moves and your card issuer may add its own charge on top. Youzse publishes in pounds from £19 a month, so the number you read is the number you budget. ### What will card payments cost me on Schedulista? They do not publish a rate. Schedulista resells Stripe, but no rate of their own appears on their pricing page, and we are not going to put Stripe's published rates in their mouth. Ask them in writing before you commit. Youzse publishes 2.5% plus 35p per transaction in pounds, with the platform fee inside that rate. ### Is the free unlimited SMS claim real? It is what they publish, and it is stated as included rather than metered, which is genuinely uncommon in this market. If reminder volume is your biggest running cost, that single fact may settle the question in their favour. Youzse makes no unlimited SMS claim, so the fair thing is to ask us to price your actual volume rather than assume parity. ### What am I really giving up by staying on a scheduler? Nothing at all, if booking is the whole job. You start giving something up when the diary becomes only the first step: deposits held against no shows, quotes before the work and invoices after it, client history you can market from, loyalty, memberships, gift cards, consultation forms and the VAT return. Each of those becomes another subscription and another set of numbers to reconcile at month end. --- ## The Setora alternative for shops that outgrow the calendar Source: https://youzse.app/compare/setora-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 10, 2026 Setora charges one flat fee per location with unlimited staff, which is a clean model and a fair one. This page works out where flat per location beats a business wide subscription and where it does not. Two numbers frame this comparison. Setora is £39 a month per location with unlimited staff and no seat fees. Youzse starts at £19 a month for the business with extra locations from £15 a month. Everything else follows from how many people work in your shop and how many shops you run. Setora is an independent UK product from Setora Technology Ltd, Companies House number 17025958, established in 2026 and aimed at independent barbershops and salons. It does one job and it is upfront about the edges of that job, which is rarer than it should be. ### Per location or per business, and where the difference lands Setora's model has a real virtue. A single site with ten barbers pays the same £39 a month as a single site with two, because seats are not charged. Anyone who has watched a per seat product punish them for hiring will recognise how much that is worth. Their site notes that prices shown exclude VAT where applicable, so budget £46.80 rather than £39 once VAT lands. The model turns at the second site. Multi location is charged per site, so two shops is £78 a month before VAT and three is £117. Youzse charges for the business and adds locations from £15 a month without a plan upgrade, which is the shape that suits an owner running two or three sites off one client list, one report and one set of numbers. So the honest rule is this. One busy site, a big team and nothing complicated around the calendar is exactly where Setora is priced well. Several sites, or one site that needs quotes, invoices, memberships or VAT returns as well as bookings, is where a business wide subscription starts to look better value. ### The monthly maths at different shapes of business | | Setora | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo owner, one site | £39 a month per location, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month per business, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | Team of six, one site | £39 a month per location with unlimited staff, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month per business with the team included | | Two sites | £78 a month, charged per site, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month per business plus extra locations from £15 a month | | Card payments | Stripe's rate charged at cost with no Setora markup. Setora publishes no rate figure of its own and states no VAT treatment for card processing | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction with our platform fee inside the rate, which is higher than Setora | | Text messaging | Billed separately, pay as you go or an optional SMS subscription | Messaging is managed inside the subscription with SMS and WhatsApp channels available | | Free trial | 14 days, no card required | 30 days, no card required | | Booking charges | Setora states it takes no booking commission of its own | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse | Setora figures taken from setora.co.uk on 10 August 2026, where the site states that prices shown exclude VAT where applicable. That statement covers the subscription. Setora states no VAT treatment for card processing and publishes no card rate of its own, so none is quoted here. Because nothing of theirs sits on top of Stripe, their card cost is lower than the Youzse card cost. ### Card processing, where Setora is more transparent than us Setora does not mark up card processing. Their pricing page states that Stripe processing is charged at Stripe's rate with no Setora markup when you use Setora payment tools, and their booking protection page goes further, saying they add no platform fee and no markup on top of Stripe, that you pay Stripe's standard processing fee at cost and that you pay it only when a card is actually charged. They publish no rate figure of their own, so the number to hold them to is whatever Stripe charges you. That is more transparent than what Youzse does and it deserves saying out loud rather than skipping past. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p with our platform fee built into that one number. Our reasoning is that a single rate is easier to forecast than a processor rate plus a platform charge you reconcile later, and it is the rate that funds 0% commission on new clients who arrive through Youzse. That reasoning does not change the arithmetic. Look up Stripe's current published rate for the card types you actually take, set it against our 2.5% plus 35p and multiply the gap by your monthly transaction count before you decide anything. Setora will come out cheaper on cards, because we add to the processor rate and they do not. One thing to add to the Setora side of the ledger when you compare. Their text messaging is billed separately, either pay as you go or on an optional subscription, so a busy shop sending reminders should add that to the £39 before calling it a flat fee. ### Where Setora is genuinely strong - Flat pricing per location with unlimited staff and no seat fees - Card processing passed through at Stripe's published rate with no markup of their own - Migration and import tooling for moving off another system - Customer data export, with their site stating that shop owners own their data - A 14 day trial with no card required - An independent UK product focused on barbershops and salons rather than everything at once ### The list Setora publishes of what it does not do - No client facing mobile app - No payment terminal integration - No WhatsApp messaging - No self check in - No booking links for individual staff - No Xero or QuickBooks connection - No marketplace or directory to bring you new clients ### Side by side on the points that usually decide it - Setora: £39 a month per site, exclusive of VAT, with unlimited staff, so one large single site team is very well served. Against that, Youzse: From £19 a month for the business, with extra locations from £15 a month for multi site owners. - Setora: Card processing at Stripe's rate with no markup of their own, which is cheaper than Youzse per transaction. Against that, Youzse: Card processing at 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside it, which is the higher rate and the trade for 0% commission on new clients. - Setora: Booking, calendar and client records built tightly around barbershops and salons. Against that, Youzse: Booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and UK VAT returns across more than 60 trades. - Setora: No marketplace or directory, so every client has to be one you already found. Against that, Youzse: Listed in the Youzse marketplace with 0% commission on the new clients it brings you. - Setora: No WhatsApp and text messaging billed on top of the subscription. Against that, Youzse: SMS, WhatsApp and email reminders driven from one set of templates. - Setora: 14 day trial with no card required. Against that, Youzse: 30 day trial with no card required. ### Setora is a flat £39. Is Youzse actually cheaper? For one site, compare £39 a month plus VAT, which is £46.80, with Youzse from £19 a month, and add your messaging costs to the Setora side because their SMS is billed separately. For two sites, Setora is £78 a month before VAT while Youzse charges for the business plus extra locations from £15 a month. Where Setora wins clearly is a single site carrying a very large team and heavy card volume, because they add nothing on top of Stripe and we do, so the card cost on their side is lower than ours. ### Are Setora's card rates better than Youzse? Yes, and the way they do it is more transparent too. Setora charges Stripe processing at Stripe's rate with no markup of their own, and they publish no rate figure themselves, so look up Stripe's current published rate for the card types you take and compare it against our 2.5% plus 35p. Youzse puts our platform fee inside that single number. We prefer one predictable rate that funds 0% commission on new clients arriving through Youzse, but on a per transaction basis Setora is the cheaper option because nothing of theirs sits on top of the processor, and you should work out the difference on your own monthly volume. ### What might I miss on Setora later? Setora publishes its own list, which we would rather quote than characterise. There is no client facing mobile app, no payment terminal integration, no WhatsApp, no self check in, no per staff booking links, no Xero or QuickBooks connection and no marketplace or directory. Treat it as a compatibility check. If none of those seven matter to how you work, Setora is a clean fit at a keen price. ### Can I get my data out of Youzse if I leave? Yes. Setora make a point of shop owners owning their data and they are right to. Youzse gives you export of client records, bookings and financial history, and our import tooling brings the same data in when you arrive. The 30 day trial runs with no card required, so you can test the import before anything is committed. --- ## The Slick alternative that prices the business, not the chair Source: https://youzse.app/compare/slick-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Slick is the closest product to Youzse in the UK, so this page sticks to published numbers rather than claims. Slick is cheaper than us on every card rate they publish, and the software maths turns entirely on how many columns you run. Slick is the product Youzse gets compared with most often, and for good reason. Both are built in the UK, both handle booking, payments and the day to day running of a service business, and neither is a marketplace that rents your existing clients back to you. So this page does the boring thing and works the numbers instead of the adjectives. One conclusion is worth putting at the top rather than burying at the bottom: on card processing Slick is cheaper than Youzse on every published line. If card takings are the bulk of your revenue, start your sums there. ### What the monthly software bill looks like as the team grows | | Slick | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | 1 column or 1 chair | Essential £20 a month, Advanced £35 a month, priced per column, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month for the whole business, VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page | | 3 columns | Essential £44 a month, Advanced £71 a month, priced per column, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month for the whole business, VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page | | 6 columns | Essential £80 a month, Advanced £125 a month, priced per column, exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month for the whole business, VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page | | 10 columns | Essential £128 a month, Advanced £197 a month, or Supercharged £219 a month for unlimited columns, all exclusive of VAT | From £19 a month for the whole business, VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page | | A second site | Charged by the columns you add at that site, exclusive of VAT | Extra locations from £15 a month, VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page | Slick figures taken from getslick.com on 7 August 2026 and calculated from their published rates of £20 plus £12 per additional column on Essential and £35 plus £18 per additional column on Advanced. Their pricing page states that prices are exclusive of VAT which is applied at the standard rates, so add 20% before comparing with the Youzse column. ### Where the column model starts to bite Slick prices by column, which is the slot on the diary rather than the salon. That keeps the entry price genuinely low for one chair, and it is easy to understand, which is more than can be said for a lot of software pricing. The trade off is that growth carries a price. A fourth chair, a Saturday junior or a room you rent to a self employed therapist all arrive on the invoice. The steps are steady until they are not. On Advanced, six columns lands at £125 a month before VAT and ten columns at £197 before VAT, at which point Supercharged at £219 a month for unlimited columns starts to look sensible. That is a large jump for a shop that has just taken on its tenth pair of hands, and it is the moment most people go looking for alternatives. None of this is a flaw. It is a pricing philosophy, and it suits a shop with a stable diary and a fixed number of chairs. It just means there is no single answer to which product is cheaper. There is only an answer for the shape of your team this month and the shape you expect next year. ### Card rates compared, where Slick wins | | Slick | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | In person card payment | 1.29% per transaction, exclusive of VAT | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, platform fee included in the rate | | Tap to Pay on phone | 1.29% plus 15p per transaction, exclusive of VAT | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, platform fee included in the rate | | Online payments and deposits | 2.17% plus 27p per transaction, exclusive of VAT | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, platform fee included in the rate | Slick card rates taken from getslick.com on 7 August 2026, stated there as exclusive of VAT, with terminal hardware listed at £179 and custom rates available above £10,000 a month in processing. Slick is cheaper than Youzse on every line in this table. The Youzse rate carries our platform fee inside the single number, which is exactly why the headline figure is higher. ### Genuine reasons to choose Slick - Lower card rates than Youzse across in person, Tap to Pay and online payments - Automated SMS reminders included on every plan, which matters if you send a lot of them - Next day payouts on card takings - Staff KPI and reporting built around chair by chair performance - A focused UK hair, barber and beauty tool with L'Oreal investment behind it since 2017 and a stated 10,000 UK pros using it - Not a marketplace, so your client relationships stay entirely your own - Contracts are not locked in and their pricing page states there are no set up costs ### Where Youzse is the better fit Youzse charges for the business rather than the diary. One subscription from £19 a month covers the team however many chairs you fill. For a growing shop that removes the small tax on hiring. The second difference is everything sitting around the calendar. Youzse covers booking, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and UK VAT returns, and it runs across more than 60 trades rather than hair and beauty alone. If you have a salon plus a mobile arm, or a studio that also sells courses, or a mixed operation that a salon tool was never designed for, that breadth decides it faster than any price table. The third is where new clients come from. Youzse lists you where people are searching, and there is 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse and book. Slick is not a marketplace, so it makes no claim here at all. This is a difference in what the two products are, not a scoring point against them. Set against that, our card rate is higher and there is no polite way to dress it up. If most of your revenue arrives as a card tap in the chair, Slick's 1.29% will beat 2.5% plus 35p once volume builds. The honest method is simple. Take your monthly card takings, work out the difference in processing, add 20% VAT to whichever Slick plan matches your column count, then compare the two totals. If Slick wins on your numbers, use Slick. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Slick? It depends on your column count and on VAT. One chair on Slick Essential is £20 a month before VAT, which is close to Youzse at £19 a month. Six columns on Slick Advanced is £125 a month before VAT, or £150 with VAT added, against one Youzse subscription for the same team. The more chairs you run, the wider the gap gets in our favour on software. Card processing pushes the other way, so compare both together. ### Which is cheaper on card payments? Slick, on every published rate. They quote 1.29% in person, 1.29% plus 15p for Tap to Pay and 2.17% plus 27p online, all exclusive of VAT. Youzse is 2.5% plus 35p with our platform fee inside that single figure. We would rather say that plainly than hide it in a footnote. ### What counts as a column on Slick? A column is a bookable slot on the diary, which in practice means a chair, a room or a staff member. Essential is £20 a month for the first column and £12 for each additional one. Advanced is £35 for the first and £18 for each additional one. Supercharged is £219 a month for unlimited columns and is aimed at teams of ten or more. All figures are exclusive of VAT. ### Does Youzse charge per staff member? No. The subscription covers the business and the team on it, starting from £19 a month. Additional locations start at £15 a month without a plan upgrade. ### Can I bring my client list across from Slick? Yes. Youzse has an import wizard for client records and appointment history, and you can export your data again at any time. Run the trial alongside Slick for 30 days with no card required, so nothing switches off until you are satisfied it works. --- ## The Solo alternative for when solo stops being solo Source: https://youzse.app/compare/solo-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Solo is booking software from Secret Spa, priced per professional and built for people working on their own. This page is about the point where that model stops fitting, and where Solo is simply the better buy. Most comparison pages pretend the rival is a compromise. Solo is not. It is a focused product for self employed hair, beauty and wellness professionals in the UK and Australia, it is priced per professional, and it does the things a one person business actually needs rather than a shrunk down version of salon software. It is also the only product in this comparison set that quotes VAT inclusive, and we think that is worth more credit than it usually gets. The question worth asking is not which product is better. It is what happens on the day you take on a second pair of hands. ### What Solo gets right, and gets right properly Start with the pricing honesty. Solo states that VAT is included in all of the prices. Website Only is £20 a month and Website & Booking System is £30 a month, and those are the amounts that leave the account. When a rival quotes £30 before VAT it is really £36, and for a sole trader watching every standing order that difference is the sort of thing that sours a relationship in month one. Solo has removed the argument entirely. The product has real substance behind the price. The Google optimised website builder and SEO setup are treated as the core of the offer rather than a bolted on extra, which suits someone whose next booking depends on being found locally. Consultation forms attach to bookings, which matters for treatments that need a record. The calendar calculates travel time between mobile appointments, which is the single feature most desk bound salon products get wrong for a mobile pro. Data transfer and expert training are free, there is a 30 day trial with no card needed, you can cancel at any time, and there is a 50% discount in the first year for professionals doing under 20 bookings a month. There is one more thing to weigh honestly. Solo comes from Secret Spa, a vetted UK marketplace for mobile beauty professionals, and Solo is stated to be free for Secret Spa pros. Access to Secret Spa runs through a recruitment process rather than a signup form, so it is not open to everyone. If you are already accepted onto it, your software question may be answered before you start comparing anything. ### The moment a second pair of hands arrives | | Solo | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Software for one professional | Website Only £20 a month or Website & Booking System £30 a month, VAT included in the price shown | From £19 a month for the business, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | Software for three professionals | Priced per professional, so the monthly cost scales with each pro you add, VAT included in the price shown | From £19 a month for the business with the team included | | Visa and Mastercard | 1.6% plus 30p per transaction | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction with the platform fee inside the rate, which is higher than Solo | | American Express | 3.3% plus 30p per transaction | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction, the same rate across card types | | Free trial | 30 days, no card needed, cancel anytime, with 50% off in year one for pros doing under 20 bookings a month | 30 days, no card required | | Add ons and one off costs | Education Hub £20 a month. Google Boost £200, Website Build £250 and SEO Setup from £100 as one off services. Data transfer and expert training free | Import tooling and guided setup are part of the subscription | Solo figures taken from booksolo.co on 7 August 2026, where the site states that VAT is included in all of the prices. Confirm with Solo how additional professionals are charged before budgeting for a team. ### Five questions worth answering before you commit either way - Will you still be working alone in eighteen months, or is a second chair likely - How much of your revenue arrives on Visa and Mastercard, where Solo's 1.6% plus 30p beats our 2.5% plus 35p - Do you need a website built and ranking, or do you already have one that works - Do you need quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards or UK VAT returns, or only a diary and payments - Are you eligible for Secret Spa, given that Solo is stated to be free for pros accepted onto it ### Where Youzse costs more, and where it earns it back Cards first, because that is where we lose. Solo quotes 1.6% plus 30p on Visa and Mastercard against our 2.5% plus 35p. On a £60 treatment that is £1.26 against £1.85, a gap of about 60p a booking. We are lower on American Express, where Solo quotes 3.3% plus 30p and our single rate does not change by card type, but Amex is a small slice of most UK beauty takings so the balance sits with Solo. If you take card payments all day and need nothing beyond a diary, Solo is the cheaper way to run. What Youzse buys instead is room to grow without repricing. One subscription from £19 a month covers the business as the team expands, so a second stylist, a rented room or an apprentice does not change the monthly figure. Around the calendar you get deposits, no show fees, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, consultation forms and UK VAT returns, and it works across more than 60 trades. Solo is deliberately narrower than that, and for a single mobile pro narrower is often correct. The last difference is where the work comes from. Solo's answer is a website that ranks and, for those accepted onto it, the Secret Spa marketplace. Youzse lists you where people search and charges 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse and book, so growth does not come with a cut taken off the top. Both are legitimate routes. One depends on being found by search, the other on being found in a directory that does not tax the introduction. Our recommendation, plainly. If you are a single mobile professional whose main gap is a website that ranks, Solo is the better buy and the VAT inclusive pricing makes it easy to budget. If you expect a team, several revenue lines or the paperwork that comes with VAT registration, Youzse is built for that shape and the 30 day trial with no card required costs nothing to test alongside what you already run. ### Is Solo cheaper than Youzse for one person? It is close. Solo is £20 a month for Website Only and £30 a month for Website & Booking System, VAT included. Youzse starts at £19 a month. Solo's card rate on Visa and Mastercard is lower than ours, so for a single pro taking card payments all day Solo will usually work out cheaper overall. ### What happens when I take on staff? Solo is priced per professional, so the cost scales with each person you add. Youzse charges for the business, so the team is included in the subscription. That is the point where the two products separate. ### Which is cheaper on card payments? Solo on Visa and Mastercard at 1.6% plus 30p against our 2.5% plus 35p. Youzse is lower on American Express, where Solo quotes 3.3% plus 30p and our rate does not change by card type. ### How is VAT handled on Youzse pricing? Yes. Youzse prices are shown VAT treatment as set out on the Youzse pricing page, as are Solo's. Two of the other products in this comparison set quote before VAT, so check the basis before comparing any figure. ### Do I have to be on Secret Spa to use Solo? No. Solo is sold as booking software in its own right. It is stated to be free for Secret Spa pros, and Secret Spa itself is a vetted marketplace with access gated by a recruitment process rather than open signup. ### Can I try both at once? Yes. Solo offers a 30 day free trial with no card needed and so does Youzse. Run them side by side for a fortnight with real bookings and let your own numbers settle it. --- ## Square Appointments charges less per card. Here is the actual trade Source: https://youzse.app/compare/square-appointments-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Square charges less per card than Youzse on every published UK rate and its free plan is a real one. The question is what that free plan leaves out and what the rest of the ecosystem costs once you need it. Square takes cards more cheaply than Youzse does. In person it publishes 1.75% on the free plan and 1.6% on Plus and Premium. Online it publishes 1.4% plus 25p on UK cards. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside that rate. There is no reading of those numbers where we come out ahead, so this page will not argue about the percentage. It will argue about three other things: what the free plan excludes, what you pay per location to get those things back and what it means that your calendar, your till and your card processing all belong to one company. ### Published UK prices and card rates | | Square Appointments | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Plan price | Free at £0 for a single location. Plus at £29 a month per location. Premium at £69 a month per location. The UK pricing page does not state whether these include or exclude VAT. | From £19 a month. VAT treatment is set out on the Youzse pricing page rather than here. | | Cards in person | 1.75% on Free and 1.6% on Plus and Premium. VAT treatment not stated on the UK fees page. | 2.5% plus 35p a transaction with the platform fee inside that rate. Higher than Square on either plan. VAT treatment not stated here. | | Cards online | 1.4% plus 25p on UK cards and 2.5% plus 25p on cards issued outside the UK. VAT treatment not stated. | 2.5% plus 35p a transaction, platform fee included. VAT treatment not stated here. | | Keyed, card on file and virtual terminal | 2.5%. VAT treatment not stated. | 2.5% plus 35p a transaction. VAT treatment not stated here. | | Buy now, pay later | Clearpay at 6% plus 30p. VAT treatment not stated. | Not published on this page. | Square figures read from squareup.com/gb on 7 August 2026. An extra 1.5% applies to cards issued outside the UK. Custom plans are available above 200k pounds a year in processing. Neither the UK pricing page nor the fees page states VAT treatment, so we have not assumed either way. ### What the free plan does not include - More than one location. Each additional location moves you to £29 or £69 a month per location, VAT treatment not stated - Class booking, so group sessions and courses are out - Waitlist - Processing time, so any service with a gap in the middle cannot be modelled properly - Google Calendar sync - Confirmation notifications, although automatic reminders by text and email are included - Custom SMS - Cancellation policies - Resource management for rooms, chairs and equipment ### The trade you are actually making Square is very good at the thing it was built for. The calendar and the till are one product, checkout is native rather than bolted on, and the hardware is its own, from the Reader to the Handheld, Terminal, Stand and Register. The free plan is not a token either. Unlimited staff accounts, a custom booking website, social media integrations, integrated payments, automated contracts and automatic reminders by text and email are all in it at £0 for a single location. If you run a counter and take most of your money in person, that is a serious offer and you should take it seriously. The first part of the trade is that payment processing is Square's own. There is no bringing your own processor, so the software and the card rate are a single decision and you cannot change one without changing the other. That is the ecosystem working exactly as designed, and it is part of why the rates can be as keen as they are. It also means a future rate change is not something you can shop around without moving your diary. The second part is where the free plan stops. Class booking, waitlists, cancellation policies, resource management, Google Calendar sync and custom SMS are the features a busy diary reaches for in month three rather than in week one, and every one of them sits on the far side of £29 a month per location. Plus also adds write access to the Bookings API. Premium at £69 a month per location adds time tracking, staff scheduling, staff pay percentages and custom contract fields. Neither price states its VAT treatment on the UK site. So the fair comparison for most growing businesses is not Youzse against Free. It is Youzse against Plus or Premium, per location, plus cards. ### Where Youzse fits Youzse costs more to take a card and it is not a till. What it is instead is a UK business system. Bookings, deposits, payments, quotes, invoices, CRM, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns come in one subscription from £19 a month, with a 30 day free trial and no card needed to start. It charges 0% commission on new clients, which matters if you are buying software to create new business rather than only to record it. Deposits are taken at the point of booking, and the client record, the invoice and the VAT return are all part of the same system rather than three products you reconcile on a Sunday evening. The honest summary is short. If most of your revenue is a card presented at a counter and your feature list is genuinely covered by Free, Square will cost you less and you should buy it. If your diary needs more than Free covers, or you want quoting, invoicing and VAT returns in the same place as the booking, then price Square at £29 or £69 a month per location before card fees, and the comparison stops being about 1.6% against 2.5%. ### Is Square cheaper than Youzse? On card rates, yes. Square publishes 1.75% in person on Free, 1.6% on Plus and Premium and 1.4% plus 25p online on UK cards. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p with the platform fee inside that rate. ### Is the Square Appointments free plan really free? For a single location, yes, at £0. Card processing is charged separately and the UK pricing page does not state VAT treatment. Multiple locations, class booking, waitlists, cancellation policies and resource management are not part of it. ### Can I use my own payment processor with Square? No. Processing is Square's own, so the software and the card rate arrive as one decision. ### What does Youzse cost? From £19 a month with a 30 day free trial and no card required, plus 2.5% plus 35p on card transactions with the platform fee inside that rate, and 0% commission on new clients. ### Which should a single location salon pick? If nearly all your money is taken at the counter and Free covers your diary, Square. If your diary needs more than Free covers, compare Youzse against Square Plus at £29 a month per location rather than against Free. --- ## A SQUIRE alternative when payouts are not the problem Source: https://youzse.app/compare/squire-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 SQUIRE is built around the barbershop chair, with commission splits and booth rent settled inside the same transaction as the haircut. Youzse does not do that, so this page is about what you get instead and where each one is honestly the better buy. If the money question in your shop is how a ticket splits between the shop and the barber, SQUIRE is built for exactly that and this page will not pretend otherwise. Youzse has no commission split engine, no booth rent collection and no per barber payout routing. If that is the job you are hiring software to do, hire SQUIRE. This page is for shops where the split is not the hard part, and where the hard part is running booking, deposits, invoices, marketing and client records in one place without paying a commission on new clients. Everything below comes from what each company publishes, in the currency each company published it. ### What SQUIRE is genuinely built around SQUIRE is barbershop software first and a booking calendar second. The ticket is pre built from the appointment, so service, retail, tip and the commission or booth rent split all sit on one transaction rather than being reconciled afterwards. Revenue is attributed to the barber who earned it, which is the number most shop owners actually want on a Monday morning. That feeds the payout tools. Auto Payout routes commission splits to the barbers' own accounts. Rent Collect takes booth rent out of the same transaction stream instead of you chasing it separately. Rapid Transfer moves money within 30 minutes for a fee charged per transfer. Around that sits a branded consumer app under your own shop name, plus booking entry points through Instagram and Google. SQUIRE is not a marketplace and does not try to be. It is a US company, Squire Technologies Inc, with terms governed by New York law, and it serves barbershops rather than beauty in general. ### Stay with SQUIRE if this is your shop - Your barbers are paid on a commission split and you want that split settled inside the transaction rather than in a spreadsheet on a Sunday night. - You rent chairs and want booth rent collected from the same money that comes through the till. - You want revenue attributed per barber so you can see who is carrying the shop. - You want payouts landing within 30 minutes and you accept a per transfer fee for the privilege. - You want a branded consumer app for your shop under your own name. - You are a barbershop rather than a salon, clinic or garage, and you want software that assumes that from the first screen. ### What each company publishes | | SQUIRE | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Entry plan | UK£20 per month, INDEPENDENT, for individual barbers, VAT treatment not stated | £19 per month in GBP, entry plan, billed per business, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | Single shop | UK£30 per month, PRO, for single location shops, VAT treatment not stated | Youzse plans rise above £19 per month in GBP by feature set rather than by chair | | Multi location | UK£60 per month per shop on EXECUTIVE and UK£90 per month per shop on TITAN, VAT treatment not stated | GBP pricing published on the Youzse pricing page, with extra locations from £15 a month | | Free trial | 14 days on INDEPENDENT | 30 days, no card required | | Card rate | No GBP rate published. The only rates found are US rates in page metadata rather than visible copy: 2.5% plus 20 cents USD card present and 2.9% plus 30 cents USD card not present | 2.5% plus 35p in GBP per transaction, with the platform fee inside that rate | | Add ons | Branded landing pages 25 USD per month and Operator AI 99 USD per month, billed in USD even on the UK view, VAT treatment not stated | Published in GBP on the Youzse pricing page | Taken from getsquire.com on 7 August 2026. Where a company does not state its VAT treatment we say so rather than assume it, and we do not convert currencies, so USD figures are left in USD. ### Where Youzse costs more, plainly At entry level the two sit within a pound of each other in the same currency. SQUIRE INDEPENDENT is UK£20 a month for individual barbers and Youzse starts at £19 a month. Move up a Youzse plan for the wider feature set and Youzse costs more than SQUIRE INDEPENDENT. That is the honest shape of it. There is a gap we cannot close for you either. SQUIRE does not state VAT treatment on its UK pricing, so we will not tell you whether UK£20 is the number that reaches your bank statement. Ask them to confirm before you compare any totals. Two more things worth knowing before you sign. SQUIRE add ons bill in US dollars even on the UK view, at 25 dollars a month for branded landing pages and 99 dollars a month for Operator AI. And no GBP card rate is published anywhere in their visible copy, so a UK shop cannot see in advance what a card payment will cost. ### Breadth is the argument, not payouts Youzse is not going to win on barbershop payouts. What it does instead is cover the rest of the business in one system: booking and deposits, quotes and invoices, client records, marketing, loyalty, gift cards, memberships, forms and VAT returns, across more than 60 trades. The commercial line matters too. Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients, so a client who finds you through Youzse and books does not arrive with a commission attached to them. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p in pounds, with the platform fee sitting inside that rate rather than being added on top of it. The trial is 30 days with no card required, against 14 days on SQUIRE INDEPENDENT. Thirty days is long enough to run a real month with real clients rather than a demo with test bookings, which is usually when you find out whether software fits the way you actually work. ### Who should not switch If you employ six barbers on commission and you spend the end of every week working out who is owed what, do not switch to Youzse to save a pound a month. The reconciliation will eat the saving in a fortnight. If you are a single chair, a small team on salary, or a shop that has quietly grown into beauty, aesthetics or something adjacent, the calculation changes. At that point the payout engine is machinery you are paying for and not using, and the things that hurt are missed deposits, unpaid invoices and clients you never followed up. ### Does Youzse handle commission splits or booth rent? No. Youzse has no commission split engine, no booth rent collection and no per barber payout routing. If that is the deciding feature, SQUIRE is the better fit and we would rather say so now. ### Is SQUIRE actually available in the UK? Yes. It publishes UK pricing in pounds, from UK£20 a month on INDEPENDENT to UK£90 a month per shop on TITAN, and its structured data declares a UK eligible region. ### Does SQUIRE charge VAT on those prices? It does not say either way. We will not guess, so ask SQUIRE to confirm before you compare their number with any VAT inclusive or VAT exclusive figure. ### What will card payments cost me on SQUIRE in the UK? No GBP rate is published. The only rates we found are US rates in page metadata, at 2.5% plus 20 cents card present and 2.9% plus 30 cents card not present. Youzse publishes 2.5% plus 35p in pounds. ### How long are the free trials? SQUIRE offers 14 days on INDEPENDENT. Youzse offers 30 days with no card required. --- ## TechMan or Youzse Garage Pro? Start with technical data. Source: https://youzse.app/compare/techman-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 TechMan is known for its Autodata, HaynesPro and parts supplier integrations. If technical data is what you are actually buying, that changes the comparison completely, so this page starts there. Written by Youzse. TechMan does not publish a price, so no figure is quoted for it here. We would rather leave the gap than print an estimate. ### What you are really comparing TechMan is known for workshop management, prompts, reminders, ordering, invoicing, reporting and Autodata, HaynesPro and parts supplier integrations. That last part is the one that matters, because it is the part Youzse Garage Pro does not do. If your technicians pull repair times, wiring diagrams and service schedules out of the system while the car is on the ramp, you are not choosing between two garage management systems. You are choosing between a system with technical data wired into it and one without. We are not going to argue you out of that. A workshop that lives in Autodata all day should buy the thing that has Autodata in it. ### The part worth pressing on Technical data is almost always licensed separately from the software that displays it. Autodata and HaynesPro are their own subscriptions, and an integration means the system can talk to them, not that the data comes free. So when you get a TechMan quote, the number that matters is the total: the workshop system, the technical data licence, per user costs, VRM lookups, SMS and setup. Compare that total against anything else, not the software line on its own. This is the single most common way garage software comparisons go wrong. Two quotes look close, one includes the data licence and one does not, and the gap turns up on the second invoice. ### Where each one is aimed | | TechMan | Youzse Garage Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Published price | No current official public price found | From £59 a month | | Trial | Check directly before buying | 30 days, no card | | Technical data integrations | Autodata, HaynesPro and parts suppliers | Not offered | | Parts ordering | Supplier integrations | Parts, suppliers and purchase orders per job | | Workshop prompts and reminders | Included | Automated MOT and service reminders | | Customer online booking | Check current scope | Included | | Online quote approval with photos | Check current scope | Included | | Card payments | Check provider and rate | 2.5% plus 35p, deposits and payment links | | VAT returns | Check current scope | MTD ready | Technical data licences are usually charged separately from the software. Ask for the total including the data subscription before comparing this against any other quote. ### Questions for the TechMan demo - Is the Autodata or HaynesPro licence included in the quoted price, or billed separately? - How many technicians can pull technical data at once, and what does an extra seat cost? - Which parts suppliers are integrated, and are those the factors you actually use? - What is the total first year cost including setup, migration and training? - What is the contract length and the notice period? - Can you export customers, vehicles, job history and MOT due dates if you leave? ### When Youzse Garage Pro is the better answer If your technicians already have their technical data somewhere else, or the work is servicing, MOTs, tyres and brakes rather than diagnostics, then you are paying for an integration you will not open. At that point the questions become how bookings arrive, whether MOT reminders go out on their own, how fast a quote gets approved and whether the invoice is paid before the keys are handed back. That is what Garage Pro is built around, at a published £59 a month with a 30 day trial and no card. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another garage system was read from that company's own public pages on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Most UK workshop systems quote on request rather than publishing a price, and where that is the case we have said so rather than printing an estimate. Garage quotes usually move once users, sites, data licences, SMS bundles, setup and training are added. Ask for the full monthly and setup cost in writing, and ask what happens at the end of the contract, before you compare anything against anything. These products change. If something here is out of date, tell us and we will correct it. ### Does Youzse Garage Pro integrate with Autodata or HaynesPro? No. If your technicians rely on repair times, wiring diagrams and service schedules inside the workshop system, TechMan covers that and we do not. ### How much does TechMan cost? We could not find an official public price, so none is quoted here. Ask for the total including the technical data licence, per user costs, VRM lookups, SMS, setup and contract length. ### When would a garage pick Youzse Garage Pro over TechMan? When the work is servicing, MOTs and general repair rather than heavy diagnostics, and the real problems are bookings, reminders, quote approval and getting paid. Published pricing and a 30 day trial also mean you can find out without a sales process. --- ## Treatwell or Youzse: the marketplace fee against owning the client Source: https://youzse.app/compare/treatwell-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 10, 2026 Treatwell publishes a 35% fee on the first booking from every new client it introduces and no monthly software price at all. This page works both numbers, including the one where Treatwell comes out cheaper than us. Treatwell asks for 35% of the first booking every new client makes when the marketplace introduces them. That is the largest new client fee of any platform compared on this site, and it lands on the appointment where you are trying to make an impression rather than a margin. The second number is the one that is missing. Treatwell refers to a monthly software fee but publishes no amount for either plan, so the only way to learn what the software costs is to ask their sales team. Youzse publishes £19 a month, charges 0% commission on new clients and puts its platform fee inside a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p, which is higher than most. Both halves of that are on this page. ### What Treatwell publishes, and what it leaves blank | | Treatwell | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Software subscription | A monthly fee is referred to but no amount is published for either plan. Freelancer and Advanced both show a Start for free button with no figure beside it and no VAT treatment stated | From £19 a month for the business, with VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | Team members | Advanced states unlimited team members at no extra cost. The plan fee itself is not published, so a cost per person cannot be worked out | The whole team is included in the business subscription from £19 a month | | New clients | 35% of the first booking made by a new client the marketplace brings you. Treatwell states that commissions and fees are subject to VAT | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse | | Repeat visits | 0% commission on repeat bookings once the client is yours | Repeat visits sit inside the subscription you already pay | | Bookings you win yourself | Treatwell states it charges nothing on bookings made directly with the salon, including calls, texts, WhatsApp, your own website and social Book Now buttons | Your own Youzse booking page, links and QR codes are covered by the subscription | | Paying online in advance | A processing fee of 2.5% plus VAT, applied only when a client pays you online in advance | 2.5% plus 35p per card transaction with the platform fee inside the rate, charged however the client pays | | Free trial | No trial length is stated anywhere. Start for free is a registration button rather than a stated period | 30 days free with no card required | | Your existing system | Treatwell states it does not sync with any other existing management systems | Import brings client records and appointment history across, and export is available at any time | | If you leave | Treatwell states that even if you cancel your plan, you still own your data | Client, booking and financial records export on request and the account is yours to close | Treatwell figures read from treatwell.co.uk on 10 August 2026. The monthly software fee is genuinely absent from that page for both plans, so no figure is quoted or estimated here. The 2.5% processing fee is published as plus VAT and applies only to online prepayments, which on that single line is cheaper per transaction than the Youzse card rate. ### Thirty five percent is an acquisition cost, so price it like one Work it on a real ticket rather than a percentage. A £60 colour introduced by the marketplace returns £39 to the salon, because £21 of it is the introduction fee. On a £150 balayage the fee is £52.50. Whether that is expensive depends entirely on what happens next, because Treatwell charges nothing on the visits that follow. So the real question is retention, not price. If four in ten of those introductions come back and keep coming back, a one time 35% on the first visit is a rational piece of marketing spend and cheaper than plenty of advertising. If they book once, chase the next offer elsewhere and never return, you have handed a third of your busiest chair to a listing. The quieter cost is habit. A salon that fills its diary from the marketplace for two years has a client list living inside somebody else's app, and the booking habit that comes with it is hard to reverse. Ask how many of your regulars could name your own booking page. If the answer is none, the fee is not the whole of what you are paying. ### Where Treatwell genuinely earns its money - Real consumer demand at scale across the UK and Europe, from people already searching for an appointment rather than for software - A consumer brand customers recognise and already trust with their card details - 0% commission on repeat bookings, so a client the marketplace introduces costs you once rather than every time - Nothing charged on bookings you win yourself, including calls, texts, WhatsApp, your own website and social Book Now buttons - Advanced includes unlimited team members at no extra cost, which suits a large floor - They state plainly that you still own your data even if you cancel your plan ### The number they do not print, and how to get yours Treatwell publishes two plans, Freelancer and Advanced, and both carry a Start for free button with no monthly amount next to it. A monthly fee is referred to. The amount is not on the page. We are not going to guess it, and you should be wary of any comparison that does. That leaves you doing the work by phone. Ask for the monthly figure in writing, ask whether it is quoted with VAT or without, ask what it becomes once any introductory period ends and ask what happens to it when you add staff or a second site. Put that answer next to the 35% and the 2.5% before you compare Treatwell with anything. It also means Start for free is not a trial length. No fixed duration is stated anywhere on that page, so treat it as a registration step rather than a countdown you can plan a switch around. Youzse states 30 days with no card required, which is a promise you can hold us to. ### Put these to Treatwell in writing before you sign - What is the monthly software fee on the plan you are recommending, and is that figure quoted including VAT or excluding it? - How is a new client defined, and for how long after the first appointment does an introduction still count as one? - If a client I already had books through the marketplace by accident, is that charged at 35%? - Does the 35% apply to the whole ticket, including retail and add ons, or to the service value only? - Treatwell states it does not sync with any other existing management systems, so what happens to the system I run today? - What comes out when I leave, in what format and how long does the export take to arrive? ### The case for staying exactly where you are If your columns are empty on a Tuesday, no software fixes that. Demand does. Treatwell has demand, more of it in the UK and Europe than anything else compared on this site, and a new salon with capacity to fill and no reputation yet is exactly the business a marketplace was built for. Nothing stops you running both either. Treatwell charges nothing on bookings made directly with the salon, so you can keep taking marketplace introductions while your own booking page, deposits, reminders and client records sit underneath in your own system. The point of moving the software is not to abandon a source of new clients. It is to stop that source being the only place your clients exist. The moment to reconsider is when the diary is full and the introductions keep arriving. At that point the 35% is buying bookings your own name was already good enough to win. ### Where Youzse is the more expensive choice Card processing, and there is no polite way to dress it up. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on every card payment with the platform fee sitting inside that single rate. Treatwell charges 2.5% plus VAT and only when a client pays online in advance. On that narrow line, for a salon that takes most of its money in the chair, they are cheaper per transaction and we are not going to pretend otherwise. The wider bill is the part nobody can settle for you, because half of it is unpublished. What we can put on the table is our own side: £19 a month to start, extra locations from £15 a month, 30 days free with no card required and 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, across more than 60 trades. Set that against whatever monthly figure Treatwell quotes you plus 35% of every first booking they introduce. If your business runs on marketplace introductions and takes very little card money in the chair, that arithmetic can land in their favour. Do it on your own takings before you move anything. ### What does Treatwell actually cost a month? Treatwell refers to a monthly software fee but does not publish the amount. Both plans on its pricing page, Freelancer and Advanced, show a Start for free button with no figure and no VAT treatment beside it, so the only way to find out is to ask and get the answer in writing. What is published is the commercial side: 35% of the first booking made by a new client the marketplace introduces, 0% on repeat bookings and a 2.5% plus VAT processing fee that applies only when a client pays online in advance. ### Does Treatwell charge on my own regulars? Not according to their own pricing page. Treatwell states that the 35% applies to first bookings by new clients it brings you from the marketplace, that repeat bookings carry 0% and that bookings made directly with the salon carry nothing, including calls, texts, WhatsApp, your own website and social Book Now buttons. The things worth confirming in writing are how long an introduced client keeps counting as introduced, and what happens if an existing regular books you through the marketplace by mistake. ### Can I run Youzse and Treatwell side by side? Yes, and for a salon with empty columns that is often the sensible order of things. Treatwell charges nothing on bookings made directly with the salon, so you can keep taking marketplace introductions while your booking page, deposits, reminders, invoices and client records live in Youzse. Treatwell states it does not sync with any other existing management systems, so expect to run the two alongside each other rather than joined up. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Treatwell? On software, we publish £19 a month to start and Treatwell publishes no figure at all, so that line cannot be settled until they quote you. On new clients, we charge 0% commission on the ones who find you through Youzse against their 35% of the first booking. On card payments we are dearer: 2.5% plus 35p on everything with our platform fee inside that rate, against their 2.5% plus VAT charged only on online prepayments. A salon taking most of its money in the chair pays us more on processing than it would pay them. ### What happens to my client list if I leave? Treatwell states that even if you cancel your plan you still own your data, which is the right position and worth holding them to in writing. Youzse exports client records, appointment history and financial records on request, and the import wizard brings the same data in when you arrive. The 30 day trial runs with no card required, so you can load your list and test the whole thing before anything is committed. --- ## A simpler Vagaro alternative for UK service businesses Source: https://youzse.app/compare/vagaro-alternative Third-party facts last checked: Aug 3, 2026 Vagaro is the most configurable platform in this category. The trade-offs are per-calendar pricing that is hard to predict and a 20% fee on marketplace new clients. Written by Youzse. Vagaro's figures come from its own UK pricing page, and where Vagaro does not publish a number we have said so rather than estimating. ### Why people search this comparison Most people do not search for a Vagaro alternative when everything is calm. They search because they are checking pricing, commission, cancellation, reviews, complaints, support, data export or whether the platform still fits the way they work. That is the right moment to compare Youzse honestly: not as the cheapest card processor, but as a newer UK platform with published pricing, 0% commission on new clients, direct client ownership, imports and a wider operating tool set. ### What Vagaro genuinely does well Vagaro reaches further beyond hair and beauty than anything else here. If you run classes, courses, memberships, retail and appointments in one business, it handles all of that natively. It is also the most configurable. Almost everything can be tailored, which is exactly what a complex multi-service business needs and exactly what a solo barber does not. It starts at £20 a month for one bookable calendar, or £30 for multiple locations. Vagaro also publishes UK card rates in its support centre: 1.15% plus 20p for tap, dip and swipe, 1.40% plus 25p keyed in and 1.15% plus 27p for Tap to Pay. ### What people tell us pushes them to look elsewhere - Pricing rises per bookable calendar, so the monthly cost is hard to predict as the team grows. - A 20% one-time fee when a new client finds you through the Vagaro marketplace. - The UK card rate is published in the support centre rather than in the main comparison table on the pricing page, so it is easy to miss when scanning. - Several capabilities are paid add-ons rather than included, so the quoted price is rarely the final price. - Reviewers often praise Vagaro support, but negative reviews and comparison sites still mention slow responses, unresolved issues after updates and setup complexity. - The depth of configuration is a real time cost if your business is straightforward. ### Youzse and Vagaro, side by side | | Youzse | Vagaro | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription from | £19 a month | £20 a month | | How it scales | Flat per business by plan | Per bookable calendar | | New client commission | 0% | 20% one-time | | Card rate | 2.5% plus 35p, platform fee included | 1.15% plus 20p tap, dip and swipe. 1.40% plus 25p keyed in. 1.15% plus 27p Tap to Pay | | Add-ons | Every feature on every plan | Several premium features cost extra | | Free trial | 30 days, no card | Varies | | Multiple locations | £15 a month per extra location | £30 a month tier | Vagaro subscription and marketplace figures are from vagaro.com/en-gb/pro/pricing. UK card rates are from Vagaro support. ### Which one fits Choose Vagaro if your business genuinely is complicated: multiple revenue lines, a class timetable, memberships, retail stock and someone with the time to configure it properly. Choose Youzse if you want the same breadth without the configuration project or the add-on list. Classes, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, quotes, invoicing and marketing are all included on every plan, and new clients cost you nothing. ### Where Youzse costs more Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments. That is higher than the headline card rates on Fresha, Booksy and Vagaro, and it is higher on purpose: the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate rather than being charged separately. There is one number to understand instead of three. If you take a lot of card payments and win very few clients through a marketplace, a platform with a lower card rate and no marketplace listing will cost you less. That is a real scenario and we would rather you worked it out on a calculator than found out in month three. Youzse works out cheaper when new clients matter to you. A 20% one-time fee on a new client, or 30% on a boosted one, is a much larger number than a few tenths of a percent on card takings, and it repeats every time you win someone new. ### How we worked this out Every figure quoted for another platform was taken from that company's own UK pricing page on the date shown at the bottom of this page. Where a platform does not publish a number, we have left it out rather than estimating it. Watch the VAT treatment when you compare. Booksy publishes its subscription and card fees plus VAT. Fresha and Vagaro publish theirs without that note. Check what each provider will actually invoice you before you decide. These platforms change their plans. If you spot something out of date here, tell us and we will correct it. ### How much does Vagaro cost in the UK? Vagaro publishes £20 a month for a single location with one bookable calendar, and £30 a month for multiple locations, with the price rising as you add bookable calendars. A one-time 20% fee applies when a new client finds you through the Vagaro marketplace. Vagaro publishes UK card rates in its support centre. ### Is Youzse a good alternative to Vagaro? If you want Vagaro's breadth without per-calendar pricing or an add-on list, yes. Youzse includes classes, memberships, gift cards, loyalty, quotes, invoicing and marketing on every plan, prices flat per business and charges 0% commission on new clients. If your business needs very deep configuration across many revenue lines, Vagaro remains the more configurable product. ### Does Vagaro charge for new clients? Yes. A one-time 20% fee applies to the first appointment when a new client discovers and books your business through the Vagaro marketplace. --- ## A clinic that runs itself Source: https://youzse.app/for/aesthetic-clinics Online booking, digital consent, card deposits and review cycles in one place, so your chair stays full and your records stay tidy. Aesthetic work is clinical practice sold in a retail setting, and nearly every commercial and regulatory risk in it comes from that split personality. The client behaves like a customer and the law treats her like a patient. ### Two appointments, not one Consultation and treatment in the same visit is how the trade grew and it is not where the trade is going. A documented consultation, time to think and a separate treatment appointment is the pattern insurers, registers and every proposed licensing regime point towards. Charge for the consultation and credit it against the treatment. It pays for the clinical time, it filters out the people gathering quotes from four clinics on a Saturday and it is what makes a two appointment model affordable to run at all. ### What has to be recorded against every treatment | Record | Why it exists | When you will need it | | --- | --- | --- | | Batch number and expiry of the product used | Traceability back to one specific vial | A recall, which becomes a phone call rather than a crisis | | Units or volume, by anatomical area | The next practitioner has to know what is already there | At any top-up and at any complication | | Medical history and current medication | Contraindications and interactions | Before you treat, and again if anything goes wrong | | Written consent for the specific treatment | Consent is treatment specific and never general | A complaint, where verbal consent counts for very little | | Before photographs in consistent lighting | The only objective record of the starting point | A client who remembers her own face differently at week four | Medical history and treatment records are special category data under UK GDPR, which requires explicit consent for the specific purpose rather than a tick box buried in terms and conditions. ### What a well run aesthetic clinic does - Runs consultation and treatment as two separate appointments - Charges for the consultation and credits it against the treatment - Collects the balance before the appointment rather than at the door - Records batch numbers, units and areas treated at every visit - Books the two week review while the client is still in the chair - Prompts the top-up on the interval for the product and dose actually given - Keeps consent to treat entirely separate from consent to market ### Results fade on a schedule, and that is the whole retention model Botulinum toxin softens at around three to four months. A hyaluronic acid filler lasts somewhere between six and eighteen depending on the product and the site. A client who drifts well past that point starts again from her original baseline, which is worse for her result and worse for your book. Prompt the top-up at the interval for what you actually gave her rather than at a generic three months for everybody. That interval sits on the record, which is the practical reason to keep the record properly in the first place. The two week review is the appointment most clinics skip and the one that most reliably produces a returning client. It costs a quarter of an hour, it catches asymmetry while it can still be corrected and it is the natural moment for the next treatment to be booked. ### Where an aesthetic clinic carries risk it has never priced - Free consultations at forty five minutes each, given to people comparing four clinics - Top-ups treated as goodwill when they are a second treatment with a second product cost - A prescribing relationship that exists on paper and not in the room - Complication management with no time set aside for it in a fully booked week - Marketing consent assumed from a signature on a treatment consent form - A no show on an hour long slot with the product already drawn up and unusable ### Can clients complete consent before they arrive? Yes. Consent and medical history forms are sent with the booking so everything is signed and on file before the appointment. ### Can I take a deposit on high value treatments? Yes. Take a card deposit at the point of booking to protect your time and cut no shows. ### Where are treatment records kept? Every client has one timeline with treatment notes, photos, consent and history, all handled to UK GDPR standards. ### Is there commission on bookings? No. One monthly subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per clinic rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A course of injectables is a considerable payment taken in clinic, so a card rate with nothing hidden inside it is worth confirming first. The card rate is 2.5% plus 35p and it is the whole rate, because the Youzse platform fee is inside it rather than billed separately. The platform charges 0% commission on new clients who discover you on Youzse, and nothing at all as a setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. The weeks before Christmas and before summer are full and January is quiet, so paying by the month suits the year far better. Beyond the trial it is a rolling monthly subscription that you are free to cancel at any time. Records remain exportable throughout, so nothing at all is being kept back to make you stay. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Batch numbers, consent forms, photographs and review dates usually sit across a clinic system, a phone and a paper file. Most are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a full month of running both before anything about your booking link changes. ### Will it work for a course of injectables specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a course of injectables calls for sits behind an upgrade. Courses drawn down per treatment, consent and batch records on the client file, review prompts and special category data handled properly under UK GDPR are all included. Youzse serves more than 60 trades, so bring us the awkward part of your week during the trial rather than after it. --- ## More cuts, less admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/barbers Online booking, walk-in queues, card deposits and reminders in one app. Built for the chair and the whole shop. Barbering is a low ticket, high volume trade, and that one fact changes almost every decision in the shop. Turning over what a salon turns over takes four times as many people through the door, so anything costing you per transaction costs you four times over. ### Why the fixed pence matters more than the percentage - Card processing is a percentage plus a fixed amount, and the fixed amount does not care that the sale is fifteen pounds - A shop doing four hundred cuts a month pays that fixed element four hundred times, which is the number to compare between providers - Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments with the platform fee inside that rate, so the fixed pence is visible rather than buried in a bundle - Selling five cuts as one prepaid block turns five fixed charges into one and banks the money before the first cut - Cash avoids the fee and removes the record, which is why a cash only shop never knows its own rebooking rate ### Walk-ins and the booked column are in permanent conflict Most shops run both and the friction is always identical. A walk-in taken at the wrong minute pushes a booked client back a quarter of an hour, and the booked client is the one who complains, because he is the one who planned his day around you. Deposits belong on the long appointments only. A skin fade with a beard sculpt holding a chair for an hour is worth protecting. Asking for a deposit on a fifteen minute dry cut costs more in friction at the door than it will ever save. ### A barber week and where the money actually sits | When | Who comes in | What it means for the chair | | --- | --- | --- | | Monday and Tuesday | Retired regulars, shift workers and few others | The right days for training, stock and selling prepaid blocks | | Wednesday and Thursday | Steady booked work with some walk-ins | Where a standing appointment can be moved without a fight | | Friday | Men getting sorted before the weekend | Fills itself, so protect it for the higher ticket work | | Saturday | Everybody, all at once, mostly on spec | The only day capacity genuinely runs out | | The fortnight before Christmas | Every regular plus every lapsed one | The year is settled here, and it is settled by queue management | A shop that works deliberately at its Monday and Tuesday is a shop with five earning days rather than three. ### The four week rhythm is the entire business A barbershop lives on the man who comes back on a predictable cycle. The commercial risk is not that he defects to another shop, it is that four weeks quietly becomes six and then seven without him making any decision at all. Prompt him at week three on his own interval. A number two all over and a scissor cut grown out are not the same cycle, and a monthly message to the whole list treats them as though they are. The lapsed list is the cheapest work in the trade. A man who has not been in for ten weeks has rarely found somebody better. He has been busy, and one message brings a surprising number of them back. ### What a well run shop does - Compares card providers on fixed pence multiplied by transaction count - Sells prepaid blocks of cuts to bank the cash and lock in the regular - Holds explicit walk-in capacity rather than improvising on the day - Takes deposits only on the appointments that hold a chair for an hour - Prompts each regular on his own interval rather than sending one monthly blast - Records guard numbers, neckline and beard preferences against the client - Works the Monday and Tuesday deliberately instead of accepting them as dead ### Does it handle walk-ins as well as bookings? Yes. Walk-ins join a live queue that sits beside your booked appointments, so the whole shop stays organised at the busiest times. ### Can each barber manage their own column? Yes. Every barber has their own schedule, services and availability, with a clear column view for the day. ### Is there commission on bookings? No. One monthly subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees and no per client charges. ### How quickly can I set up? Most shops are taking bookings in under two minutes. Add services, barbers and hours, connect Stripe and share your link. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans run from £19 a month, priced per shop rather than per person, which is why a growing team does not turn into a growing invoice. Add another location from £15 a month. A skin fade is a small fast payment repeated all day, so the per transaction rate is the figure that decides what a shop takes home. For cards it is 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee is contained in that number instead of appearing as a second charge. Where a booking begins on Youzse there is still 0% commission on new clients, and no setup cost is charged. ### Am I tied into a contract? No lock in. You get a 30 day free trial and no card is needed to start it. The fortnight before Christmas is the busiest of the barbering year and mid January is the flattest, so paying monthly simply fits better. Once the trial ends the subscription rolls monthly, and cancelling at any time is your call alone. You can export your records throughout, which is what makes cancelling a simple thing rather than a project. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms, so day one is not a blank screen. Regulars, their preferred barber and how often they come back are usually held in a book on the counter and nowhere else. Setup lands the same day for most people, and the 30 day trial is there to be used. Run both, compare them, then switch the booking link. ### Will it work for a skin fade specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so what a skin fade needs is present whichever plan you happen to be on. Walk ins and booked appointments in one diary, a column per barber, rebooking reminders on each client own cycle and card payment at the chair are all there. There are more than 60 trades on Youzse. If your way of working needs something else, tell us while the trial has time left on it. --- ## The calm behind a busy clinic Source: https://youzse.app/for/beauty-therapists Online booking, deposits, consultation forms and reminders in one place, so you can focus on the treatment not the diary. Beauty treatments work across a course rather than in a single visit, so the commercial problem is almost never the first appointment. It is every appointment after it. ### Sell the course, because the treatment only works as one A single facial is something a client books when she feels like it. A course of six is a commitment that fills a treatment room for two months, and it is the only version that produces the skin she described in the consultation. Sell it as one purchase and draw a session down each visit. Billing per visit hands her six separate opportunities to stop, and she usually takes the one around session three, when the skin goes through the stage where it looks worse before it looks better. ### What a treatment room loses in an ordinary week - A ninety minute facial lost to a no show, in a room that holds exactly one person at a time - Turnaround absorbed into the appointment, so a day booked back to back is running late by lunchtime - A course sold verbally and tracked on a card in a drawer, then lost when the drawer is tidied - A patch test skipped because she had one last year, on a product you have since changed - Consultations given away to people collecting quotes from four salons on the same Saturday ### The room is the constraint, not the therapist Unlike a salon chair, a treatment room serves one client at a time and has to be stripped and reset between them. An hour lost in a single room cannot be recovered anywhere else in the day, because there is nowhere else for it to go. Weight the deposit by how long the room is held, and build the turnaround into the appointment length rather than hoping for it. A diary assuming instant changeover produces a day that slides steadily later and a therapist eating lunch at four o'clock. ### What has to be true before a treatment goes ahead | Treatment | What is required first | What happens when it is missing | | --- | --- | --- | | A chemical peel | Skin history, current medication and a documented consultation | A recent retinoid or oral acne treatment turns a peel into a burn | | Lash or brow tint | A patch test with a date, the product and a recorded result | An insurer declines the claim, and the claim is why you insured | | Light based hair removal | Skin type, contraindications and written consent | A burn with no record of what was assessed or agreed | All of that is health information under UK GDPR, which needs explicit consent for the purpose, secure storage and access limited to the people who actually need it. ### Retention here is measured in intervals, not in visits Every treatment has a clinically right interval and it is almost never a calendar month. A course of peels runs at a fortnight, a maintenance facial at six weeks and a lash infill at two to three. One monthly newsletter serves none of them. The final session of a course is the moment to sell the next one. Skin that has just had six weeks of work is at its best and she can see it in the mirror, which is a better argument than anything you will send her in November. ### What a well run beauty business does - Sells courses as one purchase and draws a session down per visit - Charges for the consultation and credits it against the first treatment - Weights deposits by how long the room is held - Builds turnaround into the appointment length rather than hoping for it - Sends intake and consent forms before arrival instead of using a clipboard - Records products used, settings and how the skin reacted - Tracks patch test dates and blocks the booking when one has expired - Prompts the next treatment at its own clinical interval ### Can clients fill in patch test forms before arriving? Yes. Consultation, consent and patch test forms can be sent automatically and completed before the appointment. ### Can I sell treatment packages? Yes. Sell packages and gift cards online and track balances and redemptions automatically. ### Is there commission on bookings? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments, with no new client fees. ### Can I manage rooms and equipment? Yes. Schedule rooms and equipment alongside staff so two treatments never clash. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per salon rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. A course of facials sold as a block is one larger payment, so the card rate applies once instead of six separate times. The rate on cards is 2.5% plus 35p and the Youzse platform fee is part of it, so nothing arrives separately later. 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse means an introduction costs you nothing, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. Bookings climb before Christmas and before summer and fall away in the weeks after both, which suits paying by the month far better. The subscription after that is rolling and paid monthly, and you can cancel at any time you decide to. Throughout all of it your records stay exportable, which is the part most people forget to check. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your clients along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Skin history, product recommendations, patch tests and where a client sits in a course usually live on cards in a drawer. Most people are ready to trade the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a whole month of running both before the booking link moves. ### Will it work for a course of facials specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing a course of facials depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Courses drawn down per treatment, skin and patch test history on the record, course completion prompts and consent captured for treatment data are all covered. Something like 60+ trades already run on Youzse, so raise anything that does not fit while the trial is still open. --- ## Booked out, brow by brow Source: https://youzse.app/for/brow-specialists A branded booking page, card deposits and reminders that keep your column full and your clients coming back on cycle. A brow appointment is forty five minutes of judgement about somebody's face, sold at a low price on a six week cycle. The skill sits in the decision rather than in the duration, which is a genuinely difficult thing to charge for. ### You are selling a shape, and a shape takes months to undo A brow taken too thin cannot be put back that afternoon or that month. Hair grows at its own pace, and a mistake sits on the front of somebody's face through a wedding, a set of photographs and every ordinary day in between. That is why brow clients are the most loyal and the least forgiving people in beauty. It is also why mapping belongs on the record. Where the arch was set, how far the tail was taken and what she asked you to change last time make the next appointment quicker and the face consistent, and consistency is the entire product. Charge for the judgement rather than for the wax. Two studios can offer the same forty five minutes and only one of them is being paid for knowing when to stop. ### Why a low ticket trade has to think about transactions - A fixed card charge takes a far larger share of a twenty pound brow tidy than of a ninety pound colour - Ringing the brow tint through separately from the lash tint she had in the same visit pays that fixed charge twice over - Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments with the platform fee inside that rate, so the fixed pence is visible rather than buried - A fifteen minute gap between two forty five minute appointments is a third of an hour that cannot be sold to anybody - A course of four lamination appointments sold as one purchase is one transaction rather than four ### Six weeks, and a different interval for every treatment A wax and tidy comes back at four to six weeks on the hair cycle. A tint fades at three to four. Lamination lasts six to eight and should not be repeated any sooner, because doing it too often is exactly how brows get damaged. One monthly prompt to the whole list is wrong for all three. Prompt on the treatment she actually had. A message arriving the week the grow-out starts to show reads as service. The same message a fortnight late reads as an advert, because by then she has found somebody with a Saturday slot. Bundle at the point of booking rather than hoping she thinks to ask. A shape, a tint and a lash tint in one visit is a better hour for her and a materially better one for you, and she books it when it appears as a single option rather than three. The patch test is the record most often missing in this trade. Tint reactions are real, they are the reason the forty eight hour test exists, and a documented test with a date and a result is what an insurer asks for on the day it matters. ### What a well run brow business does - Records the mapping, the arch position and the tint formula per client - Tracks patch test dates with the product used and the result - Prompts on the interval of the treatment rather than the calendar month - Offers the bundled visit as one bookable option instead of three - Takes payment on a phone at the bed rather than queueing at a shared terminal - Takes deposits on lamination and the longer product heavy appointments - Books the next appointment before she stands up - Photographs the finished shape with permission, so the next one matches ### Can I take a deposit on every booking? Yes. Take a card deposit at the point of booking to protect your time and cut no shows. ### Can I bring clients back on cycle? Yes. Automated reminders bring clients back at the right time so your column stays full. ### Can I record patch tests? Yes. Keep patch test dates, notes and history on each client record. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. A lamination is one payment repeated every six to eight weeks, so the card rate applies on a cycle you can predict from the diary. For cards it is 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee is contained in that number instead of appearing as a second charge. There is 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, and no setup cost to begin. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. The weeks before summer and before Christmas are full and the fortnight after each is empty, which suits paying month by month. Once the trial ends the subscription rolls monthly, and cancelling at any time is your call alone. Your records stay exportable throughout, so leaving is a decision rather than a negotiation. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Tint shades, lamination dates, patch tests and brow mapping photographs usually sit on a phone and a record card. Setup lands the same day for most people, and the 30 day trial is there to be used. Run both, compare them, then switch the booking link. ### Will it work for a brow lamination specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a brow lamination is never the thing that forces an upgrade. Rebooking on each client own six to eight week cycle, tint and patch test history on the record, deposits and reminders are all there. There are more than 60 trades on Youzse. If your way of working needs something else, tell us while the trial has time left on it. --- ## Win the job, not the paperwork Source: https://youzse.app/for/builders Capture enquiries, send professional quotes, take a deposit to confirm and invoice on completion. One place for the whole job from first call to final payment. A builder is a cash machine that somebody else is operating. Wages leave weekly, merchants settle monthly and the client pays when a stage completes, and the whole job is a bet that those three rhythms line up. ### What a builder is carrying at any given moment - A week of wages for people who will not wait while a client gets round to a transfer - Plant on hire costing exactly the same on a rained off day as on a working one - Subcontractors who invoice when their part is finished, not when the job is - A retention on the last job that has been sitting outstanding since the spring ### Stage payments follow the programme, not the calendar Bill against things that visibly happen. Foundations poured, walls to plate height, roof watertight, first fix complete, plastered out. Each one is unarguable, the client can walk into it and nobody debates whether it has occurred. A monthly invoice on a job that has been rained off for a fortnight starts an argument. A stage invoice on the morning the roof goes watertight does not, because that is precisely what the client has been waiting to see. Take a deposit before the first delivery. Materials stacked on somebody else's drive are money already spent, and there is no reason for them to sit on your account while they wait to be used. ### The programme is what you are really selling Clients ask about the price and then live inside the programme. Ten weeks that becomes eighteen is what gets discussed at their kitchen table, written in their review and mentioned to the neighbour who was going to use you next. Most slippage is coordination rather than work. A plasterer who cannot start because the electrician moved to another site, a window on a ten week lead ordered in week eight, a steel waiting on a drawing nobody chased. Order the long lead items in the first fortnight, before the ground has even come out. The things that stop a build are almost never the bricklaying. ### Where an extension loses its margin | Stage | What goes wrong | What it costs | | --- | --- | --- | | Groundwork | A drain run, made ground or foundations that have to go deeper | Digger days and concrete nobody priced | | Superstructure | A steel or a window on a longer lead than the programme assumed | Every trade behind it shifts by the same amount | | First fix | The client moving sockets, lights and a doorway | Cheap to carry out and expensive to have never written down | | Second fix | Tiles, sanitaryware and flooring chosen late | Trades stood down and then brought back | | Handover | A snag list that stays open | The final payment, held for as long as the list is | Almost none of that is bad building. It is decisions arriving later than the programme needed them to arrive. ### A variation is a document or it is an argument A client asks for another socket while you are both standing in the hallway, you say that is no trouble, and eleven conversations like it later there is a four figure difference of opinion at handover that neither of you wrote down. Price the change, send it, get a yes in writing and then build it. Photograph everything hidden before it is covered up, because a dated picture of what was genuinely under that floor carries more weight at handover than any amount of explaining afterwards. ### What closes a build cleanly - A snag list with dates and an owner rather than a running conversation - The inspection stages passed, with the paperwork filed against the property - A final account setting out the contract sum and every agreed variation - Any retention recorded with a release date in the diary rather than a hope - A note of who recommended the client, because the next extension on that street is already being talked about ### Can customers approve quotes online? Yes. Send a branded quote that customers can approve online, then confirm the job with a deposit. ### Can I take staged payments? Yes. Take a deposit up front and invoice the balance or stages as the work progresses. ### Does it track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so no lead slips through the cracks. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. An extension is paid in stages across months, so a card rate that applies cleanly at every stage matters more than a single headline figure. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse means an introduction costs you nothing, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. Groundworks stall in a wet January and the summer runs back to back, which is exactly the shape a monthly arrangement handles. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. Throughout all of it your records stay exportable, which is the part most people forget to check. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Quoted scopes, variations, subcontractor arrangements and what was agreed on site are usually spread across texts and a site diary. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for a rear extension specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to a rear extension behind an upgrade. Staged payment schedules, priced variations approved before work happens, job history per address and quotes with photographs are all in one place. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Made to measure, quoted to match Source: https://youzse.app/for/carpenters Quote from an approved specification, take a deposit that covers the timber and invoice the balance the day the work is fitted. Fitted joinery is measured to the millimetre and fits exactly one alcove in the country. Nothing you cut has any resale value, which is why the money has to move before the saw does. ### The specification is the job Handles, hinge type, drawer runners, sheen level, grain direction and whether the plinth is scribed to a floor that is nowhere near level. Every one of those is a detail the customer will later remember agreeing to differently. Write it down and have it approved before the timber is ordered. An approved specification settles the conversation that a quote alone never does. Anything after that is a priced variation rather than a favour. Fitted work absorbs an extraordinary amount of unpriced goodwill if you let it. ### What belongs on a joinery job before cutting starts - A deposit that covers the timber and the sheet goods - Approved drawings with the critical dimensions marked - The ironmongery schedule, down to the hinge - The finish, the sheen level and who is applying it - Site readiness, because nothing fits around a floor still being laid - Lead times for anything ordered in, given to the customer in weeks - A fitting date that does not depend on another trade running to time ### Bench days and fitting days are two diaries A carpenter running fitted work is scheduling machining time in the workshop and fitting time on site, and overbooking either one leaves the other standing idle. A survey, a set of drawings and a machining run all happen weeks before anybody sees a van outside the house. Plan backwards from the fitting date and the customer stops asking why nothing appears to be happening. ### The second room is the profitable one A customer who trusts you with the study hands over the bedroom, then the boot room, then the understairs. No pitch, no measure against three other quotes and no price pressure. That only happens if the drawings, the timber, the finish and the ironmongery from the first room are still on file. Matching an existing run from memory is how a second room goes wrong in front of the person who recommended you. ### What quietly eats a joinery margin - A survey that missed a wall out of square by fifteen millimetres - Ironmongery agreed verbally and then ordered wrong - A finish changed after spraying because the customer saw the sample in daylight - Sheet goods bought at this year prices and quoted at last year ones - Fitting days lost waiting on a plasterer or an electrician - Snagging visits nobody costed into the job ### Can customers approve quotes online? Yes. Send a branded quote customers approve online, then confirm the job with a deposit. ### Can I take a deposit for materials? Yes. Take a deposit to cover materials and confirm the date, then invoice the balance on completion. ### Does it track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so no job slips through. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per workshop rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your workshop and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. A fitted wardrobe is a deposit for materials and a balance on completion, so the card rate applies at the start and at the end. Card processing is 2.5% plus 35p. That rate already carries the Youzse platform fee, which is why you will not find it invoiced apart. On introductions the answer is short: 0% commission on new customers who arrive through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Bespoke work is ordered heavily before Christmas and slows in the new year, and paying by the month is built for exactly that. Afterwards the subscription is rolling and monthly, and cancelling is something you can do at any time. Because records stay exportable throughout, staying with Youzse is never something you are pushed into. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Measurements, material choices, ironmongery and the drawings behind them tend to sit in a notebook and a phone gallery. Same day setup is the norm, and running the two alongside each other through the 30 day trial is how you check everything before switching the booking link. ### Will it work for a fitted wardrobe specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and a fitted wardrobe. Deposits covering materials, measurements and specifications per job, staged invoicing and quotes with photographs of previous work are all included. More than 60 trades use Youzse. If yours works in a way that does not fit, raise it while the trial is still running. --- ## A full diary, no chasing Source: https://youzse.app/for/carpet-cleaners Customers book by room or job, you quote larger work and take payment on site, all planned around your day. Carpet cleaning is a call-out with a machine in the back of a van, and the whole job turns on two things the customer never asks about on the phone. How wet it will be, and how long before the room can be walked on again. ### Drying time is the promise you are really making A customer padding across a damp carpet in socks that evening remembers that far longer than she remembers the stain. Give a drying time, be conservative about it and say what affects it, because a cold house in February dries nothing at all. That one number decides the method as much as the price. A flat being handed back at nine the next morning does not want a saturated extraction clean, whatever that would have done for the traffic lanes. It also decides how many jobs fit into a day. Furniture cannot go back until the floor is dry, so somebody has to be told, before you arrive, whose job that is. ### What was said on the phone against what is on the floor | What was booked | What is usually there | What it does to the visit | | --- | --- | --- | | Three bedrooms | Three bedrooms, a landing and the stairs | Stairs take as long as a room and were never in the price | | A light freshen up | Ten years of traffic lane down the hallway | A pre-spray and two passes, or a result nobody is pleased with | | One small stain | Something already attacked with a supermarket bottle | The residue has to come out before anything else will | | Just the carpets | A three seater mentioned casually at the front door | Upholstery work priced standing up in a hallway | None of those are unreasonable customers. Quoting from a room count and a photograph rather than a phone conversation is what stops all four being a surprise. ### Price the extras before you are standing in the hallway Stairs, upholstery, rugs, protector and specialist stain treatment are the highest margin things you sell, and they are almost always agreed on the doorstep, which is the worst possible moment to name a price. Put them on the booking as priced options and let the customer add them in advance. The same sofa is an easy yes the week before and an awkward negotiation with your machine already running. ### Two separate calendars sit inside your job history Domestic carpets come round roughly once a year and no household on earth has that in a diary. Rented property comes round at every tenancy change, which is a date somebody else is already tracking. Agents and landlords are the steadier half of the business. They do not need persuading about the value of clean carpets, they need somebody who answers on the Thursday a tenant moved out when the new one arrives on Monday. Record what was on the floor, what you used on it and how it came out. When the same landlord rings about the same flat eighteen months later, you can price it without driving there. ### What quietly costs a carpet cleaning business a job - Parking, because a machine on a van needs a hose run and a third floor flat with no bay is an hour gone before you start - A water supply that turns out to be a kitchen mixer tap with nothing to connect to - Promising a stain will come out before anybody has seen what made it - Heavy furniture put straight back onto a damp carpet, which marks it - A quote given by room count when two of the rooms are one through lounge - Being paid after the visit rather than before the machine goes back in the van ### Can customers book by room or job? Yes. Customers book by room or job and you quote larger work up front, then confirm with a deposit. ### How do I take payment on site? Take contactless card payments in person or send a payment link, so you never chase cash. ### Can I plan my day by area? Yes. Plan jobs by location so your day runs an efficient round. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. A whole house clean is a single payment on completion, so the card rate applies to a decent ticket and should be a number you know. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. There is 0% commission on new customers the platform introduces to you, and no setup cost before you start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. The weeks before Christmas and the spring clean months are the peaks, and the flat stretches between should not carry a fixed annual fee. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Your records remain exportable at every point, so the door is genuinely open in both directions. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your customers, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Which rooms were done, fibre types, stain history and which letting agents call you back usually live on invoices in a folder. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for a whole house carpet clean specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for a whole house carpet clean sits behind an upgrade. Quotes sent before the visit, payment on completion, room and fibre history against the property and annual clean reminders are all included. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## From the acute visit to the maintenance plan Source: https://youzse.app/for/chiropractors Sell the plan of care once rather than an adjustment at a time, collect maintenance monthly and recall every patient on the interval their plan needs. Almost every chiropractic patient arrives in acute pain, having found the clinic themselves and paying for it themselves. The commercial model turns entirely on what happens once that pain has gone. ### Why billing one adjustment at a time works against the patient - The patient reconsiders the cost every single week, and does so just as the acute pain starts improving - Motivation peaks on day one and falls fastest around the fourth visit, which is exactly where a course gets abandoned - A plan bought in advance is a decision made once, while the reason for making it is still obvious - Per visit billing leaves the clinic no forward book, so a quiet February is invisible until it arrives - The patient who stops early goes on to tell people chiropractic did not work for them ### Maintenance is the practice, not an upsell A clinic that only ever treats acute episodes has to find every patient twice over. One that keeps people on a regular check has a baseline it can plan staffing and rent around. Sell it as what it honestly is. Someone who lifts, sits at a desk for nine hours or plays sport at forty is managing a body rather than fixing a fault. Collect it monthly and automatically. A maintenance plan that needs the patient to rebook each time is the acute model wearing a different name. ### Recall on the interval the plan needs A patient on a six week check and a patient on a twelve week check should not get the same message in the same week. Recall is clinical scheduling, not a newsletter. Bring the history with it. Someone who has had two episodes of the same complaint this year needs a different conversation to someone who has had none since discharge. Health data carries explicit consent, restricted access and a retention period that genuinely deletes. That applies to the recall list every bit as much as to the notes. ### A plan of care against paying visit by visit | | Visit by visit | Plan of care | | --- | --- | --- | | When the patient decides | Every week, from scratch | Once, at the start | | Typical completion | Tails off as the pain resolves | Runs to the end of the course | | Forward book | None to speak of | Visible weeks ahead | | Card handling | A payment at every visit | One payment drawn down per visit | | After discharge | The patient disappears | Moves onto maintenance | Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p on card payments with the platform fee inside that rate, so a block collected once costs less to handle than the same money taken weekly. ### Can patients book a course of care? Yes. Block bookings let patients reserve a course of sessions in one go, so the plan stays on track. ### How do patients pay? Take card payments and deposits online or accept payment in person. It is up to you. ### Are patient records secure? Yes. Notes, history and consent sit on one timeline and are handled to UK GDPR standards. ### How quickly can I set up? Most clinics are taking bookings in a couple of minutes. Add services and hours, connect Stripe and share your link. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per clinic rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. A course of adjustments sold as a block is one payment rather than eight, which is where the card rate stops being a rounding error. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. Where a booking begins on Youzse there is still 0% commission on new patients, and no setup cost is charged. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. New year and the weeks after the summer break bring the acute cases, and the flat stretches between should not carry a fixed annual fee. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. You can export your records throughout, which is what makes cancelling a simple thing rather than a project. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your patients, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Findings, adjustment history and imaging references usually sit in a clinic system that was never built to hand anything back. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for a course of adjustments specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for a course of adjustments sits behind an upgrade. Courses drawn down per visit, findings on one patient timeline, recall intervals set per patient and UK GDPR handling for clinical records are all included. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Win the contract, run it clean Source: https://youzse.app/for/commercial-cleaners Quote contracts, schedule recurring visits and invoice on account, so every site runs on time and every invoice goes out on time. Commercial cleaning is won on a written specification, carried out after everybody has gone home and paid sixty days later by somebody who has never met you. Almost nothing about it resembles cleaning a house. ### You are a supplier, and suppliers are paid by process A finance department pays what matches an order. An invoice arriving without the purchase order number on it is not queried, it simply sits, and nobody tells you for six weeks that it is sitting. Raise the invoice on the same date every month with the site reference and the order number on it, and it travels through their system on rails. The cleaning businesses that get paid slowly are very rarely the ones doing bad work. On a contract worth two thousand a month, sixty day terms mean four thousand pounds of your money is permanently inside somebody else's bank account. That is worth knowing precisely rather than approximately. ### The margin lives in the periodic work A nightly clean is priced by the hour against three other tenders and there is very little left in it once wages, cover and consumables come out. Hard floor stripping and sealing, carpet work, high level cleaning, deep kitchen cleans and the builders clean after a refit are where a contract earns properly. They sit in the specification as options nobody diarises. Put them on a calendar per site and offer them before the facilities manager thinks to ask, because the moment he thinks to ask he asks three companies. ### What a facilities manager wants within an hour of a complaint - Who was on site last night, and what time they signed in and out - Which tasks are daily, which are weekly and which are monthly, in writing - The last completed check for that floor or that washroom - What was reported by your own staff and what was done about it - Confirmation that the person who attended was the person you said would attend - Current details of who holds keys, fobs and alarm codes for that building ### Where a cleaning contract is actually decided | Stage | What it looks like | What really decides it | | --- | --- | --- | | The tender | A specification and a price per week | Price, and whether your paperwork was complete | | The first month | Everything done properly and nobody notices | Nothing, this is the honeymoon | | Months three to nine | Standards drift as staff turn over | Whether anybody is checking before the client does | | The renewal | A meeting about the last complaint | The record you can produce on the day | Contracts are lost in month seven and cancelled at renewal. By the time the meeting is in the diary the decision has usually already been taken. ### Turnover of staff is the operational risk Cleaning is a low paid trade with high turnover, and a contract is only ever as good as whoever unlocked the door last night. Every leaver takes a fob, an alarm code and an unwritten understanding of what that client actually cares about. That is why the specification has to live somewhere other than in a supervisor's head, and why access has to be current rather than roughly right. Somebody who left in March should not still be able to walk into a building in June. It is also why the rota matters more here than in any other cleaning work. A client is not asking whether the office was cleaned, they are asking who cleaned it and at what time, and that is a question about a record rather than about standards. ### Can I schedule recurring contracts? Yes. Schedule recurring visits across sites and teams on a set cycle, so every contract runs on time. ### Can I invoice clients on account? Yes. Invoice clients and take payment online, with reminders chasing anything outstanding. ### Can I assign teams to sites? Yes. Assign teams to sites and see who is where, so nothing is missed. ### Are there per site fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. An office contract is invoiced monthly on terms rather than tapped on a card, but the rate still applies wherever a client chooses to pay by card. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. Youzse applies 0% commission on new clients who came in through the marketplace, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. Contracts are steady through the year with a lull over the Christmas closedown, and paying by the month is the honest match for that. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, so the only reason to stay is that it is working. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Site specifications, cleaning schedules, staff allocations and key holder details usually live across spreadsheets and a shared inbox. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for an office contract specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to an office contract behind an upgrade. Recurring contracts invoiced on terms, site specifications per building, staff scheduled by site and audit records the client can be shown are all there. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## Fill the class, skip the admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/dance-teachers Students book classes and terms online and pay up front, so every class is full and every term fee is in before it starts. A dance school bills the same families for classes, uniform, exam entries, costumes and tickets, and keeps some of them from four years old to eighteen. The lifetime value is remarkable. The admin is five separate businesses sharing one register. ### The dance school year | Term | What fills the hall | What is being collected | | --- | --- | --- | | Autumn | New starters, uniform fittings and the biggest intake | Class fees and uniform, plus the first mention of the show | | Spring | Exam preparation and the best attendance of the year | Exam entries and costume deposits | | Summer term | Rehearsals eating steadily into normal class time | Costume balances, ticket sales and programme adverts | | Show week | The venue, the technical rehearsal and every family at once | Nothing, because everything should already be paid | | Summer holidays | Workshops if you run them, an empty hall if you do not | Autumn fees, taken before anybody has time to reconsider | A school that reaches show week still collecting money has turned the best event of its year into the worst fortnight of it. ### The show is a separate business borrowing your name Venue hire, a lighting technician, a programme and a set are all paid for weeks before a single ticket is sold. For two months the school is running a small theatre production on a dance school's cashflow. Give it its own account. Tickets, programme adverts and a filmed recording should together cover the venue, and where they do not you are quietly funding the show out of next term's class fees. ### What has to be settled before costumes are ordered - A measured size per pupil, taken this year rather than remembered from last - A deposit up front, because a costume ordered for one child fits nobody else - A clear line on whether it is bought or borrowed, and what happens if it comes back stained - A cut off date, after which a late family is buying at their own risk - Which siblings are in which numbers, so one mother is not asked for four payments in one week ### The register is the earliest warning you will get A pupil who stops does not resign. She misses a week for a birthday, then a week for a cold, then it is half term and she has quietly gone, taking eleven years of fees with her. Two missed weeks in a row is the moment for a friendly message, and it works far more often than anybody expects. After a month it becomes a conversation about coming back, which is a much harder one to have. ### Where a dance school loses money - Family discounts applied from memory, differently, to different families - A costume balance never collected because that parent was helping backstage - A hall paid for by the hour and used by a class of four on a Thursday - Exam fees collected after the entry has already been submitted and paid for - One teacher covering the whole timetable, so a bout of flu closes the school ### You have one customer per family, not one per pupil Three sisters across six classes is one bank account, one phone number and one set of details worth keeping straight. Schools holding pupils separately send that mother four reminders in a week and then wonder why she is short with them about the costume money. Photo consent, emergency contacts and any medical information belong on the pupil record, and they are needed at exactly the moment nobody has time to go looking, which is the fifteen minutes before a show. ### Can I take term fees up front? Yes. Sell a full term or block and take payment up front, so classes are booked and paid before they start. ### Can parents book for children? Yes. Keep student and parent records together so parents can book and pay easily. ### Can I sell memberships? Yes. Memberships and passes keep regulars enrolled and renew automatically. ### Are there per student fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new student fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. A term of classes is one payment covering ten or twelve weeks, so the card rate applies three times a year rather than weekly. The card rate is 2.5% plus 35p and it is the whole rate, because the Youzse platform fee is inside it rather than billed separately. On introductions the answer is short: 0% commission on new students who arrive through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. Terms run September to July with a long summer gap and a show season in between, which a monthly arrangement handles without complaint. Beyond the trial it is a rolling monthly subscription that you are free to cancel at any time. Because records stay exportable throughout, staying with Youzse is never something you are pushed into. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your students, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Registers, grade levels, costume sizes and which siblings are in which class usually live in a folder and a series of group chats. Most are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a full month of running both before anything about your booking link changes. ### Will it work for a term of classes specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a term of classes sits behind an upgrade. Terms sold as one purchase, registers per class, family accounts covering siblings and reminders before a show or an exam are all covered. Youzse serves more than 60 trades, so bring us the awkward part of your week during the trial rather than after it. --- ## A full grooming diary, fur real Source: https://youzse.app/for/dog-groomers Online booking by breed and coat, deposits, vaccination records and reminders, all in one place. Grooming is the only trade here where the customer paying is not the one on the table, and where the job can double in size the moment the door opens. Both of those have to be priced in before the dog arrives rather than argued about afterwards. ### Coat type is the price, breed is only the starting point A puppy trim, a de-shed on a double coated husky and a de-mat on a doodle nobody has brushed since March are three unrelated jobs taking one, two and three hours. A single groom price for all three means the worst dogs are subsidised by the easiest ones. State the de-matting position when the booking is made and not at the door. A surcharge agreed in advance is accepted without comment. The same surcharge produced at collection is an argument, and it is an argument you have while holding somebody's dog. ### What actually fills a grooming day | Part of the appointment | Roughly | Where it goes wrong | | --- | --- | --- | | Check in and coat assessment | Ten minutes | The moment a booked tidy turns out to be a strip off | | Bathing and drying | Often half the appointment | A thick coat dried badly mats within a week and comes back as your fault | | The groom itself | What the owner thinks she booked | A dog that will not stand still doubles this and cannot be hurried | | Nails, ears and finishing | Fifteen minutes | Routinely done free and almost never on the bill | Four dogs a day is four handovers a day, which is why staggered collection times matter as much as the grooming slots themselves. ### The six week cycle is a welfare question before it is a commercial one A dog groomed on schedule is a quick and profitable appointment. The same dog at twelve weeks is a de-mat that would hurt the animal, and you may be professionally obliged to clip it off rather than attempt to save the coat. Standing appointments answer this better than reminders do. Set the recurring booking at the interval the coat needs and the diary becomes predictable enough to plan staff and van hours around. Where an owner will not commit to a standing slot, time the prompt to the coat. A poodle and a labrador do not need the same message, and sending both the same one tells the poodle owner you are not paying attention. ### What belongs on a pet record before the dog is on the table - Vaccination dates, prompted before the appointment rather than asked about on the day - Coat type and the finish the owner actually wants, in the words she used - Temperament notes, including anything the dog has done to a previous groomer - Medical conditions, lumps, arthritis and anything limiting time stood up - How the dog is with a high velocity dryer, which decides the length of the slot - Who is permitted to collect, which matters in shared households more often than you would like - A photograph of the last finish, so the next groomer matches it - The owner record kept linked but separate, because dogs change hands and owners have several ### Temperament notes are a staffing document A dog that has snapped before is information the next groomer needs before it is lifted onto the table, not after. That single note is the difference between a near miss and a claim, and it protects a junior who has never met the animal. It also decides what you charge. A dog needing two people and double the time is a different job to the one on the price list, and it should be booked and billed as a different job from the outset. ### Can I book different times for different breeds? Yes. Set durations by breed and coat type so each groom is given the right amount of time automatically. ### Can I store vaccination records? Yes. Capture proof of vaccination at booking and keep it against each pet profile. ### Does it reduce no shows? Yes. Deposits at booking and automated reminders by WhatsApp and SMS keep the diary full. ### Is there commission on bookings? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments, with no per customer charges. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per salon rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. A matted coat takes longer and costs more, so charging the real figure on the day is where a clear card rate matters. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. On introductions the answer is short: 0% commission on new customers who arrive through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. The fortnight before Christmas is the busiest of the grooming year and February is the flattest, so paying monthly is the sensible arrangement. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Because records stay exportable throughout, staying with Youzse is never something you are pushed into. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Coat condition, behaviour on the table and the last clip length usually live in a paper diary organised by owner rather than by dog. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a full groom on a matted coat specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to a full groom on a matted coat behind an upgrade. Price adjustments recorded at the appointment, notes held against the dog, grooming cycles rebooked automatically and deposits on longer slots are all covered. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## A full diary, spotless admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/domestic-cleaners Take one off and recurring cleans online, keep your week planned and get paid automatically, all from your phone. A domestic round is built on being let into somebody's home while they are at work. That trust takes months to earn and it attaches to a person rather than to a company, which is the central difficulty in growing one of these businesses. ### Three ways a domestic round gets put together | Shape | What you are selling | Where it breaks | | --- | --- | --- | | One cleaner with her own customers | Her hours, and there are only so many | It stops the week she is ill and nobody covers | | A small team on a shared round | Consistency, cover and someone to ring | The customer who only wants the cleaner she likes | | Introductions, with the cleaner paid direct | A match and an ongoing arrangement | You never see the work and hear about problems late | The first is the easiest to start and the hardest to ever sell, because almost nothing in it exists outside one person's head. ### What actually ends a regular clean - A key handed back in a hurry, so covering the visit means somebody standing on a doorstep - A fortnight of holiday nobody rearranged, and a customer discovering the house survives without you - A price that has not moved in three years and then moves by a fifth all at once - A new baby, a new puppy or a move across town that gets mentioned after the fact - One breakage handled defensively rather than honestly - A cleaner leaving and taking four houses with her, because the customers only ever knew her name ### Collect on the day the work happens Forty weekly cleans is forty small collections a week, and doing that by hand is an evening every Sunday for as long as the business exists. Set the payment to run against the visit and the job stops being a job. It quietly settles the cancellation question too. When money moves on the morning of the clean, a customer who cancels at eight is having a conversation about the notice period rather than about an invoice that simply never arrived. Small annual increases are far easier to hold than one large apology every three years. A round that has never had a price rise is not a loyal round, it is one that will lose a third of itself the first time you need one. ### The property record is what makes cover possible The alarm code, which key opens the side door, the dog that must not go out of the back gate, the ironing that is included and the room that is never touched. In most of these businesses all of that lives in one cleaner's memory. Written against the property, a second cleaner can walk in cold and do the job properly. Left in somebody's head, one bout of flu takes out a day of income and usually two customers with it. It is also the only honest answer when something goes missing. Knowing who was in that house, on what date and for how long is the difference between an uncomfortable week and a round that never recovers. ### What holds a domestic round together - Payment that runs on the day of the clean without anybody chasing it - A notice period agreed at the start and applied every time, including for the customers you like - Key and alarm details recorded against the property rather than on a keyring in a van - A named cleaner per house and a named cover cleaner behind her - A written note of what the visit includes, so ironing and ovens are priced rather than absorbed - Streets grown outward from where somebody is already parked - Small annual price movements instead of one large correction ### Can I set up recurring cleans? Yes. Weekly or fortnightly cleans repeat automatically, so your week stays booked without the admin. ### How do customers pay? Take card payments or send a payment link, so you never handle cash or chase invoices. ### Can I keep access notes? Yes. Keep key safe codes, access notes and preferences on each customer record. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. A weekly clean is a small repeating payment, so automatic collection at a known card rate is worth far more than a discount elsewhere. The rate on cards is 2.5% plus 35p and the Youzse platform fee is part of it, so nothing arrives separately later. An introduction costs you nothing: 0% commission on new customers who reach you through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. Domestic cleaning peaks in the fortnight before Christmas and the first weeks of January are the emptiest, which a monthly arrangement handles. The subscription after that is rolling and paid monthly, and you can cancel at any time you decide to. Exports stay available throughout, and your records leave with you if you go. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Key locations, alarm codes, which rooms are included and who prefers which products usually sit in a phone and nowhere safer. Most people are ready to trade the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a whole month of running both before the booking link moves. ### Will it work for a weekly clean specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing a weekly clean needs sits behind an upgrade. Recurring weekly and fortnightly visits, collection that happens automatically, access and preference notes per property and cover when someone is off are all included. Something like 60+ trades already run on Youzse, so raise anything that does not fit while the trial is still open. --- ## A full week, less faff Source: https://youzse.app/for/driving-instructors Pupils book and pay for lessons and blocks online, reminders cut cancellations and your diary sorts itself while you teach. A driving instructor sells the same hour to the same pupil thirty or forty times and then never sees them again. Every name in the diary is on a countdown to a test date, and the business is a queue of countdowns arranged so that they do not all run out in the same fortnight. ### The diary is a route, not a list of names An hour with a pupil in one village followed by an hour in a town twelve minutes away is not two hours of work. It is two hours and a quarter, and the quarter is fuel, wear and time that nobody paid for. Sequence the day geographically and pick up in an order that flows. Instructors who do this teach eight lessons in the time others teach six, in the same car, at the same rate. It is also why a standing weekly slot is worth defending even when a pupil asks to shift it. One move is nothing. A diary where everybody moves every week collapses into an afternoon of driving between appointments that could have sat back to back. Reputation in this trade is a number, and it markets itself. Pupils who pass first time tell everyone they know, and instructors with waiting lists have usually earned them by declining to put somebody in for a test they are not ready for. Presenting a pupil early wins one paid hour and costs the recommendation. ### A pupil from the first lesson to the test | Stage | What it looks like | What it needs from you | | --- | --- | --- | | The first few hours | Quiet roads, clutch control and a great deal of anxiety | A block sold, so the pupil is committed past the hard part | | The long middle | Steady weekly progress, and by far the longest phase | A syllabus record the pupil can watch moving | | Approaching test standard | Manoeuvres, mock tests and independent driving | The test date already booked, because the wait can be long | | Test week | A longer session beforehand and the use of your car | Pricing that reflects a morning held for one pupil | | After the pass | They are gone, and thrilled about it | A review and a referral, asked for on the day | The gap between reaching test standard and sitting the test is dead ground. Pupils who stop lessons in it arrive rusty, and instructors who keep them ticking over hold the income and the pass rate together. ### What a well run instructor does - Sells blocks up front and draws one lesson down at a time - Builds the week as a route rather than a list of names - Holds standing slots and moves them rarely - Gets the test date booked early and works backwards from it - Records syllabus progress so the pupil can see what is left - Sends a reminder the evening before, which removes most morning cancellations - Keeps a waiting list, since a pass frees an hour at almost no notice - Asks for the review and the referral on the day of the pass ### What the hourly rate has to cover - Fuel, which moves with the pump price and never with your price list - Insurance, servicing and tyres on a car doing heavy mileage at low speeds all week - Dual controls, and a vehicle replaced far sooner than a private one would be - The hours spent driving between pupils, unpaid however you look at them - Enquiries answered, test dates arranged and a week rebuilt every time somebody moves - Any block bought at last year's price and taught at this year's costs ### Can I sell blocks of lessons? Yes. Sell blocks and take payment up front, so your week is booked and paid before you turn the key. ### Can I run it from my phone? Yes. Manage your diary, take payments and message pupils from your phone between lessons. ### Does it cut cancellations? Yes. Paying up front and automated reminders together cut last minute cancellations sharply. ### Are there per pupil fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new pupil fees. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. A block of ten hours is one payment covering weeks of lessons, so the card rate applies once rather than after every drive. Paying by card costs 2.5% plus 35p, a single rate that already accounts for the Youzse platform fee rather than billing it separately. Youzse applies 0% commission on new pupils who came in through the marketplace, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. Test bookings and pupil intake surge after Christmas and again in September, and the flat weeks between should not carry a fixed annual fee. After the 30 days it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel at any time you like. Records stay exportable throughout, so the only reason to stay is that it is working. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your pupils along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Hours used, progress against the syllabus and test dates are usually tracked on a paper card the pupil keeps in the glovebox. Most finish setup the same day, and because the 30 day trial costs nothing you can run both systems side by side before committing the booking link. ### Will it work for a block of ten hours specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing a block of ten hours depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Blocks paid up front and drawn down per hour, remaining hours visible to the pupil, lesson reminders and payment taken at the kerb are all included. Youzse covers 60+ trades, and if there is a corner of your work it does not reach, tell us before the trial ends. --- ## Powering the paperwork, so you don't have to Source: https://youzse.app/for/electricians Quotes, job scheduling, invoicing and card payments in one app, so the office side of the job runs itself. An electrician finishes a job with a document. The work itself is buried in a wall where nobody can inspect it, so what the customer actually receives, and what a solicitor, an insurer or a letting agent will later ask them for, is a piece of paper with your name on it. ### Four kinds of electrical work and how each one pays | The work | How it is priced | How it gets paid | | --- | --- | --- | | Fault finding | By the hour, because nobody can quote a fault | On the day, and it should be | | Small installation work | A fixed price per item, quoted from a message | On completion, card at the door | | Rewires, boards and larger installs | Quoted, with a serious materials outlay in front of it | Deposit, stages, balance alongside the paperwork | | Inspection and testing | Per circuit or per property, entirely predictable | On issue of the report, on terms for agents | Only the last line comes back on a known cycle. It is also the one most electricians treat as filler between the real jobs. ### The certificate is the invoice's best friend A customer selling a house, letting a flat or satisfying an insurer needs that paperwork from you and cannot get it anywhere else. Sending the report and the invoice in the same message is the least awkward debt collection available to any trade here. It also means the job is not finished when the tools go back in the van. An electrician sitting on a fortnight of untyped reports has a fortnight of uninvoiced work, and rarely thinks about it in those terms. Some domestic work has to be notified and certificated and some does not, and the customer has no idea which is which. Explaining that clearly at quote stage is a very cheap way to be the one who sounds like they know what they are doing. ### What belongs on the property record rather than in the van - The board, its type and what was on each way the last time you looked - Every report and certificate issued, with its date - What you found last time, and what you recommended but were not asked to do - Which circuits are original and which have been rewired, and when - Any observation coded on a report, so the next visit starts where the last one ended - Whether the property is let, and who manages it - When the next inspection falls due, held in a diary rather than in your memory ### The recommendations nobody acted on are next year's work Every report ends with observations the customer decided against at the time. Money was tight, they were selling anyway, it could wait until the summer. Those are not lost jobs. They are jobs with a date attached to them. The customer who declined a board change in March is a different person in November when a buyer or a lender starts asking questions. If the recommendation sits on the record you can raise it in one message, and if it is in a folder on a laptop it never gets raised at all. ### Why letting agents are worth more than they look - They have many properties and they need the same work carried out on every one of them - They pay on terms without arguing about a call-out, provided the references on the invoice match theirs - They need somebody contactable, which is a considerably lower bar than being cheapest - The tenant is who you deal with on the day, so access and communication is most of the actual job - One agent leaving takes several properties with it, which is a concentration risk worth being aware of - They stay with whoever makes the compliance side effortless, and that is administrative competence rather than technical skill ### Can I quote from site? Yes. Build and send a branded quote from your phone and customers can accept it straight away. ### How do customers pay? Every invoice includes a Stripe payment link for instant card payment and overdue invoices are chased automatically. ### Can I plan jobs for my team? Yes. Schedule jobs across engineers in one diary with reminders for customers. ### What does it cost? One subscription from £19 a month, 2.5% + 35p on card payments and no contract. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per business rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. A consumer unit upgrade is a substantial single payment on completion, so the card rate applies to a large amount and deserves a proper look. Card processing is 2.5% plus 35p. That rate already carries the Youzse platform fee, which is why you will not find it invoiced apart. There is 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse, and no setup cost to begin. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. Notifiable work and landlord certificates keep the winter full while August thins out, and paying by the month absorbs the gap. Afterwards the subscription is rolling and monthly, and cancelling is something you can do at any time. Your records stay exportable throughout, so leaving is a decision rather than a negotiation. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Circuit schedules, test results and certificate expiry dates usually live in a folder in the van and a filing cabinet at home. Same day setup is the norm, and running the two alongside each other through the 30 day trial is how you check everything before switching the booking link. ### Will it work for a consumer unit upgrade specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a consumer unit upgrade is fully served from the first day. Certificates stored against the property, five yearly reminders for landlords, deposits on materials and quotes with the scope written down are all there. More than 60 trades use Youzse. If yours works in a way that does not fit, raise it while the trial is still running. --- ## Priced by the metre, paid on the day Source: https://youzse.app/for/fencing-contractors Price the run by the metre, take a deposit that covers the timber on order and send the balance before the van leaves the property. Fencing is a van of panels, a day rate and the weather. Almost the whole cost of a run is bought and paid for before a single post goes into the ground. ### A day on a fence run, and where it goes | Part of the day | Roughly | What it costs when it slips | | --- | --- | --- | | Loading and collecting materials | The first hour | A merchant trip mid job wipes out the profit on the run | | Taking the old fence out | Always underestimated | Concrete footings double the labour and were never quoted | | Setting the posts | The bulk of the work | Rock or a buried service stops the day dead | | Panels, gravel boards and caps | Quick once the posts are in | Nothing, this is the part the customer watches | | Clearing the spoil | The last hour | Removal not agreed means a tip run on your own time | Quote by the metre with removal and spoil priced separately, so the conversation at the end is about neither of them. ### The weather is your order book Demand does not arrive evenly. It arrives in the fortnight after wind brings panels down across a whole county, and every contractor in the area is busy on the same Monday morning. The people who say yes fastest are the ones you have already fenced for, because they know what a properly set post looks like. Contacting them the day after bad weather converts better than anything else you will send all year. It is also the only stretch of the year when you can hold your price. A quiet April is when discounting starts. ### Materials money is not your money Timber, postcrete and gravel boards are ordered and paid for before the job starts. A contractor funding materials out of his own account across four live jobs is running a small credit business he never applied to run. Take a deposit that covers what is actually on order rather than a token percentage. Customers accept this readily because they can see the delivery arrive on their own driveway. Send the balance the moment the last cap goes on. A fence is finished and visibly so, which makes this the easiest trade here to be paid for before you leave the property. ### What a well run fencing business does - Prices by the metre with removal and spoil listed separately - Takes a deposit that covers the timber actually on order - Checks for buried services before quoting a run of post holes - Sends the balance before the van leaves the property - Contacts every past customer in the week after a storm - Photographs the finished run from the pavement for the gallery - Records which boundary belongs to which neighbour ### Can customers approve quotes online? Yes. Send a branded quote for the run that customers approve online, then confirm with a deposit. ### Can I take a deposit for materials? Yes. Take a deposit to cover materials and confirm the date, then invoice the balance on completion. ### Does it track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so no job slips through. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. Panels and posts are bought before a hole is dug, so a deposit taken by card at order is the moment the rate is doing real work. Card takings are charged at 2.5% plus 35p, one rate with the Youzse platform fee folded in rather than presented on its own. Youzse takes 0% commission on new customers it sends your way, and there is no setup cost either. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. The fortnight after the first winter gales is the busiest stretch of the year and midsummer is not, which suits paying by the month. It carries on as a rolling monthly subscription and can be cancelled at any time. Records stay exportable the whole way through, which means walking away never means losing anything. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Run lengths, panel types, gate details and which neighbours are splitting the cost usually live on a quote pad in the van. The move itself takes a day at most, and the 30 day trial lets you run the two together until switching the booking link is uneventful. ### Will it work for a run of new fence panels specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a run of new fence panels sits behind an upgrade. Deposits covering materials, quotes with measurements and photographs, job history per property and storm follow up messaging are all there. 60+ trades are supported, and anything that does not fit is worth saying out loud before the trial ends. --- ## A full ramp, less phone tag Source: https://youzse.app/for/garages Customers book services and MOTs online by registration, you quote extra work and take payment and reminders bring them back when the next one is due. A garage sells ramp hours. There is a fixed number of them in a week, none can be stored, and the difference between a workshop that thrives and one that survives is almost entirely how many of those hours were sold rather than merely attended. ### Where the ramp hours go in a typical week | What is on the ramp | What it does for the week | The catch | | --- | --- | --- | | MOT testing | Brings the whole book back on a known cycle | Priced keenly everywhere, so it earns through what it finds | | Servicing | Predictable, bookable weeks ahead, easy to schedule | Fixed price menus that ignore how long the car took | | Repairs from old advisories | The most profitable work in the building | Only happens where somebody follows the advisory up | | Diagnostics | High skill, high value, very little parts cost | Hardest to price, so most often given away | | Warranty and account work | Fills quiet weeks and pays without chasing | Pays on their terms, thirty days at best | The bay that tests is not the bay that earns. Testing pays for itself by putting the whole customer book in front of you with a list attached. ### Sold hours and attended hours are two different numbers A technician is in the building for forty hours. The only question that matters is how many of them reached an invoice. Between the two sit road tests, parts collection, authorisation waits, moving cars around the yard and twenty minutes looking for a fitting. Most workshops have never measured that gap. Recovering two hours per technician per week across three technicians is roughly three hundred billable hours a year, with no extra staff and no extra customers. The biggest single cause is the authorisation wait. You find worn discs, you ring the owner, they are in a meeting, and a ramp holds a car that nobody is allowed to work on. ### The advisory list is next year's diary, already written Every inspection produces a list of things not urgent yet. It has a rough date attached and it is the only forward order book a garage gets for nothing. Hardly anybody works it. The advisory gets written down, the customer collects the car, and nine months later the job is done elsewhere by whoever made contact first. The same goes for service intervals and test dates on vehicles you have already had in. ### Where ramp hours quietly disappear - A customer who does not pick up while the car waits for approval - A part ordered wrong because nobody recorded the engine variant - A no show on a booked service, on a fully committed morning - A job quoted from memory and invoiced below the parts and hours - Courtesy cars returned empty and charged to nobody - Waiting appointments taken all morning, which feel like service and wreck the bay plan ### What a well run garage does - Measures sold hours against attended hours per technician - Sends extra work as a quote with a photograph, approvable from a phone - Turns last visit advisories into this visit quotes, every time - Sends service and test reminders automatically rather than by report - Takes a deposit before ordering a part specific to one vehicle - Carries an approved quote through to job and invoice without retyping - Tracks parts cost against sell price per job to see the real margin - Takes payment before the keys are handed back - Keeps a call list to refill a ramp a cancellation has just freed ### The forecourt sets the price, the record sets the margin Two garages a mile apart charge similar rates and earn very different money. The difference is rarely the rate. It is parts margin, how much of the week was billed and how much work came back unprompted. All three are record keeping. A workshop that knows what it fitted, what it advised and when the next date falls due is running a book of customers. One that knows only today is running a queue. ### Can customers book an MOT online? Yes. Customers book services and MOTs online by registration and automatic reminders bring them back when the next one is due. ### Can I quote for extra work I find? Yes. Send a quote for any extra work, get it approved and add it to the job before you start. ### How do customers pay? Take a deposit on booking and the balance on collection, by card in person or with a payment link. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per workshop rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. An MOT and service is one payment at collection, so the card rate applies to a predictable ticket several times a day. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. Nothing is taken from an introduction, because it is 0% commission on new customers found through Youzse, with no setup cost to start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. March and September are the heaviest MOT months by a distance, and the quieter ones between are a poor time to be tied in. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, so you are never choosing between your data and your options. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. MOT due dates, service history and advisories usually live in a workshop system that will not export in a form you can use. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for an MOT and service specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing an MOT and service needs sits behind an upgrade. MOT dates read from the registration, reminders that send themselves, service history against the vehicle and digital vehicle health checks are all included. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## A full round, less rounding up Source: https://youzse.app/for/gardeners Book one off jobs or recurring visits, quote larger work and take payment on site, all planned around your round. Garden maintenance is paid by the hour and the plants decide how many hours there are. Between May and September the same garden takes half as long again as it did in March, and hardly anyone prices for that. ### Why a flat hourly rate underpays a gardener in June - A lawn that took twenty minutes in April takes thirty five in June, and it is due every ten days instead of every three weeks - The volume of green waste roughly doubles, and moving it is time, fuel and a charge at the other end - The only reason more work fits into a summer day is daylight, and daylight is not something anybody can invoice - The visit a customer cancels is always the one in the week the money was already spoken for - Winter visits get judged against a summer expectation, so the hardest half of the year is the half that looks expensive ### The maintenance year on a domestic round | Months | What the round is doing | What should also be selling | | --- | --- | --- | | March and April | First cuts, everything at once, every customer rings the same fortnight | Standing arrangements rather than one-off tidies | | May to August | Cutting on a ten day cycle, hedges from July onward | Hedge work priced as its own job, not squeezed into the visit | | September and October | Growth stops, leaves start, the round feels slow | Clearances, borders cut back, gutters and jet washing | | November to February | Two visits a month at most | Pruning, structural work, turf repairs and planting | The gardener who stops in October has to sell the round all over again in April. The one who keeps a reduced winter visit keeps the customer, the slot and the position on the street. ### A round is a shape rather than a list Twelve gardens in one village is a business. Twelve gardens spread across fifteen miles is a driving job with some gardening in it. The difference never shows up in the hourly rate, it shows up in how many gardens fit into a Tuesday. That makes turning work down a commercial decision rather than a rude one. An enquiry ten minutes off the route has to earn the round trip before it earns anything, and taking it usually costs a slot you could have sold to somebody already on the run. ### Say what is in the visit and what sits outside it The awkward conversation in this trade is always about scope. A customer who books two hours means two hours of gardening, and she has quietly included clearing the shed, moving a tree fern and running three bags of rubble to the tip. Green waste deserves stating in particular. Taking arisings away costs fuel, time and a fee when you get there, and a gardener absorbing that on every visit is running a disposal service he never charged anybody for. Hedge cuts, clearances, turfing and pressure washing sit outside the round and get priced as their own work. Written down at the start, the customer asking for them is a sale rather than an imposition. ### What a maintenance round needs written down - A cycle per garden, tighter in summer and longer in winter, agreed once - Payment that runs on the arrangement rather than on a knock at the door - Exactly what the visit includes, and what is quoted separately - Whether green waste leaves with you, and what that adds - Gate codes, dogs, where the outside tap is and what must never be cut back - A winter pattern agreed in September rather than abandoned in October - Which gardens sit on which run, so a new enquiry is judged first by where it lives ### Can I set up recurring visits? Yes. Weekly, fortnightly or monthly visits repeat automatically so your round stays full without the admin. ### Can I quote for bigger jobs? Yes. Send a quote for landscaping or clearance work and confirm it with a deposit. ### How do customers pay? Take contactless card payments on site or send a payment link, so you never chase cash. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per business rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A fortnightly visit is a small recurring payment, so collecting it automatically at a known card rate is worth more than chasing cash. Every card payment is 2.5% plus 35p, the Youzse platform fee included in the rate rather than stacked on afterwards. A first booking made through Youzse carries 0% commission on new customers, and opening the account has no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. Growth stops in November and starts again in March, and paying for the months you use is the only sensible way through that. The subscription that follows is monthly and rolling, so you can cancel at any time without asking anyone. Records stay exportable throughout, which means your history comes with you whether you stay or not. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Round schedules, gate codes, which weeks each garden falls on and who pays how usually live in a diary and your memory. It is usually done inside a day. Keep both live through the 30 day trial and only point your booking link at Youzse once you are ready. ### Will it work for a fortnightly garden visit specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a fortnightly garden visit calls for sits behind an upgrade. Recurring visits on each customer own cycle, collection that happens automatically, rounds scheduled by area and notes against the property are all covered. The platform covers 60+ trades, and the trial is the window for telling us if something about your work still does not fit. --- ## Win the project, plant the admin elsewhere Source: https://youzse.app/for/landscapers Capture enquiries, quote after a site visit, confirm with a deposit and invoice in stages, all from your phone. A garden build is two thirds groundwork that nobody photographs. The client bought a picture of a terrace and the first three weeks are a digger, a mountain of spoil and a garden that looks considerably worse than it did before you arrived. ### Charge for the design or stop drawing them A plan carrying levels, falls, drainage, a planting schedule and a named materials list takes days to produce. Handed over free it becomes a shopping list the client walks round to a cheaper contractor. Price it as its own piece of work, deliver it as its own piece of work and credit it against the build if they proceed. Clients who pay for a drawing are a different species from clients collecting numbers. It settles the specification as well. Once a stone is named and a fall is dimensioned, the argument about what was included has nowhere left to happen. ### Where the money goes on a garden build | Part of the job | Share of the cost | Who gets paid first | | --- | --- | --- | | Groundwork, muck away and disposal | A large slice, invisible once finished | The skip company and the tip, on the day | | Hard landscaping and materials | The single biggest outlay | The merchant, before anything is delivered | | Subcontractors and plant hire | Small but unforgiving | The electrician and the hire yard, weekly | | Planting, turf and irrigation | The last and the smallest | You, if the budget survived the groundwork | The planting is what sells the garden and it is the first line a client cuts when the digging ran over. Protect it inside the staged payments rather than hoping. ### The ground is never what the drawing assumed A terrace set at the level on the plan meets a manhole nobody knew about, made ground full of buried brick or a boundary sitting three hundred millimetres from where the deeds imply it should. All of that is normal and none of it is free. Photograph what comes out of the hole on the day it comes out, price the variation before it turns into work and get it agreed in writing. A dated picture of a Victorian soakaway settles a conversation that words never will. ### What turns a profitable garden into a break even one - Muck away priced by the skip when the spoil turns out to be twice the volume of the hole - A client who moves the terrace two metres after the sub base has gone in - Stone ordered in one batch and then topped up from a pallet that does not match - A planting scheme specified in March and installed in the middle of a July drought ### The build is the start of the customer, not the end Somebody who has just spent a substantial sum on a garden now owns a garden that has to be kept. Raise the maintenance at handover while they are standing in it and delighted, rather than in a letter next spring when the borders have gone over. Keep the planting schedule, the stone, the pointing mix and the irrigation layout against the property. A matching replacement three years later is then something you price from a record instead of a site visit. It is also the most photographable trade of the lot. A finished garden shot from the exact position of the before picture wins more work than anything you could pay to place in front of anyone. ### What should be agreed before the digger arrives - A paid design showing levels, falls and where the water is going - A deposit that covers the stone actually on order rather than a token percentage - Stage payments tied to visible milestones rather than to calendar dates - Who is disposing of the spoil, and the basis that was priced on - Access, because a rear garden reached through a house changes every cost on the job ### Can I quote after a site visit? Yes. Quote once you have seen the site and let customers approve it online, then confirm with a deposit. ### Can I invoice in stages? Yes. Take a deposit up front and invoice in stages as the project progresses. ### Does it track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so no project slips through. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your business and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. A redesign is paid in stages as materials land and work progresses, so the card rate applies several times across a single project. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. Youzse applies 0% commission on new customers who came in through the marketplace, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Design work fills the winter and build work fills the spring, and the wet weeks between are a poor reason to be tied to anything. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Records stay exportable throughout, so the only reason to stay is that it is working. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Plans, plant schedules, material orders and site photographs usually sit across a drawing tube, a phone and a supplier inbox. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a garden redesign specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and a garden redesign. Staged payments across a project, plans and plant schedules per job, quotes with photographs and maintenance visits booked afterwards are all included. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## Booked out, lash by lash Source: https://youzse.app/for/lash-technicians A branded booking page, card deposits and reminders that keep your column full and your clients coming back for infills. A lash technician works on one client at a time, lying down, for two hours. There is no double booking, no processing time and nobody else to hold the bed, which makes lashing the least forgiving diary in beauty. ### The lash cycle and what each appointment is worth | Appointment | Time at the bed | Where the profit actually is | | --- | --- | --- | | A classic full set | Around two hours | The lowest return per hour you offer, yet the one everybody advertises | | A volume set | Two and a half hours or more | Better, if the price reflects the skill rather than the tray | | Infills at two weeks | Forty five minutes to an hour | The appointment the entire business rests on | | Infills at four weeks | Most of a full set | Charged as an infill by technicians who then wonder where the day went | Full sets are the cost of acquiring a client. Infills are the business, which is why retention matters more than how many new sets you take this month. ### Retention is a technical number before it is a commercial one How long a set lasts comes down to isolation, adhesive, the humidity in the room and what the client does to her face in the shower. It is the number deciding whether she returns at two weeks or gives up at four and goes back to strip lashes. Record the map, the curl, the length, the diameter and the adhesive against her, then record what her retention was actually like. A client losing lashes on one side every time is telling you how she sleeps, and the next set should be built differently because of it. Aftercare that sends automatically is not a courtesy. An oil based cleanser and a facial steamer will take a set down inside ten days, and the technician is blamed for both of them. ### Two hours is far too long to leave unprotected A full set that does not arrive is your entire morning, and it is the one appointment nobody can fill at two hours notice. Deposits on full sets are simply how this trade works, and almost no client objects once it is presented as normal rather than as suspicion. Apply the cancellation policy identically to everybody. A technician who waives it for a friend of a friend has no policy at all by the end of the year, and she can name the exact client who made that true. Make rescheduling self service. A client who wakes with a swollen eye at six in the morning will move the appointment herself if she can, and will simply not turn up if she cannot. ### What a well run lash business does - Takes a deposit on every full set without exception - Books the infill at the bed before she stands up - Prices infills by how long she left it rather than by the name - Times the prompt to her set and to the retention she actually gets - Records curl, length, diameter, adhesive and the exact map used - Sends aftercare automatically after every set and every infill - Lets clients reschedule themselves at any hour ### The patch test is the record most likely to be asked for Cyanoacrylate adhesive causes real allergic reactions and they arrive without warning, often in a client who has been fine for two years. A patch test with a date, the product and a recorded result is what an insurer expects to see and what most technicians cannot produce. Record it against the client rather than in a book behind the desk, and record it again whenever you change adhesive. A test on a product you no longer use is not a test, it is a piece of paper. ### Can I take a deposit on every booking? Yes. Take a card deposit at the point of booking to protect your time and cut no shows. ### Can I bring clients back for infills? Yes. Automated reminders bring clients back on the right infill cycle so your column stays full. ### Can I record patch tests? Yes. Keep patch test dates, notes and history on each client record. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per studio rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. A full set is one payment and the infills that follow are smaller ones on a two to three week cycle, so the rate applies often. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. Nothing is taken from an introduction, because it is 0% commission on new clients found through Youzse, with no setup cost to start. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. Party season and the run up to summer holidays are full while late January is empty, which suits paying month by month. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Records stay exportable throughout, so you are never choosing between your data and your options. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Curl, length, adhesive and any sensitivity are usually written on a card that never leaves the treatment room. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a set of extensions and its infill specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a set of extensions and its infill is fully served from the first day. Infills booked at the appointment, set specifications on the client record, retention prompts on each client own cycle and patch test dates are all covered. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## More callouts, less waiting around Source: https://youzse.app/for/locksmiths Take bookings and callouts online, quote the job and get paid on site by card, all from your phone whatever the hour. A locksmith is bought in the worst ten minutes of somebody's day. She is on a doorstep in the dark, she has already tried three numbers and only two questions matter to her. How long will you be, and what is it going to cost. ### The four jobs a locksmith actually does | Type of work | How it gets bought | What it is worth | | --- | --- | --- | | A lockout at eleven at night | The first person who answers and names a price | A short job at a night rate, settled on the spot | | A burglary repair the next morning | Urgently, often through an insurer or an agent | A repair plus an upgrade, to somebody who is listening properly | | Planned security work | Quoted, compared and thought about for a fortnight | The largest ticket, and the only one with margin on the parts | | Agent and landlord changeovers | A standing arrangement with somebody who has many doors | Small, constant and invoiced on terms | Most locksmiths earn from the first line and build a business out of the last two. The gap between them is whether anybody follows up once the door is open. ### Why an unquoted call-out damages this trade more than any other - The customer is stressed, it is late and she has no way of comparing anything to anything - A price named on the doorstep after the lock is drilled reads as an ambush whether or not it was one - Non-destructive entry takes real skill and looks like nothing happened, which makes it the hardest work in the trade to charge properly for - The review written that night is read by everybody who searches at midnight for the next two years - A figure agreed on the phone, with the out of hours element included in it, removes every part of that ### The lockout is an introduction to a house with bad locks Somebody who has just been let back into her own home is standing beside a door you opened in four minutes. That is the most receptive anybody is ever going to be to a conversation about the cylinder in it. It rarely happens then, because she wants to go to bed and you want to go home. It happens a week later, in a follow up most locksmiths never send, and it is worth several times what the call-out was. The same holds after a break-in. The upgrade, the back door, the window locks and the garage are all bought within the fortnight afterwards or they are never bought at all. ### What you fitted is sensitive information A list of which properties have which locks, who holds a key and which agent manages the block is exactly the sort of record a locksmith should be careful with. It is also the record that turns the second job into twenty minutes instead of an hour. Keep it against the address rather than the person, because people move and doors do not. An agent ringing about a flat wants to know what is on it now, not what a departing tenant thinks was fitted. Suited systems make this unavoidable. Once one key opens six doors in a building, the only reliable version of the truth is the one that was written down at the time. It is worth being explicit with commercial clients about how that information is held and who can see it, because they will eventually ask. Being the locksmith with a straight answer to that question is how the small jobs turn into the whole block. ### Can customers book a callout online? Yes. Customers book callouts and planned work from your booking page and you fit urgent jobs around the day. ### How do I take payment on site? Take contactless card payments in person or send a secure payment link, so you never chase cash. ### Can I run it from my phone? Yes. Manage jobs, quotes and payments from your phone wherever the work takes you. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. A lockout is paid on the doorstep at two in the morning, so contactless on your phone at the rate you already quoted is the whole arrangement. For cards it is 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee is contained in that number instead of appearing as a second charge. The platform charges 0% commission on new customers who discover you on Youzse, and nothing at all as a setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. Lockouts rise through the dark winter evenings and fall away in June, and the quieter months should not be paid for in advance. Once the trial ends the subscription rolls monthly, and cancelling at any time is your call alone. Records remain exportable throughout, so nothing at all is being kept back to make you stay. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your customers along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Which locks are on which door, key numbers and the landlords behind each property usually live on invoices rather than in a searchable record. Setup lands the same day for most people, and the 30 day trial is there to be used. Run both, compare them, then switch the booking link. ### Will it work for a night time lockout specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing a night time lockout depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Payment taken at the door, lock and key details against the address, recurring landlord work and quotes sent before you travel are all included. There are more than 60 trades on Youzse. If your way of working needs something else, tell us while the trial has time left on it. --- ## You do the treatment. We do the rest. Source: https://youzse.app/for/massage-therapists A branded booking page, health intake forms, deposits and reminders that keep your week full and your clients prepared. A massage therapist has a hard physical ceiling that most trades do not. There are only so many deep tissue hours in a pair of hands in a week, so the question is never how to do more of them. It is what each one is worth. ### Why a diary of single massages earns less than it should - A one off treatment is the easiest thing in the world to skip in an expensive month - The client decides again every single time, and decides it while she is no longer in pain - One session rarely resolves a shoulder that took two years to build, so the outcome disappoints and the therapist gets the blame - A book of singles gives you no forward view, so a quiet February arrives with no warning at all - A block bought up front is one decision, made once, while the reason for making it is still obvious - The card fee is paid on one transaction rather than on six ### Rebook from the table, not from the doorway The best moment to book the next session is while she is still lying down and can feel the difference. Ten minutes later she is at the desk with her coat on, thinking about the school run, and the answer becomes that she will ring you. She will not ring you. Nobody in this trade has ever been rung by the client who said she would ring, and the appointment quietly turns into an annual treat instead of a monthly habit. ### A notice period only works if it applies to everybody Ninety minutes of deep tissue that does not arrive is ninety minutes that cannot be resold, and the room was heated, the oils were out and the towels were washed for it. Take a deposit weighted to the length of the appointment and apply the same notice period to every client without exception. Waiving it for the clients you like is precisely what makes it unenforceable against the ones you do not. Make cancelling easy while making late cancelling costly. A client who can move the appointment herself at eleven at night gives you two days of notice. A client who has to telephone during working hours gives you none. ### What a massage therapist can actually be paid for | Work | How it bills | What limits it | | --- | --- | --- | | Treatments in your own room | On the day, or drawn down from a block | Your hands and the hours in a week | | Mobile visits at the client's home | A higher rate that has to cover the travel | Two unbilled hours of driving between three clients | | Chair massage on a company site | A day rate invoiced on terms | Finding the account, rather than doing the work | | Cover for a gym or a sports club | A retainer or a session fee on terms | Being paid on time by somebody else's treasurer | The mix decides the income more than the hourly rate does. A week of mobile visits at a premium can clear less than a week in one room once the driving is counted honestly. ### What a well run massage practice does - Sells blocks of sessions up front and draws them down automatically - Rebooks from the table at the end of the session - Weights the deposit to the length of the appointment - Applies the notice period identically to every client - Runs a waitlist so a late cancellation refills itself - Sends the health intake with the booking confirmation rather than on a clipboard - Records pressure, the areas worked and the areas to avoid - Prices mobile work with the travel time actually counted ### Are health questionnaires secure? Yes. Health information is special category data, so it is encrypted and handled to UK GDPR standards with full consent records. ### Can I work mobile as well as in a clinic? Yes. Manage clinic rooms and mobile visits in the same diary, with travel time built into your schedule. ### Do you charge per client? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. Unlimited clients on every plan. ### Can I keep treatment notes? Yes. Keep a secure history of notes and treatments against each client record. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per practice rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. An hour on the table is one payment at the end, so the card rate is effectively the only cost between the work and your bank. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. It is 0% commission on new clients who come through Youzse, and no setup cost at any point. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. Marathon season and the weeks after Christmas are busy while high summer is quiet, and a monthly arrangement tracks that honestly. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Your records stay exportable throughout, so there is nothing to unpick if you decide to move on. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Areas worked, pressure preferences and what a client came in with are usually written on paper that stays in the treatment room. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for a deep tissue hour specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a deep tissue hour is never the thing that forces an upgrade. Block bookings, treatment notes on one timeline, rebooking prompts at the interval you set and health information handled under UK GDPR are all there. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## More jobs, less driving about Source: https://youzse.app/for/mobile-mechanics Customers book by location, you quote and take payment on the drive and reminders keep the round running. All from your phone. A mobile mechanic has no premises, no ramp and no counter. The workshop is a van, the bay is somebody else's driveway, and the invoice has to be settled before you drive away, because after that there is nothing left to hold. ### Jobs a driveway cannot take - Anything needing the car properly in the air for longer than a trolley jack ought to hold it - Work running over two days on a road where the car cannot safely be left - A job on a slope, on loose gravel or in a shared car park with nobody's permission to be there - Heavy fluid changes with nowhere lawful to put what comes out - Diagnostics needing a road test the owner has not authorised - Anything where rain arriving at noon turns a routine morning into an unfinished car ### What a day of callouts is actually made of | Part of the day | What it costs you | What it should have been | | --- | --- | --- | | Driving between jobs | Fuel and an hour or two of unbilled time | Three jobs within a few miles, booked as one run | | Waiting on a parts delivery | A driveway you cannot leave and cannot bill for | Parts collected on the way or the job set for the next day | | The diagnosis before the quote | Given free, and usually the most skilled part of it | Charged as its own visit, credited against the repair | | The repair itself | The only part anybody thinks they are paying for | Quoted as labour time and parts, separately and in writing | | Getting paid | A phone call a fortnight later, then another one | Contactless on the driveway before the tools go back in | Two of those five lines are almost always unpaid, and both belong inside the price of the fourth once anybody works the rate out properly. ### Paid before the van moves A garage holds the keys. You hold nothing, so the moment the bonnet closes your invoice turns into a favour you are asking for. Take the card on the driveway, before the tools go back in, every time and without making exceptions for regulars. Parts are the other exposure. A part ordered against one registration fits one car and has no resale value, so a deposit covering it is not a test of trust. It is the difference between a cancelled job and a box in the van you will never sell. Extra work found half way through has to be approved in writing from the driveway, with a photograph. The owner is often at work and the conversation is often by message, which is exactly why a picture of the split boot settles it in one exchange instead of three. ### What a well run mobile operation does - Takes the card payment on site before packing up - Takes a deposit before ordering a part specific to a registration - Quotes call-out, labour and parts as separate lines so all three are understood - Gets extra work approved by message with a photograph attached - Books the day as a geographic run rather than in order of enquiry - Holds a stated radius and charges beyond it instead of absorbing the miles - Keeps history against the registration so the second visit starts from the first - Declines the jobs a driveway cannot take, early and without apologising ### The plate is the customer record People forget what was done and when. The vehicle does not. Job history, parts fitted and what you advised belong against the registration, because the registration is the thing that comes back, occasionally with a different owner attached to it. That record is also the cheapest repeat work available to a one van operation. Knowing what you last found, and when the next service or test falls due, turns a one off callout into somebody who rings you rather than searching again. Youzse starts from £19 a month, with a thirty day free trial that does not ask for a card. ### Can customers book by their location? Yes. Customers book by registration and location, so you can plan your round around where you already are. ### How do I take payment on the drive? Take contactless card payments in person or send a secure payment link, so you never have to chase cash. ### Can I send quotes first? Yes. Send a quote, take a deposit to confirm the job and collect the balance when the work is done. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. A roadside repair is settled where the car is, so contactless on your phone at a rate you already know is the entire payment plan. The rate on cards is 2.5% plus 35p and the Youzse platform fee is part of it, so nothing arrives separately later. Where a booking begins on Youzse there is still 0% commission on new customers, and no setup cost is charged. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. Breakdowns spike in the first cold weeks and again in the holiday getaway, and the flat stretches between suit paying by the month. The subscription after that is rolling and paid monthly, and you can cancel at any time you decide to. You can export your records throughout, which is what makes cancelling a simple thing rather than a project. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Registrations, previous repairs and parts fitted usually live on invoices in the van rather than anywhere you could actually search. Most people are ready to trade the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a whole month of running both before the booking link moves. ### Will it work for a roadside repair specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a roadside repair is never the thing that forces an upgrade. Payment taken at the roadside, vehicle history against the registration, MOT due date reminders and quotes sent before the work starts are all covered. Something like 60+ trades already run on Youzse, so raise anything that does not fit while the trial is still open. --- ## A full timetable, in tune Source: https://youzse.app/for/music-teachers Pupils book lessons and terms online and pay up front, reminders cut cancellations and your week sorts itself while you teach. A music teacher sells half an hour at an instrument, repeated every week of term for years on end. Nothing else on this site has a unit that small or a relationship that long, and almost every problem in the trade comes out of that combination. ### The half hour rate is not the hourly rate Thirty pounds for thirty minutes reads like sixty an hour and very rarely is. Teaching in pupils' homes puts ten minutes in the car between each one, so five lessons occupy four hours and pay for two and a half of them. Teaching from one room reverses that completely. The same five pupils arrive back to back, the piano never moves and the afternoon holds eight lessons instead of five. For a teacher who currently drives, it is the single largest change in earnings available. Where travel has to happen, cluster it. One village on a Tuesday and another on a Thursday is worth more than an efficient looking diary that crosses the county twice in a day. ### What fills the half hours nobody wants - Adult beginners, who are free during the day and rarely want an evening - Home educated pupils, who will happily take a Tuesday morning at the full rate - Paired lessons for two pupils at a similar stage, which pay better per hour than either alone - Theory in a small group, which is one hour of preparation sold several times over - Accompanying, which is a separate skill and deserves a separate invoice - Ensemble coaching in a school, which fills a daytime block on one invoice ### The teaching calendar and what runs on it | Part of the year | What is happening | What has to be done inside it | | --- | --- | --- | | September | New pupils, a rebuilt timetable and everybody back | Fix the standing slots for the term and collect for the term | | Autumn term | Steady teaching and the winter exam entries | Enter pupils, book an accompanist, collect exam fees up front | | Christmas | Concerts, carol work and paid engagements | Sell the spring term before anybody leaves for the holidays | | Spring term | The heaviest exam season and the fastest progress | Watch the pupils stalling rather than the ones flying | | July and August | Teaching stops very nearly altogether | Run summer courses or accept two months without fee income | A teacher billing per lesson has two months a year with nothing coming in. A teacher billing monthly across twelve has the same annual fee spread over a year the family already understands. ### Where the money leaks in a teaching week - Exam entry fees and accompanist fees paid from your own account and reclaimed in dribs - A pupil cancelling on the day for a hockey fixture that has existed since August - Books, reeds, rosin and photocopies bought for pupils and itemised on nothing - A half hour taught for forty five minutes every week because the piece was nearly there - A leaver at Christmas, from a slot you cannot refill until the following September ### The grades are why they stay and why they quit A pupil with an exam eleven weeks away practises. A pupil with no date drifts, and drifting appears as a cancelled Wednesday long before anybody uses the word stopping. The wall is theory. Plenty of pupils who love playing stall the moment progress depends on paperwork, and that is a retention problem wearing a syllabus costume. Teachers who see it coming put theory in early and in a group, where it is cheaper for the family and much less lonely for the pupil. Keep repertoire, grades and entry deadlines on a record rather than in a notebook by the piano. A missed entry deadline costs a term of momentum, and the pupil never blames the deadline. ### Can I take term fees up front? Yes. Sell a term or block of lessons and take payment in advance, so your week is booked and paid. ### Can I keep regulars in the same slot? Yes. Recurring slots keep regular pupils in the same time each week. ### Can I run it from my phone? Yes. Manage your timetable, take payments and message pupils and parents from your phone. ### Are there per pupil fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new pupil fees. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. A weekly lesson billed as a monthly plan is a small recurring payment, so automatic collection at a known card rate removes the awkward part. Card takings are charged at 2.5% plus 35p, one rate with the Youzse platform fee folded in rather than presented on its own. A first booking made through Youzse carries 0% commission on new pupils, and opening the account has no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. Terms and exam sessions drive the year and the summer is quiet, which is an argument for paying by the month rather than by the year. It carries on as a rolling monthly subscription and can be cancelled at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, which means your history comes with you whether you stay or not. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your pupils along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Pieces set, grade progress and exam entry dates usually live in a practice diary the pupil takes home again every week. The move itself takes a day at most, and the 30 day trial lets you run the two together until switching the booking link is uneventful. ### Will it work for a weekly lesson specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing a weekly lesson depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Standing weekly slots, monthly plans collected automatically, progress notes per pupil and reminders before an exam date are all included. 60+ trades are supported, and anything that does not fit is worth saying out loud before the trial ends. --- ## Booked out, beautifully Source: https://youzse.app/for/nail-technicians A branded booking page, card deposits and reminders that keep your column full and your clients on time. Nails carry the most predictable return cycle in beauty and one of the highest product costs per appointment. Both of those should be visible in how the business is priced, and in most cases neither of them is. ### What a nail appointment actually consumes | Appointment | Desk time | What it consumes besides your time | | --- | --- | --- | | Gel polish on natural nails | About an hour | Very little product, so almost all of it is labour | | A full set of extensions | Two hours or more | Tips or forms, builder gel or acrylic, files and lamp time | | Infills at three weeks | An hour or so | Product on the regrowth only, which is why it is the profitable one | | Infills at six weeks | Close to a full set | Effectively a rebalance, very rarely charged as one | Pricing by service name rather than by desk time and product is how the most skilled work in the trade becomes the least profitable hour of the day. ### The three week cycle is the whole diary Two to three weeks after a set she needs infills, and whoever asks first takes the booking. That is usually whoever has a system rather than whoever did the better work, which is an uncomfortable thing to be true. Rebook at the desk while she is still admiring them. Where she will not commit, time the prompt to the set she actually had, because a builder gel overlay and a full set of long extensions grow out on completely different schedules. Price infills by the gap. A client at three weeks and a client at six weeks are two different appointments, and charging both the same trains everybody to leave it as long as they possibly can. ### Where a nail business leaks money - Art charged at one flat price whether it took ten minutes or fifty - Removals absorbed as a courtesy, usually on somebody else's work - Repairs done free in the doorway between two booked clients - A two hour set lost to a no show, which on a full day is a quarter of the takings - Travel time on mobile work costed at nothing at all - A client drifting from a three week cycle to a five week one, unnoticed for a year ### The record protects you as much as it serves her Shape, length, colour codes, which system you built in and what lifted last time all belong against the client. It makes the next appointment quicker and the result consistent, which is most of what loyalty amounts to in this trade. Reactions matter more here than technicians expect. Uncured acrylates cause genuine allergic contact dermatitis, and once somebody is sensitised she is sensitised permanently. A dated note of the product used and what happened is a record. Remembering that she was fine last time is not. ### What a well run nail business does - Prices by desk time and product rather than by the name of the service - Charges separately for removals, repairs and art - Rebooks the infill at the desk before she leaves - Prices infills by how long she left it - Records shape, system, colour codes and any reaction against the client - Takes a deposit on the long sets that block a desk for two hours - Counts product cost per set rather than per order ### Can I take a deposit for longer sets? Yes. Set a deposit per service so long appointments are protected and no shows cost you nothing. ### Can clients see how long a treatment takes? Yes. Each service shows its duration and price, so the booking page reserves the right amount of time automatically. ### Do you take a cut of my bookings? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees and no per client charges. ### Can I send aftercare advice? Yes. Aftercare messages and consent forms can be sent automatically around each appointment. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per salon rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. A full set of acrylics is one payment and the infills that follow are smaller ones, so the card rate applies on a two to three week rhythm. Paying by card costs 2.5% plus 35p, a single rate that already accounts for the Youzse platform fee rather than billing it separately. Nothing is taken from an introduction, because it is 0% commission on new clients found through Youzse, with no setup cost to start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. Party season and the weeks before summer holidays are full while late January drops away, which is the argument for paying by the month. After the 30 days it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel at any time you like. Records stay exportable throughout, so you are never choosing between your data and your options. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Shapes, colours, infill dates and any lifting problems are usually remembered rather than recorded, which makes the next set slower than it needs to be. Most finish setup the same day, and because the 30 day trial costs nothing you can run both systems side by side before committing the booking link. ### Will it work for a full set of acrylics specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a full set of acrylics sits behind an upgrade. Infill cycles booked at the appointment, set and colour history on the client record, deposits on longer sets and reminders on each client own interval are all included. Youzse covers 60+ trades, and if there is a corner of your work it does not reach, tell us before the trial ends. --- ## Book the job, brush aside the admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/painters-decorators Send quotes, confirm with a deposit and invoice on completion, so you spend your time on the walls not the paperwork. Decorating is judged entirely on a finish and priced almost entirely on preparation, and the customer can only see one of those two things. That mismatch is where every awkward conversation in the trade begins. ### The wall sets the price, not the room Two identical bedrooms can be a day apart. One has sound plaster and takes a mist coat and two of emulsion. The other carries forty years of vinyl paper, three filled cracks, a bad patch behind a radiator and a ceiling somebody has already had a go at with a roller. A flat room rate flattens that difference and the bad rooms end up paid for by the good ones. Survey the surface and put the making good on the quote as a line the customer can read, because preparation that appears in writing stops being assumed to be free. It is also the only defence when a wall turns out worse than it looked. A written allowance for making good turns extra hours into an agreed variation rather than a conversation on a Friday afternoon. ### What has to be settled before a tin is opened - Whether the house is occupied, and who is moving the furniture - Colour, brand, finish and sheen, room by room, chosen rather than discussed - Who is supplying the materials, which changes the number substantially either way - How many coats are included, and what happens if the colour will not cover in that many - Filling, stripping and making good, priced as their own line - Access and equipment for stairwells, landings and anything above a stepladder - For exterior work, what happens to the week if it rains for four days of it ### A decorating job by the day it is on | Day | What is actually happening | What the customer sees | | --- | --- | --- | | Day one | Stripping, masking, filling and sanding | Nothing has been painted | | Day two | More filling, caulking, mist coat on new plaster | Nothing has been painted | | Day three | Ceilings and first coats | It looks patchy and worse than before you came | | Day four | Second coats, woodwork and cutting in | It suddenly looks finished | Three quarters of the labour happens before anything looks any different. Saying so on the morning of day one costs a sentence and saves the whole conversation on day two. ### Bill as the rooms close A three week job invoiced at the end is three weeks of wages, paint and travel funded out of your own account. Nobody in this trade set out to lend money and a great many people in it are doing exactly that. Invoice as each room completes. Customers almost never object, because the thing they are paying for is standing finished in front of them, and it turns one uncomfortable request at the end into three straightforward ones along the way. Take enough at the start to cover the paint. Twenty litres tinted to a specific colour is spent money the second the mixing machine stops, and no merchant is taking it back. ### What should be on file for every house you paint - The colour, the brand, the code and the sheen, room by room - How many coats went on and what they went over, because a dark red under a pale grey is next year's problem - Which surfaces were oil based and which were water based, which nobody alive remembers five years later - What the walls were like underneath, with photographs of anything genuinely bad - Who chose the colour, since touch ups are always requested by whoever hated it - The date it was done, because a rented hallway comes round again and the landlord uses whoever rings first ### Can I send quotes from my phone? Yes. Send a branded quote from your phone and let customers approve it online. ### Can I take a deposit to hold a date? Yes. Confirm the job with a deposit so booked dates are never wasted. ### How do customers pay the balance? Invoice the balance on completion with a payment link and reminders chase anything outstanding. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. A full house repaint is paid at completion or in two stages, so the card rate applies to a sizeable amount rather than pocket change. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. It is 0% commission on new customers who come through Youzse, and no setup cost at any point. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. Interior work carries the winter and exterior work carries the summer, but the changeover weeks are lean and should not be paid for in advance. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Your records stay exportable throughout, so there is nothing to unpick if you decide to move on. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your customers, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Colour codes, paint brands and which rooms you did last time usually live on a scrap of paper in the van. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a full house repaint specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for a full house repaint sits behind an upgrade. Quotes with the scope written down, deposits on materials, colour and finish notes per property and prompts for repeat work are all included. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## Train clients, not spreadsheets Source: https://youzse.app/for/personal-trainers Session booking, block packages, recurring payments and reminders in one app, so you spend your time coaching. A personal trainer has perhaps four hours a day that anybody wants to buy, and a client relationship measured in months rather than years. Both of those numbers can be moved, hardly anybody tries to move either, and that is why the trade is full of people who are exhausted and not especially well paid. ### The peak is the business and the middle of the day is the problem Clients want six until eight in the morning and five until eight at night. That is the market, it is the same market for every trainer on the same gym floor, and no amount of effort widens it. So the middle of the day has to be sold differently or written off. Semi private pairs, online programming with a monthly check in, retired clients and shift workers all live between ten and three, and between them they are the difference between a full week and a long one. ### Where a trainer's hours actually go - Programme writing done at eleven at night and charged to nobody - A free consultation given to somebody who was never going to buy - Fifteen minutes of chat after every session, which is several unpaid hours a month - A six in the morning cancellation heard at five to six, having already driven in - A block of ten sold with no expiry and used at one session a month - A gym floor fee owed whether or not a client turned up ### What actually happens to a new client | Where they are | What is going on | What decides whether they stay | | --- | --- | --- | | Weeks one to three | Motivated, aching, telling everybody about it | Sessions that are achievable rather than impressive | | Weeks four to eight | Novelty gone, results not yet visible | Showing one number that has moved, however small | | Weeks nine to twelve | First real results, and the block running out | Whether the next block was raised before this one ended | | Months four to six | It is a habit now, or it is finished | Changing the programme before they tire of it | | Past the first year | Worth several new clients and referring more | Being noticed. Old clients leave when they feel assumed | Most cancellations in this trade happen in weeks four to eight, and most trainers spend that window looking for new clients instead of watching it. ### The block that ends is the client that ends A block finishing is a decision point you handed the client, and they will make it in the car park with their partner rather than in front of you. The renewal belongs at session eight, while the results are fresh and the habit is intact. A monthly recurring payment removes the decision point altogether. Training becomes a standing cost they stop examining, which is precisely what a gym membership is and precisely why gyms are more profitable than the trainers working in them. ### What a well run PT business does - Sells recurring monthly training to standing clients and blocks to everyone else - Puts an expiry on a block so it is used at the frequency it was priced for - Raises the renewal two sessions before the block runs out - Records measurements and lifts from day one and shows the client the trend - Keeps injuries, medications and limitations on the client record - Applies one cancellation policy to everybody, friends included - Fills the middle of the day with semi private and online work - Contacts any client who has not booked for a fortnight, before it becomes a month ### Retention is cheaper than anything else available to you Replacing a client costs advertising, a free consultation, a trial session and several weeks before they are worth anything. Keeping one costs a message asking how the week went. The trainers with waiting lists are rarely the best coaches in the building. They are the ones whose clients stayed three years, because three years of one client produces the referrals that fill a diary without a pound spent on advertising. ### Can I sell blocks of sessions? Yes. Sell packages and memberships online and Youzse tracks how many sessions each client has left automatically. ### Can I take recurring monthly payments? Yes. Set up recurring memberships through Stripe so payments arrive on time without chasing. ### Does it work for online coaching? Yes. Manage in person and online sessions in the same diary, with reminders for both. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. Unlimited clients on every plan. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. A block of ten sessions is one payment covering weeks of work, so the card rate applies to a large ticket rather than a small one. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients who found you on the platform, and there is no setup cost to pay. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. January fills the diary and August empties it, which is precisely why paying by the month makes more sense than a year signed in advance. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. Your records are exportable throughout, so nothing has to be argued over if you want them back. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Session counts, programmes and how many sessions a client has left are usually tracked in a spreadsheet only you can read. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for a block of ten sessions specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing a block of ten sessions needs sits behind an upgrade. Blocks sold up front and drawn down per session, remaining balances visible to the client, rebooking prompts and payment taken at the gym door are all included. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Hold the date, sell the album Source: https://youzse.app/for/photographers Take a booking fee that holds the Saturday, sign the contract online and sell albums and prints from the same client record weeks later. A photographer sells a Saturday that cannot be resold. A wedding date held for eighteen months and then cancelled leaves nothing behind, and the season it sits in is short enough that nothing else takes its place. ### What the booking fee is actually paying for A non-refundable booking fee is not a gesture of goodwill. It buys the date off the market, which is the one thing in this trade that genuinely cannot be replaced. Size it against how far ahead the date sits. Eighteen months of held Saturdays is worth protecting more heavily than a family session booked for a fortnight on Tuesday. Get the contract signed before the date leaves the calendar rather than after. Weddings are the part of photography where the paperwork is read properly, usually by a mother of the bride. ### The margin arrives after the shooting stops Coverage pays for the day. Albums, wall prints, parent copies and extra hours are what turn a wedding from a fee into a proper job, and every one of them is sold in the weeks after the gallery goes out. That window closes. A couple will spend on prints while the day is still recent and will not once the photographs have been sitting on Instagram for six months. It only works if the gallery, the price list and the client record are still together when you come to ask. A folder on a hard drive is where print sales quietly go to die. ### Where a UK wedding photographer's year sits | Part of the year | What fills the diary | What should be selling | | --- | --- | --- | | January to March | Enquiries from couples who got engaged over Christmas | Next season dates and engagement shoots | | April to September | The wedding season, most Saturdays gone | Extra hours and second shooters | | October to November | Family and newborn sessions | Albums and prints from the summer | | December | Almost no shooting at all | Christmas print orders and deposits for next year | The quiet months are when print income has to be worked rather than waited for, which is why the record matters more than the camera. ### What a well run photography business does - Takes a booking fee scaled to how far ahead the date sits - Signs the contract before the Saturday leaves the calendar - Collects the balance before the wedding, not after the honeymoon - Keeps the gallery, the price list and the client record in one place - Asks about albums and prints while the day is still recent - Fills the winter with newborn and family sessions - Prompts couples at anniversaries and when the first baby arrives - Records which weddings sent the next enquiry ### One couple, a decade of work An engagement shoot becomes a wedding, then a newborn sitting, then a family session every other autumn. Very few trades get to bill the same two people across ten years of their life. None of that happens by memory. The couple who booked you in 2019 will use whoever contacts them when the baby arrives, and that is a diary reminder rather than a marketing campaign. ### Can I take a deposit to hold a date? Yes. Confirm shoots with a deposit and a signed contract so dates are never double booked. ### Can I track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so you can follow leads from first message to confirmed shoot. ### How do clients pay the balance? Send a balance invoice with a Stripe payment link and reminders chase anything outstanding automatically. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your business and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. A wedding is a deposit eighteen months out and a balance before the day, so the card rate applies twice across a very long gap. Every card payment is 2.5% plus 35p, the Youzse platform fee included in the rate rather than stacked on afterwards. Youzse takes 0% commission on new clients it sends your way, and there is no setup cost either. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Wedding work runs May to September and the winter is editing rather than earning, which is an argument for paying monthly on its own. The subscription that follows is monthly and rolling, so you can cancel at any time without asking anyone. Records stay exportable the whole way through, which means walking away never means losing anything. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Shoot dates, timelines, delivery deadlines and which gallery went to whom tend to be spread over email and a shared drive. It is usually done inside a day. Keep both live through the 30 day trial and only point your booking link at Youzse once you are ready. ### Will it work for a wedding shoot specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and a wedding shoot. Date deposits that hold a Saturday, balances collected automatically, shoot details per booking and delivery reminders are all in the same system. The platform covers 60+ trades, and the trial is the window for telling us if something about your work still does not fit. --- ## Bill the insurer, keep the course on schedule Source: https://youzse.app/for/physiotherapists Capture the payer, the authorisation number and the session cap at booking, then invoice insurers, employers and self-funding patients on their own terms. A physiotherapist is usually the third party in the room. The patient is on the plinth, a GP or a consultant sent them and an insurer or an employer is paying, which makes physiotherapy an invoicing problem as much as a clinical one. ### Know who you are treating for before the assessment A self-funding patient pays on the day. A private medical insurer pays against an authorisation number, a provider number and a session cap. An employer pays on thirty day terms against a purchase order and will never reply to a text message. Capturing the authorisation and the reference at booking is what separates a clinic that gets paid from one carrying six weeks of treatment it cannot invoice. Session caps matter clinically as well. If a policy funds six sessions and the presentation needs ten, that is a conversation for session two rather than session six. ### Who pays a physiotherapy clinic and on what terms | Payer | What they need from you | When the money arrives | | --- | --- | --- | | Self-funding patient | A price and a card | On the day, or up front as a block | | Private medical insurer | Authorisation number, provider number, session cap | On their remittance cycle, weeks later | | Employer or occupational health | Purchase order, invoice on terms, outcome report | Thirty days, if the invoice is right first time | | Solicitor or medicolegal | A detailed report written against the instruction | On settlement, sometimes much later | A clinic mixing all four has to capture the reference at booking, because nobody ever finds an authorisation number retrospectively. ### What a clinic needs before the first assessment - The referral source and the reason for referral - The payer, the authorisation number and the session cap - Consent for treatment and for holding health records - History, current medication and red flag screening - The patient goal in their own words, for the outcome measure - Whether an interpreter or a chaperone is needed - A follow-up booked before they leave the room ### Recovery happens in the six days you are not there Most of a rehabilitation takes place between appointments. A programme the patient cannot find is a programme they will not do, and the clinic still carries the outcome. Put the exercises on the record alongside the plan and send them out with the appointment confirmation. Progression belongs there too, so that week four is not a repeat of week one. A course that drifts from weekly to fortnightly is not the same treatment delivered more slowly. It is a different and worse one. ### Discharge is the goal, and it is not the end Good physiotherapy aims to stop. A patient discharged at the right point with a home programme that works is the outcome you want, and it is the one that produces referrals. They do come back. Runners return with a different injury, desk workers return with the same neck and post-operative patients return for the other knee. Keep the record so the second episode starts from what you already know. Clinical notes are special category data. Consent for the purpose, restricted access and a retention period that is actually enforced are legal requirements, not good manners. ### Can patients book a course of sessions? Yes. Block bookings let patients reserve a course of treatment in one go, so the plan stays on track. ### How do patients pay? Take card payments and deposits online or accept payment in person. It is entirely up to you. ### Are patient records secure? Yes. Notes, history and consent sit on one timeline and are handled to UK GDPR standards. ### How quickly can I set up? Most clinics are taking bookings in a couple of minutes. Add services and hours, connect Stripe and share your link. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per clinic rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. A course of rehab sold as a block is one payment rather than six, which is where a card rate you can read plainly starts to matter. For cards it is 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee is contained in that number instead of appearing as a second charge. An introduction costs you nothing: 0% commission on new patients who reach you through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. Injuries follow the sporting calendar and the clinic quietens over the summer break, so a monthly arrangement is the safer footing. Once the trial ends the subscription rolls monthly, and cancelling at any time is your call alone. Exports stay available throughout, and your records leave with you if you go. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your patients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Assessment findings, exercise programmes and progress measures usually sit in a clinic system that does not let you take them anywhere. Setup lands the same day for most people, and the 30 day trial is there to be used. Run both, compare them, then switch the booking link. ### Will it work for a course of rehab specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a course of rehab sits behind an upgrade. Courses drawn down per session, clinical notes on one patient timeline, discharge and review prompts and UK GDPR handling for health data are all there. There are more than 60 trades on Youzse. If your way of working needs something else, tell us while the trial has time left on it. --- ## Booked in, consent sorted Source: https://youzse.app/for/piercing-studios Take bookings and deposits online, capture consent and ID before the appointment and send aftercare automatically. A piercing takes about five minutes and then heals for anywhere between six weeks and a year. The procedure is the small part. Almost everything commercially interesting about a piercing studio happens in the months afterwards. ### Why one combined price hides the whole business - The piercing is your skill and your time, and it costs you almost nothing in stock - The jewellery is a bought item with a real cost and a real margin, and the two behave nothing alike - A single number makes it impossible to see whether cheap lobe piercings are subsidising the titanium or the other way round - Priced separately, jewellery can be sold to people who are not booking a piercing at all - An upgrade at the downsize appointment is a second sale that a combined price makes awkward to ask for ### The downsize is an appointment, not a favour Almost every fresh piercing is fitted with a longer post to allow for swelling, and it has to be shortened once that swelling settles. Somewhere between four and twelve weeks depending on the placement, and the client has no way of knowing when unless you tell her. Book it at the time of the piercing. A studio treating the downsize as an unpaid obligation the client might remember to arrange has invented an appointment nobody attends, and it generates the complaints that arrive when jewellery starts to embed. ### How long the studio stays involved after those five minutes | Placement | Roughly how long it heals | What the studio should be doing | | --- | --- | --- | | Earlobe | Six to eight weeks | A check at two months and a jewellery change | | Helix and other cartilage | Six to twelve months | A downsize at two to three months and patience with the bump at four | | Nostril | Four to six months | A downsize and an honest conversation about sleeping on that side | | Navel | Six to twelve months | A downsize and a check before any holiday | A client on a twelve month heal is somebody you should see four times. A studio that books none of those visits meets her again only when something has gone wrong. ### Walk-ins and booked work do not have to fight Piercing is one of the few trades here where a walk-in is genuinely welcome, because the procedure is short and the decision is often made that afternoon. The difficulty is that a studio running only on walk-ins cannot plan anything at all. Hold booked slots for the work needing preparation, a consultation or one named piercer, and leave the rest of the day genuinely open. An ear curation with three placements deserves an hour and should not be squeezed between two lobes. ### What has to be on the record before the needle comes out - Age verification, recorded against the client and findable years later - Written consent for the specific placement, and for a minor the consent of the person with parental responsibility - Medical history, including anything affecting healing or clotting - The exact placement, marked and agreed with the client before piercing - The jewellery fitted, with material, gauge and length - The aftercare given, sent automatically rather than recited at the door - The downsize date, booked rather than merely mentioned ### Material is the record that prevents most of the problems Reactions in piercing are overwhelmingly a material question. Knowing that a client is wearing implant grade titanium rather than something bought online at two in the morning is the first thing you need when she returns with an angry cartilage piercing. Record what you fitted, at what gauge and what length, every time. It turns the downsize into a two minute job, and it turns a complaint into a calm conversation about a piece of jewellery she swapped herself in August. ### Can clients complete consent before arriving? Yes. Consent and age checks are sent with the booking so everything is signed and on file before the appointment. ### Can I take a deposit? Yes. Take a card deposit at the point of booking to cut no shows and protect your time. ### Can each piercer have their own diary? Yes. Every piercer gets their own schedule, availability and column view. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your studio and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. Pricing the piercing and its check up together means one payment for two visits, so the card rate applies once rather than twice. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse means an introduction costs you nothing, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Half terms, the summer holidays and the weeks before Christmas are the busy ones, and the gaps between are a poor time to be tied in. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. Throughout all of it your records stay exportable, which is the part most people forget to check. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Jewellery fitted, placement, aftercare given and age verification usually live in a paper book behind the counter. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for a piercing and its check up specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and a piercing and its check up. Check ups booked at the first appointment, jewellery and placement on the client record, aftercare prompts and consent forms stored properly are all included. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## Fill every class, keep your core Source: https://youzse.app/for/pilates-instructors Members book classes online, buy passes or memberships and pay up front, so every reformer and mat is booked without the admin. Reformer Pilates is the one class business here where the equipment sets the class size. Ten machines means ten students, however large the room is and however many people are standing outside it, and every commercial decision in the studio follows from that ceiling. ### What a reformer space has to earn | The number | Why it is fixed | What it decides | | --- | --- | --- | | Machines in the room | Set by floor area and by what you could afford to buy | The absolute ceiling on any class, permanently | | Rent and rates per week | Owed whether a class runs or not | The cost carried by every space in every session | | Classes you can physically teach | Limited by your voice, your body and who can cover | How much of that ceiling you can actually reach | | Spaces sold per class | The only figure you influence day to day | Whether the studio makes money this month | Divide the weekly fixed cost by the number of spaces the timetable contains, not by the number you sold. That figure is the break even price of a space, and most studios have never sat down and worked it out. ### Matwork and reformer are two businesses sharing one timetable A mat class takes twenty people into a hired hall with nothing but a stack of mats behind the door. A reformer class takes ten into a room full of equipment that had to be bought, serviced and insured. They look alike on a timetable and they are nothing alike underneath it. Price them apart and staff them apart. The mat side is where volume and beginners live and where a nervous new student can be introduced cheaply. The reformer side is where the margin sits, and it is the one that must not run two thirds full. Use the mat class as the front door. Somebody who has done six weeks on a mat is far likelier to book a machine than a stranger who walked past the window, and she already knows how you teach. ### Where a reformer studio leaks - A cancellation an hour before class, on a machine that then sits still for the session - Classes added to a timetable that was only ever two thirds sold - Introductory offers taken repeatedly by the same student under a new email address - Springs, straps and footbars left unserviced until a machine is out of use on a Monday morning - A one to one booked into a peak evening slot for less than the class in that slot would have taken - Unlimited memberships priced on average attendance and then used by the four people who come daily ### What a well run reformer studio does - Works out the break even price of a space before setting any class price - Holds a waiting list on every class so a freed machine is offered on automatically - Applies the cancellation window to everybody, friends and staff included - Fills the classes already on the timetable before adding another one - Keeps injuries, pregnancies and modifications on the client record rather than in one instructor's memory - Sells one to one work into the quiet middle of the day instead of the evening peak - Books servicing into the diary as though it were a paying class - Notices the regular who has not booked for a fortnight, because a reformer client rarely announces that she has stopped ### Can I set capacity per class? Yes. Set how many spaces each class has and members book online until it is full. ### Can members buy memberships? Yes. Sell passes and memberships that renew automatically, so members rebook in a couple of taps. ### Do you handle waitlists? Yes. Members join a waitlist when a class is full and cancellations fill automatically. ### Are there per member fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new member fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans run from £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, which is why a growing team does not turn into a growing invoice. Add another location from £15 a month. A reformer class is capped by the number of machines, so memberships collected automatically at a known card rate is how a studio stays full. Every card payment is 2.5% plus 35p, the Youzse platform fee included in the rate rather than stacked on afterwards. Youzse charges 0% commission on new members who found you on the platform, and there is no setup cost to pay. ### Am I tied into a contract? No lock in. You get a 30 day free trial and no card is needed to start it. New year and the run up to summer fill the timetable while August is thin, and paying by the month matches that better than an annual fee. The subscription that follows is monthly and rolling, so you can cancel at any time without asking anyone. Your records are exportable throughout, so nothing has to be argued over if you want them back. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your members, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms, so day one is not a blank screen. Machine allocations, injury notes, memberships and class passes usually sit across a booking spreadsheet and your own notebook. It is usually done inside a day. Keep both live through the 30 day trial and only point your booking link at Youzse once you are ready. ### Will it work for a reformer class specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so what a reformer class needs is present whichever plan you happen to be on. Hard capacity limits per class, memberships and passes collected automatically, injury notes on the member record and waiting lists are all included. The platform covers 60+ trades, and the trial is the window for telling us if something about your work still does not fit. --- ## A smooth finish, on and off the wall Source: https://youzse.app/for/plasterers Quote quickly, confirm with a deposit and invoice on completion, so the admin never holds up the next job. Plastering is sold by the day and a day cannot be divided. A plasterer who arrives at eight to find the room not ready has already lost most of what that day was going to earn, and no version of the afternoon gets it back. ### The room has to be ready before you are Furniture out, sockets off, floors covered, paper stripped and the electrician finished with his chases. None of that is your work and all of it is your problem, because if it has not happened the day is gone. Say who is doing it in the quote and say it plainly. Most customers genuinely do not know that a wall covered in vinyl paper cannot simply be skimmed over, and they are not being difficult when they assume otherwise. Charge for the day you attended rather than the day you managed to work. Written down beforehand nobody argues with it, and left unsaid it happens to you three or four times a year. ### Where a plastering day quietly disappears - A ceiling that turns out to be lath rather than board, discovered at half past nine - Artex nobody mentioned on the phone, on the one ceiling in the house - Waiting on a joiner to finish an opening you were told would be done on Friday - Bags carried up two flights because the merchant left the delivery on the pavement - A skim priced over a wall that needed a full coat of bonding first - Cracking blamed on you months later, on a room that was heated hard while it was still green ### What each kind of work asks of the day | The work | What the day looks like | What the customer sees | | --- | --- | --- | | Skimming a ceiling | The hardest hours in the trade, finished by mid afternoon | A flat white ceiling and a short day | | Skimming sound plaster | One coat, two passes, straightforward | A wall that looks much like the last one | | Board and skim on a stud | Two trades of work inside one day | A new wall, priced in their head as a skim | | Float and set on brick | Two coats with a wait between them | Nothing at all until the second day | | Patching and making good | Fiddly, slow and impossible to estimate from a photograph | A small job, and expected to cost like one | Each of those is a different price and a different length of day. One flat room rate treats them as the same job, and the hard rooms end up paying for the easy ones. ### Your customer is usually another trade A homeowner needs a plasterer once a decade. A builder needs one every fortnight and a decorator needs one every time a customer changes their mind about a wall. That is where a full diary actually comes from. Trade customers buy on reliability rather than on price. They also expect to be invoiced on terms instead of paying on the day, which is the one place in this trade where you are carrying somebody else's money. The question you get asked is whether you can do next Tuesday. Answering it in the time it takes to read the message is worth more than any advertising, because the second plasterer to reply has already lost the work. Keep those contacts somewhere better than a phone. A builder who used you twice last year and has not been in touch since March is a conversation worth having, and it is the cheapest work you will ever win back. ### Can I quote from site? Yes. Send a branded quote from your phone while you are still on site. ### Can I take a deposit? Yes. Confirm the date with a deposit so your week stays booked. ### How do I get paid? Invoice the balance on completion with a payment link and let reminders chase anything outstanding. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per business rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. A room skim is a same day job paid on the day, so a card rate you can state before you start keeps the ending simple. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. Youzse charges 0% commission on new customers who found you on the platform, and there is no setup cost to pay. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. New build and refurbishment work dries up over Christmas and floods back in spring, which is why paying by the month is the safer bet. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. Your records are exportable throughout, so nothing has to be argued over if you want them back. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Which rooms you did, what was underneath and which builders pay on time usually exist only as memory and a text thread. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for a room skim specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a room skim is fully served from the first day. Quotes sent before the job, payment taken on completion, job history against the property and repeat work for builders scheduled ahead are all there. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## Win the job. Get paid faster. Source: https://youzse.app/for/plumbers Professional quotes, one tap invoicing, job scheduling and card payments in one app built for the van and the office. Plumbing is two trades sharing one van. One of them is a burst at seven on a Sunday that is paid before you leave the drive. The other is a bathroom quoted in February, fitted in April and still unpaid in June. Running both without noticing is how a busy plumber ends up short of money. ### The emergency half is easy money and a hard reputation A burst is bought on availability alone. Whoever answers gets it, the price is barely discussed and the customer pays gratefully on the spot. There is no better cash position in any trade here. It is also where the trade's reputation gets made and lost, because the customer cannot judge the work and can only judge the bill. Give the out of hours figure on the phone, before the van moves, and the doorstep conversation simply never happens. Answering is most of it. A missed call at seven on a Sunday is not a lead to follow up on Monday, it is a job somebody else has already finished and been paid for. ### The planned half is where the lending happens A boiler is a four figure order placed before you have earned anything at all, and a bathroom is a fortnight of labour plus sanitaryware, tiles and a tiler you are paying out of your own account. Take a deposit when the order goes in, take a stage payment when the old one comes out and take the balance before you hand over the paperwork. Say all three at quote stage and hardly anybody objects, because that is obviously how a large purchase works. ### The lines that never make it onto a bathroom quote - Lifting a floor to move a soil connection two hundred millimetres - A tiler, an electrician and a plasterer, all coordinated by you and none of them paid by the customer - Skip hire, and getting the old suite out of a first floor room - Making good around new pipework, which the customer assumed was yours and you assumed was theirs ### What comes back, and who remembers it | Work | When it is due again | Who is keeping track | | --- | --- | --- | | A boiler service | Annually, dated from the install | Nobody, unless you tell them | | A landlord's gas visit | On whatever cycle the agent works to | The agent, who uses whoever is easiest to book | | A bathroom | Fifteen to twenty years | The customer, if the record still exists anywhere | | A leak or a burst | Unpredictable and always urgent | Whoever answered the phone last time | | A filter or a system clean | Alongside the service, and never sold on its own | Nobody at all | Two of those five are diary entries you already own. Most plumbing businesses hold them as a shoebox of old invoices rather than as a list of dates. ### What belongs against the property rather than the person - The boiler make, model and serial, with the date it went in - Where the stopcock is, and whether it still turns - Which parts were fitted, so the next one is ordered before the visit rather than after it - Photographs of anything hidden, taken before it went back under the floor - Who actually pays, when the occupier and the owner are two different people - The service date, as a diary entry rather than an intention ### Gas splits this trade in two Whether you are registered to work on gas decides which half of the enquiries you can even answer. A plumber without it turns away boilers and services, which are the two most predictable repeat jobs the trade has. A plumber with it competes on availability rather than on price, because a household with no heating in January is not collecting three quotes and comparing them over the weekend. Know what is in the property before anybody asks, and be the one who is easy to book. ### Can I send quotes from the job? Yes. Build and send a branded quote from your phone on site and customers can accept it on the spot. ### How do I get paid? Every invoice carries a Stripe payment link so customers pay by card online. Automatic reminders chase anything overdue. ### Can I schedule jobs for a team? Yes. Plan jobs across engineers in one diary, with reminders so customers know when you are coming. ### Is there a contract? No. One monthly subscription from £19, 2.5% + 35p on card payments and cancel anytime. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. An emergency call out is paid on the spot by card, and the rate is the only thing between finishing the job and being paid for it. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. A first booking made through Youzse carries 0% commission on new customers, and opening the account has no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. January goes quiet once the burst pipe weeks of December have passed, which is exactly why a monthly arrangement beats an annual commitment. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, which means your history comes with you whether you stay or not. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your customers, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Which stopcock is where, what was fitted last time and which properties belong to which agent are usually carried around in your head. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for an emergency call out specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for an emergency call out sits behind an upgrade. Payment taken at the door, job history against the address, recurring landlord work scheduled ahead and invoicing on terms are all included. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## A full timetable, top marks for admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/private-tutors Students and parents book lessons and terms online and pay up front, reminders cut cancellations and your week sorts itself while you teach. Tutoring is the only trade here with a hard deadline written into its demand. A GCSE paper sits in the middle of June, everything a tutor sells is bought in relation to that date, and it is why the diary is impossible in March and empty by the end of July. ### Where a tutoring practice quietly loses money - A first session given free to a family who had already decided to book - Forty minutes of driving priced into nothing, so a front room hour earns less than one at your own table - Term time teaching billed only in term time, leaving thirteen weeks a year with no income - A pupil cancelled the night before for a school trip diarised since September - Sessions running twenty minutes over because the parent is in the kitchen and the question was a good one - Specification changes read on a Sunday afternoon and charged to nobody ### The parent pays and the pupil never chose you The child sits in the chair. The parent makes the bank transfer, and the two of them want different things from the hour. One would like it to be over. The other would like evidence that it is working. That evidence has to be deliberate, because a parent cannot see a lesson. What they see is a mock grade in November and another one in March, and a tutor who reports the gap between them keeps the booking through a bad half term. It sets your rate as well. A tutor who can show a pupil moving from a four to a six is no longer selling hours, and price stops being the first question a new family asks. ### The tutoring year and what it is really selling | Part of the year | What the phone brings | What should be selling | | --- | --- | --- | | September and October | Families settling into a new set or a new school | Long standing weekly slots at the full rate | | November to February | Alarm once the first mock results reach the kitchen table | Intensive blocks and often a second subject | | March to May | Everybody at once, and more demand than you have hours | A waiting list, and the last slots priced accordingly | | June | The exams themselves, the diary emptying week by week | September, booked before anybody breaks up | | July and August | Almost nothing, then results day right at the end | Catch up work for the year below and for retake pupils | The summer is not a quiet spell to be endured. It is the thirteen weeks that decide whether September starts full or starts from nothing. ### What a well run tutoring practice does - Bills by the half term or collects monthly across twelve months rather than term time only - Prices travel into the rate or teaches online where the family would rather have the hour than the visit - Records topics covered, mock grades and the specific weakness per pupil - Sends a short written update at the end of each half term, asked for or not - Prices the last spring slots properly instead of squeezing in one more - Books September in May, while the family still feels grateful - Keeps parental consent and contact preferences on the record - Asks results day pupils for a sentence worth quoting, because it expires by October ### Every pupil you succeed with leaves It is the strange arithmetic of the trade. The better you are, the sooner the pupil passes the exam and stops needing you, so a full practice in May can be a half empty one in September without a single thing having gone wrong. The pipeline that survives it is siblings, the year below and the parents at the school gate. All three come from families you already teach, and all three arrive by being asked. Keep leavers on the record instead of deleting them. A pupil who finished GCSE maths in June is an A level enquiry in eighteen months, and their younger brother is a booking next autumn. ### Can I take term fees up front? Yes. Sell a term or block of lessons and take payment in advance, so your week is booked and paid. ### Can parents book and pay? Yes. Keep student and parent records together so parents can book and pay easily. ### Can I teach online or in person? Yes. Manage in person and online lessons from one timetable, with reminders for both. ### Are there per student fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new student fees. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per practice rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. A weekly slot billed monthly is a small recurring payment, so collecting it automatically at a known card rate keeps money out of the lesson. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. An introduction costs you nothing: 0% commission on new students who reach you through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. Demand climbs from September and peaks before the spring exams, then falls away over the summer, which a monthly arrangement handles cleanly. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. Exports stay available throughout, and your records leave with you if you go. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your students first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Topics covered, exam boards, target grades and which siblings you also teach usually live in a notebook and an email thread. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for a weekly tuition slot specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a weekly tuition slot is fully served from the first day. Standing weekly slots, monthly plans collected automatically, progress notes per student and family accounts covering siblings are all there. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Run your salon, not your diary Source: https://youzse.app/for/salons Online booking, card deposits, automated reminders and loyalty in one place. Built for a single chair or a multi-site brand. A salon sells chair hours and nothing else. Every commercial decision in it comes down to filling those hours, protecting them or raising what one of them earns. Most salons work relentlessly at the first and almost never at the third. ### The colour column and the cut column are two different businesses A cut holds a chair for forty five minutes and holds the stylist for all of it. A full head of foils holds the chair for three hours and holds the stylist for perhaps ninety minutes, because development time is time you are paid for while nobody is standing over the client. That gap is why colour carries a salon, and it only works if the diary understands processing. A system treating a balayage as three solid hours of one person shows you a full day that is in truth half empty, and you staff a Saturday around a number that was never real. ### The salon year and what should be selling in it | Part of the year | What fills the chairs | What should be selling | | --- | --- | --- | | January and February | The quietest weeks of the year, roots and cuts | Courses of treatments and blocks bought before Christmas | | March to May | Weddings, proms and the first colour changes of spring | Consultations for big colour, booked months ahead | | June to August | Holiday hair, lighter colour and far more toning | Home care that stops a toner going brassy by week three | | September and October | Everyone back on their proper colour cycle | Standing appointments running through to Christmas | | November and December | The busiest six weeks, blow dries and full heads | Gift cards and prebooked January appointments | January is decided in December. A salon that has not sold gift cards and prebooked its regulars by Christmas Eve spends eight weeks finding that out. ### The gap between visits is the number nobody watches A regular on a six week colour cycle who drifts to nine weeks has cut what she is worth across a year by a third, and she has not left, so nobody notices. Forty clients doing that quietly is a full stylist of income gone. Measure the average gap per client rather than counting appointments in the book. Volume holds steady while the gap stretches, and by the time the volume falls the habit is a year old and she has found a Thursday somewhere else. ### What quietly costs a salon a day of chair time - A colour correction priced against a full head because both take three hours, when only one of them takes judgement - A three hour appointment lost to a no show on a Saturday, the single day of the week that cannot be resold - Development time booked as solid time, so the diary looks full while the stylist stands still - A toner, a treatment or a bond builder added at the basin and never rung through at the desk - A junior kept on shampoos all day when she is ready to be taking blow dries at her own price ### The record belongs to the salon and not to the chair Formulas, developer volumes, timings, what she asked for and what she hated all belong on one record. When a stylist is off sick in the week before a wedding, that record is the difference between covering the appointment and losing the client. It is also where patch test dates live. Insurers expect a documented test with a date and a result, and a colour reaction is exactly the moment a paper diary stops being adequate. Stylists move on, and where the salon held nothing they take the clients with them. Where the salon holds the history, the next stylist picks the client up mid conversation. ### Can clients book a specific stylist? Yes. Each stylist has a profile with their services, live availability and reviews, so clients book exactly who they want. ### Will it reduce no shows? Card deposits at booking and automated reminders across email, WhatsApp and SMS cut no shows dramatically. You can also charge an automatic no show fee. ### Do you charge commission on bookings? Never. You pay one monthly subscription and 2.5% + 35p only when you take a card payment. There are no new client fees and no per client charges. ### Can I run more than one salon? Yes. Add locations as you grow, each with its own hours, staff and pricing, all from one login with central reporting. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per salon rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A full head of highlights is a three figure payment at the desk, so the card rate is the one number a salon should be able to recite. Card takings are charged at 2.5% plus 35p, one rate with the Youzse platform fee folded in rather than presented on its own. Youzse applies 0% commission on new clients who came in through the marketplace, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. The weeks before Christmas are the busiest of the salon year and January is the quietest, which is what paying by the month is for. It carries on as a rolling monthly subscription and can be cancelled at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, so the only reason to stay is that it is working. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Colour formulas, patch test dates and who sits in which chair are usually written on record cards that will not follow you anywhere. The move itself takes a day at most, and the 30 day trial lets you run the two together until switching the booking link is uneventful. ### Will it work for a full head of highlights specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a full head of highlights calls for sits behind an upgrade. Online booking with deposits, colour and patch test history on the client record, rebooking prompts and marketing to your own column are all included. 60+ trades are supported, and anything that does not fit is worth saying out loud before the trial ends. --- ## Clubs, athletes and pitch-side on one system Source: https://youzse.app/for/sports-therapists Invoice clubs against their own purchase order, sell blocks to individual athletes and keep injury and load history on every player you treat. Sports therapy gets billed three different ways in the same week. An athlete pays on the day, a club pays on terms and pitch-side cover on a Sunday morning gets invoiced later, if anybody remembers it happened. ### The fixture list runs your diary, not you Treatment slots have to survive a season. A midweek fixture, a cup replay and a squad travelling on the Friday will all move the rehab session that was booked for Thursday. Athletes do not reschedule around your availability, they reschedule around the game. A link that lets them move the session themselves saves a phone call that otherwise never gets made at all. The volume is not even either. Pre-season and the six weeks after it produce most of the soft tissue work, and January produces most of the recurrences. ### Load and recurrence are the record that matters The interesting number is not what you treated. It is whether the same hamstring has gone twice this season and what the athlete was doing in the fortnight before it did. Keep training load, previous injury and return to play dates against the athlete rather than in a notebook in the kit bag. A recurrence pattern is invisible without it. Clubs ask for availability reports. Answering that from records rather than memory is how one season of cover turns into three. ### Where a sports therapist loses money - Pitch-side hours agreed verbally in August and never once invoiced - A club treasurer waiting on an invoice that nobody actually sent - Mileage to away fixtures absorbed rather than billed - Individual athletes seen once for an acute strain and never rebooked - Screening carried out on a touchline and written up from memory that evening - Tape and consumables bought out of the same account as the weekly shop ### What a well run sports therapy practice does - Invoices clubs on terms against their own purchase order reference - Sells blocks of sessions to individual athletes rather than singles - Takes card on a phone at the ground - Records training load and previous injury against the athlete - Sends screening before the first session, not on the touchline - Books the next rehab session before the athlete leaves - Chases overdue club invoices automatically - Reports player availability back to the club from records ### Can clients book a course of sessions? Yes. Block bookings let clients reserve a course of treatment in one go, so the plan stays on track. ### How do clients pay? Take card payments and deposits online or accept payment in person. It is up to you. ### Are client records secure? Yes. Notes, history and consent sit on one timeline and are handled to UK GDPR standards. ### How quickly can I set up? Most clinics are taking bookings in a couple of minutes. Add services and hours, connect Stripe and share your link. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per clinic rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. A block of rehab sessions is one payment covering several weeks, so the card rate applies to a larger amount and rather less often. The rate on cards is 2.5% plus 35p and the Youzse platform fee is part of it, so nothing arrives separately later. The platform charges 0% commission on new clients who discover you on Youzse, and nothing at all as a setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. Pre season and the weeks after every marathon are the peaks while the close season is quiet, so paying monthly is the sane choice. The subscription after that is rolling and paid monthly, and you can cancel at any time you decide to. Records remain exportable throughout, so nothing at all is being kept back to make you stay. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Assessment findings, exercise programmes and return to play decisions usually sit in a notebook and a spreadsheet of appointments. Most people are ready to trade the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a whole month of running both before the booking link moves. ### Will it work for a block of rehab sessions specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to a block of rehab sessions behind an upgrade. Blocks drawn down per session, assessment and progress notes on one timeline, review prompts and health data handled under UK GDPR are all covered. Something like 60+ trades already run on Youzse, so raise anything that does not fit while the trial is still open. --- ## Booked out, all year round Source: https://youzse.app/for/tanning-salons Clients book sessions online, buy courses or memberships and pay up front, so every slot is filled without the admin. Tanning is a membership business dressed as an appointment business. The income comes from blocks of minutes and monthly plans, and a salon relying on walk-in singles is running the same shop with a fraction of the certainty. ### Minutes are the unit, not visits Sell time in blocks, draw it down per session and show the remaining balance every time. A customer who knows she has forty minutes left comes back to use them. A customer who has forgotten what she bought does not, and the salon keeps the money once and loses the habit for good. Monthly memberships collected automatically are the most stable income in the trade, because they remove the weekly decision about whether to come in at all. That decision is the thing you are really competing against in November. ### The tanning year and what should be selling in it | Part of the year | What the shop looks like | What should be selling | | --- | --- | --- | | January and February | Steady, driven by winter holidays and new year intent | Monthly and annual plans while the intent is at its highest | | March to May | The busiest stretch, everybody building a base | Large minute blocks and course upgrades | | June and July | Peaks hard around holidays then falls away | Top-up packages and accelerators | | August and September | The quietest weeks of the whole year | Renewals, referrals and the lamp replacement schedule | | October to December | Occasion driven, parties and events | Gift cards and January memberships bought in advance | The quiet late summer is when the beds should be serviced and the tubes changed, because a customer on a course notices a tired lamp long before the shop does. ### What a tanning salon loses without ever noticing - Minutes sold and never used, which feels like profit and is actually a customer who has stopped coming - A membership that has been failing to collect for two months on an expired card - Lamp hours run past their rated life, so sessions take longer and the results get worse - A package that expired the week before she came in to use it - Age verification done by eye on a busy Saturday and recorded nowhere at all ### Compliance here is part of the operation, not paperwork Allowing anybody under eighteen to use a sunbed is a criminal offence in England, Wales and Scotland, and the responsibility sits with the operator rather than with the customer who lied about her age. Verification has to be recorded against the customer rather than remembered by whoever happened to be on the desk. Skin type and session history matter for the same reason. A record of what type was assessed, what sessions were taken and at what intervals protects both of you if anything is ever questioned, and it is what stops a new member being sold twelve minutes on her first day. Unstaffed hours make both of those harder rather than easier. If the shop runs on a code and a card reader, the system itself has to be the thing that knows who has been verified, what they bought and how many minutes they have already used. ### What a well run tanning salon does - Sells minutes in blocks and draws them down automatically per session - Shows the remaining balance to the customer every visit - Collects monthly memberships automatically and chases a failed collection - Prompts a top-up before the balance runs out, not after - Records age verification against the customer rather than in somebody's memory - Keeps skin type and session history per person - Schedules lamp replacement against hours run rather than by guesswork ### Can I sell courses of sessions? Yes. Sell courses and memberships, take payment up front and track how many sessions each client has left. ### Can clients book online? Yes. Clients book sessions from your branded page and pay when they book. ### Can I keep consent on file? Yes. Keep consent, skin type notes and history on each client record. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per salon rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. A course of sessions sold up front is one payment rather than ten small ones, so the card rate applies once at the start. Paying by card costs 2.5% plus 35p, a single rate that already accounts for the Youzse platform fee rather than billing it separately. Youzse takes 0% commission on new clients it sends your way, and there is no setup cost either. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. The run up to summer and the weeks before Christmas are the peaks and the autumn is quiet, which paying by the month absorbs. After the 30 days it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel at any time you like. Records stay exportable the whole way through, which means walking away never means losing anything. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Session balances, skin type assessments and consent records usually live in a till system that will not release any of it. Most finish setup the same day, and because the 30 day trial costs nothing you can run both systems side by side before committing the booking link. ### Will it work for a course of sessions specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing a course of sessions needs sits behind an upgrade. Courses drawn down per session, remaining sessions visible to the client, skin type and consent records and top up prompts are all included. Youzse covers 60+ trades, and if there is a corner of your work it does not reach, tell us before the trial ends. --- ## More ink, less admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/tattoo-artists Take enquiries, hold sessions with a deposit and send consent and aftercare automatically. Built for the chair and the whole studio. A tattoo artist sells days rather than appointments. A Saturday given to somebody who does not arrive cannot be refilled at short notice, and the design for it was drawn on a Tuesday evening that nobody paid for. ### The deposit is what makes custom work possible Design time happens before the sitting and is unpaid unless the deposit covers it. A meaningful deposit taken at consultation is the only thing making speculative drawing viable, and it is the difference between an artist who draws for booked clients and one who draws for anybody who wanders in. On large pieces stage the money across the sittings rather than settling at the end. A sleeve running over eight months should never sit as one accumulating debt, because by month six it is a sum the client has to find rather than a payment she is used to making. ### Healing sets the calendar, not the client's enthusiasm A large piece cannot be worked again until it has healed, which is a fortnight at the very least and considerably longer on a lower leg or anywhere that creases. Booking the next sitting too early wastes a day for both of you and produces worse work. Book the next sitting at the end of the current one with the healing interval already applied. She is in the chair, the piece is visibly unfinished and it is the easiest booking you will ever take. Aftercare should send automatically after every sitting rather than being explained over the noise of a machine while somebody is still bleeding. Most healing problems are aftercare problems, and a documented send protects you as much as it protects the tattoo. ### Four ways a studio fills a day, and what each one leaves behind | Type of work | How the day fills | What it leaves behind | | --- | --- | --- | | Walk-in flash | Whoever comes through the door that afternoon | A transaction, occasionally a client | | A large custom project | Six to ten sittings across a year | A collector who books the next piece before this one heals | | A guest spot in another city | A week sold out from one announcement | Clients you have no realistic way of seeing again | | Cover-ups and reworks | The difficult days nobody else wants | Your highest rate and the strongest word of mouth you will get | A studio that counts how many clients came back for a second piece knows more about next year than one that counts how many tattoos it did. ### What a tattoo studio gives away without noticing - Drawing time for consultations that never turn into a booking - A whole day lost to a no show, in a trade where a Saturday cannot be resold on the Friday - Redraws after a client changes the concept, absorbed as part of the service - Touch-ups offered indefinitely rather than inside a stated window - Consent forms and age verification stacked in a folder nobody could find under pressure - Artists renting a chair on a handshake, with the takings reconciled from memory on a Sunday ### What a well run studio does - Takes a deposit at consultation that genuinely covers the design time - States the deposit and reschedule policy in writing before it is paid - Stages payment across sittings on anything running over months - Books the next sitting at the healing interval before the client leaves - Keeps designs, references, stencils and progress photographs on one record - Records consent and age verification against the client, findable years later - Sends aftercare automatically after every single sitting - Tracks how many clients returned for a second piece ### Can I take a non refundable deposit? Yes. Hold every session with a card deposit at the point of booking so no shows stop costing you money. ### Can each artist manage their own diary? Yes. Every artist gets their own schedule, availability and column view for the day. ### Is consent handled digitally? Yes. Consent is captured before the session and aftercare is sent automatically once it is done. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new client fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans run from £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, which is why a growing team does not turn into a growing invoice. Add another location from £15 a month. A full day sitting is a large payment and a deposit is what protects the chair, so the card rate applies at both ends. Card takings are charged at 2.5% plus 35p, one rate with the Youzse platform fee folded in rather than presented on its own. There is 0% commission on new clients the platform introduces to you, and no setup cost before you start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No lock in. You get a 30 day free trial and no card is needed to start it. Summer and the weeks before Christmas fill the books while February is thin, and paying by the month is the right shape for that. It carries on as a rolling monthly subscription and can be cancelled at any time. Your records remain exportable at every point, so the door is genuinely open in both directions. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms, so day one is not a blank screen. Deposits taken, designs agreed, healing photographs and aftercare notes usually live in a phone gallery and a sketchbook. The move itself takes a day at most, and the 30 day trial lets you run the two together until switching the booking link is uneventful. ### Will it work for a full day sitting specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so what a full day sitting needs is present whichever plan you happen to be on. Deposits that protect a day in the chair, design and healing notes per client, consent forms on the record and rebooking for multi session pieces are all covered. 60+ trades are supported, and anything that does not fit is worth saying out loud before the trial ends. --- ## Book the job, branch out the admin Source: https://youzse.app/for/tree-surgeons Capture enquiries, quote after a site visit, confirm with a deposit and invoice on completion, all from your phone. Arboriculture is the one trade here where a poor decision drops several tonnes of timber onto a conservatory. The price reflects the crew, the kit and the risk, and almost every difficult conversation in this business starts with a customer who was comparing it to a gardener's day rate. ### You are selling a crew, a chipper and a judgement A reduction on a mature lime is three people, a chipper, a tipper and often a lorry for the timber. The climber is the visible part of that and easily the smallest part of the cost. Which is why quoting down the phone does not work in this trade. You cannot see the access, what sits underneath, whether the crown overhangs a road or where two tonnes of arisings are going until you are standing in the garden. Build the survey visit into how you price rather than treating it as free. Quoting everything on site and converting one in four means a full day a week spent driving for nothing at all. ### What has to be established before a quote means anything - What the tree actually is, because the species decides the work and the regrowth cycle - What sits underneath it, and what putting that back would cost - Whether the tree or the site carries any protection, which is a question asked before the saw comes out rather than after - Access for a chipper, and where the timber and the chip are going afterwards - The time of year, because there is a stretch of it when nesting has to be checked before anybody climbs ### The customer is buying a result and comparing a number Two quotes for the same oak can differ by a factor of three, and the customer has no way of telling which one included taking the timber away, which one carries cover to work above a garage and which one is a man with a ladder and an ambition. Photographs settle it. A marked up picture of that actual tree showing where the cuts go turns a price into a specification, and it is the single most effective thing this trade can do to stop being judged on the number alone. ### What comes back, and when | The work | Before it is due again | What that means for the diary | | --- | --- | --- | | A hedge cut | Once or twice every year, indefinitely | The most reliable recurring work in the trade | | A crown lift or a thin | Three to five years, depending on species | A prompt that has to know what the tree was | | A felling and stump grind | Never again on that tree | Worth asking what else is on the property while you are there | Regrowth is a diary of jobs already won. It only works if the species, the work and the access are on a record rather than in somebody's memory of a Tuesday two summers ago. ### What goes wrong on a tree job - A drive that will not take a tipper, discovered with the chipper already unhitched - A buried cable, a pond or a fence run sitting directly under the drop zone - Wind that makes the day unsafe on the one morning the whole crew was booked - A stump the price never covered, because grinding was never mentioned by either side ### Storms are a year of demand inside a fortnight Work in this trade does not arrive evenly. It arrives when a named storm goes through, and for ten days afterwards every phone in the county rings at once with jobs that genuinely cannot wait. The businesses that do well out of that fortnight are the ones who can see the diary, price from a photograph and say yes or no quickly. The ones that do badly say yes to everybody, promise Thursday to nine people and lose the customers they already had. ### Can I quote after a site visit? Yes. Quote once you have seen the job and let customers approve it online, then confirm with a deposit. ### Can I schedule around access and weather? Yes. Plan jobs around crews, access and weather and keep customers updated automatically. ### How do I get paid? Take a deposit to confirm and invoice the balance on completion with a payment link. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans run from £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which is why a growing team does not turn into a growing invoice. Add another location from £15 a month. A crown reduction is a large single payment once the site is cleared, so the card rate applies to a serious figure and should be checked. The card rate is 2.5% plus 35p and it is the whole rate, because the Youzse platform fee is inside it rather than billed separately. There is 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse, and no setup cost to begin. ### Am I tied into a contract? No lock in. You get a 30 day free trial and no card is needed to start it. Winter felling and the fortnight after every storm are the peaks, and the still months between are a bad time to be tied in. Beyond the trial it is a rolling monthly subscription that you are free to cancel at any time. Your records stay exportable throughout, so leaving is a decision rather than a negotiation. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms, so day one is not a blank screen. Site photographs, tree preservation checks and which jobs need a permit usually sit across a camera roll and a quote pad. Most are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a full month of running both before anything about your booking link changes. ### Will it work for a crown reduction specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so what a crown reduction needs is present whichever plan you happen to be on. Photographs inside quotes, deposits covering equipment and access, job history per site and follow up after bad weather are all included. Youzse serves more than 60 trades, so bring us the awkward part of your week during the trial rather than after it. --- ## The shoot is a day. The edit is a fortnight. Source: https://youzse.app/for/videographers Hold the filming date with a deposit, stage the balance across first cut and final delivery and turn one-off clients into monthly retainers. A videographer is paid for one day of filming and then spends a fortnight in an edit nobody watched happen. The gap between the shoot and the delivery is where the cashflow problem in this trade lives. ### Why one number for a film loses money - Post-production is most of the work and none of the visible effort, so a single figure makes the expensive half feel like it came free - Revisions are unlimited unless the quote says otherwise, and the third round is always about the music - Payment lands on delivery, six weeks after the camera hire and the second operator were both paid - A drone pilot, a sound recordist and a colourist all invoice you long before the client settles - Rushes and project files sit on drives you keep buying, and nobody quotes for storage ### Stage the money against the post-production calendar Take a deposit to hold the filming date, a payment when the first cut goes over and the balance on final delivery. Three points, each tied to something the client can actually watch happen. Write the revision count into the quote and price any further rounds. A client who knows two rounds are included asks for two rounds. State the delivery window in working days from the shoot rather than as a vague fortnight. The argument with a video client is almost never about the quality, it is about when. ### What a retainer is worth against one-off films | Arrangement | How it bills | Winning it again | | --- | --- | --- | | A wedding film | One payment, one client, one date | Never, they only marry once | | A one-off brand film | Quoted, pitched and negotiated every time | A full pitch for every project | | A monthly content retainer | The same amount every month on a standing arrangement | Nothing to win, it simply continues | The retainer is the only line here where the second month costs nothing at all to sell. ### Rights, releases and the drives Commercial work turns on who may use the footage, for how long and on which platforms. That belongs in a contract stored against the project rather than in an email thread from March. Model releases matter more in video than in stills, because faces move and speech is recorded. Get them signed on the day and file them with the job. Keep the brief, the brand assets, the music licence and the delivery history for each client. The second project for a business you already film should start on the morning of the shoot, not with another discovery call. ### Can I take a deposit to hold a date? Yes. Confirm shoots with a deposit and a signed contract so dates are never double booked. ### Can I track enquiries? Yes. Every enquiry enters a pipeline so you can follow leads from first message to confirmed shoot. ### How do clients pay the balance? Send a balance invoice with a payment link and reminders chase anything outstanding automatically. ### Are there per client fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per business rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A wedding film is a deposit far in advance and a balance before the day, so the card rate applies twice with a long gap between. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. Where a booking begins on Youzse there is still 0% commission on new clients, and no setup cost is charged. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. Filming runs from May to September and the winter is edit and deliver, which is an argument for paying monthly written into the calendar. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. You can export your records throughout, which is what makes cancelling a simple thing rather than a project. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Shoot dates, run of day timelines, delivery deadlines and where each film was uploaded tend to live in email and a shared drive. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for a wedding film specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a wedding film calls for sits behind an upgrade. Date deposits, balances collected automatically, shoot and delivery details per booking and reminders as a deadline approaches are all covered. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## A full round, no chasing Source: https://youzse.app/for/window-cleaners Set up recurring visits, take new bookings online and get paid automatically, so your round runs itself. A window round is one of the few things in these trades that is bought and sold as an asset, valued on what it turns over in a month. That tells you what actually matters here. Not what you charged today, but whether the same houses will still be on the round in a year. ### What a round is worth on the day somebody values it - How many properties are on it, and how many pay by a standing arrangement rather than by knocking - How tightly they sit together, because a buyer values a street and discounts a scattering - The cycle each property runs on, four weekly or eight weekly, written down rather than carried around in your head - Access notes for every side gate, dog, ladder position and awkward conservatory roof - How long the average customer has been on the round - The properties that have been skipped twice running, which a buyer will find even if you never did ### Density decides your hourly rate The work takes minutes. The driving takes hours. Two houses on the same street at eight pounds each earn more per hour than two houses a mile apart at twelve, and no price list has ever made up that difference. That makes some enquiries worth turning down. One house on the far side of town drags the van somewhere it had no other reason to be, and nobody is paying for the journey either way. Grow along the pavement you are already standing on. A word with the neighbour while the pole is still up converts better than anything you could pay to advertise, and it costs a minute. ### The round year, and what customers think is happening | Time of year | What the round is doing | What it needs from you | | --- | --- | --- | | January and February | Short days, standing water and glass that dries badly | Hold the cycle, because a skipped month becomes a cancelled customer | | March to May | Pollen and light, everybody suddenly notices their windows | Take on new work only where the van already stops | | June to August | Holidays, locked gates and nobody at home | A message the night before turns a wasted call into a paid one | | September to November | Leaf fall, filthy frames, sills and gutters | Sell gutter clearing and fascia work to the round you already have | Window cleaning has no quiet season, only months in which customers decide it has one. Payments that run whether or not anybody is at home are what carry December. ### Attrition in a round is silent Nobody rings to cancel a window cleaner. They stop answering the door, or the gate is bolted three visits in a row, and the property leaves the round without ever having been a conversation. That is why the count matters more than the takings. Turnover holds steady for months while the round is shrinking, because the customers who stay pay a little more each year and hide the ones who went. A property missed twice in succession should raise a question that week rather than next spring. By spring you have lost the slot, the neighbour has hired somebody else and the street has stopped being yours. The same record answers the other question customers ask, which is when you were last there. A cleaner who can say the date without thinking about it settles a complaint in one message, and one who cannot has already conceded it. ### Can I set up recurring rounds? Yes. Visits repeat weekly, fortnightly or monthly on your cycle, so your round stays full without the admin. ### How do customers pay? Take card payments and send payment links, so the money lands without you chasing on the doorstep. ### Can new customers book online? Yes. New customers book straight from your page and drop onto your round. ### Are there per job fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new customer fees. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. A monthly round is many small recurring payments, so collecting them automatically at a known card rate replaces an entire evening of chasing. Paying by card costs 2.5% plus 35p, a single rate that already accounts for the Youzse platform fee rather than billing it separately. There is 0% commission on new customers the platform introduces to you, and no setup cost before you start. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. Rounds thin over Christmas and rebuild through spring, which is the plainest possible case for paying month by month. After the 30 days it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel at any time you like. Your records remain exportable at every point, so the door is genuinely open in both directions. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Which street falls on which week, gate access and who pays by standing order usually live in a round book only you can read. Most finish setup the same day, and because the 30 day trial costs nothing you can run both systems side by side before committing the booking link. ### Will it work for a monthly round specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a monthly round is never the thing that forces an upgrade. Recurring rounds by area and week, collection that happens automatically, access notes against each property and reminders the night before are all covered. Youzse covers 60+ trades, and if there is a corner of your work it does not reach, tell us before the trial ends. --- ## Fill every class, find your flow Source: https://youzse.app/for/yoga-instructors Members book classes online, buy passes or memberships and pay up front, so every mat is filled without the admin. Most yoga teachers do not own the room they teach in. They hire a hall by the hour or take a flat fee on somebody else's timetable, and that one fact decides far more about the money than the style on the poster does. ### The numbers to know before a hall is booked - What the hour costs, including the fifteen minutes either side you will genuinely need - Whether the fee is still owed if the class does not run - How many people the room takes with mats spaced properly, which is fewer than the hall claims - What you charge on the door, and what a pass reduces that to per head - The headcount at which the evening breaks even, worked out once and written down - What a cover teacher costs, because a class that closes when you have flu loses students for good ### Break even is a headcount, and it sits higher than it feels A hall at twenty five pounds an hour with a class priced at nine pounds a head needs three people through the door before you have earned a penny. Everything after the third person is yours and everything before it belongs to the landlord. This is why a class run on door money alone is so uncomfortable. A wet Tuesday in November brings five people, which is an evening that paid the hall and not you. Passes and memberships move that money to the front, so the room is covered whether or not the weather cooperates. It also settles the timetable question. Two full classes are worth more than four half empty ones, and half empty classes are how teachers end up working six evenings a week for the income of three. ### Where a yoga teacher's income quietly goes - Passes sold with no expiry and redeemed two years later against a hall you are paying for now - Door money kept in a tin and reconciled at no point whatsoever - A corporate class invoiced on thirty day terms and paid on sixty - Studios booking you as cover and settling at the end of the following month - Free spaces for friends in a class other people were waiting for - A retreat deposit spent before the villa and the flights were paid for ### The income streams and how each one behaves | What you sell | When the money arrives | What it is really for | | --- | --- | --- | | A place on the door | On the night, if they turn up | New faces, and nothing you can plan a month around | | A block of passes | Up front, used across several weeks | Covering the hall before the term has started | | A monthly membership | The same date every month | The only genuinely predictable income in the trade | | A workshop or short course | Weeks ahead, at a far higher price per head | Margin, because the hall costs exactly the same | | A retreat | Deposits and balances spread over months | A year of profit and a year of risk inside one week | A teacher whose income is mostly door money has a well attended hobby. A teacher whose income is mostly memberships and courses has a business with a floor under it. ### The workshop is where the hour finally pays properly A three hour Saturday workshop at forty pounds a head fills the same room the Tuesday class fills and earns several evenings of income in one afternoon. The hall does not charge more because the subject happens to be interesting. Sell it to the students you already have. A list of everybody who has taken a class this year, with what they took and when they last came, is worth more to a yoga teacher than any advertising and costs nothing at all to keep. ### Can members buy class passes? Yes. Sell class passes and memberships that renew automatically, so members book and pay in a couple of taps. ### Do you handle waitlists? Yes. When a class is full, members join a waitlist and cancellations fill automatically. ### Can members pay up front? Yes. Members pay when they book, so every class is filled and paid before it starts. ### Are there per member fees? No. One subscription and 2.5% + 35p only on card payments. No new member fees. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per studio rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A weekly class paid by monthly membership is a small recurring payment, so automatic collection at a known card rate is the whole point. Card processing is 2.5% plus 35p. That rate already carries the Youzse platform fee, which is why you will not find it invoiced apart. It is 0% commission on new members who come through Youzse, and no setup cost at any point. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. January fills every mat and August empties the studio, which is exactly the pattern a monthly arrangement is designed to survive. Afterwards the subscription is rolling and monthly, and cancelling is something you can do at any time. Your records stay exportable throughout, so there is nothing to unpick if you decide to move on. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your members, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Class registers, memberships, class passes and who has how many left usually live in a spreadsheet and a paper register. Same day setup is the norm, and running the two alongside each other through the 30 day trial is how you check everything before switching the booking link. ### Will it work for a weekly class specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a weekly class calls for sits behind an upgrade. Class capacity limits, memberships collected automatically, passes drawn down per class and waiting lists that fill a cancellation are all there. More than 60 trades use Youzse. If yours works in a way that does not fit, raise it while the trial is still running. --- ## What "no commission" actually means Source: https://youzse.app/guides/booking-software-with-no-commission Almost every platform claims it somewhere. The word is doing a lot of work, and the qualification after it is where the money is. Commission-free is one of the most abused phrases in this category, and we are not going to pretend Youzse is above the marketing. What we can do is explain precisely what the word can hide, so you can test any claim including ours. ### The four things "commission" can mean A new client fee is a one-time charge when someone who found you through the platform's consumer app books for the first time. Often around 20%, sometimes 30% on promoted listings. This is the big one. A per booking fee is charged on every appointment regardless of where the client came from. Rare now, but it exists. A platform fee inside the card rate is a slice of every card payment that funds the software. It is genuinely a cut of your revenue, whether or not anyone calls it commission. A payout or fast settlement fee is charged for getting your own money sooner. Easy to miss and it recurs. A platform can honestly say it charges no commission while doing any of the other three. The claim is only meaningful with its qualification attached. ### How to test the claim in three questions What exactly do I pay when a brand new client books me through your app? A straight answer is a percentage and a minimum, or the word nothing. Anything longer is worth reading carefully. Is your platform fee inside the card rate or charged separately? Both are legitimate. Only one of them is visible on the pricing page, which is why a low card rate is not automatically cheaper. What do I pay to receive my own money, and how quickly does it arrive by default? Fast payout fees are the quietest recurring charge in this category. ### Where Youzse sits, stated precisely Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients. Someone who discovers your business through the Youzse marketplace and books is not charged for as an acquisition, on that booking or any booking afterwards. There is no per client fee. Youzse is not free of charges though, and we would rather write that here than have you find it later. There is a subscription from £19 a month, and card payments are charged at 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee lives inside that card rate rather than being billed separately, which is why the rate is higher than some alternatives. So the honest comparison is not "commission versus no commission". It is one number that is slightly higher on every card payment, against a much larger number charged each time you win someone new. Which is cheaper depends on how fast you are growing. ### The questions worth asking - What do I pay when a new client books me for the first time? - Is there a minimum fee per new client? - Is there any per booking charge? - Is the platform fee inside the card rate or extra? - What does it cost to get paid out faster? - Are prices quoted with or without VAT? - Does the fee apply again if that client returns? - Can I export my client list, including clients the platform introduced? ### What does commission free booking software actually mean? It usually means the platform does not take a percentage of bookings, but the phrase can coexist with a one-time fee when a new client books through the platform's marketplace, a platform fee folded into the card processing rate or a charge for faster payouts. Ask what you pay when a brand new client books, whether the platform fee sits inside the card rate and what payouts cost. ### Does Youzse charge commission? Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients, with no per client fee. It does charge a subscription from £19 a month and 2.5% plus 35p on card payments, with the Youzse platform fee sitting inside that card rate rather than billed separately. ### Is a lower card rate always cheaper? No. A lower advertised card rate often sits alongside a separate platform fee or a commission charged when the marketplace introduces a client. Add the subscription, the card fees on your actual takings and any new client fees together before deciding which is cheaper for you. ### Do I pay again when the same client rebooks? On most platforms a marketplace new client fee applies once, to that client's first booking, not to their repeat visits. Worth confirming, because the difference between once and every time is enormous over a few years. On Youzse there is no fee on either. --- ## Chair rental or employment? Source: https://youzse.app/guides/chair-rental-vs-employing-staff The most consequential structural decision a salon or barbershop makes, and the one most often decided by whichever is easier this month. This is a genuinely difficult area and the consequences of getting it wrong are financial. Nothing here is legal or tax advice. If you are choosing a model or reviewing an existing arrangement, pay an accountant for an hour of their time. It is cheap next to the alternative. ### What the two models actually are Employment means the person works for you. You control their hours, their prices and how they work. You pay wages, holiday, sick pay and pension, and you keep the revenue they generate. Chair rental means an independent business operating from your premises. They set their own prices and hours, keep their own takings, find their own clients and pay you rent. You get predictable income and none of the upside. The difference in your accounts is stark. Employment gives you higher revenue with much higher cost and risk. Rental gives you a smaller, steadier number with almost no employment obligations. ### Calling it rental does not make it rental This is the part that catches salons out. Employment status is determined by how the arrangement works in practice, not by what the agreement is titled or what both parties would prefer. If you set their hours, set their prices, provide all their products, require them to wear a uniform, take their bookings through your system and pay them a share rather than collecting rent, an inspector will look at that and see employment regardless of the paperwork. The consequences of a wrong classification are backdated: unpaid tax and National Insurance, potentially holiday pay and penalties. It is not a technicality. A genuine renter behaves like a business. They set prices, choose hours, take their own money, buy their own stock, carry their own insurance and can send someone else or work elsewhere. ### The practical trade-offs Control. Employment lets you set standards, pricing and how the place runs. With renters you can set rules about the premises, not about how they work, and that distinction is exactly what keeps the arrangement genuine. Risk. A quiet month with employees still costs you wages. With renters the rent continues and the risk sits with them, which is why the model is attractive to salons and why renters expect to keep the upside. Client ownership. This is the one that causes the arguments. A renter's clients are theirs and they leave with them. Be clear about this at the start rather than at the end. Whose booking system. If renters book through yours, you must be careful that this does not become control in practice, and you need to be clear whose client data it is. If they use their own, you lose sight of your own premises' diary. ### Whichever you choose, write it down For rental: a written licence covering rent, what is included, notice, insurance, who owns the client relationship and what happens to it on exit. For employment: a written statement of particulars on day one, and the rest of the employer obligations that come with it. For both: decide up front who owns the client list, because that is the question that turns a friendly parting into a dispute. Review it if the arrangement drifts. Many salons start with a genuine rental and gradually add rules, rotas and shared pricing until it has quietly become employment in all but name. ### Signs a rental is drifting into employment - You set their working hours - You set their prices - You provide all products and equipment - They cannot decline work or send a substitute - They must wear your uniform - You pay them a percentage rather than collect rent - They are managed and appraised like staff - Their clients are booked and held as yours ### What is the difference between chair rental and employing a stylist? An employee works for you: you control hours, pricing and method, you pay wages, holiday, sick pay and pension, and you keep the revenue. A chair renter is an independent business using your premises: they set their own prices and hours, keep their takings, find their own clients and pay you rent. You get a smaller, steadier income and far fewer obligations. ### Can I call someone self-employed if we both agree to it? No. Employment status is decided by how the arrangement works in practice rather than by what the contract is called or what both parties prefer. If you set hours and prices, provide everything, require a uniform and pay a percentage rather than collecting rent, it may be treated as employment regardless of the paperwork, with backdated tax, National Insurance and penalties. ### Who owns the clients in a chair rental arrangement? A genuine renter's clients are theirs and leave with them, which is one of the things that makes the arrangement genuinely self-employed. Agree this explicitly in writing at the start. It is the single most common cause of disputes when someone leaves. ### Should chair renters use the salon booking system? They can, but handle it carefully. Requiring it, and controlling their pricing and availability through it, looks like control and undermines the self-employed status. Be clear whose client data it is, and give each person access only to their own records. --- ## Chasing late payments Source: https://youzse.app/guides/chasing-late-payments-uk Most unpaid invoices are not disputes, they are admin someone has not got round to. Fix the system and the problem mostly disappears. Chasing money is the least enjoyable part of running a business and the part most people handle worst, usually by waiting too long and then apologising for asking. This is a general guide, not legal advice. For a large debt or a genuine dispute, take proper advice. ### Prevention is most of the answer Take payment at the point of work wherever you can. A card tapped on the doorstep never becomes a receivable. The whole problem is created by invoicing when you did not need to. Take a deposit before you buy materials. A boiler, a set of tyres or a bespoke worktop should not be funded from your own account on the strength of goodwill. Put terms in writing before you start, not on the invoice afterwards. Payment due on completion, or within seven days, is a perfectly normal term for a small business and far shorter than the thirty days people default to out of habit. Invoice the same day you finish. An invoice that arrives a fortnight late signals that you are relaxed about being paid, and it will be treated accordingly. ### The escalation that works On the due date, an automatic reminder. Neutral, no emotion, just the invoice and a payment link. Most invoices settle here, because most late payment is forgetfulness rather than refusal. Seven days late, a short personal message. A text or a call beats an email. "Just checking the invoice from the third landed, is there anything you need from me?" Give them the exit of it being your paperwork rather than their failure. Fourteen days late, a firmer written note stating the amount, the original due date and that interest and costs may be applied. This is the point to stop being apologetic. Thirty days late, a formal letter before action stating exactly what is owed, what you will do and by when. Most disputes settle at this stage because it is the first message that reads as a decision rather than a request. ### Interest and costs you are entitled to For business to business debts, the Late Payment of Commercial Debts legislation lets you charge statutory interest at the Bank of England base rate plus eight per cent, plus a fixed sum for recovery costs that rises with the size of the debt. Most small businesses never apply it, which is a shame, because mentioning it politely in the fourteen day message changes the tone of the conversation immediately. This applies between businesses. Debts owed by consumers work differently, and your right to charge interest there depends on what your terms said before the work started. Check the current rates on GOV.UK before quoting a figure, because the base rate moves. ### When it will not settle Money claims for smaller debts can be started online through the government service, and the fee is modest and recoverable. It is more accessible than most people assume. Before you go there, be honest about the evidence. A signed quote, a dated invoice, proof of delivery of the work and a record of every chase will win. A verbal agreement and a memory will not. Decide a walk-away number in advance. Beyond a certain point the hours you spend chasing cost more than the debt, and knowing your line stops a small sum consuming a month of your attention. ### The system that prevents it - Take card payment at the point of work where you can - Deposits before you buy materials - Written terms agreed before the job, not on the invoice - Shorter terms than you think: seven days, not thirty - Invoice the same day you finish - A payment link in every invoice - Automatic reminders on a schedule you set once - A dated record of every chase - A walk-away number decided in advance ### Can I charge interest on a late invoice in the UK? Between businesses, yes. The Late Payment of Commercial Debts legislation allows statutory interest at the Bank of England base rate plus eight per cent, plus a fixed recovery cost that increases with the size of the debt. For consumer debts it depends on the terms you agreed before starting. Check current figures on GOV.UK, since the base rate changes. ### How soon should I chase an unpaid invoice? On the due date, automatically. Most late payment is forgetfulness rather than refusal, and a neutral reminder with a payment link settles the majority. Waiting a fortnight to chase signals that the deadline was not real. ### What payment terms should a small business use? Shorter than the thirty days most people copy out of habit. Payment on completion, or within seven days, is entirely normal for a small service business. Agree it in writing before the work starts rather than printing it on the invoice afterwards. ### What is a letter before action? A formal written notice setting out exactly what is owed, the original due date and what you intend to do if it is not paid by a stated deadline. It is the step before starting a money claim, and many debts settle at this point because it is the first communication that reads as a decision rather than a request. --- ## Consultation forms and consent Source: https://youzse.app/guides/client-consultation-forms-and-consent Paperwork nobody enjoys, which turns out to be the thing that decides an insurance claim or a data protection complaint. Consultation forms are treated as a formality until the day they are the only thing standing between you and a claim. Practical guidance follows, not legal advice. ### What the form is actually for Establishing that the treatment is safe for this person. Allergies, medication, conditions, pregnancy, previous reactions. This is the clinical purpose and the reason insurers expect it. Recording that the client understood and agreed. What the treatment involves, what the risks are, what the realistic outcome is. Giving you a record you can produce later. A form completed at the time and stored properly is evidence. A recollection is not. It is not a disclaimer. You cannot sign away liability for negligence, and a form that reads like an attempt to do so tends to make the rest of it look worse rather than better. ### Patch tests and the records insurers expect For hair colour and several beauty treatments, insurers expect a documented patch test carried out an appropriate time before the service, with the date recorded and the result noted. A test done for a client two years ago is generally not sufficient for a treatment today. Policies specify intervals, and a fresh test is expected after a gap or a change of product. The record needs the client, the product, the date, the result and who carried it out. Recording it against the client rather than in a day book is the difference between finding it in ten seconds and not finding it at all. If the client declines a patch test, record the refusal and do not perform the treatment. Proceeding anyway is the scenario in which insurers decline to pay. ### This is health data, and that raises the bar Information about allergies, medication, pregnancy and medical conditions is special category data under UK GDPR. It needs more care than a name and a phone number. You need a lawful basis for processing it, and for most treatment businesses that will be explicit consent for the specific purpose. Bundling it into a general terms tick box is not explicit consent. It should be kept only as long as you need it, stored securely and accessible only to staff who need it. A junior on reception does not need to read everyone's medical history. Marketing consent is a separate question and must be asked separately. Someone consenting to you holding their medical details for a treatment has not consented to a newsletter. ### Make it happen before they arrive A form sent with the booking confirmation and completed at home is answered more honestly and more fully than a clipboard handed over while someone is taking their coat off. It also removes the awkwardness of asking about medication in a room where other clients can hear, which is a genuine reason people leave things out. Attach the form to the service rather than remembering to send it. Anything that depends on someone remembering will fail during a busy week, which is exactly when you most need it. Store it against the client so the next appointment starts from what you already know, and so you can find it under pressure. ### A consultation record that stands up - Sent with the booking, completed before arrival - Attached to the service automatically, not sent by memory - Allergies, medication, conditions and previous reactions captured - Patch test date, product, result and who performed it - Refusals recorded, and the treatment declined - Explicit consent for health data, separate from marketing consent - Stored against the client, findable in seconds - Access limited to staff who need it - A retention period that actually deletes ### What should a client consultation form include? Allergies, medication, medical conditions, pregnancy and previous reactions, a record that the client understood what the treatment involves and its risks and a dated signature. It should not attempt to disclaim liability for negligence, which is not effective and makes the rest of the document look worse. ### How long is a patch test valid for? It depends on your insurer and the product, but a test carried out long ago is generally not sufficient for a treatment today, and a fresh test is normally expected after a significant gap or a change of product. Check your policy wording, because this is a common reason claims are declined. ### Is client health information covered by GDPR? Yes, and more strictly. Allergies, medication, pregnancy and medical conditions are special category data under UK GDPR. You need a lawful basis, usually explicit consent for the specific purpose, storage that is secure, access limited to staff who need it and a retention period that genuinely deletes. ### Can I use one form for consultation and marketing consent? No. Consent to hold health information for a treatment is not consent to receive marketing. They are separate purposes and must be asked separately, recorded separately and be independently withdrawable. --- ## Booking software you can actually change Source: https://youzse.app/guides/customisable-booking-software-uk Every demo looks tidy. The question is what it looks like in month three, once it is carrying your services, your team and your paperwork. Software you cannot change is software you end up working around. The workarounds start small, a spreadsheet here and a template in a document folder there, and within a year half your process lives outside the system you pay for. Before you sign up to anything, it is worth knowing which parts bend and which are set in stone. ### The words on the screen A garage does not book appointments and a clinic does not take jobs. It sounds trivial until your technicians are reading a screen written for a hair salon, or your therapists are being asked to close a job. Good software lets you set the term once and applies it everywhere, including in what your customers receive. Bad software lets you rename one label and leaves the other forty as they were, which is worse than not offering it at all. Ask to see the same screen with the wording changed. It takes ten seconds and it tells you whether the setting is real or cosmetic. ### The home screen everybody stares at The dashboard is the screen your team looks at most, and the default is always a compromise built for an average business that does not exist. Look for a dashboard where you choose the widgets, move them and resize them, and where a business owner can set a sensible starting point for the whole team without overwriting what people have already arranged for themselves. A front of house on reception and a mechanic on the ramps need different numbers in front of them. One fixed dashboard means one of them is being ignored. ### A menu you can cut down Nobody uses every page. A menu with thirty entries when you need eleven slows down every single day, and it makes training a new starter harder than it needs to be. Check that you can reorder the menu, hide what you never touch and put the pages you live in at the top. On a phone the same question matters more, because there are only a few slots along the bottom and they should hold the things you tap all day. One caution. Hiding a page from a menu is tidying, not security. If you need to stop somebody opening a page, that is a permissions job, and any system worth buying keeps the two separate. Be suspicious of any vendor that offers hiding as an answer to who can see what. ### Switching off what you do not sell Most platforms cover several trades, so a chunk of what you are shown will never apply to you. Classes, memberships, vehicle lookups, purchase orders and gift cards are all useful to somebody and clutter to everybody else. The question to ask is whether an unused feature can be switched off across the business, and whether switching it back on later returns everything intact. A system that only hides things, or that loses your setup when you toggle, is telling you something about how it is built. ### Paperwork that looks like you Your invoices, quotes and reports are seen by every customer you have. A generic template with somebody else's branding on it undercuts the impression the rest of your work makes. Look for control over the layout, the typeface, your colours and your logo, and for control over what appears: your VAT number, your company number, bank details, payment terms, a payment link, a draft or paid watermark. Being able to give quotes a bolder look than invoices is a nice touch rather than a necessity. Separate from the design, check you can set the substance once: your numbering and prefixes, your payment terms, your standard small print and your bank details. Retyping those on every document is exactly the kind of small friction that makes people stop using the system properly. ### How customers meet you Not every business wants a customer picking their own slot. A mobile mechanic quoting on jobs needs enquiries, a salon needs bookings, and plenty of businesses want both depending on the service. A platform that only does one of the two will push your business into a shape that suits the software. Check you can run booking, enquiry or both, and that you can change your mind later without rebuilding your services. ### What to test in the trial - Change the terminology and check it follows into customer messages - Rearrange the dashboard, then check a colleague's is not disturbed - Hide three menu items you will never use, and confirm permissions are separate - Switch off a feature you do not sell, then switch it back on - Put your logo and colours on an invoice and send yourself one - Set your invoice prefix to continue your existing numbering - Set your payment terms and small print once and raise a fresh invoice - Switch your public page between booking and enquiry mode - Do all of it on a phone as well as a laptop - Check every change is logged, so nothing changes silently ### What does customisable booking software actually mean? In practice it means five things: you choose what is on your dashboard, you control the menu, you can switch off features you do not sell, your invoices and quotes carry your branding and your own defaults, and the product uses your words for the work you do. Anything less than that is a fixed system with a colour picker. ### Can I put my own branding on invoices and quotes? With good software, yes. Look for control over layout, typeface, primary and accent colours and your logo, plus switches for what appears on the document such as your VAT number, company number, bank details, payment terms and a payment link. Ask to see a real PDF rather than a screenshot. ### Should staff be able to customise their own view? Their own dashboard, yes, because a receptionist and a technician need different numbers in front of them. Business wide things such as the menu, document design and which features are switched on should sit behind a settings permission so one person cannot reshape the product for everyone by accident. ### Is hiding a menu item the same as restricting access? No, and treating it as though it is will get you into trouble. Hiding tidies the menu, while the page usually stays reachable by its address. Restricting access is a role and permission setting. Any system that blurs the two is not a system to trust with payroll or customer data. ### Will I lose data if I switch a feature off? You should not. A feature switch is meant to hide a part of the product you do not use, leaving the records in place so switching back on restores everything. Test it during your trial, because a platform that deletes on toggle is a platform that will surprise you later. --- ## Do you actually need booking software? Source: https://youzse.app/guides/do-i-need-booking-software Sometimes the answer is no, and we would rather tell you that than sell you something you will cancel in six weeks. This page is written by a company that sells booking software, so weigh it accordingly. What follows is the honest version: when a diary and a phone are genuinely enough, and the specific points at which they stop being enough. ### When you probably do not need it You work alone, your book is full of the same people, and they rebook in the chair before they leave. Nothing here is broken, and software will not make it better. You get almost no no shows. If people turn up, the single biggest financial argument for software does not apply to you. You take cash or bank transfer and are happy doing so. If you are not taking card payments, a large part of what these platforms do is irrelevant. You are testing whether the business works at all. Do not add a monthly cost to an experiment. Use something free and decide later. ### The four signs you have outgrown the diary You are losing appointments to no shows. This is the one that pays for everything. Two missed appointments a week at £45 is about £4,700 a year. Deposits and reminders recover most of that. You are answering the phone during appointments. Every call taken mid-treatment is an interruption for the client in the chair and a booking lost when you cannot answer. Online booking works while you are busy and while you are asleep. You have hired someone. Two diaries and one phone becomes a coordination problem immediately, and double bookings start costing you goodwill. You cannot answer simple questions about your own business. How many clients came back last quarter, which service earns most per hour, who has not been in for six months. If those take an evening to work out, you are flying blind. ### Work out whether it pays for itself Count your no shows over the last month and multiply by your average ticket. That is the recoverable number, and deposits plus reminders typically recover most of it. Then estimate the bookings you lost because nobody could reach you. Most businesses underestimate this, because a customer who could not get through simply rings someone else and you never hear about it. If those two numbers together are comfortably more than the monthly cost, the decision makes itself. If they are not, wait. The software will still be here. ### Signs it is time - More than one no show a week - Missing calls while you are with a client - A second person in the business - Customers asking to book outside your opening hours - Chasing payment after the work is done - No reliable record of who is due back and when - Wanting to be found by people who do not already know you ### Do I need booking software if I work alone? Not necessarily. If your book is full of regulars who rebook in person and you rarely get no shows, a diary is genuinely fine. The case for software for a solo operator is usually deposits and reminders: losing two appointments a week at £45 is about £4,700 a year, which a £19 a month subscription recovers many times over. ### Is booking software worth it for a small business? Count your no shows over a month and multiply by your average ticket, then add the bookings you lost because nobody could answer the phone. If that total comfortably exceeds the monthly cost, it pays for itself. If it does not, wait. ### What is wrong with a paper diary? Nothing, until you need it to do something it cannot: take a booking at eleven at night, hold a deposit, send a reminder, be in two places when you hire someone or tell you which clients have not been back in six months. A diary is a record, not a system. ### Will customers actually book online? A large share of appointments in this category are booked outside working hours, when nobody could have answered the phone. Those are bookings you are currently losing rather than bookings you would be moving online. Older client bases shift more slowly, so most businesses run both for a while. --- ## Choosing garage management software Source: https://youzse.app/guides/garage-management-software-uk Workshop software is judged on plate lookups, MOT due dates, job cards and getting paid before the car leaves. Everything else is secondary. Garage software is a different purchase to salon software. The calendar matters less, the vehicle record matters more and the feature with the clearest payback is the one that reminds a customer their MOT is due before someone else does. ### Start with the vehicle, not the appointment Typing a registration should fill in the make, model, engine, fuel type and colour without anyone touching a keyboard again. It should also pull MOT history and the next due date. If the vehicle record is an afterthought bolted onto an appointment system, you will feel it every day. Job history should hang off the vehicle as well as the customer, because cars change hands and customers own more than one. ### MOT reminders are where the money is A garage with 800 vehicles on the books loses a meaningful share of its MOT work every year to whoever contacts the customer first. Automating that reminder is the highest-return feature in the category. Check two things in any demo: that due dates are read automatically rather than typed in, and that reminders fire without anyone remembering to send them. A reminder system that depends on someone running a report on a Monday is a reminder system that stops working in August. ### Quotes customers can approve from the forecourt The moment that costs garages money is the phone call: you find extra work, the customer does not pick up, the ramp sits idle. A quote the customer can see and approve on their phone, with photos of the worn pads or the split boot, removes that dead time and reduces arguments at collection. Check that an approved quote converts straight into the job and then into the invoice, without being retyped. ### Parts, purchase orders and getting paid Parts should attach to a job with cost and sell price, so you can see margin per job rather than guessing at month end. Purchase orders should be raisable against a supplier and reconcilable when the parts arrive. On payment, the goal is money in before the keys go out. Payment links sent by text, card on collection and deposits on parts orders all reduce the ledger of people who will "settle up next week". If you are VAT registered, check the VAT return output is MTD ready and that your accountant can work with it. ### What to check in a demo - A registration plate fills in the vehicle automatically - MOT history and next due date are pulled, not typed - Reminders send automatically without a manual report - Customers approve quotes on their phone, with photos - Approved quotes become jobs and then invoices without retyping - Parts carry cost and sell price against the job - Purchase orders can be raised and reconciled - Payment links and card on collection - VAT returns are MTD ready - Vehicle and customer data can be exported - No multi-year minimum contract ### What does garage management software need to do? Pull vehicle details and MOT history from a registration plate, send MOT and service reminders automatically, let customers approve quotes from their phone, track jobs from booked in to collected, handle parts and purchase orders, take card payments and produce MTD ready VAT returns. ### Can garage software check MOT history automatically? Yes. Systems connected to the DVSA MOT history data can show past results, advisories and the next due date from the registration alone, which is what makes automated MOT reminders possible. ### Is garage software worth it for a two-ramp workshop? Usually, and the case is normally made by MOT reminders alone. Recovering even a small share of the repeat MOT work you currently lose covers the subscription several times over. The second biggest gain is quote approval, which stops ramps sitting idle while you chase a phone call. --- ## Going VAT registered Source: https://youzse.app/guides/going-vat-registered-uk Crossing the threshold is the single biggest change to the economics of a small service business. Here is what actually happens. This is a plain English overview to help you know what to ask, not accounting advice. VAT rules and thresholds change, so confirm the current figures on GOV.UK and talk to an accountant before you act. If you are anywhere near the threshold, that conversation is worth far more than it costs. ### When you have to register Registration is compulsory once your VAT taxable turnover passes the threshold in any rolling twelve month period. That is the part people miss: it is a rolling window, not your financial year, so a strong summer can trigger it in October. You must also register if you expect to pass the threshold within the next thirty days alone, for example because of a single large contract. You can register voluntarily below the threshold. That makes sense when your customers are mostly VAT registered businesses who reclaim it anyway, and when you buy a lot of materials whose VAT you could be reclaiming. It rarely makes sense voluntarily when your customers are consumers, because you cannot pass it on without either raising prices or absorbing it. ### What it does to a consumer-facing business This is the hard part and it deserves plain speaking. If you charge the public £45 for a service and you register, you have two options and neither is free. Raise your price to £54 and keep your margin, which is a twenty per cent increase your customers will notice. Or hold the price at £45, in which case £7.50 of it is now VAT and your income from that appointment has dropped to £37.50. Most businesses do something in between and take a real hit for a period. Knowing this is coming is the reason to plan for the threshold well before you reach it rather than discovering it in a letter. You do get to reclaim VAT on what you buy, which softens it if you carry a lot of stock or materials. For a business whose main cost is labour, that relief is small. ### The Flat Rate Scheme Smaller businesses can use a simplified scheme where you pay a fixed percentage of your gross turnover rather than accounting for VAT on every transaction, and generally do not reclaim VAT on purchases. The percentage depends on your trade, and there is a lower rate in the first year of registration. It can work well for labour-heavy service businesses with few costs to reclaim against, and badly for anyone buying a lot of stock. There is also a limited cost trader rule that catches businesses spending very little on goods, which pushes them to a higher rate. This is exactly the sort of decision to put to an accountant with your actual numbers rather than to work out from a blog. ### Making Tax Digital VAT registered businesses must keep digital records and file returns through compatible software. A spreadsheet you retype into a form is not compliant. Practically, this means whatever runs your bookings and invoicing needs to produce figures your accountant or filing software can use, with deposits recorded separately from final payments. Get this in place before you register rather than after. Trying to reconstruct a quarter of transactions retrospectively is a miserable weekend. ### Before you cross the threshold - Track rolling twelve month turnover, not your financial year - Model both options: raise prices or absorb it - Ask your accountant about the Flat Rate Scheme with real numbers - Check whether your customers can reclaim VAT - Get MTD ready records in place before registering - Record deposits separately from final payments - Decide your pricing approach before the letter arrives - Confirm current thresholds and rates on GOV.UK ### When do I have to register for VAT in the UK? When your VAT taxable turnover passes the registration threshold in any rolling twelve month period, or when you expect to pass it within the next thirty days on its own. The rolling window catches people out, because a strong few months can trigger registration part way through a financial year. Check the current threshold on GOV.UK. ### What happens to my prices when I register for VAT? If you sell to consumers you either raise prices by around twenty per cent and keep your margin, or hold prices and absorb the VAT out of your income. On a £45 service held at £45, roughly £7.50 becomes VAT and your income drops to £37.50. Most businesses do something in between and plan for it in advance. ### Is the Flat Rate Scheme worth it? It can suit labour-heavy service businesses with few purchases to reclaim VAT against, and suit stock-heavy businesses poorly. There is a lower rate in your first year of registration and a limited cost trader rule that pushes low-spend businesses onto a higher rate. Put your actual numbers to an accountant rather than deciding from general guidance. ### Do I need special software once I am VAT registered? You need to keep digital records and file through Making Tax Digital compatible software. A spreadsheet retyped into a form does not comply. Get this working before you register rather than reconstructing a quarter of transactions afterwards. --- ## Getting your Google Business Profile right Source: https://youzse.app/guides/google-business-profile-for-service-businesses For most local service businesses this single free listing sends more customers than everything else put together. Most are set up in ten minutes and never touched again. When someone searches for a barber, a garage or a groomer near them, the three businesses in the map box get most of the clicks. Getting into that box is not a mystery and it is not paid. It is mostly diligence that almost nobody applies. ### The three things Google is actually weighing Relevance: does your listing say you do the thing that was searched for. This is why a listing categorised simply as "salon" loses to one that lists the specific services people type. Distance: how close you are to the searcher. You cannot change this, and it is why chasing rankings for a city centre from six miles out is usually wasted effort. Prominence: how well known and well regarded you appear, which is largely reviews, consistency of your details across the web and activity on the listing. You control two of the three. Most businesses work on neither. ### Set-up that actually matters Categories. Your primary category does more work than anything else on the profile. Be specific: "hair salon" or "barber shop" rather than "beauty salon" if that is what you are. Add secondary categories for the other things you genuinely do. Services and prices. List every service by the name a customer would type, not the name you use internally. This is free real estate and most listings leave it empty. Hours, including the awkward ones. Bank holidays and early closes should be set in advance. A customer who drives to a closed shop leaves a review about it. Photos, added regularly rather than once. Real photographs of your actual premises and work, not stock. Interior, exterior, team and the work itself. Add some every month. A booking link. If people can book directly from the listing, they will. Sending them to a homepage where they have to hunt loses a share of them at every click. ### What moves you up Reviews, in volume and recently. A steady trickle beats a burst two years ago. Google reads recency, and so do customers. Replying to every review. It signals an active business, and it is the only part of a review you control. Consistent details everywhere. Your name, address and phone number should match exactly across your website, directories and social profiles. Mismatches genuinely dilute you. Posts and updates. Underused and cheap. A short post about an offer or a new service keeps the listing active. Questions and answers. You can ask and answer your own, and should. It is the only place you get to write the FAQ that appears directly in search. ### The mistakes that bury a listing - A category that does not match what people search for. - An address that differs, even slightly, from the one on your website. - No services listed, so Google has nothing to match against. - Reviews left unanswered, especially the bad ones. - Hours that are wrong on bank holidays. - Stock photography instead of the actual premises. - A keyword-stuffed business name, which breaches the guidelines and risks suspension. - Set up once and never opened again. ### The monthly ten minutes - Reply to every new review - Add two or three recent photos - Post one update - Check hours for the month ahead - Check your details still match your website exactly - Add any new services - Answer one common question in the Q and A ### How do I get into the Google map pack? Google weighs relevance, distance and prominence. You cannot change distance, so the work is in relevance and prominence: a specific primary category, every service listed by the name customers actually type, consistent name, address and phone details everywhere, a steady flow of recent reviews and replies to all of them. ### Do reviews affect local search rankings? Volume and recency both matter, which is why a steady trickle outperforms a burst of reviews collected two years ago. Replying to reviews signals an active business, and it is the only part of a review you control. Ask for one after every appointment rather than in occasional campaigns. ### Should I put keywords in my business name on Google? No. Adding keywords to your business name breaches Google's guidelines and risks suspension of the listing. Put the keywords in your categories, services and description instead, which is where they are supposed to go and where they still count. ### How often should I update my Google Business Profile? Ten minutes a month is enough: reply to new reviews, add a few real photos, post one update, check the coming month's hours and confirm your details still match your website exactly. The listings that fall behind are almost always the ones set up once and never opened again. --- ## Hiring your first employee Source: https://youzse.app/guides/hiring-your-first-employee-uk The legal minimum is shorter than people fear, but every item on it is compulsory and a few carry real penalties. This is an orientation, not employment law advice. The rules change and the penalties for the ones that matter are serious, so confirm the current position on GOV.UK and take proper advice for anything contentious. ### Before they start Check their right to work in the UK. This is not optional and the civil penalty for getting it wrong is substantial. Check the original documents or use the Home Office online service, and keep a dated copy. Register as an employer with HMRC. Do this before the first payday, and allow time, because it is not instant. Get employers liability insurance. It is a legal requirement from the day someone starts, the fines are per day uninsured and the certificate must be accessible to staff. Agree the pay, hours and start date in writing. Check the current National Minimum and National Living Wage rates for their age band, since they change every April and apply automatically. ### The written statement Every employee and worker is entitled to a written statement of employment particulars on or before their first day. Not within two months, on day one. It must cover pay, hours, holiday, place of work, job title, start date, notice, probation, sick pay and any training entitlement. You do not need a lawyer to draft a first one. ACAS publish templates that meet the requirement and are written in plain English. Whatever you use, read it before you send it. A contract you have not read is a contract you cannot enforce with a straight face. ### Pensions, holiday and payroll Automatic enrolment applies to employers, and there are duties even if the employee turns out not to qualify. You must assess them and complete a declaration of compliance. The Pensions Regulator writes to you about this and the deadlines are real. Statutory holiday is 5.6 weeks a year including bank holidays for a full-time worker, pro rata for part-time. Get the calculation right for irregular hours, which is where most small employers go wrong. Run payroll properly from the first payday, reporting to HMRC on or before you pay. For one employee, payroll software or a bookkeeper costs very little and removes an entire category of risk. Keep the records. Pay, hours, holiday taken and right to work checks all need to be retained. ### The operational part everyone underestimates Two people and one diary is a coordination problem from week one. Double bookings, gaps nobody noticed and arguments about who was meant to be in on Saturday all start immediately. Decide before they start who can see what. A new starter does not need access to your full client list, your takings or everyone's notes, and setting that boundary later feels like an accusation. Agree how their availability and time off gets requested and recorded. Verbal arrangements between two people stop working the moment there are three. ### Before day one - Right to work checked and a dated copy kept - Registered as an employer with HMRC - Employers liability insurance in place - Written statement of particulars ready for day one - Pay checked against current minimum wage for their age - Pension duties understood and diarised - Payroll set up and ready for the first payday - Access permissions decided, not left open - Rota and holiday process agreed in writing ### What do I legally need before hiring my first employee in the UK? Check their right to work and keep a dated copy, register as an employer with HMRC before the first payday, take out employers liability insurance from day one, provide a written statement of employment particulars on or before their first day and set up payroll. Automatic enrolment pension duties also apply. Confirm current requirements on GOV.UK. ### When does an employee need a contract? A written statement of employment particulars must be provided on or before the first day of work, not within a couple of months as was once the case. It must cover pay, hours, holiday, place of work, job title, notice, probation, sick pay and training. ACAS publish templates that meet the requirement. ### Do I need employers liability insurance for one member of staff? Yes, from the day they start. It is a legal requirement for almost all employers, fines are charged per day without cover and the certificate has to be accessible to your staff. ### How much holiday does a part-time employee get? Statutory entitlement is 5.6 weeks a year including bank holidays, pro rata for part-time hours. Irregular and variable hours are where small employers most often miscalculate, so check the current GOV.UK guidance rather than estimating. --- ## How much does booking software actually cost? Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-much-does-booking-software-cost-uk The advertised monthly price is rarely what you pay. Here are the three numbers that make up the real cost, and how to work out yours. Every platform advertises one number and charges you three. Comparing the monthly subscriptions is how businesses end up paying far more than they expected, because the subscription is often the smallest of the three. ### The three numbers The subscription is the advertised price. In the UK this typically runs from about £15 to £40 a month for a small business, before anything scales. Watch whether it is priced per business or per staff member, because a per-head price roughly triples the moment you hire two people. The card rate is what you pay to take money. It is quoted as a percentage plus a fixed amount, usually somewhere between about 1% and 2.5% plus 20p to 35p. The critical question is whether the platform fee sits inside that rate or is charged separately on top. The new client fee is the one people miss. Several platforms charge a one-time commission when a client who found you through their consumer app books you for the first time. Twenty per cent is common. On a busy month of new business it can be larger than everything else combined. ### What the three numbers look like in practice | Cost | Typical UK range | What to watch | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription | £15 to £40 a month | Per business or per staff member | | Card rate | 1% to 2.5% plus 20p to 35p | Is the platform fee inside it or extra | | New client fee | 0% to 30% one-time | Applies once per client, on their first booking | | Messaging | Often metered | Free allowance, then per message | | Setup and migration | Usually free, sometimes not | Ask before you commit | Ranges reflect what UK providers publish for small business tiers. For named platforms with dated figures, see our comparison pages. ### Work out your own number in ten minutes You need three figures from your own business: what you take on card in a month, roughly how many transactions that is and how many genuinely new clients you win. Take a three-chair salon turning over £6,000 a month across about 150 card transactions, winning 20 new clients whose first visit averages £45. On a platform charging £10 per team member, 1.19% plus 20p on cards and 20% on marketplace new clients, that is roughly £30 of subscription, about £101 in card fees and £180 in new client fees. Around £311. On Youzse Growth at £59 a month with a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p and 0% commission on new clients, that is £59 plus about £203, so around £262. Change the assumptions and the answer changes. A business that wins two new clients a month rather than twenty will find the lower card rate wins. That is the whole point of doing the sum on your own numbers. ### The fixed fee matters more than you think on small tickets Card pricing is a percentage plus a fixed amount per transaction, and on a small ticket the fixed part dominates. At 2.5% plus 35p, a £12 fringe trim costs 65p to process, which is 5.4% of the sale. The same rate on a £480 clutch replacement costs £12.35, or 2.6%. The headline percentage is nearly meaningless at the bottom end. If your average transaction is small, calculate your blended rate rather than comparing headline percentages. Take last month's total card fees and divide by total card takings. That single number tells you more than any pricing page. ### Ask every provider these before you sign - Is the subscription per business or per staff member? - What do I pay when a new client books me? - Is the platform fee inside the card rate or charged separately? - Are these prices quoted with or without VAT? - Is messaging included or metered? - What does setup and data migration cost? - Is there a minimum contract, and what does leaving involve? - How long is the trial, and does it need a card? ### How much does booking software cost in the UK? Subscriptions for a small UK business typically run from about £15 to £40 a month, but the subscription is only one of three costs. You also pay a card processing rate, usually between about 1% and 2.5% plus a fixed 20p to 35p per transaction and on several platforms a one-time commission of up to 30% when a new client books you through their marketplace. Add all three against your own takings before comparing providers. ### Why is the cheapest subscription not always the cheapest platform? Because platforms recover their costs in different places. A low subscription is often paired with a fee charged every time you win a new client, which grows exactly when your business is growing. A higher subscription with no new client commission is usually cheaper for a business that is expanding, and more expensive for one with a full book of regulars. ### What is a fair card processing rate in the UK? Published rates for small businesses generally sit between about 1% and 2.5%, plus a fixed 20p to 35p per transaction. A lower percentage is not automatically better value: check whether the platform fee is inside that rate or billed separately, and remember the fixed pence element dominates on small tickets. ### Should I pay for booking software at all? The case is usually made by no shows rather than features. A business losing two appointments a week at £45 each is losing about £4,700 a year. Software that costs £19 a month and prevents most of that pays for itself many times over. If you rarely get no shows and your diary is a notebook that works, you may genuinely not need it yet. --- ## Filling last minute gaps Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-fill-last-minute-gaps An empty hour cannot be sold tomorrow. Whatever you are going to do about it has to happen automatically, because you are busy. Service capacity is perishable. An unsold hour is gone in a way that unsold stock is not, and yet most businesses handle cancellations by feeling annoyed and doing nothing, because the moment it happens they are with a client. ### Make cancelling easy, which sounds wrong Every instinct says to make cancelling difficult. It is the wrong instinct, because the alternative to an easy cancellation is not attendance, it is a silent no show. A cancellation 48 hours out is a slot you can sell. A cancellation an hour before is a slot you probably cannot. Someone who cannot easily cancel simply does not turn up, and you find out when they do not arrive. Put a one-tap cancel and reschedule link in every reminder. You will see cancellations go up and no shows fall further, and the net is strongly positive because early cancellations are recoverable. ### A waitlist is the only thing that works at speed When a slot frees up, the people most likely to take it are the ones who already wanted that time and could not have it. They are a known, warm, specific list. The offer has to go out automatically and immediately. If it depends on you noticing the cancellation and messaging people, it will not happen on the days it matters, because those are the days you are flat out. Offer it to one person at a time with a short window, or to a small group first come first served. Both work. What does not work is blasting everyone and then disappointing four of them. ### Filling the gaps that were always going to be there Some gaps are not cancellations, they are simply Tuesday. Those need a different approach, because there is nothing to react to. Price the quiet times differently rather than discounting everything. A lower off-peak rate on a weekday morning fills hours that would otherwise be empty without touching what you charge on Saturday. Keep a standby list of people who are flexible: shift workers, retired clients, anyone who has ever said "let me know if you get a cancellation". That sentence is a marketing list and almost nobody writes it down. Offer the quick services into short gaps. A forty minute hole will not take a full colour but will take a fringe trim or a quick tidy, and something is a great deal better than nothing. ### Then find out why it keeps happening If one staff member has far more gaps than the rest, that is a scheduling or a rebooking problem, not bad luck. If the same slots are empty every week, stop protecting them and open them up differently, or shorten your hours and stop paying for an empty room. If cancellations spike on particular days, look at what you are sending and when. Reminder timing changes behaviour more than most owners expect. Track your no show and cancellation rate as a number rather than a feeling. It is the only way to tell whether any of this is working. ### Turning gaps back into revenue - A cancel and reschedule link in every reminder - A waitlist that offers freed slots automatically - A short window on each offer so it moves quickly - A standby list of genuinely flexible clients - Off-peak pricing on the hours that never fill - Short services offered into short gaps - Deposits so fewer slots free up at all - No show and cancellation rates tracked per staff member ### How do I fill a last minute cancellation? With a waitlist that offers the slot automatically the moment it frees up. The people most likely to take it are those who already wanted that time and could not have it. If filling the gap depends on you noticing and messaging people, it will not happen on the days you are busiest, which are exactly the days it matters. ### Should I make it harder for clients to cancel? No. The alternative to an easy cancellation is a silent no show, which is far worse. A cancellation two days out is a slot you can resell, whereas an hour before it usually is not. Businesses that add a one-tap cancel link see cancellations rise slightly and no shows fall further, which nets out strongly positive. ### How can I fill quiet weekday slots? Price the time rather than discounting the service. A lower off-peak rate on weekday mornings fills hours that would otherwise be empty without devaluing your Saturday. Keep a standby list of flexible clients, and offer your shorter services into gaps too small for a full appointment. ### How do I stop getting so many gaps in the first place? Take deposits, get the reminder timing right and rebook people at the appointment rather than hoping they return. Then look at the pattern: gaps concentrated on one staff member or one recurring slot are a scheduling problem to fix rather than bad luck to absorb. --- ## How to get more local clients Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-get-more-local-clients Ranked by what actually returns money, not by what is most fun to do on a Sunday evening. Most local businesses reach for social media first because it feels like marketing. It is usually fourth or fifth in order of return. Here is the honest ranking, cheapest and highest return first. ### 1. Keep the clients you already have This is not a growth tactic and it beats every growth tactic. Winning a new customer costs many times more than keeping an existing one, and most service businesses quietly lose a third of their base every year without noticing. Rebook at the appointment. The single highest-return habit in this entire list is asking "same time in four weeks?" before they stand up. Then automate the catch. Reminders, rebooking prompts at the right interval and a list of who has not been in for six months. Most of your growth is sitting in that last list. ### 2. Ask for referrals properly Referred customers convert better, spend more and stay longer than any other source, and almost nobody asks systematically. The ask has to be specific. "If you know anyone who needs this, send them my way" produces nothing. "Do you know one person who would like this?" produces names. Make it easy to pass on: a link they can forward, a card, anything better than "look me up". Rewarding both sides works well, provided it is a genuine offer and not tied to leaving a review. ### 3. Local search A properly maintained Google Business Profile and a steady flow of recent reviews puts you in front of people at the exact moment they are looking to buy. Nothing else has that timing. It is free, it takes ten minutes a month and most of your competitors have not touched theirs in a year. Being bookable directly from that listing matters more than anything you write on it. A customer ready to book who is sent to a homepage to hunt for a phone number is a customer you may lose. ### 4. Be bookable at eleven at night A large share of appointments are booked outside working hours, when nobody could have answered the phone. Those are not bookings you are moving online, they are bookings you are currently losing. The customer who cannot book at 10pm rings the next business on the list. You never find out that it happened, which is exactly why it stays unfixed for years. ### 5. Then social media It works, but it is slower and less measurable than everything above, and it consumes the most time. Do it after the four things above are running, not instead of them. When you do, post the work rather than the business. Before and afters, finished jobs, the actual result. Nobody follows a local business for its announcements. Put a booking link everywhere it can go: bio, profile, story highlights. Interest that cannot immediately become a booking mostly evaporates. ### In order - Rebook people before they leave - Automate reminders and rebooking prompts - Work the list of customers who have lapsed - Ask for one specific referral, not a general one - Maintain your Google Business Profile monthly - Collect reviews after every appointment - Be bookable online, out of hours, in two taps - Then post the work on social, with a booking link ### What is the cheapest way to get more clients? Keeping the ones you have. Winning a new customer costs many times more than retaining an existing one, and most service businesses lose a substantial share of their base each year without noticing. Rebooking at the appointment and prompting lapsed customers returns more than any acquisition channel. ### Does social media actually bring in customers? It works, but it is slower, harder to measure and far more time consuming than rebooking, referrals, local search and being bookable out of hours. Do it after those are running. When you do, post the work rather than announcements and put a booking link everywhere. ### How do I ask for referrals without being awkward? Be specific. "Send anyone my way" produces nothing, because it asks the customer to do the thinking. "Do you know one person who would like this?" produces actual names. Then make passing it on easy with a link they can forward. ### Why does online booking bring in new customers? Because a large share of appointments are made outside working hours, when nobody could answer the phone. Those are bookings currently going to whoever is bookable, not bookings you are shifting online. The customer who cannot book at ten at night simply rings the next business, and you never hear about it. --- ## How to get more reviews Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-get-more-reviews Almost every happy customer would leave a review. Almost none will think of it on their own. The entire problem is the asking. Businesses with hundreds of reviews are rarely better than the ones with six. They just ask, every time, and they have made it take ten seconds. That is the whole trick. ### Timing beats wording Ask within a few hours of the appointment, while they still feel how it went. A request two weeks later arrives when the feeling has faded and gets ignored. Ask after a good moment, not on a schedule. The appointment where someone said "I love it" is the one to follow up. If your system lets you trigger the request manually as well as automatically, use both. Do not ask the same person repeatedly. One request, one reminder at most. Beyond that you are training people to ignore your messages, which costs you more than a review is worth. ### Remove every step you can A direct link straight to the review box. Not your homepage, not a search result, not "look us up on Google". Every extra click loses a large share of people. On the phone they are already holding. A text massively outperforms an email for this, because the link opens straight into the app where they are already signed in. Give them something to write about. "If you have a minute, it really helps if you mention what you had done" produces specific, useful reviews rather than five stars and nothing. ### The rules you need to know You may not write, commission or publish fake reviews. Under UK consumer protection law this is enforceable and treated seriously, and the same applies to paying anyone to produce them. You may not offer a reward in exchange for a positive review. Offering an incentive for an honest review of any kind is a grey area at best and must be disclosed. The safe answer is to offer nothing and simply ask. You may not ask only your happy customers while filtering out the unhappy ones. Selectively suppressing negative feedback is a practice the CMA has acted on. Ask everyone, take what comes and reply to all of it. It is also the approach that produces the most believable profile, because a page of nothing but five stars reads as fake to customers as well as regulators. ### A review system that runs itself - Automatic request within hours of the appointment - By text, not email, wherever you have consent - A direct link to the review box, not your homepage - One reminder at most - A prompt about what to mention - Ask everyone, not just the ones you expect to be positive - Reply to every review, good and bad - Never offer a reward in exchange ### When is the best time to ask for a review? Within a few hours of the appointment, while the customer still remembers how it felt. Requests sent days later arrive after the feeling has faded and are largely ignored. Automating the send within the same day is the single highest-return change most businesses can make. ### Can I offer a discount for leaving a review? Offering a reward in exchange for a positive review is not permitted, and incentivising reviews generally is a grey area that must at minimum be disclosed. Under UK consumer protection rules fake and commissioned reviews are enforceable offences. The safe and more effective approach is to offer nothing and simply ask everyone. ### Should I only ask happy customers for reviews? No. Selectively asking customers you expect to be positive while filtering out the rest is a practice the CMA has taken action on. It also backfires, because a profile of nothing but perfect scores reads as manufactured to customers too. ### How do I make it easier for customers to leave a review? Send a direct link that opens the review box itself, by text rather than email, so it opens in the app where they are already signed in. Every extra click between the request and the box loses a large share of people. Adding a line suggesting what to mention also produces more specific and more useful reviews. --- ## How to raise your prices Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-raise-your-prices Nearly every service business is underpriced and leaves it two years too long. Here is how to do it without the week of dread. Raising prices is the fastest way to improve a service business, and the one most owners put off longest. The fear is losing everyone. What actually happens is that you lose a handful of your least profitable customers and earn more from the rest. ### The three signs you are already overdue You are booked solid weeks ahead. A full diary is not a sign you have got pricing right, it is a sign demand exceeds supply at your current price. That is the clearest signal there is. Nobody ever questions the price. If not one customer in a year has flinched, you are leaving money behind. A small amount of resistance is where the right price sits. Your costs have moved and your prices have not. Rent, products, insurance and wages have all risen. If your prices have been static for two years you have taken a real-terms pay cut without deciding to. ### How much and how often Small and annual beats large and rare. A modest rise every year is unremarkable. A big correction after four years is an event, and events get discussed. Round with care. Going from £45 to £48 is barely noticed. Going from £45 to £50 crosses a psychological line and gets counted. If you need to cross it, cross it in a year when you have visibly improved something. Raise selectively rather than across the board. Put more on the services that take the most skill or block the most time, and less on the quick ones that fill gaps. A flat percentage on everything is the lazy version. ### Telling people Give notice, apply it from a date and say it once. Four to six weeks is plenty. Existing bookings already made should honour the old price, which costs you very little and removes the main source of complaint. Do not apologise and do not over-explain. A long justification invites a negotiation. "Our prices are changing from 1 October. A cut will be £48." That is the whole message. Do not blame suppliers or the economy either. It reads defensively and it hands the customer an argument for when things improve. Tell your team before you tell customers. Staff who first hear about it from a client will not defend it. ### What actually happens next Expect to lose a few people. That is the mechanism working rather than failing. The customers most likely to leave over a few pounds are usually the ones who book the cheapest service, take the most time and never rebook. Expect one or two awkward conversations in the first fortnight and then silence. The anticipation is worse than the event, every time. Watch your rebooking rate rather than your booking count for the first month. A small dip in new enquiries with a steady rebooking rate means the rise landed fine. ### The price rise checklist - Work out your cost per chargeable hour first - Raise the skilled and time-heavy services most - Pick a date at least four weeks out - Honour bookings already in the diary - Tell your team before your customers - One short message, no apology, no blame - Update your booking page, price list and window - Review again in twelve months ### How often should a small business raise prices? Once a year is the pattern that causes least friction. A small annual rise is unremarkable and keeps pace with your costs. Leaving it three or four years forces a large correction, and large corrections get noticed, discussed and resisted. ### How much notice should I give clients of a price increase? Four to six weeks is normal and fair. Honour any bookings already in the diary at the old price. That costs very little and removes the most common complaint, which is someone who booked before the change and feels caught out. ### What should I say when I put prices up? State the change and the date it applies from, and stop. A long justification invites negotiation, and blaming suppliers or the economy hands the customer an argument for later. Say it once, clearly, without apologising. ### Will I lose customers if I raise prices? A few, and usually the least profitable ones. The customers who leave over a small increase tend to be those booking your cheapest service who rarely rebook. Watch your rebooking rate rather than total enquiries for the first month to judge whether it landed. --- ## How to reduce no shows Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-reduce-no-shows A no show is not just a lost hour, it is a lost hour you already paid a stylist or technician to be there for. Here is what genuinely reduces them. Most advice on no shows stops at "send a reminder". Reminders help, but the businesses that get their no show rate down to almost nothing do four things together: they take a deposit, they remind at the right moment, they make cancelling easy and they refill the gap automatically. ### 1. Take a deposit, and be normal about it A deposit is the single biggest lever. Someone who has paid £10 turns up. Someone who has paid nothing has nothing to lose by staying in bed. The worry is always that customers will object. In practice, almost nobody does, provided the amount is proportionate and the policy is stated before they pay. Ten to twenty per cent of the service price is normal. For a first-time client, or a long appointment that blocks a chair for three hours, take more. Deposits should come off the final bill automatically, not sit in a separate pot you have to remember. If your system makes you reconcile deposits by hand, you will stop taking them within a month. ### 2. Fix your reminder timing One reminder is not enough and four is nagging. The pattern that works is a confirmation at the moment of booking, a reminder 48 hours out and a short one on the morning of the appointment. The 48 hour reminder is the important one. It lands while there is still time for the customer to move the appointment rather than simply not turn up, and it is far enough ahead that you can refill the slot. Put a one-tap cancel or reschedule link in every reminder. It feels counterintuitive to make cancelling easy, but a cancellation 48 hours out is a slot you can sell. A silent no show is not. ### 3. Write a cancellation policy you will actually enforce A policy nobody enforces is worse than no policy, because it teaches regulars that the rules do not apply. Keep it short and put it where people see it before they book, not buried in terms. Something like: "Please give us 24 hours notice to cancel or move. Cancel later than that and we keep the deposit." That is enforceable, easy to explain and easy to apply consistently. On the legal side: a deposit or cancellation charge has to be a genuine reflection of your loss, not a penalty. Charging a £10 deposit on a £60 cut is defensible. Charging the full £60 for a missed appointment you could have refilled is not, and under UK consumer law an excessive charge in standard terms can be challenged as unfair. Take the deposit, keep it when the notice period is missed and do not try to charge the whole ticket. ### 4. Refill the gap without lifting a finger When someone does cancel, the slot should go back on sale immediately and the people who wanted that time should hear about it. A waitlist that automatically messages the next person turns a cancellation from a loss into a swap. This is the part most businesses never set up, and it is the difference between a 24 hour cancellation costing you money and costing you nothing. ### The short version - Take a deposit on every booking, more for new clients and long appointments - Confirm at booking, remind at 48 hours, remind again on the morning - Put a cancel and reschedule link in every message - Publish a 24 hour notice policy and apply it consistently - Keep the deposit when notice is missed, do not charge the full price - Run a waitlist so cancellations refill themselves - Track your no show rate by staff member and by service ### Can I legally charge a no show fee in the UK? You can, provided the charge is a genuine reflection of your loss rather than a penalty, and the policy was made clear before the customer booked. Keeping a proportionate deposit when a customer misses the notice period is normally defensible. Charging the full price of a service you could have resold is more likely to be challenged as an unfair term under consumer protection rules. Keep the amount proportionate, state it up front and apply it consistently. ### How much deposit should I take? Ten to twenty per cent of the service price is normal for a regular appointment. Take more for first-time clients, for long appointments that block a chair or ramp for hours and for services with a material cost you cannot recover. The deposit should come off the final bill automatically. ### When should appointment reminders be sent? Confirm at the moment of booking, remind 48 hours before and send a short reminder on the morning of the appointment. The 48 hour message matters most: it is early enough for the customer to move the appointment and early enough for you to refill the slot if they cancel. ### Do deposits put customers off booking? Rarely, if the amount is proportionate and the policy is visible before payment. Businesses that introduce deposits usually report a small dip in bookings and a much larger drop in no shows, which nets out strongly positive. The customers who refuse to pay a £10 deposit are disproportionately the ones who would not have turned up. --- ## How to respond to a bad review Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-respond-to-a-bad-review The reply is not for the person who wrote it. It is for the hundred people who read it afterwards and decide what kind of business you are. A bad review feels personal and the instinct is to defend yourself in detail. That instinct is almost always wrong, because you are not writing to the reviewer. You are writing to every future customer who reads the exchange. ### Wait a day, then write four sentences Nothing good has ever been written in the first hour. Draft it if you must, then leave it overnight and reread it in the morning. Thank them for the feedback. Acknowledge the specific thing without conceding what did not happen. Say what you will do or have done. Offer to take it offline with a real contact route. That is the whole reply. Four sentences reads as confident. Four paragraphs reads as rattled, and length is what makes readers assume the reviewer had a point. Never argue the facts in public, never mention what they paid and never reveal anything about their visit that they did not. That last one matters legally as well as reputationally: their appointment is their personal data, not yours to discuss. ### What readers are actually judging People do not expect a perfect score. They expect a business that handles problems well, and a calm reply to a harsh review does more for you than the review costs. A profile with only five stars is less trusted than one with a scattering of imperfect scores handled gracefully. Readers assume the perfect one has been curated. The pattern matters more than the incident. One complaint about waiting is noise. Four complaints about waiting is a message about your scheduling that you should act on rather than reply to. ### When a review can actually be removed Being unfair is not grounds for removal, and this is the thing most business owners misunderstand. Platforms remove reviews that breach their policies, not reviews that are wrong. Grounds that usually work: it is not about your business, it is from a competitor or someone who was never a customer, it contains personal abuse or discriminatory language, it reveals personal information or it is spam. Report it through the platform rather than replying angrily. If it is defamatory rather than merely negative, that is a legal question and worth proper advice before you act. If the review is genuine but the situation was resolved, the better route is to reply, fix it and then ask the customer directly whether they would consider updating it. Reviewers update far more often than people expect. ### Bury it with volume The most effective response to one bad review is twenty good ones after it. A single one star among fifteen reviews is visible. Among three hundred it is invisible and, oddly, reassuring. If a bad review has hurt, that is the signal to fix your review collection rather than to fight the review. Businesses that ask consistently never have this problem, because no single review is ever a large share of the picture. ### Replying well - Wait at least a few hours, ideally overnight - Four sentences, no more - Thank, acknowledge, act, offer to take it offline - Never dispute the facts in public - Never reveal anything about their visit - Report it only if it breaches platform policy - Look for patterns across reviews, not single incidents - Fix your review collection so no one review dominates ### How should I reply to a negative review? In four sentences, written the next day rather than the same hour. Thank them, acknowledge the specific issue without conceding things that did not happen, say what you have done about it and offer to continue offline. The reply is for future readers, not the reviewer, and a short calm one reads as confident where a long one reads as rattled. ### Can I get a bad Google review removed? Only if it breaches platform policy, not because it is unfair. Grounds that usually succeed include reviews that are not about your business, come from someone who was never a customer, contain abuse or discriminatory language, reveal personal information or are spam. Report it through the platform rather than replying angrily. ### Does one bad review really matter? Far less than it feels. Customers do not expect a perfect score and often distrust one, because a page of nothing but five stars reads as curated. A single low rating among a large number of recent reviews is close to invisible, which is why building review volume is a better response than fighting any individual review. ### Should I mention what the customer paid or what happened at their appointment? No. Details of their visit are their personal data, and disclosing them publicly is both a data protection problem and reputationally damaging. Keep the public reply general and move any specifics to a private conversation. --- ## Surviving the quiet months Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-survive-a-quiet-january The quiet month is predictable, which means it is a planning problem rather than a marketing emergency. For most UK service businesses January is brutal and August is uneven. Everyone knows this and almost nobody plans for it, so it arrives every year as a surprise and gets treated as a crisis. ### Sell the quiet month before it arrives The money for January is earned in November and December, when people are spending. The work is to convert that spending into commitments that land later. Gift cards are the obvious one and the most underused. Sold in December, redeemed in January and February, and a meaningful share are never redeemed at all. Prepaid blocks work even better because they bring the customer back rather than just the money. Five cuts, six sessions, a course of treatments, sold at Christmas and drawn down through the quiet weeks. Book January appointments in December, at the appointment. A diary with January already in it is a completely different January. ### Plan the cash, not just the diary Look at last January rather than guessing. Your own numbers from twelve months ago are the most accurate forecast you will find. Set money aside in the strong months deliberately. A percentage of takings moved out of the current account in November is far easier than borrowing in February. Know which of your fixed costs can flex and which cannot, before you need to know. Rent and insurance will not move. Stock orders and discretionary spend will. If you are VAT registered, remember the January return lands in the worst possible month. Put that money aside as it is collected rather than finding it later. ### What to do with the empty hours Work the lapsed list. The customers who have not been in for six months are the cheapest bookings available, and a quiet week is exactly when you have time to contact them. Discount time, not price, if you must discount. An off-peak Tuesday slot at a lower rate does not devalue your Saturday. A blanket twenty per cent off does, and it is very hard to unwind. Do the jobs the busy months never allow. Photograph your work properly, fix the booking page, write the service descriptions, sort the price list, get the accounts straight. Reach the customers who only come at Christmas. They are a real segment and a message in mid-January converts a surprising share of them. ### What not to do - Blanket discounting, which trains your regulars to wait for it. - Cutting your marketing in the quiet month, which makes the next one worse. - Panic-posting on social media every day for a fortnight. - Extending your hours before you have filled the ones you have. - Assuming this year will be different without changing anything. ### The plan - Look at last year's numbers for the same month - Sell gift cards and prepaid blocks in the busy period - Book quiet-month appointments while people are in the chair - Set money aside in the strong months - Put VAT aside as it is collected - Work the lapsed customer list - Discount off-peak time, never price across the board - Use the hours on the jobs the busy months never allow ### How do I prepare for a quiet January? Earn it in November and December. Sell gift cards and prepaid blocks while people are spending, book January appointments in December at the appointment itself, set money aside from the strong months and put VAT aside as it is collected so the January return does not land on an empty account. ### Should I discount during quiet periods? Discount time rather than price. A lower rate on an off-peak Tuesday does not devalue your Saturday, whereas a blanket percentage off everything trains your regulars to wait for it and is very difficult to unwind afterwards. ### What is the quickest way to fill a quiet week? Contact the customers who have not been in for six months. They are the cheapest bookings available because they already know you, and a quiet week is the only time you have the hours to do it properly. ### Do gift cards actually help cash flow? Yes, in two ways. The money arrives in your strongest month and is redeemed in your weakest, and a share is never redeemed at all. Prepaid blocks of sessions work even better, because they bring the customer back rather than only the cash. --- ## How to take card payments Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-take-card-payments-uk You no longer need a terminal, a contract or a merchant account. Here are the four ways to get paid and what each one actually costs. Taking cards used to mean a bank merchant account, a monthly terminal rental and an eighteen month contract. None of that is necessary now, and if you are still paying for it you are almost certainly overpaying. ### The four ways to get paid Tap to pay on your phone. The card touches your handset and that is the whole setup. No hardware, nothing to charge, nothing to lose in the van. Best for mobile work and anyone who does not want a device on the counter. A card reader. A small physical device paired to your phone or till. Worth it when several people take payment at once, when you want a printed receipt or when the counter is busy enough that handing over a phone is awkward. A payment link. Sent by text, email or WhatsApp, paid whenever the customer opens it. This is the one that fixes chasing: the invoice and the means to pay it arrive together. Payment at online booking. The strongest option, because it takes the money before the appointment rather than after. Deposits taken at the point of booking are also the single most effective thing you can do about no shows. ### Which suits which business | Method | Best for | Watch out for | | --- | --- | --- | | Tap to pay on phone | Mobile work, solo operators | One phone means one person taking payment | | Card reader | Busy counters, multiple staff | Hardware cost and something else to charge | | Payment link | Invoiced work, trades, landlords | Still relies on the customer acting | | Pay at booking | Appointments, deposits, courses | Needs a booking system behind it | ### Understanding what it costs Card fees are a percentage plus a fixed amount per transaction, and the fixed amount is the part that decides whether small sales are worth taking on card. At 2.5% plus 35p, a £12 sale costs 65p to process, which is 5.4%. The same rate on a £480 job costs £12.35, or 2.6%. If your average ticket is small, the percentage in the advert tells you very little. Work out your blended rate instead: last month's total card fees divided by total card takings. That one number is more useful than any pricing page, and it is the only fair way to compare providers. Also check whether the platform fee is inside the card rate or billed separately. A low advertised rate with a separate per booking or new client charge is not cheaper, it is differently shaped. ### The things people get caught by Surcharging. You cannot add a fee to a consumer for paying by debit or credit card in the UK. If cards cost you money, build it into your prices rather than adding it at the till. Payout speed. Standard settlement is usually a couple of working days. Paying extra for faster payouts is a recurring cost that is easy to switch on and forget about. Chargebacks. If a customer disputes a payment you will be asked for evidence. Booking confirmations, reminder messages and a record of your cancellation policy win these. Screenshots assembled after the fact usually do not. Minimum spends. Refusing cards under a fiver annoys people and, on a percentage plus fixed fee, is often solving a problem worth about thirty pence. ### Getting set up - Work out your average transaction value first - Compare on blended rate, not headline percentage - Check whether the platform fee is inside the card rate - Take deposits at booking, not payment at the end - Put a payment link in every invoice - Never surcharge a consumer for using a card - Check the default payout speed and what faster costs - Keep booking and reminder records for chargebacks ### What is the cheapest way to take card payments in the UK? It depends on your average transaction rather than the headline rate. Card fees are a percentage plus a fixed amount, so on small tickets the fixed pence dominates: at 2.5% plus 35p a £12 sale costs 5.4% to process, while a £480 job costs 2.6%. Work out your blended rate from last month's fees and takings and compare providers on that. ### Can I charge customers a card fee in the UK? No. Surcharging consumers for paying by debit or credit card is not permitted in the UK. If card processing costs you money, build it into your prices rather than adding it at the point of payment. ### Do I need a card reader? Not any more. Tap to pay on a phone handles contactless payments with no hardware at all, which suits mobile work and solo operators. A physical reader earns its place when several people take payment at once or the counter is busy enough that passing a phone around is impractical. ### How long do card payments take to reach my bank? Standard settlement is typically a couple of working days. Many providers offer faster payouts for an additional fee, which is a recurring cost that is easy to enable and then forget. Check the default speed before paying to accelerate it. --- ## Writing a cancellation policy that holds up Source: https://youzse.app/guides/how-to-write-a-cancellation-policy A policy nobody enforces is worse than no policy, because it teaches your regulars that the rules are decorative. Most cancellation policies fail for one of two reasons: they are too long to read, or they are never applied. A short policy applied every time beats a detailed one applied when you are annoyed. This is practical guidance, not legal advice. ### Keep it to three sentences It needs to say how much notice you want, what happens if you do not get it and nothing else. Something like: "Please give us 24 hours notice to cancel or move an appointment. If you cancel later than that, or do not attend, we keep the deposit. Bookings can be changed free of charge outside that window." That is enforceable, easy to explain to a customer and short enough that people actually read it. Every extra clause is another thing you have to remember, defend and apply consistently. Resist them. ### Setting the notice period Match it to how long it realistically takes you to refill the slot. Twenty four hours is standard for short appointments. Forty eight is reasonable for anything that blocks a lot of time. Do not set a week. You will not enforce it, and a policy you do not enforce trains people to ignore the next one. For appointments where you buy materials in advance, the notice period should sit before the point at which you place the order, not before the appointment. ### What you can fairly charge A charge in your standard terms has to reflect a genuine loss rather than punish the customer. Under UK consumer protection rules a term that causes a significant imbalance against the consumer can be challenged as unfair. Keeping a proportionate deposit when the notice period is missed is normally defensible. Charging the full price of a service you might still resell is much harder to defend. Practically, this means take a deposit of ten to twenty per cent, keep it when notice is missed and leave it there. That is the model almost every UK service business ends up at, and it holds up. Say it before the customer pays, not afterwards. A policy that first appears on the receipt has not been agreed to. ### Applying it without being the villain Apply it to everyone, every time. Waiving it for the people you like is exactly what makes it indefensible when you eventually enforce it against someone you do not. Give one free pass, deliberately and by policy, rather than by mood. Everyone has a genuine emergency once. A stated "first time, no charge" rule is generous and still consistent. Make cancelling easy. It feels wrong to remove friction, but a cancellation 48 hours out is a slot you can resell. A silent no show is not. Put a one-tap cancel and reschedule link in every reminder. Put a waitlist behind it so cancelled slots refill themselves. That turns enforcement from a revenue argument into an administrative detail. ### A policy that works - Three sentences, no more - A notice period you will actually enforce - Shown before payment, not on the receipt - A proportionate deposit, not the full price - One stated free pass rather than ad hoc mercy - Applied to everyone, every time - A cancel and reschedule link in every reminder - A waitlist to refill the gap ### What should a cancellation policy say? How much notice you need, what happens if you do not get it and nothing else. For example: 24 hours notice to cancel or move, deposit retained for later cancellations and no shows, free changes outside that window. Three sentences that people read beats a detailed policy that nobody does. ### How much notice should I ask for? Match it to how long it takes you to resell the slot. Twenty four hours suits short appointments and forty eight suits anything blocking significant time. Do not set a week, because you will not enforce it and an unenforced policy teaches customers to ignore the next one. ### Can I charge the full price for a late cancellation? It is risky. A charge in standard terms has to reflect a genuine loss rather than penalise the customer, and since you may resell the slot, charging the whole price is more open to challenge as an unfair term. Keeping a proportionate deposit is the model that holds up. ### Should I ever waive the charge? Yes, but by policy rather than by mood. A stated rule such as one free pass per customer is generous and still consistent. Waiving it for the people you like is what makes the policy indefensible the day you try to enforce it against someone you do not. --- ## What insurance do you actually need? Source: https://youzse.app/guides/insurance-for-uk-service-businesses One of these is a legal requirement. Most of the others are the difference between a bad week and losing the business. General guidance, not insurance advice, and cover varies enormously between policies. Read the actual wording and talk to a broker who knows your trade rather than buying the cheapest result on a comparison site. ### The one that is compulsory Employers liability insurance is a legal requirement if you employ anyone, from their first day. Fines are charged per day without cover. It applies more widely than people assume. Casual staff, part-timers and in some cases work experience placements can all count, and treating someone as self-employed does not automatically remove the duty if the reality is employment. The certificate must be accessible to your employees. ### Public liability, and why it is not enough on its own Public liability covers injury or damage to a third party or their property. Someone trips over your cable, you flood a customer's kitchen, a client slips in your reception. The critical gap for anyone who works on people is that a standard public liability policy typically does not cover harm caused by the treatment itself. A customer who trips in your salon is public liability. A customer burned by a chemical treatment usually is not. That is what treatment risk cover is for, and it needs to name the specific treatments you perform. Add a new service and you need to check it is covered, because policies are written against a list. Many landlords and most commercial premises require public liability as a condition of the lease, so check what level you are obliged to hold. ### The others worth understanding Professional indemnity covers advice or a service that causes financial loss rather than physical harm. Relevant to consultants, tutors and anyone whose recommendation a client relies on. Product liability matters if you sell or supply anything, including retail products in a salon or parts fitted in a garage. Equipment and stock cover for the things you cannot work without. Ask specifically about tools left in a van overnight, which is a common exclusion that catches out mobile trades. Business interruption for when you cannot trade at all. Read the trigger conditions carefully, because what counts as a qualifying event is where these policies differ most. Cyber and data cover is increasingly relevant now that every business holds client records digitally, and it typically includes support with breach notification. ### What actually invalidates a claim A treatment not named on the policy. The single most common problem: the business added a service and never told the insurer. No patch test record. For hair colour and several beauty treatments, insurers expect a documented test and a signed consent. A verbal "she said she was fine" is not a record. Unqualified staff performing a treatment the policy assumed was carried out by someone qualified. Records you cannot produce. If your consent forms, patch tests and treatment notes are on paper in a drawer, assume that at the moment you need them most you will not find the right one. ### The annual review - Employers liability in place if anyone works for you - Public liability at the level your lease requires - Treatment risk cover naming every service you offer - New services added to the policy when you launch them - Qualifications on file for everyone performing treatments - Patch test and consent records kept digitally and findable - Equipment cover including tools left in a vehicle - The actual policy wording read, not just the summary ### What insurance is legally required for a UK business? Employers liability insurance is compulsory from the first day you employ anyone, with fines charged per day without cover. Public liability is not a legal requirement in most cases but is commonly required by commercial landlords and by many clients before they will engage you. ### Does public liability cover treatments? Usually not. Public liability covers injury or damage to third parties, such as a client tripping in your premises. Harm caused by the treatment itself normally needs separate treatment risk cover, which is written against a named list of services. Adding a new treatment means checking it is covered. ### What most commonly invalidates an insurance claim? Performing a treatment that is not named on the policy, missing patch test or consent records, unqualified staff carrying out a treatment the policy assumed was performed by someone qualified and records you cannot produce when asked. Keeping consent and patch test records digitally solves the last of those. ### Do I need insurance if I work from home or mobile? Public liability and treatment risk still apply, because the risk follows the work rather than the premises. Mobile workers should also check equipment cover specifically for tools left in a vehicle overnight, which is a frequent exclusion. Home insurance rarely covers business activity. --- ## Is free booking software really free? Source: https://youzse.app/guides/is-free-booking-software-really-free Sometimes yes. Often the cost has simply moved somewhere you cannot see on the pricing page. Here is where to look. Search for booking software and almost every result leads with the word free. Some of it genuinely is. Most of it is free in the sense that the bill arrives somewhere other than a monthly subscription, and it is worth knowing where before you build your business on it. ### Where free platforms make their money Card processing margin is the most common. If the software is free but you must use its payment processing, the rate is where the business model lives. A percentage point of difference on £6,000 a month is £60, which is more than most paid subscriptions. New client commission is the second. A platform with a consumer marketplace can charge you a one-time fee, often around 20%, every time it introduces someone. Free to install, priced per customer acquired. Metered messaging is the third. Reminders are the feature that actually reduces no shows, and a free tier that includes twenty messages a month will not cover a busy diary. The overage is where it stops being free. Paid promotion is the fourth. If the marketplace ranks businesses, being visible in it eventually costs money, and that cost is not on the pricing page at all. Feature gating is the fifth and most honest. The free tier is real, it just stops at the point your business becomes serious: no deposits, no team, no reports, one location. ### When free genuinely is the right answer If you are testing whether online booking suits you at all, use a free tool. There is no sense paying to find out. If you take very few card payments, a free platform funded by processing margin costs you almost nothing, because the mechanism it uses to charge you barely fires. If you have a full book of regulars, no interest in being found by strangers and no need for deposits, a free calendar link may be all you ever need. We would rather say that than sell you something you do not need. ### When free starts costing more than paid - You are winning new clients through a marketplace that charges a commission on each one. - You take a lot of card payments, so a slightly higher processing rate outweighs any subscription. - You need deposits to stop no shows, and deposits are behind the paid tier. - You have a team, and the free tier is single user. - You send enough reminders to blow through the free message allowance every month. - You cannot export your client list, which makes leaving expensive in a way that never appears as a price. ### The question that settles it Ask any provider, free or paid: what do I pay when a new client books me, what is the card rate and can I export my full client list whenever I want. Three answers, sixty seconds and you will know more about the real cost than an hour on the pricing page would tell you. Youzse is not free. It starts at £19 a month, charges 2.5% plus 35p on cards with the platform fee inside that rate and charges 0% commission on new clients who find you through the marketplace. Whether that beats a free platform depends entirely on your mix, which is why the arithmetic above matters more than anyone's marketing. ### Is free booking software actually free? Some genuinely is, particularly simple calendar-link tools. Platforms that are free but include payments or a consumer marketplace usually recover their costs through card processing margin, a one-time commission when a new client books you, metered messaging, paid promotion or feature gating. None of those appear as a monthly price, but they are still what the software costs you. ### What is the catch with free salon software? Most often the payment processing rate, a commission charged when the marketplace introduces a new client or that the features which actually reduce no shows, deposits and unlimited reminders, sit behind a paid tier. Check all three before committing your diary to it. ### When should I move from free to paid booking software? When you start taking meaningful card payments, when you need deposits to protect your time, when you add a second person or when the commission on new clients starts exceeding what a subscription would cost. Work out your last three months against both models rather than guessing. ### Can I take my clients with me if I leave a free platform? Sometimes, and it is the single most important thing to check before you start. Ask specifically whether you can export your full client list with contact details and notes, including clients who first found you through the platform. If the answer is unclear, treat that as the real price of using it. --- ## Choosing an online booking system in the UK Source: https://youzse.app/guides/online-booking-system-for-small-business-uk Most booking platforms are built for the American market and adapted afterwards. Here is what to check if you are running a business in Britain. Plenty of good booking software is not built for the UK. It works, but you notice the seams: prices in dollars, dates that read the American way round, VAT as an afterthought and support asleep when your Saturday goes wrong. These are the things worth checking specifically. ### VAT is not an optional extra here If you are VAT registered, or heading towards the threshold, the system has to handle it properly rather than letting you add a line at the end. Check that invoices show VAT correctly, that deposits are recorded separately from final payments and that the reporting produces something your accountant can actually use. Ask specifically whether VAT returns are Making Tax Digital ready, because filing is no longer something you can do by hand. Also check whether the platform quotes its own prices with or without VAT. Providers differ, and a price plus VAT is 20% more than it looks. ### UK GDPR, not a generic privacy toggle You are responsible for the personal data you hold, and your software should make that possible rather than difficult. Look for marketing consent recorded per channel and per person with a date, a retention policy that genuinely deletes old records rather than hiding them, an audit trail and a way to fulfil an access or erasure request without exporting your entire database by hand. If you handle health information, and clinics, therapists and tattooists all do, that is special category data and needs more care than a tick box. Most businesses processing personal data also need to pay the ICO data protection fee. It is modest and it is enforceable. ### The small things that turn out to matter Dates written the British way round. A reminder that says an appointment is on 03/08 means something different to an American system, and customers do misread it. Prices in pounds throughout, including the card rate, so you are not converting in your head or absorbing exchange movement. Phone number formats and SMS delivery that work properly to UK mobiles, which is not a given with international providers. Support that answers during your working day. A Saturday morning problem in a salon is not a Monday problem. ### The UK checklist - MTD ready VAT returns, with deposits recorded separately - Prices quoted clearly as including or excluding VAT - Marketing consent recorded per channel with dates - Retention policy that actually deletes - Data access and erasure requests handled without manual exports - Card rates published in pounds - British date formats in every customer message - Reliable SMS delivery to UK mobiles - Support hours that overlap your trading hours - No minimum contract ### What should a UK small business look for in a booking system? Beyond the calendar, check the UK specifics: Making Tax Digital ready VAT returns with deposits recorded separately, UK GDPR tooling for consent, retention and data requests, card rates published in pounds, British date formats in customer messages, reliable SMS to UK mobiles and support during British working hours. ### Does booking software need to be GDPR compliant? You need to be compliant, and the software should make it possible. Look for marketing consent recorded per channel and dated, a retention policy that deletes old records automatically, an audit trail and a way to fulfil access and erasure requests without exporting your whole database by hand. ### Do I need to register with the ICO? Most UK businesses processing personal data need to pay the ICO data protection fee. For a small business it is a modest annual amount and non-payment is enforceable, so it is worth checking rather than assuming you are exempt. ### Is it a problem if my booking software is not UK based? Not necessarily, and plenty of international platforms work well. The friction shows up in VAT reporting, date formats in customer messages, support hours and whether card rates are quoted in pounds. Test a real booking end to end, including the confirmation and reminder, before you commit. --- ## Choosing salon booking software in the UK Source: https://youzse.app/guides/salon-booking-software-uk Every platform demos well. These are the questions that decide whether you are still happy in eighteen months. Booking software is easy to buy and painful to change, so the things that matter are rarely the things demonstrated in a sales call. Here is what to actually interrogate. ### Work out the real monthly cost Three numbers make up what you pay: the subscription, the card processing rate and whatever the platform charges when a new client books you. Comparing subscriptions alone is how salons end up surprised. Ask specifically: does the bill change when I add a stylist? What is the fee when a new client books through your app? Is the platform fee inside the card rate or charged separately? Are these prices with or without VAT? Then run your own numbers: your monthly card takings, your average transaction and how many new clients you expect. The platform that wins on a spreadsheet is often not the one with the lowest headline price. ### Deposits and no show protection This is the feature that pays for the software. Check that deposits are taken by card at the point of booking, that the amount can vary by service and that the deposit comes off the final bill automatically rather than needing manual reconciliation. Also check the reminder schedule is configurable and that reminders carry a one-tap cancel or reschedule link. Making cancellation easy sounds wrong and is right: an early cancellation is a slot you can resell. ### Who owns the client? The most important question and the one least often asked. Can you export your full client list, with contact details and notes, whenever you want? If a client first found you through the platform, are they still your client? Some platforms charge you a one-time fee for a new client and then leave the relationship with you. Others make the relationship harder to take with you. Ask directly, and ask what an export file actually contains before you commit. ### UK specifics that get overlooked Make sure the system handles UK GDPR properly: recorded marketing consent per channel, a retention policy that actually deletes old records and a way to fulfil a data access or erasure request without exporting your whole database by hand. If you are VAT registered, check the reporting produces something your accountant can use and that deposits are recorded separately from final payments. Check that dates, currency and phone number formats are British throughout. It sounds trivial until a reminder tells a client their appointment is on 03/08 and they read it the American way. ### Ask every platform these - What do I pay when a new client books me? - Does my bill rise when I add a stylist? - What is the card rate, and is the platform fee inside it? - Are prices quoted with or without VAT? - Can deposits vary by service, and do they auto-deduct? - Can I export my full client list, including notes and consent? - How are data access and erasure requests handled? - How long is the trial, and does it need a card? - Is there a minimum contract? ### What should salon booking software cost in the UK? Subscriptions typically run from about £15 to £40 a month before per-staff costs. The subscription is rarely the biggest number though: card processing and any fee charged on new clients usually matter more. Add all three together against your own takings before comparing platforms. ### Do I need booking software if I only have one chair? The case is about deposits and reminders rather than a calendar. A solo stylist losing two no shows a week at £45 each is losing about £4,700 a year. Software that costs £19 a month and prevents most of that pays for itself many times over. ### What is the difference between booking software and a booking marketplace? Booking software runs your business: calendar, clients, deposits, payments, reminders. A marketplace also lists you to consumers browsing for a salon. Most platforms do both, and the fee they charge for a marketplace-introduced client is usually the biggest single difference in what you pay. ### Does salon software need to be GDPR compliant? You need to be compliant, and your software should make that possible. Look for recorded marketing consent per channel, a retention policy that deletes old records automatically, an audit trail and a way to fulfil access and erasure requests without exporting your database by hand. --- ## Switching booking software without losing clients Source: https://youzse.app/guides/switching-booking-software-without-losing-clients The fear that stops most businesses moving is losing the client list. Done in the right order, a switch takes an afternoon and nobody misses an appointment. Most people who want to leave their booking platform stay put for another year because switching feels risky. It is not, if you do it in the right order and do not cut over on your busiest week. ### Before you do anything, export Get your data out of the old system first, while your account is still fully active. Once you cancel, access to exports often goes with it. You want four things: your customer list with contact details, marketing consent status and notes; your appointment history; your service list with prices and durations; and your reviews. Save the files somewhere safe and keep them even after the move. If the platform will not give you a clean export, that is worth knowing now. It also tells you something about how easy leaving was always going to be. ### Run both for two weeks Do not switch overnight. Import into the new system, set up your services, staff and hours and take a fortnight to check it against the old one while the old one still handles live bookings. This is the reason trial length matters. A seven day trial does not give you time to do this properly. Thirty days does. During the parallel run, book a few real appointments through the new system yourself. Check the confirmation email, the reminder, the deposit and the payment. Bugs in your setup show up here, not in a demo. ### Pick a quiet week to cut over Switch on a Monday of a quiet week, never in December, never the week before a bank holiday. Change your booking link everywhere on the same day: Instagram and Facebook bio, Google Business Profile, your website, your email signature and the sign on the door. A stale link on one profile is where the confusion comes from. Keep the old system readable but closed to new bookings for a month, so you can look up anything you missed. ### Tell your regulars properly One message, sent once, in your own voice. "We have moved our bookings to a new system. Here is the new link. Your appointments are all still in place." That is the whole message. Do not apologise or over-explain. Customers care that their next appointment still exists, not which software you use. Check your marketing consent before you send anything promotional. Consent given on one platform still applies to the person, not the platform, but you need to have carried the consent record across rather than assuming it. ### The switching checklist - Export customers, history, services and reviews from the old system - Import into the new system and check the numbers match - Set up services, prices, durations, staff and opening hours - Configure deposits, reminders and your cancellation policy - Test a real booking end to end, including payment - Run both systems in parallel for two weeks - Pick a quiet week to cut over - Update every booking link on the same day - Message your regulars once, with the new link - Keep the old system readable for a month ### Will I lose my clients if I change booking software? Not if you export your client list before you cancel the old account, import it into the new system and tell your regulars once with the new booking link. The clients belong to you. What you cannot carry across is a marketplace listing on the old platform, so update every link you control on the day you switch. ### How long does it take to switch booking systems? The import itself usually takes an afternoon. The sensible timeline is longer: two weeks running both systems in parallel so you can check everything before you move live bookings across. That is why a 30 day trial is more useful than a 7 day one. ### What data should I export before leaving a booking platform? Customers with contact details, marketing consent status and notes; appointment history; your service list with prices and durations; and your reviews. Export while your account is still active, because access often disappears when you cancel. ### Does marketing consent carry over to a new system? Consent is given by the person to your business, not to the software, so it does carry over. What matters is that you actually transfer the consent record, including when and how it was given, rather than assuming everyone opted in. If your export does not include consent status, treat those contacts as unconsented for marketing until you ask again. --- ## Taking deposits for appointments Source: https://youzse.app/guides/taking-deposits-for-appointments-uk Deposits are the most effective no show protection there is, and the area where UK businesses most often get the rules wrong. This is a practical guide, not legal advice. If you are drafting terms for a large business or handling a live dispute, take proper advice. For a salon, garage, clinic or trade business setting a sensible deposit policy, this covers what you need. ### How much to take Ten to twenty per cent of the service price is the normal range and is easy to defend as proportionate. Go higher when your exposure is higher: a first-time client with no history, an appointment that blocks a chair or a ramp for hours or a service where you have already bought materials. Colour corrections, large tattoos, bridal work and specialist parts orders all justify a bigger deposit. Whatever you set, apply it consistently. Charging some customers and not others is the fastest way to make a policy indefensible. ### Refundable or non-refundable? The honest answer is that "non-refundable" is not a magic phrase. Under UK consumer protection rules a term in your standard contract can be challenged if it causes a significant imbalance to the detriment of the consumer. A deposit you keep because the customer gave you no notice and you lost the slot is reasonable. A deposit you keep because they cancelled three weeks out and you refilled the appointment is not. The workable model is a notice window. Cancel with more than 24 or 48 hours notice and the deposit is refunded or moved to the new appointment. Cancel inside the window or fail to turn up and you keep it. That is easy to explain, easy to apply and stands up. State it before the customer pays, not after. A policy that first appears on the receipt has not been agreed to. ### VAT on deposits If you are VAT registered, a deposit generally creates a tax point when you receive it. In practice that means VAT is usually due in the period you took the deposit, not the period you did the work. If you keep a deposit because the customer did not turn up, the VAT treatment can differ depending on whether the payment is treated as consideration for a supply or as compensation. This is genuinely fiddly and the treatment has shifted over the years, so ask your accountant how to handle retained deposits rather than assuming. Whatever the answer, make sure your system records deposits separately from final payments so the figures are actually available at quarter end. ### Chargebacks and disputes Occasionally a customer will dispute a retained deposit with their bank. You will be asked for evidence. What wins these: a record that the policy was shown before payment, a timestamped booking confirmation, the reminder messages you sent and a clear log of when the customer cancelled or failed to attend. If your booking system keeps all of that automatically, a chargeback is a five minute job. If it does not, it is an afternoon of screenshots and a likely loss. Respond within the deadline the card provider gives you. Missing it loses the case regardless of the merits. ### A deposit policy that holds up - Set a proportionate amount, typically 10 to 20 per cent - Show the policy before the customer pays - Use a clear notice window, 24 or 48 hours - Refund or transfer the deposit when notice is given - Keep it when notice is missed, and never charge the full price - Apply the rule to everyone, every time - Record deposits separately for VAT - Keep booking, reminder and cancellation logs for disputes ### Are appointment deposits refundable in the UK? It depends on your terms and whether those terms are fair. A deposit retained because a customer cancelled inside a stated notice window, or did not turn up, is generally reasonable. Keeping a deposit when the customer gave plenty of notice and you refilled the slot is more likely to be treated as an unfair term. Publish a clear notice window, refund outside it and keep the deposit inside it. ### Do I pay VAT on a deposit? If you are VAT registered, receiving a deposit generally creates a tax point, so VAT is usually due in the period you received it rather than when the work is done. The treatment of a deposit you keep after a no show can differ, so check with your accountant. Keep deposits recorded separately so the figures are available at quarter end. ### How do I win a chargeback on a retained deposit? Evidence and speed. Provide the booking confirmation, proof the cancellation policy was shown before payment, the reminders you sent and a log of when the customer cancelled or failed to attend. Respond inside the card provider's deadline, because missing it loses the case regardless of the facts. ### Can I charge the full price for a no show? It is risky. A charge in your standard terms has to reflect your genuine loss rather than punish the customer. Since you may be able to refill the slot, charging the entire service price is more likely to be challenged than keeping a proportionate deposit. Most UK businesses keep the deposit and leave it there. --- ## What to put on an invoice Source: https://youzse.app/guides/what-to-put-on-an-invoice-uk An invoice is a legal document before it is a request for money. Most of what it needs is straightforward, and the parts people get wrong are the numbering and the VAT. This is a plain guide, not tax advice. The detail changes, so confirm the current position on GOV.UK and ask your accountant about anything specific to your business. What follows is the shape of it, and the mistakes that cost people time at year end. ### The basics, whether or not you are VAT registered Every invoice needs a unique identifying number, your business name, address and contact details, and the name and address of the customer you are billing. It needs a clear description of what you supplied, the date you supplied it and the date of the invoice itself. Those two dates are often different and both matter. Then the money: the amount charged for each item, any VAT, and the total owed. Add how you want to be paid and by when, because an invoice that does not say when payment is due invites a customer to decide for themselves. Write the description as though someone unfamiliar with the job is reading it, because at some point one will be. "Labour" is a dispute waiting to happen. "Front brake pads and discs replaced, 2 hours labour" is not. ### If you trade as a limited company Use your full registered company name exactly as it appears at Companies House, not your trading name on its own. Company stationery and your website also have to show your registered office address, your company number and where you are registered. Putting the same details on your invoices keeps everything consistent and saves anyone chasing you for them. If you name any director on the invoice, you have to name them all. Most businesses avoid the problem by naming none. ### Once you are VAT registered A full VAT invoice carries more than a plain one. Alongside the basics it needs your VAT registration number, a sequential invoice number, the time of supply or tax point if that differs from the invoice date, and for each line the quantity, the unit price excluding VAT, the VAT rate applied and the amount excluding VAT. It also needs the total excluding VAT, the total VAT charged in sterling and the rate of any cash discount offered. For small retail sales there is a simplified version, which is why a coffee shop receipt does not look like a builder's invoice. The threshold and the reduced field list are set out on GOV.UK, and if you mainly invoice businesses you will be issuing full invoices anyway. One trap worth naming: only charge VAT once you are actually registered. If you are waiting for your number to come through, GOV.UK explains how to handle invoices raised in the gap. Charging VAT you are not yet registered to charge is a genuine problem rather than a paperwork slip. ### Numbering is where people come unstuck Invoice numbers have to be unique, and for VAT purposes they have to run in sequence. Two invoices sharing a number, or a sequence with unexplained gaps, is exactly the sort of thing that turns a routine enquiry into a longer one. The usual causes are mundane. Someone raises invoices in a spreadsheet while the office raises them in the software. A prefix changes at the start of the year and the count restarts. An invoice is deleted rather than cancelled and credited, leaving a hole nobody can explain later. Pick a format and let one system own it. A prefix, a fixed number of digits and an automatic increment is enough. INV 00042 tells anyone what it is at a glance and sorts properly. If you cancel an invoice, issue a credit note against it rather than deleting the record. The gap is then explained by a document instead of by your memory eighteen months on. Moving from another system is the moment to get this right. Carry on from your last number rather than starting again at one, or you will have two invoices numbered 1 in the same tax year. ### Payment terms and what happens when they are ignored State the terms on the invoice. Fourteen or thirty days is normal, and payment on receipt is fine for consumer work provided you say so before you start. For business to business work, if you have not agreed terms the law fills the gap with thirty days. You can also charge statutory interest on a late commercial debt, currently set at eight per cent above the Bank of England base rate, plus a fixed sum in compensation that rises with the size of the debt. Most people never invoke it. Quoting it in your terms is still worth doing, because it changes the tone of the second reminder without you having to write anything unpleasant. Keep your records. VAT records generally have to be kept for six years, and business records for five or six years depending on how you trade. Digital copies are acceptable, and a system that stores every issued document is easier to defend than a folder of PDFs. ### The part nobody legislates for A correct invoice that looks like it was thrown together still slows down payment. Your logo, your colours and a consistent layout signal that there is an organised business behind the request, and organised businesses get paid sooner. The practical version of this is not a design project. Set your layout, colours and logo once, set your payment terms, bank details and small print once, and let every invoice inherit them. The consistency does the work. Add a payment link if you take cards. Removing the step where a customer has to find their card reader and type a sort code out of an email is the single cheapest thing you can do to your payment times. ### Before you send it - Unique invoice number, following on from the last one - Your business name, address and contact details - Full registered company name and number if you are a limited company - Customer name and address - Clear description of what you supplied - Supply date and invoice date - Amount per item and the total owed - VAT registration number, rates and totals if you are registered - Payment terms, due date and how to pay - Bank details or a payment link, or both ### What must be included on a UK invoice? A unique invoice number, your business name, address and contact details, the customer's name and address, a clear description of what you supplied, the supply date and the invoice date, the amount charged per item, any VAT and the total owed. Adding your payment terms and how to pay is not compulsory but it gets you paid faster. Check current GOV.UK guidance for the detail. ### Do invoice numbers have to be sequential? They have to be unique, and for VAT purposes they have to be sequential. Gaps and duplicates are what draw questions, so let one system own the numbering rather than raising invoices in two places. If you cancel one, issue a credit note instead of deleting it so the gap is explained. ### What extra does a VAT invoice need? Your VAT registration number, a sequential number, the tax point if it differs from the invoice date, and for each line the quantity, unit price excluding VAT, VAT rate and amount excluding VAT, plus the total excluding VAT and the total VAT in sterling. Smaller retail sales can use a simplified invoice with fewer fields. ### Can I change my invoice prefix part way through the year? Yes, as long as numbering carries on rather than restarting. Changing from INV to 2026 and continuing the count is fine. Changing the prefix and going back to 1 gives you two invoices with the same number in the same year, which is the thing to avoid. ### How long do I need to keep invoices? VAT records generally need keeping for six years, and business records for five or six years depending on how you trade. Digital copies count, so keeping every issued document in your system is both acceptable and easier to search than a filing cabinet. ### Can I charge interest on a late invoice? For business to business debts, yes. Statutory interest is eight per cent above the Bank of England base rate, plus a fixed compensation amount that rises with the size of the debt. Most people never claim it, but stating it in your terms makes a polite second reminder considerably more effective. --- ## Switching from Booksy, step by step Source: https://youzse.app/switch/booksy Third-party facts last checked: Aug 10, 2026 Booksy is a well built product with a client app your regulars already have on their phones. If you are going anyway, this is the running order that keeps your diary intact while you do it. ### The running order, first to last - Write down what you actually need on the other side, which for most shops is the client list, the services with their prices and the next six weeks of bookings - Export those three while the Booksy account is still live, because an account you have already cancelled is a poor place to go looking for a file - Open the Youzse trial, which is 30 days with no card, and import the client file first - Read the preview screen rather than the row count. Youzse checks for records that already match so a client is not created twice - Import services, then staff, then bookings, in that order, because a booking needs the other three to exist - Rebuild the parts that were never data, which means reminder timing, deposit rules and cancellation windows - Point your own booking link, your Instagram profile and your Google Business Profile at Youzse only once the diary is one you trust - Cancel Booksy after the last booking made under it has happened, not before ### What a Booksy export gives you and what Youzse does with it Youzse recognises a Booksy client file by its column headings and maps first name, last name, email address, mobile phone, birthday, notes and address straight through. Service files carry name, category, duration, price and description. Booking files carry date, time, service, client, staff member, duration, price and status, and the Booksy status words are translated on the way in, so done becomes completed and rejected becomes cancelled. One asymmetry is worth knowing before you plan any marketing. The Booksy client mapping in Youzse has no marketing consent column in it, so consent does not arrive with the file the way it does from some other platforms. Treat every imported Booksy client as having given you no marketing permission until you hold a record of one. That is the cautious reading of UK data protection law and it is also the only reading that survives a complaint. Reviews are a separate job from the client list. Youzse can read the reviews on your public Booksy profile from pasted text, pull out the reviewer name, the date, the rating and the comment where the profile shows them, and store each one labelled as imported. A copy of a review is not the star average sitting on your Booksy profile, and we would rather say that plainly than let anyone believe their rating travels with them. ### What the bill looks like on each side | | Booksy | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription | £40 a month, plus £5 a month per additional team member. Booksy states that all services are subject to VAT, which will be added to the final price | From £19 a month for the business, with VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | New clients | No marketplace commission unless Boost is switched on. Boost is a one time 30% fee, with a minimum of £5, based on the total cost of a Boost client's first visit | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse | | Returning clients | 0% commission from the second visit onward | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, so there is no first visit fee for a second visit to be free of | | Card payments | Mobile Payments 1.29% plus 20p plus VAT, Tap to Pay 0.99% plus 20p plus VAT and Fast Payouts 1.5% | 2.5% plus 35p per transaction with the Youzse platform fee inside the rate and VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page, which is higher than every Booksy line in this row | | Free trial | 7 days, stated as no credit card or commitment required | 30 days with no card | | Channels that carry no commission | Instagram and Facebook Reserve, Google Search and Maps, your personal booking link and QR codes | Your own booking link, your social profiles and the Youzse marketplace listing, which carries 0% commission on the new clients it brings you | Booksy figures taken from biz.booksy.com/en-gb/pricing. Booksy states that all services are subject to VAT, which will be added to the final price, so add it to every Booksy figure above before comparing. On card processing Booksy is cheaper than Youzse on every rate it publishes. ### The parts that get worse, not better - The Booksy client app is on your regulars' phones already, and moving means asking them to book somewhere else. That is a real cost and no feature table makes it go away. - Card processing costs you more with us. Booksy publishes 0.99% plus 20p plus VAT on Tap to Pay against our 2.5% plus 35p, and our platform fee sitting inside the rate explains the gap without closing it. - Marketing consent does not arrive in the Booksy client mapping, so a list you assumed was contactable may need permission gathering again before you use it. - Reminder timings, deposit rules and cancellation windows are settings rather than records. Nothing exports them and they have to be built again wherever you go. - Any QR code you have printed, and any link in a bio or a shop window, points at Booksy until you change it yourself. ### What Booksy is genuinely good at, and when leaving is still right Booksy has real strengths and a page that pretends otherwise is not worth reading. Adoption among barbers is high, so clients recognise the booking flow without being taught it. Booksy publishes a list of channels that carry no marketplace commission at all, covering Instagram and Facebook Reserve, Google Search and Maps, your personal booking link and QR codes, so a shop with a full book can run on it without ever paying for a client. Boost is something you switch on rather than the default. The trial is 7 days, stated as no credit card or commitment required. If your book is full and Boost is off, Booksy is not costing you much beyond the subscription. The case for leaving is usually one of two things. Either £40 a month plus VAT plus £5 a head for the team has grown past what a booking diary is worth to you, or you have outgrown booking altogether and want quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards and VAT returns in the same place. Youzse starts at £19 a month for the business and covers more than 60 trades, which is a different shape of product rather than a better version of the same one. Where we lose is the card rate, and it is worth saying twice. If most of your revenue arrives as a tap in the chair, run the arithmetic on your own monthly card takings before you move, because the subscription saving can be smaller than the processing difference. ### What does the Youzse importer actually do with a Booksy file? It reads it. Youzse recognises a Booksy client export by its column headings, which are first name, last name, mobile phone and email address, and maps those along with birthday, notes, street, city, postcode and country. Service files map name, category, duration, price and description. Booking files map date, time, service, client, staff member, duration, price and status, and Booksy status words are translated so done becomes completed and rejected becomes cancelled. Every mapping is shown on screen before anything is written and you can change it. The importer then checks for records that already match, so running a file twice does not create a second copy of everyone, and a committed batch can be rolled back if you decide it went in wrong. ### Do my Booksy reviews and my star rating come with me? Your Booksy star rating stays on your Booksy profile, because it belongs to that profile rather than to you. What Youzse can do is read the review text from your public Booksy profile, pull out the reviewer name, the date, the rating and the comment where they are shown, and store each one labelled as imported from Booksy. Clients see that label. It is the only defensible way we can think of to carry reviews between platforms, and it means an imported history reads as history rather than as fresh praise for a business that has only just arrived. ### How do I move without losing bookings that are already in the diary? Overlap rather than switch. Export your bookings while the Booksy account is still live and import that file into Youzse so the diary is populated from the first day. Take new bookings on Youzse while Booksy stays readable, and leave the old account open until the last booking made under it has actually happened. The Youzse trial runs 30 days with no card, which normally covers the tail of an existing diary. Cancelling first and exporting afterwards is the one order that causes real damage. --- ## Leaving Fresha without losing your client list Source: https://youzse.app/switch/fresha Third-party facts last checked: Aug 10, 2026 You have decided. The question now is what you can take with you, what stays behind and how much of your diary is at risk on the day you switch. This page answers those in order. The fear is nearly always the same one. Not the price and not the calendar, but the client list. Years of names, numbers, birthdays and notes sitting inside somebody else's software, with no obvious way of knowing whether they will still be yours next month. So this page starts there and leaves the pricing argument to the comparison page. What comes out of Fresha, what the Youzse importer reads, what genuinely does not travel and what you do about the booking links people already have. ### What moves and what stays behind | | Comes across | What to watch | | --- | --- | --- | | Client records | Names, email addresses, mobile numbers, birthdays, notes and postal addresses | Youzse reads the Fresha client column headings, so the file usually needs no renaming before you upload it | | Marketing consent | Yes, as a flag on the client rather than an assumption | Check it survived before you send anything. Consent is the one field where guessing is a data protection problem rather than an inconvenience | | Services and prices | Service name, category, duration, price and description | Prices land as they were on the day of the export, so look again at anything you were about to put up | | Bookings | Past and future appointments with client, service, staff member, date, time, duration and status | Completed, confirmed, cancelled and no show statuses are translated. Anything named differently is carried through as written for you to correct | | Staff | Names, email addresses, phone numbers and job titles | Team members still have to accept an invitation before they can log in | | Reviews | Review text from your public profile, stored with the reviewer name, the date and the rating where the profile shows one | They are labelled as imported rather than passed off as new, which is honest and is not the same as inheriting a rating | | Saved card details | No | Card details sit with the payment processor behind your old platform rather than in a spreadsheet, so clients enter a card again the first time they pay through Youzse | | Your Fresha marketplace listing | No | The listing, its position in search and the reviews attached to it belong to Fresha and stay there | The Youzse importer recognises Fresha client files by their column headings and maps clients, services, bookings and staff. Nothing in this table is a claim about what Fresha will hand over on any given day, so look at the export you actually get before you plan around it. ### The marketplace clients question, answered plainly This is the question people are too polite to ask out loud. If Fresha introduced you to a client, is that client yours? In practice the relationship is yours and the listing is not. Fresha charges a 20% one time commission on new clients who discover your business through the Fresha marketplace, with a stated minimum fee of £4 per client, and it does not charge that commission again when the same person comes back. The money has therefore already been paid on everyone you have won so far. What you give up by leaving is future discovery, not the people you have already met. That distinction shapes how you tell people. Clients who found you through your own website, through Google or through social media were never marketplace clients at all, because Fresha excludes those channels from the commission. They will follow you the moment you say where to book. The ones who arrived through the marketplace are the ones worth a personal message rather than a bulk email. Fresha is genuinely good at the thing you are giving up. It runs a large consumer marketplace, it fills empty columns for a business still building a book and it does not charge commission on returning clients. If discovery is doing real work for you, switching it off is a decision worth taking deliberately rather than as a side effect of changing software. ### The order to do it in - Export your clients, your services and your appointments while the Fresha account is still active and paid - Start the Youzse trial, which runs 30 days with no card, and upload the client file first - Read the preview screen before you commit. Youzse looks for records that already match, so the same client does not land twice - Import services and prices next, then staff, then appointments, because a booking needs its client, its service and its staff member to exist first - Rebuild the things an export does not carry, which usually means deposit rules, reminder wording and forms - Take live bookings on Youzse for a fortnight while Fresha is still running, so the diary has a fallback - Change your booking links last, and only once the Youzse diary is one you would trust on a Saturday ### How long it takes and where the time actually goes The uploading is the short part. A client list is a file, and the Youzse importer takes it through the same four steps every time: read the file, match the columns, show you a preview and then commit the batch. If something looks wrong in the preview you change the mapping and run it again, and if a committed batch turns out to be wrong you can roll that batch back rather than unpicking rows by hand. The time goes on checking. Somebody has to look at a sample of clients and confirm the mobile numbers arrived in a usable shape, look at the services and confirm the durations are right, and look at the first week of future bookings and confirm they are on the right day with the right person. That is not software work, it is your work, and rushing it is how a Saturday goes wrong. The sensible shape is a period of overlap rather than a switchover date. Run Youzse alongside Fresha through the 30 day trial, put new bookings on Youzse, keep the old diary readable and cancel only when the last booking made under the old system has been and gone. ### What actually breaks on the day - Every link you have already given out points at Fresha, and nobody can redirect a web address on a domain they do not own. Your Instagram profile, your Google Business Profile booking link, your printed cards and any QR code you had made all have to be changed by hand. - Clients with a card saved will be asked for it again. Say so in the message rather than letting them discover it at the till. - Reviews on your Fresha listing stay on your Fresha listing. What you can bring across is a copy, shown as imported, which is not the same as inheriting the rating. - Automations do not export anywhere. Reminder timings, deposit rules, cancellation windows and message wording are settings rather than records, and they have to be built again. - Youzse card processing is 2.5% plus 35p with our platform fee inside that single rate, and Fresha publishes 1.19% plus £0.20 with no VAT treatment stated for it. On card takings alone you will pay us more per transaction and there is no way to present that which makes it smaller. ### Will I lose my clients if I leave Fresha? Not the people. The relationship is yours and their contact details come out in a file you can upload to Youzse. What stays behind is the Fresha marketplace listing, its position in search and the reviews attached to it. Fresha charges its 20% one time commission only on new clients the marketplace introduces, with a stated minimum of £4 per client, and not on their return visits, so nothing further is owed on the clients you already have. ### Can Youzse read a Fresha export? Yes. Youzse recognises the Fresha client column headings and maps first name, last name, email, mobile, birthday, notes, address and marketing consent without you renaming anything. Service, booking and staff files are mapped too, and every mapping is shown on screen for you to correct before the import runs. ### What happens to bookings already in my Fresha diary? Import them from the appointment file so the Youzse diary is not empty on day one, and keep the Fresha diary readable until the last of those bookings has happened. Completed, confirmed, cancelled and no show statuses are translated as they come in. ### What do I do about my booking link? Replace it. Your Youzse booking page lives on youzse.app followed by your own booking slug, and the link on your Instagram profile, your Google Business Profile, your website and anything printed has to be pointed at it by hand. Do that last, once you trust the diary. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Fresha? It depends on your mix, and the honest answer has two halves. Youzse is from £19 a month for the business, with VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page, and 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, so there is no charge at the moment somebody new books. Against that, our card rate of 2.5% plus 35p is higher than the 1.19% plus £0.20 Fresha publishes, and Fresha does not state anywhere on its site whether its published prices include VAT. Work it through on your own card volume before you decide. --- ## Leaving Treatwell and taking your data with you Source: https://youzse.app/switch/treatwell Third-party facts last checked: Aug 10, 2026 Treatwell publishes two statements that matter more here than any price. You still own your data even if you cancel, and Treatwell does not sync with any other existing management system. Both are worth reading carefully before you move. ### What Treatwell says about your data, and what it means Treatwell states that even if you cancel your plan, you still own your data. That is a good thing to have in writing and not every platform says it. It settles the question people ask first, which is whether cancelling costs them their client list. It does not. Treatwell also states that it does not sync with any other existing management system. That sentence shapes the whole move. There is no live connection between Treatwell and wherever you go next, so the transfer is a file out and a file in, done once and checked by a person. Plan for a handover rather than a switch. Youzse has no named column profile for Treatwell the way it has for some other platforms, and we are not going to pretend the import is one click. What you get is a file upload where you match your columns to Youzse fields on screen, a preview before anything is written, duplicate checking so the same client is not created twice and the ability to roll a batch back if it went in wrong. That is the honest version. ### Three things to settle before you cancel anything - Get the export out first. Treatwell says you own your data after cancelling, but retrieving a file from an account you have already closed is a slower conversation than downloading one from an account that is still open. - Your Treatwell listing and the reviews on it stay with Treatwell. Youzse can store a copy of review text, shown labelled as imported, which is not the same thing as inheriting a rating. - Bookings will keep arriving through Treatwell until your listing is gone. Decide the date you stop accepting them and tell your regulars where to go instead, rather than letting them find a dead link. ### What each side charges | | Treatwell | Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | Monthly software fee | Referenced on the Treatwell partner pricing page, but the amount is not published for either the Freelancer or the Advanced plan and no VAT treatment is stated, so no figure is quoted here | From £19 a month for the business, with VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | New clients from the marketplace | 35% commission on first bookings made by new clients Treatwell brings you from the marketplace. Treatwell states no VAT treatment for that commission | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse | | Repeat and direct bookings | 0% commission on repeat bookings and on bookings made directly with the salon | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, so there is no first booking fee for a repeat to be measured against | | Paying online in advance | A processing fee of 2.5% plus VAT, applied to a booking only if a client pays you online in advance | 2.5% plus 35p on card payments with the platform fee inside the rate and VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page, applied whether the client pays online or in the chair | | Free trial | No trial length is published. Start for free is a registration route rather than a stated trial period | 30 days with no card | Treatwell figures taken from treatwell.co.uk/partners/pricing. The monthly software fee is referenced there without an amount, so this table leaves it out rather than estimating it. Treatwell states 2.5% plus VAT for online prepayment and states no rate at all for money taken in the salon, which means a business collecting most of its takings in the chair pays Treatwell nothing on those payments and would pay Youzse 2.5% plus 35p on them. ### The export checklist - Clients, with names, contact details and any notes the export carries - Services with their durations and their current prices - Bookings already in the diary, at the very least the next six weeks of them - The things that are not records at all, such as your opening hours, your cancellation policy and your deposit rules - A copy of your public review text, taken while the listing is still live - A list of every place your Treatwell booking link appears, because each one gets changed by hand ### Mapping the columns yourself is less frightening than it sounds With no named profile for a platform, the Youzse importer falls back to asking you. It reads the headings in your file, shows them beside the Youzse fields and lets you match them up. Email to email, mobile to phone, birthday to date of birth. The wizard then runs the same way it does for every other source: read the file, match the columns, preview the result and commit the batch. Two safety nets sit underneath that. Before anything is written, Youzse looks for a record that already matches, so a client who is in the system is not created a second time. After it is written, the batch can be rolled back, which turns a mapping mistake into a few minutes rather than an afternoon. Do the client list first and check a sample by hand. Then services and prices, then staff, then bookings, because a booking needs its client, its service and its staff member to exist before it can attach to any of them. ### Where the money lands after the move | Scenario | On Treatwell | On Youzse | | --- | --- | --- | | A new client finds you on the marketplace and books a first visit | 35% commission on that first booking, with no VAT treatment stated | 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse | | That client comes back and pays in the salon | 0% commission on repeat bookings, and Treatwell states no rate for money taken in the salon | 2.5% plus 35p on the card payment, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | | A client books directly with you and pays online in advance | 0% commission on direct bookings, plus the processing fee of 2.5% plus VAT because the payment is online and in advance | 2.5% plus 35p on the card payment, VAT treatment set out on the Youzse pricing page | Worked from the figures Treatwell publishes at treatwell.co.uk/partners/pricing. The monthly software fee is not published on either plan, so neither column is a total cost of ownership. The pattern to take away is that Treatwell charges heavily at the moment a new client arrives and lightly afterwards, while Youzse charges a flat subscription plus a card rate and charges 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse. ### What Treatwell is good at, and who should stay Treatwell runs a large consumer marketplace for hair and beauty in the UK and it is honest about the trade it offers. You pay a lot at the point a new client arrives and much less afterwards, which is a defensible model for a salon with columns to fill. Treatwell charges 0% commission on repeat bookings and on bookings made directly with the salon, so a business that turns first visits into regulars keeps the benefit. Saying in plain words on a public page that you still own your data after cancelling is more than most platforms commit to. Stay if the marketplace is filling your diary and those bookings are becoming repeat clients. A 35% cost on a first booking is expensive, but an empty chair earns nothing at all, and it earns nothing again the following month. Move when the marketplace has done its work and the bill no longer reflects it, or when you need more than a booking diary. Youzse is from £19 a month for the business with 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse, and it runs quotes, invoices, memberships, gift cards, loyalty and UK VAT returns alongside the calendar across more than 60 trades. Set against that, our card rate of 2.5% plus 35p applies to payments Treatwell would not have charged you for at all, so a salon taking most of its money in the chair should price that in honestly before moving. ### Do I keep my clients if I cancel Treatwell? Treatwell states that even if you cancel your plan, you still own your data, so the answer from their own page is yes. The practical advice is to take the export while the account is open rather than relying on retrieving it afterwards, because an open account is a download and a closed one is a request. ### Will Treatwell sync with Youzse? No, and Treatwell says so. Their partner pricing page states that they do not sync with any other existing management system. The move is a file out and a file in, checked by a person, rather than a connection that keeps two diaries in step. ### Is there a one click Treatwell import? No. Youzse holds named column profiles for some platforms and Treatwell is not one of them, so you match the columns yourself in the import wizard. The preview, the duplicate checking and the batch rollback all work the same way whatever the file came out of. ### What happens to my reviews? The reviews on your Treatwell listing stay on your Treatwell listing. Youzse can store review text you bring across and shows it labelled as imported, so a client sees the history without being misled about where it came from. ### Is Youzse cheaper than Treatwell? Nobody can answer that from published figures, because Treatwell does not publish a monthly software fee for either plan. What can be compared is the shape. Treatwell charges 35% commission on a first booking from a marketplace client, 0% on repeat and direct bookings and a processing fee of 2.5% plus VAT when a client pays online in advance. Youzse charges from £19 a month for the business, 0% commission on new clients who find you through Youzse and 2.5% plus 35p on card payments whenever they happen. If the marketplace has stopped sending you new clients, our shape is likely to be cheaper. If it has not, do the sums. ### How long should I run both? Until the last booking made through Treatwell has happened. The Youzse trial is 30 days with no card, which usually covers a booking tail, and the risk of cancelling early is not the software. It is the client who turns up on a day nobody has a record of. --- ## Booking software for Acupuncturist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/acupuncturists Acupuncture is prescribed as a course, and a patient who pays needle by needle usually stops before the course has done its work. ### Sell the course A block sold up front and drawn down per visit commits the patient to the treatment that was actually recommended. Hold the notice period consistently. A treatment room lost at short notice is not resold. ### Seasonal maintenance is the long game Patients who complete a course often return seasonally. That steady baseline is what makes a clinic viable through quiet months. Record points used and how the patient responded so the recall is clinical rather than a guess. ### Intake before the first needle Health history captured before arrival is more complete and more honest than a form filled in at reception, and it is health data with the handling that implies. ### What a well run acupuncture clinic does - Sells courses as blocks drawn down per visit - Recalls seasonally as well as within a course - Records points used and patient response - Sends intake forms before the first appointment - Applies a consistent cancellation policy ### Can I sell a course as a block? Yes. Sell the course up front and draw down per visit, which keeps patients through the treatments where the results actually appear rather than losing them after two needles. ### Can I record points used and the response? Yes. Points, response and any reaction sit on the patient record, so a seasonal recall is based on what worked last time rather than a guess. ### How are health intake forms handled? Sent with the booking confirmation and completed before arrival, which produces fuller and more honest answers than a clipboard at reception. They are stored as special category data with consent and an enforced retention period. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per clinic rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. Selling a block of treatments means one larger card payment rather than five small ones, which is where a transparent rate is worth reading twice. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. The platform charges 0% commission on new patients who discover you on Youzse, and nothing at all as a setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. Bookings often build through autumn as old complaints return with the cold and then quieten right through July, which a rolling arrangement absorbs without complaint. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Records remain exportable throughout, so nothing at all is being kept back to make you stay. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your patients, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Point selections, intake forms and how a patient responded last season are usually written on paper that cannot leave the treatment room. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a block of five treatments specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a block of five treatments is never the thing that forces an upgrade. Blocks drawn down per visit, points and responses on the patient record, intake forms completed before arrival and UK GDPR retention are all included. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## Booking software for Car Valeter businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/car-valeters Valeting happens on a driveway or an office car park, nowhere near a card machine, and a single detail is a good day rather than a business. ### Get paid where the work happens Contactless on a phone means no terminal to carry and no invoice to chase. Price the packages clearly so there is no negotiation on the drive. ### Fortnightly beats one-off A detail is a good day. A round of fortnightly maintenance washes is a business you can plan a week around. Sell the maintenance wash as a monthly subscription and let it collect itself. ### The vehicle holds the notes Coatings applied, problem areas and paint condition belong against the car so the next visit is quicker and the upsell is informed. Local business fleets are recurring work that fills weekdays, which is when domestic demand is weakest. ### What a well run valeting business does - Takes contactless on a phone wherever it works - Prices packages as clear tiers - Sells monthly maintenance washes on recurring payment - Books standing slots that repeat - Records coatings and paint notes per vehicle - Builds weekday fleet work with local businesses ### Can I take payment on a driveway? Yes, contactless on your phone. Valeting happens nowhere near a card machine, and an invoice sent afterwards is a payment you have chosen to chase. ### Can I sell a monthly maintenance wash? Yes, on a recurring payment. A detail is a good day, but a round of fortnightly maintenance washes is a business you can plan a week around. ### Can I record coatings and paint condition per vehicle? Yes, against the car, so the next visit is quicker and any upsell is informed rather than a guess. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. Valeting happens on a driveway with no card machine nearby, so contactless on your phone at a known rate is the whole payment story. Cards are 2.5% plus 35p, with the Youzse platform fee built into that rate instead of charged separately at the end of the month. There is 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse, and no setup cost to begin. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. Spring and the weeks before Christmas are strong while January is wet and thin, so paying for the months you use is the honest fit. From there it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel whenever you want to. Your records stay exportable throughout, so leaving is a decision rather than a negotiation. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Coatings applied, paint condition and which cars belong to which household are usually held in your head and a WhatsApp thread. Most are up and running within the day. Use the 30 day trial to keep the old and the new alongside each other before the booking link changes. ### Will it work for a valet specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing a valet needs sits behind an upgrade. Contactless payment on the driveway, recurring maintenance washes, coating and condition notes against the vehicle and round scheduling are all included. With 60+ trades on the platform most of these edges are already known, but tell us during the trial if yours is not. --- ## Booking software for Counsellor businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/counsellors Counselling depends on a consistent weekly hour and a confidential record. The commercial mechanics should be invisible, because every minute spent discussing money is a minute taken from the work. ### Take the money out of the room A recurring payment set up once means fees are never discussed at the start or end of a session, which matters more here than in any other trade on this site. Apply the cancellation policy consistently and state it at contracting, so it is a boundary rather than a negotiation. ### The standing hour is the work The same time each week, held automatically, is part of the therapeutic frame rather than an administrative convenience. ### Confidentiality is the whole obligation Notes are special category data. Restricted access, secure storage, explicit consent and a retention policy that actually deletes are all required. Reminders need wording carefully so nothing is disclosed on a lock screen someone else can see. ### What a well run counselling practice does - Collects session fees automatically - Holds a standing weekly slot per client - States the cancellation policy at contracting - Keeps notes as confidential records with restricted access - Words reminders so nothing is disclosed - Enforces a retention period rather than keeping notes forever ### Can fees be collected without discussing them in session? Yes, and this is the point. Set a recurring payment once and money never comes up at the start or end of a session, which matters more in this work than in any other trade Youzse serves. ### Can I hold the same weekly slot for a client? Yes. A standing weekly appointment is booked once and repeats, so the frame holds without rebooking every week. ### Are reminders discreet? Reminder wording is yours to set, so nothing about the nature of the appointment needs to appear on a lock screen someone else might see. ### How are notes protected? Session notes are special category data. Access is restricted to the people who need it, consent is recorded for the specific purpose, everything is audit logged and retention is enforced rather than left to good intentions. ### What does Youzse cost? Pricing starts at £19 a month, priced per practice rather than per person, so headcount is not a lever on what you pay. If you open a second site it is from £15 a month. Weekly fees collected automatically means money never comes up in the room, and the card rate is the only cost that touches a session. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. There is 0% commission on new clients the platform introduces to you, and no setup cost before you start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Youzse starts with a 30 day free trial that asks for no card at all. August and late December go quiet in counselling as clients travel, and a monthly arrangement is kinder to that pattern than a year committed in advance. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. Your records remain exportable at every point, so the door is genuinely open in both directions. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes, and in a single pass. Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Standing weekly slots, session notes and contact preferences usually live in a paper diary and a locked drawer rather than anything you could move. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for a weekly session specifically? Yes. All of it is on all of them, because every feature is on every plan, so nothing a weekly session needs sits behind an upgrade. Standing weekly appointments, fees collected without discussion, discreet reminder wording and restricted access to session notes under UK GDPR are all there. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## Booking software for Dog Trainer businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/dog-trainers Training only works across a course. A client paying weekly drops out in week three and concludes the dog is the problem. ### Sell the course as one purchase Six weeks paid up front commits the owner to the point where results appear. Weekly payment gives them six chances to stop. Run group classes and one to ones from the same diary, with capacity limits so a class is never overbooked. ### Puppy class to lifelong client The puppy course is the start of a relationship that runs through adolescence, recall work and behaviour support. Track where each dog got to and invite them to the next stage rather than waiting to be asked. ### Notes on the dog, not the owner Behaviour, triggers and progress belong against the dog. Owners have several, and dogs change hands. ### What a well run training business does - Sells courses as one purchase up front - Runs group classes with capacity limits - Takes deposits on one to one home visits - Invites clients to the next course as they finish - Keeps behaviour and progress notes per dog - Tracks referrals from owners ### Can I sell a course as one purchase? Yes, and it is what makes training work. An owner paying weekly drops out in week three and concludes the dog is the problem, whereas one who paid for six weeks stays to the point results appear. ### Can I run group classes with a capacity limit? Yes, alongside one to ones in the same diary, so a class is never overbooked and a home visit slot can carry a deposit. ### Can I keep notes against the dog rather than the owner? Yes. Behaviour, triggers and progress belong to the dog, which matters because owners have several and dogs change hands. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per business rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. A six week course sold as one purchase is a single card payment, so the rate applies once rather than six times over. Every card payment is 2.5% plus 35p, the Youzse platform fee included in the rate rather than stacked on afterwards. There is 0% commission on new owners the platform introduces to you, and no setup cost before you start. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. Puppy intake spikes after Christmas and again in early summer, and the gaps between should not be paid for at a fixed annual rate. The subscription that follows is monthly and rolling, so you can cancel at any time without asking anyone. Your records remain exportable at every point, so the door is genuinely open in both directions. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your owners first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Behaviour notes, triggers and progress belong to the dog, yet they usually sit in a folder organised by the owner surname. It is usually done inside a day. Keep both live through the 30 day trial and only point your booking link at Youzse once you are ready. ### Will it work for a six week course specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a six week course is fully served from the first day. Courses sold as one purchase, group classes with capacity limits beside one to ones, notes held against the dog and deposits on home visits are all included. The platform covers 60+ trades, and the trial is the window for telling us if something about your work still does not fit. --- ## Booking software for Event Planner businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/event-planners An event is planned for months and paid for in lumps, with supplier deposits leaving your account long before the client balance arrives. That mismatch is the whole risk. ### Stage payments against supplier commitments Align your milestones to when supplier deposits fall due, so you are never funding somebody else's wedding from your own account. A deposit on booking is what holds the date. Contracts and scope signed before planning starts. ### The guest list is the next client list Everyone at a well run event sees the planning. Corporate clients repeat annually and private ones recommend for years. Get in first for next year rather than waiting for the enquiry. ### Suppliers and budgets are reusable Who you used, what it cost and how it went makes the second event dramatically faster to plan and quote. ### What a well run event business does - Takes a deposit on booking to hold the date - Stages payments against supplier deposit dates - Signs contracts and scope before planning begins - Keeps supplier and budget history per event - Prompts annual corporate clients ahead of the date - Tracks which events generate the next ones ### Can I stage payments against supplier deposits? Yes. Aligning your milestones to when supplier deposits fall due is what stops you funding somebody else's wedding out of your own account for three months. ### Can I keep supplier and budget history per event? Yes, which makes the second event dramatically faster to plan and quote than the first. ### Can I prompt annual corporate clients? Yes. Corporate events repeat, and getting in before the enquiry is how you keep them rather than re-pitching each year. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your business and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. Milestone payments aligned to supplier deposits arrive by card across months, so the rate matters at every stage rather than once at the end. The card rate is 2.5% plus 35p and it is the whole rate, because the Youzse platform fee is inside it rather than billed separately. An introduction costs you nothing: 0% commission on new clients who reach you through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Weddings and corporate seasons stack into summer and December while February is planning rather than earning, so pay for the months you use. Beyond the trial it is a rolling monthly subscription that you are free to cancel at any time. Exports stay available throughout, and your records leave with you if you go. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Supplier lists, budgets and what was agreed for last year event tend to be buried in email chains and a shared drive. Most are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a full month of running both before anything about your booking link changes. ### Will it work for an event specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and an event. Staged payments matched to supplier deposits, supplier and budget history per event, annual prompts for corporate clients and approvals in writing are all covered. Youzse serves more than 60 trades, so bring us the awkward part of your week during the trial rather than after it. --- ## Booking software for Handyman businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/handymen Handyman work is many short jobs where chasing forty pounds costs more than the job earned. Everything depends on not creating debt in the first place. ### Take the card before you leave Contactless on a phone at the door removes the entire receivables problem. There is no version of this trade where invoicing small work makes sense. Price by the hour or the half day consistently rather than negotiating each job. Consistency is faster and earns more. ### Nobody has one job They have a list and they get round to it slowly. The jobs they mentioned but did not book are your next visit. Record what you did and what they mentioned, then check back when the season makes it relevant. ### Landlords are recurring work Agents and landlords need a reliable handyman constantly and pay on terms. That is a schedule rather than a series of enquiries. ### What a well run handyman business does - Takes the card at the door before leaving - Prices by hour or half day consistently - Sends quick quotes from the van - Records the jobs a customer mentioned but did not book - Builds recurring maintenance work with agents - Tracks neighbour referrals ### Can I take payment at the door? Yes, contactless on your phone with no card reader to carry. On short jobs, chasing forty pounds costs more than the job earned, so the answer is not to create the debt. ### Can I record the jobs a customer mentioned but did not book? Yes, against the property. Nobody has one job, they have a list and the things they put off are your next visit if anyone writes them down. ### Can I set up recurring work for letting agents? Yes. Standing maintenance visits invoiced on terms turn a series of enquiries into a schedule, which is the difference between being busy and being booked. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. Short jobs are settled at the door on a phone, so a card rate you can quote from memory is worth more than a discount on a plan. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. On introductions the answer is short: 0% commission on new customers who arrive through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. December and January are lean for small works while spring is relentless, which is an argument for paying by the month if ever there was one. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Because records stay exportable throughout, staying with Youzse is never something you are pushed into. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your customers along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. The jobs a customer mentioned but did not book are usually remembered rather than recorded, which is where the next visit quietly disappears. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for a short job specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing a short job depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Contactless payment on your phone, jobs noted against the property, recurring maintenance visits for letting agents and invoicing on terms are all included. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## Booking software for Heating Engineer businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/heating-engineers A boiler ties up a four figure sum in parts before you have earned anything, and the job runs for a day or more. That cash profile is the whole commercial problem. ### Fund the boiler from the job Take a deposit when the order goes in, stage the balance and take the final payment before you hand over the manual and the paperwork. Customers accept this readily when it is stated up front and resent it when it appears at the end. ### Annual services book themselves Every boiler you fit is a service due in twelve months, and every rented property needs a gas safety certificate every year. That is the most predictable repeat work in the trades, and it only happens if a reminder fires without anyone remembering. ### The property holds the history Make, model, parts fitted and past faults belong against the address. The second visit is faster and quoted correctly because of it. Certificates stored against the property are there at the next visit rather than in a van somewhere. ### What a well run heating business does - Takes a deposit when the boiler is ordered - Stages payments across a large install - Reminds on annual services and gas safety dates - Keeps boiler and fault history per property - Stores certificates against the address - Builds recurring work with landlords and agents ### Can I take a deposit before ordering a boiler? Yes. A boiler ties up a four figure sum in parts before you have earned anything, and taking a deposit on order is normal and accepted when it is stated up front. ### Can Youzse remind customers about annual services? Yes, automatically. Every boiler you fit is a service due in twelve months and every rented property needs a gas safety certificate every year, which is the most predictable repeat work in the trades if a reminder actually fires. ### Can I store certificates against a property? Yes. Certificates, make, model and past faults sit against the address, so the next visit is quicker and correctly quoted, and the paperwork is there when a landlord or agent asks. ### What does Youzse cost? It is £19 a month to begin with, priced per business rather than per person, so bringing in cover for a busy week costs you nothing extra. Locations beyond the first are from £15 a month. A boiler ties up a four figure sum before you have earned anything, so a deposit taken by card at the point of order is where the rate counts. For cards it is 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee is contained in that number instead of appearing as a second charge. 0% commission on new customers who find you through Youzse means an introduction costs you nothing, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? There is no tie. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is requested. The first cold snap swamps you and July is dead, which is precisely the shape a month by month arrangement is built to survive. Once the trial ends the subscription rolls monthly, and cancelling at any time is your call alone. Throughout all of it your records stay exportable, which is the part most people forget to check. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Nothing has to be retyped, because Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Boiler makes, serial numbers, service dates and gas safety certificates are usually filed against a van rather than against an address. Setup lands the same day for most people, and the 30 day trial is there to be used. Run both, compare them, then switch the booking link. ### Will it work for a boiler install specifically? Yes. The feature list does not change from plan to plan, so nothing a boiler install calls for sits behind an upgrade. Deposits on order, annual service reminders that genuinely fire, certificates stored against the property and landlord paperwork on demand are all there. There are more than 60 trades on Youzse. If your way of working needs something else, tell us while the trial has time left on it. --- ## Booking software for Hypnotherapist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/hypnotherapists Hypnotherapy works over a programme. A client paying session by session usually stops before the change they came for has happened, which is bad for them and bad for the practice. ### Programmes, not sessions Sell the programme, collect it up front or monthly and draw down per session. It commits the client to the course of work that was actually recommended. Hold the cancellation policy consistently. ### Results generate the next client This is a referral trade. Clients who finish a programme get results and tell people, and they come back for maintenance. Prompt the follow-up at the point the programme suggests rather than waiting to be contacted. ### Confidential records Session notes are health data. Consent for the specific purpose, secure storage and enforced retention are required. ### What a well run hypnotherapy practice does - Sells programmes rather than single sessions - Offers monthly payment plans across a programme - Prompts follow-ups at the programme interval - Keeps confidential notes with restricted access - Takes intake and consent before the first session - Tracks where referrals come from ### Can I sell a programme rather than single sessions? Yes. Sell the programme up front or as a monthly plan and draw down per session, which keeps clients through to the point the work actually changes something. ### Can follow-ups be prompted automatically? Yes, at the interval the programme suggests rather than when you happen to remember, which is what turns a completed programme into maintenance work. ### Are session notes kept confidential? Yes. They are treated as health data with restricted access, recorded consent for the purpose and an enforced retention period. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per practice rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. A programme sold up front is one payment rather than a series of awkward reminders, so the card rate is the number worth checking. Card processing is 2.5% plus 35p. That rate already carries the Youzse platform fee, which is why you will not find it invoiced apart. An introduction costs you nothing: 0% commission on new clients who reach you through Youzse, and no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. January brings the stop smoking and weight work and it has thinned right out by May, so paying month by month rides that better than a signed year. Afterwards the subscription is rolling and monthly, and cancelling is something you can do at any time. Exports stay available throughout, and your records leave with you if you go. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Programme progress, scripts used and what a client responded to are usually held in notebooks nobody else could pick up and read. Same day setup is the norm, and running the two alongside each other through the 30 day trial is how you check everything before switching the booking link. ### Will it work for a programme of sessions specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to a programme of sessions behind an upgrade. Programmes sold as one purchase, sessions drawn down as they happen, follow up prompts at the right interval and confidential note handling are all standard. More than 60 trades use Youzse. If yours works in a way that does not fit, raise it while the trial is still running. --- ## Booking software for Kitchen & Bathroom Fitter businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/kitchen-fitters A kitchen ties up thousands in units and worktops before fitting starts and runs for a fortnight on site. Almost everything that goes wrong commercially is a staging or a specification problem. ### Stage against delivery, template and completion A deposit on order funds the units. Payments at template and at completion keep the cash matching the outlay rather than trailing it. Agree the stages in writing before you start, not when you need the money. ### Specification disputes are the norm Appliances, handles, worktop edges and who is doing the electrics are where every kitchen argument starts. Quote the specification in detail and handle changes as priced variations approved before they happen. ### Kitchen first, bathroom next A customer who let you rip out their kitchen will let you do the bathroom. Keep appliance details, suppliers and photos so the next quote takes twenty minutes. ### What a well run fitting business does - Takes a deposit when units are ordered - Stages payments at template and completion - Quotes specification in detail - Handles changes as priced, approved variations - Records appliances and suppliers per job - Stores warranties against the property ### Can I stage payments across a kitchen fit? Yes. Set stages at order, template and completion so the cash matches the outlay rather than trailing it, and agree them in writing before you start rather than when you need the money. ### How do I handle changes to the specification? As priced variations approved before the work happens. Appliances, handles, worktop edges and who is doing the electrics are where every kitchen dispute starts, and agreeing them in writing ends most of it. ### Can I keep appliance and supplier details per job? Yes, which makes the follow-on bathroom quote a twenty minute job instead of a survey, and puts warranties where you can find them. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. Staged payments at order, template and completion arrive by card weeks apart, so the rate applies at three moments rather than one. The rate on cards is 2.5% plus 35p and the Youzse platform fee is part of it, so nothing arrives separately later. Youzse charges 0% commission on new customers who found you on the platform, and there is no setup cost to pay. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. Kitchens are booked hard from January and go quiet through the August holidays, and paying by the month matches that better than a fixed year. The subscription after that is rolling and paid monthly, and you can cancel at any time you decide to. Your records are exportable throughout, so nothing has to be argued over if you want them back. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Appliance models, supplier orders, variations agreed on site and warranty paperwork are usually spread over emails and a folder in the van. Most people are ready to trade the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a whole month of running both before the booking link moves. ### Will it work for a kitchen fit specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a kitchen fit sits behind an upgrade. Staged payment schedules, priced variations approved before work starts, appliance and supplier details per job and warranty records are all in one place. Something like 60+ trades already run on Youzse, so raise anything that does not fit while the trial is still open. --- ## Booking software for Makeup Artist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/makeup-artists A bridal booking blocks a Saturday morning months ahead and often a trial before it. A cancellation two weeks out is a date that will not be refilled. ### The deposit holds the date Take a deposit proportionate to how far ahead the date is held, and collect the balance before the morning rather than on it. Charge for the trial as the appointment it actually is. Giving it away invites people who were never going to book. ### The bridal party is the pipeline Every wedding puts your work in front of a room of people who will need a makeup artist. The bridesmaids are as valuable as the bride. Keep looks, products and skin notes on the client record so the next booking is faster and the result consistent. ### Patch tests and allergies Recorded against the client with dates, not remembered. Reactions are real and a documented test is what an insurer expects. ### What a well run makeup business does - Takes a deposit to hold the date - Charges for trials as a separate appointment - Collects the balance automatically before the day - Records looks, shades and products per client - Tracks patch tests and allergies - Follows up with the wider bridal party ### Can I take a deposit to hold a wedding date? Yes, and you should. A Saturday held eighteen months ahead and then cancelled cannot be refilled, so take a deposit proportionate to how far out the date is and collect the balance automatically before the morning. ### Can I charge for a trial separately? Yes. A trial is a real appointment that blocks real time, and pricing it as one filters out enquiries that were never going to book. ### Can I record patch tests and allergies? Yes, against the client with dates and results. Reactions are real in this work and a documented test is what an insurer expects to see. ### What does Youzse cost? £19 a month is the starting figure, priced per business rather than per person, so seat counts never enter the conversation. A second location is from £15 a month on top. Bridal work is a deposit far ahead and a balance the week before, so a clear card rate matters more than it does where people simply turn up. The card rate is 2.5% plus 35p and it is the whole rate, because the Youzse platform fee is inside it rather than billed separately. Where a booking begins on Youzse there is still 0% commission on new clients, and no setup cost is charged. ### Am I tied into a contract? Not at all. The 30 day free trial runs without a card being handed over. Weddings cluster between May and September and the winter is thin, which is exactly why paying month by month beats committing to a year. Beyond the trial it is a rolling monthly subscription that you are free to cancel at any time. You can export your records throughout, which is what makes cancelling a simple thing rather than a project. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your clients first, then their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Wedding dates, trial notes, patch test results and the party sizes behind them tend to live across a phone, a notebook and Instagram messages. Most are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you a full month of running both before anything about your booking link changes. ### Will it work for a bridal booking specifically? Yes. Nothing is held back, because every feature is on every plan, so a bridal booking is fully served from the first day. Date deposits, balances collected automatically, trials priced as the real appointments they are and patch tests recorded against the client are all in one place. Youzse serves more than 60 trades, so bring us the awkward part of your week during the trial rather than after it. --- ## Booking software for Microblading Artist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/microblading Microblading is one treatment delivered in two appointments. Pricing them separately makes the second feel optional, and a client who skips it gets a result neither of you wanted. ### Sell both appointments as one treatment Price the initial and the top-up together and hold the follow-up slot at the time of the first. Take a deposit on the initial. It is a long, product-heavy appointment and a no show costs you most of a day. ### Pigment fades on a schedule A colour boost is due roughly annually. A client who does not come back ends up somewhere else having a correction, which is worse for them and lost revenue for you. Record the pigment, the mapping and the healed result so the refresh matches. ### Consent and aftercare are not optional Consent forms, patch test dates and age verification belong on the client record. Aftercare should send automatically, because most healing complaints trace back to it. ### What a well run PMU studio does - Prices the initial and top-up as one treatment - Books the follow-up at the first appointment - Takes a deposit on the initial - Records pigment, mapping and healed result - Prompts an annual colour boost - Sends aftercare automatically - Keeps consent and patch test records against the client ### Can I sell the initial and the top-up as one treatment? Yes, and pricing them together is what stops the top-up feeling optional. Hold the follow-up slot at the time of the first appointment so it is booked rather than hoped for. ### Can I prompt an annual colour boost? Yes. Pigment fades on a schedule, and a client who is not prompted usually ends up somewhere else having a correction, which is worse for them and lost revenue for you. ### Where do consent forms and patch tests live? On the client record with dates, alongside the pigment and mapping used, so the refresh matches and the paperwork is findable if it is ever needed. ### What does Youzse cost? Subscriptions open at £19 a month, priced per studio rather than per person, meaning the bill answers to your studio and not to your rota. Further locations are from £15 a month each. Pricing the initial and the top-up together means one payment for two appointments, so the card rate applies once rather than twice. Card takings are charged at 2.5% plus 35p, one rate with the Youzse platform fee folded in rather than presented on its own. Nothing is taken from an introduction, because it is 0% commission on new clients found through Youzse, with no setup cost to start. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. Every account opens on a 30 day free trial and no card is required up front. Brow work peaks before summer and before Christmas, and the flat weeks between are a poor reason to be tied to anything. It carries on as a rolling monthly subscription and can be cancelled at any time. Records stay exportable throughout, so you are never choosing between your data and your options. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Moving is an import rather than a rebuild, because Youzse imports your clients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Pigment codes, mapping photographs, consent forms and patch test dates are usually held in a phone gallery and a paper folder. The move itself takes a day at most, and the 30 day trial lets you run the two together until switching the booking link is uneventful. ### Will it work for an initial and a top-up specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so there is no upgrade standing between you and an initial and a top-up. Treatments sold as a pair, follow ups booked at the first appointment, annual colour boost prompts and consent forms on the client record are all included. 60+ trades are supported, and anything that does not fit is worth saying out loud before the trial ends. --- ## Booking software for Nutritionist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/nutritionists A first consultation gathers information. The reviews are where habits actually change, and where the client decides whether any of it was worth paying for. ### Sell the plan with its reviews included Billing reviews separately makes them feel optional, and clients drop off after the first appointment having changed nothing. Sell the plan as one package with the follow-ups built in, or run it as a monthly support arrangement. ### Progress has to be visible Measurements and progress tracked over time are what a client renews on. Without them, they judge on how they feel this week. Prompt each review at the interval the plan needs rather than leaving it to the client to remember. ### Health data handled properly Dietary and medical information is special category data, needing explicit consent, secure storage and enforced retention. ### What a well run nutrition practice does - Sells plans with reviews included - Offers monthly ongoing support plans - Tracks measurements and progress over time - Prompts reviews on the plan interval - Takes intake questionnaires before the first appointment - Handles health data to UK GDPR ### Can I sell a plan with its reviews included? Yes. Selling the reviews as part of the plan is what stops clients dropping off after the first consultation having changed nothing, which is the most common failure in this work. ### Can I track measurements over time? Yes. Progress tracked across appointments is what a client renews on, because otherwise they judge on how they feel this week rather than on what has actually changed. ### How is dietary and medical information handled? As special category data under UK GDPR: explicit consent for the purpose, secure storage, restricted access and a retention period that deletes. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per practice rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. A plan with its reviews included is a single larger payment, which makes the card rate the cost that matters rather than the monthly one. Every card payment is 2.5% plus 35p, the Youzse platform fee included in the rate rather than stacked on afterwards. Youzse applies 0% commission on new clients who came in through the marketplace, and there is no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. New year and late spring are the busy stretches in nutrition work, and the quiet months between should not be paid for a year ahead. The subscription that follows is monthly and rolling, so you can cancel at any time without asking anyone. Records stay exportable throughout, so the only reason to stay is that it is working. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your clients, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Measurements, food diaries and review dates are usually spread over spreadsheets and email threads that will not lift out cleanly. It is usually done inside a day. Keep both live through the 30 day trial and only point your booking link at Youzse once you are ready. ### Will it work for a plan with reviews specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for a plan with reviews sits behind an upgrade. Plans sold with their reviews, measurements tracked across appointments, review reminders and explicit consent for dietary and medical data are all included. The platform covers 60+ trades, and the trial is the window for telling us if something about your work still does not fit. --- ## Booking software for Osteopath businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/osteopaths Osteopathy is a plan of treatment sold to someone who arrived in pain, and the diary has to stay full to work. Both facts point at the same handful of habits. ### Sell the plan, settle on the day Billing one appointment at a time invites the patient to reconsider every week, usually just as the acute problem eases and motivation drops. Sell the plan of treatment up front and draw down per visit. Take payment at the appointment rather than running an account. Apply the notice window the same way to everyone. A clinic that waives it selectively cannot enforce it when it matters. ### The recall keeps the diary full Patients return when someone reminds them at the point symptoms would otherwise creep back. Left alone, most simply do not. Time the recall to the plan and the presentation rather than sending everyone a monthly message. ### Clinical records, held properly Assessment, treatment and outcome on one timeline is better care and better protection. Health data needs consent, restricted access and a retention period that genuinely deletes. ### What a well run osteopathic practice does - Sells plans of treatment rather than single appointments - Takes payment at the appointment, not on account - Recalls patients on the interval the plan needs - Keeps every visit on one clinical timeline - Sends intake and consent forms before the first appointment - Applies the cancellation policy consistently ### Can I sell a plan of treatment rather than single appointments? Yes. Sell the plan as one purchase and draw a session down per visit, so the patient commits to the course that was actually recommended instead of reconsidering every week as the acute pain eases. ### How do recalls work? Recalls are timed to the plan and the presentation rather than sent to everyone monthly, and they fire without anyone remembering to run a report. Every visit sits on one clinical timeline so the recall is informed rather than generic. ### Are patient records handled to UK GDPR? Yes. Clinical notes are special category data, so Youzse records consent for the specific purpose, restricts access to the staff who need it, keeps an audit trail and enforces a retention period that genuinely deletes rather than hides. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans open at £19 a month, priced per clinic rather than per person, so taking on someone new never moves the number. Extra locations start at £15 a month. Most osteopathy clinics take payment at the desk as the patient books the next appointment, so the card rate is what actually touches your takings. Card payments run at 2.5% plus 35p, and the Youzse platform fee sits inside that rate rather than arriving as a separate line. There is 0% commission on new patients who find you through Youzse, and no setup cost to begin. ### Am I tied into a contract? No. It opens with a 30 day free trial and no card is asked for to begin it. Osteopathy has no true off season, though acute cases thin out over the summer and the plan you are on should not punish that. After that it becomes a rolling monthly subscription you can cancel at any time. Your records stay exportable throughout, so leaving is a decision rather than a negotiation. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your patients, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Treatment plans, referral letters and the notes behind them usually sit in a clinic system that was never designed to let them out. Most businesses are set up the same day, and the 30 day trial is there so you can run both side by side before you move your booking link over. ### Will it work for a course of treatment specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so nothing you need for a course of treatment sits behind an upgrade. Course sales, per patient recall intervals, clinical notes on one timeline and UK GDPR handling for special category data are all part of it. Youzse supports more than 60 trades, so if something about how you work does not fit, say so before the trial ends rather than after. --- ## Booking software for Pest Controller businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/pest-control Pest work is a treatment plus at least one follow-up, and the follow-up is where the money quietly leaks away. Reactive call-outs are unpredictable; scheduled prevention is not. ### Price the programme, not the visit A treatment without its follow-up rarely works. Selling the programme with follow-ups included means they happen and they are paid for. Take payment at the first visit for domestic work and invoice commercial contracts on terms. ### Prevention is the contract Pubs, kitchens and food businesses need scheduled prevention whether or not anything has been seen. That is the work that fills a quiet month. Reports they can show an inspector are a large part of what they are actually buying. ### Site history matters What you found, what you treated and where it recurred belongs against the site, because recurrence is the pattern that determines the next treatment. ### What a well run pest control business does - Sells treatment programmes with follow-ups included - Takes payment at the first domestic visit - Invoices commercial contracts monthly on terms - Runs scheduled prevention visits on a standing cycle - Produces reports a food business can show an inspector - Keeps treatment and recurrence history per site ### Can I sell a treatment programme with follow-ups included? Yes, and it is the right way to price it. A treatment without its follow-up rarely works, and billing the follow-up separately is where the money quietly leaks away. ### Can I run scheduled prevention contracts? Yes. Pubs, kitchens and food businesses need prevention whether or not anything has been seen, and that recurring work is what fills a quiet month. ### Can I produce reports for inspections? Yes. Treatment and recurrence history per site produces the record a food business can show an inspector, which is a large part of what they are actually buying. ### What does Youzse cost? You start at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which keeps the bill flat as the rota fills out. Every location after the first is from £15 a month. A programme with its follow ups priced in is one payment rather than three chased ones, which is where the card rate earns its keep. You pay 2.5% plus 35p on card takings, and because the Youzse platform fee lives inside that rate there is nothing further to add. Youzse takes 0% commission on new customers it sends your way, and there is no setup cost either. ### Am I tied into a contract? Nothing is signed. The account begins on a 30 day free trial with no card required. Rats arrive with the cold and wasps arrive with the heat, so the flat months between should not be paid for in advance. Then it runs month to month as a rolling subscription you may cancel at any time. Records stay exportable the whole way through, which means walking away never means losing anything. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers and their history, then your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Treatment dates, recurrence history and site plans for food businesses usually live in a treatment book an inspector cannot be shown from. You will normally be set up the same day, and the 30 day trial gives you room to keep both running until the new one has proved itself. ### Will it work for a treatment programme specifically? Yes. Since every feature is on every plan, you will not find the part that matters to a treatment programme behind an upgrade. Programmes sold with follow ups included, scheduled prevention contracts, treatment history per site and reports ready for an inspection are all part of it. Youzse is built for 60+ trades, so tell us inside the 30 days if something about your set up does not sit right. --- ## Booking software for Pet Sitter businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/pet-sitters Pet sitting is booked weeks ahead and cancelled at short notice, and a cancelled fortnight over Christmas cannot be refilled at any price. ### Dates held are dates paid for A deposit when the dates are booked is what makes the booking real. A message saying "pencil me in" is not a commitment. Collect the balance automatically before the stay begins rather than chasing someone who is abroad. Charge properly for the dates everyone wants. Christmas and August are not ordinary weeks. ### The same families, every year This is repeat business by nature. The families who trust you with a key and a dog come back annually, and often book the same weeks. Get in before they book someone else. A prompt in early spring for the summer is worth more than any advertising. ### The record protects the animal Feeding routine, medication, vet details, key arrangements and emergency contacts belong on the pet record, findable in seconds by whoever is covering. ### What a well run pet sitting business does - Takes a deposit when dates are held - Collects the balance before the stay starts - Prices peak periods differently - Prompts rebooking before the season fills - Keeps routine, medication and vet details per pet - Runs recurring daily walks on a standing schedule ### Can I take a deposit when dates are booked? Yes, and it is what makes a booking real. A cancelled fortnight over Christmas cannot be refilled at any price, so a message saying "pencil me in" is not a commitment. ### Can I charge more for peak dates? Yes. Christmas and August are not ordinary weeks and should not be priced as though they are. ### Where do feeding routines and vet details live? On the pet record, linked to the owner, findable in seconds by whoever is covering. Owners have several animals and animals change hands, so a single flat list falls apart in both cases. ### What does Youzse cost? The lowest plan is £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so nobody has to be counted before you can put them on the rota. Extra premises come in from £15 a month. A week of sitting is booked months ahead and paid in two parts, so a deposit by card is the moment the rate applies to. Card processing is 2.5% plus 35p. That rate already carries the Youzse platform fee, which is why you will not find it invoiced apart. The platform charges 0% commission on new owners who discover you on Youzse, and nothing at all as a setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? No, there is nothing to sign. A 30 day free trial comes first and no card is needed to use it. Christmas and August are the weeks that pay for the year and February is empty, which is the case for paying monthly in a single sentence. Afterwards the subscription is rolling and monthly, and cancelling is something you can do at any time. Records remain exportable throughout, so nothing at all is being kept back to make you stay. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? It does. Youzse imports your owners, everything on their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Feeding routines, medication timings and vet details are usually in a message thread whoever is covering cannot find at seven in the morning. Same day setup is the norm, and running the two alongside each other through the 30 day trial is how you check everything before switching the booking link. ### Will it work for a week of sitting specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan and nothing you rely on for a week of sitting sits behind an upgrade. Deposits that make a date real, peak pricing for Christmas and August, pet records linked to owners and cover notes anyone can read are all there. More than 60 trades use Youzse. If yours works in a way that does not fit, raise it while the trial is still running. --- ## Booking software for Podiatrist businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/podiatrists Podiatry has the longest patient relationships of any trade here. Routine foot care runs every six to eight weeks for years, often for older patients who would rather not handle payment at every visit. ### Standing plans suit standing patients A recurring care plan collected automatically removes the transaction from a relationship that may run a decade. Where a patient prefers it, sell a block of appointments up front instead. Either beats taking a card every six weeks. ### The recall is the business The value is entirely in the return visit. A reliable recall on each patient's own interval is worth more than any marketing this trade will ever do. Keep treatment history and orthotic details on the record so the next appointment starts from what you found last time. ### Health data and accessibility Medical history, medication and conditions are special category data. Consent, secure storage and enforced retention are required. Consider how an older patient books. Online booking is useful, but a system that also lets someone phone and be added in seconds matters more here than in most trades. ### What a well run podiatry practice does - Collects recurring care plans automatically - Recalls each patient on their own interval - Keeps treatment and orthotic history per patient - Takes medical history before the first visit - Applies a consistent cancellation policy - Handles health data to UK GDPR ### Can patients pay for routine care automatically? Yes. Set a recurring care plan once and it collects on the treatment cycle, which suits a relationship that often runs for years and patients who would rather not hand over a card every six weeks. ### Can I set a different recall interval per patient? Yes. Recalls run on each patient's own interval rather than one clinic-wide setting, which matters when routine care ranges from six to ten weeks depending on the foot. ### Where do orthotic details live? On the patient record alongside treatment history, so the next appointment starts from what was fitted and how the foot responded rather than from a card index. ### What does Youzse cost? The entry plan is £19 a month, priced per practice rather than per person, which means growing the team leaves your bill exactly where it was. A further location adds from £15 a month. Routine foot care is mostly small repeat payments every six to ten weeks, so a card rate matters more here than a headline monthly price. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. Youzse takes 0% commission on new patients it sends your way, and there is no setup cost either. ### Am I tied into a contract? No contract. There is a 30 day free trial to start with and no card is required to open it. Foot care carries on all year, but a practice built on retired patients feels the winter and your subscription should flex rather than bite. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. Records stay exportable the whole way through, which means walking away never means losing anything. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes it can. Youzse imports your patients along with their history, your service list and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Nail and skin history, orthotic specifications and recall intervals tend to be scattered between a paper diary, a spreadsheet and a filing cabinet. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for routine foot care specifically? Yes. There is one feature set and every plan carries all of it, so nothing routine foot care depends on is locked behind an upgrade. Recurring care plans, recall intervals set per patient, orthotic details on the record and UK GDPR handling for clinical notes all come as standard. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Booking software for Roofer businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/roofers Scaffolding and materials are spent before a tile is lifted, and weather can push a job by a fortnight. Roofing is quoted on trust and paid on completion, which is a risky combination without a deposit. ### Cover the outlay before the tower goes up A deposit covering scaffold and materials is standard and reasonable. Funding it yourself is a loan nobody asked you to make. Send a payment link on completion so it settles the same week rather than requiring a second visit. ### Photographs do the selling and the settling Most customers cannot see their own roof. Photographs in the quote show them exactly what you found, and photographs afterwards show what you did. They also end most disputes before they start. ### One roof leads to the street Roofing is won on visible work and word of mouth. Follow up after the first winter, when the work has been tested and the customer is most likely to recommend you. ### What a well run roofing business does - Takes a deposit covering scaffold and materials - Includes photographs in every quote - Sends a payment link on completion - Follows up after the first winter - Keeps photos and guarantees against the property - Tracks which customers generate referrals ### Can I include photographs in a quote? Yes, and it settles most disputes before they start. Customers cannot see their own roof, so showing them what you found is the difference between a quote that converts and one that gets a second opinion. ### Can I take a deposit to cover scaffold and materials? Yes. Both are spent before a tile is lifted, and funding them yourself is a loan nobody asked you to make. ### Can I follow up with past customers after bad weather? Yes. Storm damage is when demand spikes, and a message to the customers whose roofs you already know is the highest converting thing you will send all year. ### What does Youzse cost? Plans run from £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, which is why a growing team does not turn into a growing invoice. Add another location from £15 a month. Scaffold and materials are spent before a tile is lifted, so a deposit taken by card at acceptance is what the rate is really about. Paying by card costs 2.5% plus 35p, a single rate that already accounts for the Youzse platform fee rather than billing it separately. It is 0% commission on new customers who come through Youzse, and no setup cost at any point. ### Am I tied into a contract? No lock in. You get a 30 day free trial and no card is needed to start it. Autumn storms bring a fortnight of everything at once and February can be still, so paying for the months you use is the sane arrangement. After the 30 days it is a rolling monthly subscription and you can cancel at any time you like. Your records stay exportable throughout, so there is nothing to unpick if you decide to move on. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, their history, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms, so day one is not a blank screen. Survey photographs, quoted scopes and which roofs you have already been up tend to sit in a camera roll and a quote pad. Most finish setup the same day, and because the 30 day trial costs nothing you can run both systems side by side before committing the booking link. ### Will it work for a roof repair specifically? Yes. Every feature is on every plan, so what a roof repair needs is present whichever plan you happen to be on. Photographs inside quotes, deposits covering scaffold, past customer records you can message after bad weather and staged invoicing are all included. Youzse covers 60+ trades, and if there is a corner of your work it does not reach, tell us before the trial ends. --- ## Booking software for Tyre Fitter businesses Source: https://youzse.app/for/tyre-fitters A set of four ordered in for a customer who does not turn up is stock you did not choose to carry, in a size you may not sell again quickly. ### Special orders need paying for Take payment or a deposit when the order goes in, particularly for unusual sizes. The risk sits with whoever paid, and it should not be you. Price fitting, balancing and disposal as a clear package rather than as surprises at the counter. ### Tread wears on a schedule you can see You know what you fitted, when and roughly how long it lasts. That makes the next set foreseeable in a way most trades would envy. A reminder before the MOT beats being found on a price comparison site at the last minute. ### Fleets and seasonal work Local businesses with vans, and customers who swap winter and summer tyres, are recurring work invoiced on terms rather than won one sale at a time. ### What a well run tyre business does - Takes a deposit on special order tyres - Prices fitting, balancing and disposal as one clear package - Keeps tyre history against the registration - Reminds before the MOT and on tread intervals - Books seasonal changeovers ahead - Invoices fleet and trade accounts on terms ### Can I take a deposit on special order tyres? Yes. A set ordered in for a customer who does not arrive is stock you did not choose to carry in a size you may not sell again quickly, so the risk should sit with whoever placed the order. ### Can Youzse remind customers before their MOT? Yes. Due dates are read from the registration and reminders send automatically, which beats being found on a price comparison site the week the test is due. ### Can I keep tyre history against a registration? Yes: make, size and date fitted against the vehicle rather than the owner, so tread intervals are foreseeable and seasonal changeovers can be booked ahead. ### What does Youzse cost? Youzse begins at £19 a month, priced per business rather than per person, so the figure holds whether you are one person or nine. Additional sites are from £15 a month. A set of tyres is one substantial card payment on the day, so the rate applies to a large ticket and is worth knowing exactly. Taking a card costs 2.5% plus 35p. The Youzse platform fee is already inside that rate, so it is not billed on top of it. A first booking made through Youzse carries 0% commission on new customers, and opening the account has no setup cost. ### Am I tied into a contract? You are not. Youzse opens with a 30 day free trial and no card details are needed. The first frost fills the bays and midsummer does not, and paying by the month means the quiet weeks cost you less than the busy ones. What follows is a rolling monthly subscription, cancellable at any time you choose. Records stay exportable throughout, which means your history comes with you whether you stay or not. ### Can I move across from the system I use now? Yes. Youzse imports your customers, then the history attached to them, your services and prices and your reviews from the major platforms. Sizes fitted, dates and the registration they belong to usually live on a fitting slip rather than anywhere you could message from. Setup is usually a same day job, and the 30 day trial exists precisely so the two can run in parallel until you are certain. ### Will it work for a set of tyres specifically? Yes. Every feature is included on every plan, which means a set of tyres is never the thing that forces an upgrade. MOT due dates read from the registration, reminders that send themselves, tyre history against the vehicle and deposits on special orders are all covered. Over 60 trades run on Youzse, and if any part of your way of working is awkward we would rather hear it during the trial than afterwards. --- ## Welcome to Youzse Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/welcome-to-youzse Category: Getting started Welcome. Youzse is one place to run the booking, customer and payment side of your business, whether you cut hair, fix cars, train clients or look after pets. This article gives you the lie of the land so you know what to set up and in what order. What you can do with Youzse: - Take bookings through your own public page, day and night - Keep a calendar of everything that is happening across your team - Hold all your customer records, notes and history in one place - Send invoices, take deposits and get paid online - Send booking confirmations and reminders automatically - Run loyalty, gift cards, memberships and discounts when you are ready The good news on fees: when a new client finds you through Youzse and books, you pay 0% commission on that booking. The clients you win are yours to keep. Where to start: You will already have answered a few questions when you signed up, your business details, your address, your opening hours and the data protection bits. That gets your account live. From there a short setup list walks you through the rest. 1. Finish your business profile so your page looks the part 2. Add the services or jobs you offer 3. Add your team and their working hours 4. Check your public booking page 5. Connect online payments when you are ready to take money You do not have to do it all at once. Work through it at your own pace and come back to this category any time you get stuck. Common questions: Do I have to set everything up before I can take a booking? No. A business profile, one service and your hours are enough to take your first booking. Everything else can wait. How long does setup take? Most businesses are taking bookings within an hour. Bringing customers across from another system adds a little more. What does 0% commission on new clients mean? When somebody finds you through Youzse and books, you pay no commission on that booking. The client is yours to keep. --- ## Setting up your business profile Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/setting-up-your-business-profile Category: Getting started Your business profile is what customers see when they land on your page, so it is worth a few minutes to get it right. You set most of this during sign-up, but you can change any of it whenever you like. Where to find it: Go to Settings, then Business Profile. This is the home for your name, logo, cover image, contact details and review links. What to fill in: - Business name: the name customers will recognise - Logo: a square image works best, it shows on your page and on confirmations - Cover image: a wider banner photo for the top of your page - Contact details: phone and anything else you want customers to see - Google review link: paste this in so happy customers can leave you a review in one tap Your location and hours: Your address and opening hours live under Settings, then Locations. Your address shows on your page and helps local customers find you, so keep it accurate. If you have more than one site you can add each one here. A quick tip on photos: Good images make a real difference. A clear logo and a warm cover photo of your space tell people they are in the right place before they read a word. Once your profile is looking good, move on to adding your services so customers have something to book. Common questions: Where do I change my business name and logo? Settings, then Business Profile. Your address and opening hours live under Settings, then Locations. What size should my logo be? A square image works best, because it shows on your page and on the confirmations customers receive. Why add a Google review link? It lets a happy customer leave you a Google review in one tap, and Google reviews are what show in search and maps. --- ## Adding your services Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/adding-your-services Category: Getting started Services are the things customers book, a haircut, a full valet, a boiler service, a training session. Each one has a name, a length and a price, and that is what powers your booking page and your calendar. A note on wording: Youzse changes its wording to suit your trade. Salons and clinics see these as services, while garages and trades can switch the label to jobs under Settings, then Appearance. Whatever you call them, they work the same way. Where to find it: Go to Services in the main menu, then add your first one. What to set for each service: - Name: what the customer recognises, for example Haircut, Full Valet or Boiler Service - Description: a short line on what is included - Duration: how long it takes, this is what blocks out your calendar - Price: what you charge, or leave it as from a price if it varies Getting the length right matters: The duration decides how much time each booking takes up, so be realistic. If a job usually runs over, build that in. It keeps your day from bunching up. Who can do it: You can choose which team members offer each service. That way customers only get offered staff who actually do that work. You can reorder, duplicate or hide services at any time, so start with your most popular ones and add the rest later. Next, add the people who carry out the work. Common questions: Can I hide a service from my public page? Yes. A service can be set not to show publicly, which suits work you only ever book yourself. How do I charge more for a senior member of staff? Create it as a separate service assigned only to them, so your booking page is honest about what each person costs. Do I have to set a duration? It is worth it, because the duration is what generates realistic slots. Without one your diary will not reflect how long the work takes. --- ## Adding your team Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/adding-your-team Category: Getting started Adding your team lets customers book the right person and gives each member their own diary. Even if it is just you, it is worth adding yourself as a team member so bookings have somewhere to land. Where to find it: Go to Staff in the main menu to see everyone and add someone new. For each person you can set: - Their name and how it appears to customers - Which services or jobs they offer - Their working hours at each location - Their own working diary in the calendar Inviting them to log in: If you want a team member to use Youzse themselves, send them an invitation from the Staff area. They will get an email to set a password and sign in. You control what each person can see and do, so front-of-house staff and managers can have different access. Setting working hours: Each person has their own hours per location, set from their staff record. These hours decide when customers can book them, on top of your overall opening hours. There is a separate article on working hours and availability that covers this in detail. Keeping it tidy: You can reorder your team so the right people show first, and you can hide anyone who has left. If someone only does certain jobs, set that on their record so they are never offered for work they do not do. With your team and services in place, your booking page is nearly ready for customers. Common questions: Do staff set their own password? Yes. They are invited by email and choose their own. Passwords are never imported or set by you. What if the invitation does not arrive? Check the email address, then their spam folder, then resend it from their staff record. Can I add somebody without giving them access? You can hold a staff record for the diary. They cannot sign in until an email address is added. --- ## Setting your working hours and availability Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/setting-working-hours Category: Getting started Your hours are what decide when customers can book. Get them right and your booking page only ever offers times you can actually work. There are two layers to it, your overall opening hours and each person own hours. Your opening hours: Go to Settings, then Locations and open the hours for your location. Set the days you are open and the times for each. If you close for lunch or only open some days, set that here. If you have more than one site, each one has its own hours. Each person hours: On top of your opening hours, every team member has their own working hours. Open someone record under Staff and set when they work at each location. A customer can only book a person when both your business and that person are open. Time off and one-off changes: Life happens, so you can add overrides for individual days, a bank holiday, a training day, a late start. These sit on top of the normal pattern and stop bookings landing when you are away. You can set a single day or a range. A few things worth checking: - Do your team hours match your opening hours, or are there gaps - Have you blocked any known closures coming up - Does the length of your services leave room between bookings Tip: think about how far ahead and how close to the day people can book. Those booking rules live under Settings, then Booking rules, and they work alongside your hours to protect your diary. Common questions: Why is nobody bookable on a particular day? Almost always because that person has no working hours set for it. Check the staff hours before anything else. What is the difference between business hours and staff hours? Business hours say when you are open. Staff hours say when each person works. A slot needs both to allow it. Can I still add a booking outside working hours? Yes. Working hours govern what customers can book online, not what you can put in the diary yourself. --- ## Your public booking page Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/your-public-booking-page Category: Getting started Your public page is where customers find you, see what you offer and book. It pulls everything together, your profile, your services, your team and your hours, into one page with its own web address. How customers reach it: Every business gets a tidy link based on your name. Share it on social media, in your email signature and on your existing website. When a new client books through it, you pay 0% commission on that booking. Choosing how your page works: Go to Settings, then Appearance, to set what your page does. You can choose: - Online booking, customers pick a service, a person and a time and book themselves in - Enquiry form, customers send you a message and you book them in yourself - Both, offer a form alongside instant booking Pick whatever suits how you like to work. Plenty of trades start with enquiries and switch on instant booking once they are comfortable. What makes a page convert: - A clear logo and a warm cover photo - Services with sensible prices and lengths - Accurate opening hours so the times shown are real - Your address and contact details filled in Check it before you share it: Open your own page and run through a booking the way a customer would. Make sure the right services show, the times look right and the wording reads well. Once it feels right, share the link far and wide. Common questions: How do I see what customers see? Open your own page in a private browser window. Normal browsing shows you a stored copy that may be out of date. Why is a service missing from my page? It is either set not to show publicly, or nobody with working hours is assigned to it. Where do I get the link to share? From your public page settings. It is what you put on social profiles, in your email signature and on printed material. --- ## Your go-live checklist Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/your-go-live-checklist Category: Getting started Before you point customers at your page, it is worth a quick run through the essentials. Youzse keeps a setup list for you on the Getting started screen, which ticks items off as you complete them. Here is what is worth getting done first. The essentials: - Add a service: at least one service or job so there is something to book - Set your opening hours: under Settings, then Locations - Add your team and their hours: so customers can book the right person - Complete your profile: name, logo, cover image and contact details - Connect online payments: so you can take deposits and get paid online - Choose your notifications: decide which alerts you receive and on which channels - Review your booking rules: how far ahead and how close to the day people can book - Publish your booking page: pick booking, enquiries or both When you are ready to get paid: - Confirm your payout details so money reaches your bank - Set up VAT if you are registered - Set your invoice defaults Worth doing soon after: - Import your existing customers so their history comes with them - Add photos to your page - Invite the rest of your team Take it in order and you will be live in good shape. The setup list on the Getting started screen is the easiest way to keep track, each item links straight to the right place. There is no need to finish everything before you open, the essentials are enough to start taking bookings. Common questions: What is the minimum before I go live? A business profile, your services with prices, your hours and at least one person assigned to each service. Should I take a test booking first? Yes. Book yourself through your own public page and read the confirmation that arrives. It catches most setup mistakes. Do I need online payments switched on to start? No. You can take bookings and be paid however you do now, and connect payments when you are ready. --- ## Finding your way around Youzse Source: https://youzse.app/help/getting-started/finding-your-way-around-youzse Category: Getting started Once you are set up, knowing where everything lives makes day to day work quick. Here is a plain guide to the main menu so you always know where to look. The main areas: - Dashboard: your at a glance home, what is happening today and what needs attention - Calendar: your diary across the whole team, where you view and add bookings - Bookings: the full list of bookings, handy for searching and bulk actions - Customers: every customer record, with notes, history and contact details - Services: the services or jobs you offer, with prices and lengths - Staff: your team, their working hours and what each person offers - Invoices: invoices you have raised and their payment status - Inbox: messages and enquiries from customers - Reports: how your business is doing, takings, bookings and more - Settings: everything behind the scenes, profile, hours, payments and more You may also see Quotes, Leads, Companies, Loyalty, Gift cards and Waitlist depending on your plan and trade. Quick ways to get around: - The search opens from anywhere, type a customer, a booking or a page name to jump straight there - Settings is your control room, profile, locations, payments, notifications and booking rules all sit under it - The Getting started screen keeps your setup list handy while you are finding your feet One last thing on wording: Youzse adapts its language to your trade, so what one business calls bookings another sees as jobs or appointments. You can change this under Settings, then Appearance, so the app speaks the way you do. Common questions: Why can I see fewer menu items than a colleague? What you see depends on your role and your plan. Some pages are permissions, others are features your plan includes. Where do settings live? Settings in the sidebar, grouped by area, from your business profile through to payments and compliance. Is there a search? Yes, and it jumps straight to pages, customers and records rather than making you navigate to them. --- ## Preparing your data for import Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/preparing-your-data-for-import Category: Importing your data Export one CSV per type of record, keep the header row exactly as your old system wrote it and make sure each file is under 50 MB. That is almost all of the preparation there is. What the importer accepts: - CSV files only. Spreadsheets need saving as CSV first, from File then Save as in Excel, Numbers or Google Sheets - Up to 50 MB per file - One kind of record per file, so clients in one and appointments in another Leave the headers alone: Youzse reads your header row to work out what each column holds. If your export says Client First Name, leave it as Client First Name. Renaming columns to something you think is tidier makes the match worse, not better, because the recognised names come from the platforms themselves. Worth doing before you export: - Merge obvious duplicate clients in your old system where it lets you, because cleaning up there is quicker than cleaning up twice - Delete test records and staff who left years ago - Check dates look consistent, since a file mixing 03/04/2026 and 2026-04-03 will import but is worth spot-checking What you do not need to do: You do not need to rename columns, reorder them, split full names into two columns or convert prices into pence. Youzse handles all of that, and splitting a name by hand is more likely to break than to help. A note on file names: Name the file after what is in it. A file called clients.csv or appointments-2026.csv is recognised straight away, because the importer reads the filename for words like client, booking, invoice, quote, staff and service. Common questions: Can I import an Excel file directly? No. Save it as CSV first. In Excel choose File, then Save as, then CSV UTF-8. The importer accepts .csv and .txt only. What if my file is bigger than 50 MB? Split it by date range and import each piece separately. Appointment history is usually the only file that gets near the limit, and importing it in yearly chunks works fine. Do I have to import everything at once? No. Most businesses import customers first, get going and bring appointment history across later. Nothing has to happen on day one. --- ## What Youzse can and cannot import Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/what-youzse-can-and-cannot-import Category: Importing your data Youzse imports nine kinds of record: customers, companies, services, staff, appointments, leads, quotes, invoices and reviews. Saved card details are the one thing that can never come across. What comes across: - Customers, with names, emails, phone numbers, addresses, dates of birth, notes and marketing consent where your export includes it - Companies, for businesses you invoice rather than individuals, including VAT numbers - Services, with name, category, duration, price and description - Staff, with names, emails, phone numbers and job titles - Appointments, with date and time, service, customer, staff member, duration, price, status and notes - Leads and quotes - Invoices, with numbers, dates, totals, VAT and payment status - Reviews, through a separate paste-based tool What does not come across: - Saved card details, because cards live with the payment provider rather than the booking system - Photos and file attachments - Your old system's internal record IDs - Staff logins and passwords, because staff are invited to set their own A word on card details: This is not a Youzse limitation, it is how card storage works everywhere. If a provider offers to migrate saved cards, that is a conversation between two payment processors and not something a CSV can carry. Your customers add a card again the first time they pay, which takes seconds. Product line matters: Vehicles, parts, suppliers and purchase orders are Garage Pro features. On Garage Pro those import routes are open to you. On the standard product line they are not shown at all. Common questions: Will my appointment history come across? Yes, as far back as your export goes. Export the widest date range your old system allows, because most default to the last few months. Can I import my customers' saved cards? No. No booking platform can transfer stored card details. Customers add a card the next time they pay. What happens to marketing consent? Where your export has a consent column it is imported and respected. Where it does not, customers arrive without consent and stay out of campaigns until they opt in. --- ## The order to import things in Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/the-order-to-import-things-in Category: Importing your data Import in this order: staff, then services, then customers, then appointments. Each step gives the next one something to link to. Why the order matters: An appointment row names a service, a customer and a staff member. If those already exist in Youzse the appointment attaches to the right records. If they do not, the link is weaker and you end up tidying afterwards. The order: 1. Staff, so appointments can be assigned to the right person and working hours make sense 2. Services, so appointments attach to a real service with a real price and duration 3. Customers, the big one and the one most businesses care about most 4. Appointments, last, so every row has something to point at 5. Invoices, quotes and leads, any time after customers are in 6. Reviews, any time, because they use their own tool and depend on nothing else If you have already imported out of order: Nothing is broken. Import the missing records, then check the appointments that were affected. You can also roll an import back and run it again once the records it depends on exist. On Garage Pro: Import companies before customers if you invoice businesses, and vehicles after customers so each vehicle attaches to its keeper. Common questions: What happens if I import appointments first? They still import. Services and staff named in the file are matched by name where they already exist, and where they do not you will have tidying to do afterwards. Do I have to import staff if I work alone? No. Solo businesses can skip straight to services and customers. Can I run two imports at the same time? Let one finish before starting the next. The progress screen tells you when it is done, and running them in sequence keeps the matching predictable. --- ## Importing your data lawfully Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/importing-your-data-lawfully Category: Importing your data Every import asks two questions before it runs: where the data came from, and your lawful basis for processing it. Both are stored against the import, so you have a record if you are ever asked. Where the wizard asks: At the Settings step you fill in a short description of the origin, something like Fresha customer export, March 2026. It is required. Vague answers help nobody in a year's time when you cannot remember which file this was. Choosing a lawful basis: You pick one of three. - Legitimate Interest, the usual choice for moving your own existing client records between systems you control - Consent, where the people concerned actively agreed - Contract Performance, where you hold the data to deliver something you have agreed to do You are the data controller: Youzse processes this data on your instructions. The decision about what to import and why is yours, which is exactly why the wizard asks you to record it rather than assuming. Marketing is a separate question: A lawful basis for holding a customer record is not the same as consent to market to them. Where your export carries a marketing consent column it is imported and honoured. Where it does not, imported customers arrive without marketing consent and stay out of campaigns until they opt in. That is deliberate. Keep the export file safe: Store the CSV you uploaded somewhere sensible and delete stray copies from your downloads folder. It is personal data sitting on a laptop. Common questions: Which lawful basis should I choose for moving my own client list? Legitimate Interest usually fits, because you already hold the records to serve the same clients and you are changing the system rather than the purpose. Does importing a customer mean I can email them marketing? No. Marketing needs consent, which is tracked separately. Imported customers are excluded from campaigns unless a consent column said otherwise. Where can I see what I recorded? Open the import from Import Data. The source description and lawful basis are stored on it, and the Activity Log under Settings records that the import happened. --- ## Bringing your reviews across Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/bringing-your-reviews-across Category: Importing your data Reviews do not come across in a CSV. They have their own tool, where you choose the platform they came from and then either upload a PDF of your reviews page or paste the reviews in as text. Why they are different: Almost no booking platform offers a review export, because reviews are the thing that keeps you there. What you can always do is see them on your own public profile, so that is what this works from. Where to start: Open Import Data in the sidebar and choose the review option, which is the reliable way in. The Reviews page itself lives at /app/reviews. How it works: 1. Choose the platform the reviews came from, such as Google, Fresha, Booksy, Vagaro, Setmore, Mindbody, Square, Timely or GlossGenius 2. Follow the instructions shown for that platform, which differ because their pages differ 3. Either upload a PDF saved from your reviews page, or paste the text from your public profile 4. Check and tidy each row before you save it Platform quirks worth knowing: Fresha ratings come across as text, so they are read for you. Booksy shows ratings as pictures rather than text, so you set the star rating on each row yourself. Acuity does not usually hold native reviews at all, so Google or a fresh campaign is the better route there. Check every row: This is a read of a page rather than a clean export, so rows need a look before you keep them. Correct the name, the date and the rating where they have not come through cleanly. Earning fresh ones instead: A rebuild campaign invites past customers to leave a new review with you. Before one can be launched you have to attest that the reviews are genuine, which is deliberate: your review history is only worth anything if it is true. Common questions: Can I import Google reviews? You can bring the history across from your Google Business profile. Your reviews stay on Google as well, which is where they do the most for you in search. Why do I have to check each row? Because it is read from a page rather than a structured export. A minute of tidying is the price of not losing years of reviews. Is it against the rules to copy my own reviews? These are reviews of your business, shown publicly. Presenting them as reviews left on Youzse would not be honest, which is why they carry the platform they came from. --- ## Using the import wizard Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/using-the-import-wizard Category: Importing your data The guided migration has five steps: Files, Mapping, Settings, Review and Run. You are never asked which platform your data came from, because Youzse works that out from the column headers in your file. Where to find it: Go to Import Data in the sidebar. From there you can start the guided migration for a full move, or click a single record type to import just that. The five steps: 1. Files. Upload your CSVs. Youzse reads each filename and header row and works out whether it holds customers, appointments, invoices, services, staff, companies, leads or quotes 2. Mapping. You are shown which column has been matched to which Youzse field. Where a platform is recognised its own column names are used, so Client First Name from Fresha or Given Name from Square lands in the right place without you touching it 3. Settings. Where the data came from, your lawful basis for processing it and what to do when a row matches a record you already have 4. Review. A count of the rows about to be imported and what they will become, and your last chance to go back 5. Run. It processes and shows a live count of created, updated, skipped and errored rows Importing one type on its own: Clicking a record type on the Import Data page opens a shorter version of the same thing: Upload, Mapping, Settings, Preview, then the results. Same engine, fewer files. You can leave and come back: The guided migration keeps its place in the page address, so refreshing or closing the tab does not lose your progress. Common questions: Where do I choose which system I am importing from? You do not, and no such setting exists. Detection is automatic from your headers. If your platform is not one of the recognised ten, you map the columns yourself at the Mapping step. What if Youzse guesses the wrong record type? Change it at the Mapping step before you continue. Naming files clearly, like clients.csv, makes the guess right far more often. Can I stop halfway through? Yes, up until you press to run it. Once processing starts, let it finish and then roll it back if it was wrong. --- ## Mapping columns by hand Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/mapping-columns-by-hand Category: Importing your data At the Mapping step every column in your file is listed with the Youzse field it has been matched to. You can change any of them, and you can leave a column out. When you will need this: If your export came from one of the ten recognised platforms, most columns are already matched and you are only checking. If it came from anywhere else, or from a spreadsheet you keep yourself, this is where the work happens. How to map a column: Each row on the Mapping step is one column from your file. Pick the Youzse field it belongs to. Anything you leave unmapped is ignored, which is the right answer for internal reference numbers and columns you no longer need. The fields worth knowing: - Customers: first name, last name, email, phone, date of birth, address, city, county, postcode, country, notes, marketing opt-in and source - Services: name, category, duration in minutes, price and description - Staff: display name, first name, last name, email, phone and job title - Appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, customer email, staff name, duration, price, status, notes and location - Invoices: invoice number, issue date, due date, customer name, subtotal, tax, total, amount due and status Names in one column: If your file has a single full name column, map it to the full name field and Youzse splits it. Do not split it yourself in the spreadsheet, because middle names and double-barrelled surnames go wrong far more often by hand. Dates and times in separate columns: Where a platform is recognised, a separate time column is joined onto the date automatically. For an unrecognised export, the tidiest fix is to combine date and time into one column in your spreadsheet before you upload. Prices: Enter prices as you normally write them. Youzse converts to pence on the way in, so 42.50 is understood. Common questions: What happens to a column I do not map? Nothing. It is ignored and not stored, which is the right choice for old system IDs and internal codes. Can I map two columns to the same field? No, one column per field. If you have both Mobile and Phone, map whichever is more reliably filled in. Do I have to map every field Youzse offers? No, only what you have. A customer import with nothing but name and email works perfectly well. --- ## Choosing a duplicate rule Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/choosing-a-duplicate-rule Category: Importing your data When an imported row matches a record you already have, Youzse does one of four things, and you choose which at the Settings step. The four rules: - Skip duplicates. Matching rows are left out and your existing record is untouched - Update existing records. Empty fields on your existing record are filled in from the import, and anything already filled in is kept - Replace existing records. The imported values overwrite what you have - Flag for review. Everything imports and possible duplicates are marked so you can look at them yourself Which to pick: Update is the safe default for a second pass. If you imported customers last month and are now importing a fresher export, Update fills the gaps without overwriting anything you have corrected by hand since. Skip suits a top-up where you want the new people only and do not want the file touching anyone already on the system. Replace suits the case where the file you are importing is definitively more correct than what is in Youzse. It is the only option that can lose work you have done since the last import, so use it deliberately. Flag for review suits a messy list you would rather eyeball than have a rule decide on. Doing it twice is fine: Running the same file again with Update is harmless. That is what makes it safe to import, check, fix the export and import again. Common questions: Which rule should I use the first time? It barely matters on an empty account, because there is nothing to match. Update is a sensible habit for every import after that. Will Replace delete notes I have added since? It overwrites the fields present in your file. Anything the file does not contain is left alone, but a note column in the import will replace the note in Youzse. How do I find the rows that got flagged? Open the import from Import Data and look at the results, then check the customer list for the marked records. --- ## Understanding duplicates Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/understanding-duplicates Category: Importing your data Youzse looks for an existing match on email address first, then phone number, then a close match on name. Whatever it finds, your duplicate rule decides what happens next. Why duplicates happen at all: Most client lists have the same person twice already. Someone books once with a work email and once with a personal one, or a mobile is stored with spaces in one record and without in another. Moving platforms is when this finally becomes visible. What counts as a match: - The same email address is the strongest signal and is checked first - The same phone number is checked next, ignoring spaces and formatting - A close name match is the weakest, which is why Flag for review exists Cleaning up before you export: If your old system can merge duplicates, do it there. You will be doing it once instead of twice, and the export that follows is cleaner for it. Cleaning up afterwards: Open Customers and search for the name. Where you find two records for one person, keep the one with the fuller history and move anything useful across before removing the other. Phone numbers: Numbers are tidied on the way in, so 07700 900123 and +447700900123 match each other. Landlines and mobiles held in separate columns in your export are both accepted, but only one can be mapped to the phone field, so pick the one you actually ring. Common questions: Does Youzse merge duplicates automatically? No. It matches and applies the rule you chose. Merging two existing customer records is something you do yourself, deliberately. Two people in my family share an email address. Will they merge? With Update or Replace they would be treated as one person. Use Flag for review for a list you know has shared addresses, or give one of them a different email before exporting. Are appointments deduplicated too? Appointments are matched on the customer, service and start time together, so importing the same history twice does not double your diary. --- ## Import from Fresha Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-fresha Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Fresha's column names, so a Fresha export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Fresha: Log in at partners.fresha.com. 1. Open Clients from the left-hand menu to see your full client list. 2. Use the export option at the top of the list and choose CSV. 3. Open Calendar, then the Appointments tab. Set the date filter as far back as it goes, then export. 4. Take your service menu export too if Fresha offers one separately. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Fresha should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Fresha. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Clients: Client First Name, Client Last Name, Client Email, Client Mobile, Client Birthday, Client Notes, Client Address, Client City, Client Postcode, Client Country and Marketing Consent - Services: Service Name, Service Category, Duration (min), Price and Description - Appointments: Appointment Date, Appointment Time, Service, Client, Client Email, Team Member, Status, Price, Location and Notes - Team: Team Member Name, First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone and Job Title Worth knowing: - Marketing Consent is imported and honoured, so people who opted out in Fresha stay opted out - Appointment Date and Appointment Time are joined into one timestamp automatically - Fresha statuses map across, so completed, confirmed, cancelled, no-show and pending all land correctly What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Does my Fresha marketing consent come across? Yes. Fresha exports a Marketing Consent column and Youzse imports it, so anyone who opted out stays opted out. Will my Fresha reviews transfer? Not in the CSV, but there is a separate review import that takes Fresha reviews pasted straight in. See Bringing your reviews across. How far back does the appointment export go? As far as you set the date filter. Fresha defaults to a short recent range, so widen it before exporting or you will only get a few weeks. --- ## Import from Booksy Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-booksy Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Booksy's column names, so a Booksy export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Booksy: Log in to the Booksy web dashboard, or use Booksy Biz on your device. 1. Open the Clients section from the main menu. 2. Use the export option, often behind a three-dot menu, and choose CSV. 3. Open Appointments or History, set your date range and export. 4. Export your service list if Booksy offers it separately. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Booksy should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Booksy. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Clients: First Name, Last Name, Email Address, Mobile Phone, Birthday, Notes, Street, City, Zip Code and Country - Services: Service name, Category, Duration, Price and Description - Appointments: Date, Time, Service, Client Name, Client Email, Staff, Duration, Price, Status and Notes - Staff: Name, First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone and Title Worth knowing: - Booksy writes Email Address rather than Email, and Mobile Phone rather than Phone, and both are recognised - The Booksy status done is mapped to completed, and rejected is mapped to cancelled - If you cannot find an export option, Booksy support can produce a data export for you What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Booksy will not let me export. What now? Ask Booksy support for a data export, which they can produce for your account. You have a right to a copy of your own client data. Do Booksy reviews come across? Not through the CSV. Booksy reviews can be brought over with the separate review import tool. Why does my export say Email Address instead of Email? That is just how Booksy names the column. Youzse recognises it, so there is nothing for you to change. --- ## Import from Vagaro Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-vagaro Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Vagaro's column names, so a Vagaro export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Vagaro: Sign in at vagaro.com/pro. 1. Open Reports from the main navigation. 2. Go to Customer Reports, then Customer List and export as CSV. 3. Go to Appointment Reports, then Appointment List. Set the widest date range and export. 4. Export your service list from the service reports if you want prices to come across. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Vagaro should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Vagaro. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Customers: First Name, Last Name, Email, Cell Phone, Home Phone, Birthday, Notes, Address, City, State, Zip and Referred By - Services: Service Name, Service Category, Duration, Price and Description - Appointments: Date, Time, Service, Customer, Customer Email, Employee, Duration, Price, Status and Notes - Staff: Employee Name, First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone and Title Worth knowing: - Cell Phone is used as the phone number, and Work Phone is deliberately not imported because most businesses ring the mobile - Referred By is brought across as the customer source, which is useful for seeing where your clients came from - The Vagaro status checked out is mapped to completed, and booked to confirmed What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Which phone number does Vagaro send over? Cell Phone, falling back to Home Phone. Work Phone is not imported. Is Preferred Stylist imported? It is recognised in the export but not stored as a field. Assign a preferred staff member in Youzse if you want that behaviour. State is a US field. What happens to it? It is mapped to the county field, which is where a UK address expects it. --- ## Import from Setmore Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-setmore Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Setmore's column names, so a Setmore export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Setmore: Sign in at my.setmore.com. 1. Open Customers from the left sidebar. 2. Use the Export button at the top of the customer list and download as CSV. 3. Open Appointments, then Past Appointments and export. 4. Export upcoming appointments too, so your future diary comes with you. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Setmore should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Setmore. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Customers: Customer Name, Customer Email, Customer Phone, Address, City, State, Zip Code, Country and Notes - Services: Service, Category, Duration, Cost and Description - Appointments: Date, Start Time, Service, Customer Name, Customer Email, Staff Name, Duration, Cost, Status and Notes - Staff: Staff Name, First Name, Last Name, Email and Phone Worth knowing: - Setmore exports a single Customer Name column, which Youzse splits into first and last name, so do not split it yourself - Setmore calls the price Cost, and it is recognised - The Setmore status accepted is mapped to confirmed, and requested to pending What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Should I split the name column before importing? No. Leave it as one column. Youzse splits full names more reliably than a spreadsheet formula does. Do I need to export past and future appointments separately? Yes, Setmore separates them. Export both and upload both files. Why is my price column empty? Setmore names it Cost. If you renamed it in the spreadsheet, map it by hand at the Mapping step. --- ## Import from SimplyBook.me Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-simplybookme Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises SimplyBook.me's column names, so a SimplyBook.me export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from SimplyBook.me: Sign in at admin.simplybook.me. 1. Open Reports from the main menu. 2. Open the client list report and export as CSV. 3. Open the booking report, set your date range and export. 4. Inside SimplyBook.me you can also request a full data export from its own Settings, under Data Management. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from SimplyBook.me should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from SimplyBook.me. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Clients: Client Name, Client Email, Client Phone, Address, City, Zip, Country, Comment and Birthday - Services: Service, Category, Duration, Price and Description - Bookings: Start Date, Start Time, Service, Client Name, Client Email, Provider, Duration, Price, Status and Comment - Providers: Provider, Provider Name, Email and Phone Worth knowing: - SimplyBook.me calls staff Providers, and that column becomes your staff member - The Comment column is imported as the note on the record - End Date and End Time are recognised and deliberately not imported, because duration is what Youzse works from What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: What happens to my Providers? Each Provider becomes a staff member. Import staff before bookings so each booking attaches to the right person. Are my custom intake fields imported? No. Custom fields do not map to standard Youzse fields. Rebuild them under Forms once you are set up. Where do comments go? The Comment column becomes the note on the client or the booking, depending on which file it came from. --- ## Import from Acuity Scheduling Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-acuity Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Acuity Scheduling's column names, so a Acuity Scheduling export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Acuity Scheduling: Sign in at acuityscheduling.com, or reach it through your Squarespace dashboard. 1. Open Reporting from the sidebar. 2. Set the date range as wide as it will go, because Acuity defaults to a recent window. 3. Export the appointment list as CSV. 4. That single export carries your client details too, so a separate client export is not essential. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Acuity Scheduling should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Acuity Scheduling. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Clients: First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone and Notes - Services: Appointment Type, Category, Duration and Price - Appointments: Start Date, Start Time, Appointment Type, First Name, Last Name, Email, Calendar, Duration, Price, Notes, Canceled and No Show - Staff: Calendar, Calendar Name and Email Worth knowing: - Acuity calls a staff member a Calendar and a service an Appointment Type, and both are recognised - The Canceled and No Show columns hold true or false, and are turned into proper cancelled and no-show statuses - Where neither flag is set, an appointment is imported as completed What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: I only have an appointment export. Is that enough? Yes. Acuity puts client name, email and phone on every appointment row, so customer records can be built from it. What is the Calendar column? Acuity uses Calendar for the person or resource the appointment belongs to. It becomes your staff member. Why do all my appointments say completed? Acuity only flags cancellations and no-shows. Anything without a flag is treated as completed, which is right for past history. --- ## Import from Square Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-square Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Square's column names, so a Square export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Square: Sign in at squareup.com/dashboard. 1. Open Customers, then Directory and export as CSV. 2. If you use Square Appointments, open Appointments, then Activity and export your booking history. 3. Open Invoices and export if you want your invoice history to come across. 4. Export your item library if your services live there. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Square should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Square. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Customers: Given Name, Family Name, Email Address, Phone Number, Company Name, Birthday, Address Line 1, Address Line 2, Locality, Administrative District, Postal Code, Country and Note - Services: Item Name, Category, Price and Description - Appointments: Start At, Service Name, Customer Name, Customer Email, Staff Member Name, Duration (min), Price, Status, Note and Location - Invoices: Invoice Number, Date, Due Date, Customer Name and Amount Worth knowing: - Square uses Given Name and Family Name rather than first and last, and both are recognised - Locality is the town and Administrative District is the county, which is how Square names UK address fields - Reference ID and Instant Profile are recognised and deliberately not imported, because they are Square internals What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Do my Square card readers still work? No. Square hardware is tied to Square. Youzse takes card payments through its own payment setup, including Tap to Pay on iPhone. Will saved cards come across from Square? No. Stored cards cannot be transferred between platforms by anyone. Customers add a card again on their next payment. Can I import my Square invoices? Yes. Export from the Invoices section and upload it. Invoice numbers, dates, customer and amount are recognised. --- ## Import from Calendly Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-calendly Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Calendly's column names, so a Calendly export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Calendly: Sign in at calendly.com. 1. Open Scheduled Events, or Activity, from the navigation. 2. Set the date range to cover all the history you want. 3. Export as CSV. 4. Calendly puts invitee details on every row, so this one file carries your contacts too. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Calendly should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Calendly. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Contacts: Invitee Name, Invitee Email and Text Reminder Number - Event types: Event Type Name and Duration - Events: Start Date & Time, Event Type Name, Invitee Name, Invitee Email, Event Host, Location, Status, Canceled and Response - Hosts: Event Host, Host Name and Host Email Worth knowing: - Calendly calls a customer an Invitee, a service an Event Type and a staff member an Event Host, and all three are recognised - The Canceled column holds Yes or No and is turned into a proper cancelled status - Invitee Name is a single column and is split into first and last name automatically What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Calendly does not really have customers. What gets imported? Each invitee becomes a customer record built from their name and email, which gives you a contact list you can actually work with. What happens to my questionnaire responses? The Response column is imported as the note on the booking. Rebuild ongoing questions under Forms. Do my Calendly event types become services? Yes. Event Type Name becomes the service name and the duration comes with it. Check prices afterwards, because Calendly rarely holds them. --- ## Import from QuickBooks Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-quickbooks Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises QuickBooks's column names, so a QuickBooks export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from QuickBooks: Sign in at quickbooks.intuit.com. 1. Open Sales, then Customers and export the list. 2. Open Sales, then Invoices, filter by date range and export. 3. Save both as CSV if QuickBooks offers you a choice of format. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from QuickBooks should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from QuickBooks. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Customers: Customer, Display Name, Company, Email, Phone, Mobile, Street, City/Town, County, Postcode/Zip, Country and Notes - Companies: Company, Phone, Email, Website, Street, City/Town, County, Postcode/Zip, Country, VAT Reg No and Company Number - Invoices: Invoice No., Date, Due Date, Customer, Amount, Tax, VAT, Total, Balance Due, Status and Memo Worth knowing: - QuickBooks holds a customer name in one column, which is split into first and last name automatically - Invoice statuses map across, so paid stays paid, past due becomes overdue and open or unpaid becomes sent - VAT Reg No and Company Number are imported onto company records, which matters if you invoice businesses What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Should I keep using QuickBooks for accounts? Many businesses do. Youzse handles bookings, invoicing and payments day to day, and you can keep your accountant on QuickBooks. Do payments come across with the invoices? The status does, so a paid invoice arrives marked paid. Individual payment transactions are not imported. What is the difference between customers and companies? A customer is a person and a company is a business you invoice. Import companies first if your invoices are addressed to businesses. --- ## Import from Sage Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-sage Category: Importing your data Youzse recognises Sage's column names, so a Sage export imports with the mapping already done for you. Export your data, upload the files and check the Mapping step rather than filling it in. Exporting from Sage: Sign in at accounts.sage.com. 1. Open Contacts, then Customers and export as CSV. 2. Open Sales, then Invoices, filter to the period you want and export. 3. Take a supplier export too if you are on Garage Pro and want suppliers across. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, check what has been matched, which coming from Sage should already be right 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it There is no step where you tell Youzse you are coming from Sage. It is worked out from the headers in your file. Columns Youzse recognises: - Customers: Contact Name, Company Name, Email Address, Telephone, Mobile, Address 1, Address 2, Town, County, Postcode and Country - Companies: Company Name, Email Address, Telephone, Address 1, Address 2, Town, County, Postcode, Country, VAT Number, Website and Account Ref - Invoices: Invoice Number, Date, Due Date, Customer Reference, Net Amount, VAT Amount, Gross Amount, Outstanding and Status Worth knowing: - Sage writes contact names as Surname, Forename, which is parsed correctly, so leave it alone - Net Amount becomes the subtotal, VAT Amount the tax and Gross Amount the total - Account Ref is stored as the company registration reference, so your Sage account codes are not lost What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: My names are in Surname, Forename order. Do I need to fix them? No. That format is expected and parsed correctly. Does my VAT scheme come across? No. Set your VAT scheme up under Settings, then VAT. Only the numbers on invoices are imported. Can I import supplier records? Suppliers are a Garage Pro feature. On Garage Pro, export your Sage supplier list and import it as companies. --- ## Import from Treatwell Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-treatwell Category: Importing your data You can move from Treatwell to Youzse with a CSV export. Treatwell is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from Treatwell: Sign in to Treatwell Connect. 1. Open your client list from the Connect dashboard. 2. Use the export or download option and choose CSV. 3. Export your appointment history from the calendar or reporting area, with the widest date range available. 4. If no export is offered, contact Treatwell support and ask for a copy of your client data. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a Treatwell export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Treatwell will not give me an export. What are my options? Ask their support team directly for a copy of your client data. It is your data and you are entitled to a copy of it. Do my Treatwell reviews come across? Not in a CSV, but the separate review import can take reviews you paste in. See Bringing your reviews across. Will I keep paying commission? Not on Youzse. When a new client finds you through Youzse and books, you pay 0% commission on that booking. --- ## Import from Phorest Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-phorest Category: Importing your data You can move from Phorest to Youzse with a CSV export. Phorest is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from Phorest: Sign in to Phorest on desktop. 1. Open the Manager or reporting area. 2. Find the client list report and export it as CSV. 3. Export your appointment history from the appointment reports, with the widest date range. 4. Export your treatment or service list if it is available separately. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a Phorest export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Does my Phorest client history come across? Client records and appointment history do, as far back as your export goes. Treatment notes come across where they are a column in the export. What about my Phorest loyalty points? Balances are not imported. Set your scheme up under Loyalty and credit long-standing regulars by hand if you want to. Can Phorest support export for me? Yes, ask them. Salon software vendors will usually produce a data export on request. --- ## Import from Mindbody Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-mindbody Category: Importing your data You can move from Mindbody to Youzse with a CSV export. Mindbody is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from Mindbody: Sign in to the Mindbody business portal. 1. Open Reports from the main navigation. 2. Run the client list report and export it as CSV. 3. Run the appointment or class history report for the widest date range and export. 4. Export your service and class list if you want prices and durations across. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a Mindbody export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Do my class schedules come across? Class history imports as appointments. Rebuild the recurring schedule itself under Classes, which takes minutes and is a good moment to tidy it. What happens to my class packages? Balances are not imported. Set packages up under Settings, then Class Packages, and credit existing members by hand. Are contracts and memberships imported? No. Recurring billing has to be set up fresh, because payment authority cannot transfer between platforms. --- ## Import from Timely Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-timely Category: Importing your data You can move from Timely to Youzse with a CSV export. Timely is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from Timely: Sign in at gettimely.com. 1. Open Reports. 2. Run the client list report and export as CSV. 3. Run the appointment report across your full history and export. 4. Export your service list from the services area. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a Timely export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Does Timely export everything at once? No, it is report by report. Export clients, appointments and services separately, then upload all three files. Do consultation forms come across? No. Rebuild them under Forms, which also lets customers complete them before they arrive. What about my Timely deposits? Existing deposit records are not imported. Set deposit rules up under Settings, then Booking Rules. --- ## Import from GlossGenius Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-glossgenius Category: Importing your data You can move from GlossGenius to Youzse with a CSV export. GlossGenius is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from GlossGenius: Sign in to GlossGenius on the web. 1. Open your client list. 2. Use the export option and download as CSV. 3. Export your appointment history from the calendar or reports area. 4. If export is not available on your plan, contact GlossGenius support and request your data. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a GlossGenius export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: GlossGenius has no export button. What do I do? Contact their support and ask for your client data. You are entitled to a copy of it. Do my client photos come across? No. Photos and attachments cannot be imported from any platform. Save any you need before you close the account. Will my prices come across? If your export has a price column, yes. Otherwise set prices under Services, which is quick and worth reviewing anyway. --- ## Import from TechMan Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-techman Category: Importing your data You can move from TechMan to Youzse with a CSV export. TechMan is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from TechMan: Sign in to TechMan. 1. Open the reporting area. 2. Export your customer list as CSV. 3. Export your vehicle list, so registrations come across with their keepers. 4. Export job history and invoices for the period you want to keep. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a TechMan export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Do vehicle records come across? Vehicles are a Garage Pro feature. On Garage Pro, import customers first and then vehicles, so each vehicle attaches to the right keeper. What about MOT due dates? You do not need to import them. Garage Pro looks up vehicle and MOT data from the registration, so due dates come from the source. Are job cards imported? Job history imports as appointments or invoices depending on your export. Live job cards are best finished in TechMan before you switch. --- ## Import from Garage Hive Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-garage-hive Category: Importing your data You can move from Garage Hive to Youzse with a CSV export. Garage Hive is not one of the platforms whose column names Youzse recognises on sight, so you match the columns yourself at the Mapping step, which takes a couple of minutes per file. Exporting from Garage Hive: Sign in to Garage Hive, which runs on Business Central. 1. Open the customer list. 2. Use the Business Central export to Excel, then save the file as CSV. 3. Export your vehicle list the same way. 4. Export posted sales invoices for your invoice history. Save each export as CSV. If it arrives as an Excel file, open it and use Save as to produce a CSV, because the importer accepts CSV only. Uploading to Youzse: 1. Go to Import Data in the sidebar 2. Start the guided migration and add your files at the Files step 3. At the Mapping step, point each column at the Youzse field it belongs to, which is the part that matters here 4. At the Settings step, describe where the data came from and pick your lawful basis 5. Review the counts and run it Mapping a Garage Hive export: Name the files clearly, something like clients.csv and appointments.csv, because the record type is worked out partly from the filename. Then map the essentials and leave the rest unmapped. - For customers: first name, last name, email and phone. Everything else is a bonus - For appointments: start date and time, service name, customer name, staff name and status - For services: name, duration in minutes and price If your file has one full name column, map it to the full name field rather than splitting it yourself. If date and time sit in separate columns, combine them into one column in your spreadsheet before uploading. What will not come across: - Saved card details, which no platform can transfer - Photos and attachments - Loyalty balances and package credits - Staff logins, because staff are invited to set their own password Common questions: Garage Hive exports to Excel, not CSV. Is that a problem? No. Open the file and save it as CSV, then upload. The importer takes CSV only. Can I bring my vehicle list across? Yes on Garage Pro. Import customers first so each vehicle attaches to its keeper. What happens to my technician records? Export your users and import them as staff. Each one is invited to set their own password, so no logins transfer. --- ## Import from a spreadsheet Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/import-from-a-spreadsheet Category: Importing your data If your customer list lives in a spreadsheet, save it as CSV with a single header row and one kind of record per file, then map the columns yourself at the Mapping step. Plenty of businesses arrive this way and it works well. Getting the file right: 1. Put your column names in the first row and nothing above them 2. Delete any title rows, merged cells, totals rows and colour-coded legends 3. Keep one kind of record per file, so customers in one file and appointments in another 4. Save as CSV. In Excel that is File, then Save as, then CSV UTF-8 Merged cells and totals rows are the usual culprits when an import looks strange, because a CSV has no idea what a merged cell is. A minimal customer file: You need less than people expect. A file with First Name, Last Name, Email and Phone is a perfectly good import. Add date of birth, address and notes if you have them. Names in one column: Keep them in one column and map it to the full name field. Youzse splits it, and splitting by hand goes wrong on double-barrelled surnames and middle names. Dates: Pick one format and use it throughout. Mixed formats in one column are where partial imports come from, and spreadsheets are prone to silently reformatting dates, so check the column before saving. Phone numbers: Format the column as text before typing numbers, or the leading zero on a UK mobile disappears. If yours already look like 7700900123, add the zero back before you export. Prices: Plain numbers, so 42.50 rather than a currency-formatted cell. Remove currency symbols and thousands separators. Common questions: My spreadsheet has one row per appointment with the client repeated. Is that a problem? No, that is normal and how most platforms export. Youzse builds one customer record from the repeated details. Can I import a Google Sheet directly? Not directly. Use File, then Download, then Comma-separated values, and upload that file. What if I only have names and phone numbers? That is enough. Import them, and fill in emails as customers book. --- ## Checking your imported data Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/checking-your-imported-data Category: Importing your data Start with the four numbers the import shows you: created, updated, skipped and errors. Then spot-check about ten real records against your old system. That catches nearly everything. Reading the counts: - Created is new records - Updated is existing records the import filled in or overwrote, depending on your duplicate rule - Skipped is rows deliberately left out, usually duplicates under the Skip rule - Errors is rows that could not be imported at all A high skipped count is normal on a second import and usually means the rule worked. A high error count means something about the file needs another look. What to spot-check: - Open Customers and search for three people you know well, then check the phone number, email and any notes - Open Calendar and look at a week you remember, checking the right people are at the right times with the right staff member - Open Services and check prices and durations came across, because a price in the wrong column is easy to miss - Check that a customer you know has opted out of marketing is still opted out Counts not matching: If 500 customers went in and you see 480, the difference is almost always duplicates already on the system, blank rows at the bottom of the spreadsheet or rows with no name and no contact details. When something is wrong across the board: Do not fix hundreds of records by hand. Roll the import back, correct the export and run it again. Common questions: How long does an import take? Most finish in under a minute. A large appointment history can take several. The progress screen updates live, so you can watch it. My customer count is lower than my old system. Is that a problem? Usually not. Old systems count deleted and duplicate records in their totals. Check the skipped and error counts before worrying. Can I see exactly which rows failed? Yes. Download the error report from the import, which lists the row number, the field and what went wrong. --- ## Fixing rows that did not import Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/fixing-rows-that-did-not-import Category: Importing your data Open the import from Import Data and download the error report. It is a CSV with three columns, Row, Field and Message, naming exactly which row failed and why. The usual causes: - A missing name, because a customer with no name in any column cannot be created - An unreadable date, which is why a column mixing formats lands some rows and not others - An email that is not an email address, often a note that has drifted into the wrong column - Blank rows at the bottom of the spreadsheet, which are harmless and can be ignored - A price with a currency symbol or thousands separator in an unexpected place How to fix them: 1. Download the error report 2. Open your original export alongside it and find those row numbers 3. Correct them in the spreadsheet, or delete them if they are junk 4. Save a new CSV containing just the corrected rows 5. Import that file with the duplicate rule set to Update Importing only the failures is deliberate. The rows that worked the first time are already in, and re-importing everything just makes a longer report to read. If nearly every row failed: That is a mapping problem rather than a data problem. Start the import again and look carefully at the Mapping step, because a column pointed at the wrong field fails consistently rather than occasionally. Common questions: Do failed rows partially import? No. A row either imports completely or not at all, so you never end up with half a customer. Where is the error report? Open Import Data, open the import and download it from there. It is named after the import, like import-42-errors.csv. Can I just fix them by hand in Youzse? For a handful, yes, that is quicker. For more than about twenty, fixing the spreadsheet and re-importing is faster and less error-prone. --- ## Rolling back an import Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/rolling-back-an-import Category: Importing your data If an import went in wrong you can roll it back. That removes every record it created, and it is available on any import that has finished and has not already been rolled back. When rollback is available: An import can be rolled back when it has finished, whether it completed cleanly or completed with errors, it created at least one record and it has not been rolled back before. Rollback is a one-time action per import. What rollback removes: Everything the import created. Where the import was a staff import that also created platform accounts and memberships, those are removed too, so a mistaken staff import does not leave orphaned logins behind. What rollback does not undo: Records the import updated rather than created. If you ran an import with the Replace rule and it overwrote details on customers you already had, rolling back removes the new customers but does not restore the old values on the ones it changed. That is the reason to be deliberate about Replace. How to roll back: 1. Go to Import Data 2. Open the import you want to undo 3. Choose to roll it back and confirm Then fix your export and import again. Work done since: If you have been using the system since the import, be careful. An appointment you have booked against an imported customer is affected by removing that customer. Rolling back is best done soon after the import, not a fortnight later. Common questions: Can I roll back an import twice? No. Once an import has been rolled back it is marked as such and the option is gone. Does rollback undo changes to existing records? No. It removes what the import created. Values it overwrote on existing records stay overwritten. What if rollback is not offered? It means the import did not create anything, has not finished or has already been rolled back. If it created nothing there is nothing to undo. --- ## Importing after you have gone live Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/importing-after-you-have-gone-live Category: Importing your data Yes, you can import once you are already trading on Youzse. Take a fresh export from your old system, set the duplicate rule to Update, and it fills in what is missing without touching what you have changed since. Why this comes up: Most businesses do not migrate in one clean go. They import their client list, start taking bookings and only get round to appointment history a few weeks later. Or they run both systems for a fortnight and need the stragglers. Doing it safely: 1. Export fresh from your old system rather than reusing the file from last time 2. Import with the duplicate rule set to Update 3. Check the counts, where created is genuinely new people and updated is gaps filled 4. Spot-check a customer you have edited by hand since the first import Update rather than Replace: This is the one place the difference really bites. Update fills empty fields and leaves everything else alone, so a phone number you corrected last week survives. Replace would overwrite it with whatever the old system still holds. Overlapping appointment history: Appointments are matched on customer, service and start time together, so importing a date range you have already imported does not duplicate the diary. Running two systems at once: Pick one as the master for new bookings from day one, otherwise you will be reconciling two diaries. Most people switch new bookings to Youzse immediately and leave the old system read-only. Common questions: Will importing again duplicate my customers? Not with Skip or Update. Matching is on email, then phone, then close name matches, and only Flag for review deliberately lets both through. Can I import a date range I have already imported? Yes. Overlapping appointments are matched and not duplicated. Should I keep my old subscription running? Keep it until you have checked your data and taken bookings on Youzse for a week or two. Export everything you might want before you cancel, because access usually ends with the subscription. --- ## Importing your invoices Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/importing-your-invoices Category: Importing your data Youzse imports invoice records with their number, issue date, due date, customer, subtotal, tax, total, amount outstanding and payment status. Individual payment transactions are not imported, only the resulting status. Import customers first: An invoice row names a customer. Import your customers, and your companies if you invoice businesses, before the invoices themselves, so each invoice attaches to the right record. What the importer reads: - Invoice number, so your numbering carries on rather than restarting - Issue date and due date - Customer name, matched against the customers you have already imported - Subtotal, tax and total - Amount outstanding, which is what makes an invoice show as part paid - Status How statuses map: Paid stays paid. Past due and overdue become overdue. Open, unpaid and pending become sent. Void and cancelled become void. Draft stays draft. That mapping is why an accounting export lands sensibly without you recoding it. Line items: Most accounting exports give one row per invoice rather than one row per line. That imports as an invoice with its totals, which is right for historical records you are keeping for reference. Invoices you raise in Youzse from now on have full line items. Keeping your numbering: Check the highest invoice number that came across, then set your next number under Settings, then Document Defaults, so you do not reuse one. Common questions: Will importing invoices affect my VAT return? Imported historical invoices sit in your records. Check the VAT area before filing, and speak to your accountant about how the changeover period is treated. Can I import invoices without importing customers? You can, but the invoice will not attach to a customer record. Import customers first. Do imported invoices get sent to customers? No. Importing is silent. Nothing is emailed to anyone. --- ## Importing quotes and leads Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/importing-quotes-and-leads Category: Importing your data Quotes and leads are two of the nine record types the importer handles, so work you have not won yet comes across rather than being retyped. Import customers first: Both attach to a customer. Import your customer list before either, so a lead about an existing client lands on that client rather than creating a second record. Leads: A lead is an enquiry you have not converted yet. Export whatever your old system calls them, prospects, enquiries or opportunities, and name the file leads.csv so the record type is recognised. Map name, email, phone and any source or notes column. Quotes: A quote is a priced proposal. Export your open quotes at least. Won and lost history is useful for reporting but is not urgent, and many businesses import only what is still live. What not to bother with: Quotes that expired two years ago and leads that never replied are not worth moving. A migration is a good moment to leave dead weight behind. After importing: Open Leads to see your pipeline and check the stages look right. Open Quotes and check totals. Anything still live can be sent from Youzse from now on. Common questions: Will importing a lead email anyone? No. Importing never sends anything. Quotes and leads arrive silently. Can I import quotes with their line items? Most exports give one row per quote with a total, which is what imports. Quotes you build in Youzse from now on have full line items. What if my old system had no leads feature? Then you have nothing to import. Start using Leads from now on, and enquiries from your public page land there automatically. --- ## Importing staff and services Source: https://youzse.app/help/importing-your-data/importing-staff-and-services Category: Importing your data Staff and services are the two imports to run first, because appointments name both. Staff import with names, emails, phone numbers and job titles and services with name, category, duration, price and description. Staff: Import a staff file and each person becomes a team member. Where the file has an email address they are invited to set their own password. No login or password is ever imported from another system, which is deliberate. After importing staff, open Staff and set working hours for each person, because those do not come from a CSV. Services: A service needs a name, and is far more useful with a duration and a price. Category is worth mapping if you have one, since it groups your booking page. Check durations after import. Some platforms export a duration in hours rather than minutes, and a ninety minute treatment that arrives as one and a half minutes is obvious on the calendar but easy to miss in a list. Which staff do which services: That relationship is not in most exports. Open Services after importing and set who can do what, which is also what makes the right people appear on your booking page. Rolling back a staff import: If a staff import was wrong, rolling it back removes the accounts and memberships it created, so you are not left with logins for people who should not have them. Common questions: Do imported staff get an email straight away? They are invited to set a password where the import included an email address. If you would rather do it later, import staff without the email column and add addresses when you are ready. Are working hours imported? No. Set them under Staff after importing. It is a few minutes per person and worth doing properly. My service durations look wrong. What happened? Your export probably used hours rather than minutes. Fix the column in the spreadsheet and import again with the duplicate rule set to Replace. --- ## How online booking works Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/how-online-booking-works Category: Bookings & calendar Your public booking page lets customers book you around the clock without a single phone call. Here is how it works from their side and yours. What the customer does: 1. Choose a service They open your booking page and pick the service they want. Each service shows its length and price so there are no surprises. 2. Pick a team member If you have a team they can choose who they would like, or leave it to you to assign. 3. Choose a time Youzse shows only the slots that are genuinely free, based on your opening hours, breaks, existing bookings and any time off. Nothing that clashes can be picked. 4. Confirm their details New customers add their name and contact details and give marketing consent. Returning customers are recognised so they can rebook in seconds. 5. Pay any deposit If you ask for a deposit, they pay it or save a card during this step before the booking is held. What happens next: New online bookings arrive as Pending so you stay in control. You confirm them from your calendar or the bookings list, and the customer is told the moment you do. If you take the booking yourself while signed in, it is confirmed straight away. The true win: every new client who finds you and books through Youzse comes with 0% commission. The customer is yours to keep. Common questions: Do I have to approve each booking? That depends on your booking rules. Instant booking puts it straight in the diary, which is what most businesses use. What does the customer get? A confirmation with the date, time and where to come and usually a reminder before the appointment. Can I stop online booking for one service? Yes. Set that service not to show publicly and it can only be booked by you. --- ## Adding a booking yourself Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/adding-a-booking-yourself Category: Bookings & calendar Plenty of bookings still come in by phone or in person. Adding them yourself takes seconds and keeps your diary complete. To add a booking: 1. Open your calendar Tap a free slot in the calendar, or use the New booking button. 2. Find the customer Search for an existing customer by name, email or phone. If they are new, add them on the spot with a few quick details. 3. Choose the service and team member Pick the service, then the team member who will carry it out. The length fills in automatically from the service. 4. Set the date and time Confirm when the booking should start. Youzse will warn you if the slot falls outside working hours or clashes with another booking. 5. Save Save the booking and it appears on the calendar straight away. Good to know: - Bookings you add while signed in are confirmed immediately, so the customer gets a confirmation rather than a pending notice. - You can add a note for anything the team should know before the appointment. - For automotive jobs you can attach the customer's vehicle to the booking. If you would rather the customer paid a deposit first, set that up in your booking rules and it will apply to new online bookings. Common questions: Can I book outside my working hours? Yes. Adding a booking yourself is not restricted by the hours that govern online booking. Does the customer get a confirmation? Yes, provided they have contact details on their record and confirmations are switched on. Can I add a customer as I go? Yes. You do not need to create the customer first, the record is made while you take the booking. --- ## Your calendar and diary views Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/your-calendar-and-diary-views Category: Bookings & calendar Your calendar is the heart of your day. It shows every booking, who it is with and what stage it has reached, all in one place. Choosing a view: Use the view switcher at the top of the calendar to change how much you see at once. - Day: one day in detail, ideal for working through a busy schedule. - 3 day: a rolling few days for a fuller picture. - Week: your working week side by side. - Month: the big picture for spotting quiet and busy spells. - List: a simple agenda on mobile, perfect on the go. Youzse remembers the view you used last, so it opens the way you like it. Reading your diary: Each booking shows the customer, service and team member. Booking colours and labels help you see at a glance what is confirmed, in progress or completed. If you have a team, you can filter the calendar to one person or see everyone together. Use the date controls to jump forward and back, or return to today with a single tap. Taking action: Tap any booking to open it. From there you can confirm it, reschedule, mark it complete, cancel it or record a no-show. Tap an empty slot to add a new booking right where you tapped. Public holidays show on the calendar too, so you can plan your opening hours around them. Common questions: Which view should I use day to day? Day for working the diary, week for planning, month for spotting how full you are. Can I see only one staff member? Yes, filter the calendar to the person you want. Useful in a busy team where the full diary is hard to read. Do classes show on the calendar? Yes, alongside appointments, so the whole day is in one place. --- ## Setting availability, breaks and time off Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/setting-availability-breaks-time-off Category: Bookings & calendar Your availability decides which slots customers can book online. Set it once and Youzse keeps your booking page honest, so no one books a time you cannot work. Setting working hours: Each team member has their own weekly pattern. For every day of the week you set whether they are working and their start and finish times. Days marked as not working show no slots at all. If a team member works across more than one location, you set their hours per location so each diary stays accurate. Adding a break: You can add a daily break, such as lunch, to each working day. Online slots will skip the break window automatically, and you will be warned if you try to book over it by hand. Booking time off: For holidays, training or the odd day away, add time off for the dates concerned. Those days stop offering slots while the time off is in place. Depending on your team setup, time off may go to a manager for approval before it takes effect. Why it matters: - Customers only ever see times you can genuinely work. - Your team's diaries stay realistic, which cuts down on clashes. - Existing bookings are never moved automatically. If time off lands on a day with bookings, you will still see them so you can reschedule or get in touch. Keep your hours up to date and your booking page does the gatekeeping for you. Common questions: Does blocking time cancel bookings already made? No. It stops new bookings. Check the dates and move anything already in the diary yourself. How do I close the whole business for a day? Settings, then Business Holidays. That closes the day for everybody rather than one person. Should I put lunch in as a break? Yes, as part of the working pattern, so it is protected automatically rather than relying on memory. --- ## Deposits and no-show protection Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/deposits-and-no-show-protection Category: Bookings & calendar Deposits and no-show protection help you guard your most valuable asset, your time. You set the rules and Youzse applies them. Taking a deposit: In your booking rules you can ask for a deposit on bookings. Choose a fixed amount or a percentage of the service price. When deposits are switched on, the customer pays the deposit or saves a card during booking before the slot is held. A deposit is taken up front. The rest is only ever invoiced when the work is done, never charged in full at the point of booking. That keeps it fair for the customer and clean for your books. Protecting against no-shows and late cancellations: You can set a cancellation window in hours. Cancellations inside that window count as late. You can also set: - A no-show fee for customers who simply do not turn up. - A late cancellation fee for cancellations inside your window. When a customer has a card saved from booking, you can charge the no-show or late cancellation fee against it from the booking screen. Every charge is recorded so you have a clear trail. Setting it up: 1. Open your booking rules. 2. Turn on deposits and choose a fixed amount or percentage. 3. Set your cancellation window and any no-show or late cancellation fees. 4. Save. The rules apply to new bookings from then on. Used gently, deposits cut no-shows without putting customers off booking. Common questions: Do deposits actually reduce no-shows? Substantially. A booking somebody has paid towards is one they turn up for or tell you about in advance. What do I need before I can take a deposit? Online payments connected, under Settings, then Online Payments. Is a deposit refundable? That is your policy to set. Whatever you choose, state it clearly at the point of booking. --- ## Rescheduling and cancellations Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/rescheduling-and-cancellations Category: Bookings & calendar Plans change. Youzse makes it easy to move or cancel a booking and keeps everyone in the loop automatically. Rescheduling a booking: 1. Open the booking from your calendar or bookings list. 2. Choose Reschedule. 3. Pick a new time from the slots that are free. 4. Save. The customer is told about the new time straight away. The old slot is released the moment you reschedule, so it can be booked by someone else. Cancelling a booking: Open the booking and choose Cancel. The slot frees up and the customer receives a cancellation notice. If a no-show or late cancellation fee applies under your booking rules, you can deal with that from the booking screen. Letting customers manage their own: You can allow customers to reschedule or cancel their own bookings, which saves you the back and forth. In your booking rules you can set: - Whether rescheduling is allowed at all. - A reschedule window, so changes are only allowed up to a certain number of hours before the appointment. - A limit on how many times a single booking can be moved. Customers manage their booking from the secure link in their confirmation, or from their account. Anything inside your window is blocked, so last-minute chaos stays under control. Every change is recorded against the booking, giving you a clear history of who moved what and when. Common questions: Can customers reschedule themselves? Where you allow it. Self-service saves you phone calls and gets you more notice. Does a cancellation free the slot straight away? Yes, and it becomes bookable again. Check your waitlist, because somebody may be waiting for it. Is the customer told automatically? That depends on your notification settings. For a same-day change, contact them directly as well. --- ## Recurring and blocked time Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/recurring-and-blocked-time Category: Bookings & calendar Some customers come back like clockwork, and some of your time should never be booked at all. Youzse handles both. Recurring bookings: For regulars, set up a recurring series so the same booking repeats automatically. When you create the series you choose how often it repeats: - Weekly - Fortnightly - Monthly - Custom, where you set the exact number of days between bookings. Youzse creates the run of appointments for you and adds them to the calendar. The customer is told when their recurring series is set up. If plans change you can cancel the upcoming bookings in the series without touching ones already completed. Blocking out time: To keep time free for admin, deliveries or a personal commitment, block it out so it cannot be booked online or by mistake. - For one-off or longer blocks, add time off for the dates or part-days concerned. - For a regular gap such as lunch, add a daily break to your working hours so it is skipped every day automatically. Blocked time and time off behave like a wall to the booking page, no slots are offered across them, while your existing bookings stay exactly where they are. Keeping repeat work on a schedule and protecting the gaps you need means your diary works the way your business actually runs. Common questions: Can I change one occurrence of a repeating booking? Yes. A single occurrence can be moved without affecting the rest of the series. What should I use blocked time for? Anything that is not a customer booking but still uses the slot, like admin, deliveries or training. How far ahead should a repeating booking run? Far enough to hold the slot and not so far that it becomes a chore to unpick. Six months suits most. --- ## Waitlists Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/waitlists Category: Bookings & calendar A full diary is a good problem, but it should never mean turning customers away. Waitlists capture the demand and help you fill gaps the moment they appear. How it works: When you have no free slots, a customer can join your waitlist instead of giving up. They can ask for a specific slot or simply tell you the dates and times that suit them, along with the service and the team member they prefer. Filling a gap: When a booking is cancelled or rescheduled, that time opens up. Youzse can offer the freed slot to a waiting customer and let them know it is available. The offer is held for a window, giving them a fair chance to claim it before it passes to the next person or returns to general availability. If they take it, the slot becomes their booking. If the window passes without a claim, the slot stays open for anyone. Managing your waitlist: From the waitlist you can see who is waiting and what they are after. You can add a customer to the waitlist yourself, for instance when someone calls, and remove anyone who no longer needs a place. Why it is worth using: - You never lose a keen customer just because today is full. - Cancellations get filled quickly, so your time does not go to waste. - Customers feel looked after, because being full does not mean being shut out. Common questions: Does the waitlist fill cancellations automatically? It is how you reach people who wanted a slot. Check it as soon as a cancellation comes in. What should I record on a waitlist entry? Which days and times actually work for them, so you can match somebody to the slot that comes up. Is a waitlist worth it if I am rarely full? Yes, because it also tells you which times are in demand, which is useful when you set your hours. --- ## Reminders and confirmations Source: https://youzse.app/help/bookings-calendar/reminders-and-confirmations Category: Bookings & calendar Good communication is what makes customers turn up and come back. Youzse keeps them informed at every stage, automatically. Confirmations: When a booking is made, the customer is told. Online bookings arrive as pending and the customer gets their confirmation the moment you accept it. Bookings you take yourself while signed in are confirmed straight away. If anything changes, reschedules and cancellations send their own notices too. Reminders: Reminders nudge customers before their appointment so fewer slots are wasted. You decide the timing in your reminder schedule, for example a set number of hours or days before the booking. You can run more than one reminder, such as a gentle note a few days ahead and a final one the day before. Which channels are used: Youzse can reach customers by email, push notification, SMS and WhatsApp. To keep things simple and avoid surprise costs, email and push are on by default. SMS and WhatsApp stay switched off until you turn them on, so you choose when to use them. Setting it up: 1. Open your notification settings. 2. Set the timing for appointment reminders, adding more than one if you like. 3. Turn on SMS or WhatsApp if you want those channels as well. 4. Save. Your reminders apply to upcoming bookings. A timely reminder is one of the simplest ways to cut no-shows and show customers you are on top of things. Common questions: When should a reminder go out? Twenty-four hours ahead suits most businesses, because it gives somebody time to rearrange their day. Do reminders cost anything? Email and push are free. Text and WhatsApp messages carry a per-message cost. Can I change the wording? Yes, under Settings, then Email Templates. --- ## Managing customer records Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/managing-customer-records Category: Customers & CRM Every customer you serve gets a record in Youzse. It holds their contact details, booking history, invoices, notes and more, so anyone on your team can pick up where someone else left off. Adding a customer: You can create a record by hand from the Customers area, and one is also created automatically the first time someone books with you online. Capture as much or as little as you need to start. A name is enough, though an email or phone number lets you stay in touch later. What you can store: - Name, email, phone and full postal address - Date of birth and any VAT details - A source so you know where they came from: walk-in, online, referral, import or added manually - Tags to group and filter people - Free-text notes for anything else worth remembering Finding people: Use the search box at the top of the Customers list. It matches across name, email, phone, postcode, address and town, so a partial detail is usually enough. You can also filter by tag or by source, and sort by name, when they were added or when they last visited. Organising with tags: Tags are simple labels you create as you go, for example "regular", "new client" or "needs follow-up". Add up to ten per customer, then filter the list by one or more tags. Tags are the easiest way to build a working view of your customer base. Blocking and merging: If someone repeatedly causes problems you can block them with a reason, which stops new bookings. If the same person ends up with two records you can merge them so their history sits in one place. Common questions: How do I merge two records for the same person? Keep the one with the fuller history, move anything useful across, then remove the other. Can I delete a customer entirely? Erasure is more involved than a delete button, because some records must be kept for tax. See deleting customer data. How do customers get added? They are created when somebody books, when you add them yourself or when you import your existing list. --- ## Customer history and notes Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/customer-history-and-notes Category: Customers & CRM Open any customer record and you get their whole story with you in one place. It saves digging through emails or paper diaries and helps you give a more personal service. What the record shows: - Appointments, past and upcoming, with the service and team member - Invoices and quotes raised for them - Vehicles on file, for garages and similar trades - Leads and enquiries linked to them - Memberships and loyalty activity where you use those features - Lifetime value, so you can see what they have spent overall Adding notes: Notes are for anything worth remembering: a preference, an allergy, how they take their coffee or what was agreed last time. Add as many as you like. Each note records who wrote it and when, so the team always has context. Pinning the important ones: Pin a note to keep it at the top of the record. Use this for the things someone needs to see straight away, like a key preference or a standing instruction. Pinned notes stay put until you unpin them. The activity timeline: Each record keeps an activity log showing what has happened: when it was created or updated, when a note was added, when an email was sent and so on. It is a plain history of who did what, which is handy for keeping your team accountable and for answering customer queries. A note on privacy: Notes can hold sensitive information, so treat them with care. Only record what you genuinely need, keep it factual and remember the customer may ask to see the data you hold. Sensitive fields like notes are stored securely. Common questions: Who can see the notes I write? Anyone whose role gives them access to customer records, so write them as though the customer might read them. Should I record health information in a note? Health details are sensitive data with extra obligations. Use a form designed for it rather than a free-text note. Does history follow a customer between staff? Yes. The record holds everything, so whoever sees them next has the full picture. --- ## Leads and enquiries Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/leads-and-enquiries Category: Customers & CRM Not every customer is ready to book straight away. Youzse helps you capture early interest and work it through to a sale, so nothing slips through the cracks. Enquiries: An enquiry is an incoming message, for example from your contact form or booking page. New enquiries land in your inbox so you can see them at a glance, mark them as read and reply. Each enquiry keeps the conversation together with the person's name, email and phone. Turning an enquiry into action: Once you have spoken to someone you can convert an enquiry into a customer record, or into a lead if it needs chasing over time. Converting keeps the original details so you do not have to retype anything. Leads and your pipeline: A lead is a piece of potential work you are actively pursuing. Give it a title and an expected value, then move it through your pipeline stages as it progresses. You can assign a lead to a team member and set an expected close date, so everyone knows who is doing what and by when. Winning and losing: - Mark a lead as won when the work is confirmed - Mark it as lost if it does not come off, and record a reason so you can learn from it - Convert a won lead into a booking or invoice to carry the details across Why it matters: Tracking leads and enquiries means you follow up consistently rather than relying on memory. It is the difference between a busy week and a quiet one. Search across your leads by title or customer name to find anything quickly. Common questions: Where do enquiries from my page arrive? In Inbox, and they can be worked as leads from there. When should I convert a lead to a customer? When they book or buy. Converting earlier fills your customer list with people who never came back. Should I delete leads that went nowhere? Mark them lost instead. Somebody who was not ready in March is sometimes ready in September. --- ## Marketing consent and contacting customers Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/marketing-consent-and-contacting-customers Category: Customers & CRM Staying in touch keeps customers coming back, but it has to be done properly. Youzse keeps a clear line between messages a customer needs and marketing they have agreed to receive. Service messages versus marketing: Booking confirmations, reminders and similar messages are part of the service someone has asked for, so you can always send them. Marketing, like offers and newsletters, is different and needs consent. How consent is recorded: Each customer record has a marketing opt-in setting. When someone opts in, Youzse records the exact time their consent was given, so you have a clear record. Consent is never assumed. If you have not been told yes, treat the answer as no. Customers can also opt out at any time, and every marketing message includes an unsubscribe link that updates their record automatically. Sending a one-off message: From a customer record you can send a direct email or notification, for example to follow up after a visit. If a customer has asked you to restrict processing of their data, sending is blocked until that is lifted. Every message you send is logged against the record. Channels and defaults: Email and push notifications are switched on by default. SMS and WhatsApp are switched off until you choose to enable them for your business, because text channels carry a per-message cost and stricter rules. You stay in control of which channels you use. Good practice: - Only market to people who have opted in - Keep messages relevant and not too frequent - Honour opt-outs straight away, which Youzse does for you - Keep your customer details accurate so messages reach the right person Common questions: Can I market to customers who booked but never opted in? No. Holding a record because somebody booked is not consent to market to them. Are reminders affected by marketing consent? No. Confirmations and reminders are service messages about work the customer asked for. What happens to consent when I import customers? It comes across where your export includes it. Where it does not, imported customers arrive without consent. --- ## Reviews and your reputation Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/reviews-and-your-reputation Category: Customers & CRM Reviews build trust with new customers and tell you what is going well. Youzse collects them in a way that is tied to real appointments, so the feedback you gather is genuine. How reviews are collected: After an appointment a review request can be sent to the customer with a secure link. They leave a star rating and an optional comment. Because each request is linked to a real booking, you can be confident the reviews come from people you have actually served. Replying to feedback: You can reply to a review from the Reviews area. A thoughtful reply to a happy customer shows you care, and a calm, professional response to a less glowing one shows future customers how you handle things. Permissions decide who on your team can reply, and whether they can reply to all reviews or only their own. Ratings on your booking page: Reviews can feed into your overall business rating and appear on your public booking page, which helps win new bookings. You can control visibility, including how reviews for different types of team members are treated and whether they show on the booking page. This keeps your public rating fair and representative. Your overall rating: Youzse summarises your reviews into stats so you can track how you are doing over time. Watch the trend rather than any single review, and use the detail to spot what to improve. Making the most of reviews: - Send a request soon after the appointment while it is fresh - Reply to as many reviews as you can, good and bad - Use recurring themes to guide training and small improvements - Never offer incentives in exchange for a positive review Common questions: Should I reply to bad reviews? Yes, calmly and briefly. Your reply is read by everyone deciding whether to book, not just the reviewer. Can I only ask happy customers? You should not. Filtering breaches most platform rules and produces a rating nobody believes. Can I bring reviews from another platform? Yes, through the review import. See bringing your reviews across. --- ## Memberships and loyalty Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/memberships-and-loyalty Category: Customers & CRM Repeat customers are the backbone of a service business. Youzse gives you two ways to encourage them to come back: paid memberships and a loyalty programme. Memberships: A membership is a recurring paid plan a customer subscribes to, for example a monthly plan that includes certain services or a discount. You create plans with a name, price and billing interval, set the benefits and choose whether to cap the number of members. Customers are billed automatically on each renewal. Managing a membership: Once someone is subscribed you can pause, resume or cancel their membership as their needs change. Each membership shows its status and current billing period on the customer record, so you always know who is active. Setting benefits: Benefits are flexible. A plan might include specific services, an unlimited allowance or a member discount that applies at checkout. Choose what fits how you work and what gives members real value. Loyalty: The loyalty programme rewards customers for spending or visiting. You can run it in one of three modes: - Points: earn points per pound spent and redeem them against rewards - Stamps: collect a stamp per visit, with a reward once they reach the target - Cashback: earn a percentage of spend back as credit Rewards and extras: Define the rewards customers can redeem, and optionally add a welcome bonus for joining or a referral bonus. You can also set points to expire after a period if you wish. A customer's balance and history sit on their record, and you can adjust it by hand when needed. Choosing your approach: Memberships suit predictable, recurring revenue. Loyalty suits encouraging more frequent visits. Many businesses run both. Start simple and adjust as you see what your customers respond to. Common questions: What is the difference between the two? A membership is a recurring payment for ongoing benefits. Loyalty rewards spend or visits you have already had. Can I run both? Yes, and they work well together. A membership secures the revenue, loyalty rewards the regulars. Do balances transfer from another platform? No. Loyalty balances and package credits do not transfer, so credit long-standing customers by hand. --- ## Letting customers manage their own bookings Source: https://youzse.app/help/customers-crm/customer-self-service Category: Customers & CRM The less time you spend on the phone rearranging appointments, the more time you have for the work itself. Youzse lets customers handle the routine bits themselves. Managing a booking from an email link: Every booking confirmation includes a secure link to manage that appointment. Without signing in, a customer can view the details and cancel if they need to. Cancellations respect the free window you set, so someone cannot cancel at the last minute outside your rules. The customer account: Customers who create a Youzse account get a portal across all the businesses they book with. From there they can: - See upcoming and past bookings, plus cancelled ones - Reschedule a booking to a new available slot - Cancel a booking within your rules - Update their own profile and contact details - Manage saved cards for faster checkout - View loyalty points and gift cards Rescheduling: When a customer reschedules, Youzse only offers slots that are genuinely free, using the same availability rules as your own booking page. That means self-service never creates a clash in your diary. Privacy controls: The portal also gives customers their own privacy tools. They can update their marketing preferences, download a copy of the data you hold and request to close their account. This helps you meet your data protection duties without extra admin. Why offer it: Self-service reduces no-shows and missed calls, and customers like the convenience of sorting things in their own time. Your diary stays accurate because every change flows straight back into Youzse. Common questions: Does self-service mean losing control of my diary? No. Customers can only do what your booking rules allow, within the notice period you set. What can a customer do themselves? View their bookings, reschedule or cancel where you allow it, pay invoices and update their own details. Does it reduce phone calls? Noticeably, and it gets you more notice on cancellations because changing a booking is easier than ringing. --- ## Setting up payments Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/setting-up-payments Category: Payments & invoicing Before you can take card payments, deposits or online bookings, you need to connect your account to Stripe. Youzse uses Stripe to process every card payment securely, so your card details and your customers' never touch your own systems. What you will need: - Your business or personal bank details for payouts - A way to verify your identity (passport, driving licence or similar) - Your business address and, if you have one, your company number How to connect: 1. Go to Settings then Payments. 2. Select Connect payments and follow the on-screen steps. 3. Enter your business details, bank account and identity documents when prompted. 4. Return to Youzse. Once Stripe confirms your details, Payments enabled appears on the page. Verification can take a few minutes, occasionally longer if Stripe needs to review a document. You can keep using the rest of Youzse while you wait. Once you are connected you can: - Take card payments in person and online - Ask for deposits at the point of booking - Send invoices and payment links - Get paid out to your bank on a schedule that suits you If Stripe asks for more information later, you will see a prompt on the Payments page telling you exactly what is outstanding. Keeping your details up to date means your payouts are never held up. Common questions: What do I need to connect payments? Your business details and bank account. Verification is part of the process and is required before payouts run. Can I take bookings before payments are set up? Yes. Connect payments when you are ready and carry on being paid however you do now. Why are my payouts on hold? Usually because account verification is outstanding. Check Settings, then Online Payments. --- ## Taking deposits Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/taking-deposits Category: Payments & invoicing A deposit takes part of the price up front when a customer books, then the rest is settled when the job is done. It protects your diary against no-shows and gives customers a reason to turn up. How deposits work on Youzse: A deposit is taken up front, at the point of booking. The full balance is only invoiced once the appointment is complete. Youzse never asks a customer to pay the whole amount in advance through a booking link. Setting a deposit on a service: 1. Go to the service you want to charge a deposit on. 2. Choose a deposit type: a fixed amount, or a percentage of the price. 3. Save. From now on, that deposit is requested whenever the service is booked. Taking a deposit on a single booking: When you create a booking you can set or override the deposit for that one appointment. A deposit can never be more than the customer owes. You can collect a deposit by: - Charging a card saved on the customer's file - Sending the customer a payment link to pay online - Recording a deposit you have taken by cash or another method When the appointment is finished and you raise the invoice, any deposit already paid is credited automatically, so the customer is only billed the balance. If a customer does not show up, you can keep an unforfeited deposit against the booking rather than chasing the full amount. Common questions: How much should a deposit be? Enough to represent a real commitment. A quarter to a third of the price is common. Do I need online payments for deposits? Yes. Connect them first under Settings, then Online Payments. What if a customer cancels in good time? Follow the policy you set and stated at booking. Returning it for genuine notice keeps customers. --- ## Taking payment in person Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/taking-payment-in-person Category: Payments & invoicing You can take contactless card payments using nothing but the phone in your hand, with Tap to Pay on iPhone. There is no separate card reader to buy, charge or lose, and no extra hardware to set up. What you need: - A connected Stripe account (see Setting up payments) - A supported iPhone with the Youzse app - A contactless card, Apple Pay or another contactless wallet from the customer Taking a payment at checkout: 1. Open the booking and go to Checkout when the job is done. 2. Enter or confirm the amount due. Any deposit already paid is shown and deducted. 3. Choose to take the payment by card in person. 4. Hold the customer's contactless card or phone near the top of your iPhone and wait for confirmation. 5. The payment lands against the booking and the customer's record, and a receipt is sent automatically. Other ways to take payment in person: - Card on file: charge a card the customer has already saved - Cash: record the amount taken so your takings stay accurate - Payment link: send a link for the customer to pay on their own phone Every payment you take is tied to the right customer and booking, so your day's takings and reports always add up. You can see the running total for the day on the Payments screen. Common questions: Do I need a card reader? Not with Tap to Pay on iPhone, which takes contactless payments on the phone itself. Where does the payment show? Against the booking and in your payment history, the same as any other payment. Is it as secure as a terminal? Card details are handled by the payment provider rather than stored by you, exactly as with an online payment. --- ## Sending invoices Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/sending-invoices Category: Payments & invoicing An invoice is the bill you send a customer for work you have done. On Youzse you raise the invoice once the job is complete, then send it for payment and track it through to paid. Creating an invoice: 1. Go to Invoices then create a new invoice, or raise one straight from a completed booking. 2. Choose the customer. Their company details are carried through automatically for business customers. 3. Add line items with a description, quantity and price. VAT is worked out per line based on your settings. 4. Check the totals, then save. Raising an invoice from a booking pulls in the service and price for you, and credits any deposit already taken so the customer is only billed the balance. Sending it: Select Send to email the invoice to the customer. The invoice needs a customer with an email address, at least one line item and a total above zero. Once sent, its status moves to sent, then to viewed when the customer opens it. Getting paid: - The customer can pay online through the link on the invoice - You can record a payment taken by cash, card or bank transfer - Part payments are supported, with the status showing part paid until the balance clears You can set default payment terms and a due date in your settings so every invoice carries them automatically. If you need to cancel an unpaid invoice, void it. You can duplicate an invoice to reuse its details, or restore one that was voided in error. Common questions: When should I invoice? On completion for work whose final figure can move. Take a deposit up front to protect the slot. Can a customer pay from the invoice? Yes. The invoice carries a payment link, so they can settle it without ringing you. How do I keep my invoice numbering? Set your next number under Settings, then Document Defaults, particularly after importing history. --- ## Creating quotes Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/creating-quotes Category: Payments & invoicing A quote is a priced proposal you send before any work begins. The customer can accept or decline it, and once accepted you can turn it straight into a booking or an invoice. Creating a quote: 1. Go to Quotes then create a new quote. 2. Choose the customer. Company details are carried through automatically for business customers. 3. Add line items with a description, quantity and price. VAT is worked out per line from your settings. 4. Set how long the quote is valid for, then save. You can set a default validity period in your settings so every quote carries an expiry date without extra work. Sending it: Select Send to email the quote to the customer. The quote needs a customer with an email address, at least one line item and a total above zero. Its status moves to sent, then to viewed once the customer opens it. If you revise the items on a quote you have already sent, the customer is told it has changed. When the customer responds: - Accepted quotes can be converted into a booking, with a date and staff member - Accepted quotes can also be converted into a draft invoice that matches the quote line for line - Declined quotes record the reason, and you can reopen one if the customer changes their mind You can duplicate a quote to reuse its details for a similar job. A quote can only be converted once, so you always have a clear trail from quote to job to invoice. Common questions: Can a customer accept a quote themselves? Yes, from the link in the email, and the status updates automatically. Can a quote become a booking? Yes. An accepted quote converts into an invoice or into an appointment, carrying its lines across. I deleted a quote by mistake. Is it gone? No. Open Quotes and switch to the trashed view to restore it. --- ## Issuing refunds Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/issuing-refunds Category: Payments & invoicing If you need to give a customer their money back, you can refund a card payment directly from Youzse. The refund goes back to the card the customer originally paid with. How to issue a refund: 1. Find the payment you want to refund, on the customer's record or against the invoice or booking. 2. Select Refund. 3. Enter the amount. You can refund the whole payment or just part of it. 4. Add a reason, then confirm. The customer is notified automatically once the refund is processed. Refunds usually take a few working days to appear on the customer's statement, depending on their bank. Good to know: - You can never refund more than the remaining amount of a payment. Part refunds reduce what is left to refund. - When you refund a payment in full, Youzse reverses the card-processing fee and the Youzse fee on that transaction, so a fully refunded sale does not leave you out of pocket on fees. - Refunds against a VAT invoice carry the right proportion of VAT, so your figures stay correct. If a refund cannot be completed, for example because the connected account does not have the funds available, you will see an error and the customer is told the refund did not go through. Make sure your balance or payout timing allows for refunds you expect to make. Common questions: How long does a refund take to reach the customer? A few working days, decided by their bank rather than by you. Can I refund part of a payment? Yes, in full or in part. Do I get the card fee back? Processing fees are not usually returned on a refund. Factor that in before refunding as a goodwill gesture. --- ## VAT settings Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/vat-settings Category: Payments & invoicing Your VAT settings tell Youzse how to work out and show tax on your quotes and invoices. Get them right once and every document you raise follows them automatically. Telling Youzse you are VAT registered: 1. Go to your VAT or tax settings. 2. Turn on VAT registered and enter your VAT number. 3. Choose your VAT scheme, such as standard or flat rate. 4. Set whether you enter prices with VAT included or excluded by default. If you are not VAT registered, leave this turned off. Youzse then raises documents with no VAT charged, so you never accidentally bill tax you should not. How VAT is applied: - VAT is worked out per line item, using the rate set against each service - The usual UK rates are supported: standard, reduced, zero and exempt - A customer marked as VAT exempt has VAT removed from their documents - The breakdown on a document shows the net, VAT and gross for each rate used When you send a quote or invoice, Youzse records your VAT status, number, scheme and rate as they stood at that moment. That snapshot stays with the document, so a later change to your settings never rewrites tax on something you have already issued. Your VAT views are kept deliberately plain and sober, with the figures laid out clearly so they are easy to check against your records and your VAT return. Only invoices in pounds appear on your UK VAT figures. Common questions: I am not VAT registered. Do I need this? No. Leave it until you register. When should I set VAT up? Before you send your first invoice. Correcting VAT on invoices already issued is a real nuisance. Does Youzse file my return? No. It gives you the figures from your invoices. Filing is with HMRC. --- ## Payouts and getting your money Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/payouts-and-getting-your-money Category: Payments & invoicing A payout is money moving from your Youzse payments balance into your own bank account. Once you are set up, payouts happen automatically on a schedule you control. Where to look: Go to Settings then Payments, or Payouts, to see: - Your available balance, ready to be paid out - Your pending balance, still clearing from recent payments - A list of recent payouts with the amount and the date they arrive - A breakdown of transactions, including fees, so you can see net amounts Choosing your payout schedule: 1. Open your payout schedule settings. 2. Choose daily, weekly or monthly. 3. For weekly, pick the day. For monthly, pick the date. 4. Save. Your next payouts follow the new schedule. Card payments take a couple of working days to clear before they become available to pay out. This is normal and protects against payments that fail or are reversed. Good to know: - Payouts go to the bank account you set up when connecting payments. Keep it current to avoid delays. - Each payout and transaction is listed so you can reconcile against your bank statement. - If a payout is held, it is usually because Stripe needs more information. Check the Payments page for any prompt telling you what is outstanding. If you ever change banks, update your details in your payment settings before your next payout is due. Common questions: Why is my payout less than my takings? Card processing fees, and the timing of when payments settled. Open the payout to see what it covers. How often am I paid out? On the schedule set in your payment settings. There is always a short delay after the customer pays. My payouts have stopped. What now? Check for outstanding verification under Settings, then Online Payments. That is the usual cause. --- ## Understanding Youzse fees Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/understanding-youzse-fees Category: Payments & invoicing It helps to know exactly what comes off a payment before it reaches your bank. Youzse keeps this simple and shows it plainly. Card processing: When a customer pays by card, a processing fee applies to that transaction. The standard UK rate is 2.5% + 35p per transaction. This covers both the card processing and Youzse handling the payment, with no reader to hire and no monthly terminal fee. Cards issued outside the UK can carry a higher rate, as international and premium cards cost more to process. You can see your real, rolling effective rate in your payment settings, so you always know what you are actually paying across recent payments. Commission on new clients: This is where Youzse is different. You pay 0% commission on new clients you win through Youzse. When the platform sends you a customer you would not otherwise have had, you do not pay a slice of that booking as commission. You keep the value of the relationship and every repeat visit that follows. Other charges to be aware of: - A small fee may apply per payout to your bank - If a customer raises a chargeback or dispute, a dispute fee applies, as it does with any card processor - Faster, instant payouts, where available, carry a small percentage fee on top of the standard payout What this means for you: - Standard UK card payments cost 2.5% + 35p each - New clients won through Youzse carry 0% commission - Every fee is itemised in your transactions so nothing is hidden If you want to check the exact rates that apply to your account, your payment settings always show the current figures. Common questions: What is the 0% commission on new clients? When somebody finds you through Youzse and books, you pay no commission on that booking. What do card payments cost? A processing rate per transaction, which is separate from your subscription. See your pricing details for the current rate. Are there fees on cash payments? No. Card processing applies to card payments. --- ## Prepaid messaging credit Source: https://youzse.app/help/payments-invoicing/prepaid-messaging-credit Category: Payments & invoicing SMS and WhatsApp messages are paid for from a prepaid credit balance on your account. You top up in advance, and the cost of each message is taken from your balance as it sends. Email and app notifications never cost anything and never touch your credit. If you cannot see Prepaid credit in your account yet, it is still being rolled out. Everything below applies once it is switched on for you. How it works: - You add credit to your balance using the card saved on your account - Each SMS or WhatsApp message is priced per send, and that amount comes off your balance at the moment it goes out - Every top-up and every send is recorded in your activity, so you can see exactly where each penny went - If your balance cannot cover a message, that message does not send. The customer still gets the email version, so nothing important is lost Topping up: 1. Go to Settings then Messaging. 2. Under Top up, enter an amount and select Top up now. 3. The amount is added to your balance straight away and charged to your saved card. The amount you enter is the credit that lands on your balance. If VAT applies, it is shown and added on top of your card charge, and a VAT receipt is available, so the full amount you top up is always available to spend on messages. Auto top-up: Rather than watching your balance, you can let Youzse top it up for you. Turn on Auto top-up, choose the balance it should trigger at and the amount to add each time. When a send takes your balance below your trigger, your card is charged and the credit added automatically. You will also get an alert whenever your balance runs low, so you are never caught out. Keeping control of spend: - Your balance, spend this period and a projection to month end are shown at the top of the Messaging page - The activity page lists every credit and debit, with filters for type, channel and date - You can also set a monthly budget cap, which blocks sends that would take your spend over the limit you choose You are always in charge: nothing sends unless you have paid for it up front, and nothing is charged to your card unless you top up or have auto top-up turned on. Common questions: What does credit pay for? SMS and WhatsApp messages. Email and app notifications are always free. What happens when I run out? Paid sends stop rather than failing silently, so you find out before your customers do. How do I keep the cost down? Use email for anything that is not urgent, and keep text messages for the day-before reminder. --- ## Your business profile and branding Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/business-profile-and-branding Category: Settings & your account Your business profile is what customers see on your public page and across the things you send them. Getting it right makes you look established and helps people choose you with confidence. You will find it under Settings then Business. You need the View settings and Edit settings permission to open it, which owners and managers have by default. What you can set: Business name: The name shown on your public page, invoices and notifications. Keep it the name customers know you by. Logo and cover image: Upload a square logo and a wider cover image. The logo appears alongside your name and the cover sits across the top of your public page, so choose something clear and on brand. Bio: A short, friendly description of what you do and who you are for. Write it the way you would talk to a customer. Contact details: Add your public phone number and email so people can reach you. Company details: If you are a registered company you can add your company number and registered office address. These keep your invoices tidy and compliant. Social and reviews: Link your Instagram and Facebook so customers can find you, and add your Google review link to point happy customers in the right direction. Gallery: Upload photos of your work, your space or your team. A strong gallery does a lot of the selling for you. Changes save against your business and update your public page straight away. If you do not see them, refresh the page. Common questions: Where does my logo appear? On your public page and on the documents and confirmations your customers receive. Can I change my business name later? Yes, under Settings, then Business Profile. It updates everywhere it is shown. Where do my address and hours live? Under Settings, then Locations, so a business with more than one site can set each separately. --- ## Your team and what they can access Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/team-roles-and-permissions Category: Settings & your account You can invite as many of your team as you need and decide exactly what each person can reach. This keeps sensitive things like billing and customer data in the right hands. Find your team under Settings then Team, and roles under Settings then Roles. Inviting someone: 1. Go to Settings then Team and send an invitation to their email. 2. Choose the role that fits what they do. 3. They accept the invite, set a password and they are in. You can resend or revoke an invitation at any time before it is accepted, and remove a team member later if they leave. The built-in roles: - Owner: Full access to all features and settings. - Manager: Access to most features except billing and GDPR. - Senior Staff: Customer management, team oversight and reports. No settings or billing. - Staff: Their own appointments, basic customer access and services. - Apprentice: View-only access to their own schedule and assigned appointments. Custom roles: If the built-in roles do not fit, create your own. Give it a name and tick exactly the permissions it should have, grouped by area such as Customers, Appointments, Invoices, Payments, Staff and Settings. Permissions you do not have on your plan or product line will not appear, so you only see what is relevant to your business. Built-in roles cannot be edited or deleted. If you delete a custom role, anyone using it falls back to their default permissions automatically. Changing someone's permissions takes effect the next time they act, so there is no need to ask them to log out. Common questions: Should everybody have their own login? Yes, always. A shared login means you cannot tell who did what, and one person leaving forces everybody to change their password. Can one person have two roles? Each person has one role. Where somebody does two jobs, create a role covering both. Why can a colleague not see a page? Their role does not include that permission, or the feature is not part of your plan. --- ## Notification settings Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/notification-settings Category: Settings & your account Youzse keeps your customers in the loop automatically, from booking confirmations to reminders. You decide which messages go out and on which channels. Find these under Settings then Notifications, with the channel grid under Notification channels. You need the Edit settings permission. The four channels: - Email: On by default and free to send. - Push: On by default for customers who have your app and have allowed notifications. - SMS: Off by default. Turn it on per message type when you want texts. - WhatsApp: Off by default. Turn it on per message type when you want WhatsApp messages. So out of the box only email and push fire. Nothing goes out by SMS or WhatsApp until you switch it on, which means no surprise costs. The channel grid: This is a simple grid of message types down the side and channels across the top. Tick a box to turn that channel on for that type, untick to turn it off. SMS and WhatsApp show the cost so you always know what a send will run to. Getting SMS and WhatsApp going: There is a guided messaging setup screen that walks you through switching these on for the first time. You can also set a monthly budget cap so spend never runs away from you. Templates and timing: You can personalise the wording of the messages you send and set when reminders go out, for example a day before an appointment. Personalisation tags drop in details like the customer's name and appointment time. Customers always control their own marketing consent, so promotional messages only ever reach people who have opted in. Common questions: Which channels are on by default? Email and push. SMS and WhatsApp stay off until you enable them, because they cost per message. Can customers opt out of reminders? They control their own notification preferences. Marketing consent is tracked separately. Where do I change the wording? Settings, then Email Templates. --- ## Two-factor authentication Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/two-factor-authentication Category: Settings & your account Two-factor authentication adds a second step when you log in, so even if someone learns your password they still cannot get in. We strongly recommend it for everyone, especially owners and anyone who can reach billing or customer data. You will find it under your account security settings. How it works: You use an authenticator app on your phone, such as Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator or Authy. The app shows a fresh six-digit code every thirty seconds, and you enter that code after your password when you log in. Setting it up: 1. Open your security settings and start two-factor setup. 2. Scan the QR code with your authenticator app, or type in the secret key by hand. 3. Enter the six-digit code from the app to confirm and finish. Recovery codes: When you set up, you are given a set of one-time recovery codes. Save these somewhere safe and offline, like a password manager. If you ever lose your phone, a recovery code lets you log in. Each one works once. You can regenerate a fresh set at any time by confirming a current code, which retires the old ones. If you get it wrong: To protect your account, too many wrong codes will lock it. If that happens, contact support to unlock it. Turning it off: You can disable two-factor by confirming your password. For your safety, doing so signs out your other sessions and removes any trusted devices, so everyone has to log in fresh. If a team member is locked out or has lost their device, an owner can reset their two-factor from the Team settings so they can set it up again. Common questions: What if I lose my phone? Use one of your recovery codes. Save them somewhere safe when you switch two-factor on, not afterwards. Do all my staff need it? Anyone with access to customer data or money should have it. It is the single most effective account protection available. I have no recovery codes and a new phone. What now? Contact support and expect to prove who you are, because the alternative would make two-factor pointless. --- ## Keeping your account secure Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/keeping-your-account-secure Category: Settings & your account Beyond two-factor, Youzse gives you a few more ways to keep your account safe. You will find these under your account security and sessions settings. Active sessions: This shows everywhere you are currently logged in, with the device, browser, rough location and when it was last active. Your current session is marked so you know which is which. If you spot something you do not recognise, you can: - Revoke a single session to sign that device out. - Sign out everywhere else in one go, keeping only your current session. Revoking a session logs that device out straight away and we send you a notification so you have a record of it. Trusted devices: When you log in with two-factor, you can choose to trust that device for thirty days so you are not asked for a code every time on your own phone or computer. Only do this on devices that are yours. You can revoke trust for one device or for all of them at once, which is the right move if a device is lost or shared. Password confirmation: For sensitive actions, like changing your password or managing payment methods, we ask you to confirm your password again first. This is a short-lived check that protects you if you step away from a logged-in screen. Just enter your password when prompted and carry on. Session timeout: For security your session has a maximum lifetime, so you will be asked to log in again after a long stretch. When your session is close to expiring you can extend it with one click, up to that maximum, rather than starting over. Good habits: Use a strong, unique password, turn on two-factor, only trust your own devices and sign out of anything you no longer use. Common questions: Why was I asked for my password again? Sensitive actions ask you to confirm, so somebody at an unattended screen cannot change them. What is a trusted device? A device you have marked as yours, so you are not challenged every time. Only do it on devices you control. Will Youzse ever ask for my password? No, and neither will support. Anybody who does is not who they claim to be. --- ## Your plan and billing Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/your-plan-and-billing Category: Settings & your account Everything to do with your subscription lives under Settings then Billing. Only people with the Manage billing permission can reach it, which by default is the owner. What you can do: See your plan: Your current plan and subscription status are shown at the top, so you always know where you stand. Change plan: Browse the available plans and switch up or down when your needs change. Moving to a bigger plan unlocks more features straight away. Payment methods: Add, remove or set a default card. For your security, adding or changing a card asks you to confirm your password first. Invoices: View your subscription invoice history and download any invoice as a PDF for your records or your accountant. Billing portal: For deeper subscription management you can open the secure billing portal, where card and subscription details are handled safely. A word on commission: Youzse charges your plan fee, and you keep 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse. Growing your business through Youzse never costs you a cut of the booking. Messaging spend: SMS and WhatsApp messages to customers carry a small per-message cost on top of your plan. You can review this messaging spend and set a monthly budget cap under the messaging billing settings, so costs stay predictable. Email and push notifications are included. If a payment fails: Keep a valid card on file so your subscription stays active. If a payment does not go through, add or update your card and we will try again. Common questions: Where do I see what my plan includes? Settings, then Subscription and Billing. It is also where a missing feature is usually explained. Can I change plan? Yes, from the same place. Your data is unaffected and gated features appear or disappear accordingly. Where are my billing invoices? Under Settings, then Billing invoices, where you can download them for your accounts. --- ## Customising your public page Source: https://youzse.app/help/settings-configuration/customising-your-public-page Category: Settings & your account Your public page is your shopfront on Youzse. It pulls in your profile, branding and services, and you choose how customers get in touch from it. The main control is under Settings then Appearance. You need the Edit settings permission. How customers reach you: You decide what happens when someone lands on your page by choosing a page mode: - Online Booking: Customers book a service and time themselves, there and then. Best if you want a self-serve diary. - Enquiry Form: Customers send you an enquiry instead of booking directly. Best if every job needs a quote or a quick chat first. - Booking and Enquiry: Offer both, so customers can book straightaway or get in touch when they would rather ask first. Some trades start with a sensible default for their type, and you can change it whenever you like. Shaping the rest of your page: - Profile and branding: Your logo, cover image, bio and gallery all come from your business profile, so keep that up to date. - Services: The services you publish are what customers can book or enquire about. Tidy names, durations and prices make the page easy to use. - Enquiry form: If you use enquiries, you can tailor the questions on your form so you gather what you need up front. Previewing: You can view your own public page at any time to see exactly what customers see. Make a change, refresh the public page and check it reads well on a phone, since that is where most customers will find you. Common questions: Can I take enquiries instead of bookings? Yes. Enable the enquiry form under Settings, then Appearance, and set its fields under Settings, then Enquiry Form. I changed something and the page looks the same. Why? Your browser is showing a stored copy. Check in a private window, and allow a few minutes for public pages. Can I have both booking and an enquiry form? Yes, and most businesses do. Booking for standard work, enquiries for anything needing a price first. --- ## How Youzse protects your data Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/how-youzse-protects-your-data Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR Your business runs on trust, and so does ours. Here is how Youzse looks after the information you and your customers put into the platform. Your data is kept separate: Each business on Youzse has its own walled-off space. Your customers, bookings and notes are never mixed with another business's data. Sensitive information is encrypted: Things like private notes are encrypted, so they are unreadable even to us at rest. Where a feature involves health information, every time it is opened is recorded. Access is controlled: You decide which of your team can see what, using roles and permissions. Sensitive actions ask for an extra confirmation, and you can see and end active sign-ins at any time. We are your processor: You own your customers' data. Youzse stores and processes it on your behalf, only ever on your instructions, under a Data Processing Agreement you accept when you join. Built to a high bar: Youzse is designed around UK data protection law from the ground up, with audit trails, retention controls and tools to handle data requests, so you can meet your own obligations with confidence. Common questions: Where is my data stored? On infrastructure under our control, with access restricted and logged. Your business data is separated from every other business. Can Youzse staff see my customer records? Access is controlled and audited, and support will ask before acting in your account rather than assuming. What should I do on my side? Give everyone their own login, use two-factor, and limit each role to what the job needs. --- ## You are the data controller Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/youre-the-data-controller Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR Under UK data protection law, your business is the data controller for your customers' information, and Youzse is your processor. It sounds formal, but the idea is simple. What it means: You decide what customer data you hold and why. We look after it for you and do only what you ask with it. The relationship is set out in the Data Processing Agreement you accept when you sign up. What stays with you: - Having a reason to hold each customer's data, usually because they have booked with you - Telling customers how their data is used, through your privacy notice - Keeping data accurate and only for as long as you need it - Handling requests from customers about their own data What Youzse handles for you: - Storing and securing the data - Keeping audit trails of what happens to it - Giving you the tools to answer data requests and to delete data properly Your privacy notice: Before your public page goes live, you set up your own privacy notice. Your booking page asks customers to confirm they have read it, which keeps everything transparent. Common questions: What does being the controller mean? You decide what customer data is collected and why. Youzse processes it on your instructions. Who answers a customer data request? You do. It is your relationship with the customer, and the tools to answer it are in your account. Do I need to register with the ICO? Most businesses handling personal data do. Check the ICO self-assessment, which takes a few minutes. --- ## Marketing consent and the law Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/marketing-consent-and-the-law Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR Marketing to your customers is fine, as long as you have the right permission. UK rules treat marketing messages differently from booking messages, so it is worth understanding the line. Booking messages are different: Confirmations, reminders and other messages about a booking the customer asked for do not need separate marketing consent. They are part of the service. Marketing messages need a basis: To send marketing emails or texts, you generally need the customer to have agreed, or to rely on the soft opt-in. The soft opt-in only applies when you collected the details yourself while selling to that person, you are marketing your own similar services, and every message gives an easy way to opt out. How Youzse helps: - Each customer record carries a marketing preference, and we never assume consent - Customers can unsubscribe from any marketing message, and we suppress them automatically - Anyone who has opted out will not receive marketing, even if they are in a list you send to When importing: Bring the marketing preference across from your old system so the right people stay opted in and everyone else stays out. Changing platforms does not create permission you did not have. Common questions: Is a booking enough to allow marketing? No. Booking is a service relationship. Marketing needs consent, tracked separately. How should I ask for consent? As its own question, saying what you will send and how often, with an easy way out. What happens when somebody unsubscribes? They are suppressed immediately and stay suppressed. Reversing that is deliberate and audit-logged. --- ## Responding to a data request Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/responding-to-a-data-request Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR Sometimes a customer will ask to see the information you hold about them. This is called a subject access request, and you have one calendar month to respond. What they are entitled to: A copy of the personal data you hold about them, in a format they can read and take with them. How Youzse helps: Youzse can gather everything held about a customer across your account and produce it for you as a clear report and a machine-readable file. You do not have to dig through the system by hand. How to handle one: 1. When a customer asks, record the request and note the date, as your month runs from then. 2. Use the data request tools in Youzse to produce their data. 3. Check it over and share it with the customer securely. A few things to know: - The deadline is one calendar month, so start promptly - If you are unsure a request is genuine, you can confirm the person's identity first - Keep a note of how you responded, in case you need to show it later If you are ever unsure how to handle a request, the Youzse team can point you in the right direction. Common questions: How long do I have? One month from the request. Start it the day it arrives rather than the week it is due. Can I charge for it? Not in normal circumstances. Requests are free. What do I actually send? The personal data you hold about them. An export of their record is the starting point. --- ## Deleting a customer the right way Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/deleting-customer-data Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR If a customer asks you to erase their data, or you simply no longer need it, deleting them properly matters. A plain delete is not always the right answer, because some records have to be kept. What proper erasure looks like: Youzse removes the personal details that identify someone, while keeping the things the law requires you to retain, such as financial records, in a form that no longer points to them. How Youzse handles it: 1. Personal details such as name, email and phone are removed or replaced. 2. Anything sensitive is rendered unreadable by destroying its key. 3. Audit trails are kept but stripped of personal identifiers, so you can still show what happened. 4. Invoices and payment records are kept for the period the law requires, with the personal details removed. 5. A record of the deletion is produced, so you have proof it was done. Why not just delete: You are required to keep certain financial records for several years for HMRC. Proper erasure honours the customer's request while keeping you compliant. When in doubt: Use the erasure tools rather than deleting records by hand, and reach out to the Youzse team if a case is tricky. Common questions: Can I just delete the customer? Not quite. Some records must be kept by law, particularly invoices for tax, so erasure is more careful than a delete button. What gets removed? Personal data that is no longer needed. Records with a legal retention obligation are kept to the minimum necessary. Does deletion stop marketing? Yes, and suppression is immediate regardless of whether anything else is deleted. --- ## Data retention explained Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/data-retention-explained Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR You should keep customer data only for as long as you genuinely need it. Holding on to everything forever is not allowed, and it is not good practice either. Sensible defaults, which you can adjust: - Customer contact details, around three years from their last appointment - Health or other sensitive notes, around one year from their last appointment - Appointment records, around seven years, as they tie into your finances - Invoices and payment records, seven years, which HMRC requires - Audit logs, around three years Why these periods: Financial records have to be kept for tax purposes. Contact details are kept long enough to welcome a returning customer, but not indefinitely. Sensitive data is kept for the shortest sensible time. How Youzse helps: Youzse keeps an eye on retention for you and flags records that have passed their period, so you are not holding data you should have let go. You can set your own periods to match how you work. A good habit: Review your retention settings now and then, and when you import, leave behind data you no longer need rather than carrying it over. Common questions: How long should I keep customer data? As long as you need it for the purpose, plus any legal obligation. Tax records have their own required period. Can I keep everything forever just in case? No. Keeping personal data with no purpose is exactly what retention rules exist to prevent. Does Youzse set sensible defaults? Yes, and they are there to be reviewed against how your business actually works. --- ## Reporting a data breach Source: https://youzse.app/help/trust-privacy-gdpr/reporting-a-data-breach Category: Trust, privacy & GDPR A data breach is any security incident that puts personal data at risk, such as data being lost, exposed or accessed by the wrong person. If one is likely to harm the people involved, it must be reported to the regulator within 72 hours. What counts: - A device or login falling into the wrong hands - Personal data sent to the wrong person - Data being accessed or taken without permission What to do straight away: 1. Contain it. Change passwords, end sessions and stop the data going any further. 2. Assess it. What data was involved, how many people and how serious is the risk. 3. If there is a real risk to people, report it to the ICO within 72 hours of becoming aware. 4. If the risk is high, tell the affected people too. How Youzse helps: You can raise an incident inside Youzse, and the platform helps you pull together what the regulator needs, with a report template populated from the details. Tools like two-factor sign-in, trusted devices and session controls help prevent incidents in the first place. If you think something has happened: Act quickly and get in touch with the Youzse team. Moving fast is what counts. Common questions: What counts as a breach? Personal data lost, exposed or accessed by somebody who should not have it. A misdirected email can qualify. How quickly must I report? Within 72 hours of becoming aware, where the breach is likely to be a risk to people. Who do I report to? The ICO, and the people affected where the risk to them is high. --- ## Youzse for salons and beauty Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-salons-and-beauty Category: Industry guides Youzse is built for salons and beauty professionals who live and die by the diary. Hairdressers, nail technicians, lash and brow specialists, beauty therapists and tanning salons all run on the same calendar-first setup, so your day is laid out at a glance. What it does for you: Online booking around the clock: Clients book their own appointments from your public page, choosing the service and the time that suits them. No more back and forth over messages. Deposits and no-show protection: Hold a card deposit when a client books so a missed slot does not cost you a full afternoon. You decide which services need one. Client records that remember: Keep colour notes, preferences and visit history against each client so the next appointment picks up where the last one left off. Loyalty and rewards: Reward your regulars with loyalty stamps and gift cards. The clients you already have come back more often. Getting set up: 1. Build your profile so clients know where you are and what you offer. 2. Add your services with realistic durations and prices. 3. Turn on deposits for the treatments that need protecting. 4. Share your booking link on Instagram and in your bio. You keep 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse, so growing your column never costs you a cut of the takings. Common questions: Can I take deposits on colour appointments? Yes, and it is worth it. Long appointments are the ones a no-show hurts most. Can each stylist have their own diary? Yes, with their own hours, services and profile, all inside the one business. Can I move my clients from Fresha or Booksy? Yes, and their column names are recognised automatically. See the import guides. --- ## Youzse for barbers Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-barbers Category: Industry guides Youzse keeps a barber shop moving. Whether you run one chair or a full team, the calendar shows the day ahead and lets clients book the barber they always ask for. What it does for you: Book your favourite barber: Clients pick the barber they want and the service they are after, so regulars keep their seat and new faces find a slot that fits. Walk-ins and appointments together: Manage booked chairs and walk-ins side by side. The diary stays honest even on a busy Saturday. Deposits stop the empty chair: Take a card deposit on the bookings that get missed most. A no-show no longer means lost money. Client history at a glance: See what each client had last time so you can pick up the conversation and the cut without missing a beat. Manage it from your phone: Youzse works on mobile, so you can check the next appointment between clients. Getting set up: 1. Set up your shop profile with your location and opening hours. 2. Add your cuts and trims with the right durations. 3. Add each barber so clients can choose who they want. 4. Turn on deposits and share your booking link. There is 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse. One simple subscription, and the chair stays yours. Common questions: Does it handle walk-ins as well as bookings? Yes. Add a walk-in yourself and it sits in the diary alongside online bookings. What stops no-shows? Reminders first, then deposits on the appointments where a gap really costs you. Is there commission on new clients? No. A new client who finds you through Youzse and books costs you 0% commission on that booking. --- ## Youzse for garages (Garage Pro) Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-garages Category: Industry guides Garage Pro is Youzse built for the motor trade. It runs the whole job, from the online booking to the payment, and it actually understands what an MOT is. Garages, MOT centres, mobile mechanics, tyre fitters and valeters all run on it. What it does for you: DVLA and MOT lookups: Type in the registration and Youzse pulls the make, model, colour, year, fuel type, MOT status and expiry and tax due date. The vehicle is attached to the job before it reaches the ramp. Live workshop board: Track every job across the floor through booked, checked in, in progress and completed. Assign a bay and your mechanics clock on and off automatically. Vehicle health checks: Build an electronic vehicle health check (EVHC) against a job so the customer sees exactly what needs doing and why. Online bookings and reminders: Customers book MOTs, services and repairs online, and automated MOT and service reminders bring them back when they are due. Quotes, parts and payment: Send a quote the customer approves from their phone, raise parts requests and purchase orders to your suppliers, then invoice with UK VAT and take card payment. Getting set up: 1. Set up your workshop profile, bays and opening hours. 2. Add your services, like MOT, full service and diagnostics. 3. Share your booking link so the diary fills around the clock. You keep 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse, on one monthly subscription that grows from a single bay to a multi-site centre. Common questions: Do I get MOT reminders? Yes, on Garage Pro, using the due date from the vehicle lookup rather than a spreadsheet you maintain. Can I look up a vehicle from the registration? Yes. Make, model, specification and MOT information come back automatically. Does it handle parts and suppliers? Yes, on Garage Pro, with a parts catalogue, part requests and purchase orders. --- ## Youzse for trades Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-trades Category: Industry guides Youzse speaks your language. For plumbers, electricians, builders, roofers and other trades, the work is organised as jobs rather than appointments, and the layout follows your pipeline from first enquiry to paid invoice. What it does for you: Capture the enquiry: Customers send you the job details from your public page, including the property address, how urgent it is and photos of what needs doing. Nothing gets lost in a missed call. Quote the work properly: Build professional quotes with itemised lines, then send them for the customer to approve. When they say yes, convert the quote to an invoice in one step. Schedule across sites: See your jobs on the calendar and keep track of who is where, even when you are running several sites at once. Get paid: Collect a deposit before work begins, then invoice with UK VAT and take card payment through a secure link. See at a glance what is paid and what is overdue. Keep customer records: Every customer carries their site addresses and job history, so a return visit takes seconds to set up. Getting set up: 1. Set up your business profile with your trade and service area. 2. Decide which work is bookable online and which is quote only. 3. Send your first quote and convert it to an invoice when it is accepted. There is 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse. The work you win stays yours. Common questions: Can I quote before booking the work in? Yes. Send a quote, and convert it to a booking or an invoice once it is accepted. Can I invoice a business rather than a person? Yes, using company records with their own billing address and VAT number. Does it work on a phone on site? Yes. Quotes, invoices and payments can all be handled from a phone between jobs. --- ## Youzse for fitness and clinics Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-fitness-and-clinics Category: Industry guides Youzse works for both sides of health and fitness, the studio floor and the clinic room. Personal trainers, yoga and Pilates instructors, physiotherapists, chiropractors and sports therapists all keep their diary and their clients in one place. What it does for you: Sessions booked online: Clients book one to one sessions, group classes and assessments straight from your public page, with the time that fits their week. Recurring bookings: Set up repeat sessions for clients who train with you week in, week out, so the slot is always held. Client records and notes: Keep progress notes, areas of concern and history against each client, ready for the next session. Clinics can collect the relevant details up front through the enquiry form. Packages and payment: Invoice for session packages and take card payment, then keep a clear view of what is settled. Reminders that reduce no-shows: An automated reminder before each session keeps your diary full and your clients on time. Getting set up: 1. Set up your profile with your location or studio. 2. Add your sessions and classes with the right durations. 3. Share your booking link and let clients book themselves in. You keep 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse, so a growing client base never eats into your earnings. Common questions: Can I run classes as well as one-to-one sessions? Yes, with their own capacity, waitlists and per-session pricing, where your plan includes group bookings. Can I sell blocks of sessions? Yes, through class packages, so clients pay up front for a block. Can clients complete a form before arriving? Yes. Forms can be attached to services and sent before the appointment. --- ## Youzse for pet services Source: https://youzse.app/help/industry-guides/youzse-for-pet-services Category: Industry guides Youzse is made for pet professionals who know their regulars by name, and by breed. Dog groomers and other pet services keep their bookings, their furry clients and their reminders all in one calendar. What it does for you: Online booking for owners: Owners book grooming appointments from your public page and choose the service their dog needs, from a full groom to a quick bath and tidy. Pet records that remember: Store the breed, size, temperament and any notes against each pet, so you know what you are working with before they arrive. Recurring appointments: Set up repeat visits for the dogs that come back every few weeks, and the slot is always there waiting. Reminders that reduce no-shows: Automated reminders bring owners back when their pet is due and cut the gaps in your day. Loyalty and gift cards: Reward loyal owners with stamp cards, a free groom after so many visits and offer gift cards for the pet lovers in their life. Getting set up: 1. Set up your profile with your location and opening hours. 2. Add your grooming services with realistic durations. 3. Turn on deposits if you want to protect your busiest slots. 4. Share your booking link with your owners. There is 0% commission on new clients won through Youzse. Every new owner you bring in is yours to keep. Common questions: Can I record details about the pet? Yes, on the customer record, so whoever sees them next knows the coat, the temperament and anything to watch. Can I set different durations per breed? Set them up as separate services with their own duration and price, which also keeps your diary realistic. Do reminders reduce no-shows? Considerably, and grooming appointments are long enough that a gap is worth preventing. --- ## Setting up a class Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/setting-up-a-class Category: Classes & group bookings Open Classes in the sidebar and create one. A class is a session several people book onto at once, with its own capacity, waitlist and price. How a class differs from an appointment: An appointment is one customer in one slot. A class is many customers in the same slot with a limit on how many. That difference is why classes are their own thing rather than a service booked repeatedly. What to set: - The name, as customers will see it - When it runs and how long for - How many people can attend - Who teaches it - What it costs Who it suits: Fitness and yoga studios, training providers, workshops, group grooming sessions, anything where the room rather than the person is the limit. If Classes is not in your sidebar: Classes are part of the group bookings feature. Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing, to see whether your plan includes it. Common questions: Can a class have more than one instructor? Assign the person leading it. Where two people run a session together, the class is still one bookable session. Do classes show on my calendar? Yes, alongside your appointments, so you can see the whole day in one place. Can customers book a class online? Yes, from your public page, subject to the capacity you set. --- ## Class capacity and waitlists Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/class-capacity-and-waitlists Category: Classes & group bookings Capacity is the number of people who can book a session. Once it is full, further customers can join a waitlist instead of being turned away. Setting capacity honestly: Set it to what the room, the equipment or the instructor can genuinely handle. A class oversold by two is a class where two people have a bad time and do not come back. Why the waitlist matters: Somebody always drops out. Without a waitlist that space stays empty, so you have lost the revenue and disappointed somebody who wanted to come. With one, the space refills itself. Watch the waitlist as a signal: A class with a standing waitlist is telling you to put another session on. That is the most useful piece of information a class timetable produces. Late cancellations: Set a cancellation window that gives the waitlist a realistic chance. Somebody dropping out ten minutes before leaves nobody time to get there. Common questions: Can I change capacity after people have booked? Yes. Increasing it opens more places. Reducing it below the number already booked does not remove anybody. Does the waitlist fill the space automatically? The waitlist is how you reach people who wanted a place. Check it as soon as a cancellation comes in. Can I overbook deliberately? You can set capacity higher than the room if you expect no-shows, but it is a gamble and the people turned away at the door remember it. --- ## Running a recurring class series Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/class-series Category: Classes & group bookings A series is the same class repeating on a schedule. Set your Tuesday evening class up once and the sessions are created for you rather than entered week by week. Why use a series: Because a timetable entered by hand drifts. Somebody forgets a week, a session is created at the wrong time, and customers who tried to book on a Tuesday find nothing there. Setting one up: Create the class, then set it to repeat on the pattern you run. Each occurrence becomes its own bookable session with its own capacity and its own list of attendees. Changing one session: Individual sessions can be changed without touching the rest, which is what you want for the week you start half an hour late or move to a different room. Ending a series: Set an end where the course has a fixed length. An open-ended series is right for an ongoing weekly class and wrong for a six-week course. Common questions: If I cancel one week, does the whole series stop? No. Cancelling one session leaves the rest running. Can customers book the whole course at once? A block of sessions is what class packages are for. See selling blocks of classes. Can I change the time of every future session? Change the series, and check what people have already booked before you do. --- ## Managing who is booked onto a class Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/managing-class-participants Category: Classes & group bookings Open the session and you see everybody booked onto it. From there you can add somebody yourself, remove somebody or deal with a change. Adding somebody yourself: Useful for the person who rings, the person who turns up hoping and the regular who always pays at the door. Adding them puts them on the list so the numbers are right. Removing somebody: Where somebody cannot come, take them off so the place is genuinely free and the waitlist can be used. Checking the list before the session: A quick look before you start tells you whether to set out eight mats or fourteen, and who is new and might need showing where things are. Notes on a participant: Anything that matters for the session, like an injury to work around, belongs on the customer record so whoever is teaching can see it. Common questions: Can I move somebody to a different session? Remove them from one and add them to the other. Tell them, because they will not assume it happened. What if somebody turns up who is not on the list? Add them if there is capacity. The list is what your numbers are counted from. Can the instructor see the list? Yes, if their role allows it. Give teaching staff the access they need to see who is coming. --- ## Checking people into a class Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/checking-people-into-a-class Category: Classes & group bookings Mark people in as they arrive. It takes seconds at the door and it is what makes everything downstream accurate. Why bother marking attendance: - You know who actually came rather than who said they would - Repeat no-shows become visible instead of being a vague feeling - Class packages are drawn down against real attendance - Your figures on how well a class is doing mean something Doing it at the door: Check people in on a phone or tablet as they come in. Trying to remember afterwards produces a list that is roughly right, which is the same as wrong. People who did not come: Leave them unmarked. That is the record, and it is what tells you whether a full class is genuinely full or booked by people who never arrive. Persistent no-shows: A booking that is never attended is a place somebody else wanted. Where it becomes a pattern, a deposit or a cancellation policy is the answer rather than removing the person. Common questions: Does check-in have to happen at the exact time? No. Mark people in as they arrive or shortly after. What matters is that it reflects who was there. What if I forget to check anyone in? Update the session afterwards. Later is better than never, though the same day is better than the following week. Does a no-show still get charged? That depends on your cancellation policy. Set one under Settings, then Booking Rules. --- ## Cancelling a class session Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/cancelling-a-class-session Category: Classes & group bookings Cancel the session so nobody else books it, then contact everybody who was booked. A cancelled class is not one disappointed customer, it is ten. Do it in this order: 1. Cancel the session, so no more bookings come in 2. Tell the people booked onto it, as directly as you can manage 3. Offer them another session or a refund 4. Deal with anyone who paid, promptly Tell people properly: An email nobody opens is not telling somebody. For a class cancelled the same day, ring or text. People who turn up to a locked door tell everyone about it. One session or the whole series: Cancelling one session leaves the rest of the series running. Only cancel the series where the class is genuinely finishing. People who paid: Move them to another session or refund them, and do it quickly. Sitting on somebody's money for a class that did not happen is what turns a minor annoyance into a review. Common questions: Does cancelling notify everyone automatically? Cancellation notifications depend on your notification settings. For a same-day cancellation, contact people directly as well. What about people on the waitlist? Tell them too. They were expecting a possible place. Should I refund or move people? Offer both and let them choose. Most people take another session if it is offered warmly. --- ## Pricing a class Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/pricing-a-class Category: Classes & group bookings A class has its own price per session, set on the class rather than inherited from anything else. Working out the price: Think in terms of the session rather than the person. A class of ten at £8 and a class of six at £14 are close to the same money, and the second is a nicer class to teach. Filling versus charging: A cheap class that fills is usually better than an expensive one that does not, because a room with four people in it feels flat and people do not come back. Get it full, then look at price. Taking payment up front: Classes are prone to no-shows because the individual commitment is small. Paying at the time of booking fixes most of that, and is the biggest single thing you can do to make a timetable reliable. Blocks and memberships: Where people come every week, a block of sessions or a membership is better for both of you. They pay less per session and you get the money up front. Common questions: Can different sessions of the same class cost different amounts? Sessions carry their own price, so a peak-time class can be priced differently from an off-peak one. Can I run a free taster session? Set the price to nothing for that session. Take the booking anyway so you know who is coming. How do I stop no-shows? Charge at booking, set a clear cancellation window and use the waitlist to refill anything that frees up. --- ## Selling blocks of classes Source: https://youzse.app/help/classes-and-groups/selling-blocks-of-classes Category: Classes & group bookings A class package is a block of sessions sold as one purchase. Set them up under Settings, then Class Packages. The customer pays once for ten sessions rather than paying each week. Why they work for both sides: You get the money up front and a customer who has committed. They get a better rate and stop making the decision every week, which is the real reason people stop coming to things. Sizing a block: Five and ten are the usual choices. A block big enough to feel like a commitment and small enough not to feel like a gamble. Pricing the discount: Ten to twenty per cent off the single-session price is enough to be worth having. Much more and you are discounting people who would have come anyway. Expiry: Give a block a sensible life. An open-ended block of ten sits on your books for years and turns up unexpectedly. Three or six months is reasonable, and be clear about it when you sell it. Common questions: Where do I set packages up? Settings, then Class Packages. They need the group bookings feature. Can somebody use a package on any class? That depends how you set it up. Be clear with customers about which sessions their block covers. Are package balances imported from another platform? No. Balances do not transfer between platforms, so credit existing customers by hand when you switch. --- ## Sending a quote to a customer Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/sending-a-quote Category: Quotes & sales Open Quotes in the sidebar, create a quote, add your lines, then send it. The customer gets an email with the quote and can accept or decline it without ringing you. Building the quote: 1. Go to Quotes and create a new one 2. Choose the customer, or add a new one as you go 3. Add your lines with a description, a quantity and a price 4. Check the totals and any VAT 5. Preview it to see the PDF exactly as the customer will Sending it: Send the quote and it goes out by email with a link. Until you send it a quote sits as a draft and nobody sees it. Previewing first: The preview shows the real document, using the branding from Settings, then PDF Templates. It is worth a look the first few times so you know what your customers are receiving. Duplicating a quote: If you quote similar work often, open a previous quote and duplicate it. That copies the lines so you only change what differs, which is much faster than starting again. Deleted by mistake: Deleted quotes are not gone. Open Quotes, then the trashed view, and restore it. Common questions: Can the customer accept a quote themselves? Yes. The email carries a link where they can accept or decline it, and the status updates for you automatically. Do I need to add a customer before quoting? No. You can add the customer while building the quote and the record is created for you. Can I change a quote after sending it? Edit it and resend. The customer gets the updated version, so make sure they are looking at the latest one before they accept. --- ## Quote statuses explained Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/quote-statuses-explained Category: Quotes & sales A quote has one of seven statuses, and most of them change on their own as the customer acts. The statuses: - Draft, which only you can see and nothing has been sent - Sent, which means it has gone out by email - Viewed, which means the customer has opened it - Accepted, which means they said yes - Rejected, which means they said no - Converted, which means it has become an invoice or a booking - Expired, which means it passed its valid-until date without an answer Why Viewed is useful: It tells you the difference between a quote that has not landed and a quote that has landed but is being thought about. Chasing those two needs a different conversation, and it saves you badgering someone whose email went to spam. Rejected by mistake: If a customer declines and then changes their mind, you can un-reject the quote and put it back in play rather than rebuilding it. Expired quotes: An expired quote is still in your list and can still be duplicated. Expiry is about the price you offered no longer standing, not about deleting the record. Common questions: Does the status update automatically? Yes. Sent, viewed, accepted and rejected all update themselves from what the customer does. A customer says they accepted but it still says sent. Why? They probably replied by email rather than using the link in the quote. Mark it accepted yourself. Can I reopen a rejected quote? Yes. Un-reject it and it goes back into play, so you do not have to build it again. --- ## Turning a quote into an invoice or a booking Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/converting-a-quote Category: Quotes & sales Once a quote is accepted you can convert it in one step, either into an invoice for the money or into an appointment for the work. Nothing is retyped. Converting to an invoice: Open the quote and convert it. The lines, quantities, prices and VAT all carry over, and the quote is marked as converted so you can see at a glance which quotes turned into work. Converting to an appointment: If the quote was for a job you need in the diary, convert it to an appointment instead. That puts it on the calendar attached to the same customer. Doing both: Plenty of businesses convert to an appointment to get the work booked in, then invoice on completion. That order suits anyone whose final figure can move once the job is under way. Keeping the paper trail: The original quote stays in your records with its converted status, so you can always see what you offered and what it became. Common questions: Do I have to accept a quote before converting it? Accepting first keeps your reporting honest, because it distinguishes work you won from work you simply invoiced. It is the tidier habit. What if the final price changed? Convert it, then edit the invoice. The quote keeps the figure you originally offered, which is what you want for your records. Can one quote become several invoices? Convert it once, then create further invoices for the customer as the work progresses. Staged billing is done invoice by invoice. --- ## Chasing a quote that has gone quiet Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/chasing-an-unanswered-quote Category: Quotes & sales Open the quote and resend it. The customer gets a fresh email with the same link, which is usually all a quiet quote needs. Check the status first: It tells you what kind of chase this is. A quote still showing sent rather than viewed has probably not been opened, so the problem is the email rather than the price. A quote showing viewed has been read and is being considered. When it has not been viewed: - Check the email address on the customer record - Resend it - Ring them and mention it is in their inbox, because a quote that lands in spam is invisible When it has been viewed: Resending the same thing rarely helps. A short personal message asking whether they have any questions does more than a second copy of the same PDF. Set an expiry you mean: A valid-until date gives you a natural reason to make contact and a natural reason for them to decide. Quotes without one drift indefinitely. Common questions: Does resending create a second quote? No. It is the same quote and the same link, sent again. Can I chase automatically? Quote chasing is a manual send. For broader follow-up, Campaigns under Marketing can reach a group of customers at once. Should I delete quotes nobody answered? No need. Let them expire. They stay in your records and can be duplicated if the customer comes back. --- ## Restoring a deleted quote Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/restoring-a-deleted-quote Category: Quotes & sales Deleting a quote does not destroy it. Open Quotes, switch to the trashed view, find the quote and restore it. Why it works this way: Quotes are a record of what you offered someone. Losing one to a mis-tap would mean losing evidence of a price you gave, so deleting moves it out of your way rather than removing it. Restoring: 1. Go to Quotes 2. Open the trashed view 3. Find the quote and restore it It returns with its lines, totals and status intact. When to delete rather than expire: Delete genuine mistakes, like a quote raised against the wrong customer. Let real quotes that came to nothing expire instead, because the fact you quoted someone is worth knowing later. Common questions: How long do deleted quotes stay recoverable? They sit in the trashed view rather than being cleared on a timer, so a quote deleted months ago can still be brought back. Does restoring notify the customer? No. Restoring is silent. Nothing is emailed unless you send it again. Can I restore a converted quote? A converted quote is attached to an invoice or a booking, so deleting one is rarely what you want. Restore it and check the invoice it created is still right. --- ## Working your leads pipeline Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/working-your-leads-pipeline Category: Quotes & sales Open Leads in the sidebar. Each lead is a card on a board and the columns are the stages you have set up. Move a card along as the conversation progresses. What a lead is: Somebody who has shown interest but is not a customer yet. An enquiry from your public page, a phone call you took, a name from a referral. Using the board: - Move a lead into the next stage as things develop - Open a lead to add notes on what was said and when - Update the status when it is won or lost Notes are the point: A lead without notes is just a name. Two lines about what they asked for and what you quoted turns a cold callback into a conversation that sounds like you remember them. Losing leads well: Mark dead leads as lost rather than deleting them. A lost lead is useful information, and people who were not ready in March are sometimes ready in September. Where leads come from: Enquiries submitted on your public page arrive automatically. Anything else you add yourself as it comes in. Common questions: Can I change the stages? Yes, the pipeline stages are yours to define. Set them to match how you actually sell rather than working around someone else's process. What is the difference between a lead and a customer? A lead has not booked or bought yet. Convert a lead to a customer when they do and the record carries across. Do leads show on my calendar? No. Leads are a pipeline rather than a diary. Book an appointment once the lead becomes real work. --- ## Turning a lead into a customer Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/converting-a-lead Category: Quotes & sales Open the lead and convert it. It becomes a customer record carrying the name, contact details and anything else you captured, so nothing is retyped. When to convert: When they book, buy or otherwise become real. Converting too early fills your customer list with people who never came back, and converting too late means typing their details in twice. What comes across: The contact details you hold and the notes you have added. The lead history stays attached, so you can still see where they came from. Straight to a quote: A lead that needs a price does not have to be converted first. Raise the quote and the customer record is created as you go. Marketing consent: Converting a lead does not create consent to market to them. Somebody enquiring about a haircut has not agreed to a monthly newsletter. Consent is recorded separately and deliberately. Common questions: Does converting delete the lead? No. The lead is marked converted and stays in your history, so your pipeline reporting still adds up. What if they are already a customer? Existing customers are matched on email and phone, so you get a note against the customer you already have rather than a duplicate. Can I convert several leads at once? Convert them one at a time. It is a deliberate action, and in practice you want to check the details as each one goes across. --- ## Building an enquiry form for your public page Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/building-an-enquiry-form Category: Quotes & sales The enquiry form is the contact form on your public page. Switch it on under Settings, then Appearance, then set up its fields under Settings, then Enquiry Form. Why the two places: Appearance controls whether the form appears at all. The Enquiry Form screen controls what it asks. Until it is enabled the fields cannot be edited, which is why that screen tells you to turn it on first. Choosing your fields: Ask for the least you need to reply. A name and one way of contacting them is genuinely enough for most businesses. Every extra field costs you enquiries, and you can ask the rest when you reply. Where enquiries go: Straight into your Inbox, where they can be worked as leads. Nothing sits in an email account waiting to be noticed. Enquiry form or booking page: If people can book directly, let them. The enquiry form is for work that needs a conversation first, like a quote for a job whose price depends on seeing it. Common questions: Why can I not edit the fields? The form is switched off. Enable it under Settings, then Appearance, and the fields become editable. Do I get an email when someone enquires? Enquiries arrive in your Inbox, and your notification settings control what else is sent. Check Settings, then Notifications. Can I have both an enquiry form and online booking? Yes, and most businesses do. Booking for the standard work, enquiries for anything that needs pricing up. --- ## Your inbox explained Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/your-inbox-explained Category: Quotes & sales Inbox in the sidebar collects the enquiries that come in from your public page. It exists so customer messages live with the customer record rather than in somebody's personal email. Why it matters: An enquiry sitting in a personal inbox is invisible to everyone else, gets buried by lunchtime and is lost entirely when that person is on holiday. In Inbox it is visible to whoever has permission to see it. Working through it: - Open an enquiry to read it in full - Reply, or turn it into a lead if it needs following up over time - Convert it to a customer once they book or buy Who can see it: Access is controlled by permission, so you decide which roles can read enquiries. Check Settings, then Roles. Response time is the whole game: Most enquiries go to more than one business. Replying quickly wins work that a better price two days later will not. Common questions: Do enquiries also get emailed to me? Your notification settings decide. Set them under Settings, then Notifications, so the right people are told. Can I reply from Inbox? Yes, and replying there keeps the conversation attached to the record rather than scattered across mailboxes. What happens to spam? Delete it. Persistent nuisance addresses can be blocked from the marketing side under Suppressions. --- ## Invoicing a business rather than a person Source: https://youzse.app/help/quotes-and-sales/companies-and-business-customers Category: Quotes & sales Companies in the sidebar holds business clients. Use it when your invoice needs to be addressed to a business rather than to the person who booked. When you need it: A fleet booking cars in for servicing, a letting agent sending you jobs, a firm paying for staff treatments. The person you deal with is not the person who pays, and the invoice has to be right for their accounts department. What a company record holds: Name, contact details, billing address, VAT number and a registration reference. That is what makes an invoice acceptable to their finance team. Linking people to companies: Customers can belong to a company. The individual keeps their own record and history, and the invoice goes to the business. Purchase order numbers: Many businesses will not pay an invoice without their own reference on it. Ask for it up front and put it on the invoice, because chasing that afterwards adds weeks. Importing companies: Accounting exports from QuickBooks and Sage carry company records with VAT numbers. Import companies before customers so people attach to the right business. Common questions: Do I need companies if I only serve the public? No. Most salons and barbers never touch it. It is there for when a business becomes the payer. Can one company have several contacts? Yes. Several customers can belong to the same company, each keeping their own booking history. Does the company get the booking confirmations? No. Confirmations go to the person attending. Invoices go to the business. --- ## Choosing a loyalty scheme Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/choosing-a-loyalty-scheme Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Loyalty runs in one of three modes: points, stamps or cashback. Open Loyalty in the sidebar to set yours up and pick the mode that matches how you want to reward people. The three modes: - Points, where customers earn a number of points for every pound they spend and swap them for rewards you define - Stamps, where each visit earns a stamp and a set number of stamps earns a reward - Cashback, where a percentage of each spend comes back as credit towards future work Which to choose: Stamps suit anyone whose customers buy roughly the same thing each time, like a barber or a dog groomer. Everyone understands a stamp card because everyone has had one. Points suit a varied menu where spend differs a lot between visits, so a cut and a full colour do not earn the same reward. Cashback suits higher-value, less frequent work like garages and trades. A percentage back is easy to understand and needs no reward menu at all. You can change your mind: Balances already earned keep the unit they were earned in, so switching mode later does not corrupt what customers have built up. It is still worth choosing carefully, because explaining a change to regulars is the awkward part. Common questions: Can I run points and stamps at the same time? No. One scheme with one mode, which is what makes it simple enough for customers to follow. Do customers see their balance? Yes. Their balance with your business shows in their account, so they can see how close they are to a reward. Does loyalty cost me anything to run? The feature is part of your plan. The cost is whatever you choose to give away. --- ## Setting up loyalty points Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/setting-up-loyalty-points Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships In points mode you set how many points a customer earns per pound spent, then build a menu of rewards each with a points cost. Open Loyalty in the sidebar. Setting the earn rate: One point per pound is the usual starting place because the maths is obvious to everyone. Points are earned on whole pounds spent, so a £40 visit at one point per pound earns 40 points. Working out what a point is worth: Decide the giveaway first, then set the price. If you want roughly a fiver back on every hundred pounds spent, and a pound earns a point, then a reward worth £5 should cost about 100 points. Set the rate and the reward prices together or the scheme drifts. Turning it on: A programme has to be active before anything is earned. Points are not awarded retrospectively, so switch it on before you start telling customers about it. Keeping it worth having: A scheme nobody can reach is worse than no scheme at all. Make the first reward achievable within three or four normal visits or people stop looking. Common questions: Are points earned on the full amount including VAT? Points are calculated from the spend recorded against the visit. Set your earn rate with that in mind. Do points apply to gift card purchases? Rewarding someone for buying a gift card and again for spending it means paying twice for the same money. Decide which you want and keep it consistent. Can I give a customer points by hand? Yes. Adjusting a balance is useful for putting right a bad visit or crediting a long-standing regular when you first launch. --- ## Setting up a stamp card Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/setting-up-a-stamp-card Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships In stamps mode you set two numbers: how many stamps a visit earns and how many stamps earn the reward. Open Loyalty in the sidebar. The classic setup: One stamp per visit and a reward at ten. Customers understand it without being told, which is most of the value. Choosing the threshold: Base it on how often people really come. If your regulars visit monthly, a reward at ten stamps is nearly a year away and nobody will chase it. Six is a better target for a monthly service, ten for something weekly. More than one stamp per visit: You can award more than one, which is a way to run a promotion. Double stamps in January fills a quiet month without discounting your prices. No paper card: The balance follows the customer rather than a card in a wallet, so it cannot be lost, forgotten or forged. Customers see how many stamps they have in their account. Common questions: Does a bigger spend earn more stamps? No, stamps are per visit. If you want spend to matter, points is the mode you want. What if someone books two services in one visit? It is one visit and one stamp. Stamps count attendances rather than lines on a bill. Can I wipe a card that has been abused? Yes, balances can be adjusted. It is worth a conversation first, because usually it is a misunderstanding rather than an abuse. --- ## Setting up cashback Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/setting-up-cashback Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships In cashback mode you set a percentage and that share of every spend comes back to the customer as credit. Open Loyalty in the sidebar. Who it suits: Garages, trades and anyone whose average job runs into the hundreds. A stamp card makes no sense when someone visits twice a year, but five per cent back on a £600 job is £30 they can feel. Setting the percentage: Treat it as a discount you are choosing to defer. Two to five per cent is the sensible range for most trades. Ten per cent sounds generous and eats a lot of margin. No reward menu needed: Cashback has no threshold and no reward list. Credit accumulates and gets used against future work, which is less to explain and less to maintain. Telling customers: Cashback works best when it is mentioned at the point the bill is settled. Somebody paying £600 who is told £30 is waiting for them next time has a reason to come back rather than shop around. Common questions: Is cashback paid out as money? No. It is credit towards future work with you, which is the point of it. Does cashback expire? Set an expiry if you want one. Long-lived credit is a liability that builds up quietly, so it is worth considering. Can I run cashback on some services only? The percentage applies to the scheme. To reward particular work, a discount or a promotion is the better tool. --- ## Creating loyalty rewards Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/creating-loyalty-rewards Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Rewards are what a customer swaps their balance for. Create them under Loyalty, each with a name and a cost in points, and order them so the most reachable one is first. What makes a good reward: - Something you can give without resenting it - Something the customer actually wants - Priced so a regular reaches the first one in a few visits A free add-on service usually beats money off, because it costs you time you were going to spend anyway rather than cash out of the till. Turning rewards on and off: Only active rewards can be redeemed, so you can build a seasonal reward in advance and switch it on when you are ready. Retiring a reward is a switch rather than a deletion, which keeps the history of what people redeemed. Ordering them: The display order is yours. Put the cheapest first so a customer with a small balance sees something within reach rather than a list of things they cannot afford. Common questions: Can I have a reward nobody can afford yet? Yes, and an aspirational reward at the top is fine as long as there is a reachable one below it. What happens to a reward I deactivate? It stops being redeemable. Rewards already redeemed keep their history. Do rewards work in stamps mode? Stamps reward at a threshold you set. The reward menu is what points mode redeems against. --- ## Redeeming a reward Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/redeeming-a-reward Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Rewards are applied when you take payment. Open the booking, apply the reward, and the balance comes off the customer record automatically. Checking a balance: Open the customer record. Their balance and how close they are to the next reward are on it, which is worth a glance before you take payment so you can mention it. Mention it out loud: A customer who is told they have earned something will use it and come back for the next one. A customer who never hears about it forgets the scheme exists, and you have given away nothing but goodwill you never claimed. If a balance looks wrong: Check when the scheme was switched on, because nothing is earned before that. Then check whether points have expired. Balances can be adjusted by hand where something genuinely went wrong. Common questions: Can a customer redeem their own reward online? Rewards are applied at payment. Their balance is visible in their account so they know what they have. What if they want to save up instead? Then do not apply it. Balances carry forward, subject to any expiry you have set. Can I refuse a reward at busy times? You can, but blackout rules customers do not expect are how schemes get a bad name. Better to price the reward so you are happy to honour it always. --- ## When loyalty points expire Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/when-loyalty-points-expire Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Points can be set to expire a fixed number of days after they are earned. Set the period under Loyalty, or leave it off so balances never expire. Why expiry exists: Unused balances are a promise you have made. Without expiry, somebody who visited twice two years ago can turn up expecting a reward priced at old rates. Expiry keeps the liability in a period you can plan around. Choosing a period: Twelve months is the common choice and is easy to defend. Anything under six months feels mean to customers who visit a few times a year. Being fair about it: Tell people. An expiry nobody was told about produces exactly one conversation and it is not a good one. Put it on your booking page and mention it when the scheme is explained. Turning expiry off: Leave the period unset and points last indefinitely. That is simplest for customers and worth it if your margins carry the risk comfortably. Common questions: Does the whole balance expire at once? Points expire on the basis of when they were earned, so an active customer keeps topping the balance up rather than losing everything on a date. Can I give expired points back? Yes, balances can be adjusted. It is a reasonable goodwill gesture for a good customer who missed it. Does cashback expire the same way? Cashback credit follows the expiry you set on the scheme. Setting one is worth considering, because credit balances build up quietly. --- ## Selling and redeeming gift cards Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/selling-gift-cards Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Open Gift Cards in the sidebar to issue a card and to see every card you have out there. Each one has a balance that is drawn down as it is used. Why sell them: A gift card is money you have already been paid for work you have not done yet. It also brings in someone who has never used you, chosen by somebody who already trusts you, which is the best kind of new customer. Issuing one: Create the card with its value and it is tracked from then on. Everything sold is visible in one list rather than scribbled in a book. Redeeming: Apply the card when taking payment and the balance comes down by what was used. Part-used cards keep the remainder for next time. Christmas: Most businesses sell more gift cards in December than the rest of the year together. It is worth having them ready and mentioned on your public page before the end of November rather than the week before. Common questions: What happens if a card is only part used? The remaining balance stays on the card for next time. Nothing is lost by spending less than the full value. Can a gift card be used against a deposit? Apply it when you take payment. Whether that is the deposit or the balance is up to you. Do gift cards expire? Terms are yours to set. Be aware that consumers have expectations here, and an expiry that surprises someone holding a present is a bad conversation. --- ## Understanding gift card liability Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/gift-card-liability Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Every unredeemed gift card is a liability: money in your bank that you still owe in work. Gift Cards tracks the outstanding total so you know what that number is. Why it matters: Gift card money feels like income the day it arrives and it is not. Spending December takings in January leaves you doing the work in February with nothing coming in for it. Businesses get caught by this every year. What the total tells you: It is the sum of every balance still out there. Treat it as a debt to be delivered rather than money in hand. Talking to your accountant: Gift card income is usually recognised when the card is redeemed rather than when it is sold. Your accountant will want the outstanding balance at your year end, and this is where you get it. Common questions: Is a gift card sale counted as revenue straight away? Speak to your accountant. The usual treatment recognises it on redemption, because until then you owe the work. What happens to cards that are never redeemed? They stay on your liability until they are used or expire under your terms. Unredeemed balances are eventually a gain, but not until then. Can I see which cards are still outstanding? Yes. The gift card list shows each card with its remaining balance. --- ## Setting up memberships Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/setting-up-memberships Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Memberships are recurring plans your customers subscribe to. Create them under Settings, then Memberships, where you can also see your monthly recurring revenue and how many active members you have. Why memberships work: They turn an unpredictable month into a predictable one. Knowing a set amount arrives before you open on the first changes how a small business plans, and customers who pay monthly are far more likely to come in and use what they are paying for. Building a plan: Give it a name, a price and a period, and be clear about what a member gets. A plan people can explain to a friend in one sentence sells. A plan with four tiers and an asterisk does not. What to include: Something with a real perceived value that costs you less than it appears to. Priority booking, a monthly service, a standing discount, a free add-on each visit. Watching the numbers: Monthly recurring revenue and active member count sit on the same screen. Watch both, because revenue climbing while member numbers fall means you are relying on a handful of people. Common questions: How do members pay? Recurring payments go through your online payment setup, so set that up first under Settings, then Online Payments. Can members still book normally? Yes. A membership sits alongside booking rather than replacing it. Can I import memberships from another platform? No. Payment authority cannot transfer between platforms, so members subscribe again on Youzse. Tell them before you switch. --- ## Class packages and chair rentals Source: https://youzse.app/help/loyalty-and-rewards/class-packages Category: Loyalty, gift cards & memberships Two settings that often get missed. Class packages sell a block of sessions up front. Chair rentals hold agreements with people who rent space from you. Class packages: Set them up under Settings, then Class Packages. A package is a number of sessions sold as one purchase, so a customer buys ten classes rather than paying each time. You get the money in advance and they get a better rate, which suits both of you. Packages need classes, which are part of the group bookings feature. If Classes is not in your sidebar, that is why. Chair rentals: Set them up under Settings, then Chair Rentals. This is for salons and barbershops where a stylist rents a chair rather than being employed. The agreement, the rate and the arrangement live in one place instead of a note on a phone. Renters are not employees: Someone renting a chair usually runs their own books and their own clients. How much of your system they use is a decision to make deliberately, and the roles under Settings, then Roles, are what enforce it. Common questions: Where do I find class packages? Under Settings, then Class Packages. They need the group bookings feature, which is what puts Classes in your sidebar. Does a package expire? Set terms that suit you. An unused block of ten with no end date is a liability that sits open indefinitely. Can a chair renter see my whole customer list? Only if you let them. Give renters a role limited to what they need, which is usually their own diary and their own clients. --- ## Sending a marketing campaign Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/sending-a-marketing-campaign Category: Marketing & growth Open Campaigns under Marketing in the sidebar. A campaign is one message sent to a group of customers by email, SMS or WhatsApp, and only people who have opted in receive it. Building one: 1. Choose your channel 2. Choose who it goes to, either a segment you have built or a filter you set there and then 3. Write the message, or pick a template 4. Preview it and send yourself a test 5. Send it Consent is checked for you: Every send is filtered against marketing consent and the suppression list before anything leaves. Somebody who opted out cannot be reached by accident, which is the protection you want when a mis-selected filter would otherwise be a regulatory problem rather than an embarrassment. Always send yourself a test: A test email costs nothing and catches the mistakes that matter, like a broken link, a name that did not merge or a price you changed your mind about. What to send: Something the reader gains from. A quiet-week offer, a seasonal reminder, news of a service you have added. A message that exists only because it has been a while since the last one reads exactly like that. Common questions: Why did fewer people receive it than my segment showed? Consent and suppression are applied at send time. The difference is people who have opted out or been suppressed since the segment was built. Can I schedule a campaign for later? Build it in advance and send when you are ready. Test first, because a scheduled mistake is harder to catch. Does sending SMS cost extra? Text and WhatsApp messages have a per-message cost. Email is included. Check Settings, then Messaging, for how yours is set up. --- ## Building an audience segment Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/building-a-segment Category: Marketing & growth Open Segments under Marketing. A segment is a saved filter describing a group of customers, so you build the audience once and reuse it every time. What you can filter on: Only fields that are safe to target with. Sensitive personal data is deliberately not available to segmentation, so a segment can never be built on health information or anything else it would be unlawful to use for marketing. Segments worth having: - Customers who have not been in for six months - Customers of one particular service - Customers at one location, if you have more than one - Your highest-spending customers Why reusable matters: A segment you rebuild by hand each time drifts. Saving it means the lapsed-customer campaign you run every quarter measures the same thing each quarter, so the numbers actually compare. Segment size is not send size: A segment tells you who matches. Consent and suppression are applied when the campaign sends, so the number reached is usually smaller. That is working as intended. Common questions: Why can I not segment on a customer note? Notes are free text and can hold anything, including sensitive information. Targeting on them is not offered, which is deliberate. Can I combine filters? Yes. Segments are built from several conditions together, which is how you get from everybody to the group you actually want. Do segments update themselves? A segment is a filter rather than a fixed list, so it reflects who matches at the time you use it. --- ## Reusing marketing templates Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/marketing-templates Category: Marketing & growth Open Templates under Marketing. A template is a message body you save once and reuse, so the campaign you run every year is not rewritten from nothing every year. What to keep as a template: - Your seasonal offers, because next December will look a lot like this one - A lapsed-customer message, since wording that works keeps working - A birthday or anniversary message - Anything you have sent twice already Preview and test: Templates can be previewed and you can send yourself a test email before one is used in a real send. Do it. Reading your own message in a real inbox catches things that look fine in an editor. Keeping them current: A template with last year's prices in it will go out with last year's prices. Review them before the season they belong to rather than the morning you send. Common questions: Do templates work for SMS as well as email? Templates are reusable message bodies. Keep SMS versions short, because a text has far less room than an email and costs per message. Can I duplicate a template? Save a variation as its own template. Two clearly named templates beat one edited so many times nobody knows what it says. Does editing a template change campaigns already sent? No. A campaign that has gone out is a record of what was sent. --- ## Choosing between email, SMS and WhatsApp Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/choosing-a-marketing-channel Category: Marketing & growth Campaigns can go by email, SMS or WhatsApp. Email is included in your plan. Text and WhatsApp messages carry a per-message cost, so use them where the immediacy is worth paying for. Email: Best for anything with detail, images or more than one idea. Cheap enough to send regularly, easy to ignore, and it can carry a proper offer with a link. SMS: Almost always read, and read within minutes. That makes it right for genuine urgency, like a cancellation you want filled this afternoon. It also makes it intrusive if you use it for a newsletter. WhatsApp: Sits between the two. More room than a text and more conversational, but it is a personal space and people notice when a business turns up in it uninvited. The rule of thumb: Would you be pleased to receive this by text? If the honest answer is that an email would have done, send the email. Cost control: Watch what you are spending on messaging. Settings, then Messaging, is where your messaging arrangement lives. Common questions: Do I need separate consent for SMS? Consent should cover the channel you use. Somebody who agreed to emails has not necessarily agreed to texts, and the safest position is to be specific when you ask. Which gets the best response? SMS gets read most, email gets acted on most for anything needing thought. Use them for different jobs rather than picking a winner. What happens if I run out of messaging credit? Sends stop rather than silently failing. Check Settings, then Messaging, to see where you stand. --- ## Who you are allowed to market to Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/marketing-consent-rules Category: Marketing & growth Only customers who have opted in receive marketing. Holding somebody's details because they booked with you is not the same as being allowed to market to them, and Youzse keeps the two apart deliberately. Consent is per person and recorded: Each customer record carries their marketing consent. Campaigns are filtered against it at the point of sending, so an opted-out customer cannot be reached by a mis-set filter. Imported customers: Where an export carried a consent column, that consent comes across. Where it did not, imported customers arrive without consent and stay out of campaigns until they opt in. That is the correct default, however inconvenient it feels on day one. Asking properly: - Ask for it as its own question rather than burying it in terms - Say what you will send and roughly how often - Make opting out easy and honour it immediately Service messages are different: Booking confirmations, reminders and receipts are part of delivering what the customer asked for. They are not marketing and do not depend on marketing consent. Do not slip an offer into a reminder, because that turns a service message into a marketing one. Common questions: Can I email past customers who never opted in? Not for marketing. You can contact them about work you are doing for them, which is a different thing. Someone asked to be removed. What do I do? Suppress them. It is immediate and permanent unless deliberately reversed, and the reversal is recorded. Does an opt-out mean I have to delete them? No. It means you stop marketing to them. Their record and history stay, because you may still need them for tax and for the work you did. --- ## The suppression list Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/the-suppression-list Category: Marketing & growth Open Suppressions under Marketing. Anything on this list, whether an email address or a phone number, will never receive marketing from your business. How addresses get on it: - Somebody unsubscribes - Somebody asks you directly to stop - A message hard bounces, meaning the address does not exist - You add them yourself Why bounces matter: Repeatedly emailing addresses that do not exist damages your sending reputation, which means your real messages start landing in spam folders. Suppressing dead addresses protects delivery for everybody else. Taking someone off the list: It is possible and it is audit-logged, with a record of who did it and when. That is deliberate. Removing a suppression means marketing somebody who previously said no, so it should leave a trail. Only do it when you have a genuine reason, such as the customer asking you to start again. Suppression beats consent: If somebody is suppressed, a consent flag on their record makes no difference. The suppression wins, which is what makes it a reliable safety net. Common questions: Does suppressing someone delete their record? No. They keep their customer record, their booking history and their invoices. They just stop receiving marketing. Can a suppressed customer still get booking confirmations? Yes. Confirmations and reminders are service messages about work they have asked for, not marketing. Why is removing a suppression logged? Because it undoes somebody's stated wish. A record of who did it and when protects you as much as them. --- ## Collecting customer reviews Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/collecting-customer-reviews Category: Marketing & growth Open the Reviews page at /app/reviews, or reach it from the review requests widget on your dashboard. From there you can collect new reviews from customers and bring across reviews you already earned somewhere else. Why reviews matter more than anything else you do: Somebody choosing between two local businesses reads reviews and looks at little else. Volume and recency both count. Forty reviews from three years ago look worse than fifteen from this year. Asking well: - Ask soon after the visit, while it is fresh - Ask everyone rather than only the people you think will say something nice - Make it one tap, because anything longer loses most people Your Google link: Put your Google review link in your business profile so happy customers can leave one in a single tap. Google reviews do work your own reviews cannot, because they show up in search and on maps. Reviews you already have: Moving platforms does not have to mean starting from zero. Reviews you earned elsewhere can be brought across, and there is a separate guide for that. Common questions: Can I ask only the customers who were happy? You can, and you should not. Filtering out unhappy customers is against most review platform rules and produces a rating nobody believes. How many reviews do I need? Enough to look established and recent enough to look alive. A steady trickle beats a burst followed by silence. Can I offer something in exchange for a review? Paying for reviews breaches the rules of every major platform and is treated as a consumer protection matter. Ask properly instead. --- ## Handling a bad review Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/handling-a-bad-review Category: Marketing & growth Reply, keep it short and keep it calm. Your reply is not really for the person who complained, it is for the hundred people who will read it while deciding whether to book. What a good reply does: - Thanks them for saying something - Acknowledges the specific problem without arguing the detail - Says what you are doing about it - Offers to sort it out privately What a bad reply does: Argues, explains at length why they are wrong or implies they are lying. Even when you are entirely right, the argument itself is what readers remember. Take it offline quickly: Invite them to contact you directly. Nothing useful gets resolved in public, and a long public thread makes a small problem look enormous. One bad review is not a disaster: A business with nothing but five stars looks curated. One honest three-star review with a decent reply from the owner often makes the rest more believable. When it is not a real customer: Genuinely fake reviews can be reported to the platform. Do that rather than fighting it in the replies, and keep the public response neutral in the meantime. Common questions: Should I reply to every review? Reply to the critical ones always. Replying to the good ones occasionally is plenty. How quickly should I reply? Within a day or two. A reply weeks later reads as though nobody was paying attention. Can I get a review removed? Only the platform can remove one, and only if it breaches their rules. Disagreeing with it is not enough. --- ## Referring another business to Youzse Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/your-referral-scheme Category: Marketing & growth Referrals rewards you for introducing another business to Youzse. Go to Settings, then Referrals, to find your link. When a business you refer signs up and subscribes to a paid plan, you both earn account credit. This is business to business: It is worth being clear, because the name suggests otherwise. This scheme is not for a customer recommending you to a friend. It rewards you for recommending Youzse to another business owner. Using your link: Copy it and share it directly. It works best sent to somebody who has actually mentioned struggling with their booking system, and worst broadcast to people who have not. What the figures mean: The referrals screen shows four numbers. - Referred, the businesses who have used your link - Pending, those who have signed up but not yet subscribed - Qualified, those who have subscribed and earned the credit - Earned, the credit total Credit rather than cash: The reward is credit against your own account, so it comes off what you pay rather than arriving in your bank. Rewarding your own customers: For a customer-brings-a-friend scheme, use loyalty or a discount instead. That is a different tool for a different job. Common questions: When do I get the credit? When the business you referred subscribes to a paid plan. A sign-up that never subscribes stays as pending. Does the other business get anything? Yes, you both earn credit. Is there a limit on how many I can refer? Refer as many as you genuinely know. The scheme rewards real recommendations rather than volume for its own sake. --- ## Getting found on Google Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/getting-found-on-google Category: Marketing & growth Three things do most of the work: a complete public page, an address and opening hours that are correct everywhere and a steady flow of Google reviews. Your public page: Fill it in fully. A business name, a real description of what you do, your services with prices, photographs and your address. Half-finished pages rank badly because they answer fewer of the questions somebody is asking. Consistency matters: Your name, address and phone number should match exactly across your Youzse page, your Google Business Profile, your social accounts and anywhere else you are listed. Search engines treat inconsistent details as a reason to trust all of them less. Google Business Profile: Claim it if you have not. It is free, it is what shows in maps and it is the single highest-return hour of marketing available to a local business. Reviews: Recent reviews carry more weight than old ones. A few a month beats forty in one week and then nothing. Describe what people search for: Write your services the way customers say them rather than the way the trade says them. People search for what they want done, not for its technical name. Common questions: Does having a Youzse page replace a website? For many small businesses it is enough on its own, because it carries your services, prices, hours and booking in one place. How long does it take to show up? Weeks rather than days for a new page. Consistency and reviews compound over months. Should I write blog posts? Only if you will keep it up. An abandoned blog does less for you than a complete, accurate public page. --- ## Filling a quiet week Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/filling-a-quiet-week Category: Marketing & growth Look at your existing customers before you go looking for new ones. Build a segment of people who have not been in for a while, then send them something specific for the days you need to fill. Why lapsed customers first: They already know you, they have already paid you and they need no persuading about whether you are any good. Winning one back is far cheaper than finding somebody new. Making the offer work: - Name the days, so it fills the gap you actually have rather than the Saturday that was already full - Give it an end date, because an offer with no deadline gets ignored - Keep it simple enough to understand in one line Do not discount your busy times: An offer that applies whenever means giving money away on appointments you would have sold anyway. Restrict it to the quiet slots. Check the waitlist first: Before discounting anything, look at who is already waiting for a slot. Filling a gap from the waitlist costs you nothing at all. Common questions: How much should I discount? Enough to prompt action and no more. A free add-on often shifts as many bookings as money off and costs you less. Will regular discounting train people to wait? Yes, if it is predictable. Vary what you offer and when, and never discount your busiest days. What if nobody responds? Check the send reached people at all, then look at the offer. Silence usually means the offer was not interesting rather than that the message failed. --- ## Measuring whether your marketing worked Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/measuring-your-marketing Category: Marketing & growth The number that matters is bookings taken after the send, not how many people opened it. Open rates tell you your subject line worked. Bookings tell you the campaign worked. What to look at: - Bookings in the days after the send, compared with a normal week - Whether the people who booked were in the segment you targeted - Revenue from those bookings against anything you gave away Where to look: Reports in the sidebar shows what came in and when. Compare the week of a campaign against the weeks either side rather than judging it on its own. Give it more than a day: People read a message, think about it and book at the weekend. Judging a Tuesday campaign on Tuesday afternoon will always look disappointing. Compare like with like: This is the real reason to save segments. The same segment sent the same kind of offer at the same time of year is the only comparison worth trusting. Be honest about the giveaway: Twenty bookings at a third off is not automatically better than twelve at full price. Work the margin rather than the volume. Common questions: Where do I see campaign results? Open the campaign for what was sent and to whom, and use Reports for the bookings and revenue that followed. What is a good open rate? It varies too much to be a useful target. Your own trend over time tells you far more than anyone else's benchmark. How often should I send? Often enough to be remembered and rarely enough to be welcome. Monthly suits most local businesses. --- ## Hiding your business from the marketplace Source: https://youzse.app/help/marketing-and-growth/hiding-from-the-marketplace Category: Marketing & growth Being listed on the Youzse marketplace is optional. You can take yourself off it entirely, or stay listed and publish only your town rather than your address. Both are switches you control, both apply straight away and both can be reversed whenever you like. Where to find it: On the web, Settings, then Marketplace Visibility, in the Customisation group. On the app, Business Settings, then Marketplace Visibility. You need permission to edit settings, so owners and managers can change it and other staff cannot. What hiding does: Switch on "Hide me from the marketplace" and you stop appearing anywhere customers browse. That means marketplace search, the Youzse homepage, every town page, every trade and industry page, the same browsing and search inside the customer app, and the sitemap Youzse gives to search engines. What hiding does not touch: Your own page keeps working exactly as it does now. Your link, your QR codes, the "Book now" button on your own website and any link you have shared or printed all still open your page and still take bookings. Nothing changes for the people you already deal with either. Existing bookings stand, customers who have favourited you keep you in their list, your reviews and rating stay on your page, review links keep working and gift card links keep working. The point is the difference between being advertised and being reachable. Hiding stops Youzse putting you in front of people who have never heard of you. It never stops the people you send to your page. Who tends to use it: Mobile and home-based businesses who do not want strangers browsing to them. Businesses that are full and taking no new customers for now. Private or members-only operations that run entirely on referral. Franchisees whose head office handles all the marketing. Anyone winding down who still needs the diary running for existing customers. Your address is a separate choice: The second setting decides how much of your address goes on the public page, and it works whether you are listed or hidden. Show my full address publishes your street, your postcode and a map pin. It suits a shop or salon that people walk into. Show my town only publishes the town and nothing else. No street line, no postcode, no map pin and no exact position anywhere public. You still turn up in local searches, but Youzse ranks you from the centre of your town rather than from where you actually are, so nobody can work backwards from a distance to a home address. It suits anyone working from home or travelling to customers. Customers who have booked always see the full address and directions, whichever option you pick. The setting governs what strangers see, not what your own customers get. Search engines take longer: Hiding removes you from the sitemap immediately, so Youzse stops telling Google and the AI search tools about your page. Your page stays live, because your own link has to keep working, so a search engine that already found it may keep showing it for a few weeks until it recrawls. If you need something gone from Google faster than that, Google's own removal tool is the only thing that will do it. Turning it back on: Switch it off and you reappear straight away, with your services, photographs, reviews and rating exactly as they were. Nothing is deleted while you are hidden and there is nothing to rebuild. Common questions: How quickly does it take effect? As soon as you save. Youzse clears the public listings for you at that moment rather than waiting for a cache to expire, and every listing is checked against your setting as the page is built. Will it cancel my bookings? No. Hiding changes nothing about your diary, your customers or any booking already in it. Does it change what I pay? No. Your subscription and your card rates are exactly the same either way. There is no commission on new marketplace clients when you are listed and no discount for hiding. Will customers who favourited me lose me? No. Favourites open your page directly, so they keep working while you are hidden. Can I be listed but keep my address private? Yes. That is what the town only option is for. The two settings are independent, so any combination of them is fine. Do I lose my reviews? No. Your reviews and your rating stay on your page and come straight back into the marketplace if you list yourself again. Can my staff change this? Only staff who can edit settings, which normally means owners and managers. Every change is written to your audit log with who made it and when. --- ## Controlling what your customers receive Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/controlling-customer-notifications Category: Notifications & messaging Go to Settings, then Notifications. It controls which notifications your customers receive and when they are sent. What gets sent as standard: - A confirmation when a booking is made - A reminder before the appointment - A note when something is changed or cancelled - Receipts and invoices when money moves Turning things off: You can, and you should think hard before you do. Reminders are the cheapest no-show protection there is, and a confirmation is what stops somebody ringing to check you wrote it down. Timing matters more than volume: A reminder twenty-four hours ahead gives somebody time to rearrange their day. A reminder an hour ahead gives them time to feel guilty. If you only send one, send it the day before. Service messages are not marketing: Confirmations, reminders and receipts are part of delivering what was booked. They do not depend on marketing consent, and they should never carry an offer, because that turns them into marketing. Common questions: Can I change the wording? Yes. Settings, then Email Templates, is where the wording lives. Do reminders cost anything? Email is included. Text and WhatsApp messages have a per-message cost. My customer says they got nothing. What now? Check the email address, then look at Settings, then Email Deliverability, to see whether it was delivered or bounced. --- ## Notification channels explained Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/notification-channels Category: Notifications & messaging Notifications can go by email, push, SMS or WhatsApp. Email and push are on by default. SMS and WhatsApp are off until you turn them on, because they cost money per message. Why the defaults are what they are: Email and push cost nothing extra, so they are safe to have on from the first day. Turning SMS on silently would mean a business discovering a bill they never agreed to, which is why it waits for a deliberate decision. Email: The default for everything. Cheap, detailed and easy to keep a copy of. Push: Goes to the customer's phone through the app. Immediate and free, and it only reaches people who have the app. SMS: Almost always read within minutes, which makes it the strongest reminder channel and the most expensive. Most businesses that use it use it for the day-before reminder only. WhatsApp: More room than a text and more conversational. It carries a per-message cost like SMS. Turning a channel on: Enable it, then check your messaging setup so there is something behind it. A channel enabled with nothing configured produces messages that never arrive. Common questions: Why are my customers not getting texts? SMS is off by default. Enable it and check Settings, then Messaging. Do customers choose their own channel? Customers control their own notification preferences. What you enable sets what is possible. Is push the same as an SMS? No. Push goes through the app and is free. SMS goes to any phone and costs per message. --- ## Editing your email templates Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/editing-email-templates Category: Notifications & messaging Go to Settings, then Email Templates. This is where the wording of your confirmations, reminders and receipts lives. Why bother: The standard wording is perfectly serviceable and sounds like software. Two minutes making a confirmation sound like you is the difference between a message that reads as automated and one that reads as your business. What to change first: Your booking confirmation, because every customer receives it. Then your reminder, because it is the one that prevents no-shows. Keep the useful bits: Whatever you rewrite, the customer needs the date, the time, the service, the person and where to come. Charm is worth adding. It is not worth losing the address for. Say what to do if plans change: A line telling somebody how to move or cancel their booking saves you phone calls and gets you more notice when they cannot make it. Test before you rely on it: Make a booking yourself and read what arrives. A template that looks right in an editor sometimes reads oddly in a real inbox. Common questions: Can I add my logo? Branding comes from your business profile, so set your logo there and it carries through. Will changing a template affect emails already sent? No. Emails already sent are a record of what went out. Can I have different templates per service? Templates apply to the type of notification. Anything service-specific is better handled with a form or a note on the booking. --- ## Setting up messaging Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/setting-up-messaging Category: Notifications & messaging Go to Settings, then Messaging. This is where your text and WhatsApp arrangement is configured and where you can see what messaging is costing you. Before you enable a paid channel: Work out roughly what you will send. A hundred bookings a month with one reminder each is a hundred messages, and knowing that number in advance is better than discovering it on a bill. What to use SMS for: The day-before reminder, and cancellations somebody needs to know about now. Both are worth paying for because both directly protect revenue. What not to use it for: Anything that could wait for an email. Newsletters, offers and general updates all belong on a channel that costs nothing. Keep an eye on it: Check what you are spending occasionally rather than never. Messaging costs creep up quietly as your booking volume grows. Common questions: Do I need to set anything up to send email? No. Email works from the start. Messaging setup is only for SMS and WhatsApp. What happens when I run out of credit? Sends stop rather than failing silently, so you find out before your customers do. Can I cap what I spend? Watch the messaging area and keep paid channels to the notifications that genuinely need them. That is the effective control. --- ## Notification sequences Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/notification-sequences Category: Notifications & messaging A sequence is more than one message sent over time for the same thing. A reminder a week before, another the day before and a final one on the morning is a sequence rather than three separate settings. Where it helps: - Appointment reminders, where one message is often not enough - MOT reminders, where people mean to ring and then forget - Anything with a deadline the customer will otherwise miss Do not overdo it: Three messages about a haircut is nagging. Two is a reminder. Judge it by what you would want to receive about the same thing. Vary the channel: A sequence works best when the messages differ. An email a week out and a text the day before feels like two useful nudges. Two identical emails feel like a fault. Watch the cost: Every step in a sequence on a paid channel multiplies what you spend. A three-step SMS sequence costs three times a single text, for every booking. Common questions: How many steps should a sequence have? Two is right for most bookings. Three is worth it only where the customer is likely to forget entirely. Can I stop a sequence for one customer? A customer who has asked not to be contacted should be respected. Check their notification preferences and any suppression. Do sequences apply to marketing? Marketing goes through Campaigns. Sequences are for the service messages around a booking. --- ## Email deliverability Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/email-deliverability Category: Notifications & messaging Go to Settings, then Email Deliverability. It tracks how your customer emails are performing, what is being delivered and what is bouncing. Why look at it: Because a confirmation that never arrived is worse than one you never sent. The customer thinks they are not booked, and the first you hear about it is an empty slot or an angry phone call. What the numbers mean: - Delivered means it reached the mail server, which does not prove anyone read it - Bounced means it was rejected, and a hard bounce means the address does not exist - Repeated bounces to the same address are a sign of a typo in a customer record Fixing bounces: Correct the address on the customer record. If it cannot be corrected, ring them. An address that bounces will bounce every time until somebody changes it. Protecting your reputation: Repeatedly emailing addresses that do not exist damages how mail providers treat everything you send. Addresses that hard bounce are suppressed for exactly that reason. Common questions: A customer says they never got the confirmation. What do I check? Look here first to see whether it was delivered, then check the address, then ask them to check spam. Why do some customers never seem to receive anything? A hard bounce suppresses the address. Correct it on the record. Does a delivered email mean they read it? No. It means it reached their mail server. Anything after that is out of your hands. --- ## Emails not arriving Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/emails-not-arriving Category: Notifications & messaging Work through it in order. The address, then the delivery record, then the customer's spam folder. That sequence finds nearly every case. Step by step: 1. Open the customer record and check the email address character by character 2. Open Settings, then Email Deliverability, and look for the message 3. If it bounced, the address is wrong or no longer exists 4. If it was delivered, ask the customer to check spam and junk 5. Check the notification is actually switched on under Settings, then Notifications The most common cause by far: A typo. Gmail spelled gmial, a missing letter in a domain, a stray space at the end. It looks right at a glance and fails every time. The second most common: The notification is switched off. Somebody turned it off months ago and nobody remembered. Suppressed addresses: An address that has hard bounced is suppressed and will not be tried again. Correcting the address on the record is what fixes it. Common questions: Everything is going to spam. What can I do? Check the deliverability figures for bounces, keep your customer list clean and avoid subject lines that read like advertising. Only one customer is affected. What does that mean? Almost certainly their address or their mail provider. Ring them and confirm the address. Nobody is receiving anything. What now? Check the notification settings first, then the deliverability figures. If both look right, contact support. --- ## Push notifications on the app Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/push-notifications Category: Notifications & messaging Push notifications go to a customer's phone through the app. They arrive immediately, they cost nothing and they are on by default. Who receives them: Only customers who have the app installed and have allowed notifications on their device. Everyone else gets email instead, so nobody misses out. What they are good for: Reminders and anything time-sensitive. A push notification lands on a lock screen the way a text does, without the per-message cost. What they are not: A replacement for email. People delete apps, change phones and turn notifications off. Email remains the channel you can rely on for anything that matters. Encouraging the app: Customers with the app rebook more often, because booking again is two taps rather than finding your page. Mentioning it when somebody pays is usually enough. Common questions: Why did a customer not get a push notification? They either do not have the app, have not allowed notifications on their device or are signed out. Do push notifications cost anything? No. They are free, which is why they are on by default. Can I send a marketing message by push? Marketing goes through Campaigns and follows marketing consent. Push notifications here are for service messages about bookings. --- ## Notifications for you and your team Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/staff-notifications Category: Notifications & messaging What you and your team receive is separate from what customers receive. Your own alerts are set from your profile rather than from the customer notification settings. What is worth being told about: - A new booking, so you know the diary changed - A cancellation, because that is a gap you may want to fill - A new enquiry, because response time wins the work - A failed payment, because that needs chasing while it is fresh What is not: Every reminder that goes to a customer. Alerts you learn to ignore are worse than no alerts, because you stop reading the ones that matter. Different people need different alerts: Whoever answers the phone wants enquiries and cancellations. Whoever does the books wants failed payments. The same set for everybody suits nobody. Enquiries live in Inbox regardless: Even with every alert off, enquiries still arrive in Inbox. Alerts tell you to look, they are not the record. Common questions: Where do I set my own notifications? From your own profile area rather than the customer notification settings. Can each staff member choose their own? Yes. Their alerts are theirs to set. I am getting too many alerts. What should I turn off? Keep new bookings, cancellations, enquiries and failed payments. Turn off anything you have never acted on. --- ## The activity log Source: https://youzse.app/help/notifications-and-messaging/the-activity-log Category: Notifications & messaging Go to Settings, then Activity Log. It records what was done in your account, who did it and when. What it is for: Answering questions you cannot answer from memory. Who cancelled that booking. Who changed that price. Who removed somebody from the suppression list. Whether a former employee did anything on their last day. Why it matters beyond curiosity: If a customer asks who accessed their record, or you have to report a data breach, a log of who did what is the difference between an answer and a guess. Data protection expects you to be able to say. Some actions are logged deliberately: Taking somebody off the suppression list is recorded with who did it and when, because it undoes a person's stated wish. Actions with consequences leave a trail on purpose. Reading it: Look for the record and the time rather than scrolling. You are usually confirming a specific suspicion rather than browsing. Common questions: Can I edit or delete log entries? No, and that is the point. A log you can edit proves nothing. Who can see the activity log? It is behind a settings permission, so only people whose role allows it. Does it record what customers do? It records activity in your business account. Customer actions on their own bookings show on those bookings. --- ## Adding a team member Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/adding-a-team-member Category: Your team Open Staff in the sidebar and add the person. They are invited by email and set their own password, so you never handle it. What to fill in: - Their name as customers should see it - Their email address, which is how the invitation reaches them - Their job title, which shows on your public page - Their role, which decides what they can see and do Never share a login: Give everyone their own account. A shared login means you cannot tell who changed a price, who cancelled a booking or who looked at a customer record, and it means one person leaving forces everyone else to change their password. They set their own password: Passwords are never imported from another system and never set by you. That is deliberate, and it is why a staff import needs email addresses. After adding them: Set their working hours and which services they do. Neither comes from the invitation, and until you set them the person cannot be booked online. Common questions: The invitation never arrived. What now? Check the email address is right, then check the person's spam folder. You can resend the invitation from their staff record. Can I add someone without an email address? You can hold a staff record for the diary, but they cannot log in until an address is added. Does adding staff cost more? That depends on your plan. Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing, for how yours counts team members. --- ## Roles and permissions explained Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/roles-and-permissions Category: Your team Every team member has a role and the role is a set of permissions. Manage them under Settings, then Roles, where you create and edit roles to control what people can access. Why permissions rather than trust: It is not about whether you trust your team. It is about limiting what a mistake can do, keeping customer data seen only by people who need it and being able to answer honestly if a customer asks who could see their record. What permissions cover: Each area has its own. Viewing customers, editing them, seeing appointments, taking payments, running reports, changing settings, reading enquiries and approving leave are all separate. The principle to follow: Give people what their job needs and nothing beyond it. A stylist needs the diary and their own clients. They do not need billing, and giving it to them helps nobody. Data protection expects this: Restricting access to personal data to people who need it is part of handling it properly. If everyone can see everything, that is difficult to defend. Common questions: Can one person have two roles? Each team member has one role. Where somebody genuinely does two jobs, create a role that covers both. Will changing a role log people out? No, but permission changes take effect for that person. Someone mid-task may be told they no longer have access, which is working correctly. Who can change roles? Only somebody whose own role allows managing settings. That is the permission to be most careful with. --- ## Creating a custom role Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/creating-a-custom-role Category: Your team Go to Settings, then Roles, and create one. Name it after the job rather than the person, choose the permissions it needs, then assign people to it. Name it after the job: Front desk, Senior stylist, Technician, Chair renter. A role called Sarah has to be rebuilt when Sarah leaves and tells the next person nothing. Build it up rather than down: Start with nothing and add what the job actually requires. Starting from everything and removing bits is how permissions nobody intended survive for years. Roles worth having: - Front desk, with the diary, customers and taking payments, but no settings and no reports - Practitioner, with their own diary and their own clients - Manager, with reports and staff but not billing - Chair renter, with their own diary and their own clients only Test it: The reliable check is to ask the person to do their normal work for a day and tell you what they could not reach. Guessing from a list of tick boxes misses things. Common questions: Can I copy an existing role? Build the new one and set the permissions you want. Naming it clearly matters more than saving the setup time. What happens to people in a role I delete? Move them to another role first. Leaving somebody without a role means they can sign in and do nothing. Should everyone have their own role? No. Roles describe jobs. If you have as many roles as staff, they have stopped being roles. --- ## Setting staff working hours Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/setting-staff-working-hours Category: Your team Open Staff, open the person and set their working hours. Those hours are what generate the bookable slots customers see for them. Business hours and staff hours: Your business hours say when you are open. Staff hours say when each person works. Somebody can only be booked when both allow it, which is how a part-timer works correctly inside a shop that opens six days. Get these right first: Almost every complaint that no slots are showing comes back to working hours. Before looking at anything else, check the person actually has hours set for the day in question. Breaks: Set lunch and regular breaks as part of the pattern so they are protected automatically. Relying on remembering to block them out is how people end up working through lunch. Changing them later: Changing hours affects future availability. Bookings already taken stay where they are, so shortening a day does not silently cancel somebody's appointment. Move those yourself. Common questions: Why can nobody book with a particular staff member? Nine times out of ten they have no working hours set. Check that before anything else. Can hours differ week to week? Set the usual pattern, then use time off for the exceptions. That is easier to maintain than a pattern that changes constantly. Do working hours stop me adding a booking myself? No. You can always add a booking yourself. Working hours govern what customers can book online. --- ## Choosing which staff do which services Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/staff-and-services Category: Your team Open Services and set who can do each one. A customer booking a service then sees only the people who actually perform it. Why it matters: Without this, a customer can book a colour with somebody who does not colour. You find out on the day, and the choice is between letting them down or doing work the person is not trained for. It is not just about skill: Use it for anything that should limit who takes the work. Training levels, certifications, senior pricing or a treatment only one room is equipped for. Different prices for different people: Where a senior member of staff charges more, that is usually a separate service assigned only to them. It keeps the booking page honest about what each person costs. After importing: Which staff do which services is almost never in an export, so it is one of the first things to set up after a migration. Until you do, availability will look wrong. Common questions: What if everyone does everything? Assign every service to everyone. Small teams often work that way and that is fine. Can a customer pick any staff member? Only those assigned to the service they chose. An any-available option lets them not care, which fills your diary more evenly. Someone is missing from a service. Why? Either they are not assigned to it or they have no working hours. Check the assignment first. --- ## Staff profiles on your booking page Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/staff-profiles-on-your-page Category: Your team A staff profile carries a photo, a job title and a short biography, and it shows on your public page when a customer is choosing who to book with. Why it is worth doing: People book people. A new customer choosing between two names they know nothing about picks at random. Give them a face and two sentences and they choose deliberately, turn up expecting that person and rebook with them. What makes a good profile: - A clear, friendly photograph taken in reasonable light - A job title that means something to a customer rather than to the trade - Two or three sentences on what they specialise in Photographs: Consistency matters more than production values. Five photos taken against the same wall on the same phone look far better together than five taken in different places over three years. Keeping it current: Update profiles when people change roles or leave. A profile for somebody who left last spring is the kind of detail customers notice. Common questions: Do I have to show my staff publicly? No. Businesses where the customer does not choose the person often leave profiles off entirely. Can a staff member edit their own profile? That depends on their permissions. Their own profile area is where they would do it. What if somebody does not want their photo online? Leave it off. A profile without a photo is better than one somebody is uncomfortable with. --- ## Booking time off for a staff member Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/booking-staff-time-off Category: Your team Book the time off against the person and they stop being bookable for those dates. Customers cannot book them and the diary shows why they are unavailable. Do it as soon as you know: Time off entered late is the classic cause of the booking you have to ring somebody up and move. The five minutes it takes to record a holiday in March saves an awkward phone call in July. Booking on behalf of your team: Managers with the right permission can enter leave for other people from Settings, then Leave Approvals. That matters for anyone who tells you in passing rather than using the system, which in most small businesses is most people. Existing bookings are not cancelled: Blocking out time stops new bookings. Anything already in the diary stays there, so check the dates and move what needs moving. Half days and odd hours: Use time off for a dental appointment or an early finish just as you would for a fortnight away. Anything that should stop bookings belongs here. Common questions: What happens to bookings already in the diary? They stay. Time off prevents new bookings rather than removing existing ones, which is why you check the dates first. Does the customer get told? Not automatically, because nothing has been cancelled. If you move a booking, tell them yourself. Can staff enter their own time off? With leave management they can request it and you approve. Otherwise it is entered for them. --- ## Setting a leave policy Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/setting-a-leave-policy Category: Your team Go to Settings, then Leave Policy, to set the rules that govern how staff can request time off. It is part of the staff leave management feature, so it appears once your plan includes it. What the feature covers: An approval workflow, allowance tracking and a team holiday calendar. Together they replace the group chat, the wall planner and the argument in August about who asked first. What to decide: - How much notice a request needs - How much leave each person gets - How many people can be off at once - Who approves what Set the maximum off at once carefully: This is the rule that saves you. Two people off the same week in a team of four means turning customers away, and it is much easier to have the system decline it than to have the conversation afterwards. Write it down anyway: The settings enforce the rules. A short written policy explains them, and people follow rules they understand far better than rules that simply reject their request. Common questions: I cannot see Leave Policy. Why? Staff leave management is a plan feature. Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing, to see whether your plan includes it. Does it track how much leave people have left? Yes, allowance tracking is part of the feature. What if I only have one member of staff? Then a policy is probably more machinery than you need. Book time off directly instead. --- ## Approving leave requests Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/approving-leave-requests Category: Your team Go to Settings, then Leave Approvals. It shows requests waiting for an answer, lets you browse all staff leave and lets you book time off on behalf of your team. Answer quickly: People are trying to book flights. A request sitting unanswered for three weeks costs somebody money and costs you goodwill, and it is the single thing staff complain about most with any leave system. Seeing the whole picture: Browsing all staff leave together is what stops you approving three people for the same week. Check the calendar before you answer rather than after. Booking on behalf of somebody: Useful for the person who tells you in passing rather than using the system, and for time off you are giving rather than they are asking for. Who can approve: Approving leave is its own permission, so you can give a manager approvals without giving them the rest of settings. Once approved: The person is blocked out of the diary for those dates. Check nothing was already booked with them and move anything that was. Common questions: Can I approve part of a request? Talk to the person and have them request the days that work. Half-approving something they did not ask for causes more confusion than it solves. Does the staff member get told? They see the outcome of their request. Notification settings control what else is sent. What if I decline? Say why. A declined request with no reason is the fastest way to make a good employee start looking elsewhere. --- ## Business holidays and closures Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/business-holidays Category: Your team Go to Settings, then Business Holidays, to mark the days you are closed. No bookings can be made on those dates by anybody. The difference from staff time off: Business holidays close the whole business. Staff time off blocks one person. Christmas is a business holiday. Somebody's fortnight in Spain is time off. Put the bank holidays in now: Do the whole year in one sitting. It takes ten minutes and prevents the recurring problem of somebody booking Christmas Eve at four o'clock because nobody had closed it off. Check before you close: Marking a date closed stops new bookings but does not remove bookings already taken. Look at the day first and move anything that is in there. Tell your customers: Your opening hours and closures show on your public page, which answers most of it. A short note in December about your Christmas hours saves a lot of phone calls. Common questions: Does this cancel bookings already made? No. It prevents new ones. Check the day and move anything already booked. Can I close one location and not another? Locations have their own hours. Set closures for the site they apply to. What about a half day? Adjust the opening hours for that day rather than closing it, so people can still book the morning. --- ## When a staff member leaves Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/when-a-staff-member-leaves Category: Your team Remove their access on their last day. Then deal with the diary, the profile and anything addressed to them. Do it in this order: 1. Remove their access, so they can no longer sign in 2. Reassign or contact anyone booked with them in the future 3. Take their profile off your public page 4. Clear their working hours so no more slots are offered Access first, everything else after: A former employee who can still sign in can see your entire customer list. Whatever the circumstances of them leaving, that access goes on the last day rather than when you get round to it. Their bookings are the urgent bit: Customers booked with somebody who has left need telling and rebooking. Doing it before they find out on the day is the difference between a minor inconvenience and a lost customer. Keep the history: Removing access does not erase what they did. Past bookings, invoices and the activity log stay intact, which you need for your records and for answering questions later. Common questions: Should I delete the staff member entirely? No. Their history is attached to real bookings and invoices. Remove access and take them off the public page. What if they had customers who only saw them? Contact those customers personally before they book again. Handled well it keeps them, handled badly they follow the person. Can I see what they did before they left? Yes. Settings, then Activity Log, records who did what. --- ## Why a team member cannot see something Source: https://youzse.app/help/your-team/staff-cannot-see-something Category: Your team Check their role first. Nine times in ten a page missing for one person and present for you is a permission they do not have. Work through it in this order: 1. Open Settings, then Roles, and look at the role that person is on 2. Check whether the permission for that area is granted 3. If the page is missing for everyone including you, it is a plan feature rather than a permission 4. Ask them to sign out and back in after a change Permission or plan: The quick test is whether you can see it yourself. If you can and they cannot, it is their role. If nobody can, the feature is not on your plan. Features that need a plan: Classes need group bookings. The workshop, vehicles, parts, suppliers and purchase orders need Garage Pro. Leave approvals need staff leave management. After changing a role: Changes take effect for that person straight away, though somebody mid-task may need to sign out and back in for the sidebar to catch up. Common questions: They can see the page but cannot save. Why? Viewing and editing are separate permissions. They have one and not the other. Everyone including me is missing something. What is it? A plan feature. Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing. Can I see what somebody actually did? Yes. Settings, then Activity Log, records actions with who took them and when. --- ## What Garage Pro adds Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/what-garage-pro-adds Category: Garage & workshop Garage Pro is the version of Youzse built for garages and workshops. It adds a set of pages the standard product line does not have at all. What appears in your sidebar: - Workshop, for running jobs through bays and mechanics - Vehicles, for vehicle records tied to their keeper - Parts, for your parts catalogue - Suppliers, for the factors you buy from - Purchase orders, for what you have ordered - Part requests, for parts a mechanic needs on a live job Plus registration lookups: Vehicle and MOT data is looked up from the registration, so you type seven characters instead of a make, model, engine size, fuel type and MOT date. If you cannot see these: You are on the standard product line. These pages are not hidden by a permission, they are not part of that product at all. Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing. What stays the same: Everything else. Customers, bookings, invoices, payments, reminders and reports work the way they do everywhere else. Garage Pro adds to the platform rather than replacing it. Common questions: Can I switch to Garage Pro later? Yes. Your existing customers, bookings and invoices stay exactly as they are and the garage pages appear. Do I need Garage Pro to book vehicle work? No. You can take bookings and invoice for vehicle work on the standard product. Garage Pro adds the vehicle records, the workshop and the parts side. Is it only for MOT centres? No. It suits any workshop, including mobile mechanics, tyre fitters and valeters, wherever the vehicle matters as much as the customer. --- ## Looking up a vehicle by registration Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/vehicle-lookup Category: Garage & workshop Enter the registration and the vehicle details come back automatically. Make, model, specification and MOT information are filled in for you. Why it matters: Typing vehicle details by hand is slow and produces mistakes that surface later, usually when the wrong part has been ordered. A lookup takes seconds and is right. Where you can do it: From Vehicles when adding a vehicle, and while creating a booking for vehicle work, so the details are attached from the start. Refreshing a record: Vehicle data can be refreshed on an existing record, which is worth doing when a vehicle comes back after a year. MOT dates in particular move. If a lookup fails: Check the registration for the usual confusions between a zero and the letter O, or a one and the letter I. Very new, personally imported or recently re-plated vehicles are sometimes not found, in which case enter the details by hand. Lookups are metered: Vehicle data comes from a paid data source, so lookups are a real cost. It is worth knowing that before running the whole car park through it out of curiosity. Common questions: Do I need Garage Pro for lookups? Yes. Registration lookups are part of Garage Pro. Is MOT information included? Yes, and it is what drives MOT reminders. What if the details come back wrong? Edit the record. The lookup fills the details in and does not lock them. --- ## Managing your vehicle records Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/managing-vehicles Category: Garage & workshop Open Vehicles in the sidebar. Each vehicle is its own record attached to the customer who keeps it, with the work you have done on it. Why vehicles are separate from customers: A customer can have three vehicles and a vehicle can change hands. Keeping them as separate records linked together means history follows the vehicle where that is right and follows the person where that is right. What a vehicle record holds: Registration, make, model, specification from the lookup, its keeper and the jobs you have done on it. Photos can be attached, which is worth doing for damage you want a record of before you start work. Marking a vehicle sold: When a vehicle leaves your customer's ownership and you do not know where it went, mark it sold. It stops appearing in reminders while its history is kept. Import order: Import customers before vehicles, so each vehicle attaches to the right keeper rather than arriving orphaned. Common questions: Can one customer have several vehicles? Yes, as many as they keep. Each has its own record and history. What happens if a customer sells their car? Transfer it to the new keeper if they are also your customer, or mark it sold if not. Does the service history follow the vehicle? The work done stays on the vehicle record, which is what makes a full history useful when it comes back. --- ## Transferring a vehicle to a new keeper Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/transferring-a-vehicle Category: Garage & workshop Open the vehicle and transfer it to the new customer. The vehicle keeps its service history and the keeper changes. When you need it: A customer sells a car to a family member, or a car you have serviced for years turns up with somebody new who says they bought it from your existing customer. Both are common and both are handled by transferring rather than creating a second record. Why not just create a new record: Because you lose the history. A vehicle you have serviced for six years is worth more to you and to the new owner with that history attached. What to check afterwards: - The new keeper's contact details are right, since reminders will go to them - Any future bookings are against the right customer - MOT reminders now reach the new owner rather than the old one Where the vehicle has left your customers entirely: Mark it sold instead. That stops reminders without deleting anything. Common questions: Does the old customer keep the history? The history stays with the vehicle. The previous keeper keeps their own record and everything else they own. What about invoices already raised? Invoices stay with the customer they were raised against, which is correct for your accounts. Can I transfer to somebody who is not a customer yet? Create them as a customer first, then transfer. --- ## Running a job through the workshop Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/running-a-workshop-job Category: Garage & workshop Open Workshop in the sidebar. It shows the jobs in progress, which bay each is in and which mechanic is on it. Why a workshop view rather than a diary: A booking says a car is coming at nine. A job says where the car is now, who is working on it and whether it is waiting for a part. Those are different questions and the workshop answers the second. Assigning bays and mechanics: A job can be assigned to a bay and a mechanic, and both can be changed as the day moves. That is what makes the board worth looking at when somebody asks whether the car will be ready. Health checks can be required: A job can be set to need its vehicle health check completed before it can be finished. Try to close one without it and you are sent to the health check to complete it first. That is deliberate, because a check nobody did is worse than no check at all. Parts mid-job: A mechanic who needs a part raises a part request from the job rather than walking to the office. It goes for approval and the job records that it is waiting. Common questions: Why can I not mark a job complete? The job requires a vehicle health check and it has not been completed. You are taken to the check so you can finish it. Is the workshop the same as the calendar? No. The calendar is what is booked in. The workshop is what is happening right now. Can a mechanic see only their own jobs? Yes. My Workshop is the mechanic view, showing the work assigned to them. --- ## The mechanic dashboard Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/the-mechanic-dashboard Category: Garage & workshop My Workshop is the mechanic's own view. It shows the jobs assigned to them and lets them clock on and off, without the whole workshop board and everything else in the sidebar. Why a separate view: A mechanic with oily hands and a phone needs today's jobs and a way to record time. Giving them the full system is slower for them and grants access nobody needs. Clocking on and off: Time on a job is recorded by clocking on and off it. Clock status shows what somebody is currently on, which is how you tell whether a job has actually been started. Clock off at the end of the day: A session left running overnight produces a job that appears to have taken eighteen hours. Get into the habit of clocking off and check at the end of the day for anything still running. Permissions: What a mechanic sees is controlled by their role. A role with the workshop and their own jobs but not settings, billing or reports is the usual shape. Common questions: Can a mechanic see other people's jobs? My Workshop shows their own. Whether they can reach the full board depends on their role. What if somebody forgets to clock off? Check the clock status and correct it. A forgotten session skews any time reporting you do. Does clocking on start the job? It records that the mechanic is working on it, which is what tells the office the car has been started. --- ## Vehicle health checks Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/vehicle-health-checks Category: Garage & workshop A vehicle health check is a structured record of a vehicle's condition, completed against a template as the mechanic works through it. Why they earn their keep: A health check turns an opinion into a record. Instead of telling a customer their tyres are getting low, you show them what was measured and when. It sells the work you genuinely should be doing and protects you when somebody says nobody mentioned it. Completing one: Open the job and work through the check. Each item is recorded as you go, so the check is built while the vehicle is on the ramp rather than remembered afterwards. Making it compulsory: A job can require its health check before it can be finished. Attempting to close the job sends you to the check instead. That is the setting that turns health checks from a good intention into something that happens on every vehicle. Talking to the customer: Report what was found, what needs doing now and what can wait. A check that turns every finding into urgent work stops being believed after the second visit. Common questions: Why will my job not close? It requires a health check that has not been completed. Finish the check and the job can be closed. Can I create my own check sheets? Yes, health check templates are yours to build. Does the customer get a copy? The check is recorded against the job and the vehicle, which is what you work from when you talk to them. --- ## Building health check templates Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/evhc-templates Category: Garage & workshop A template is the list of things a health check asks about. Build yours so every mechanic checks the same items in the same order on every vehicle. Why templates rather than free text: Consistency. Two mechanics writing their own notes produce two different standards of check and neither can be compared with the last visit. A template makes the check repeatable and the history comparable. What to include: The things you would actually look at on the ramp. Tyres and tread depths, brakes, lights, fluids, suspension, exhaust, wipers, battery. Anything you routinely find and routinely sell work on. Keep it short enough to be done properly: A forty-item check that takes half an hour gets rushed and ticked. Twenty items done honestly are worth more than forty done at speed. More than one template: Different templates suit different work. A quick check on an interim service is not the same as a full inspection before a long trip. Common questions: Where do I build them? Health check templates are managed from the workshop settings area, alongside the rest of your workshop configuration. Can I change a template later? Yes. Checks already completed keep the questions they were completed against, so your history stays honest. Should every job have a check? Most workshops require one on any job where the vehicle is on a ramp. It takes minutes and consistently pays for itself. --- ## Your parts catalogue Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/your-parts-catalogue Category: Garage & workshop Open Parts in the sidebar. It is the catalogue of parts you fit, with the details and costs you need to price a job. Why keep a catalogue: Because you fit the same parts repeatedly. Having them recorded means a job is priced from what you actually paid rather than from memory, and the margin on a job becomes a number rather than a hope. What to put in it: Start with what you fit most often. Filters, pads, discs, bulbs, wiper blades, oil. The long tail of parts you have fitted once is not worth typing in. Costs and prices: Record what you pay so you can see the margin. A part whose cost has crept up over two years while your price stayed the same is invisible until it is written down. Parts on a job: Parts are added to a job as they are used, which is what puts them on the invoice and keeps the job costing honest. Common questions: Do I have to add every part I fit? No. Build up the ones you use often and add the rest as one-offs on the job. Does this track stock levels? The catalogue holds your parts and their costs. Purchase Orders records what you have ordered from suppliers. Can a mechanic add a part themselves? A mechanic on a live job raises a part request, which goes for approval rather than straight onto the job. --- ## Approving part requests Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/approving-part-requests Category: Garage & workshop Open Part Requests in the sidebar, under Automotive. When a mechanic needs a part for a job they raise a request, and it moves through pending, approved and on order. Why requests rather than just ordering: It puts a decision between the workshop and the money. Somebody sees the cost, checks the customer has authorised the work and orders once rather than twice. It also means the office knows why a car is sitting there. The three states: - Pending, waiting for somebody to decide - Approved, agreed and ready to order - On order, ordered from the supplier and waiting to arrive Deal with pending quickly: A pending request is a vehicle on a ramp doing nothing. Requests waiting an hour cost you a bay and requests waiting until tomorrow cost you a customer. Approving is its own permission: Give it to whoever should be making the spending decision. It does not have to be the same person who runs the settings. Common questions: Who can approve part requests? Anyone whose role includes the approval permission, which you set under Settings, then Roles. Does approving order the part? Approving agrees it. Ordering is what moves it to on order, and purchase orders are where you record that with the supplier. Can a mechanic see the status of their request? Yes, from the job. That is how they know whether to move on to another car. --- ## Suppliers and purchase orders Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/purchase-orders-and-suppliers Category: Garage & workshop Suppliers holds the factors and merchants you buy from. Purchase Orders records what you have ordered from them, at what price and for which job. Why write purchase orders down: Because otherwise the answer to what a job cost you is a guess. A purchase order ties the part, the price and the job together, which is the only way to know whether the work made money. The states an order moves through: It starts as a draft, is sent to the supplier, then is marked partially received or received as the parts arrive. Seeing what is still outstanding tells you which jobs are waiting on deliveries. Receiving properly: Mark orders received when the parts actually turn up. An order left open looks like a part you are still waiting for, and that is the thing that keeps a car in a bay for an extra day. Supplier records: Keep the account number, contact and terms on the supplier. It is the information you want when a delivery is wrong and you need somebody on the phone quickly. Importing suppliers: A supplier list from an accounting export can be imported as companies. Sage and QuickBooks exports carry the details you need. Common questions: Can I send a purchase order to the supplier? Purchase orders are produced as documents you can send, with your own branding from the PDF template settings. What happens when part of an order arrives? Record what came in. The rest stays outstanding so it is still visible. Do purchase orders affect my invoices? They record what you spent. What you charge the customer is set on the job and the invoice. --- ## MOT reminders Source: https://youzse.app/help/garage-and-workshop/mot-reminders Category: Garage & workshop Go to Settings, then MOT Reminders. It contacts customers before their MOT falls due, using the due date that came back with the vehicle lookup. Why it is the best thing in Garage Pro: Every vehicle you have ever seen needs an MOT once a year, and the garage that reminds people is the garage that gets the booking. It is repeat work that arrives without you doing anything, from customers you already have. You do not have to maintain the dates: Due dates come from the vehicle data rather than from somebody typing them into a spreadsheet. Refresh a vehicle record and the date is current. Timing: Far enough ahead that people can plan and close enough that they have not booked elsewhere. Two to three weeks suits most, and a second nudge in the final week catches the ones who meant to ring. Keep your vehicle records clean: Reminders are only as good as the records behind them. Mark vehicles sold when they leave your customers and transfer them when they change hands, or you are reminding people about cars they no longer own. Common questions: Where does the MOT date come from? From the vehicle lookup rather than from you. Refresh a record if you want to be sure it is current. Do reminders cost anything? Email is included. Text messages have a per-message cost, so check Settings, then Messaging. Can a customer opt out? Yes, and it is honoured. An MOT reminder is a service message about their vehicle, but somebody who asks not to be contacted should not be. --- ## Reading your reports Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/reading-your-reports Category: Reports & exports Open Reports in the sidebar. It shows revenue, bookings and how the business is doing across a period you choose. Where to start: Compare a period against the one before it. A revenue figure on its own means very little. The same figure next to last month tells you something you can act on. What is worth looking at regularly: - Revenue for the period, against the period before - Number of bookings, which tells you whether a revenue change came from volume or from price - Which services are actually selling - Which staff are busiest, and who has gaps Volume or price: This is the question most small businesses never ask. Revenue up with fewer bookings means you are charging better. Revenue up with far more bookings means you are working harder for it. Those need different responses. Do not check it daily: Daily figures are noise. Weekly and monthly are where the pattern is, and looking too often mostly produces anxiety. Common questions: Who can see reports? Anyone whose role includes the reports permission, which you set under Settings, then Roles. Do reports include unpaid invoices? Look at what has been invoiced against what has been paid. An outstanding invoice is not money you have. Can I get the underlying data? Yes. Exports give you the detail behind the figures. --- ## Your dashboard Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/your-dashboard Category: Reports & exports The dashboard is what you land on when you sign in. It is built from widgets, and which ones you see can be arranged to suit how you work. What it is for: The five-second version of the business. What is happening today, what needs attention, what came in. It is a glance rather than a reporting tool. Arranging it: Put what you act on at the top. For most businesses that is today's diary and anything needing a decision, not a revenue chart you look at once a month. Different businesses need different dashboards: A garage wants today's jobs and what is waiting on parts. A salon wants the diary and the gaps. Somebody doing the books wants outstanding invoices. Arrange it for the job you actually do. If it looks empty: A new account has nothing to show yet. It fills in as bookings and customers arrive. Common questions: Can each staff member arrange their own? What people see is shaped by their role and their own layout, so a mechanic and an owner do not see the same screen. Why is a widget missing? Either your role does not include that area or the feature is not on your plan. Does the dashboard update live? It reflects the state when you load it. Refresh if you have been sitting on it for a while. --- ## Numbers worth watching every week Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/numbers-to-watch-weekly Category: Reports & exports Four figures, once a week, ten minutes. Bookings taken, revenue, no-shows and how full next week looks. Bookings taken this week: Not appointments delivered, bookings made. It is a leading number, so it tells you about next month rather than last month, which is the only kind of number you can still do something about. Revenue: Against the same week last month and, if you have the history, the same week last year. Seasonal businesses that compare against last week alone frighten themselves every January. No-shows: Count them. Most businesses feel no-shows rather than measuring them, and the feeling is usually worse than the number. If the number really is bad, deposits are the answer. How full next week looks: Gaps you can see on Monday are gaps you can fill. Gaps you notice on Friday are lost. What to do with them: Write them down somewhere. Four numbers in a notebook every Monday for a year is a better management report than any dashboard you never look at. Common questions: Is once a week often enough? Yes, for nearly every small business. Daily is noise. Which single number matters most? Bookings taken, because it is the one that tells you what is coming. What if the numbers are bad? Look at the gaps first. Filling a quiet week from your existing customers is quicker than anything else available to you. --- ## Spotting customers who have stopped coming Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/spotting-lapsed-customers Category: Reports & exports Build a segment of customers who have not booked for a while and look at it once a month. It is the cheapest new work available to you. Why lapsed customers get missed: Nobody cancels. They just stop coming, and because there is no moment where it happens you never notice. A customer who came every six weeks for two years and has not been in since March is invisible unless you go looking. Choosing the window: Base it on how often people normally come. For a six-weekly haircut, three months is lapsed. For an annual service, three months is nothing. Set the window against your own pattern. What to do about it: Contact them. Not with a discount straight away, just a note that it has been a while. Plenty of people meant to rebook and forgot, and that costs you nothing to fix. Why they left: Some moved away, some found somebody else, some had a bad visit nobody heard about. The last group is worth knowing about and they will usually tell you if asked directly. Common questions: How far back should I go? Two or three times your normal booking interval. Beyond that they have genuinely gone. Can I contact them if they never opted into marketing? Not with marketing. Contacting somebody about work you have done for them is different, and the line is worth respecting. How often should I check? Monthly is plenty. It is a slow-moving list. --- ## Understanding your revenue figures Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/understanding-revenue-figures Category: Reports & exports Three numbers get confused with each other. What you invoiced, what you collected and what has reached your bank are not the same, and the gaps between them are normal. Invoiced: What you have billed. It includes anything unpaid, so it is the most optimistic of the three. Collected: What customers have actually paid. This is your real revenue for the period. In your bank: What has been paid out to you. Card payments settle on a delay, so the money arrives after the customer paid it. That gap is normal and is not money going missing. Fees: Card processing takes a percentage. What is paid out is what the customer paid less fees, which is why a payout rarely matches a day's takings exactly. Gift cards are not revenue yet: Money taken for a gift card is a liability until the work is done. Counting it as income is how businesses end up busy in February with nothing coming in. Common questions: Why is my payout smaller than my takings? Processing fees, and the timing of when payments settled. Open the payout to see what it covers. When does the money arrive? Payouts run on a schedule with a delay after the payment. See payouts and getting your money. Which number do I give my accountant? They will want the detail rather than a headline. Export the underlying data. --- ## VAT in Youzse Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/vat-in-youzse Category: Reports & exports VAT in the sidebar shows the VAT on your invoices across a period. Set your VAT details up first under Settings, then VAT. Set it up before you invoice: Your VAT number and rate belong on invoices from the first one you send. Correcting VAT on invoices already issued is a genuine nuisance, so do it before you go live rather than after. What the area gives you: The VAT figures from your invoices for a period, which is what you or your accountant work from at return time. It is not a filing tool: Youzse shows you the numbers from your invoices. Filing your return is done with HMRC, and how you do that is between you and your accountant. Imported invoices: Historical invoices imported from another system carry their VAT figures. Check the changeover period carefully before filing, since that is where the overlaps happen. If VAT is not in your sidebar: It appears once VAT is enabled for your account. Check Settings, then VAT. Common questions: I am not VAT registered. Do I need any of this? No. Leave it alone until you register. Can I change the VAT rate on one service? Rates are set as part of your VAT configuration and applied to what you sell. Set it up under Settings, then VAT. Does Youzse file my return? No. It gives you the figures. Filing is with HMRC. --- ## Exporting your data Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/exporting-your-data Category: Reports & exports Exports give you the records behind the figures as a file you can open in a spreadsheet. When you need one: - Your accountant wants the detail rather than a summary - You want to analyse something reports do not cover - You are asked for a copy of somebody's data - You want your own backup It is your data: Being able to get your records out whenever you want is not a favour. It is what stops any platform, including this one, holding you hostage. Take an export occasionally so you know you can. Personal data in exports: An export of customers is a file full of personal data sitting on a laptop. Keep it somewhere sensible and delete it when you are done. The obligations that apply in the system apply to the copy on your desktop. Responding to a data request: Where a customer asks for the data you hold about them, an export is part of how you answer. There is a separate article on doing that properly. Common questions: What format do exports come in? A spreadsheet-friendly file you can open in Excel, Numbers or Google Sheets. Can I export everything at once? Export the areas you need. Taking each type separately is also easier to work with afterwards. Who can export? It is permission-controlled, because an export is a copy of your customer data. --- ## Getting your data out if you leave Source: https://youzse.app/help/reports-and-exports/leaving-youzse Category: Reports & exports Export what you need before you cancel. Access to a platform ends when the subscription does, and that is true here as it is anywhere else. What to take: - Your customer list - Your booking history - Your invoices, which you are required to keep for tax purposes - Your services and prices Why we say this plainly: Because a platform that makes leaving difficult is telling you something about how it expects to keep you. Your records are yours and being able to walk out with them is the point. Do it before you cancel: Not after. Take the exports, open them and check they contain what you expect while you still have the account. Your tax records: Invoices have to be kept for years after the work. Export them and store them properly rather than assuming you can come back for them. If you are leaving because something is not working: Tell us first. A fair number of departures turn out to be a setting nobody found or a feature nobody knew existed. Common questions: How long do I have after cancelling? Do not rely on a window. Export everything before you cancel. Will my customers be told? No. What you tell them is your decision, and worth planning if they book online with you. Can I come back? Yes, and your export is what you would import to pick up where you left off. --- ## No available slots are showing Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/no-available-slots Category: Troubleshooting Nine times in ten it is working hours. Check those first, then whether anybody is assigned to the service, then your booking rules. Work through it in order: 1. Open Staff and check the person has working hours set for the day in question 2. Open Services and check somebody is assigned to that service 3. Check the day is not a business holiday 4. Check nobody has time off covering it 5. Check your booking rules for a notice period longer than you meant The notice period catch: A rule requiring forty-eight hours' notice means today and tomorrow show nothing. That is working correctly and it looks exactly like a fault. If you want same-day bookings, the notice period is what to change. How far ahead can people book: If your booking window is short, dates beyond it show nothing. Somebody trying to book three months out sees an empty calendar. Test it yourself: Open your own public page in a private browser window and try to book. Seeing what a customer sees settles most of these in a minute. Common questions: It works for one staff member and not another. What is different? Their working hours, or the services they are assigned to. Compare the two people. Slots show for next week but not this week. Why? Your notice period. It is doing what it was set to do. Everything looks right and there are still no slots. What now? Check your business hours as well as the staff hours. Both have to allow the slot. --- ## My booking page is not showing what I expect Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/booking-page-not-updating Category: Troubleshooting Open your public page in a private browser window. That shows you what customers see rather than what your browser remembered. Why a private window: Normal browsing keeps a copy of pages you have visited. You can be looking at yesterday's version of your own page while every customer sees the new one, or the other way round. Work through it: 1. Check the change was actually saved rather than left in a form 2. Open your public page in a private window 3. Check the service or staff member is set to show publicly 4. Check the person has working hours and is assigned to the service Things hidden on purpose: A service can be set not to show publicly, which is right for work you only book yourself. If a service is missing from your page, check that first. Prices and descriptions: These come from the service record. Change them under Services rather than anywhere else. Common questions: I changed a price and the old one is showing. Why? Your browser is showing a stored copy. Check in a private window. A staff member is missing from my page. Why? Either they are not assigned to that service, they have no working hours, or their profile is not set to show publicly. It looks right for me and wrong for a customer. What now? Ask them to reload the page. If it persists, contact support with a screenshot. --- ## A feature is missing from my sidebar Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/a-feature-is-missing-from-my-sidebar Category: Troubleshooting It is one of two things. Either your role does not include that area, or the feature is not part of your plan or product line. Telling them apart: If somebody else in the business can see it and you cannot, it is your role. If nobody can see it, it is the plan. Features that depend on a plan or product line: - Classes need group bookings - Workshop, Vehicles, Parts, Suppliers, Purchase orders and Part requests need Garage Pro - Leave Policy and Leave Approvals need staff leave management - VAT appears once VAT is enabled for your account If it is a permission: Somebody with settings access can adjust the role under Settings, then Roles. After a change, sign out and back in if the sidebar has not caught up. If it is a plan: Check Settings, then Subscription and Billing, to see what your plan includes. Common questions: I upgraded and still cannot see it. What now? Sign out and back in. If it is still missing, contact support with the feature name. Why is the workshop missing when I run a garage? The workshop is part of Garage Pro rather than the standard product line. Can I try a feature before paying for it? Ask support. It is a better use of your time than guessing from a pricing page. --- ## I cannot sign in Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/cannot-sign-in Category: Troubleshooting Use the password reset on the sign-in page. If the password is fine and two-factor is the obstacle, use one of your recovery codes. Work through it: 1. Check you are using the right email address, since people often have two 2. Reset your password from the sign-in page 3. If the reset email does not arrive, check spam 4. If two-factor is the problem, use a recovery code 5. If you have no recovery codes left, contact support Recovery codes: These are the codes you were given when you switched two-factor on. They exist precisely for a lost or wiped phone. If you have never saved them, do that now while you can still sign in. A new phone: Two-factor lives on the device rather than in the cloud. Set it up again on the new phone before wiping the old one if you can, and use a recovery code if you cannot. Repeated failed attempts: Sign-in is rate limited after several failures, which is deliberate. Wait a few minutes rather than trying harder. Common questions: I have no recovery codes and a new phone. What now? Contact support. Expect to prove who you are, because the alternative would make two-factor pointless. Why was I signed out? Sessions expire for security. Signing in again is normal rather than a fault. Can somebody else reset my password for me? No. Reset links go to your own email address, which is what makes them safe. --- ## A customer says they did not get a confirmation Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/customer-did-not-get-confirmation Category: Troubleshooting Three checks, in this order. The address on their record, the delivery record, then whether the notification is switched on at all. The checks: 1. Open the customer and read the email address carefully, character by character 2. Open Settings, then Email Deliverability, and look for the message 3. Open Settings, then Notifications, and confirm confirmations are enabled 4. Ask the customer to check spam and junk Nearly always a typo: Gmial instead of gmail, a missing letter in a domain, a space on the end. It looks right at a glance and fails every single time. If it bounced: The address is wrong or no longer exists. Correct it on the record, because a hard-bounced address is suppressed and will not be tried again. If it was delivered: It reached their mail server, so it is in a spam folder or a filter. Ask them to search their whole mailbox rather than just the inbox. Reassure them meanwhile: Tell them the booking is confirmed regardless. Somebody who does not have the email mainly wants to know they still have the appointment. Common questions: Can I resend a confirmation? Correct the address and resend from the booking. Why does this keep happening to the same customer? Their address is wrong on their record, or their provider is filtering you. Ring them and confirm the address. All my customers are affected. What now? Check the notification is switched on, then look at the deliverability figures, then contact support. --- ## A payment failed Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/a-payment-failed Category: Troubleshooting Most failures happen at the customer's bank rather than anywhere you control. The usual fix is for them to try again or use a different card. Common causes: - Insufficient funds - The bank declining an unfamiliar transaction - An expired card - A verification step the customer did not finish on their phone What to do: Ask them to try again. If it fails twice, ask for a different card. Do not keep retrying the same card, because repeated attempts make banks more suspicious rather than less. The verification step: Card payments often ask the customer to confirm in their banking app. People close the tab before finishing it, which looks like a failure and is really an unfinished payment. If your own payouts have stopped: That is a different problem. Check Settings, then Online Payments, since payouts can be held when account verification is outstanding. Do not take a risk on it: A failed payment is not a payment. Deliver the work when you are happy, not because the customer says it went through. Common questions: Can I see why it failed? The payment record carries what came back. Bank declines are often deliberately vague, and only the customer's bank can say more. Should I charge a fee for a failed payment? Failures are usually not the customer's fault. Ask them to try again first. What if the money left their account but I see nothing? Pending authorisations look like payments and clear on their own. Give it a couple of days before refunding anything. --- ## A change I made is not showing Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/changes-not-showing Category: Troubleshooting Refresh the page first. If it is still wrong, check the change actually saved, then wait a few minutes for pages that are cached for speed. The usual causes: - The change was typed but not saved - Your browser is showing a stored copy of the page - A public page is cached briefly, so it updates shortly rather than instantly - The change was made somewhere other than where you are looking A proper refresh: A hard refresh forces the browser to fetch the page again rather than reuse what it has. On most browsers that is holding shift while clicking reload. Public pages are cached: Your public page is stored briefly so it loads quickly for customers. A change appears within a short time rather than the same second. That is deliberate and it is what keeps the page fast. Two people editing at once: If a colleague is changing the same thing, the last save wins. Where something keeps reverting, ask whether somebody else is in there. Common questions: How long should I wait before worrying? A few minutes for a public page. Anything inside the system should be immediate after a refresh. It reverted after I saved. Why? Either it did not save, or somebody else saved over it. Check the activity log. Nothing is updating anywhere. What now? Sign out and back in, then contact support if it persists. --- ## Getting help from support Source: https://youzse.app/help/troubleshooting/getting-help-from-support Category: Troubleshooting Open Support in the sidebar. The more specific you are, the faster this goes. What to include: - What you were doing, with the page you were on - What you expected to happen - What happened instead - When it happened, and whether it happens every time - A screenshot, which is worth more than three paragraphs Names and references help: The customer's name, the booking date, the invoice number. Something that identifies the exact record turns a search into a lookup. Before you get in touch: Check the troubleshooting articles for the obvious ones. Availability problems are almost always working hours, and missing pages are almost always a permission. What not to send: Do not send passwords. Support will never ask for one, and anybody who does is not support. If something is urgent: Say so and say why. A booking page nobody can use on a Saturday morning is not the same as a report column you would like renamed. Common questions: Where is Support? In the sidebar, below the help centre. Do I need to log a ticket for a question? Try the help centre first. If it is not covered, ask, because a question nobody could answer from the docs usually means the docs need improving. Can support see my data? Access to your account is controlled and audited. Support will ask before doing anything in your account rather than assuming. --- ## Book an appointment Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-booking-appointments/book-an-appointment Category: Booking appointments Booking takes under a minute. Find the business, choose your service, pick a time and confirm. Step by step: 1. Find the business, either through Discover or by opening a link they have given you 2. Choose the service you want, where you will see the price and how long it takes 3. Pick a time from the slots available 4. Choose a particular person if you have a preference, or leave it to whoever is free 5. Confirm What you will need: Your name and a way to be contacted. Some businesses ask for a deposit or for payment at the time of booking, which is shown before you confirm. Choosing a person: Where a business lets you choose, you can pick somebody you have seen before. Leaving it open usually gives you more times to choose from. Confirmation: You will get a confirmation with the date, time and where to go. If it does not arrive, check your spam folder before assuming the booking failed. Common questions: Do I need an account to book? Having one keeps your bookings, receipts and rewards together and makes booking again much quicker. Why can I not find a time that suits me? The business may be fully booked, or may need a minimum amount of notice. Try looking further ahead, or ask to go on their waitlist. Will I be charged when I book? Only if the business asks for a deposit or for payment up front, and that is shown before you confirm. --- ## Reschedule or cancel a booking Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-booking-appointments/reschedule-or-cancel-a-booking Category: Booking appointments Go to My Bookings in your account, open the appointment and choose to reschedule or cancel. Do it as early as you can. Rescheduling: Choose a new time from what is available. The business is told, so you do not need to ring as well. Cancelling: Cancel from the same place. Some businesses set a cancellation window, so cancelling with plenty of notice avoids a charge and lets somebody else have the slot. Why notice matters: A slot cancelled the day before can be filled. A slot cancelled an hour before is usually lost, which is why late cancellations sometimes carry a charge. Deposits: Whether a deposit is returned depends on the business's policy and how much notice you gave. Their terms are shown when you book. If you cannot cancel online: Contact the business directly. Some appointments are too close to their start time to change without speaking to somebody. Common questions: Will I be charged for cancelling? That depends on the business's policy and your notice. Cancelling early almost always avoids it. Can I change who I am seeing? Rescheduling lets you pick from what is available, which may include a different person. I cannot find the booking. Where is it? Check you are signed in with the same email address you booked with. --- ## Find a business near you Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-booking-appointments/find-a-business-near-you Category: Booking appointments Open Discover to see businesses near you, or search for a name, a service or a treatment to go straight to it. Browsing: Discover lists businesses near you so you can see what is around. Useful when you know what you want done but not who does it. Searching: Search by business name if somebody recommended one, or by the service if you are shopping around. What to look at: - Reviews, and how recent they are - Prices, which are shown on the services - How far away they are - Whether they have times that suit you Saving favourites: Save a business to your favourites so it is easy to find again. Worth doing as soon as you find somebody good. Common questions: Why can I not find a business I know uses Youzse? Try their exact name, or ask them for their booking link. Not every business chooses to appear in Discover. Are the prices shown final? They are what the business has listed. Anything that depends on the work itself, like a repair, may be quoted after they have seen it. Can I book more than one business? Yes, as many as you like, all from the same account. --- ## What happens after you book Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-booking-appointments/what-happens-after-you-book Category: Booking appointments A confirmation arrives straight away with the date, the time and where to go. Most businesses also send a reminder before the appointment. Your confirmation: Keep it. It has the address, the time and how to change the booking if you need to. Reminders: Usually the day before, by email or text depending on the business. Some also send a notification to your phone if you have the app. If nothing arrives: Check your spam folder first. Then check My Bookings in your account, which is the real record. If the appointment is there, you are booked whether the email arrived or not. Making sure reminders reach you: Keep your email address and mobile number up to date in your account. A reminder sent to an old address helps nobody. Before you go: Some businesses send a form to complete beforehand, particularly for treatments. Filling it in before you arrive saves time when you get there. Common questions: I did not get a confirmation. Am I booked? Check My Bookings. If the appointment is listed, you are booked. Can I turn reminders off? Manage what you receive from your notification preferences in your account. Do I need to arrive early? Follow whatever the business says in the confirmation. A few minutes early is usually appreciated. --- ## Joining a waitlist Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-booking-appointments/joining-a-waitlist Category: Booking appointments When a business is fully booked you can ask to go on their waitlist. If somebody cancels, they can offer the slot to you. Why it is worth doing: Cancellations happen constantly, often at short notice. Being on the list is the difference between hearing about them and not. What to tell them: Which days and times actually work for you. A waitlist entry saying anytime is less useful than one saying weekday evenings, because they can match you to what comes up. Being quick: Slots that free up tend to be close at hand, so an answer within the hour usually gets it and an answer tomorrow usually does not. Classes: Group sessions often have a waitlist too. Popular classes rely on them, since somebody nearly always drops out. Common questions: How will they contact me? However you normally hear from them, which is usually email or text. Keep your details current. Does joining a waitlist cost anything? No. It is a note that you would like a slot. Can I be on more than one waitlist? Yes, with as many businesses as you like. --- ## Create your account Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-account-data/create-your-account Category: Your account & data Register with your email address, or continue with Apple or Google. Your account keeps your bookings, saved cards and rewards together. What you need: An email address and a name. A mobile number is worth adding, because it is how most businesses send reminders. Signing up with Apple or Google: Quicker, and there is no extra password to remember. Use the same one each time or you will end up with two accounts and your bookings split between them. Why an account is worth having: - Your bookings across every business in one place - Rebooking in two taps rather than filling a form again - Receipts and invoices you can find later - Loyalty balances that follow you Verifying: Confirm your email or phone number if you are asked to. It is what lets a business be confident they are contacting the right person. Common questions: Do I need an account to book? It makes everything quicker afterwards, particularly rebooking. I think I have two accounts. What now? Sign in with each address to see which holds your bookings, then use that one from now on. Is my information shared with every business? A business sees what it needs to serve you. Each one holds its own relationship with you rather than everyone sharing one list. --- ## Update your personal details Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-account-data/update-your-personal-details Category: Your account & data Go to your account and open Personal Details. Change what you need and save. Keep your contact details current: Reminders go to the email address and mobile number on your account. An old address is the single most common reason somebody misses an appointment. What you can change: Your name, email address, phone number and address. Businesses you have booked with see the details relevant to serving you. Changing your email address: You may be asked to confirm the new one. Do it promptly, because your sign-in and your reminders both depend on it. Notification preferences: What you receive and how is set separately in your account. If reminders are useful but marketing is not, you can have one without the other. Common questions: Will businesses see my new details automatically? Your account details are what they contact you on, so keeping them current is enough. Can I have different details for different businesses? Your account holds one set of details. Anything specific to one business is best mentioned to them directly. I have moved. Does my booking history change? No. Your history stays exactly as it is. --- ## Managing your notifications Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-account-data/managing-your-notifications Category: Your account & data Manage what you receive from the settings in your account. Booking messages and marketing are separate, so you can stop one without losing the other. The two kinds of message: - Service messages, like confirmations, reminders and receipts, which are part of the appointment you booked - Marketing, like offers and newsletters, which only arrive if you have agreed to them Opting out of marketing: Use the unsubscribe link in the message or your notification settings. It takes effect immediately and it does not affect your bookings. Turning reminders off: You can, though most people find them the most useful message they get. If reminders are arriving in the wrong way rather than being unwanted, change the channel instead. A business you no longer use: Unsubscribe from their marketing. Your booking history stays, which you may want for your own records. Common questions: I unsubscribed but still get reminders. Why? Reminders are about appointments you booked rather than marketing. They are different, and they stop when you have no bookings. Can I choose email instead of text? Your preferences control how you hear from businesses where they offer a choice. How do I stop everything from one business? Unsubscribe from their marketing and cancel any upcoming bookings. Contact them directly if you want your details removed entirely. --- ## Download or delete your data Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-account-data/download-or-delete-your-data Category: Your account & data Go to your account and open My Data. From there you can request a copy of the information held about you, or ask for your account to be deleted. Getting a copy: Request a download and you will be sent the information held about you. This is your right under UK data protection law and you do not have to give a reason. Deleting your account: Request deletion and your personal data is removed in line with the privacy policy. What deletion cannot remove: Some records have to be kept by law. A business is required to keep invoices for years for tax purposes, and that obligation sits above a deletion request. Those records are kept to the minimum necessary rather than deleted on request. Businesses hold their own records: Each business you have used is responsible for the information it holds about you. Where you want a business to delete what they hold, ask them directly as well. Before you delete: Download a copy first if you might want your receipts or history. Deletion is not something that can be reversed later. Common questions: How long does a request take? Data protection law allows up to a month. Most requests are handled well inside that. Will deleting my account cancel my bookings? Deal with any upcoming appointments first, and tell the business, so nobody is left holding a slot for you. Does deleting stop marketing? Yes. It is also worth unsubscribing directly, which takes effect immediately. --- ## Keeping your account safe Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-account-data/keeping-your-account-safe Category: Your account & data Use a password you have not used anywhere else, and never read out a code sent to your phone to somebody who has rung you. Passwords: The risk is not somebody guessing yours, it is a different website being breached and your password being tried here. A unique password removes that entirely. A password manager makes it easy. Codes sent to your phone: Nobody legitimate will ever ring and ask for one. Not your bank, not a business you booked with, not Youzse. Anyone asking is trying to get into your account. Signing in with Apple or Google: A good option, because there is no separate password to be reused or leaked. On a shared device: Sign out when you have finished, particularly on a family tablet or a work computer. If something looks wrong: A booking you did not make, or a change you did not ask for, means changing your password immediately and contacting the business. Common questions: Will Youzse ever ask for my password? No, and neither will any business using it. Anyone who does is not who they say they are. Is it safe to save a card? Card details are held by the payment provider rather than by the business, and are not visible to staff. What if I forget my password? Reset it from the sign-in page. The link goes to your email address, which is what makes it safe. --- ## Pay an invoice Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-payments-receipts/pay-an-invoice Category: Payments & receipts Go to your account and open Invoices. Open the one you want, check the detail, then pay. Paying: Use a card you have saved or enter a new one. Apple Pay and Google Pay are available where the business has them enabled. A receipt follows once the payment clears. Check before you pay: Look at the lines and the total. If something is not what you expected, ask the business before paying rather than after. Questions are much easier to resolve before money has moved. Paying from a link: Businesses often send a payment link by email or text. That link opens the same invoice, so you can pay without signing in. If a payment fails: It is usually the bank rather than the business. Try again, or use a different card. Some banks ask you to confirm the payment in their app, and closing that screen too early leaves the payment unfinished. Common questions: Is it safe to pay this way? Card details go to the payment provider rather than to the business, and staff never see your full card number. Can I pay part of an invoice? Ask the business. Part payment is something they arrange rather than something you set yourself. The payment left my account but the invoice still shows unpaid. Why? A pending authorisation can look like a payment. Give it a day, and contact the business if it has not cleared. --- ## Save a payment card Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-payments-receipts/save-a-payment-card Category: Payments & receipts Go to your account and open Payment Methods. Add a card there, or use Apple Pay or Google Pay where they are available. Where your card details actually go: To the payment provider, not to the business. Nobody at the business can see your full card number, and they could not use it outside a payment you have agreed to. Why save one: Paying becomes a tap. It also makes deposits and memberships work smoothly rather than needing your card each time. Removing a card: Remove it from the same screen whenever you like. If you have a membership or a regular payment running, sort out a replacement first or the payment will fail. An expired card: Cards expire and payments then fail. Updating the card before it expires avoids a failed membership payment and the awkward message that follows. Common questions: Is my card shared with every business I book with? No. A saved card is used for payments you make, and businesses do not get your card details. Can a business charge me without asking? Only where you have agreed to it, such as a membership or a cancellation policy you accepted when booking. What if my card is lost or stolen? Cancel it with your bank, then remove it here and add the replacement. --- ## View your receipts and transactions Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-payments-receipts/view-your-receipts-and-transactions Category: Payments & receipts Go to your account and open Transactions. Everything you have paid is listed there, and each one has a receipt you can open or share. What you will find: Payments, deposits and refunds, with the business, the date and the amount. Open any of them for the receipt. Why it is useful: Claiming something back, checking what you paid last time or settling an argument about whether a deposit was taken. It is all in one place rather than scattered across email. Sharing a receipt: Open the transaction and share the receipt. Handy for expenses or for insurance. Something you do not recognise: Check the business name and date first, since trading names sometimes differ from the name over the door. If it is still not yours, contact the business, then your bank. Common questions: How far back does my history go? Everything paid through your account is listed. Can I get a VAT receipt? The receipt shows what the business charged, including VAT where they charge it. Ask them directly if you need something specific for accounts. A refund is not showing in my bank. How long does it take? Refunds usually take a few working days to appear, depending on your bank. --- ## Paying a deposit Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-payments-receipts/paying-a-deposit Category: Payments & receipts A deposit is part of the price paid when you book. It comes off what you owe at the end. Why businesses ask for one: A booked slot nobody turns up to is time they cannot sell to anyone else. A deposit means somebody who books genuinely intends to come. It is not a fee, it is part of the price. When you will be asked: Before you confirm, and the amount is shown. You are never charged without seeing what for. If you cancel: Whether a deposit is returned depends on the business's cancellation policy and how much notice you gave. Cancel early and it is usually returned or moved to your new booking. If they cancel: Your deposit should be returned or moved to a new appointment. Contact them if it has not been. Common questions: Is a deposit the same as paying in full? No. It is part of the price, and the rest is due at the appointment. What happens if I reschedule? Deposits usually move with the booking. Check the business's policy. Can I get a deposit back if I cancel in good time? Usually, subject to their policy. Ask before cancelling if you are unsure. --- ## Getting a refund Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-payments-receipts/getting-a-refund Category: Payments & receipts Refunds come from the business you paid. Contact them directly, and once issued the money takes a few working days to reach your bank. How to ask: Contact the business with the date, the amount and what the problem was. Open the transaction in your account for the details, which makes it much quicker for them to find. How long it takes: The business issues it, then your bank processes it. A few working days is normal, and it is your bank rather than the business that decides the exact day. Refunds go back the way they came: A card payment is refunded to that card. If the card has since been cancelled, tell your bank, because they can usually still allocate it. If you cannot agree: Try the business first, calmly and in writing. Your rights as a consumer are unaffected by any policy they state, and your card provider may be able to help if it cannot be resolved. Common questions: Can Youzse refund me directly? No. The business you paid holds the money and issues the refund. How will I know it has been done? A refund shows in your transactions once the business issues it, before it reaches your bank. What if the business will not respond? Put it in writing, keep a copy and speak to your card provider about a chargeback if it stays unresolved. --- ## Earn and redeem loyalty Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-loyalty-memberships/earn-and-redeem-loyalty Category: Loyalty & memberships Where a business runs a loyalty scheme, you earn automatically when you book and pay. Open Loyalty in your account to see what you have. The three kinds of scheme: - Points, where you earn for every pound you spend and swap them for rewards - Stamps, where each visit earns a stamp and a set number earns a reward - Cashback, where a share of what you spend comes back as credit Nothing to carry: Your balance follows your account rather than a card in your wallet, so it cannot be lost or left at home. Using a reward: Rewards are applied when you pay. Mention it, because staff are usually happy to apply it and will not always spot it themselves. Balances are per business: Each business runs its own scheme, so stamps at one do not count at another. Common questions: Why has my balance not gone up? Loyalty is earned when the visit is paid for. Balances also start from when the business switched their scheme on. Do points expire? Some businesses set an expiry. Your account shows what you have, and the business can tell you their terms. What if I think my balance is wrong? Ask the business. They can look at it and adjust it if something has gone astray. --- ## Subscribe to a membership Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-loyalty-memberships/subscribe-to-a-membership Category: Loyalty & memberships A membership is a recurring plan you subscribe to. You pay a set amount on a schedule and get whatever the plan includes. Joining: Open the business profile or your account to see the plans available, choose one and confirm your payment details. It starts straight away. What you get: It varies by business. A regular service included, a standing discount, priority booking or a free add-on each visit. What is included is shown before you subscribe. Managing it: Open Memberships in your account to see what you are subscribed to, what it costs and when the next payment is due. Keep your card current: A membership payment fails when a card expires, and that usually means an awkward message rather than a quiet renewal. Update the card before it expires. Common questions: When am I charged? On the schedule shown when you subscribed, usually monthly from the day you joined. Can I still book normally? Yes. A membership sits alongside booking rather than replacing it. Does a membership include everything? Only what the plan says. Anything outside it is charged as usual. --- ## Cancelling a membership Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-loyalty-memberships/cancelling-a-membership Category: Loyalty & memberships Open Memberships in your account and cancel from there. Do it before the next payment date rather than after. Timing matters: Cancelling the day after a payment usually means you have paid for a period you are choosing not to use. Cancel a few days before renewal instead. What happens to the rest of the period: Most businesses let you use what you have already paid for until it runs out. Their terms say, and they will tell you if you ask. Removing your card instead: Do not do this in place of cancelling. It causes a failed payment rather than a clean cancellation, and leaves the business chasing you about it. Coming back later: Cancelling does not delete your account or your history. You can subscribe again whenever you like. Common questions: Will I get a refund for the current month? That depends on the business's terms. Ask them, as many will let you use out what you have paid for. Does cancelling affect my loyalty balance? No. Loyalty is separate and stays as it is. Can I pause instead of cancelling? Ask the business. Some are happy to, though it is arranged with them rather than set by you. --- ## Using a gift card Source: https://youzse.app/help/customer-loyalty-memberships/using-a-gift-card Category: Loyalty & memberships Give the gift card details when you pay and its value comes off what you owe. Anything left stays on the card for next time. Part-using a card: Spending less than the full value does not lose the remainder. The balance stays on the card until you use it. If the bill is more than the card: The card covers what it can and you pay the rest as normal. Mention it before they take payment: Applying a gift card afterwards means refunding and retaking the payment, which is more hassle for everyone. Say at the start that you have one. Expiry: Terms are set by the business that sold it. Check before you assume, particularly with a card you were given a while ago. Common questions: Can I use a gift card towards a deposit? Ask the business. Many will let you. I have lost the card. Can it be replaced? Contact the business who sold it. They can see the cards they have issued. Can I use a gift card at a different business? No. A gift card is for the business that issued it. --- ## Everything you can change in Youzse Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/everything-you-can-change Category: Making Youzse yours Youzse is built to be shaped around how you already work rather than the other way round. Most of it can be changed, and none of it needs a developer or a support ticket. This article is the map. Each section links to the full guide. Your dashboard: Pick which widgets appear, drag them where you want them and resize them. Owners can also set the starting dashboard for the whole team. On the app you choose a separate set of widgets for your phone home screen, because a phone and a desk monitor are not the same job. Your menu: Reorder the sidebar, reorder whole groups and switch off anything you never use. On the app you choose which three items sit in the bottom tab bar. You can also decide what the little number beside a menu item counts. Your wording and layout: Call your work appointments, bookings or jobs and every label in the product follows. Choose a calendar, pipeline or workshop dashboard. Decide whether your public page takes bookings, collects enquiries or does both. Your features: Optional features can be switched off if they clutter your day, and switched back on later with nothing lost. Your documents: Design your invoices, quotes and reports with fifteen layouts, your own colours, your own typeface and your logo, then set what appears on them. Separately, set your numbering, your payment terms, your bank details and the small print that goes on every document. Your brand: Your logo, cover image, bio, gallery and contact details live in your business profile, and they drive your public page and everything customers receive. What customers hear from you: Which notifications go out, on which channel and when, plus the wording of the emails themselves. Who sees what: Roles and permissions decide what each person can reach. Worth saying plainly: hiding a menu item tidies the menu, it does not restrict access. Use roles for that. On the app: Two places hold all of it. More, then App Customisation covers your home screen widgets, your tab bar, your theme and your public page. More, then Business Settings covers the rest, including Features, PDF Template and Document Defaults. Anything that applies to the whole business is the same setting on both, so a change made between jobs on your phone is live on the web before you get back. Common questions: Do I need a paid plan to customise things? No. Layout, menu, wording and document design are part of the product on every plan. Some individual features and some dashboard widgets are tied to a plan, and those are labelled where you choose them. Will customising anything affect my existing data? No. These controls change how things are presented to you and how documents look from now on. Bookings, customers, invoices and history are untouched. Does my customisation apply to my team as well? It depends which one. Menu changes, feature switches, document design and document defaults apply to everyone in the business. Your dashboard arrangement and your phone tab bar are yours alone, unless you are an owner setting the team default. Where do I find all of this? Most of it sits under Settings. The dashboard and the menu are customised where you use them, from the dashboard toolbar and the bottom of the sidebar. --- ## Customising your dashboard Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/customising-your-dashboard Category: Making Youzse yours Your dashboard is the first thing you see each morning, so it should show the things you actually act on. Every widget on it can be moved, resized, removed or added. On the web: 1. Open your dashboard and click Edit layout. 2. Drag a widget by its body to move it, or drag its bottom corner to resize it. 3. Use the Widgets menu to switch widgets on and off, or to add ones you are not using yet. 4. Click Done to save, or Cancel to walk away from the changes. The Widgets menu is grouped so you can see what is on offer: - Active: what is on your dashboard now. Click one to hide it. - Available: everything else you can add. Click one to add it. - Locked: widgets that come with a higher plan. The badge tells you which one. - Reset to default: puts the dashboard back to the standard arrangement for your type of business. Personal or team default: Owners see a Personal and Team default switch at the top of the Widgets menu. Personal is your own dashboard. Nobody else sees it and nobody else is affected by it. Team default is the dashboard everyone starts with. It only changes what a colleague sees if they have not already arranged their own, so setting a sensible team default is safe. Anyone who has customised theirs keeps it. Positions and sizes are personal. When you set a team default you are choosing the list of widgets, not the exact grid. What is on offer and why: The widgets you can choose from depend on two things. Your type of business, so a garage is not offered widgets built for a salon. And your dashboard layout, since the calendar, pipeline and workshop views each carry their own set. Switching layout does not throw away the widgets you picked for the other one, they come back if you switch back. On the app: Go to More, then App Customisation, then Dashboard. Choose the widgets you want on your phone home screen and tap Save my dashboard. Owners on a team plan can switch to the team default and tap Save team default. Your phone widgets are chosen separately from your web dashboard on purpose. A phone screen fits about four useful things and a desk monitor fits a dozen, so tying them together made both worse. Common questions: Will my team see my dashboard changes? Only if you are an owner and you save a team default. Anything you save as Personal is yours alone. Why can I not add a widget I have seen elsewhere? It is either not offered for your type of business, it belongs to the other dashboard layout, or it is on a higher plan. Locked widgets are listed at the bottom of the Widgets menu with the plan that includes them. I have made a mess of it. Can I start again? Yes. Edit layout, then Widgets, then Reset to default. Resetting currently needs the Edit settings permission, so if nothing happens when you click it, ask an owner to reset it for you. Does the app show the same dashboard as the web? No, and that is deliberate. Widgets are chosen separately for the phone so each screen shows what suits it. Both are saved to your account, so a new phone picks up your choices. Is a change to the team default recorded anywhere? Yes. Dashboard changes are written to the activity log under Settings, then Activity Log, with who made the change and what it was before. --- ## Customising your menu Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/customising-your-menu Category: Making Youzse yours Nobody uses every page in Youzse. The menu can be cut down to the ones you do use, put in the order you use them, and it stays that way for everyone in the business. On the web: 1. Scroll to the bottom of the sidebar and click Customise menu. 2. On the Visibility tab, drag an item by its handle to move it within its group. 3. Drag a group heading to move the whole group. 4. Switch an item off to hide it from the menu. 5. Changes save as you make them. There is no separate save button. Dashboard and Settings can never be hidden, so there is no way to lock your business out of its own navigation. Hiding is tidying, not locking: This is worth being clear about. A hidden page is still there. It keeps every permission check and every plan check it had, and anyone who knows the address can still open it. Hiding shortens the menu, it does not restrict anyone. If you need to stop somebody reaching a part of the product, that is a role. Set it under Settings, then Roles. Menu changes apply for everyone in the business, so agree them before you start switching things off. You need the Edit settings permission, which owners and managers have by default. Search follows your menu: The quick search and the command palette read the same list, so a page you have hidden stops cluttering your search results too. Badges: The Badges tab controls the little number that sits beside a menu item. For most items you can choose what it counts or turn it off entirely. Bookings can show today or the week's total, classes can show today's sessions or the ones with spaces left, the inbox can show unread or active, and so on. Pick the one that matches how you work rather than leaving them all on. On the app: Go to More, then App Customisation, then Tab Bar. You get three slots between Dashboard and More. Add or remove items, reorder them with the arrows, then tap Apply. Everything you leave out is still reachable from the More menu. Your tab bar is saved on your own device for your own login, so your phone and a colleague's phone can be set up completely differently. Common questions: I hid a page by mistake. How do I get it back? Open Customise menu at the bottom of the sidebar and switch it back on. Nothing was deleted. Does hiding a page stop my staff opening it? No. It only removes it from the menu. Use roles and permissions if you need to actually restrict access. Why can I not drag anything? Reordering needs the Edit settings permission. Without it you can still see the menu list but not change it. Does my sidebar order carry over to the app? No. The web sidebar and the app tab bar are separate. The sidebar applies to everyone in the business, the tab bar is per person and per device. Can I hide Settings? No. Dashboard and Settings always stay, so there is always a route back. --- ## Layout, terminology and your public page Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/layout-terminology-and-your-public-page Category: Making Youzse yours A garage does not book appointments and a clinic does not take jobs. Youzse lets you set the language and the layout so the product reads like your trade. You will find all three under Settings, then Appearance. You need the Edit settings permission. Public page: This decides what a customer can do when they land on your page. - Online Booking: they browse your services and book a slot themselves. - Enquiry Form: they send you a message and you follow it up. - Booking and Enquiry: some services are bookable, others show a request a quote button, and there is a general enquiry form as well. Switching to enquiry only turns online booking off for your customers, so Youzse asks you to confirm before it does. Dashboard: Choose the view you open on. - Calendar view: today's schedule, upcoming appointments and daily revenue. Best if your day is driven by the diary. - Pipeline view: active leads, outstanding quotes, invoices and a revenue overview. Best if your work arrives as enquiries you have to win. - Workshop view: the workshop board, MOT due list, bay utilisation and mechanic hours. Available on Garage Pro. Your layout also decides which widgets are offered, so changing it changes the menu of things you can put on your dashboard. Terminology: Pick appointments, bookings or jobs and every label in the product follows. - Appointments suits salons, clinics and therapists. - Bookings is the general purpose choice and suits most service businesses. - Jobs suits trades, garages and field service. None of these three settings touches your data. They change what you see and how your page behaves from now on. Existing bookings, customers and history are exactly as they were. On the app: Go to More, then App Customisation. Appearance there covers your dashboard layout and your theme, which can follow your phone or be fixed to light or dark. Theme is a personal choice on that device. Public Page sits in the same list and needs the Edit settings permission, since it changes what customers see. Common questions: Will changing my terminology rename anything my customers have already received? No. It changes labels in the product and in what you send from now on. Documents already issued are unchanged. Can different staff use different terminology? No. Terminology is one choice for the business, so everybody is speaking the same language. Does turning on enquiry only mode delete my services? No. Your services stay exactly as they are and become bookable again the moment you switch back. Can I use the workshop dashboard without Garage Pro? No. The workshop view is built on the workshop board, MOT data and bay utilisation, which are Garage Pro features. Is dark mode available on the web? Yes, the web app follows your device theme. The explicit light, dark or match system choice is on the app. --- ## Turning features on and off Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/turning-features-on-and-off Category: Making Youzse yours Some of what Youzse can do will not apply to you. Anything optional can be switched off so it stops taking up space, and switched on again whenever you want it. Find it under Settings, then Features. You need the Edit settings permission. What is on the screen: The page lists the optional features that come with your plan, grouped by area, each with a short description and a switch. Your plan name is shown at the top so you know what you are working with. A feature your plan does not include is shown with an Upgrade to enable badge instead of a switch. Nothing is hidden from you, you can see what the next plan up would add. If you are on a plan with no optional features, the page says so rather than sitting empty. Switching one off: Youzse asks you to confirm first, because switching a feature off hides it across the whole business for everybody. Your data is not deleted. Switch the feature back on and everything is where you left it. The change is recorded in the activity log with who made it and when, so an unexplained disappearance is always traceable. Find it under Settings, then Activity Log. What is not here: Plenty of things people think of as features are not switches on this page. - Whether a feature exists on your plan at all is decided by your plan, under Settings, then Subscription and Billing. - What each person can reach is decided by roles, under Settings, then Roles. - Tidying a page out of the menu is done from Customise menu at the bottom of the sidebar. On the app: Go to More, then Business Settings, then Features. It is the same list and the same switches, and because feature switches apply to the whole business, a change made on your phone applies on the web straight away. Common questions: If I turn a feature off, do I lose the data? No. Nothing is deleted. The feature and everything in it comes back when you switch it on again. Why is a feature greyed out with an upgrade badge? It is not part of your current plan. Upgrading under Settings, then Subscription and Billing makes the switch available. Can I turn a feature off for one member of staff only? No. Feature switches apply to the whole business. To limit one person, change their role or create a custom role. Does a switched off feature still send notifications? No. Once it is off, the feature and everything it does stops, including anything it would have sent. Who can change these? Anyone with the Edit settings permission, which owners and managers have by default. --- ## Designing your PDF template Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/designing-your-pdf-template Category: Making Youzse yours Every document you send is a piece of your brand. The PDF template editor gives you real control over how invoices, quotes, reports and purchase orders look, with a preview that updates as you work. Find it under Settings, then PDF Templates. The editor: The preview fills the right of the screen, with a tab for each document type. Quote, Invoice and Report are always there, and Garage Pro adds Purchase Order. Switch tabs to see the same settings applied to a different document. The controls on the left are split into two tabs, Content and Style. Style: - Layout: fifteen designs, from classic and minimal through to editorial, industrial, luxury and receipt. Each one has a short description under the picker. - Typography: a choice of typefaces, from clean sans faces to serif ones for a more traditional feel. - Primary and accent colour: your brand colours, entered as hex values. - Cover colour: an optional colour band across the top of the document. - Logo: on or off, at four sizes. Your logo comes from your business profile. Content: The content switches decide what actually appears on the page: line numbers, notes, the tax breakdown, your VAT number, your company number, the customer's address and email, the site address, due dates, valid until dates, payment links, a payment QR code, quote acceptance links, payment terms, terms and conditions, bank details, and draft or paid watermarks. The wording behind those switches is not set here. Your bank details, terms and footer text live in Document Defaults, and the switch decides whether they are printed. A different look for one document type: At the top of the Style tab is a switch called Custom style for whichever document you are viewing. Left off, that document uses your default style along with everything else. Turn it on and the look settings you change apply to that document type only, which is how you give quotes a bolder cover than invoices without maintaining two brands. Two reset links are on hand: reset this document back to the default style, or reset every document at once. Content switches are deliberately global. Only the look varies per document, so you cannot accidentally leave your VAT number off one document type and not another. The preview: The preview renders a sample document with made up customers and lines. It never shows real customer data, so you can experiment safely and share your screen without a second thought. Click Save changes when you are happy. Nothing you are trying out affects a live document until you do. On the app: Go to More, then Business Settings, then PDF Template. Layout, typeface, colours, logo size and the content switches are all there, with a link straight through to Document Defaults for the wording. Common questions: Where does my logo come from? Your business profile, under Settings, then Business Profile. Upload it once and it flows through to your documents and your public page. Can my quotes look different from my invoices? Yes. Turn on the custom style switch while viewing quotes, and the layout, typeface and colours you set apply to quotes alone. Why can I not change what a document says, only whether it shows? Because the words belong to your business rather than to a design. Payment terms, terms and conditions, bank details and the footer are set once under Settings, then Document Defaults, and every template prints the same ones. Does the preview use a real invoice? No. It is a sample built for the purpose, so nothing you do here can touch a customer's document. Will changing the template restyle documents I have already sent? A PDF a customer has downloaded stays as it was. Documents generated after your change use the new design. --- ## Document defaults and numbering Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/document-defaults-and-numbering Category: Making Youzse yours Document defaults are the values Youzse fills in for you every time you raise an invoice or a quote. Set them once and you stop retyping the same payment terms forever. Find them under Settings, then Document Defaults. You need the Edit settings permission. Invoice defaults: - Due days: how long a customer has to pay. This sets the due date on every new invoice. - Tax rate: the rate applied by default to new lines. - Payment terms: the sentence explaining how and when you expect to be paid. - Show site address: include the job site address, which matters if you work at the customer's property rather than yours. Quote defaults: - Valid for: how many days a quote stands before it lapses. A short window creates useful urgency, and thirty days is a common choice. Shared across your documents: - Terms and conditions: your small print, up to two thousand characters. - Bank details: the account information for customers paying by transfer. - Footer: a short line at the bottom of every document, often your company number or a thank you. Each of these only appears if the matching switch is on in your PDF template, which is what lets you print bank details on invoices while leaving them off quotes. Numbering: Invoices, quotes and, on Garage Pro, purchase orders each have three numbering settings. - Prefix: the letters in front of the number, such as INV or 2026. Letters, digits, hyphens, slashes, dots and spaces are allowed. - Next number: the number the next document will take. - Digits: how many digits the number is padded to, from one to ten. Five digits turns 42 into 00042. Youzse will not let you set the next number at or below the highest number you have already issued under that prefix. That guard exists to stop two documents ever carrying the same number, which is the sort of mistake that only surfaces at year end in front of an accountant. Changing your prefix is fine and numbering carries on. If you are moving from another system, set your prefix and next number to continue your old sequence rather than starting again at one. A word on VAT: If you are VAT registered, your invoice numbers need to be unique and sequential, and your invoices need to carry the details HMRC requires. Youzse handles the numbering as long as you do not reuse a prefix and count backwards. Your VAT number and rate are set under Settings, then VAT. Purchase orders: Garage Pro adds purchasing terms, payment terms, notes and a footer for purchase orders, kept separate from your customer facing sales terms. Suppliers should not be reading the small print you wrote for customers. On the app: Go to More, then Business Settings, then Document Defaults. Every field is there and saves to the same place, so a change made on the shop floor is live on the web immediately. Common questions: Can I change my invoice prefix part way through the year? Yes. Numbering continues from your next number under the new prefix. Keep a note of the change so your records make sense later. Why will Youzse not let me set the next number lower? Because a number below one you have already used would produce two documents with the same reference. Choose a number above your highest issued one, or use a new prefix. Can I carry on my numbering from my old system? Yes, and you should. Set the prefix to match your old one and set the next number to one above your last invoice. Where do payment terms actually appear? On the document, as long as the payment terms switch is on in your PDF template under Settings, then PDF Templates. Do these defaults change invoices I have already sent? No. They apply to documents created after you save them. An invoice already raised keeps the terms and numbering it was issued with. Can I override a default on a single invoice? Yes. Defaults are a starting point. Change the due date, the rate or the terms on any individual document as you create it. --- ## Setting up your own workspace Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/your-own-workspace Category: Making Youzse yours Plenty of Youzse is set once for the whole business, and that is the owner's job. A useful amount of it is yours alone, and nobody else is affected when you change it. This is the list of what you can set for yourself. Your dashboard on the web: Open your dashboard and click Edit layout. Choose your widgets, drag them where you want them and drag a corner to resize. Click Done and it is saved to your account, so it follows you to any computer you log in on. If your business has a team default, you started from it. The moment you arrange your own, yours takes over and later changes to the team default leave you alone. Your home screen on the app: Go to More, then App Customisation, then Dashboard. This is a separate list from your web dashboard, so a phone screen shows the few things worth glancing at rather than a shrunken version of your desk setup. Your tab bar on the app: Go to More, then App Customisation, then Tab Bar. Three slots sit between Dashboard and More. Put the things you tap all day in them and reach the rest from More. This one is saved on your own device, so your phone and a colleague's can be set up completely differently. Your theme and language: Click your name at the bottom of the sidebar, then My Profile. Alongside your contact details you can set your theme to light, dark or follow your device, and your language and formats to British or American English. On the app, go to More, then App Customisation, then Appearance for the same theme choice on that device. Your profile and how you appear: The same My Profile page holds your name, phone, address and photo, plus your display name, job title and short bio. If your business shows its team on its public page, that is what customers read, so it is worth writing properly. Your login and your phone: Under your profile you will find security and active sessions, where you can change your password, set up two factor authentication and sign out any device you no longer use. On the app, go to More, then Security. As well as the same options there is App Lock, which asks for Face ID, Touch ID or your device PIN before the app opens, and which can lock again after a period of inactivity. Worth switching on if you leave a phone or tablet on a counter. Your notifications: The bell in the top bar keeps your alerts. On the app, notifications arrive as push messages once you allow them on that device. On the app: Everything personal sits in two places. More, then App Customisation holds your home screen, your tab bar and your theme. More, then My Account holds your details, and More, then Security holds your app lock, your password and your sessions. What is not yours to change: The sidebar order, the badges, the wording, the documents and the features that are switched on are set for the whole business, so one person tidying up would rearrange everybody's day. Those sit behind the Edit settings permission, which owners and managers have. If you need one of them changed, ask. Common questions: Will my dashboard changes affect anyone else? No. Unless you are an owner deliberately saving a team default, everything on this page is yours alone. Does my setup follow me to a new phone or computer? Your dashboard, your app home screen, your profile, your theme and your language are saved to your account and follow you. Your app tab bar and your app lock are saved on the device, so a new phone starts fresh. Why is my colleague's app showing different tabs? Because the tab bar is a personal choice on each device. There is nothing to fix. Can I change what customers see about me? You can write your own display name, job title and bio, which is what appears if your business lists its team publicly. Whether the team is shown at all is a business setting. I cannot find My Profile. Click your own name at the bottom of the sidebar on the web, or open More on the app. It is separate from Settings, which holds the business wide options. --- ## Why can I not change that? Source: https://youzse.app/help/making-it-yours/why-can-i-not-change-that Category: Making Youzse yours If a switch is greyed out or a drag handle is missing, nothing is broken. Youzse splits customisation into two kinds, and the second kind is deliberately kept to a small number of people. Personal, and open to everyone: - Your dashboard on the web: which widgets, where they sit, how big they are. - Your home screen and your tab bar on the app. - Your theme, your language and your profile details. - Your app lock, your password and your active sessions. Nobody needs to give you permission for any of that. See what you can set for yourself for the full list. Business wide, and behind the Edit settings permission: - The sidebar order, hidden menu items and what the badges count. - The dashboard layout, the terminology and how your public page behaves. - Which optional features are switched on. - The PDF template and the document defaults. - The business profile, notifications and everything else under Settings. Each of these reshapes the product for everybody, which is why one careless afternoon should not be able to do it. Owners and managers have the permission by default. What it looks like when you do not have it: On the web a switch is greyed out, a drag handle is missing or the settings page simply is not in your menu. On the app the row carries a padlock and tells you when you tap it. Neither is an error worth reporting. What to ask for: Two options, and the first is usually quicker. Ask an owner to make the change, since most of these are set once and forgotten. Or ask to be given the Edit settings permission, which an owner can do by changing your role or building a custom role under Settings, then Roles. Be specific about which one you need. Edit settings is a broad permission covering billing adjacent screens as well as the cosmetic ones, so an owner may reasonably prefer to make the single change for you. Not everything greyed out is about permissions: Some things are missing because of the plan rather than your role. A dashboard widget listed under Locked, or a feature showing an upgrade badge, is not something an owner can grant you. That needs a plan change. Others are missing because a feature is switched off for the business, or because the page belongs to a product line you are not on, such as the workshop screens on Garage Pro. One thing worth knowing: A page hidden from the menu is only hidden. If a colleague sends you a link to it, it will open, provided your role allows it. Hiding is tidying rather than locking, so never treat a missing menu entry as proof that somebody cannot reach something. On the app: The same rules apply. More, then App Customisation holds your personal choices, and More, then Business Settings holds the business wide ones with a padlock on anything your role does not cover. A change an owner makes on the web shows on your phone straight away. Common questions: Why can my colleague change the menu and I cannot? They have the Edit settings permission and you do not. It is a role setting rather than anything to do with how long you have been there. Can I hide a menu item just for me? No. Menu visibility is one list for the business. Your dashboard, your app home screen and your app tab bar are the parts you can trim for yourself. I was able to do this last week and now I cannot. Your role or its permissions have probably changed. Permission changes take effect the next time you act, so it can appear mid shift. Ask an owner what changed. The switch is there but nothing happens when I use it. Check whether the feature belongs to your plan. A control that looks available but refuses to save is usually a plan limit rather than a fault, and the page will normally say so. Who counts as an owner? The person whose account the business was created under, plus anyone given the Owner role. Managers hold most of the same permissions apart from billing and GDPR. --- ## What a card payment actually costs you Source: https://youzse.app/blog/what-a-card-payment-actually-costs-you Category: Payments Published: Aug 6, 2026 Card fees are quoted in a format that hides where the money goes. "2.5% plus 35p" and "1.19% plus 20p" look like the second one is roughly half the first. On a small ticket they are much closer than that, and on a very small ticket the percentage barely matters at all. The arithmetic: Every card fee has two parts. A percentage of the transaction, and a fixed amount per transaction regardless of size. The fixed part is the one that decides whether small jobs are worth taking on card. On a £12 fringe trim at 2.5% plus 35p, the percentage is 30p and the fixed fee is 35p. Total 65p, which is 5.4% of the sale. The headline rate said 2.5%. On a £40 cut at the same rate, the percentage is £1 and the fixed fee is 35p. Total £1.35, or 3.4%. On a £480 clutch replacement, the percentage is £12 and the fixed fee is 35p. Total £12.35, or 2.6%. Now the headline rate is nearly the real rate. What this means in practice: The smaller your average transaction, the more the fixed fee matters and the less the percentage tells you. A barber doing forty £15 cuts a week is in a completely different position to a garage doing eight £400 jobs, even on identical rates. Three things worth doing about it: - Work out your real blended rate. Take last month's total card fees and divide by total card takings. That single number is more useful than any headline rate. - Look at whether very small transactions belong on card at all, or whether they should be bundled. A £6 add-on charged separately costs proportionally far more than the same £6 added to the main bill. - Check whether the platform fee is inside or outside the card rate. A low card rate with a separate per-booking or new-client fee is not cheaper, it is differently shaped. Youzse charges 2.5% plus 35p, and the platform fee is inside that. There is no separate per-booking fee and no commission on new clients who find you through Youzse. Whether that is cheaper than an alternative depends entirely on your mix, which is why the blended-rate calculation above is worth ten minutes of your time before you choose anything. --- ## Pricing your services without guessing Source: https://youzse.app/blog/pricing-your-services-without-guessing Category: Running a business Published: Aug 3, 2026 Most service businesses set prices by looking at what the place down the road charges and landing slightly under. That is not pricing, it is following someone who may well be guessing too. Start with your cost per available hour: Add up everything it costs to open for a month. Rent, rates, utilities, insurance, software, wages including your own, stock, accountant, everything. Then work out how many chargeable hours you actually have in a month. Not opening hours. Chargeable hours. A one-chair salon open 40 hours a week has about 173 hours a month. If realistically 65% of those get booked, that is 112 chargeable hours. Divide monthly costs by 112 and you have the number every hour has to beat before you have made anything. This number surprises people. Costs of £3,400 a month over 112 chargeable hours is £30 an hour just to stand still. Utilisation is the lever nobody pulls: Going from 65% to 75% utilisation on that example adds 17 chargeable hours a month without raising a single price. At an average £45 an hour that is £765 of extra revenue against almost no extra cost. Deposits, reminders and a waitlist move utilisation more reliably than a price rise moves margin, and customers do not complain about them. Then think about what you are actually selling: Once you know your floor, the question is what the work is worth rather than what it costs. Two things justify charging more than the shop down the road: - Scarcity. If you are booked three weeks out, your prices are too low. That is the clearest signal there is. - Specificity. General services compete on price. Specific ones do not. "Haircut" competes with everyone. "Curly hair specialist" competes with almost nobody in your town. Raising prices without losing everyone: - Raise for new customers first and let existing ones roll over at the next appointment. - Round sensibly. £45 to £48 is invisible. £45 to £50 gets noticed. - Never apologise for it in the message. State it, give the date it applies from, move on. - Expect to lose a few of your least profitable customers. That is the mechanism working, not a failure of it. An annual review beats a dramatic one every three years. Small, regular, unremarkable. --- ## GDPR for a two-person business Source: https://youzse.app/blog/gdpr-for-a-two-person-business Category: Compliance Published: Jul 31, 2026 UK GDPR has a reputation for being a corporate problem. It is not. If you hold a client's phone number, you are processing personal data and the rules apply. The good news is that for a small service business the obligations are genuinely manageable. This is a plain English overview, not legal advice. Know what you hold and why: Write down, once, what personal data you keep and the reason. Client names and numbers to manage appointments. Card details held by your payment provider, not you. Notes on treatments. For a clinic or tattoo studio, health information, which is a special category and needs more care. That list is most of the work. You cannot protect data you have not accounted for. Understand which lawful basis you are using: Managing a booking someone asked for does not need consent. It is necessary to perform a contract with them. That is why you do not need to ask permission to text someone a reminder about an appointment they made. Marketing is different. Sending promotional messages needs consent, and that consent has to be specific, recorded and as easy to withdraw as it was to give. A tick box that was pre-ticked is not consent. "By booking you agree to marketing" is not consent. Record consent per channel and per person, with the date. If your system cannot tell you when and how someone opted in, you cannot evidence it. Do not keep things forever: Holding client records indefinitely because deleting feels risky is itself the risk. Decide how long you keep inactive client records and apply it. Several years after last contact is defensible for most service businesses. Longer is defensible where there is a clinical or safety reason and you can explain it. The important part is that the deletion actually happens, automatically, rather than being a job nobody does. Be able to answer a request: Someone can ask what you hold about them, ask for a copy or ask you to delete it. You have one month. For a small business this is rarely difficult, but it is very difficult if the answer is spread across a diary, a phone, a notebook and three WhatsApp threads. Note that erasure is not absolute. You can keep what you need for legal or accounting reasons, invoices being the obvious example. You delete what you no longer have a reason to hold. The bits people forget: - Most businesses processing personal data need to pay the ICO data protection fee. For a small business it is a modest annual amount and non-payment is enforceable. - You need a privacy notice that people can actually find, written in language they can read. - A personal data breach that risks people's rights has to be reported to the ICO within 72 hours. Know now who would do that, rather than working it out during one. - Staff access should be limited to what each person needs. A junior does not need to see everyone's clinical notes. None of this requires a consultant. It requires knowing what you hold, having a reason for it, recording consent honestly and being able to delete on request. --- ## Why marketplace commission compounds, and a subscription does not Source: https://youzse.app/blog/why-marketplace-commission-compounds Category: Running a business Published: Jul 28, 2026 A one-time fee on a new client is easy to dismiss. Twenty per cent of one appointment, once and then they are yours. On a £45 first visit that is £9 to acquire a client who might spend £2,000 with you over four years. Framed that way it is obviously good value. It is good value. The problem is what happens to that number as you grow. Two businesses, same platform: A settled salon with a full book of regulars wins three new clients a month. At 20% of a £45 first visit, that is £27 a month. Trivial. A salon that has just opened, or just hired two stylists, is winning forty new clients a month because it has columns to fill. Same rate, same platform, £360 a month. Not trivial. The fee did not change. The business did. Commission pricing charges you most at exactly the moment you can least afford it, which is when you are growing and have not yet got the repeat book to support the extra capacity. A subscription does the opposite. It is heaviest when you are small and quiet, and proportionally lighter every month you grow. Fixed costs are unpleasant when you are struggling and forgettable when you are busy. Which shape suits you: - If your book is full and stable, and you barely need new clients, commission is cheap and a subscription is dead weight. Take the commission model. - If you are growing, hiring, opening a second location or filling a new column, commission is the expensive shape and a flat subscription is the cheap one. - If you are somewhere in between, work out your actual new client count for the last three months and multiply it out. It usually settles the argument in about four minutes. The part that is not about money: There is a second question underneath the pricing one, which is who the client belongs to. A platform that charges you once and leaves you with the relationship is selling introductions. A platform that keeps the relationship is renting you access to your own customers. Ask any provider directly: can I export my full client list with contact details and notes, at any time, including for clients who first found me through you? The answer tells you what you are actually buying. Youzse charges 0% commission on new clients and recovers its costs through a card rate of 2.5% plus 35p, with the platform fee inside that single number. That is the right shape for a business that is growing, and the wrong shape for one with a full book and high card takings that never needs to be found. We would rather say which is which than pretend one model wins for everyone. --- ## How far ahead should clients be able to book? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/how-far-ahead-should-clients-be-able-to-book Category: Bookings Published: Jul 25, 2026 Most booking pages let people book twelve months ahead because that was the default and nobody changed it. It is worth changing. The booking window is one of the few settings that quietly decides your no show rate, how painful your next price rise is and how much of the week you spend rescheduling. Long windows raise no shows: The further out an appointment is made, the more likely life gets in the way. Someone booking six weeks ahead has six weeks to change jobs, book a holiday, move house or simply forget why they booked in the first place. Someone booking on Tuesday for Thursday has two days. That is not an argument for a two day window. It is an argument for noticing that a twelve month window and a six week window produce measurably different diaries. Long windows lock in old prices: Every appointment sitting in your diary at last year's price is a small hole in this year's revenue. If you raise prices in March and honour bookings made before the change, a twelve month window means you are still doing March work at February prices the following January. A shorter window makes an annual price rise painless. A long one turns it into a spreadsheet exercise you will put off. What to actually set: - Repeat appointments such as a cut, a groom or a nail infill work well at six to eight weeks. Long enough for a client on a monthly cycle to book the next two, short enough that most of them turn up. - Seasonal and event work needs longer. A wedding makeup artist or a marquee hire business has to take bookings a year out, because a year out is when the decision gets made. - Vehicle work follows the MOT and service cycle, so a garage wants at least three months and usually twelve, because customers book the moment the reminder lands. - Anything carrying a real deposit can safely take a longer window. The deposit is already doing the job the short window was doing. Minimum notice matters more than maximum: Almost everybody tunes the maximum and ignores the minimum. Minimum notice is the setting that stops somebody booking a two hour colour for eleven minutes' time while you are mid appointment with your phone in the back room. Set it to the shortest period in which you would genuinely be ready. For most businesses that is two to four hours. For anything needing preparation, stock or travel it is a day. Setting it to zero and hoping is how you end up apologising to somebody who did nothing wrong. A rule of thumb: Set the window to roughly twice your typical rebooking cycle, then let deposits handle anything longer. A barber on a four week cycle wants eight weeks. A dog groomer on an eight week cycle wants sixteen. A garage on an annual cycle wants twelve months and a reminder. Then measure it. Break your no show rate down by how far ahead each booking was made. If appointments booked more than six weeks out fail twice as often as the rest, you have just found your window and it is shorter than the one you have. --- ## What to do when a client turns up late Source: https://youzse.app/blog/what-to-do-when-a-client-turns-up-late Category: Bookings Published: Jul 22, 2026 Every service business needs an answer to this before it happens, because in the moment you will make a worse decision than the one you would have made calmly on a Tuesday morning. The question is not whether to be nice about it. The question is what you do with the fifteen minutes. Work out your cut-off first: A cut-off is the point past which the appointment cannot run properly. It is not a punishment, it is arithmetic. If a service takes fifty minutes inside a sixty minute slot, ten minutes of lateness is absorbable and twenty minutes is not, because the client booked after them ends up paying for it. Write the number down. Fifteen minutes is the most common cut-off for appointment based work. For anything with a fixed finish, such as a class, a bay slot or a courtesy car handover, it is much tighter. The three options, in order: 1. Run the appointment short. Best for lateness inside the cut-off. Do a smaller job properly rather than the full job badly, and say what you are dropping before you start rather than after. 2. Move them to a gap later the same day. Best when you have one. It costs you nothing, it rescues the client and it protects everybody booked behind them. 3. Treat it as a late cancellation. Best when they are past the cut-off and there is no gap. This is the option people avoid, and avoiding it is exactly what trains the behaviour. What you should not do is run the full appointment late and absorb it yourself. That decision is invisible to the person who was late and extremely visible to the next four people. Say it before it happens, not after: A lateness rule enforced for the first time in the moment reads as a mood. The same rule sitting on your booking page, in the confirmation and in the reminder reads as a policy, and nobody argues with a policy they agreed to at the point of booking. Two lines is enough. Tell them that arriving more than fifteen minutes late may mean the service cannot be completed, and that the appointment may be treated as a late cancellation. Plain, specific and free of threat. The repeat offender is a different problem: One late arrival is traffic. The fourth is a pattern, and the pattern is costing you real money, usually attached to somebody who is otherwise perfectly pleasant. For repeat lateness the fix is structural rather than confrontational. Give them the first appointment of the day, where lateness only harms them. Or the last, where it harms nobody. Or ask for a deposit on future bookings. All three work better than a difficult conversation and none of them require you to have one. The measurement nobody takes: Record the time you actually started, not the time that was booked. After a month you will know whether lateness is a handful of clients, one particular day of the week or your own optimistic slot lengths. In a surprising number of businesses it turns out to be the slot lengths, and the client was never the problem. --- ## Where double bookings actually come from Source: https://youzse.app/blog/where-double-bookings-actually-come-from Category: Bookings Published: Jul 19, 2026 A double booking feels like carelessness. It almost never is. In nearly every case it is a gap between two systems that both believe they own the diary, and the person who takes the blame is simply the one who was standing closest. There are five common causes and each has a different fix. The diary lives in two places: The most common cause by a distance. Online bookings land in one system and phone bookings go in a paper book, a phone calendar or somebody's head. The two are reconciled at the end of the day, and the clash happens during it. The fix is not discipline. It is having one diary that both routes write into immediately. Any process that relies on somebody remembering to copy an appointment across will fail on the busiest day of the year, because that is the day nobody has time to copy anything. Two staff, one resource: Two stylists can absolutely both be free at two o'clock. If they both need the same backwash, the same lift or the same MOT bay, the diary says yes and physics says no. Rooms, bays, chairs and equipment need to be bookable in their own right, not implied by who is on shift. If your system only tracks people, it will keep letting you sell a resource twice. Someone is booking from memory: A receptionist who knows the diary well is faster than the software and will occasionally book a slot from recall rather than from the screen. This works perfectly until the moment somebody books that slot online while the phone call is still in progress. The fix is a habit rather than a policy. The slot is not confirmed to the customer until it is on the screen. It costs three seconds and removes an entire category of clash. Buffers and overruns are not modelled: A ninety minute colour booked into a ninety minute slot with no cleardown is a double booking waiting for a slow week to end. The diary is technically correct and operationally impossible. If your services routinely need setup, cleardown or travel, build that into the service duration rather than trusting yourself to leave a gap. A mobile business should be building travel time in as a rule, not as a favour to itself. Cancellations that half happened: A customer cancels by text, you free the slot in your head, somebody rebooks it and then the original cancellation was never actually processed. Now two people believe they have two o'clock and both are right. Cancel in the system first, in the conversation second. The order matters more than it sounds. What to do when it happens anyway: - Ring the one you can move, not the one who is easiest to move. They are rarely the same person. - Offer something specific rather than an apology. A named alternative slot beats "we will sort something out". - Write down which of the five causes it was. Three entries in a notebook will show you the pattern faster than any amount of resolving to be more careful. Being more careful is not a fix. Removing the second diary is. --- ## The hidden cost of a ten minute gap Source: https://youzse.app/blog/the-hidden-cost-of-a-ten-minute-gap Category: Bookings Published: Jul 16, 2026 Ten minutes between appointments feels like nothing. It is a coffee, a tidy up, a look at your phone. It is also the least examined cost in most service businesses, because it never appears on any statement and nobody ever invoices for it. Six of them in a day is an hour. Five days a week is a working day a month. Where the gaps come from: Almost all of it comes from rounding. A service that genuinely takes thirty five minutes gets booked as forty five because forty five is a tidy number and the slots line up neatly. That is ten minutes of paid time converted into a gap, repeated every time the service is sold. The second source is defensive padding. Somebody once overran badly, so a buffer went in, and the buffer stayed long after the overrun stopped happening. Buffers are worth having. Buffers nobody has reviewed in two years are just lost revenue with a good reason attached. The arithmetic: A stylist charging £45 an hour with six ten minute gaps a day is losing an hour of chargeable time a day. Across a five day week that is five hours, or £225 of capacity that was never available to sell. Over a working year, allowing for holiday, that is somewhere north of £10,000 of capacity in a single chair. It is not £10,000 of profit, because you would not fill all of it. Filling half of it is still a very good year. What to do about it: - Time your services honestly for a fortnight. Actual start to actual finish, written down. Most owners find at least one service is ten minutes shorter than the slot it sells and one is fifteen minutes longer. - Set durations to what the work takes rather than to the nearest quarter hour. A thirty five minute service should be thirty five minutes. Tidy numbers are for price lists, not for diaries. - Keep buffers where they earn their place. Cleardown between colours, travel between jobs and bay turnaround are real. A blanket ten minutes on everything is not. - Use the gaps you cannot remove. A ten minute slot is enough for a fringe trim, a patch test, a wheel nut torque check or a quick collection. Make those services bookable and the gap starts paying. - Let a waitlist see the gaps. A cancellation that leaves a forty minute hole is worth far more filled by somebody waiting than left as a long lunch. The part that is not about money: Some gaps are load bearing. A day booked wall to wall with no air in it produces tired work, short conversations and a rebooking rate that quietly falls. The goal is not zero gaps. It is knowing which gaps you chose and which ones the software chose for you. Count them for a week. It is usually the first time anyone has. --- ## Should you still take walk-ins? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/should-you-still-take-walk-ins Category: Bookings Published: Jul 13, 2026 Plenty of businesses went appointment only and never looked back. Plenty of others lost their best trade doing it. The honest answer is that it depends on three things, and none of them is what people usually argue about. The three things that decide it: The first is your average ticket. A £15 cut and a £480 clutch replacement are different businesses. The lower the ticket and the shorter the service, the more walk-in trade is worth having, because the customer will not plan a week ahead for a fifteen minute job and a nearby competitor will happily take them. The second is footfall. A high street unit with people passing the window is sitting on free demand. A first floor studio, an industrial estate or a mobile round has no walk-in trade to lose, so the decision makes itself. The third is whether you are already full. If you are booked three weeks out, walk-ins are an interruption. If your Tuesdays are quiet, they are the cheapest customers you will ever acquire. What appointment only actually buys you: - A predictable day, which is worth more to most owners than the marginal revenue. - Deposits, which walk-in trade cannot give you. - Accurate staffing, because you know what is coming. - A client record for everybody who comes through the door, which is the thing walk-in businesses almost never have and later regret. What it costs you: - The impulse customer, who is often the highest margin one because they take whatever slot is free. - Quiet period rescue. Walk-ins fill the hours nobody books in advance. - Anybody whose life does not run to a calendar. That is a bigger share of the population than most booking software companies believe. The hybrid that usually wins: Hold most of the diary for booked appointments and release a defined amount of walk-in capacity at the times you are historically quiet. Late morning midweek is the classic. Book the walk-in in when they arrive rather than treating them as an off-diary event, so the day still has one source of truth. Two rules make it work. Booked clients never wait behind a walk-in, and every walk-in gets recorded as a customer with contact details and consent before they leave. Without the first rule you punish the people who did the right thing. Without the second you have a busy shop and no client list. Turn walk-ins into bookings: The most valuable thing a walk-in gives you is not the transaction. It is the chance to book the next one. A walk-in who leaves with an appointment in six weeks has stopped being footfall and started being a customer. That conversion happens at the till, in about eight seconds, and it is the single habit that separates busy walk-in shops with a full diary from busy walk-in shops that start again every Monday. --- ## Cashflow and profit are not the same number Source: https://youzse.app/blog/cashflow-and-profit-are-not-the-same-number Category: Payments Published: Jul 10, 2026 A business can be profitable and still fail to pay its wages on the last Friday of the month. This catches people out because both numbers are described as "how we are doing", and they are describing completely different things. Profit is whether the work you did was worth doing. Cash is whether the money is in the account today. A good year and an empty account can happen at the same time, and in growing businesses they very often do. Where the two drift apart: Card payouts take a day or two to land. Card money taken on Friday is not spendable on Friday. Every business knows this and roughly half of them still plan as though it were not true. Deposits are cash you hold before you have earned it. That is genuinely useful. It is also somebody else's money until you do the work, and treating a diary full of deposits as revenue is how businesses end up owing refunds they cannot fund. Invoiced work is profit long before it is cash. A trade business quoting, doing the job and invoicing on thirty day terms has recognised a good month and will feel it in six weeks. The wages do not wait six weeks. VAT collected is not yours. If you are registered, a share of every payment arriving in your account belongs to HMRC and is simply passing through. A quarterly bill arriving on an account that has been spending it all quarter is the most common cashflow shock in a small business. Stock and parts go out before they come back. A garage that buys a clutch on Tuesday and gets paid on Friday has funded somebody else's repair for three days. Multiply by a busy week. The pattern underneath: Every one of those is a timing difference rather than a loss. Nothing has gone wrong. The money is simply arriving after the obligation, and growth widens every gap at once, which is why the scariest cashflow moments in a small business usually arrive during the good months. Four habits that fix most of it: - Keep VAT somewhere else. A separate account with the VAT share moved out weekly turns a quarterly shock into a non event. The same works for tax set aside as a sole trader. - Know your payout timing and plan to it. If money lands two working days later, a bank holiday weekend is a four day gap and payday should not sit inside it. - Take deposits, and do not spend them. The point of a deposit is commitment and no show protection, not working capital. - Invoice the day the job finishes. Not Sunday night, not at the end of the month. The clock on a thirty day term starts when the invoice is sent and the single biggest lever on getting paid faster is sending it sooner. What to actually watch: Profit is a monthly or quarterly question and your accountant is better at it than you are. Cash is a weekly question and nobody is going to ask it for you. Once a week, look at the balance, what is due out before the next payday and what is genuinely due in. Three numbers, ten minutes. It will not make you more profitable. It will stop the profitable year from being a frightening one. None of this is financial advice, and a good accountant is worth considerably more than any article about them. --- ## Gift cards, the cashflow win and the catch Source: https://youzse.app/blog/gift-cards-the-cashflow-win-and-the-catch Category: Payments Published: Jul 7, 2026 Gift cards are the closest thing a service business has to free working capital. Somebody pays you in November for work you will do in February, and in the meantime the money sits in your account. That is a real advantage and it comes with a real catch, which is that the money is not yours yet. Why they work so well: A gift card is bought by somebody who is not the customer, which means it brings you a person who has never been through your door. Redemption rates on gift cards are high, and a redeemer who has a good visit becomes a client rather than a one off. They also land in the two weeks of the year when your diary is at its quietest and your costs are not. December gift card sales fund January, which is the single most useful thing about them. The catch: An unredeemed gift card is a liability, not revenue. You have taken money and you owe a service. If you have sold £4,000 of gift cards and spent £4,000, you have spent money against work you still have to deliver, at whatever your costs are when the customer finally books. Treat gift card money the way you treat deposits. It is in the account, it is not in the profit, and the balance outstanding is a number you should be able to state at any moment. The VAT wrinkle worth knowing: UK rules distinguish between a single purpose voucher, where the VAT treatment of what it buys is known at the point of sale, and a multi purpose voucher, which can be spent on things with different VAT treatments. The point at which VAT is accounted for is different for each. For most service businesses selling a card redeemable against anything on the menu, the practical effect is that VAT is dealt with at redemption rather than at sale. Do not take that as advice. Ask your accountant once, write the answer down and apply it consistently, because getting it wrong for two years is a tedious thing to unpick. Expiry, and being fair about it: Expiry dates are allowed and a very short one is asking for a complaint. Terms in a consumer contract have to be fair, and a card that quietly dies after six months while the customer was waiting for a diary slot is the kind of term that gets challenged and should be. Twelve to twenty four months is the usual range. Whatever you choose, put the expiry on the card itself, on the receipt and in the terms and send a reminder before it lapses. Businesses that remind people get redemptions and goodwill. Businesses that stay quiet get an angry phone call and a refund they did not have to give. Practical settings worth getting right: - Make the balance partial. A £50 card spent on a £38 service should leave £12, not vanish. Card holders who lose change do not come back. - Never allow a gift card to be exchanged for cash. State it plainly on the card. - Record who bought it as well as who redeemed it. The buyer is a customer too and nobody ever markets to them. - Let people buy online, at any hour, with instant delivery to an email address. Most gift cards are bought in a hurry by somebody who has left it late. - Reconcile the outstanding balance monthly. If your system cannot tell you the total value of live gift cards in one number, that is the first thing to fix. Gift cards are one of the few things in a small business that improve cashflow, bring new people in and cost almost nothing to run. They just need to be treated as the debt they are until the day somebody sits in the chair. --- ## Chargebacks and disputes for service businesses Source: https://youzse.app/blog/chargebacks-and-disputes-for-service-businesses Category: Payments Published: Jul 4, 2026 The first chargeback is always a shock. Money that arrived weeks ago leaves the account, a fee goes with it, and you are asked to prove that a service you definitely provided was in fact provided. It is not a scam and it is not personal. It is the card scheme rules working as designed, with the balance deliberately tipped towards the cardholder. Knowing how the process runs makes it far less alarming and considerably more winnable. What actually happens: A cardholder disputes a payment with their bank. The bank pulls the money back from you immediately and asks the card scheme to adjudicate. You get a window to submit evidence, typically a week or two. The scheme decides. If you win, the money comes back. The fee is usually charged whether you win or lose, because it covers the process rather than the outcome. On Youzse that fee is £20. That is why prevention is worth much more than dispute handling, and why chasing a £14 dispute is rarely worth the afternoon. The three disputes a service business actually sees: The first is genuine card fraud, where somebody used a stolen card. You will lose these and you should, which is why taking a card in person or through a proper payment page matters more than it seems. The second is "I did not recognise this". A statement descriptor showing a company name nobody has heard of, three weeks after a visit, triggers a dispute from an honest customer. This is entirely avoidable and it is the most common one. The third is a service quality dispute, where somebody was unhappy and used their bank rather than telling you. These are the ones worth fighting, because the evidence is usually on your side. The evidence that wins: - The booking record showing what was booked, by whom, when and from which device or email address. - The confirmation and reminder messages you sent, and the fact they were delivered. - Proof the service happened. An attendance record, a signed form, a completed job sheet, before and after photos on a vehicle. - Your cancellation and no show terms, plus proof they were shown at the point of booking rather than added afterwards. - Any conversation where the customer said the work was fine. Notice that all of that is generated automatically by a business running its bookings through one system, and almost none of it exists in a business running a paper diary and a card reader. How to prevent most of them: - Set your statement descriptor to the name over the door, not your limited company name. This one change removes most "I do not recognise this" disputes on its own. - Send a receipt at the time of payment, every time. - Show your cancellation and no show policy at the point of booking, and get it agreed there rather than emailed later. - Take deposits through a payment page with card authentication rather than keying numbers in over the phone. A telephone card payment is the weakest position you can be in. - Answer complaints quickly. Most quality disputes are from somebody who felt ignored. A refund you chose to give costs less than a chargeback you lost plus the fee. When to just refund: If it is small, if you would probably lose and if the customer has a point, refund it and move on. A refund is cheaper than a lost dispute, faster than the process and it occasionally gets you the customer back. Fight the ones where you have the evidence and the amount justifies the hour. Prevent the rest by making it obvious who took the money and what for. --- ## Should you still take cash? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/should-you-still-take-cash Category: Payments Published: Jul 1, 2026 The case for cash is short and it is not wrong. No processing fee, money in hand the same day, nothing to go down at the worst possible moment. The case against it is longer, less obvious and mostly made of small numbers that nobody adds up. What cash actually costs: Banking it costs money. Most business current accounts charge for cash deposits, often per hundred pounds or per transaction, and a business banking £1,500 of cash a week is paying a real percentage to put its own money in its own account. Counting it costs time. Cashing up, reconciling a float, fixing the night the till was £8 out and getting to a branch or a post office is unpaid labour. Fifteen minutes a day at the end of a shift is more than an hour a week from your most tired hour. Discrepancies cost more than they should. Cash goes missing in tiny amounts and the investigation is always worse than the loss. Every business with a till has had the conversation and nobody has ever enjoyed it. It is invisible to your reporting. A card payment attaches itself to a booking, a customer and a service. A £40 note tells you nothing. If a third of your takings are cash, a third of your reporting is guesswork and your busiest service may not be the one you think. The record keeping is on you. Cash still has to be recorded accurately for VAT and for tax, and HMRC takes a dimmer view of a weak cash trail than of almost anything else. Good records are not optional just because there was no card machine involved. The honest comparison: On a £40 service at 2.5% plus 35p, the card fee is £1.35. Against that, the cash equivalent has a deposit fee, a share of your cashing up time and the chance that this is the £40 that goes unrecorded. The gap is much narrower than the "cash is free" instinct suggests. On small tickets card is genuinely more expensive. On anything above about £30, once time is priced at all, they are close. Where cash still earns its place: - Markets, mobile rounds and anywhere signal is unreliable. A dead card reader with no fallback loses the whole sale, not the fee. - An older client base that pays in cash by habit. Removing it costs you the customer, which costs vastly more than the fee. - Tips, where cash is often what the team prefers, though the rules on how tips are allocated apply either way. Where it does not: - Deposits. A cash deposit taken in person defeats the point, because the commitment is meant to happen at booking rather than on the day. - Anything invoiced. Cash against an invoice creates a reconciliation job that will be done badly. - Any business trying to measure itself. You cannot improve a mix you cannot see. The middle position most businesses land on: Keep taking cash, stop preferring it and never let it be the only route. Make card and contactless the obvious default at the point of sale, take deposits and prepayments by card only and put a number on what the cash actually costs you before deciding it is free. Then look at your split in six months. In most businesses the customers moved to card long before the owner did. --- ## What a 20% discount really costs you Source: https://youzse.app/blog/what-a-twenty-percent-discount-really-costs-you Category: Payments Published: Jun 28, 2026 Discounting feels like a lever with a small cost and a big effect. The cost is much larger than it looks, and the effect is usually smaller, because the arithmetic works on your margin rather than on your price. The number that matters: Take a £50 service where £20 goes on the direct costs of delivering it. Product, the share of wages for that hour, card fee, laundry, whatever it genuinely is. That leaves £30 of contribution. Knock 20% off the price and you sell it at £40. Your costs did not move, so you have £20 of contribution left. The price fell by a fifth. The contribution fell by a third. Now try a business with tighter costs. A £50 service with £30 of direct cost has £20 of contribution. The same 20% discount leaves £10. Half the margin, gone, in exchange for a discount most customers describe as modest. How many extra bookings you need: This is the question nobody asks before running the offer. In the first example, going from £30 to £20 of contribution means you need 50% more bookings just to stand still. In the second, going from £20 to £10 means you need to double your volume to break even. Not to profit. To break even, on a day that is now twice as busy, twice as tiring and needs the same staff. If your offer is going to a list of existing customers who were going to book anyway, the extra volume is zero and the discount is a straight transfer out of your pocket. The part that outlasts the offer: Price is a signal. A service discounted regularly is telling people its real price is the discounted one, and they will simply wait for the next round. Businesses that run a January offer every January have trained their client base to book in January. Discounts also select for the customer you want least. The person who comes for 20% off is, on average, less likely to rebook at full price, more likely to no show and more likely to leave for the next offer. You are paying to acquire your least loyal customers. Things that work better than cutting the price: - Add value instead of subtracting price. A treatment, an upgrade or a longer consultation costs you your marginal cost rather than your margin, and it does not reset anybody's idea of what you charge. - Discount time, not service. Ten per cent off Tuesday mornings fills the hours you cannot sell and leaves Saturday untouched. That is yield management rather than a sale. - Bundle forwards. Three sessions prepaid at a small saving brings cash in, locks in the next two visits and costs you far less per booking than a straight discount. - Reward the behaviour you want. Money off the next visit when they rebook before leaving beats money off this one, because it buys retention rather than a transaction. - Use referral credit. It costs you a discount only when it brings somebody new, which is the only version of a discount that reliably pays for itself. When a discount is genuinely right: To clear perishable capacity today, because an empty chair at three o'clock is worth nothing at four. To open a new location or a new stylist's column where the goal is filling a diary fast. To recover a client after something went wrong. All three have an end date and a specific job. If your offer has neither, it is not a promotion. It is a price cut you have not admitted to yet. --- ## Rebooking before they leave the chair Source: https://youzse.app/blog/rebooking-before-they-leave-the-chair Category: Customers Published: Jun 25, 2026 There is a moment at the end of every appointment when the client is happy, the work is fresh and they are standing in front of you with their card out. It lasts about eight seconds. What happens in it decides more about your revenue next quarter than anything you will post, print or pay for. Most businesses use it to say thanks and hold the door. Why it is worth so much: A client who leaves with a date in the diary comes back. A client who leaves saying they will ring is making a genuine, sincere statement of intent that fails perhaps half the time, because six weeks later they are busy, your number is not to hand and somebody nearer their office is open on a Thursday. The cost of the rebooking is zero. The cost of winning that person back through advertising, once they have drifted, is everything you would spend acquiring somebody new plus the awkwardness of admitting you noticed they went. What a good rate looks like: Rebooking rate is the share of completed appointments that leave with the next one booked. Businesses that have never measured it are usually somewhere between 20% and 40% and are certain it is higher. Businesses that measure it and work on it get to 60% or 70% on repeat services. Every ten points is a directly measurable increase in revenue that costs nothing, which is a sentence that is almost never true about anything else in a small business. Say it as an assumption, not a question: "Would you like to book again?" invites a no, and a polite person will take it because they do not want to be pushed. "You are on about six weeks, so that puts us at the second week of March. Do mornings still work best for you?" invites a date. The difference is that the second version has already decided the client is coming back and is only sorting out logistics. It is not pushier. It is less pushy, because it never asks them to make a commitment out loud. Three things that make it easier: - Know their cycle before they stand up. If your system shows the last four visit dates on the same screen as the payment, the interval is obvious and you can say the date rather than ask for it. - Have something specific to say. "Your colour will start to shift at about seven weeks" is a reason. "See you soon" is not. - Make the payment and the rebooking the same conversation. Two separate interactions gives them a door to leave through in the middle. When it does not fit: Some work genuinely cannot be rebooked at the chair. A garage does not know what the car will need in nine months and a plumber does not want to book a hypothetical leak. The equivalent for that kind of business is the reminder, which does the same job on a delay. MOT dates, service intervals, boiler service anniversaries and annual checks are all rebooking, just triggered by the calendar instead of by the till. The measurement: Track the share of appointments that end with a future booking, by staff member, for a month. Rebooking rate varies enormously between two people working in the same room doing the same job, and the gap is almost always the wording rather than the skill. Show people their own number. It moves on its own once they can see it. --- ## How to spot a client about to stop coming Source: https://youzse.app/blog/how-to-spot-a-client-about-to-stop-coming Category: Customers Published: Jun 22, 2026 Almost nobody leaves a business angrily. Angry customers complain, and a complaint is a gift because it can be answered. The ones you lose are the ones who quietly stretch six weeks into eight, eight into twelve and then into somebody else's chair. That drift is visible in your own records long before it is permanent, and almost nobody looks. The four signals worth watching: The interval stretches. A client whose average gap was 35 days is now at 52. Nothing was said and nothing went wrong. They are already halfway out, and this is the single most reliable indicator there is. The service shrinks. Somebody who used to book a colour and a cut is now booking just the cut. Somebody who had a full valet now books the mini. Spend per visit falling before visits stop is a classic pattern, and it usually means price, time or a slight loss of enthusiasm. Add-ons stop. The treatment, the beard trim, the extra bay check. Add-ons are discretionary and they are the first thing to go when somebody is reconsidering. The reminders stop landing. Bounced emails, an old mobile number, an unanswered confirmation. Half the "lost" clients in a database are not lost at all, they simply changed phone number and never heard from you again. Build one list and look at it monthly: Take every client whose last visit is more than one and a half times their own average interval. Not a flat ninety days, because a monthly client at seventy days is in trouble and an annual client at seventy days is fine. It has to be relative to their own pattern. That list is your entire retention problem, ranked, in one place. In most businesses it is much shorter than people fear and much more valuable than they expect. What to actually send: - Not an offer. A discount to somebody who was about to book anyway costs you money and tells everybody else to wait until they lapse. - Something specific and human. Reference the last thing you did, name the person who did it and offer two actual dates. - Ask a question rather than making a pitch. "Are you still due your six weekly appointment or have you changed to a different schedule?" gets a reply, including the useful replies you would rather not have. - Accept the answer. Somebody who has moved away or gone elsewhere should be marked as such and left alone. A clean list is worth more than a big one, and repeatedly messaging people who have gone is how you end up reported as spam. The uncomfortable part: Some of them will tell you why. The price went up, the wait got longer, they did not like the new person, the last one was rushed. That is not a bad afternoon, that is the most valuable market research you will ever get and it costs nothing. Write the reasons down. Five of them in a row that say the same thing is a fault in the business, not a run of bad luck. Do it monthly, not annually: A client at eight weeks who was on six is winnable with a text. The same client at nine months has a new routine, a new person and no particular reason to come back. The whole exercise takes twenty minutes a month and it is worth more than every acquisition campaign a small business ever runs. --- ## Client notes worth keeping, and ones that will get you in trouble Source: https://youzse.app/blog/client-notes-worth-keeping Category: Customers Published: Jun 19, 2026 Client notes are the difference between a business that remembers you and one that asks the same three questions every visit. They are also, in a lot of businesses, an unreviewed pile of personal data that nobody has read in five years. Both things are true at once, and the fix for the second does not require giving up the first. The test that settles most arguments: Assume the client will read it. They are entitled to. Anybody can ask for a copy of what you hold about them and you have a month to provide it, so every note you write should be one you would be comfortable reading aloud to the person it describes. That single test removes almost every problematic note ever written, and it removes none of the useful ones. Notes that earn their place: - What you actually did. Products, quantities, timings, settings, colours, parts, torque figures. This is the professional record and it is the reason notes exist. - Preferences and constraints. Prefers the quieter chair, cannot do mornings, always parks round the back, does not want the beard trimmed. - What went well and what did not. If the last one was a shade too dark, that is the most useful sentence in the file. - Safety and clinical information where it is relevant to the work. Allergies, medication that affects treatment, previous reactions. - Consent and what they agreed to. The waiver, the patch test date, the photo permission. Notes that will cause you a problem: - Opinions about the person. Difficult, rude, a nightmare, cheap. If it describes them rather than the work, it does not belong in a system. - Anything about their appearance, weight, relationships or personal circumstances that has nothing to do with the service. - Third party information. What they told you about their sister is her personal data, not theirs, and it should not be in either file. - Payment resentment. "Never tips" is a note that has ended more than one business relationship at the moment it was disclosed. - Speculation about health. Recording what somebody told you is a record. Guessing a diagnosis is not, and it is a category of data that carries much stricter obligations. Special category data deserves more care: Health information, and anything revealing it, is treated differently under UK GDPR and needs a stronger basis than "it is useful to know". Clinics, tattoo studios, aesthetics practitioners and anybody taking a medical history are already handling it, whether or not they have thought about it in those terms. Where you do hold it, keep it in a field designed for it rather than in a free text box, restrict who can see it and be able to say why you have it. A junior on reception does not need to read anybody's medical history to take a payment. Practical habits: - Write the note at the end of the appointment, not at the end of the week. A note written on Friday about Tuesday is half invented. - Keep it factual and short. Two lines of specifics beats a paragraph of impressions. - Never use a client record as a message board between staff. Anything you would not want on a screen while the client is standing next to it should not be there. - Review and delete. Notes on somebody who has not been near you in years are a liability with no upside. A retention rule that runs automatically is worth more than good intentions. - Restrict access by role. Not everybody needs to see everything, and that is as true in a five person salon as in a hospital. None of this is legal advice. It is the practical version of a simple rule, which is that a note should be about the work, useful next time and fit to be read by the person it is about. --- ## Loyalty schemes that do not give away your margin Source: https://youzse.app/blog/loyalty-schemes-that-do-not-give-away-your-margin Category: Customers Published: Jun 16, 2026 The tenth cut free is the most common loyalty scheme in the country and one of the least examined. It is a 10% discount, paid to the customers who were already the most loyal, in exchange for nothing they were not going to do anyway. Sometimes that is fine. Often it is a rebate on your best clients dressed up as a growth strategy. The only question that matters: What behaviour is this changing? If the honest answer is none, you are not running a loyalty scheme, you are running a discount with a delay on it. Behaviours worth paying for include coming back sooner, spending more per visit, booking a service they have not tried, referring somebody, coming on a quiet day and paying up front. Each of those is worth real money and each can be rewarded specifically. The three shapes and what they suit: Stamps are simple, visible and understood by everybody. They work best where the service is uniform and the visit frequency is what you want to move. A stamp card is a blunt instrument, which is exactly why it works in a barber shop and badly in a garage. Points let you weight things. Points per pound spent rewards value rather than visits, so a client having a colour earns more than one having a fringe trim. You can also award points for the behaviour rather than the spend, which is where they get interesting. Double points on a Tuesday costs you far less than 10% off everything. Cashback and credit is the most flexible and the most controllable. A balance earned on this visit and spendable on the next is genuinely powerful, because it is only valuable if they come back and it brings its own deadline. Cost it before you launch it: Take your gross margin on a typical service, then work out what the reward costs as a share of it. A tenth visit free on a £30 service is £30 given away against roughly £270 of revenue, so about 11% of turnover and a much larger share of your margin. Now compare that to giving £5 of credit for rebooking on the day. That is under 2% of the same revenue and it is buying a behaviour rather than rewarding an existing one. Rules that keep it sane: - Put an expiry on earned rewards. Credit with no end date is an open liability and it removes the urgency that made it work. - Cap what can be redeemed at once. A client arriving to spend eleven months of points in a single Saturday appointment is a bad day. - Do not stack it with everything else. A loyalty reward on top of a promotional price on top of a referral credit is how a service gets delivered at a loss. - Exclude gift card purchases from earning. Otherwise somebody can buy value, earn a reward on it and spend both. - Make the balance visible to the customer without them asking. A scheme nobody can see is a scheme nobody responds to. The version most businesses should run: Something small, automatic and tied to rebooking or spend, with a clear balance the client can see, an expiry and a cost you have actually calculated. The scheme that goes wrong is always the one designed as a gesture rather than as an offer, because a gesture has no number attached and nobody notices what it costs until it has been running for two years. --- ## The first appointment decides the next twelve Source: https://youzse.app/blog/the-first-appointment-decides-the-next-twelve Category: Customers Published: Jun 13, 2026 The first appointment is the most expensive one you will ever deliver. You paid to be found, you gave up a slot you could have sold to a regular and you are meeting somebody who does not yet know whether you are any good. If they come back for four years, it was the best money you ever spent. If they do not, you paid full price for a single transaction. The difference is usually decided in the parts of the visit nobody rehearses. The decision starts before they arrive: A confirmation that arrives immediately, says the right address, names the person they are seeing and answers the questions a first timer actually has does a surprising amount of work. Where to park. Which door. What to bring. How long it will take. A first visit carries a small amount of anxiety that regulars have long forgotten. Every question you answer in advance is a small piece of that removed, and a relaxed client is an easier client to impress. The first four minutes: Being greeted by name matters more than anything else that happens at the front of the visit. It requires nothing but knowing who is due and looking up. The other thing that matters is not being processed. A new client who is handed a clipboard, left alone and then collected has learned that they are a slot. Where you need forms, send them in advance so the visit starts with a conversation instead of paperwork. The consultation is the whole game: The single strongest predictor of a first timer returning is whether they felt listened to before the work started. Not the quality of the work, which most clients are not qualified to judge in fine detail, but whether what they asked for is what they got. Ask what they have had done before and what they did not like about it. That question alone gets you the thing they were too polite to mention, and it is nearly always the reason they left the last place. Then say back what you are about to do before you do it. Nobody has ever been unhappy about being told what was going to happen. The goodbye is not admin: The end of a first appointment is where the relationship is either started or quietly ended. Three things belong there and they take under a minute. 1. Tell them when to come back and why. A date and a reason. "Six weeks is where this will start to lose its shape." 2. Book it, or send them away with an obvious way to book that does not involve ringing during working hours. 3. Make sure they leave as a record rather than a receipt. Contact details, preferences, what you did and consent captured properly if you intend to message them later. The follow up nobody sends: A short message two days later asking whether they are happy with it takes seconds and does two jobs. It catches the unhappy client before they tell everybody else, and it gives the happy one an obvious moment to say something nice, which is when a review request actually works. Measure the second visit: First visit numbers are easy to celebrate and mean very little. The number that tells you whether the business is working is what share of first timers come back within their expected interval. Track it monthly by staff member and by how the client found you. Some acquisition channels bring people who return at twice the rate of others, and until you measure the second visit you have no idea which ones you are paying for. --- ## Getting your business quoted by AI search Source: https://youzse.app/blog/getting-your-business-quoted-by-ai-search Category: Marketing Published: Jun 10, 2026 A growing share of "who should I use for this" now gets asked to an assistant rather than typed into a search box. The answer that comes back is a short list of two or three names with a sentence each, and there is no second page. That is a harsher format than a results page. Being fourth is the same as being nowhere. It is worth understanding what actually gets a small business into those three. Answer engines quote specifics, not adjectives: A model producing a recommendation needs something concrete to say. "Friendly, professional service you can trust" is unquotable because it describes nothing and every competitor says it too. "Curly hair specialist in Chester, open Sundays, does patch tests for colour, wheelchair accessible ground floor" is four facts that can be matched against four different questions. The business that publishes facts gets cited. The business that publishes atmosphere does not. Consistency across sources is what builds confidence: Assistants cross reference. When your name, address, phone number and opening hours are identical everywhere they appear, you look like a real, verifiable business. When your old address is still on three directories and your Sunday hours differ between your website and your listing, you look uncertain, and uncertain businesses get left out of a short answer. This is unglamorous work and it is the highest return work available. One afternoon fixing every listing you can find is worth more than a month of posting. Answer the actual questions: The queries that matter to a local service business are long and specific. Is anywhere open late on a Thursday. Does anyone near me do gel removal without a rebook. Can I get an MOT the same day. Do you take dogs that are nervous. If the answer to a question like that exists on your site as plain text, it can be quoted. If it exists only in your head, or in a photo of a price list, it cannot. Most small business websites are made of images and adjectives, which is the worst possible shape for this. What to actually publish: - A services page with names, descriptions, durations and prices as text. Not a PDF, not a photograph of a printed menu. - Opening hours as text, including the exceptions. Bank holidays, late nights, the Saturday you close early. - A short FAQ made of the questions people genuinely ring and ask. Twelve real questions beats a thousand words of prose. - Who you are for and who you are not for. Specificity is what gets you matched. Trying to be for everybody gets you matched to nobody. - Structured data on your pages so machines can read the business, the services, the location and the hours without guessing. The things that work in both directions: Reviews still matter, because they are the third party evidence an assistant leans on when it has to choose between two similar businesses. So does having a bookable link, because a recommendation is far more useful if the next step exists. None of this conflicts with ordinary search. A page that answers a real question in plain, specific language ranks well and gets quoted well, because both systems are ultimately looking for the same thing. The one sentence version: Write down the true, specific, checkable facts about your business in text a machine can read and make sure they say the same thing everywhere. That is the whole method. It is not complicated and almost nobody local to you has bothered. --- ## Email, SMS or WhatsApp: which one gets read? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/email-sms-or-whatsapp Category: Marketing Published: Jun 7, 2026 Every service business ends up sending four kinds of message. Confirmations, reminders, follow ups and marketing. Most businesses pick one channel and use it for all four, which means three of them are being sent on the wrong one. The channels have genuinely different properties and the right answer is to match the message to the channel rather than to have a favourite. Email: Cheap to the point of free, unlimited length, keeps a record and handles attachments. Open rates on transactional email are strong and open rates on promotional email are not, which tells you what it is for. Use it for confirmations, receipts, invoices, forms, anything with a document attached and anything the client may want to find again in three months. Use it for newsletters if you have something worth saying. Do not rely on it for a reminder two hours before an appointment. A meaningful share of people will not have looked at their email in that time. SMS: Almost universally read and read quickly, which is exactly why it should be rationed. It costs real money per message, it is short and it arrives with an urgency the recipient did not choose. Use it for the reminder the day before, the "your car is ready" message, the running late notice and the cancellation slot offer. Anything time critical and short. Do not use it for marketing unless the consent for that is explicit and recorded. UK rules on electronic marketing are stricter than most people assume, and a promotional text to somebody who only ever agreed to appointment reminders is the single most common compliance mistake in this market. WhatsApp: Very high open rates, conversational, free at the point of use for the customer and increasingly the channel people actually prefer. It also has the most rules attached, because business messaging on WhatsApp runs on approved templates outside an open conversation window. Use it where the customer has chosen it. Confirmations, reminders and the back and forth that a phone call used to handle. It is particularly good for anything with a photo attached, which makes it a natural fit for garages, groomers, valeters and trades. The distinction that keeps you legal: A message about an appointment somebody booked is part of delivering what they asked for. You do not need marketing consent to tell somebody their appointment is tomorrow. A message trying to sell them something is marketing, and marketing needs consent that is specific, freely given and recorded, with an easy way out in every message. A pre-ticked box is not consent and "by booking you agree to receive offers" is not consent either. Record consent per channel, per person, with a date. If you cannot evidence when and how somebody opted in, you cannot demonstrate you had permission, and demonstrating it is your job rather than theirs. This is a summary rather than legal advice. A sensible default set: - Booking confirmation by email, with the calendar file and any forms. - Reminder 24 hours ahead by SMS or WhatsApp, whichever they chose. - Short reminder on the morning where no shows are a real problem. - Follow up two days later by email or WhatsApp. - Marketing by email as the default, with SMS reserved for the two or three moments a year that genuinely justify the cost and the intrusion. The cost angle nobody models: SMS looks cheap per message and is expensive at volume. Sending two reminders by text to 400 clients a month is a real line in your accounts, and half of those people would have read an email perfectly happily. Let people choose the channel at booking, default the noisy ones to the cheap channel and reserve the expensive channel for the messages where being read within the hour is worth paying for. --- ## Writing a service menu that books itself Source: https://youzse.app/blog/writing-a-service-menu-that-books-itself Category: Marketing Published: Jun 4, 2026 A booking page has one job and it usually fails at the same point. Somebody arrives, ready to book, reaches a list of thirty one services with names they do not recognise, cannot work out which one applies to them and decides to ring instead. Then they do not ring. Almost every abandoned online booking is a menu problem rather than a demand problem. Fewer options, better sorted: A list of thirty services is not a sign of a versatile business, it is a decision you have pushed onto somebody with less information than you. Group them, hide the rare ones behind a category and put the four things most people actually book at the top. If a service is booked twice a year, it does not need to be visible to everybody arriving on the page. It needs to exist for the two people who want it. Name things the way customers do: Trade language is precise and unhelpful. Customers do not search for a "Level 2 restructure" or a "wet service inspection". They search for what they want to happen. The fix is to lead with the customer name and put the professional term second. "Gel removal and reapply" first, the technical name after. You lose nothing and you stop asking somebody to translate before they can buy. The description answers one question: Not what the service is. Whether it is the right one for them. A good description says who it suits, what happens, how long it takes and what it includes or does not. Three lines. "Best if you have had colour in the last six months. Includes a consultation, patch test where needed and a blow dry. Allow two hours." Look at your current descriptions and count how many are just the name of the service written out again. In most businesses it is most of them. Price and duration should be visible: Hiding the price does not create an enquiry, it creates a bounce. The customer assumes the worst and goes to the page that told them. Where prices genuinely vary, say the range and say what moves it. "From £65, depending on length and thickness" is honest, useful and books. "Price on consultation" reads as evasive even when it is not. Duration matters just as much, because half the people looking at your page are trying to work out whether it fits in a lunch hour. The additions that make a difference: - A short "not sure which to book" option that routes to the shortest consultation you offer. It rescues the people who would otherwise leave. - Add-ons offered at the point of booking rather than sold in the chair. People buy more from a list than from a person, and nobody feels sold to. - A photograph of the actual result, not stock imagery. Real work outperforms a professional photo of somebody else's. - The obvious answers underneath. Parking, access, whether children are welcome, whether you take card, what happens if they are late. Test it on somebody who does not work there: Give your booking page to a friend, tell them to book the thing they would want and say nothing while they do it. Where they hesitate is where your page is broken. It takes four minutes and it will tell you more than any amount of staring at your own menu, because you already know which one they should pick and that is precisely the knowledge the customer does not have. --- ## What to post when you have no time to post Source: https://youzse.app/blog/what-to-post-when-you-have-no-time-to-post Category: Marketing Published: Jun 1, 2026 Most advice for small business social media is written by people whose job is social media. It assumes a content calendar, a strategy and a spare afternoon. You have none of those and you are not going to get them. Here is the version that survives contact with a working week. The only rule that matters: Take the photo while you are working. Not later, not on a special shoot day. The single reason small business accounts die is that photographing the work is treated as a separate task, and separate tasks do not happen. Two seconds at the end of a job, every job, for a week. You will have twenty photographs and a problem you no longer have. The five things worth posting: 1. The work itself. Before and after is the entire genre and it never stops working. A finished cut, a valeted interior, a repaired tap, a groomed dog looking mildly betrayed. 2. The process. People are far more interested in how something is done than in the result. A short clip of the mid stage of a job outperforms the polished finish more often than not. 3. The person. Faces do better than anything else. Who is in today, who has just joined, who has just qualified in something. 4. The useful thing. One genuine tip from your trade. How to make a colour last, what that noise probably is, when to book a boiler service. This is the content that gets saved and shared. 5. The availability. A gap on Thursday afternoon, a cancellation, a quiet week. This is the post that directly makes money and it is the one people are most embarrassed to make. What to write underneath: One sentence about what it is and one about who it is for. Then, on maybe one post in four, a plain instruction to book with a link. Do not write a paragraph. Do not open with a question you do not want answered. Do not use twenty hashtags. A handful of specific, local ones does the job and the rest is decoration. The ten minute batching habit: Sit down once a week, pick the best four photos from your camera roll, write four sentences and schedule them. That is the whole system. It works because it separates the two activities that do not fit together. Capturing needs to happen constantly and takes seconds. Publishing needs ten minutes of quiet and happens once. Trying to do both in the moment is why people post twice and stop. Consent, before you post anything: You need permission before putting a recognisable client, their child or their pet on a public account, and you need it in a form you can prove later. A verbal yes while somebody is in the chair is easy to give and awkward to refuse, which is exactly why it is worth capturing it properly at booking instead. Record the permission against the client, keep it separate from the consent to be marketed to and honour a withdrawal quickly. Vehicles need a thought too, since a number plate identifies an owner. What to stop doing: - Reposting quotes and generic graphics. Nobody has ever booked from an inspirational quote. - Apologising for not posting. It draws attention to a gap nobody noticed. - Chasing a trend that has nothing to do with your trade. - Measuring likes. Look at saves, shares, profile visits and the only number that matters, which is bookings that came from the link. Four real photos a week from an actual working business beats a beautifully planned account that stops in March. Consistency at a low level wins, because the alternative is not a better standard, it is nothing at all. --- ## Where to put your booking link Source: https://youzse.app/blog/where-to-put-your-booking-link Category: Marketing Published: May 29, 2026 A booking link is the only marketing asset a service business has that works while it sleeps. Most businesses have it in exactly one place, which is a social media bio that a third of their customers will never see. The link costs nothing to place. The only thing stopping it appearing in fifteen places is that nobody has sat down for twenty minutes and put it there. The four that convert best: Your Google Business Profile. This is where people find you when they are ready. A profile with a working booking link converts intent that is already at its peak. A profile with only a phone number converts it during opening hours and loses it outside them. Your social media bio, as the only link. Not one of four. The whole point of the position is that it is unambiguous. The bottom of every invoice and receipt. This is the most under used location in the entire list. Somebody reading an invoice has just had the service, thinks well of you and is holding a document with room on it. Your voicemail and your missed call text. Half the calls a small business misses are somebody trying to book. A missed call that triggers a text with the link recovers the ones that would otherwise ring somewhere else. The rest of the list: - Email signature, on every email anybody in the business sends. - Every confirmation and reminder message, so rebooking and rescheduling never requires a phone call. - Your review replies. Somebody reading reviews is deciding, and a link in the reply is in front of them at that moment. - Printed on the card you hand over, as a short link and a QR code. - On the window and on the door, for the people who arrive when you are closed or full. - In the shop, at the till, on a small card by the card machine. - On the vehicle, if you have one on the road. - In your out of office and your holiday message. - On the quote you send, so an approved quote can turn into a date without another exchange. - In any local directory, forum or community group listing you have. Make the link short and legible: A booking URL with a long random string is fine in an email and hopeless on a van, a card or a voicemail script. You want something short enough to be said aloud and typed correctly by somebody who heard it once. A QR code alongside it covers everything printed. Test it before you print five hundred, and test it with an actual phone rather than a preview. What to check once it is out there: Every link should land on the booking page itself rather than the homepage. Sending somebody to a homepage after they clicked "book" adds a step, and every step loses people. Then check it on a phone. Most of your traffic is on one, and a booking page that requires pinching and zooming will be abandoned by people who fully intended to book. The twenty minute job: Open a note, paste the link and work through the list above ticking off where it already is. In most businesses it is in two or three places out of fourteen. Fixing that is not a marketing campaign. It has no budget, takes one sitting and it is very likely the highest return twenty minutes available to you this month. --- ## The first 24 hours of a data breach Source: https://youzse.app/blog/the-first-24-hours-of-a-data-breach Category: Compliance Published: May 26, 2026 Most personal data breaches in small businesses are not hacks. They are a phone left in a taxi, a client list emailed to the wrong address, a laptop taken from a car or a member of staff who left with a copy of everything. All of them start the same clock, and the businesses that handle it well are the ones that decided the order of the first few steps before anything happened. This is a practical summary rather than legal advice. Where the stakes are high, get proper advice quickly. What actually counts: A personal data breach is any security incident leading to accidental or unlawful destruction, loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure of or access to personal data. Losing it counts. Deleting it by accident with no backup counts. Somebody inside the business looking at records they had no reason to see counts. It does not require malice and it does not require a criminal. That is the part people get wrong, usually while deciding something was "not really a breach" and therefore not worth writing down. The 72 hour clock: If a breach is likely to risk people's rights and freedoms, it has to be reported to the ICO within 72 hours of you becoming aware of it. Not 72 working hours. If it also poses a high risk to those individuals, they have to be told directly, without undue delay. The clock starts at awareness, which means the moment somebody in the business knew, not the moment it reached the owner. That is a strong argument for staff knowing they must report immediately and never being punished for doing so. The order to work in: 1. Contain it. Change the password, revoke the session, remotely wipe the device, recall the message, lock the account. Stop the bleeding before you analyse it. 2. Find out what data and whose. Categories of data, roughly how many people and whether anything sensitive is involved. An approximate answer now is worth more than a precise one on Friday. 3. Assess the risk to those people. Could this lead to fraud, distress, identity theft or physical harm? A list of first names is not the same as a list of home addresses with medical notes attached. 4. Decide on reporting, and record the decision either way. If you decide not to report, write down why. That reasoning is what you will be asked for. 5. Tell the people affected if the risk to them is high. Plainly, quickly, with what happened and what they should do. 6. Fix the cause rather than the instance. A lost phone is a symptom. No screen lock and no remote wipe is the cause. Write it down as you go: Every breach must be recorded internally, including the ones you decide not to report. Time it happened, time you found out, what data, how many people, what you did, what you decided and why. That record is the single most useful thing you can produce if anybody asks later, and it takes ten minutes at the time and half a day to reconstruct afterwards. The preparation that makes all of this easy: - Know now who makes the call. In a small business it is the owner, and they should know that today rather than on the day. - Have the ICO reporting route to hand, along with anything you would need to log in to your own systems from somewhere else. - Make sure every device with client data on it has a screen lock, encryption and a remote wipe you have tested once. - Limit what each person can see. A breach of one account is only as bad as what that account could reach. - Tell staff that reporting a mistake immediately is the expected behaviour. A culture where people hide an error for a day is the only reliable way to miss the deadline. The version to remember: Contain, assess, record, report if it warrants it, tell people if the risk to them is high, then fix the underlying cause. The mistake that turns an incident into a serious problem is nearly always hesitation rather than the breach itself. --- ## Is your booking page usable by everyone? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/is-your-booking-page-usable-by-everyone Category: Compliance Published: May 23, 2026 Accessibility gets treated as an obligation for large organisations with a compliance department. For a local service business it is simpler than that and more directly commercial. Around one in five people in the UK has a disability, and a booking page they cannot use is a customer who goes elsewhere without ever telling you why. The Equality Act 2010 requires reasonable adjustments so that disabled people are not put at a substantial disadvantage. That applies to how you provide a service, and taking bookings is providing a service. This is a summary rather than legal advice. The things that go wrong most often: Contrast. Pale grey text on white looks tasteful on a designer's screen and is unreadable to a large number of people, including anybody outdoors on a phone. This is the most common failure by a distance and the easiest to fix. Tap targets that are too small. A time slot rendered as a tiny box is difficult for anybody with a tremor, arthritis or large hands. Bigger buttons help everyone and cost nothing. Colour as the only signal. If available and unavailable slots differ only by being green or grey, then for a colour blind user they do not differ at all. Add a label, a border or a strike through. Form fields with no proper labels. A placeholder that vanishes when you start typing is not a label, and a screen reader announces an unlabelled field as nothing useful at all. No keyboard route. Plenty of people never use a mouse or a touchscreen. If you cannot reach every part of your booking flow with the tab key alone, some people cannot complete it. Time limits. A booking session that expires while somebody is still deciding punishes anybody who needs longer, which includes people using assistive technology and people who were interrupted by their own life. The information that is part of accessibility: Half the problem is not the page at all, it is what the page fails to say. Publish it plainly. - Whether there are steps, and how many. - Whether there is a ground floor option. - Where the nearest accessible parking is. - Whether the space is quiet or loud, which matters enormously to autistic clients and to many others. - Whether a companion, a carer or an assistance dog is welcome. - Whether you can offer a longer appointment or a quieter time on request. Publishing that costs nothing and it converts, because somebody who currently has to ring and ask an awkward question will simply book instead. A five minute test anyone can run: 1. Load your booking page on a phone in bright daylight. If you are squinting, so is everybody else. 2. Complete a booking using only the tab and enter keys. Note anything you cannot reach. 3. Turn your phone's text size up to a large setting and see whether the layout still works or the buttons overlap. 4. Turn on the screen reader built into your phone and try to get through the first two steps. It is an uncomfortable five minutes and it is the most informative test on this list. 5. Ask somebody over seventy to book an appointment while you watch and say nothing. The standard to aim at: WCAG 2.2 at level AA is the recognised benchmark and the reference point most organisations use. You do not need to become an expert in it. Getting contrast, labels, keyboard access, tap target size and text resizing right covers the large majority of real world problems. If your booking page comes from a platform, that work is largely somebody else's job, and it is a perfectly reasonable thing to ask a provider about before you commit to them. If your booking page is your own, the five minute test above will find more issues than an afternoon of reading. The commercial point: An accessible booking page is not a favour to a minority. Larger text, better contrast, bigger buttons and clearer labels make the page easier for everybody, particularly on a phone, outdoors, in a hurry, which is how most bookings are actually made. --- ## Client data on your team's personal phones Source: https://youzse.app/blog/client-data-on-your-teams-personal-phones Category: Compliance Published: May 20, 2026 In most small service businesses, a good deal of client contact happens on a phone somebody bought themselves. Photos of the work, WhatsApp threads about appointments, client numbers saved in personal contacts, a note of somebody's address in the notes app. It is convenient, it is how the work actually gets done, and it quietly creates two problems that only ever surface at the worst possible moment. The two problems: The first is data protection. You are the controller of that client data regardless of whose phone it sits on. If you cannot say where it is, who can see it or how it would be deleted, then you cannot meet the obligations you already have. The second is commercial. A client list living in a stylist's personal contacts is a client list that leaves with the stylist. This is not a hypothetical and it is not usually malicious. Nobody deletes their own contacts when they change job. What good looks like without being unreasonable: Banning personal phones outright does not work in a business with three people and no company handsets. The realistic goal is that work data lives in the work system and personal devices are a window onto it rather than a copy of it. - Client contact happens through the business, not from a personal number. Business messaging, a business WhatsApp or the system that already holds the booking. - Client numbers are not saved into personal contacts. If somebody needs to ring a client, they should be doing it from a record rather than from their address book. - Photos of work go straight into the client record or the business account, then off the camera roll. This also solves the consent question, because the permission and the photo end up in the same place. - Anybody accessing the system on their own phone does it through an account with a password, two factor authentication and permissions limited to their role. - Screen lock and remote wipe are non negotiable on any device that touches client data. Write two short things down: A one page policy saying what is and is not allowed on a personal device. It does not need to be long. It needs to exist, be signed and be understood, because "we assumed everyone knew" is not a defence. A leaver checklist. Revoke system access the same day, not at the end of the month. Remove them from group chats. Ask them to confirm in writing that they have deleted client data from personal devices and contacts. Change any shared password, because shared passwords always exist even in businesses that say they do not. The one that catches everybody out: Group chats. A WhatsApp group with the team in it, where client names, conditions, addresses and complaints get discussed, is a data processing activity nobody has assessed, sitting on devices you do not control, with a full history visible to anybody added later. It is also very hard to delete. If a client asks you to erase what you hold about them, a five year team chat is not something you can honestly say you have dealt with. Move operational chat to somewhere with records, roles and the ability to remove a person and their access. Keep the team group for arranging who is bringing the biscuits. The uncomfortable question worth asking: If your most experienced member of staff left tomorrow and took their phone with them, how much of your client base would go with it and could you truthfully tell those clients you still control their data? If the answer is uncomfortable, the fix is not a difficult conversation with a colleague. It is a system where the client belongs to the business, everybody can do their job through it and nobody needs to keep a private copy in order to work. None of this is legal advice, and a business with employees should get the employment side of any device policy checked. --- ## Special category data in a small clinic or studio Source: https://youzse.app/blog/special-category-data-in-a-small-clinic Category: Compliance Published: May 17, 2026 A tattoo studio asking about medication. A massage therapist recording an old back injury. An aesthetics practitioner taking a full medical history. A podiatrist noting a diabetes diagnosis. A salon recording a scalp condition and an allergy. All of those are health information, which UK GDPR treats as special category data with a higher bar than ordinary personal data. Very few small practices have ever been told this in plain terms, and most are already handling it perfectly sensibly by instinct while having nothing written down. This is a practical summary and not legal advice. What counts: Special category data covers health, race or ethnic origin, religious or philosophical beliefs, political opinions, trade union membership, genetic and biometric data used for identification, sex life and sexual orientation. For a service business it is almost always health. It includes anything that reveals health rather than only what is stated outright. A note that somebody is undergoing chemotherapy is health data whether it appears as a diagnosis or as a reason for a change of treatment. Criminal offence data is handled under separate rules again, which matters to anybody doing DBS style checks on staff. The bar is higher, and it is a specific bar: Ordinary personal data needs a lawful basis. Special category data needs a lawful basis and a separate condition under Article 9, and the two are not the same thing. Explicit consent is one route and it is not always the best one, because consent has to be freely given and easy to withdraw, which sits awkwardly when you genuinely cannot perform the treatment safely without the information. Practitioners providing health or social care may be able to rely on a health related condition instead. Which one applies depends on what you actually do, and it is worth getting a straight answer once rather than assuming. What that means in practice: - Ask only for what affects the treatment. A full medical history for a service that needs to know about two things is over collection, and over collection is the most common failing. - Explain why you are asking on the form itself. One line next to the question does more for trust and compliance than a privacy notice nobody opens. - Keep it in a structured field rather than a free text box. Data you can find is data you can protect, restrict and delete. - Restrict access by role. Reception does not need to read a medical history to take a payment or book a follow up. - Encrypt it at rest and make sure it is not sitting in an email inbox, a spreadsheet or a photograph of a paper form on somebody's phone. - Set a retention period and stick to it. Clinical records are often kept longer for good reason and that reason should be written down rather than assumed. - Consider whether you need a data protection impact assessment. Large scale processing of health data usually triggers one, and it is a useful exercise even when it does not. Paper forms are not a loophole: A filing cabinet of consultation forms is processing special category data in exactly the same way as a database, with worse security, no access control, no audit trail and no realistic way to answer a request for erasure. If a client asks what you hold about them, a drawer of forms in date order is a genuinely awful afternoon. Digital records with a search box are a two minute job. The things worth doing this month: Write down what special category data you collect, why you collect it, which condition you are relying on, who can see it and how long you keep it. That is most of an Article 30 record and it is the document that turns a vague worry into a settled question. Then look at your intake form and delete every question you do not act on. It is the fastest compliance improvement available and it makes the form better for the client at the same time. --- ## Rotas, holiday and the weeks everybody forgets Source: https://youzse.app/blog/rotas-holiday-and-the-weeks-everybody-forgets Category: Staff Published: May 14, 2026 Two things reliably go wrong with staff time in a small service business. The rota is built around who is available rather than around when customers want to come, and holiday is handled informally until the week it becomes an argument. Both are fixable and neither requires an HR department. The number people underestimate: Statutory holiday in the UK is 5.6 weeks a year for a worker. For somebody working five days a week that is 28 days including bank holidays, and the statutory entitlement is capped at 28 days. That is where the surprise sits. A business that closes on eight bank holidays and offers "20 days plus bank holidays" has offered exactly the statutory minimum, not a benefit on top of it. Plenty of owners believe they are being generous when they are meeting the floor. Part time workers get it pro rata. Irregular hours and part year workers are calculated differently and the rules there have changed in recent years, so it is worth checking the current guidance on gov.uk rather than copying what a friend does. This is a summary, not employment advice, and getting a contract checked once is cheap. Why the rota is usually wrong: Most small business rotas are built from staff preference and habit. The result is a shop with three people on a dead Tuesday and two on a Saturday with a waiting list. Take your bookings from the last three months and plot them by hour and by day. Nearly every service business finds two things. There is a peak they are underserving and there are hours they are paying for that produce almost nothing. Moving one shift from a quiet morning to a busy evening costs nothing and is usually worth more than any marketing you could run that month. A leave process that takes five minutes: - Requests in writing, in one place, never verbally in the middle of a shift. - A cut off for the busy period. Christmas requests in by the end of September, summer by the end of March. First come, first served after that, and everybody knows the rule in advance. - A cap on how many people can be off at once, set per role rather than per person. Two stylists off is manageable. Both MOT testers off is a closed bay. - Approved leave blocks the diary automatically. A holiday that exists in a WhatsApp thread but not in the booking system will be booked over, and it will be booked over by you. - Visible balances. Most disputes about holiday are actually disputes about arithmetic, and they disappear the moment everybody can see the same number. The things that get missed: Carry over rules should be written down. Whether unused days roll into the next year, and how many, is a decision you make once rather than an argument you have every January. Holiday pay for staff whose earnings vary, including commission and tips where they count, is not simply their basic rate. This is a well known trap in commission based trades and it is worth getting right rather than discovering later. Leavers are owed pay for holiday accrued and untaken. Budget for it rather than being surprised. And self employed chair renters are not employees and do not accrue holiday from you at all, but the label on the arrangement does not decide the status. What actually happens in practice does, and getting that wrong is expensive. The version that works: One place where availability, approved leave and bookings all live, so a booked holiday closes the diary and a shift pattern reflects when customers actually turn up. Everything else is negotiation, and negotiation is far easier when nobody is arguing about the facts. --- ## Who on your team should see what Source: https://youzse.app/blog/who-on-your-team-should-see-what Category: Staff Published: May 11, 2026 In most small businesses everybody can see everything. It is not a decision, it is what happens when a system is set up in one evening and permissions look like a job for a quieter week. The cost of that shows up in three ways, and by the time it does, it is too late to set them up quietly. What actually goes wrong: Somebody sees the takings. Once a stylist knows exactly what the business turns over, and has their own view of what they contribute, the conversation about pay changes and it changes with incomplete information. Somebody sees another client's notes. Health information, addresses and personal circumstances get read by people with no reason to read them. Under UK GDPR you should be limiting access to what each person needs, and unrestricted internal access is one of the more common findings when something goes wrong. Somebody exports the client list. Usually on their last week. It is often not even malicious, since a departing stylist may genuinely believe their clients are theirs. The export happened because it was possible. The rule to work from: Give each person what they need to do their job well, and nothing beyond it. Not as a statement of distrust, but because access is a risk that has to be balanced against a benefit, and access somebody never uses has no benefit at all. Frame it that way to the team, because the version where permissions arrive with no explanation reads as an accusation and generates far more resentment than the change deserves. A sensible starting shape: - Front desk needs the diary, customer contact details, bookings, payments and the ability to take money. It does not need clinical notes, staff pay, business reporting or the ability to export the customer list. - A stylist, technician or therapist needs their own diary, the client history for the people they are treating and the notes relevant to the work. Whether they see other people's columns depends on how you actually cover for each other. - A manager needs everything operational, including reporting and refunds, and usually not the billing account or the ability to remove other administrators. - The owner needs everything, including the parts nobody else should have. Billing, plan changes, permissions, integrations and anything that can delete data permanently. - Anybody temporary or on trial should start at the smallest useful set and be widened, rather than starting wide and never being narrowed. The four permissions worth being strict about: Exporting customer data. This is the one that becomes a competitor's mailing list. It should be a deliberate act by one or two people. Deleting records. Deletion should be restricted and, ideally, recoverable. Most systems that allow anyone to delete a customer will eventually have somebody delete a customer. Refunds and discounts. Not because you distrust the team, but because a discount is money and money should leave with a name attached to it. Changing prices. Prices are a business decision and it is remarkably easy to change one by accident on a busy Saturday. The part that makes it survivable: Everybody should have their own login. Shared accounts destroy the entire point, because an audit trail that says "reception" tells you nothing on the day you actually need it. Two factor authentication on anybody with wide access is worth the twenty seconds. And when somebody leaves, access ends that day rather than at the end of the month, which is only possible if you knew who had what in the first place. Doing it now takes half an hour. Doing it after an incident takes considerably longer and happens in front of an audience. --- ## Tips and service charges after the Tipping Act Source: https://youzse.app/blog/tips-and-service-charges-after-the-tipping-act Category: Staff Published: May 8, 2026 Tipping used to be a matter of house custom. The Employment (Allocation of Tips) Act 2023 changed that, and since it came into force employers have had legal obligations around tips rather than traditions. It gets far less attention in hair, beauty and vehicle trades than it does in hospitality, which is odd, because a busy salon can be handling a substantial amount of card tips every month. This is a plain summary and not legal advice. The core of it: Qualifying tips, gratuities and service charges must be passed on to workers in full. The employer cannot make deductions, and that includes deducting the card processing fee or an administrative charge. Allocation between workers has to be fair. Fair does not mean identical, and a reasonable, explained method that recognises different roles and contributions is allowed. What is not allowed is an arbitrary split nobody can justify. Tips must be paid by the end of the month following the month they were received. The written policy: Where tips are received on more than an occasional and exceptional basis, you need a written tipping policy, available to workers, setting out how tips are dealt with and how they are allocated. That policy is a short document. What counts as a tip, how card tips are handled, how they are shared, when they are paid and who decides. Writing it forces you to make decisions you have probably been making informally and inconsistently. Records: You have to keep records of tips received and how they were allocated, and workers have a right to request that information. The records requirement runs for three years. In practice this means card tips need to be recorded per transaction and per worker rather than totalled up at the end of the week from memory. If your payment setup cannot separate a tip from the service amount, that is the first thing to fix, because everything else depends on it. What is in and what is out: Cash tips handed directly to a worker, which the employer has no control over, are generally outside the scope. The worker keeps them and is responsible for their own tax position. Anything paid by card, anything the employer receives and distributes, and any mandatory or discretionary service charge is squarely inside. Agency workers are covered too, which catches out businesses that use freelance help at busy periods. The practical setup for a salon or garage: - Enable tipping at the payment stage rather than as a conversation. People tip more readily when it is a button and less readily when it is an awkward moment. - Record the tip against the booking and the worker who did the work, automatically. - Decide and write down how tips are shared with people who supported the work but did not perform it, such as juniors, reception and valeters. - Pay them through payroll where they run through the business, and speak to your accountant about the tax and National Insurance treatment, because it differs depending on how tips are distributed. - Give staff a way to see their own tip total without having to ask. Why it is worth doing properly: Beyond the legal duty, tips are one of the more emotive subjects in a small team. An unexplained split creates suspicion that lasts far longer than the money involved. A written policy, an automatic record and a visible total removes the entire argument, which is worth the afternoon regardless of what the legislation requires. --- ## MOT reminders are the easiest revenue in a garage Source: https://youzse.app/blog/mot-reminders-are-the-easiest-revenue-in-a-garage Category: Garages Published: May 5, 2026 A garage has something almost no other business has. A legally required, date certain, annually repeating reason for every customer to come back, already recorded against every vehicle that has ever been through the workshop. Most garages do nothing with it, and instead compete for the same work at the last minute against everybody else in town. The arithmetic: Take the number of vehicles you have tested in the last two years. Assume a modest share of them have drifted to a competitor or to a fast fit chain simply because somebody else got in touch first. Winning back even a small fraction of that with a message is the cheapest revenue in the business. There is no advertising spend, no discount and no acquisition cost. The customer already knows where you are and has already trusted you with the vehicle. When to send: Around a month out is the moment that matters, because a test can be done up to a month minus a day before the current certificate expires while keeping the same anniversary date. That is the window where the customer has a genuine reason to act and no reason to wait. A second, shorter nudge a week before expiry catches the people who meant to ring and did not. Anything more than that is nagging. A separate reminder for the service is worth running on its own schedule, because service intervals and MOT dates rarely align and combining them into one message means one of them gets ignored. What to say: Short, specific and about their vehicle. The registration, the make, the date it is due and two things they can do. Book online, or ring. Do not lead with a discount. An MOT reminder is a useful piece of information, and a customer who receives useful information from their garage thinks well of the garage. A customer who receives an offer thinks about price, which is the one comparison you do not want to invite. The conversion nobody sets up: An MOT booking is worth far more than the test fee, because it is an appointment with a vehicle on a ramp and a technician who can see it. - Offer a service alongside the test at the point of booking, not on the day. Somebody booking online will add it. Somebody standing at the counter feels sold to. - Quote for advisories from the last test before they arrive. You already know what the vehicle needed a year ago and so does the DVSA record. - Book the retest at the same time as reporting a failure. The gap between a failure and a decision is where a customer goes elsewhere. The data hygiene that makes it work: The whole thing depends on knowing the registration, the expiry date and a working mobile number for the owner. That is three fields and most garages have two of them. - Capture a mobile number on every job, without exception. An address is nearly useless for this and an email is second best. - Look the vehicle up from the registration rather than typing details in. Typed details drift and a wrong registration means a reminder that never lands. - Record the owner separately from the vehicle. Cars get sold, and a reminder to the previous owner is wasted while the new one goes to somebody else. - Mark vehicles you know have gone rather than messaging them forever. The bit that compounds: A reminder system does not have a good month and a bad month. It works every week, on a set of vehicles that grows each time you test one, and it takes no ongoing effort once it is running. There are very few things in a workshop that can be set up once and produce bookings for a decade. This is the main one. --- ## Selling additional work without wrecking trust Source: https://youzse.app/blog/selling-additional-work-without-wrecking-trust Category: Garages Published: May 2, 2026 Every garage has had the same phone call. You ring to say the vehicle needs more than it came in for, and you can hear the customer deciding whether to believe you. That reaction is not about you. It is decades of accumulated suspicion about the trade, and no amount of being trustworthy in person fixes it over the phone, because over the phone you sound exactly like somebody who is not. The fix is evidence rather than persuasion. Show, do not tell: A photograph of the actual pad, the actual tyre, the actual leak, sent to the customer's phone before you ring, changes the conversation completely. They are no longer deciding whether to trust you. They are looking at their own car. A short video is better still, particularly for anything with movement or noise. Thirty seconds of a technician pointing at a split boot is more persuasive than any script. This is the single highest impact change available to a workshop and it takes a technician about forty seconds per vehicle. Grade the work honestly: A red, amber and green health check works because it does the thing customers most want and least expect, which is to tell them what does not need doing yet. - Red is unsafe or illegal and should be done now. - Amber will need attention within a defined period, with the period stated. - Green is fine, and saying so is what makes the red believable. A report that is entirely red reads as a sales document. A report with eleven greens, two ambers and one red reads as an inspection, and the one red gets authorised. Give the amber a date: "This will need doing at some point" gets forgotten. "The nearside front tyre is at 3mm, so allow around 5,000 miles or roughly six months" gets a booking. Deferring work properly is also the most profitable thing you can do with it, because a recorded amber item with a date becomes a reminder, and a reminder becomes a booking without a phone call. Quote before you ring: Have the parts price, the labour and the total ready. A call that says "it needs discs and pads, I will find out how much and call you back" gives the customer half an hour to ring somewhere else and repeat what you just told them. Send the figure in writing at the same time. People agree to numbers they can read far more readily than to numbers they have heard once. The things that destroy it: - Discovering more work after the customer has already authorised a total. If it is going to happen, warn them at the first call that a second call is possible and why. - Doing work without authorisation because it was obviously needed. It is never worth it and it is the fastest way to a dispute. - Bundling everything into one intimidating figure. Itemise it and let them choose. - Pressure language. "You really shouldn't drive it like that" is sometimes true and always sounds like a sales technique. State the fact and let it do the work. What good looks like from the customer's side: They get a message while they are at work with photos, a clear list split into what is urgent and what is not, a price against each item and a link to approve the ones they want. No phone call at an awkward moment, no pressure, no decision made under time pressure with a receptionist waiting. Approval rates go up, the average invoice goes up and the reviews say the thing every garage wants them to say, which is that this one is honest. --- ## What an hour in your workshop actually costs Source: https://youzse.app/blog/what-an-hour-in-your-workshop-actually-costs Category: Garages Published: Apr 29, 2026 A garage labour rate is usually set by finding out what the workshop down the road charges and going slightly under. That is not a rate, it is a rumour and it ignores the fact that the other garage may have three bays, a different rent and no idea what they are doing either. Here is the version with numbers in it. Start with hours you can actually sell: A technician on a 40 hour week is not 40 sellable hours. Take off holiday, sick days, training, cleaning, road tests, waiting for parts, moving vehicles, MOT admin and the twenty minutes that disappears every morning. Most workshops that measure this honestly land somewhere around 75% to 85% of paid time being available for chargeable work, and considerably lower if the same person also answers the phone. Call it 32 sellable hours from a 40 hour technician. That number is the denominator for everything that follows and it is the number nobody calculates. Then take every cost: Wages and employer costs for the whole team including the office. Rent, rates, power, which is not a small line in a workshop with a ramp and a compressor. Insurance, equipment finance, calibration, diagnostic subscriptions, software, waste disposal, consumables, the accountant, the mortgage on the building or the lease on the unit. Everything. Not just the technician's wage, because the technician's wage is typically under half of what an hour costs to provide. Divide and get a floor: Monthly costs divided by monthly sellable hours gives you a break even rate. That is the number at which you have made nothing. Whatever comes out will be higher than most owners expect, because they have been mentally comparing their labour rate to a wage rather than to the cost of running a workshop. Everything above that number is profit and everything below it means you are paying for the privilege of doing the work. The two numbers that move it: Productivity is how much of the available time is sold. This is the one to fix first. A bay standing empty while somebody waits for a part is the most expensive thing in the building, and better parts ordering, better scheduling and taking bookings online rather than by phone all move it. Efficiency is how the time taken compares to the book time for the job. A technician consistently beating book time on familiar work is generating hours you can sell. One consistently over it on unfamiliar work is not a bad technician, it is a scheduling decision that put the wrong job in front of them. Both are worth measuring and neither is worth using as a stick. Where parts sit alongside it: Parts margin is a real part of workshop profitability and it does not remove the need for a correct labour rate. A garage subsidising cheap labour with heavy parts margin looks competitive on the phone and becomes uncompetitive the moment a customer supplies their own parts. Decide your policy on customer supplied parts before you are asked, and price the labour so it stands on its own. The rate to actually charge: Take your break even hourly figure and add the margin the business needs to invest, absorb a bad month and pay you properly. Then check it against the local market, not to copy it but to understand what you are asking customers to accept. If the number you need is above the local rate, the answer is rarely to drop it. It is to be specific about why. Diagnostic capability, manufacturer training, a courtesy vehicle, a warranty, photos with every job. Specialisation lets you charge above the town rate. Being the cheapest general garage in town is a race with only one prize. --- ## Quoting for trades without dropping your price Source: https://youzse.app/blog/quoting-for-trades-without-dropping-your-price Category: Trades Published: Apr 26, 2026 Ask a trade why they lost a job and the answer is almost always price. Ask the customer and it very often is not. It was that somebody else replied the same day, sent something they could understand and rang back once. Price matters. It matters considerably less than the three things around it. Speed decides more than anything: The first credible quote sets the reference point for every quote after it. It also arrives while the customer is still enthusiastic, which is a state that decays quickly. A quote sent within 24 hours is competing on merit. A quote sent a week later is competing against somebody the customer has already started to imagine doing the work. If a full quote takes time, send an acknowledgement the same day with when the quote will arrive, then hit that date. Nearly all of the advantage is in being responsive rather than in being fast at pricing. Make it readable by somebody who does not do your job: A quote that says "supply and fit as discussed, £3,400" asks the customer to trust a single number with nothing to hold on to. When a competitor sends a breakdown, yours looks like the vague one even if it is the better job. - Itemise labour, materials and anything variable, without exposing your margins line by line. - Say what is included and, more importantly, what is not. Making good, waste removal, scaffolding, parking, certificates, decorating afterwards. - Put timescales on it. Start availability, working days on site, anything that depends on lead times. - State what you need from them. Access, power, water, clearing a room, a decision on a finish by a certain date. - Say how long the quote is valid. Materials move and an open ended quote is a liability. Offer options rather than one number: A single price is a yes or no decision. Two or three options turn it into a choice about which one, which is a far better conversation to be in. A good, better and best structure works in almost every trade. The important part is that the middle option is the one you actually want to sell and the others exist to give it a context. It also stops the customer building their own cheaper version out of a competitor's quote and yours. Follow up once, properly: Most trades never follow up at all, which is why following up once puts you ahead of most of the people you are quoting against. A single message three or four days later asking whether they have any questions and whether the scope is what they expected is enough. It is not pushy and it frequently uncovers the actual objection, which is usually a detail rather than the total. When they ask for it cheaper: Do not drop the price for nothing. It tells the customer the first number was invented and it tells them there may be more to come. Reduce the scope instead. Take something out, use a different material, have them do the clearing or the decorating. The price comes down because the job got smaller, which is honest and keeps your rate intact. If they are comparing against a much lower quote, the useful question is what that quote includes. Nine times out of ten it is missing something, and pointing that out calmly is far more effective than defending your own number. The one that costs nothing: Make it easy to say yes. A quote a customer can accept online, at nine in the evening when they finally sit down together, converts better than one that requires a phone call during the working day. Everything above is free. None of it requires you to be cheaper than anybody. --- ## Day rate or fixed price? Source: https://youzse.app/blog/day-rate-or-fixed-price Category: Trades Published: Apr 23, 2026 Every trade eventually settles into one of these and defends it firmly. Both are right, for different work, and using the wrong one is where the bad jobs come from. The distinction is not about the size of the job. It is about how well you can predict it. What a day rate really is: A day rate transfers the risk of the job overrunning from you to the customer. That is its entire function and it is a perfectly reasonable thing to do when neither of you can know how long something will take. It suits work where the scope genuinely cannot be pinned down. Chasing a fault, opening up an old building, anything where the first hour tells you what the next three days look like. Its weakness is that it caps your upside and it punishes competence. Getting faster at something, buying a better tool or knowing the trick that saves two hours all reduce what you earn. A day rate pays you for time rather than for outcome, and time is the one thing you cannot make more of. It also creates an unspoken suspicion. Customers on a day rate watch the clock, and some of them will read a slow morning as a slow worker rather than as a difficult joist. What a fixed price really is: A fixed price transfers the risk to you and pays you for being good. If you can do in four hours what the price assumed would take six, that is your reward for skill, preparation and experience. It suits work you have done many times, where you know the variables and anything where the customer needs certainty in order to say yes. Most domestic customers strongly prefer a fixed price, because they are budgeting rather than buying time. Its weakness is obvious. Underestimate and you work for nothing, and you will underestimate occasionally no matter how long you have been doing it. How to choose: - Have you done this exact job at least five times? Fixed price. - Is there anything behind a wall, under a floor or inside a machine that you cannot see today? Day rate, or a fixed price for the investigation and a quote afterwards. - Is the customer nervous about cost? Fixed price, even if it means pricing in more contingency and being open about that. - Is it a long project with stages? Fixed price per stage, which gives certainty without asking you to guarantee something you have not uncovered yet. - Is another trade's work going to determine yours? Day rate, or a fixed price with a written dependency and what happens if it slips. The hybrid that solves most arguments: Charge a fixed price for a defined scope, with a stated hourly or daily rate for anything found outside it, agreed in writing before it goes ahead. The customer gets a number they can plan around. You are protected against the thing nobody could have known about. The critical part is agreeing in advance how variations are handled, because the argument is never about the extra work, it is about the fact that nobody discussed it. The rule for both: Whatever the shape, write down the scope before starting. Most disputes on both models come from a difference in what each person believed was included, and that difference is completely invisible right up until the invoice. Two paragraphs of scope, sent and acknowledged, prevents more trouble than any amount of careful pricing. --- ## Package deals and prepaid credits, done properly Source: https://youzse.app/blog/package-deals-and-prepaid-credits Category: Running a business Published: Apr 20, 2026 A package is one of the few offers that helps both sides. The client gets a better price and a commitment they will actually keep. You get cash up front and the next several visits locked in before anybody else can compete for them. It is also the offer most likely to be priced by feel, which is where the trouble starts. What you are actually buying: When you discount a block of six sessions, you are paying for three things. Certainty of the next six visits, the cash arriving now rather than over four months and the fact that a client who has prepaid does not shop around. Those are worth real money, which is why a package discount is justified in a way that a general discount is not. The question is how much. Pricing it: Start from the individual price and work out what the block is worth to you. A block of six removes five separate rebooking conversations, five chances to drift and five chances for a competitor to be closer that week. A discount somewhere between 5% and 15% is the usual landing zone. Below 5% and nobody bothers. Above 15% and you are giving away more margin than the certainty is worth, unless the package is deliberately being used to fill dead capacity. The exception is a package that only runs at quiet times. Discount that harder, because the alternative is an empty chair. Prepaid credit is a liability: This is the part that gets forgotten. Money taken for six sessions is a debt of six sessions. If your costs rise, if the client comes back in eighteen months or if a member of staff leaves, you still owe the work. Track the outstanding balance in sessions and in value, and know the total across all clients at any moment. A business that has quietly sold £9,000 of unredeemed packages has £9,000 of work to do that will not appear as revenue when it happens. Expiry, and being reasonable about it: Packages need an end date, otherwise the liability is open ended and the urgency that makes them work disappears. Set the expiry to a realistic multiple of the intended interval. Six weekly sessions should not expire in three months, because one holiday and one bout of flu will use that up and you will end up making an exception anyway. Whatever you set, put it on the receipt, in the confirmation and in the reminder, and warn people before it lapses. An expiry that is enforced without warning generates a complaint that costs more than the sessions. Refunds and the awkward cases: Decide these before somebody asks, not during. - Client wants to stop halfway through. The fair method is to charge the sessions used at the full individual rate and refund the balance. State that on the terms and nobody argues. - Client moves away. Same rule, and be gracious about it. - Course of treatment that turns out to be unsuitable. Stop, refund the unused portion and do not let a package pressure anybody into treatment they should not have. - Transfer to a friend or family member. Allowing it is usually good business and it should be a decision rather than a surprise. Where packages work best: Anything with a natural course. Six sessions of a treatment, a block of personal training, a set of grooms, a series of lessons. The client already understands that one is not enough. They also work well as the mechanism for a genuinely better price. Rather than discounting your headline rate, keep it and offer the lower effective rate only to people prepared to commit. That protects the value of the individual session and gives you something to sell. The thing that makes it all work: The client needs to be able to see how many sessions they have left without having to ask, and you need to be able to see it without checking a spreadsheet. If the balance lives in a notebook, you will get it wrong at least once and it will be in front of somebody. --- ## Moving off the paper diary without losing a week Source: https://youzse.app/blog/moving-off-the-paper-diary-without-losing-a-week Category: Running a business Published: Apr 17, 2026 A paper diary has genuine advantages. It never goes down, everybody understands it, it takes no training and it works during a power cut. Businesses that have used one for twenty years are not being stubborn, they are using something that works. The reasons to move are real too. A paper diary cannot send a reminder, cannot take a deposit, cannot be in two places at once, cannot tell you which service earns the most and cannot be recovered if it is left on a bus. If you have decided to move, the order you do it in decides whether it takes an afternoon or a fortnight. Do not start by entering everything: The instinct is to type in every client and every future appointment before switching on. It is the wrong first move, because it is the biggest job, it happens before anybody has learned the system and half of it will be wrong. Start with the things that must exist for a single booking to work. Your opening hours, your staff, your services with real durations and real prices. That is an hour or two and it is the foundation for everything else. Then the forward diary, then the clients: Enter the appointments that are already booked, working forward from today. Most businesses only have four to eight weeks of forward bookings and that is a manageable evening. Clients can come across as they arrive. Every appointment you enter creates the client record anyway, so within one full cycle of your business, most of your active client base has entered itself. The clients who have not been in for two years can wait, and some of them should simply never be typed in at all. If you have a spreadsheet or an export from anywhere, use it. Importing a list is much faster than typing one, and it is worth spending twenty minutes tidying the file before importing rather than an hour fixing records afterwards. Run both for two weeks: This is the step people skip and it is the one that prevents the disaster. For a fortnight, every booking goes in both places. It is mildly annoying and it means that when something goes wrong on day four, you still have a working diary. It also builds the habit, because the new system stops being a thing you are trying and starts being the thing you use. Set a date to stop and stop on it. Running both indefinitely is how you end up with double bookings, which is the exact problem you were trying to solve. What to switch on and when: 1. Bookings and the calendar first. Get the diary right before anything else. 2. Confirmations and reminders next, once you trust the data. Reminders sent from a diary with wrong numbers in it teaches everybody to distrust the system. 3. Online booking after that, once your services, durations and prices are genuinely correct, because that page is now taking bookings without you. 4. Payments and deposits when the rest is stable. 5. Everything else afterwards. Marketing, loyalty, forms, reporting. None of it matters if the diary is not right. Telling clients: Say very little. Clients do not care what software you use and an announcement invites questions. What they should notice is that they now get a confirmation and a reminder, and that they can book online if they want to. Mention it at the chair, put the link where they will see it and let it spread on its own. The one thing to keep from the paper diary: Whatever your paper system did well, name it and make sure the new one does it too. Usually it is the ability to see the whole day at a glance, or a private shorthand for regulars. Most of those have an equivalent. Day view, colour coding, tags on a client record. The mistake is assuming the new system cannot do it and quietly keeping a second diary for that one thing, which is how businesses end up with two diaries permanently. --- ## Five numbers worth checking every Monday Source: https://youzse.app/blog/five-numbers-worth-checking-every-monday Category: Running a business Published: Apr 14, 2026 Almost every small business owner checks the same single number every week, which is what came in. It is the most obvious number and the least useful, because by the time it moves the cause is a month behind you. Four others take ten minutes together and each of them is a leading indicator rather than a rear view mirror. 1. Utilisation: The share of your available hours that were actually sold. Not booked, sold, so cancellations and no shows come out. This is the single most useful operating number in a service business. It tells you whether your problem is demand or pricing, and those have completely different solutions. A business at 55% utilisation does not have a pricing problem. A business at 92% has one and is denying it. Watch it by day and by staff member rather than as one figure, because a healthy average often hides a dead Tuesday and a stylist who cannot take a breath. 2. Rebooking rate: The share of completed appointments that left with the next one booked. This is the number that predicts next month better than anything else on the list. It moves quickly in response to a habit change, it varies enormously between people doing identical work and almost nobody measures it. If you track one new thing this year, track this. 3. Average spend per visit: Total takings divided by number of appointments. Simple, and it separates two things that look identical in the takings figure. A good week can be more people or more per person. Those are different businesses heading in different directions. Rising visits with falling average spend means you are getting busier and poorer, which is the most common way for a service business to exhaust itself. 4. New client return rate: Of the first time clients you saw last month, what share have booked again? This is the honest measure of whether your acquisition is working. Businesses obsess over how many new clients arrived and rarely ask how many stayed. If you are spending anything at all on being found, this number tells you whether that spend is building something or filling a bucket with a hole in it. Give it a month or two to be meaningful and then track it as a trend rather than week to week. 5. Cash position for the next fortnight: Not profit. What is in the account, what is due out before the next payday and what is genuinely due in. Three lines, ten minutes and it is the number that stops a good month becoming a frightening one. Profit is a quarterly conversation with your accountant. Cash is a weekly conversation with yourself. What to do with them: Write the five down in the same place every Monday. A notebook is fine. The value is not in the sophistication, it is in having a series, because a single week's utilisation means nothing and eight weeks of it means everything. Then pick one to work on for a quarter and leave the others alone. Trying to move all five at once moves none of them, and the one worth picking is usually rebooking rate, because it is the cheapest to change and it lifts three of the other four on its own. The numbers not to bother with weekly: Followers, likes, page views and total client count. All of them go up over time regardless of whether the business is getting better, which is exactly why they are comforting and exactly why they are useless. --- ## When to open a second location, and when not to Source: https://youzse.app/blog/when-to-open-a-second-location Category: Running a business Published: Apr 11, 2026 A second site is the most common ambition in a successful service business and one of the more common ways to turn a good business into a stressful one. It is not that expansion is wrong. It is that it is usually attempted as a response to a full diary, and a full diary has cheaper answers. The three questions worth answering honestly first. Is the first one actually full? Full means every sellable hour is sold at a price you are happy with, on every day, not just Thursday to Saturday. Most businesses that feel full are at high utilisation on three days and moderate on the rest. If that is you, the cheapest available growth is filling the quiet days and raising the price on the busy ones. Both cost nothing, carry no risk and can be done this month. A second site costs a lease, a fit out, staff and a year of your attention. Work through the alternatives properly. Extended hours, a later evening, an earlier start, another chair or bay in the space you already have, a higher price on peak times, better rebooking. Any of those that works removes the need for the harder thing. Can the first one run without you? This is the question that decides it. A second location means you are in one building while the other one operates, which means the first one has to work when you are not there. If your business currently depends on you being present to make decisions, keep standards, handle the awkward customer and know where everything is, then opening a second site does not double the business. It halves the first one and adds a new one that has never had you in it. The honest test is a fortnight away. Not a long weekend. If two weeks off produces a mess, the systems are not ready and no amount of enthusiasm compensates for that. Does the demand exist over there? A business that is full is full of people who live near it. That demand does not travel. The second site starts from zero in a place where nobody has heard of you, and the first year of a new site is an acquisition problem rather than a capacity one. Ask where your existing clients actually come from. If 80% are within two miles, you are a local business with a local catchment, and a site four miles away is a new business rather than a branch. What to fix before, not after: - Everything a person needs to do the job written down, because you will be training people you are not standing next to. - One system covering both sites, with the diary, clients, stock and reporting in one place. Two separate systems means two separate businesses and no way to compare them. - A manager in place at site one before site two opens. Not the day it opens. Months before, doing the job while you are still there to correct it. - Reporting that shows each site separately and both together, so you can tell which one is carrying the other. - A plan for the first year of losses at the new site, funded from something other than the first site's working capital. The alternatives people skip too quickly: A bigger unit in the same area rather than a second one. Same catchment, one team, one set of overheads and no split attention. Adding a service line that uses your existing hours better. A salon adding treatments, a garage adding diagnostics or air conditioning, a groomer adding daycare. Or simply taking more money out of a well run single site, which is a perfectly respectable outcome that nobody puts on social media. Expansion is a legitimate ambition. It is just rarely the cheapest way to earn more, and the businesses that make it work almost always spent a year making the first site run without them before they signed anything.